7SA511 Iec

.
UMERICAL $ISTANCE 0ROTECTION 2ELAY

3)02/4%# 3!
)NSTRUCTION -ANUAL
6
/RDER .O # ' #
&IGURE )LLUSTRATION OF THE NUMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3! IN HOUSING FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
3IEMENS !'
3! 6
#ONFORMITY
#ONFORMITY
4HIS PRODUCT IS IN CONFORMITY WITH THE DIRECTIVE OF THE #OUNCIL OF THE %UROPEAN #OMMUNITIES ON THE APPROXIMA
TION OF THE LAWS OF THE -EMBER 3TATES RELATING TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE
%%# AND CONCERNING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR APPLICATION WITHIN SPECIFIED VOLTAGE LIMITS ,OW VOLTAGE
DIRECTIVE %%#
#ONFORMITY IS PROVED BY TESTS THAT HAD BEEN PERFORMED ACCORDING TO ARTICLE OF THE #OUNCIL $IRECTIVE IN ACCOR
DANCE WITH THE GENERIC STANDARDS %. AND %. FOR %-# DIRECTIVE AND THE STANDARDS %.
FOR LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE BY 3IEMENS !'
4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED FOR APPLICATION IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
4HE DEVICE IS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS OF )%# AND THE 'ERMAN STANDARDS
$). PART CORRESPONDING TO 6$% PART
# ' #
3! 6
#ONTENTS
#ONTENTS

)NTRODUCTION

!PPLICATION

&EATURES

)MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
$ESIGN

!RRANGEMENTS

$IMENSIONS

/RDERING DATA
4ECHNICAL $ATA

'ENERAL DATA
)NPUTSOUTPUTS
%LECTRICAL TESTS
-ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS
#LIMATIC STRESS TESTS
3ERVICE CONDITIONS
$ESIGN

$ISTANCE PROTECTION

0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL

4ELEPROTECTION INTERFACE

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL

&AULT LOCATION

!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
# ' #

ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
3! 6
#ONTENTS
-ETHOD OF OPERATION

/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT

$ISTANCE PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION AND PROCESSING
/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
)MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FIX IMPEDANCE OPTIONAL
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION UNDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP
,OOP DETERMINATION FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS
,OOP DETERMINATION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
&AULT IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
$IRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
4RIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
4RIPPING LOGIC
3WITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
$EFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT AND EMERGENCY PROTECTION

-EASURES TO BE TAKEN IN THE CASE OF POWER SWINGS OPTIONAL WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT
DETECTION
$ETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
0OWER SWING BLOCKING
/UT OF STEP TRIPPING

5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE

0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION
:ONE ACCELERATION WITH :"
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :"
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FAULT DETECTION ZONE RELEASE
5NBLOCKING MODE WITH :"
$IRECTIONAL UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION
"LOCKING MODE
/VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES
2EVERSE INTERLOCKING
7EAK INFEED MEASURES ECHO FUNCTION
4RANSIENT BLOCKING

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION


%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT OPTIONAL

&AULT DETECTION
$ETERMINATION OF THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE
3ENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
&AULTED LINE LOCATION

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
)NVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS

!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL

3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
!CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES
)NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE

# ' #
3! 6
#ONTENTS

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS

-ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSE
#ONNECTION OF EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM
#ONTROL OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO !2 DEVICES


/PERATING MODES
$EAD LINE OR DEAD BUS SWITCHING
3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM
!SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING

$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION

#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST

!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
0ROCESSING OF ANNUNCIATIONS
)NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS SIGNAL RELAYS
)NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER
)NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT OPTIONAL
$ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION FOR FAULT RECORDING
/PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND CONVERSION
-ONITORING FUNCTIONS
(ARDWARE MONITORING
3OFTWARE MONITORING
-ONITORING OF EXTERNAL MEASURING TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

5NPACKING AND REPACKING

0REPARATIONS
-OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS
-ODEL 3!J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
-ODEL 3!J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR J%JJJ FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION
#HECKING THE RATED DATA
#ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS
)NSERTING THE BACK UP BATTERY
#HECKING THE ,3! TRANSMISSION LINK
#ONNECTIONS
#HECKING THE CONNECTIONS

#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS

/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS AND GENERAL
3ETTINGS FOR THE INTEGRATED OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
#ONFIGURATION OF THE SERIAL INTERFACES ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING ADDRESS BLOCK

#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

)NTRODUCTION
0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING THE DEVICE CONFIGURATION ADDRESS BLOCK

-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS

)NTRODUCTION
-ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS ADDRESS BLOCK
-ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS ADDRESS BLOCK

# ' #
3! 6
#ONTENTS
/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3AFETY PRECAUTIONS

$IALOG WITH THE RELAY

-EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL
/PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COMPUTER
/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS
2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

)NTRODUCTION
0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE
3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS OPTIONAL
3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME
)NITIAL DISPLAYS ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
0OWER SYSTEM DATA ADDRESS BLOCK
'ENERAL DATA
,INE DATA GENERAL
!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA
'ENERAL DEVICE DATA
3ETTINGS FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
'ENERAL SETTINGS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING OF THE DISTANCE STAGES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
3ELECTION OF THE FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM ADDRESS BLOCK
'ENERAL SETTING FOR FAULT DETECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTING FOR VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)
3ETTINGS FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
3ETTINGS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
3ETTINGS FOR THE POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR TELEPROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
5NDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES ADDRESS BLOCK
/VERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR MEASURED VALUE MONITORING ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED STAR POINT
ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ADDRESS BLOCK
.ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION INVERSE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK ADDRESS BLOCK
3ETTINGS FOR FAULT LOCATION ADDRESS BLOCK

!NNUNCIATIONS
)NTRODUCTION
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCK
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
$ATA OF EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ADDRESS BLOCK
#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS ADDRESS BLOCK
2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
2EAD OUT OF EARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ADDRESS BLOCK

# ' #
3! 6
#ONTENTS

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES

!DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK ADDRESS BLOCK
%RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS ADDRESS BLOCK
/FF/N CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE
)NFORMATION TO ,3! DURING TEST OPERATION ADDRESS BLOCK
3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS ADDRESS BLOCK
2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER SET VIA BINARY INPUTS

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

'ENERAL
4ESTING THE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION STAGE AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
4ESTING THE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
4ESTING THE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
4ESTING THE DISTANCE ZONES
4ESTING THE GRADING TIMES
4ESTING THE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH PROCEDURES
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH PROCEDURES
4ESTING THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4ESTING THE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION
4ESTING THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTIONS IF FITTED

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS

#URRENT VOLTAGE AND PHASE SEQUENCE CHECKS
$IRECTION CHECK WITH LOAD CURRENT
%ARTH FAULT CHECKS FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF USED
$IRECTION CHECK FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IF USED
#HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
#HECKING THE CARRIER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
#HECKING OVERREACH ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES
#HECKING REVERSE INTERLOCKING
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH RELEASE SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH BLOCKING SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH UNDERREACH TRANSFER SIGNAL
#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
4RIPPING TEST INCLUDING CIRCUIT BREAKER
42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE ADDRESS BLOCK
,IVE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS BLOCK
3TARTING A TEST FAULT RECORD ADDRESS BLOCK

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION
-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

2OUTINE CHECKS

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY

&AULT TRACING

2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE
# ' #
3! 6
#ONTENTS
2EPAIRS
3TORAGE
!PPENDIX

'ENERAL DIAGRAMS
"
#ONNECTION DIAGRAMS
4ABLES
./4%
4HIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL DOES NOT PURPORT TO COVER ALL
DETAILS IN EQUIPMENT NOR TO PROVIDE FOR EVERY POSSI
BLE CONTINGENCY TO BE MET IN CONNECTION WITH INSTAL
LATION OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE
3HOULD FURTHER INFORMATION BE DESIRED OR SHOULD
PARTICULAR PROBLEMS ARISE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED
SUFFICIENTLY FOR THE PURCHASER S PURPOSE THE MATTER
SHOULD BE REFERRED TO THE LOCAL 3IEMENS SALES OFFICE
4HE CONTENTS OF THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL NOT

BECOME PART NOR MODIFY ANY PRIOR OR EXISTING AGREE
MENT COMMITMENT OR RELATIONSHIP 4HE SALES CON
TRACT CONTAINS THE ENTIRE OBLIGATIONS OF 3IEMENS 4HE
WARRANTY CONTAINED IN THE CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PAR
TIES IS THE SOLE WARRANTY OF 3IEMENS !NY STATEMENTS
CONTAINED HEREIN DO NOT CREATE NEW WARRANTIES NOR
MODIFY THE EXISTING WARRANTY
# ' #
3! 6
)NTRODUCTION

!PPLICATION
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3)02/4%#

3! PROVIDES FAST RELIABLE AND SELECTIVE CLEAR
ANCE OF ALL KINDS OF GROUND AND PHASE FAULTS IN SINGLE
ANDOR MULTIPLE FED OVERHEAD LINES AND CABLES IN RA
DIAL RING OR ANY TYPE OF MESHED NETWORKS 4HE SYS
TEM STARPOINT MAY BE ISOLATED COMPENSATED ARC
SUPPRESSED BY 0ETERSEN COIL SOLIDLY EARTHED OR LOW
RESISTANCE EARTHED
)T CONTAINS ALL THE VITAL FUNCTIONS FOR THE PROTECTION OF A
LINE FEEDER CIRCUIT AND IS THUS UNIVERSALLY APPLICABLE
)T CAN ALSO BE USED AS A TIME GRADED BACK UP PRO
TECTION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS OF ALL KINDS
FOR LINES TRANSFORMERS GENERATORS MOTORS AND BUS
BARS
)TS FUNDAMENTAL FUNCTION IS DETERMINATION OF THE DIS
TANCE OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT BY IMPEDANCE MEASURE
MENT 4HIS CAN BE SUPPLEMENTED BY A SERIES OF OP
TIONAL FUNCTION MODULES WHICH PROVIDE POWER SWING
SUPPLEMENT TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE FOR RAP
ID CLEARANCE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR
CABLES EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR ISOLATED OR COM
PENSATED NETWORKS HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PRO
TECTION FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT IN EARTHED
NETWORKS AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE FOR OVERHEAD LINES
SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FAULT LOCATION FOR
SPEEDY LOCATION OF THE DAMAGED AREA %XTERNAL AC
CESSORIES ARE THEREFORE NORMALLY NOT REQUIRED
4HROUGHOUT A FAULT IN THE NETWORK THE MAGNITUDES OF
THE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES ARE STORED FOR A PERIOD OF AT
MOST SECONDS AND ARE AVAILABLE FOR SUBSEQUENT
FAULT ANALYSIS
#ONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE MEASURED VALUES PER
MITS RAPID ANNUNCIATION OF ANY FAULT IN THE MEASURING
TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS #ONTINUOUS PLAUSIBILITY MONI
TORING OF THE INTERNAL MEASURED VALUE PROCESSING CIR
CUITS AND MONITORING OF THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGES TO EN
SURE THAT THEY REMAIN WITHIN TOLERANCE ARE OBVIOUSLY
INHERENT FEATURES
3ERIAL INTERFACES ALLOW COMPREHENSIVE COMMUNICA
TION WITH OTHER DIGITAL CONTROL AND STORAGE DEVICES
&OR DATA TRANSMISSION A STANDARDIZED PROTOCOL IN AC
CORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) AND )%# IS
USED AS WELL AS ACCORDING $). SELECTABLE
4HE DEVICE CAN THEREFORE BE INCORPORATED IN ,OCAL
IZED 3UBSTATION !UTOMATION NETWORKS ,3! 4HE
SYSTEM INTERFACE IS SUITED TO COMMUNICATION VIA A
MODEM LINK
# ' #
)NTRODUCTION

&EATURES
0ROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH POWERFUL BIT MICRO

PROCESSOR
COMPLETE DIGITAL MEASURED VALUE PROCESSING AND
CONTROL FROM DATA ACQUISITION AND DIGITIZING OF THE
MEASURED VALUES UP TO THE TRIP AND CLOSE DECISION
FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
COMPLETE GALVANIC AND RELIABLE SEPARATION OF THE
INTERNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS FROM THE MEASURE
MENT CONTROL AND SUPPLY CIRCUITS OF THE SYSTEM
WITH ANALOG INPUT TRANSDUCERS BINARY INPUT AND
OUTPUT MODULES AND DCDC CONVERTER
COMPLETE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE PRO
TECTION OF A HIGH VOLTAGE FEEDER CIRCUIT
OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
OPTIONALLY VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED 5) OR PHASE ANGLE DEPENDENT IM
PEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
POLYGONAL TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC WITH INDEPEN
DENT SETTING OF REACH ALONG THE 2 AND 8 AXIS
WITH SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR EARTH FAULTS
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SOUND PHASE PO
LARIZATION AND VOLTAGE MEMORY GIVING UNLIMITED
DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY
COMPREHENSIVE SUPPLEMENTARY FUNCTIONS CAN BE
ORDERED AS AN OPTION
CONTINUOUS CALCULATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED
VALUES AND INDICATION ON THE FRONT DISPLAY
SIMPLE SETTING AND OPERATION USING THE INTEGRATED
OPERATION PANEL OR A CONNECTED PERSONAL COMPUT
ER WITH MENU GUIDED SOFTWARE
STORAGE OF FAULT DATA STORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS VAL
UES DURING A FAULT FOR FAULT RECORDING
COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL CONTROL AND STORAGE
DEVICES VIA SERIAL INTERFACES IS POSSIBLE OPTIONALLY
WITH K6 INSULATION OR FOR CONNECTION OF OPTICAL
FIBRE
CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE MEASURED VALUES
AND THE HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OF THE RELAY
3!6

)NTRODUCTION
)MPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS

$ISTANCE PROTECTION WITH
PHASE SELECTIVE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
OPTIONAL VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT DETECTION OR
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION WITH POLYGONALLY
SHAPED ANGLE DEPENDENT CHARACTERISTIC
FIVE DISTANCE ZONES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE EITHER IN
THE FORWARD DIRECTION OR IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OR
NON DIRECTIONAL AND TWO CAN BE USED AS GRADED
OVERREACH ZONES
SEVEN TIME STAGES
POLYGONAL TRIPPING CHARACTERISTIC WITH INDEPEN
DENT SETTING OF REACH ALONG THE 2 AND 8 AXIS
SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR PHASE AND EARTH FAULTS
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SOUND PHASE PO
LARIZATION AND VOLTAGE MEMORY THUS SUITABLE FOR
USE WITH CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND GIV
ING UNLIMITED DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVITY
PHASE SEGREGATED TRIP FOR USE WITH SINGLE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURE
0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL WITH IMPED
ANCE FAULT DETECTION
POWER SWING DETECTION BY D2DT MEASUREMENT
AVOIDS UNWANTED TRIP OCCURRENCES DURING POWER
SWINGS IN THE SYSTEM
FOR USE OF POWER SWING BLOCKING OR OUT OF STEP
TRIPPING
PROGRAMMABLE FOR DIFFERENT SCHEMES OF
PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING 0544
PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING 0/44 IN
RELEASE OR BLOCK MODE
$EAD FAULT PROTECTION
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

WITH TWO STAGE DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT CHARAC
TERISTIC AND SEPARATE EARTH CURRENT STAGE
FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION IF VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
MCB TRIPS OR
FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION IN CASE OF VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER SECONDARY FUSE FAILURE
PROVIDES THERMAL REPLICA OF THE CURRENT HEAT
LOSSES
TRUE RMS MEASUREMENT OF ALL THREE CONDUCTOR
CURRENTS
ADJUSTABLE WARNING STAGES
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
FOR COMPENSATED OR ISOLATED NETWORKS WITH
PHASE SELECTIVE FAULT DETECTION
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
(IGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION OPTIONAL
FOR HIGH RESISTIVE EARTH FAULTS IN NETWORKS WITH
EARTHED STARPOINT
WITH TWO STAGE EARTH CURRENT PICK UP
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING ZERO SEQUENCE
COMPONENTS OF CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES
OPTIONALLY WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON VIA COM
MUNICATION LINK EG 0,# OR OPTICAL FIBRE
BACK UP FUNCTION IN CASE OF VOLTAGE FAILURE USING
DEFINITE TIME EARTH CURRENT PROTECTION
ALTERNATIVELY NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME EARTH
CURRENT PROTECTION WITH THREE SELECTABLE CHARAC
TERISTICS NOT IN CONJUNCTION WITH DIRECTIONAL EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION
PROVIDES HIGH SPEED OPERATION AT EITHER LINE END

WHEN SWITCHING MANUALLY ONTO A BOLTED FAULT

# ' #
3! 6
!UTOMATIC RECLOSE FUNCTION OPTIONAL

SINGLE POLE THREE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE
POLE
SINGLE OR MULTI SHOT EG 2!2 AND $!2 THREE
POLE $!2 FROM SECOND SHOT ON
WITH SEPARATELY ALLOCATED ACTION TIMES AND DEAD
TIMES FOR SINGLE POLE THREE POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
FOR FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 DELAYED !2 FOR
FURTHER SHOTS
SYNCHRO CHECK BEFORE AUTO RECLOSURE AFTER
THREE POLE TRIP
)NTRODUCTION
OUTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN OHMS PRIMARY AND SEC

ONDARY KILOMETERS AND LINE LENGTH
OPTIONALLY WITH PARALLEL LINE MUTUAL COMPENSATION
4HE STANDARD FUNCTIONS ALSO INCLUDE
TWO LOGICAL FUNCTIONS WITH TIME STAGES WHICH CAN
BE DEFINED BY THE USER IN ORDER TO COMBINE DELAY
OR PROCESS EXTERNAL SIGNALS
CONTINUOUS SELF MONITORING RIGHT FROM THE $# CIR
CUITS THROUGH THE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
INPUTS TO THE TRIPPING RELAYS THUS ACHIEVING MAXI
MUM AVAILABILITY AND A MORE CORRECTIVE THAN PRE
VENTIVE MAINTENANCE STRATEGY
SETTABLE ALTERNATIVELY FOR DEAD LINE CHECK ANDOR

DEAD BUS CHECK
MEASUREMENT AND TEST ROUTINES UNDER NORMAL

LOAD CONDITIONS
MEASUREMENT OF LOAD CURRENTS AND OPERATING VOLT
AGES
MEASUREMENT OF POWER AND FREQUENCY
OUTPUT OF MEASURED IMPEDANCES DIRECTIONAL AND
PHASE SEQUENCE CHECK
ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING POSSIBLE WITH PRE DE

TERMINATION OF THE INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM
ANNUNCIATION STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION OF THE LAST

FOUR NETWORK FAULTS WITH REAL TIME CLOCK
SETTABLE MINIMUM VOLTAGE
STORAGE OF DATA OF THE LAST THREE EARTH FAULTS IN ISO

LATED OR ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE

5 PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE AND FREQUENCY DIF
FERENCE F
SYNCHRO CHECK DEAD LINE CHECK OR DEAD BUS

CHECK ALSO POSSIBLE BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE OF THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER
MEASURED VOLTAGES CAN BE CONNECTED EITHER PHA
SE TO PHASE OR PHASE TO EARTH
CAN BE STARTED BY FAULT DETECTION OR TRIP COMMAND
OR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND
CALCULATION OF THE FAULT DISTANCE
# ' #
DATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION FOR FAULT RECORDS

GIVING
RAPID FAULT ANALYSIS
DETAILED FAULT RECORDS
COUNTING OF TRIPPING AND CLOSING COMMANDS AS
WELL AS RECORDING OF FAULT DATA AND ACCUMULATIVE
ADDITION OF THE INTERRUPTED FAULT CURRENTS
COMMISSIONING AIDS SUCH AS DIRECTIONAL VERIFICA
TION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER LIVE TEST

3! 6
$ESIGN

!RRANGEMENTS
!LL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS INCLUDING DCDC CONVERTER

ARE ACCOMMODATED ON TWO PLUG IN MODULES OF
$OUBLE %UROPA &ORMAT 4HESE MODULES ARE INSTALLED
IN A HOUSING 80 4WO DIFFERENT TYPES OF HOUSINGS
CAN BE DELIVERED
3!J J"JJJ IN HOUSING 80 FOR
PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL
AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS
TIC WINDOW
0LASTIC GUIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF
PLUG IN MODULES .EXT TO THE GUIDE RAIL AT THE BOT
TOM ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF EACH MODULE A CON
TACT AREA WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED TO THE
HOUSING IS INSTALLED TO MATE WITH THE EARTHING
SPRING OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO EARTH IS MADE
BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT %ARTHING SCREWS
HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE
HOUSING !DDITIONALLY TERMINAL IS CONNECTED TO
THE CASE
!LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO SCREWED
TERMINALS WHICH ARE ARRANGED OVER CUT OUTS ON
THE TOP AND BOTTOM COVERS 4HE TERMINALS ARE
NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AT THE
BOTTOM AND TOP
4HE HEAVY DUTY CURRENT PLUG CONNECTORS PROVIDE
AUTOMATIC SHORTING OF THE CT CIRCUITS WHENEVER
THE MODULES ARE WITHDRAWN 4HIS DOES NOT RELEASE
FROM THE CARE TO BE TAKEN WHEN CT SECONDARY CIR
CUITS ARE CONCERNED
&OR THE ISOLATED INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL CONTROL AND
STORAGE UNIT AN ADDITIONAL COUPLING FACILITY HAS
BEEN PROVIDED &OR THE HARD WIRED 6
23# SERIAL INTERFACE 3!J JJJJJ
J" SCREWED TERMINALS ARE PROVIDED &OR THE IN
TERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION MODEL
3!J JJJJJ J# TWO & 3-! CONNECTORS
HAVE BEEN PROVIDED
4HE DEGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0
FOR THE TERMINALS )0 &OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE RE
FER TO &IGURE

$ESIGN
3!J J#JJJ IN HOUSING 80 FOR

PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR 3!J J%JJJ FOR
CUBICLE INSTALLATION
4HE HOUSING HAS FULL SHEET METAL COVERS AS WELL
AS A REMOVABLE FRONT COVER WITH TRANSPARENT PLAS
TIC WINDOW FOR PANEL MOUNTING
0LASTIC GUIDE RAILS ARE BUILT IN FOR THE SUPPORT OF
PLUG IN MODULES .EXT TO THE GUIDE RAIL AT THE BOT
TOM ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF EACH MODULE A CON
TACT AREA WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED TO THE
HOUSING IS INSTALLED TO MATE WITH THE EARTHING
SPRING OF THE MODULE #ONNECTION TO EARTH IS MADE
BEFORE THE PLUGS MAKE CONTACT %ARTHING SCREWS
HAVE BEEN PROVIDED ON THE REAR WALL OF THE HOUS
ING
!LL EXTERNAL SIGNALS ARE CONNECTED TO CONNECTOR
MODULES WHICH ARE MOUNTED ON THE REAR COVER
OVER CUT OUTS &OR EACH ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
ONE SCREWED TERMINAL AND ONE PARALLEL SNAP IN
TERMINAL ARE PROVIDED &OR FIELD WIRING THE USE OF
THE SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN
CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS
4HE HEAVY DUTY CURRENT PLUG CONNECTORS PROVIDE
AUTOMATIC SHORTING OF THE CT CIRCUITS WHENEVER
THE MODULES ARE WITHDRAWN 4HIS DOES NOT RELEASE
FROM THE CARE TO BE TAKEN WHEN CT SECONDARY CIR
CUITS ARE CONCERNED
4HE ISOLATED INTERFACE TO A CENTRAL CONTROL AND STOR
AGE UNIT 3!J JJJJJ J" IS LED TO A
POLE CONNECTION MODULE )N THE INTERFACE FOR
OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION 3!J JJJJJ J#
A MODULE WITH & 3-! CONNECTORS IS PROVIDED
INSTEAD
4HE PLUG MODULES ARE LABELLED ACCORDING TO THEIR
MOUNTING POSITION BY MEANS OF A GRID SYSTEM EG
! 4HE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTIONS WITHIN A MODULE
ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT
WHEN VIEWED FROM THE REAR EG ! REFER TO
&IGURE
$EGREE OF PROTECTION FOR THE HOUSING IS )0 FOR
CUBICLE INSTALLATION )0 FOR THE TERMINALS )0
&OR DIMENSIONS PLEASE REFER TO &IGURE
# ' #
3! 6
$ESIGN
$ #
" !
"
6OLTAGE CONNECTOR
(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTOR
EG "
EG !
!
HORIZONTAL POSITION
VERTICAL POSITION
CONSECUTIVE CONNECTION NUMBER

#ONNECTION PLUGS REAR VIEW
# ' #

"
&IGURE
HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
EXAMPLE

3! 6

$ESIGN
$IMENSIONS
&IGURES AND SHOW THE DIMENSIONS OF THE VARIOUS TYPES OF HOUSINGS AVAILABLE
3! (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80

)NTERFACE FOR OPTICAL

FIBRE BELOW

2ESET AND PAG

ING BUTTONS

%ARTHING TERMINAL
-AX TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX MM
/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

INTEGRATED &
3-! CONNECTOR
WITH CERAMIC POST

EG FOR GLASS FIBRE UM
$IMENSIONS IN MM
&IGURE

$IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
# ' #
3! 6
$ESIGN
3! (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80

-OUNTING PLATE

$
"

2ESET AND PAGING
#ONNECTOR MODULES
BUTTONS

(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTORS
3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM

4WIN SPRING CRIMP CONNECTOR IN PARALLEL FOR
OR -
MAX MM
&URTHER CONNECTORS
3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM

4WIN SPRING CRIMP CONNECTOR IN PARALLEL FOR
MAX MM
/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

0ANEL CUT OUT
INTEGRATED &
3-! CONNECTOR
WITH CERAMIC POST

EG FOR GLASS FIBRE UM

&IGURE
$IMENSIONS IN MM
$IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION
# ' #

3! 6

$ESIGN
/RDERING DATA
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION

RELAY

3!
2ATED CURRENT RATED FREQUENCY

! (Z
! (Z
!UXILIARY VOLTAGE
6 DC
6 DC
6 DC
#ONSTRUCTION
IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING "
IN HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING #
IN HOUSING 80 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION
WITHOUT GLASS FRONT %
/PERATING LANGUAGE
'ERMAN !
%NGLISH !
&RENCH "
&AULT DETECTION SYSTEMS

/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS
/VERCURRENT AND VOLTAGE CONTROLLED UNDERIMPEDANCE 5)
AND POLYGONAL IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTORS
/VERCURRENT AND UNDERIMPEDANCE 5) FAULT DETECTORS
-EASURED CURRENT INPUT FOR EARTH CURRENT
)NPUT FOR )% RESIDUAL CURRENT OF PROTECTED LINE
)NPUT FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
)NPUT FOR )%0 PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION
3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR COUPLING TO A CONTROL CENTRE
WITHOUT SERIAL INTERFACE !
WITH ISOLATED SERIAL INTERFACE SIMILAR 6 OR 23 # "
WITH SERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTION #
NEXT PAGE

# ' #
3! 6
$ESIGN
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION

RELAY

3!
3UPPLEMENTS
!2 !UTO 2ECLOSURE
0#/ 0ARAMETER #HANGE /VER FACILITY
3# 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE #HECK
WITHOUT !2
WITHOUT 3# WITHOUT 0#/ !
WITH !2 POLE
WITH 3#
WITHOUT 0#/ "
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3#
WITHOUT 0#/ #
WITHOUT !2
WITH 3#
WITH 0#/ %
WITH !2 POLE
WITH 3#
WITH 0#/ &
WITH !2 POLE WITH 3#
WITH 0#/ '
3UPPLEMENTS
03
%&
0OWER 3WING OPTION

(IGH RESISTANCE %ARTH &AULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS
WITHOUT 03 WITHOUT %&

WITH 03
WITHOUT %&
WITHOUT 03 WITH %&

WITH 03
WITH %&
ONLY WITH POLYGONAL IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTORS TH FIGURE OF ORDERING CODE
ONLY WITH EARTH CURRENT INPUT FOR )% OR )%0 TH FIGURE OF ORDERING CODE OR

# ' #

3! 6
4ECHNICAL DATA
4ECHNICAL DATA

'ENERAL DATA

)NPUTSOUTPUTS
-EASURING CIRCUITS
2ATED CURRENT ).
! OR !
2ATED VOLTAGE 5.
6 TO 6 SETTABLE
2ATED FREQUENCY F.
(Z OR (Z SETTABLE
"URDEN CT CIRCUITS PER PHASE AND RESIDUAL PATH

AT ). !
AT ). !
FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AT !
APPROX 6!
APPROX 6!
APPROX 6!
"URDEN VT CIRCUITS
AT 6
FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION OR BUSBAR VOLTAGE AT 6
6!
6!
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY CT CIRCUITS PHASES AND EARTH

THERMAL RMS
DYNAMIC IMPULSE

}). FOR SECOND

}). FOR SECONDS
}). CONTINUOUS
}). HALF CYCLE
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY CT CIRCUIT FOR HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION

THERMAL RMS
! FOR SECOND
! FOR SECONDS
! CONTINUOUS
/VERLOAD CAPABILITY VT CIRCUITS
THERMAL RMS
6 CONTINUOUS
!UXILIARY $# SUPPLY
!UXILIARY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY VIA INTEGRATED DCDC CONVERTER
6 DC
!UXILIARY VOLTAGE 5(
6 DC
6 DC
/PERATING RANGES
TO 6 DC
3UPERIMPOSED AC VOLTAGE
PEAK TO PEAK
AT RATED VOLTAGE
AT THE LIMITS OF THE VOLTAGE RANGES
0OWER CONSUMPTION
APPROX 7
APPROX 7
QUIESCENT
PICKED UP
"RIDGING TIME DURING FAILURESHORT CIRCUIT

OF AUXILIARY DC VOLTAGE

TO 6 DC TO 6 DC
MS AT 5 6 DC
# ' #
3! 6
4ECHNICAL DATA
(EAVY DUTY TRIP CONTACTS

4RIP RELAYS NUMBER
#ONTACTS PER RELAY
3WITCHING CAPACITY
3WITCHING VOLTAGE
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT
-!+%
"2%!+

./

76!
76!
6
! CONTINUOUS
! FOR S
3IGNAL CONTACTS
3IGNAL RELAYS
#ONTACTS PER RELAY
3WITCHING CAPACITY -!+%"2%!+
3WITCHING VOLTAGE
0ERMISSIBLE CURRENT

#/ OR ./
76!
6

!
"INARY INPUTS NUMBER

6OLTAGE RANGE
RECONNECTABLE TO 6 DC UP TO PRODUCTION SERIES ''

IN FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER IN RANGES
FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE
6DC
6DC
6DC
6DC
PICK UP VALUE APPROX
6DC
6DC
6DC
6DC
-AX CONTROL VOLTAGE

#URRENT CONSUMPTION
6DC
APPROX M! INDEPENDENT OF OPERATING VOLTAGE
3ERIAL INTERFACES
/PERATOR TERMINAL INTERFACE
#ONNECTION
4RANSMISSION SPEED
NON ISOLATED
AT THE FRONT POLE SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR ACCORDING
)3/ FOR CONNECTION OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR
AS DELIVERED "AUD
MIN "AUD MAX "AUD
)NTERFACE FOR DATA TRANSFER TO A CONTROL CENTRE

3TANDARDS
4RANSMISSION SPEED
4RANSMISSION SECURITY
#ONNECTION DIRECTLY
4RANSMISSION DISTANCE
4EST VOLTAGE
#ONNECTION OPTICAL FIBRE
/PTICAL WAVE LENGTH

0ERMISSIBLE LINE ATTENUATION
4RANSMISSION DISTANCE
.ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION
# ' #
SIMILAR 66 TO ##)44 23 # TO %)!

0ROTOCOL ACCORDING TO )%# OR $).
AS DELIVERED "AUD
MIN "AUD MAX "AUD
(AMMING DISTANCE D
AT HOUSING TERMINALS
CORE PAIRS WITH INDIVIDUAL AND COMMON SCREENING
EG ,) 9#9 #9 X X MM
MAX M
K6 WITH RATED FREQUENCY FOR MIN
INTEGRATED & 3-! CONNECTOR FOR DIRECT OPTICAL FIBRE
CONNECTION WITH CERAMIC POST
EG GLASS FIBRE M
FOR FLUSH MOUNTED HOUSING AT THE REAR
FOR SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING ON THE BOTTOM COVER
NM
MAX D"
MAX KM
RECONNECTABLE FACTORY SETTING LIGHT OFF

3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
%LECTRICAL TESTS
)NSULATION TESTS
3TANDARDS
)%#
(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST

EXCEPT DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT
K6 RMS (Z
(IGH VOLTAGE TEST ROUTINE TEST

ONLY DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY INPUT
K6 DC
)MPULSE VOLTAGE TEST TYPE TEST

ALL CIRCUITS CLASS )))
K6 PEAK S * POSITIVE

AND NEGATIVE SHOTS AT INTERVALS OF S
%-# TESTS IMMUNITY TYPE TESTS

3TANDARDS
)%# )%# PRODUCT STANDARDS

%. GENERIC STANDARD
6$% PART
(IGH FREQUENCY
)%# CLASS )))
K6 PEAK -(Z S SHOTSS

DURATION S
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
)%# CLASS )))
AND )%# CLASS )))
K6 K6 CONTACT DISCHARGE K6 AIR DISCHARGE

BOTH POLARITIES P& 2I
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD

6M -(Z TO -(Z
NON MODULATED )%# REPORT CLASS
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD
AMPLITUDE MODULATED )%# CLASS
6M -(Z TO -(Z !- K(Z
2ADIO FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PULSE

MODULATED )%# %.6 CLASS
6M -(Z REPETITION FREQUENCY (Z

DUTY CYCLE
&AST TRANSIENTS
)%# AND )%# CLASS
#ONDUCTED DISTURBANCES INDUCED BY

RADIO FREQUENCY FIELDS AMPLITUDE MODULATED
)%# CLASS )))
0OWER FREQUENCY MAGNETIC FIELD
)%# CLASS )6
)%#
K6 NS K(Z BURST LENGTH MS

REPETITION RATE MS BOTH POLARITIES 2I
DURATION MIN
6 K(Z TO -(Z !- K(Z
!M CONTINUOUS !M FOR S (Z

M4 (Z
%-# TESTS EMISSION TYPE TESTS

3TANDARD
#ONDUCTED INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE AUX VOLTAGE
#)302 %. CLASS "
)NTERFERENCE FIELD STRENGTH
#)302 %. CLASS !

%. J GENERIC STANDARD

K(Z TO -(Z
-(Z TO -(Z
# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
-ECHANICAL STRESS TESTS
6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING OPERATION

3TANDARDS
)%#
AND )%#
6IBRATION
)%# CLASS
)%#
SINUSOIDAL
(Z TO (Z
MM AMPLITUDE
(Z TO (Z G ACCELERATION
SWEEP RATE OCTAVEMIN
CYCLES IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
3HOCK
)%# CLASS
HALF SINE
ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS IN
EACH DIRECTION OF ORTHOGONAL AXES
3EISMIC VIBRATION
)%# CLASS
)%#
SINUSOIDAL
(Z TO (Z
MM AMPLITUDE HOR AXIS
(Z TO (Z
MM AMPLITUDE VERT AXIS
(Z TO (Z
G ACCELERATION HOR AXIS
(Z TO (Z
G ACCELERATION VERT AXIS
CYCLE IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
6IBRATION AND SHOCK DURING TRANSPORT

3TANDARDS
)%#
AND )%#
6IBRATION
)%# CLASS
)%#
SINUSOIDAL
(Z TO (Z
MM AMPLITUDE
(Z TO (Z
G ACCELERATION
CYCLES IN ORTHOGONAL AXES
3HOCK
)%# CLASS
)%#
HALF SINE
ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS IN
#ONTINUOUS SHOCK
)%# CLASS
)%#
HALF SINE
ACCELERATION G DURATION MS SHOCKS

#LIMATIC STRESS TESTS
0ERMISSIBLE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

DURING SERVICE
DURING STORAGE
DURING TRANSPORT
# TO #
# TO #
# TO #
3TORAGE AND TRANSPORT WITH STANDARD WORKS PACKAGING
# ' #

3! 6
0ERMISSIBLE HUMIDITY
4ECHNICAL DATA
MEAN VALUE PER YEAR RELATIVE HUMIDITY
ON DAYS PER YEAR RELATIVE HUMIDITY
#ONDENSATION NOT PERMISSIBLE
7E RECOMMEND THAT ALL UNITS ARE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THEY ARE NOT SUBJECTED TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT NOR TO LARGE TEM
PERATURE FLUCTUATIONS WHICH MAY GIVE RISE TO CONDENSATION

3ERVICE CONDITIONS
4HE RELAY IS DESIGNED FOR USE IN INDUSTRIAL ENVIRON

MENT FOR INSTALLATION IN STANDARD RELAY ROOMS AND
COMPARTMENTS SO THAT WITH PROPER INSTALLATION ELEC
TRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY %-# IS ENSURED
4HE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALSO BE HEEDED
!LL CONTACTORS AND RELAYS WHICH OPERATE IN THE
SAME CUBICLE OR ON THE SAME RELAY PANEL AS THE
DIGITAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHOULD AS A RULE BE
FITTED WITH SUITABLE SPIKE QUENCHING ELEMENTS
!LL EXTERNAL CONNECTION LEADS IN SUB STATIONS
FROM K6 UPWARDS SHOULD BE SCREENED WITH A
SCREEN CAPABLE OF CARRYING POWER CURRENTS AND
EARTHED AT BOTH SIDES .O SPECIAL MEASURES ARE

NORMALLY NECESSARY FOR SUB STATIONS OF LOWER

VOLTAGES
)T IS NOT PERMISSIBLE TO WITHDRAW OR INSERT INDIVIDU
AL MODULES UNDER VOLTAGE )N THE WITHDRAWN CONDI
TION SOME COMPONENTS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY EN
DANGERED DURING HANDLING THE STANDARDS FOR
ELECTROSTATICALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS MUST
BE OBSERVED 4HE MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED
WHEN PLUGGED IN
7!2.).' 4HE RELAY IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN RESI
DENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR LIGHT INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENT
AS DEFINED IN %.
$ESIGN
(OUSING
80 REFER TO 3ECTION
$IMENSIONS
REFER 3ECTION
7EIGHT FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER

UP TO '' IN PARENTHESIS
IN HOUSING FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
IN HOUSING FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
APPROX KG KG
APPROX KG KG
$EGREE OF PROTECTION ACC TO %.

(OUSING
4ERMINALS
)0

)0

)0 FOR CUBICLE INSTALLATION THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION REQUIRED FOR THE POINT OF INSTALLATION MUST BE ENSURED BY THE CUBICLE
# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
$ISTANCE PROTECTION
%ARTH IMPEDANCE MATCHING

2%2,
8%8,
-UTUAL IMPEDANCE MATCHING
2-2,
8-8,
TO STEPS

TO STEPS
FOR FAULT LOCATION WITH PARALLEL LINE
COMPENSATION OPTIONAL
TO STEPS
TO STEPS
0HASE PREFERENCES
FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS
IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS
PHASE TO PHASE OR
LEADING PHASE TO EARTH OR
LAGGING PHASE TO EARTH
FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS

IN ISOLATED OR
ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
, , OR , , ACYCLIC OR

, , OR , , CYCLIC
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE PICK UP

5E o 5
IN ISOLATED OR ARC COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
6 TO 6 STEPS 6
&AULT DETECTION
/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION GENERAL FAULT DETECTION PARAMETERS
TO
0HASE CURRENTS )PH).
%ARTH CURRENT )E).
TO
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE PICK UP 5E o 5
6 TO 6
$ROP OFF RATIOS
APPROX
-EASURING TOLERANCES ACCORDING 6$% PART
q
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS 6 0
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED CURRENT FAULT DETECTION UNDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION OPTIONAL
#HARACTERISTIC
TWO STAGE WITH SETTABLE INCLINATION
6OLTAGE CONTROL
BY 5PH E OR 5PH PH SELECTABLE
3ETTING RANGES
MINIMUM CURRENT PICK UP )PH
TO | ).
STEPS | ).
5NDERVOLTAGE PICK UP
5PH E
6 TO 6
STEPS 6
5PH PH
6 TO 6
STEPS 6
$ROP OFF RATIOS
)PH
APPROX
5PH E 5PH PH
APPROX
q
#HARACTERISTIC
3ETTING VALUES BASED ON ). !

8! FORWARDS REACH FOR ALL FAULTS
8 ! REVERSE REACH FOR ALL FAULTS
2! RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE 3# !
2! RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE 3# !
!
LIMIT ANGLE BETWEEN 2! AND 2!
2!% RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH 3# !%
2!% RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH 3# !%
!% LIMIT ANGLE BETWEEN 2!% AND 2!%
)PH MINIMUM OPERATING PHASE CURRENT
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO ).
$ROP OFF RATIOS

FOR 2 8
FOR )PH
APPROX
APPROX FOR ) ).
POLYGONAL PHASE ANGLE DEPENDENT 2 SECTION

STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS
STEPS | ).
3ECONDARY VALUES ARE RELATED ON ). ! FOR ). ! THE VALUES ARE TO BE DIVIDED BY
# ' #

3! 6
WITH SINUSOIDAL QUANTITIES
4ECHNICAL DATA
8 FOR
SC
8
2 FOR
SC
2
$ISTANCE MEASUREMENT
#HARACTERISTIC
POLYGONAL INDEPENDENT CONTROLLED STAGES
3ETTING VALUES BASED ON ). !

8
FORWARDS REACH FOR ALL FAULTS
2
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE PHASE
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE PHASE EARTH
2%
TO STEPS

TO STEPS
TO STEPS

8 FOR
SC
8
2 FOR
SC
2
&OR ALL TYPES OF FAULTS
3ENSITIVITY
WITH QUADRATURE VOLTAGES AND

VOLTAGE MEMORY
DYNAMICALLY UNLIMITED
4IMES
3HORTEST TRIPPING TIME
$ROP OFF TIME
APPROX MS
APPROX MS
4IME STAGES
3ETTING RANGES
FOR ALL STAGES
S TO S STEPS S

OR 0 IE STAGE INEFFECTIVE
4IME EXPIRY TOLERANCES
OF SET VALUE OR MS
!LL STAGES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE IN FORWARD OR REVERSE DIRECTION OR NON
DIRECTIONAL 4HE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES
/VERCURRENT EMERGENCY PROTECTION

WITH MEASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE EG 64 SECONDARY MCB TRIP OR DETECTED FUSE FAILURE
(IGH SET PHASE OVERCURRENT )).
$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4)
0HASE OVERCURRENT )PH).
$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4)PH
%ARTH OVERCURRENT )%).
$EFINITE TIME DELAY 4)%
TO
STEPS
S TO S STEPS S
TO
STEPS
S TO S STEPS S
TO
STEPS
S TO S STEPS S
$ROP OFF RATIOS

FOR ) ).
FOR ) X ).
APPROX
APPROX
q

# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL

TECTION
ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DE
0OWER SWING DETECTION
RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR

BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND
FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
3ETTING THE DIFFERENCE 2 BETWEEN THE POLYGONS

SECONDARY BASED ON ). !

TO STEPS
3ETTING RATE OF CHANGE D2D4
S TO S STEPS S
0ROGRAMS
BLOCK FIRST DISTANCE ZONE ONLY

BLOCK ALL ZONES BUT FIRST ZONE
BLOCK ALL DISTANCE ZONES
OUT OF STEP TRIPPING
!CTION TIME
S TO S STEPS S

OR 0 IE UNTIL DROP OFF OF THE POWER SWING
POLYGON

4ELEPROTECTION INTERFACE
4ELEPROTECTION MODES SELECTABLE

0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
FAULT DETECTION ACCELERATION

ZONE ACCELERATION SPECIAL ZONE :"
4RANSMIT SIGNAL PROLONGATION

4RANSMIT SIGNAL DELAY
2ECEIVED SIGNAL PROLONGATION
S TO S STEPS S

S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
RELEASE OVERREACHING ZONE :"

RELEASE FAULT DETECTION ZONE DIRECTIONAL
UNBLOCKING ZONE :"
UNBLOCKING FAULT DETECTION ZONE DIRECTIONAL
BLOCKING ZONE :"
4RANSMIT SIGNAL PROLONGATION

4RANSMIT SIGNAL DELAY
%CHO DELAY TIME
%CHO PULSE DURATION
%CHO BLOCK DURATION
4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME
7AITING TIME FOR TRANSIENT BLOCKING
S TO S STEPS S

S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S 0
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S 0
/VERREACHING TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES
.# LINK WITH $# CONTROL CABLE AND SUPPLEMENTARY

AUXILIARY RELAY
WITH ./ OR .# INTERLOCK LOOP
# ' #

3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
.UMBER
LOGICAL INPUTS VIA BINARY INPUT

LOGICAL OUTPUTS FOR BINARY OUTPUTS
3TART AND 3TOP

TIME EXPIRED
OPERATING TIME
APPROX MS
DELAY
S TO S STEPS S
TIME TOLERANCE
OF SET VALUE OR MS
4HE DELAY TIMES DO NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES

3ETTING RANGESSTEPS
&ACTOR K ACCORDING TO )%#
4IME CONSTANT
4HERMAL WARNING STAGE
WARNTRIP
#URRENT WARNING STAGE
)WARN).
4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC
TO
STEPS
TO MIN STEPS MIN
TO REFERRED TO TRIP
TEMPERATURE RISE STEPS
TO
STEPS
T
T
)
)PRE
K
$ROP OFF RATIOS

TRIP
WARN
))WARN
LN
)+

) . ) PREK ) .

)+ ) .
TRIP TIME
TIME CONSTANT
LOAD CURRENT
PRELOAD CURRENT
FACTOR ACCORDING TO )%#
REFER ALSO TO &IGURES AND
APPROX
APPROX
APPROX
4OLERANCES
REFERRING TO Kw ).
REFERRING TO TRIP TIME
)NFLUENCE VARIABLES REFERRED TO Kw).
!UXILIARY DC VOLTAGE IN RANGE 5(5(.
4EMPERATURE IN RANGE # AMB #
&REQUENCY IN RANGE FF.

q
q q S

+

# ' #
3! 6
4ECHNICAL DATA
TMIN

TMIN

0ARAMETER
0ARAMETER
SETTING VALUE
SETTING VALUE
TIME CONSTANT
TIME CONSTANT
MIN
MIN

T
LN

)K
)K

).

).

)K | ).

T

)K | ).

)K ) . ) PREK ) .
LN

)K ) .
FOR PRELOAD
&IGURE
4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC OF OVERLOAD

PROTECTION WITHOUT PRELOAD
# ' #
&IGURE
4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC OF OVERLOAD

PROTECTION WITH PRELOAD

3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL
$ETECTION
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E
6 TO 6 STEPS 6
$ELAY
OPTIONAL TRIP
APPROX S SETTABLE UP TO S
-EASURING TOLERANCE ACCORDING 6$% PART
OF SET VALUE
&AULTED PHASE DETERMINATION

-EASURING PRINCIPLE
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT PHASE TO EARTH
5 FAULTED PHASE
5 UNFAULTED PHASES
6 TO 6 STEPS 6
6 TO 6 STEPS 6
OF SET VALUE
-EASURING PRINCIPLE
MEASUREMENT OF ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER
0ICK UP VALUE )E ACTIVE OR REACTIVE COMPONENT

#4 ANGLE ERROR CORRECTION
M! TO M! STEPS M!
TO STEPS FOR OPERATING POINTS
OF THE #4 CHARACTERISTIC
OF SET VALUE
FOR TAN WITH ACTIVE COMPONENT

# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS

OPTIONAL
&AULT DETECTION
%ARTH CURRENT PICK UP )%). FOR TRIP
,OWER PICK UP VALUE FOR MEASUREMENT RELEASE
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5%
TO STEPS

)%).
6 TO 6 STEPS 6
$ROP OFF RATIO

APPROX
OF SET VALUE
-EASURING PRINCIPLE
WITH )% ) AND 5% o 5
&ORWARDS ANGLE
-EASURING TOLERANCES AT 5. AND ).
APPROX
^
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON
RELEASE MODE
^
TO ^
4IMES
3HORTEST TRIPPING TIME
2E ORIENTATION TIME AFTER CHANGE OF DIRECTION
APPROX MS
APPROX MS
4RIP DELAY TIME

"ACK UP TIME 4 DIRECTIONAL
"ACK UP TIME 4 NON DIRECTIONAL
%CHO DELAY TIME
%CHO PULSE DURATION
%CHO BLOCK DURATION
4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME
7AITING TIME FOR TRANSIENT BLOCKING
S TO S STEPS S 0

S TO S STEPS S 0
S TO S STEPS S 0
S TO S STEPS S 0
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S
S TO S STEPS S 0
4IME EXPIRY TOLERANCES
OR MS
)NVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT BACK UP PROTECTION

CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AS DESCRIBED BEFORE
#HARACTERISTICS
NORMAL INVERSE OR
VERY INVERSE OR
EXTREMELY INVERSE
TYPE ! OR " OR # ACCORDING )%#
OR "3 REFER TO &IGURE
0ICK UP VALUE )%).

4IME SETTING 4)%
CORRESPONDS TO 4- FACTOR
TO STEPS

S TO S STEPS S 0
TO STEPS 0
-EASURING TOLERANCES
EARTH CURRENT PICK UP VALUE
TIME EXPIRY
TO
MS FOR
# ' #
))% AND
4)%S

3! 6
T;S=
4ECHNICAL DATA

T;S=

)%;S=

.ORMAL INVERSE
) )

4

)%

) )
T;S=
)%;S=
) )
6ERY INVERSE
;S=

%

) )
)%

;S=

4)% CORRESPONDS TO THE

USUAL TIME MULTIPLIER 4-

)%;S=

TRIPPING TIME
4)%
SET TIME DELAY
EARTH FAULT CURRENT
PARAMETER 4)E
)%
SET EARTH FAULT PICK
UP VALUE
PARAMETER )E

%

) )
%XTREMELY INVERSE
&IGURE

) )
)%

;S=
4RIPPING TIME CHARACTERISTICS OF INVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
-AX NUMBER OF POSSIBLE SHOTS
2!2 FIRST SHOT

UP TO $!2 FURTHER SHOTS
!UTO RECLOSE MODES
SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE OR

SINGLETHREE POLE ST SHOT 2!2
FURTHER SHOTS THREE POLE $!2
!CTION TIMES
2!2 DEAD TIME SINGLE POLE
2!2 DEAD TIME THREE POLE
$!2 DEAD TIMES
$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS
S TO S
S TO S
S TO S
S TO S
S TO S
STEPS S
STEPS S
STEPS S
STEPS S
STEPS S
2ECLAIM TIME
,OCK OUT TIME
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE
$URATION OF 2%#,/3% COMMAND
S TO S
S TO S
S TO S
S TO S
STEPS S
STEPS S 0
STEPS S
STEPS S

/PERATION MODES
#HECK PROGRAMS FOR AUTO RECLOSE
SYNCHRO CHECK
DEAD LINE LIVE BUS CHECK
DEAD BUS LIVE LINE CHECK
DEAD BUS DEAD LINE CHECK
OR COMBINATIONS
#HECK PROGRAMS FOR MANUAL CLOSE
SAME AS FOR AUTO RECLOSE INDEPENDENT SETTING
6OLTAGES
5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK
5 FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK
6 TO 6
6 TO 6
STEPS 6
STEPS 6
5 MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE
MEASURING TOLERANCE
6 TO 6
6
STEPS 6
MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE
MEASURING TOLERANCE
TO

STEPS
F MEASUREMENT
SETTING RANGE FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING
SETTING RANGE FOR SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING
MEASURING TOLERANCE
(Z TO (Z STEPS (Z

(Z TO (Z STEPS (Z 0
M(Z
MIN OPERATING VOLTAGE
6
4IMES
MINIMUM MEASURING TIME
ACTIVE TIME
APPROX MS
S TO S STEPS S
# ' #

3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
&AULT LOCATION
/UTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE
IN PRIMARY
IN SECONDARY
IN KM LINE LENGTH
IN PERCENT LINE LENGTH
3TART TO MEASURE COMMAND
BY TRIP SIGNAL OR BY DROP OFF OF FAULT DETECTION

OR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
3ETTING REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH SECONDARY

KM TO KM STEPS KM
0ARALLEL LINE MUTUAL COMPENSATION
CAN BE ORDERED AS AN OPTION

SETTING OF MATCHING REFER TO 3ECTION

SINUSOIDAL QUANTITIES
OF LINE LENGTH WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE

INFEED
FOR SC AND 5SC5.
/UTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN KM OR MILES OR PERCENTS ONLY FOR HOMOGENEOUS LINES 7HEN SETTING RELATED REACTANCE IN
MILE
THE OUTPUT CAN BE READ IN MILES

# ' #
3! 6

4ECHNICAL DATA
!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
/UTPUT OF MEASURED VALUES

/PERATIONAL VALUES OF CURRENTS
RANGE
TOLERANCE
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF VOLTAGES
RANGE
TOLERANCE
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF VOLTAGES
RANGE
TOLERANCE
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF POWERS
RANGE
TOLERANCE
/PERATIONAL VALUE OF FREQUENCY
RANGE
TOLERANCE
), ), ),

IN ! PRIMARY AND IN ).
TO ).
OF ). FOR ) ).
OF MEAS VALUE FOR ) ).
5, % 5, % 5, %
IN K6 PRIMARY AND IN 5.o
TO 5.o
OF 5.
5, , 5, , 5, ,
IN K6 PRIMARY AND IN 5.
TO 5.
OF 5.
0A 0R ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER
IN -7 OR -6!R PRIMARY AND
IN 3. o 5. ).
TO 3.
OF 3.
F
IN F.
TO F.
OF F.
/PERATIONAL VALUES OF OVERLOAD PROTECTION
CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE RELATED ON

TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE
%ARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

MODELS WITH SENSITIVE RESIDUAL CURRENT INPUT
)%A )%R ACTIVE AND REACTIVE EARTH CURRENT

IN ! PRIMARY AND M! AT RELAY INPUT
-EASURED VALUES PLAUSIBILITY CHECKS

3UM OF CURRENTS
PHASES AND EARTH
3UM OF VOLTAGES
PHASES AND EARTH

PHASE TO PHASE
PHASE TO PHASE AGAINST PHASE TO EARTH
3TEADY STATE MEASURED VALUE SUPERVISION

#URRENT UNBALANCE
)MAX)MIN SYMMETRY FACTOR

AS LONG AS ) )LIMIT
6OLTAGE UNBALANCE
PHASE TO PHASE AND PHASE TO EARTH
5MAX5MIN SYMMETRY FACTOR

AS LONG AS 5 5LIMIT
6OLTAGE FAILURE THREE PHASE
\5\ LIMIT VOLTAGE AS LONG AS \)MAX\ LIMIT CURRENT
6OLTAGE FAILURE SINGLE PHASE
5% AND )%
0HASE SEQUENCE
CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION
# ' #

3! 6
4ECHNICAL DATA
&AULT EVENT DATA STORAGE

3TORAGE OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE LAST FOUR FAULT EVENTS THE THREE LAST CAN BE READ OUT LOCALLY
2EAL TIME CLOCK
2ESOLUTION FOR OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
2ESOLUTION FOR FAULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS
2ESOLUTION FO EARTH FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
MIN MS WITH PERSONAL COMPUTER

MS
MS
-AX TIME DEVIATION

"UFFER BATTERY

,ITHIUM "ATTERY 6 !H 4YPE #2 !!
3ELF DISCHARGE TIME YEARS
$ATA STORAGE FOR FAULT RECORDING

3TORAGE PERIOD FAULT DETECTION OR TRIP COMMAND MS
MAX
S SELECTABLE PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT TIME
3AMPLING RATE
INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER MS AT (Z

INSTANTANEOUS VALUE PER MS AT (Z
#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION LOG

.UMBER OF STORED TRIP EVENTS CAUSED BY 3!
UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS
POLE SEGREGATED
.UMBER OF STORED RECLOSE EVENTS
UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS
FOR EACH KIND OF AUTO RECLOSURE
4OTAL OF TRIPPED CURRENTS
UP TO DECIMAL DIGITS PLUS AFTER DECIMAL POINT

POLE SEGREGATED
4RIP COMMAND AND ANNUNCIATIONS VIA BINARY INPUT

USER DEFINABLE TRIP COMMAND
FOR ANNUNCIATION PROCESSING AND DIRECT LOCAL TRIP
USER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATIONS
FOR ANNUNCIATION PROCESSING
#OMMISSIONING AIDS
0HASE SEQUENCE AND DIRECTIONAL CHECK
#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST
WITH AUTO RECLOSURE
WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE

THREE POLE
3TORAGE OF A TEST RECORD

# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
-ETHOD OF OPERATION

/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT
4HE NUMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION 3)02/4%#

3! IS EQUIPPED WITH A POWERFUL AND PROVEN
BIT MICROPROCESSOR 4HIS PROVIDES FULLY DIGITAL
PROCESSING OF ALL FUNCTIONS FROM DATA ACQUISITION OF
MEASURED VALUES TO THE TRIP SIGNALS FOR THE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
&IGURE SHOWS THE BASE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT
, , ,
-%
4HE TRANSDUCERS OF THE MEASURED VALUE INPUT SEC

TION -% TRANSFORM THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES FROM THE
MEASUREMENT TRANSFORMERS OF THE SWITCH GEAR AND
MATCH THEM TO THE INTERNAL PROCESSING LEVEL OF THE
UNIT !PART FROM THE GALVANIC AND LOW CAPACITIVE
ISOLATION PROVIDED BY THE INPUT TRANSFORMERS FILTERS
ARE PROVIDED FOR THE SUPPRESSION OF INTERFERENCE 4HE
FILTERS HAVE BEEN OPTIMIZED WITH REGARD TO BANDWIDTH
!%
,#$ DISPLAY
X
CHARACTERS
&AULT
2EADY
SIGNALS
CAN BE MAR
SHALLED
#
,%$ CAN BE
MARSHALLED
/PERATOR
PANEL
#7
2
&
$!
-3

0
*9 . %
,%$
2ESET
X TRIP COM
MANDS CAN BE
MARSHALLED
3ERIAL
INTERFACE
BINARY
#ONTROL CENTRE
ISOLATED
INPUTS CAN BE
MARSHALLED
3ERIAL
0ERSONAL
INTERFACE
COMPUTER
0OWER
SUPPLY
&IGURE
(ARDWARE STRUCTURE OF DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3!
# ' #

3!6
AND PROCESSING SPEED TO SUIT THE MEASURED VALUE
PROCESSING 4HE MATCHED ANALOG VALUES ARE THEN
PASSED TO THE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !%
4HE ANALOG INPUT SECTION !% CONTAINS INPUT AMPLIFI
ERS SAMPLE AND HOLD ELEMENTS FOR EACH INPUT ANA
LOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS AND MEMORY CIRCUITS FOR
THE DATA TRANSFER TO THE MICROPROCESSOR
!PART FROM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION OF THE MEASURED
VALUES THE MICROPROCESSOR PROCESSES THE ACTUAL
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 4HESE INCLUDE IN PARTICULAR
&ILTERING AND FORMATION OF THE MEASURED QUANTI
TIES
#ONTINUOUS CALCULATION OF THE VALUES WHICH ARE
RELEVANT FOR FAULT DETECTION
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED PHASES IN CASE OF A
FAULT
3CANNING OF LIMIT VALUES AND TIME SEQUENCES
#ONTROLLING OF SIGNALS AND SEQUENCES FOR TELEPRO
TECTION AUTO RECLOSURE ETC
$ECISION ABOUT TRIP AND CLOSE COMMANDS
3TORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS CURRENT AND VOLTAGE VAL
UES DURING A FAULT FOR ANALYSIS
"INARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TO AND FROM THE PROCESSOR
ARE CHANNELLED VIA THE INPUTOUTPUT ELEMENTS &ROM
THESE THE PROCESSOR RECEIVES INFORMATION FROM THE
SWITCH GEAR EG REMOTE RESETTING OR FROM OTHER
EQUIPMENT EG BLOCKING SIGNALS /UTPUTS INCLUDE
IN PARTICULAR TRIP COMMANDS TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SIGNALS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING OF IMPORTANT EVENTS AND
CONDITIONS AS WELL AS VISUAL INDICATORS ,%$S AND AN
ALPHANUMERICAL DISPLAY ON THE FRONT

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
!N INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD IN CONNECTION
WITH A BUILT IN ALPHANUMERICAL ,#$ DISPLAY ENABLES
COMMUNICATION WITH THE UNIT !LL OPERATIONAL DATA
SUCH AS SETTING VALUES PLANT DATA ETC ARE ENTERED
INTO THE PROTECTION FROM THIS PANEL REFER 3ECTION
5SING THIS PANEL THE PARAMETERS CAN BE RECALLED AND
THE RELEVANT DATA FOR THE EVALUATION OF A FAULT CAN BE
READ OUT AFTER A FAULT HAS OCCURRED REFER 3ECTION
4HE DIALOG WITH THE RELAY CAN BE CARRIED OUT ALTERNA
TIVELY VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE IN THE FRONT PLATE BY
MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER
6IA A SECOND SERIAL INTERFACE OPTION FAULT DATA CAN
BE TRANSMITTED TO A CENTRAL EVALUATION UNIT $URING
HEALTHY OPERATION MEASURED VALUES CAN ALSO BE
TRANSMITTED EG LOAD CURRENTS 4HIS SECOND INTER
FACE IS ISOLATED AND THUS SATISFIES THE REQUIREMENTS
FOR EXTERNAL SIGNALS IE ISOLATION AND INTERFERENCE
SUPPRESSION COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS ACCORD
ING TO )%# AND 6$% PART
#OMMUNICATION VIA THIS INTERFACE IS ALTERNATIVELY POS
SIBLE BY MEANS OF FIBRE OPTIC LINKS PROVIDED THIS IN
TERFACE IS ACCORDINGLY ORDERED REFER 3ECTION /R
DERING DATA
! POWER SUPPLY UNIT PROVIDES THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY ON
THE VARIOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS TO THE DESCRIBED FUNCTIONAL
UNITS 6 IS USED FOR THE RELAY OUTPUTS 4HE ANALOG
INPUT REQUIRES q 6 WHEREAS THE PROCESSOR AND ITS
IMMEDIATE PERIPHERALS ARE SUPPLIED WITH 6 4RAN
SIENT FAILURES IN THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE UP TO MS
WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING SHORT CIRCUITS IN THE DC
SUPPLY SYSTEM OF THE PLANT ARE BRIDGED BY A DC VOLT
AGE STORAGE ELEMENT RATED AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
6DC
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS THE MAIN FUNCTION OF THE RELAY

)T IS CHARACTERIZED BY HIGH MEASURING ACCURACY AND
FLEXIBLE ADAPTATION POSSIBILITIES FOR THE GIVEN NETWORK
CHARACTERISTICS )T CAN BE EXTENDED BY A RANGE OF
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

&AULT DETECTION
&AULT DETECTION HAS THE DUTY TO DETECT A FAULTY CONDI

TION IN THE NETWORK AND TO INITIATE ALL THE NECESSARY
PROCEDURES FOR SELECTIVE CLEARANCE OF THE FAULT
3TART THE DELAY TIMES
3ELECTION OF THE MEASURED VALUES
2ELEASE OF IMPEDANCE CALCULATION AND DIRECTIONAL
IDENTIFICATION
2ELEASE OF TRIPPING COMMAND
)NITIATION OF AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
)NDICATIONOUTPUT OF THE FAULTY CONDUCTORS
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY HAS A VARIETY OF FAULT
DETECTION FUNCTIONS FROM WHICH THE OPTIMUM CAN BE
CHOSEN FOR THE SYSTEM UNDER CONSIDERATION REFER TO
3ECTION /RDERING DATA
4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION OPERATES WITH HIGH

SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS )F THERE IS NO SIGNIFICANT DIFFER
ENCE BETWEEN NORMAL OPERATION INCLUDING OVER
LOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT IN TERMS OF THE CURRENT WHICH
EG IN NETWORKS WITH HIGHLY FLUCTUATING
WILL FLOW
SYSTEM IMPEDANCE OR WHERE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
THEN UNDER IMPE
LIMITING DEVICES ARE INSTALLED
DANCE FAULT DETECTION VOLTAGE CONTROLLED CURRENT OR
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION MUST BE USED 7ITH THESE
OPTIONS COMPREHENSIVE FACILITIES ARE POSSIBLE TO
MATCH TO THE NETWORK CONDITIONS AND THE USER S PHI
LOSOPHY

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION AND PROCESSING
!N IMPORTANT ELEMENT FOR ALL FAULT DETECTION METHODS

IS THE DETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT SINCE THE DETERMINA
TION OF THE FAULTY LINE LOOPS 3ECTION ESSENTIALLY
DEPENDS ON WHETHER IT IS AN EARTH FAULT OR NOT 4HE
MODEL 3! IS EQUIPPED WITH STABILIZED MEASURE
MENT OF THE EARTH CURRENT WITH DELAY FACILITY AS WELL
AS DETECTION OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE -EASURES
HAVE ALSO BEEN PROVIDED TO SUPPRESS FAULT DETECTION
IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS IN ISOLATED
OR COMPENSATED SYSTEMS
) %
).

) % RESET

) % PICK

&IGURE
UP

%ARTH CURRENT DETECTOR
# ' #

PICK UPRESET CHARACTERISTIC

) PH MAX
).
EXAMPLE )%). SET AT

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HE EARTH CURRENT DETECTOR MONITORS THE FUNDAMEN

TAL WAVE OF THE TOTAL OF THE PHASE CURRENTS )% | )
IN COMPARISON WITH THE THRESHOLD VALUE )T IS STABI
LIZED AGAINST FAULTY PICK UP CAUSED BY ASYMMETRIC
OPERATING CURRENTS OR DISTORTED CURRENTS IN THE SEC
ONDARY CIRCUIT OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RESULTING
FROM DIFFERENT CURRENT TRANSFORMER SATURATION WITH
EARTH FREE SHORT CIRCUITS THE ACTUAL PICK UP VALUE
IS AUTOMATICALLY INCREASED AS THE PHASE CURRENTS IN
CREASE &IGURE %XAMPLE FOR SETTING THE HOR
IZONTAL BRANCH IS SHIFTED ACCORDING DIFFERENT SET
TINGS 4HE DROP OFF VALUE IS APPROX OF THE
PICK UP VALUE
4HE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE DETECTOR MONITORS THE FUN
DAMENTAL WAVE OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5%
o | 5 IN COMPARISON WITH THE SET THRESHOLD VALUE
4HE DROP OFF VALUE IS APPROX OF THE PICK UP
VALUE
)N SYSTEMS WITH AN EARTHED STARPOINT SOLIDLY EARTHED
OR LOW RESISTANCE EARTHED THE PICK UP OF THE
EARTH CURRENT MONITOR AS WELL AS THAT OF THE DISPLACE
MENT VOLTAGE MONITOR LEAD TO PICK UP OF THE EARTH
FAULT DETECTOR $ETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT ON ITS OWN
DOES NOT LEAD TO GENERAL FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE
DISTANCE PROTECTION BUT ONLY CONTROLS THE OTHER FAULT
DETECTION MODULES )T IS NOT ANNUNCIATED ON ITS OWN
EITHER
)N NON EARTHED SYSTEMS ISOLATED STARPOINT OR WITH
ARC COMPENSATION BY MEANS OF 0ETERSEN COIL THE
DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE MONITOR IS NOT USED FOR EARTH
FAULT DETECTION ! SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULT IS ALSO INI
TIALLY ASSUMED IN THESE SYSTEMS IN THE EVENT OF A
SINGLE PHASE FAULT DETECTION AND THE DETECTION IS
SUPPRESSED TO PREVENT FAULTY PICK UP BY THE OSCILLA
TION TRANSIENTS ON THE OCCURRENCE OF A SIMPLE EARTH
FAULT 0ICK UP IS ENABLED AGAIN FOLLOWING AN ADJUST

/VERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION IS A PHASE DEDI

CATED FAULT DETECTION PROCEDURE &OLLOWING NUMERIC
FILTERING THE CURRENTS IN EACH PHASE ARE MONITORED IN
COMPARISON WITH A SET THRESHOLD VALUE ! PICK UP
SIGNAL IS OUTPUT FOR THAT THOSE PHASES IN WHICH THE
SET THRESHOLD HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
4O ENABLE MEASURED VALUE SELECTION SEE 3ECTION
THE PHASE DEDICATED FAULT DETECTION SIGNALS
ARE CONVERTED INTO PHASE LOOP INFORMATION 4HIS IS
CARRIED OUT DEPENDING ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
ACCORDING 3ECTION AND IN EARTHED SYSTEMS
ON THE PARAMETER 0( &!5,43 ADDRESS AC
CORDING TO 4ABLE )N NON EARTHED SYSTEM THE
PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS SELECTED IN THE CASE OF
A SINGLE PHASE FAULT DETECTION WITHOUT EARTH FAULT
DETECTION
4HE FAULTY PHASES ARE ANNUNCIATED !N EARTH FAULT IS
ALSO ANNUNCIATED IF DETECTED ACCORDING TO 3ECTION

4HE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTOR IS RESET WHEN OF
THE PICK UP VALUE IS FALLEN BELOW
&AULT DETECTION
MODULE
%ARTH FAULT
DETECTION
,
,
,
NO
NO
NO
0(!3% 0(!3%
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,
,
NO
NO
NO
0(!3% %!24(
, %
, %
, %
,
,
,
,
,
,
YES
YES
YES
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
0ARAMETER
0( &!5,43
IRRELEVANT
2ESULTANT
LOOP
!NNUNCI
ATION
ONLY FOR EARTHED SYSTEM STARPOINT
4ABLE

ABLE DELAY TIME 4)E 0(!3% ADDRESS THIS IS

NECESSARY SO THAT THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS STILL ABLE
TO RECOGNIZE A CROSS COUNTRY DOUBLE EARTH FAULT WITH
ONE BASE POINT ON A SPUR FEEDER )F HOWEVER AN EARTH
FAULT IS ALREADY PRESENT IN THE SYSTEM THIS IS DETECTED
BY THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE MONITOR THE DELAY IS
THEN NOT EFFECTIVE AN EARTH FAULT WHICH NOW OCCURS IN
ANOTHER PHASE CAN ONLY BE A DOUBLE PHASE EARTH
FAULT
,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE OVERCURRENT

FAULT DETECTION
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
)MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IS A LOOP DEDICATED FAULT

DETECTION PROCEDURE %ITHER THE THREE PHASE PHASE
LOOPS WITHOUT EARTH FAULT OR THE THREE PHASE EARTH
LOOPS WITH EARTH FAULT ARE MONITORED DEPENDING ON
THE RESULT OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION 3ECTION
! PREREQUISITE FOR MEASUREMENT OF A LOOP
IMPEDANCE IS THAT AT LEAST ONE OF THE ASSIGNED PHASE
CURRENTS AS WELL AS THE DIFFERENCE CURRENT DECISIVE FOR
THE LOOP HAVE EXCEEDED AN ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM VAL
UE )PH
0ICK UP CAUSED BY SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS IN
SYSTEMS WITH A NON EARTHED STARPOINT IS EFFECTIVELY
SUPPRESSED BY THE MEASURES DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION

8
8!
&ORWARDS
DIRECTION
2!%
2!
4HE IMPEDANCES ARE CALCULATED SEPARATELY FOR 2 AND

8 IN CYCLIC TIME INTERVALS AND COMPARED WITH THE SET
VALUES ! MEASURED VALUE STEP CHANGE MONITOR IS
USED TO SYNCHRONIZE THE MEASUREMENT WINDOW ON
OCCURRENCE OF A FAULT #ALCULATION PROCEDURE IS THE
SAME AS THAT DESCRIBED FOR DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
IN 3ECTION
!N EXAMPLE OF THE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTERISTIC IN
THE COMPLEX 28 PLANE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 4HE
BOLD DOTS IDENTIFY THE SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH DE
TERMINE THE GEOMETRY OF THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
4HE 8 INTERSECTIONS 8! AND 8 ! ARE DECISIVE FOR
THE FAULT REACH IN THE FORWARD LINE DIRECTION AND IN
THE REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION 4HE 2 INTERSECTIONS
CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY FOR PHASE PHASE LOOPS 2!
AND PHASE EARTH LOOPS 2!% )T IS THUS POSSIBLE
EG TO PERMIT A LARGER FAULT RESISTANCE TOLERANCE FOR
EARTH FAULTS BOLD DOTTED LINE IN &IGURE
)N ORDER TO GUARANTEE UNEQUIVOCAL CRITERIA FOR DIS
CRIMINATION BETWEEN LOAD OPERATION AND A SHORT CIR
CUIT ESPECIALLY IN THE CASE OF LONG HIGH LOADED
LINES THE CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE SET DEPENDENT ON
THE PHASE ANGLE THE 2 SECTION 2! THEN APPLIES TO
PHASE ANGLES ABOVE A SETTABLE VALUE ! THE 2 SEC
TION 2! BELOW !
4O AVOID INTERMITTENT PICK UP SIGNALS NEAR THE BOR
DER LINES OF THE CHARACTERISTIC A HYSTERESIS OF IS
PROVIDED
0HASE ANGLE DEPENDENCE CAN SEPARATELY BE
ACHIEVED FOR EARTH FAULT WITH 2!% AND !% BUT FOR
REASONS OF SIMPLIFICATION THIS IS NOT ILLUSTRATED IN &IG
URE
# ' #
2!
2!%
2!
2!
2EVERSE
DIRECTION
&IGURE
)MPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER

ISTICS
0ICK UP RESULTS FOR THE MEASUREMENT LOOP IN WHICH

THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR LIES WITHIN THE FAULT DETECTION
POLYGON )F DETECTION OCCURS IN MORE THAN ONE LOOP
THE RELAY REGARDS AS VALID ALL THOSE LOOPS WHOSE IM
PEDANCE IS NOT GREATER THAN OF THAT SMALLEST
IMPEDANCE 4HIS AVOIDS WRONG PICK UP SIGNALS
WHICH COULD BE CAUSED BY THE INFLUENCE OF THE FAULT
CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ON THE UNFAULTED LINE LOOPS
ESPECIALLY IN CASES OF SMALL SOURCE IMPEDANCES
4HE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FOR PHASE EARTH IS
SUPPLEMENTED BY AN OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH
WHERE PICK UP OF THE OVERCURRENT STAGE ONLY LEADS
TO DETECTION IF THE ASSOCIATED IMPEDANCE LOOP HAS
BEEN ELIMINATED AS DESCRIBED IN THE PREVIOUS PARA
GRAPH )N THIS MANNER DOUBLE FAULTS WITH HIGH CURRENT
ARE ALSO CORRECTLY DETECTED EVEN IF A FAULT LOOP HAS
BEEN ELIMINATED BY THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED ABOVE
3INCE THE OVERCURRENT STAGE CAN ONLY RE ESTABLISH
ELIMINATED LOOPS FOR PICK UP ERRONEOUS FAULT DETEC
TION AS A RESULT OF AN OVERCURRENT IS PREVENTED AT THE
SAME TIME IF THE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS IN THE FAULT
FREE PHASES CAN EXCEED THE SET OVERCURRENT VALUE ON
NON EARTHED FEEDING TRANSFORMERS OR EARTHED CON
SUMER TRANSFORMERS

3!6
)T IS ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE TO USE THE IMPEDANCE FAULT
DETECTION JUST ONLY FOR EARTH FAULTS )N THIS CASE THE
PHASE EARTH MEASUREMENT IS ENABLED BY MEANS OF
THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IT IS NOT EFFECTIVE FOR PHASE
PHASE FAULTS /VERCURRENT DETECTION IS EFFECTIVE IN
STEAD IN THIS CASE 4HIS DETECTION PROGRAM IS OF AD
VANTAGE IN SYSTEMS WITH LIMITERS FOR EARTH CURRENTS
EARTHED AT LOW IMPEDANCE SO CALLED RESISTANCE
EARTHING WHERE A SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SUFFICIENT FOR
THE OVERCURRENT STAGE FLOWS FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS
BUT NOT FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS %ARTH FREE FAULTS ARE
THUS DETECTED BY THE OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
56

5)

5)

6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION

5NDER IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
OPTIONAL

)
4HE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION IS A PHASE

DEDICATED FAULT DETECTION PROCEDURE WHICH ALSO
TAKES INTO CONSIDERATION LOOP INFORMATION $ECISIVE
IS THE EXCEEDING OF PHASE CURRENTS WHERE THE PICK
UP VALUE DEPENDS ON THE MAGNITUDE OF THE LOOP VOLT
AGES
4HE BASIC CHARACTERISTIC CAN BE GATHERED FROM THE
CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE EXCEEDING OF A MINIMUM CURRENT )PH IS THE FIRST
PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK UP !BOVE THIS
CURRENT VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OVERCURRENT DETECTION IS
EFFECTIVE WHOSE SLOPE IS DEFINED BY THE PARAMETERS
5) AND 5) ! HIGH SET OVERCURRENT STAGE
)PH IS SUPERIMPOSED IN THE CASE OF SHORT CIRCUITS
OF HIGH CURRENT 4HE BOLD DOTS IN &IGURE IDENTIFY
THE SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH DETERMINE THE GEOME
TRY OF THE CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC
&AULT DETECTION OF A PHASE IS RESET WHEN OF THE
RESPECTIVE CURRENT IS FALLEN BELOW OR OF THE RE
SPECTIVE VOLTAGE IS EXCEEDED
4HE DEVICE HAS THREE SUCH FAULT DETECTION MODULES
EACH OF WHICH IS CONTROLLED BY THE PHASE EARTH VOLT
AGES OR THE PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES 0ARAMETERS ARE
USED TO DEFINE WHETHER THE VOLTAGES 50H % OR THE
VOLTAGES 50H 0H ARE DECISIVE OR WHETHER THIS DE
PENDS ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AS DESCRIBED IN
3ECTION 4HIS ENABLES HIGHLY FLEXIBLE ADAPTA
TION TO THE SYSTEM CONDITIONS /PTIMUM CONTROL
LARGELY DEPENDS ON WHETHER THE SYSTEM STARPOINT IS
NOT EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED EARTHED WITH
A LOW IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE EARTHED OR SOLIDLY
EARTHED 4HE POSITION OF THE STARPOINT EARTHING IS ALSO
SIGNIFICANT IN THE LATTER CASE )NFORMATION ON THE SET
TING IS CONTAINED IN 3ECTION

PH
PH

)).
&IGURE
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTORS

5) CHARACTERISTIC
#ONTROL WITH 50H % IS CHARACTERIZED BY A HIGH SENSI

TIVITY TO EARTH SHORT CIRCUITS AND IS THEREFORE PARTICU
LARLY ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH AN EARTHED STAR
POINT )T IS AUTOMATICALLY ADAPTED TO THE EXISTING LOAD
CONDITIONS IE IT BECOMES MORE CURRENT SENSITIVE
DURING LOW LOAD OPERATION THE PICK UP THRESHOLD
IS HIGHER IN THE CASE OF HIGH LOAD CURRENTS 4ABLE
SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE PHASE CURRENTS LOOP
VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS WITH SINGLE PHASE
PICK UP IF CONTROL WITH PHASE EARTH VOLTAGES IS SE
LECTED
4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP DEPENDS ON THE EARTH FAULT
IN
DETECTION ACCORDING TO 3ECTION AND
ON THE PARAMETER 0( &!5,43
EARTHED SYSTEMS
ADDRESS ACCORDING TO 4ABLE )N NON
EARTHED SYSTEMS THE PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS
SELECTED IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE PICK UP WITH
OUT EARTH FAULT DETECTION
4HE DETECTED PHASES ARE ANNUNCIATED !N EARTH
FAULT IS ALSO ANNUNCIATED IF DETECTED ACCORDING TO

# ' #
3!6
&AULT DETECTION
MODULE
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
-EASURED
CURRENT
-EASURED
VOLTAGE
%ARTH FAULT
DETECTION
0ARAMETER
0( &!5,43
2ESULTANT
LINE LOOP
!NNUNCI
ATION
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
NO
NO
NO
0(!3% 0(!3%
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
NO
NO
NO
0(!3% %!24(
, %
, %
, %
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
YES
YES
YES
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
IRRELEVANT
ONLY FOR EARTHED SYSTEM STARPOINT
4ABLE
,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED
FAULT DETECTION PHASE EARTH
4HE SENSITIVITY IS PARTICULARLY HIGH IN THE CASE OF PHA

SE PHASE FAULTS WHEN CONTROLLING WITH 50H 0H 4HIS
CONTROL IS ADVANTAGEOUS WITH EXTENDED COMPEN
SATED SYSTEMS BECAUSE ITS PRINCIPLE EXCLUDES PICK
UP BY SINGLE EARTH FAULTS )T IS AUTOMATICALLY ADAPTED
TO THE EXISTING LOAD CONDITIONS IN THE CASE OF TWO
PHASE AND THREE PHASE FAULTS IE IT BECOMES MORE
CURRENT SENSITIVE DURING LOW LOAD OPERATION THE
PICK UP THRESHOLD IS HIGHER IN THE CASE OF HIGH LOAD
&AULT DETECTION
MODULE
-EASURED
CURRENT
,
,
,
4ABLE
,
,
,
-EASURED
VOLTAGE
, ,
, ,
, ,
CURRENTS 4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE

PHASE CURRENTS LOOP VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS IN
THE CASE OF PICK UP OF ONLY ONE FAULT DETECTION MOD
ULE IF CONTROL WITH PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES IS SE
LECTED
4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP IN THIS CASE IS INDEPENDENT
OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION AND THIS METHOD IS THERE
FORE NOT SUITABLE FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS
%ARTH FAULT
DETECTION
IRRELEVANT
0ARAMETER
0( &!5,43
IRRELEVANT
2ESULTANT
LINE LOOP
!NNUNCI
ATION
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
FAULT DETECTION PHASE PHASE
)F THE POSSIBILITY OF MAKING THE VOLTAGE LOOPS DEPEN

DENT ON THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS USED THE HIGH
SENSITIVITY FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS THEN ALSO APPLIES
TO PHASE PHASE FAULTS 4HIS POSSIBILITY IS IN PRIN
CIPLE INDEPENDENT OF THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM
# ' #
STARPOINT IT ASSUMES HOWEVER THAT THE EARTH FAULT

CRITERIA ACCORDING TO 3ECTION HAVE BEEN SATIS
FIED SAFELY FOR ALL EARTH FAULTS 4ABLE APPLIES TO THE
FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM PHASE EARTH OR PHASE
PHASE VOLTAGES WITH SINGLE PHASE PICK UP

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT DETECTION
MODULE
-EASURED -EASURED
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
%ARTH FAULT
DETECTION
0ARAMETER
0( &!5,43
!NNUNCI
ATION
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, ,
, ,
NO
NO
NO
IRRELEVANT
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
YES
YES
YES
IRRELEVANT
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
4ABLE
,INE LOOPS AND PHASE ANNUNCIATIONS WITH SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION
VOLTAGES PHASE EARTH WITH EARTH FAULT VOLTAGES PHASE PHASE WITHOUT EARTH FAULT
)T IS FINALLY ALSO POSSIBLE TO ONLY CONTROL WITH THE VOLTA

GE LOOPS 50H % WHEN AN EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN DE
TECTED $ETECTION FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS THEN ONLY
TAKES PLACE WITH HIGH SET OVERCURRENT ) 4HIS IS
ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH A LOW IMPEDANCE
EARTHED STARPOINT IE WITH EARTH FAULT LIMITING AIDS
SO CALLED RESISTANCE EARTHING )N THESE CASES ONLY
EARTH FAULTS ARE TO BE DETECTED BY THE VOLTAGE CON
&AULT DETECTION -EASURED

MODULE
CURRENT
-EASURED
VOLTAGE
TROLLED FAULT DETECTION )T IS USUALLY EVEN UNDESIRABLE

THAT PHASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS LEAD TO UNDER
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
4HE MEASURED LOOP IS INDEPENDENT OF THE PARAMETER
0( &!5,43 4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE
PHASE CURRENTS LOOP VOLTAGES AND OUTPUT RESULTS
%ARTH FAULT
DETECTION
0ARAMETER
0( &!5,43
2ESULTANT
LINE LOOP
!NNUNCI
ATION
, %
, %
, %
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
YES
YES
YES
IRRELEVANT
, %
, %
, %
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
, %
NO
NO
NO
IRRELEVANT
NO PICK UP AND
NO ANNUNCIATION
BY 50H %)
4ABLE

2ESULTANT
LINE LOOP
FAULT DETECTION PHASE EARTH WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION ONLY
WITHOUT EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION ) MUST PICK UP
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP

&OR CALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE TO FAULT THE CURRENTS
AND VOLTAGES OF THE FAULTY LOOP ARE DECISIVE 4HE
PHASE SELECTIVE FAULT DETECTOR DETERMINES THE FAULTED
LOOP AND RELEASES THE CORRESPONDING MEASUREMENT
VALUES FOR IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
WHEREBY THE FACTOR :%:, IS DEPENDENT ONLY UPON THE

LINE CONSTANTS AND NOT UPON THE DISTANCE TO FAULT
,
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE PHASE LOOP FOR EXAMPLE

FOR A TWO PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT , , &IGURE THE
FOLLOWING IDENTITY APPLIES
), :,
), :, 5,
5,
,
),
ARE COMPLEX MEASURED VALUES

AND
: 2 J8 IS THE COMPLEX LINE IMPEDANCE
:,
WHERE 5 )
5,
)%
:%
%
4HE LINE IMPEDANCE IS THUS

&IGURE
5
5 ,%
: , ,%
) , ) ,
),
:,
,
5,
),
:,
,
,
5,
,
0HASE EARTH SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
&AULT LOOP SELECTION IS SUCH THAT FOR EACH TYPE OF FAULT

THE CORRECT MEASURED VALUES ARE USED FOR THE CALCU
LATION &OR MULTIPLE FAULTS WHEREBY MORE THAN TWO
PHASES OR EARTH ARE INVOLVED ONE OF THE POSSIBLE
FAULT LOOPS WILL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE
4HE SELECTION OF VALID SHORT CIRCUIT LOOPS VARIES CON
SIDERABLY DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER THE SYSTEM STAR
POINT IS EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED 0ETERSEN
COIL !CCORDINGLY THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM STAR
POINT HAS TO BE KNOWN BEFORE THE DEVICE IS PUT INTO
OPERATION SEE 3ECTION
%
&IGURE
0HASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
&OR THE CALCULATION OF A PHASE EARTH LOOP FOR EXAM

PLE FOR A SHORT CIRCUIT , % &IGURE IT MUST BE
OBSERVED THAT THE IMPEDANCE OF THE EARTH RETURN
PATH IS NOT NORMALLY EQUAL WITH THE IMPEDANCE OF THE
PHASE )N THE LOOP EQUATION
) ,
:, ) %
:% IS REPLACED BY
: % 5 ,%
:%
:,
: , WHICH GIVES US
:%
) , : , ) % : ,
5 ,%
:,
FROM WHICH ONE OBTAINS THE LINE IMPEDANCE
5 ,%
:,
) , : %: , ) %
# ' #

,OOP DETERMINATION FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED

SYSTEMS
)N NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT EACH CONTACT OF A

PHASE WITH EARTH IS A SHORT CIRCUIT WHICH MUST BE IN
TERRUPTED IMMEDIATELY BY THE NEAREST PROTECTIVE DE
VICE )F ALL POWER TRANSFORMERS FEEDING TOWARDS THE
SHORT CIRCUIT ARE EARTHED THEN THE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT
WILL RESPOND 4HE EARTH FAULT ELEMENT IS
THEREFORE USED AS AN ADDITIONAL CRITERION FOR EARTH
FAULTS
7ITH DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS PICK UP NORMALLY OCCURS IN
TWO PHASES AND EARTH WITH OVERCURRENT DETECTION OR
FOR TWO PHASE EARTH LOOPS IMPEDANCE DETEC
TION )N THIS CASE IT IS POSSIBLE TO SET THE RELAY SO THAT
ONLY THE PHASE PHASE LOOP PARAMETER 0(0(%
&,43 0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9 OR THE LOOP OF THE
LEADING PHASE TO EARTH 0(0(% &,43 ,%!$).'

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
0( % OR THE LOOP OF THE LAGGING PHASE TO EARTH

0(0(% &,43 ,!'').' 0( % WILL BE SELECTED
4ABLES AND SHOW THE MEASUREMENT QUANTI
TIES WHICH WILL BE SELECTED FOR DISTANCE MEASURE
MENT IN EARTHED NETWORKS
.OTE )N SYSTEMS WITH EARTHED STAR POINT THE RELAY
MUST BE CONNECTED TO THREE STAR CONNECTED VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS 5, . 5, . 5, . WITH EARTHED PRI
MARY STAR POINT AND TO THREE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ),
), ), 4HE STAR POINT LEAD FOR THE CURRENT TRANSFORM
&AULT DETECTION
PHASES
3ELECTED
SETTING PARAMETER
,
,
,
%
%
%
, %
, %
, %
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, ,
, ,
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
, ,
, ,
, ,
0(0(% &,43
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
, %
, %
, %
0(0(% &,43
,%!$).' 0( %
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
, %
, %
, %
0(0(% &,43
,!'').' 0( %
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, %
0( &!5,43
%& #/.42/,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, ,
0( &!5,43
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
,
,
,
,
,
,
, %
, %
0( &!5,43
0(!3% %!24( /.,9
4ABLE

3ELECTED
LOOP
ERS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE )% CURRENT PATH OF THE

RELAY )F THE )% CURRENT PATH OF THE RELAY IS FED FROM THE
STAR POINT LEAD OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER SET OF A PAR
ALLEL LINE FOR PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION OF THE FAULT LO
CATOR IF THIS OPTION IS AVAILABLE THE RELAY CALCULATES
THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT FROM THE SUM OF THE THREE
PHASE CURRENTS )F THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS HAVE RE
SIDUAL VOLTAGE WINDINGS THESE SHOULD BE CONNECTED
IN OPEN DELTA TO THE VOLTAGE INPUT PROVIDED FOR THE
PURPOSE THIS ALLOWS THE RELAY TO GIVE COMPLETE MONI
TORING OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECONDARY CIR
CUITS
3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH OVERCURRENT OR UNDER IMPE

DANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT DETECTION
PHASE LOOPS
3ELECTED
LOOP
3ELECTED
SETTING PARAMETER
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
IRRELEVANT
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
IRRELEVANT
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, ,
, ,
, ,
0(0(% &,43
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
0(0(% &,43
,%!$).' 0( %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
0(0(% &,43
,!'').' 0( %
, , , ,
, , , ,
, , , ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
IRRELEVANT
, % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, %
, ,
0( &!5,43
%& #/.42/,
, % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, ,
, ,
0( &!5,43
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
, % , % , %
, , , , , ,
, %
, %
0( &!5,43
0(!3% %!24( /.,9
4ABLE
3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
,OOP DETERMINATION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
)N ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS NO CURRENTS

RESEMBLING A SHORT CIRCUIT ARE PRESENT IN THE CASE OF A
SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULT /NLY A DISPLACEMENT OF THE
VOLTAGE TRIANGLE OCCURS &IGURE 4HIS CONDITION
DOES NOT REPRESENT ANY IMMEDIATE DANGER FOR THE
OPERATION OF THE NETWORK )N THIS CASE THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION MUST NOT RESPOND SINCE THE PHASE TO
EARTH VOLTAGE OF THE FAULTY PHASE IS ZERO THROUGHOUT

THE WHOLE GALVANICALLY INTERCONNECTED NETWORK 4HIS
WOULD LEAD TO A MEASURED IMPEDANCE EQUAL ZERO FOR
THE FAULTY PHASE EARTH LOOP AT EACH MEASURING
POINT &OR THIS REASON PICK UP OF ONE SINGLE PHASE
TO EARTH FAULT DETECTOR IS AVOIDED IN 3! RELAY
5,
5,
5,
5,
B EARTH FAULT IN PHASE ,
%ARTH FAULT IN A NON EARTHED NETWORK
/N THE OCCURRENCE OF AN EARTH FAULT ABOVE ALL IN EX

TENSIVE COMPENSATED NETWORKS A SIGNIFICANT IGNI
TION CURRENT CAN FLOW WHICH CAN CAUSE THE EARTH CUR
RENT DETECTOR TO PICK UP OR FOR THE OVERCURRENT ELE
MENT IN CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES EVEN A PHASE CUR
RENT PICK UP 3! HAS SPECIAL FEATURES TO PRE
VENT SUCH FAULTY REACTION SEE 3ECTION
)N THE CASE OF A DOUBLE EARTH FAULT IN ISOLATED OR COM
PENSATED NETWORKS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO ELIMINATE ONE
FAULT 4HE SECOND FAULT REMAINS IN THE NETWORK AS A
SIMPLE EARTH FAULT 7HICH ONE OF THE FAULTS WILL BE IN
TERRUPTED IS DEPENDENT UPON THE DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
PRIORITY WHICH IS SET TO BE THE SAME THROUGHOUT THE
WHOLE GALVANICALLY CONNECTED NETWORK 7ITH
3! THE FOLLOWING DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PRIORITIES
CAN BE SELECTED
ACYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE ,
ABBREVIATED ,, ACYCLIC
CYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE , BEFORE ,
ABBREVIATED ,, CYCLIC
CYCLIC , BEFORE , BEFORE , BEFORE ,

5,
5,
A SOUND NETWORK WITHOUT EARTH FAULT

&IG
5
ABBREVIATED ,, CYCLIC

/NE EARTH FAULT WILL BE CLEARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
SELECTED PREFERENCE A SECOND CROSS COUNTRY
FAULT WOULD REMAIN ON THE NETWORK AND CAN BE DE
TECTED BY THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FACILITY SEE 3EC
TION
&OR UNEARTHED NETWORKS MEASURING QUANTITIES WILL
BE SELECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4ABLES AND
.OTE 'ENERALLY IT IS ASSUMED THAT THREE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS ), ), ), AND THREE STAR CONNECTED
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE PROVIDED )F ONLY TWO CUR
RENT TRANSFORMERS ANDOR TWO VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IN 6 CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE RELIABLE DETECTION OF
DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED NETWORKS IS NOT
ALWAYS POSSIBLE &OR THE DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER
ENCE THE PREFERRED PHASES MUST ALWAYS BE
EQUIPPED WITH THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS IF ONLY TWO
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT DETECTION
PHASES
3ELECTED
LOOP
3ELECTED
SETTING PARAMETER
,
,
,
%
%
%
, %
, %
, %
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
, ,
, ,
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, #9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
,
,
%
%
%
,
%
0(!3% 02%&
,, #9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
4ABLE
3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION
OR UNDERIMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT DETECTION
PHASE LOOPS
3ELECTED
LOOP
3ELECTED
SETTING PARAMETER
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
, %
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
% , %
,
,
,
, , ,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
IRRELEVANT
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
% , %
,
,
,
, , ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
, ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
% , %
,
,
,
, , ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
, %
, ,
, %
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
CONTINUED NEXT PAGE

# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT DETECTION
PHASE LOOPS
3ELECTED
LOOP
3ELECTED
SETTING PARAMETER
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
% , %
,
,
,
, , ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
0(!3% 02%&
,, !#9#,)#
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
%
%
%
%
,
,
,
,
0(!3% 02%&
,, #9#,)#
4ABLE
, %
, ,
, %
, ,
0(!3% 02%&
,, #9#,)#
3ELECTED MEASUREMENT QUANTITIES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT IMPEDANCE CALCULATION
4HE RELAY CALCULATES THE RESISTANCE 2 AND THE REAC

TANCE 8 OF THE FAULT LOOP SEPARATELY USING THE MEA
SURED VALUES DETERMINED BY THE SELECTION DESCRIBED
IN 3ECTION !S LONG AS A FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICK
ED UP THE CALCULATION IS EFFECTED CONTINUOUSLY 4HE
ALGORITHM EVALUATES ALL THE UPDATED INSTANTANEOUS
VALUES OF CURRENT AND VOLTAGE THROUGHOUT AT LEAST THE
LAST HALF CYCLE 7ITH DIFFICULT MEASUREMENT CONDI
TIONS EG VERY SMALL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGES OR NEAR
THE BALANCED POINT THE DATA WINDOW AND THUS THE
NUMBER OF EVALUATED VALUES IS AUTOMATICALLY IN
CREASED
4HE CALCULATION IS AN INTEGRATION OF THE LINE IDENTITY
2%

2,
2

2
8%

8,
8

8
AND
REFER TO 3ECTION

4HE SEPARATE SETTING FACILITIES FOR THE FACTORS ALLOWS
THE POSSIBLE PHASE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN EARTH AND
CONDUCTOR IMPEDANCE TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN
ADDITION TO THE RELATIONSHIP :%:, 4HIS DIFFERENCE
CAN BE OF SIGNIFICANT VALUE IN CABLE NETWORKS
, DI 2 I U
DT
AND ALLOWS WITH ITS IDEAL FILTER CHARACTERISTICS DETER
MINATION OF THE 2 AND 8 , COMPONENTS FOR THE
SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP INDEPENDENT OF THE SETTING OF THE
TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE TO PHASE LOOP VALUES
CONFORMING TO THE SELECTION GIVEN IN FOR U THE
INSTANTANEOUS VALUES OF PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
AND FOR I THE DIFFERENCE OF THE PHASE CURRENTS ARE
USED EG &IGURE
DI , DI ,
2
DT
DT
DI , 8 %
DT
8,
2,
8,
) ,
2,
8,
,
2&
,
,
5,
I , I , U ,% U ,%
&OR CALCULATION OF A PHASE TO EARTH LOOP ACCORD

ING &IGURE
5,
) ,
DI %
2
DT
&IGURE
0HASE PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
2
I , % I % U ,%
2,
,
2 AND , ARE THE REQUIRED IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS

4HE CALCULATED REACTANCE IS THE LINE REACTANCE 8, UP
TO THE POINT OF FAULT 4HIS DETERMINES THE DISTANCE TO
FAULT 4HE RESISTANCE VALUE ON THE OTHER HAND CON
TAINS IN ADDITION TO THE CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE 2, THE
FAULT RESISTANCE 2& REFER TO &IGURES AND
.OTE 4HE FACTORS 2%2, AND 8%8, ARE PURELY MATHE
MATICAL VALUES AND HAVE NO PHYSICAL MEANING 4HEY
CAN BE RELATIVELY EASILY CALCULATED FROM THE LINE DATA
WITHOUT USING COMPLEX FORMS FROM THE FORMULAE

,
5,
),
2,
8,
)%
2%
8%
,
2&
%
&IGURE
0HASE EARTH SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HE DIRECTION OF THE FLOW OF FAULT ENERGY IS DETERMINED

IN A SIMILAR WAY TO DISTANCE MEASUREMENT 3ECTION
&OR THE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION HOWEVER
SOUND PHASE AND STORED REFERENCE VOLTAGES ARE
USED )T IS THUS ENSURED THAT THE RELAY CORRECTLY DETER
MINES THE DIRECTION OF ALL TYPES OF FAULT EVEN WHEN
THE SHORT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE HAS COLLAPSED 4HE DEPTH
OF THE STORED VOLTAGE VARIES DEPENDENT ON THE MEA
SURING CONDITIONS 4HE STORED VOLTAGE IS ONLY OF IM
PORTANCE IF THE MEASURING CIRCUIT VOLTAGE IS NOT SUF
FICIENT FOR A PRECISE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION 3INCE
THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE STORED VOLTAGES IS FRE
QUENCY DEPENDANT THE FREQUENCY IS MEASURED AND
FED INTO THE CALCULATION
,
, ,
,
, ,
5
, ,
,
,
5
5
, ,
,
B ,OOP PHASE PHASE , ,
2EFERENCE VOLTAGES FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
&AULTED
LOOP
,
,
,
,
,
,
4HE THEORETICAL DIRECTIONAL LINE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE

)N PRACTICE THE POSITION OF THE DIRECTIONAL CHAR
ACTERISTIC IS DEPENDENT UPON THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE
AS WELL AS THE LOAD CURRENT CARRIED BY THE LINE IMMEDI
ATELY BEFORE FAULT INCEPTION
,
A ,OOP PHASE EARTH , %

&IGURE
4HE REFERENCE VOLTAGE FOR BOTH A PHASE EARTH LOOP

AND A PHASE PHASE LOOP IS ALWAYS AT RIGHT ANGLES TO
THE SHORT CIRCUIT VOLTAGES &IGURE 4HIS IS CON
SIDERED IN THE CALCULATION OF THE DIRECTIONAL VECTOR
4ABLE SHOWS THE ALLOCATION OF MEASURED VALUES
FOR THE CALCULATION OF DISTANCE AND DIRECTION TO THE
POSSIBLE FAULT LOOPS
-EASURING CURRENT
DISTANCEDIRECTION
),
),
),
),
),
),
%
%
%
,
,
,
K% | ) %
K% | ) %
K% | ) %
),
),
),
-EASURING VOLTAGE
DISTANCE
5,
5,
5,
5,
5,
5,
-EASURING VOLTAGE
DIRECTION
%
%
%
,
,
,
5,
5,
5,
5,
5,
5,
,
,
,
,
,
,
5,
5,
5,
,
,
,
.OTE K% :%:,
4ABLE
-EASURED VALUES FOR DISTANCE CALCULATION AND DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&IGURE SHOWS THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC TAK
ING INTO CONSIDERATION THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE WITH
OUT LOAD CURRENT 3INCE THE UNFAULTED VOLTAGE EQUALS
THE GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND DOES NOT CHANGE AFTER
FAULT INCEPTION THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC IN THE
IMPEDANCE DIAGRAM APPEARS TO BE DISPLACED BY THE
SOURCE IMPEDANCE )F THE LOCATION OF THE FAULT IS &
&IGURE A THE SHORT CIRCUIT LIES IN THE FORWARD DI
RECTION THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE IN THE REVERSE DIREC
TION !LL FAULT LOCATIONS RIGHT UP TO THE RELAY LOCATION
CTS ARE CLEARLY RECOGNIZED AS FORWARDS &IGURE
B 7HEN THE CURRENT FLOWS IN THE OPPOSITE DIREC
TION THE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC CHANGES IMMEDI
ATELY &IGURE C 4HEN THE REVERSED CURRENT
WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE :3
:, FLOWS THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
8
INDUCTIVE
: FORWARDS
$IRECTIONAL
CHARACTERISTIC
^
REVERSE
CAPACITIVE
&IGURE
3! DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
&
3
&
3
3!
A
J8
J8
: :
3
&
3
: :
3
2
&
C
B
&IGURE
$IRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC WITH SOURCE IMPEDANCE WITHOUT LOAD TRANSPORT
)F LOAD IS CARRIED BY THE LINE THEN THIS RESULTS IN A VOLT

AGE DROP AT THE SOURCE IMPEDANCE &IGURE A
3INCE AT THE MEASURING POINT THE VOLTAGE 5 IS MEA
SURED NOT GENERATOR VOLTAGE % THE DIRECTIONAL CHAR
ACTERISTIC SUFFERS A ROTATION BY THE LOAD ANGLE &IG

3
URES B AND C 4HEREFORE THE DIRECTIONAL

CHARACTERISTIC HAS A SAFETY DISTANCE FROM THE LIMITS OF
THE FIRST QUADRANT IN THE 2 8 DIAGRAM &IGURE

# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
:
%
,
3 | ) ,
5
,
,
5
5
,
,
%
5
,
,
BEFORE FAULT INCEPTION
,
,
%
,
,
,
AFTER FAULT INCEPTION
A 6OLTAGE VECTOR DIAGRAM FOR EARTH FAULT ON LOADED LINE
J8
J8
3 : ,
3
2
B
&IGURE
C
$IRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC WITH SOURCE IMPEDANCE AND LOAD TRANSPORT
# ' #

3!6

4HE TRIPPING ZONES OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY

3! HAVE A POLYGONAL CHARACTERISTIC 4HEY CON
SIST OF THE DIRECTIONAL LINES IN ACCORDANCE WITH 3EC
TION AND IN EACH CASE A REACTANCE AND RESIS
TANCE LIMIT 2EACTANCE INTERSECTION 8 AND RESISTANCE
INTERSECTION 2 CAN BE SET SEPARATELY AND INDEPEN
DENTLY FROM EACH OTHER )N ADDITION THE 2 INTERSEC
TIONS CAN BE SET SEPARATELY FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS
AND PHASE EARTH FAULTS 2% SO THAT A HIGHER RESIS
TANCE MARGIN CAN BE OBTAINED FOR EARTH FAULTS IF RE
QUIRED
!S SHOWN IN &IGURE THE RELAY POSSESSES THE FOL
LOWING CHARACTERISTICS WHICH CAN BE SET INDEPEN
DENTLY
ST ZONE INSTANTANEOUS ZONE : WITH THE SETTING
PARAMETERS
8
2
2%
4
2EACTANCE REACH
2ESISTANCE PHASE PHASE
2ESISTANCE PHASE EARTH
4 OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED SEPARATE
TIME SETTINGS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND MULTI
PHASE FAULTS
ND ZONE DELAYED BACK UP ZONE : WITH THE

SETTING PARAMETERS
8
2
2%
4
2EACTANCE REACH
$ELAYSEPARATE SETTINGS FOR SINGLE
PHASE AND MULTI PHASE FAULTS
RD ZONE DELAYED BACK UP ZONE : WITH THE SET

TING PARAMETERS
8
2
2%
4

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
2EACTANCE REACH
$ELAY
"ESIDES THESE INDEPENDENT ZONES TWO CONTROLLED

ZONES ARE AVAILABLE WHICH CAN BE ACTIVATED BY LOG
ICAL CONDITIONS
/VERREACH ZONE :" FOR ZONE EXTENSION EG FOR
TELEPROTECTION AUTO RECLOSURE OR CONTROLLED VIA
BINARY INPUT WITH THE SETTING PARAMETERS
8"
2"
2"%
4"
2EACTANCE REACH
4" OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED SEPARATE
TIME SETTINGS FOR SINGLE PHASE AND MULTI
PHASE FAULTS
/VERREACH ZONE :, ACTIVATED BY MULTI SHOT !2

ND AND FURTHER CYCLES SO CALLED $!2 OR CON
TROLLED VIA BINARY INPUT WITH THE SETTING PARAME
TERS
8,
2,
2,%
4,
2EACTANCE REACH
4, OR DELAYED IF REQUIRED
!LL ZONES CAN BE SET TO OPERATE EITHER IN FORWARD DI

RECTION OR IN REVERSE DIRECTION OR NON DIRECTIONAL
&IGURE SHOWS THE TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS &OR
AN EASIER CLARIFICATION SEPARATE 2 SETTING FOR EARTH
FAULTS IS SHOWN FOR ST ZONE ONLY :ONE :, IS OMITTED
FOR THE SAME REASON
!DDITIONALLY A DIRECTIONAL AND A NON DIRECTIONAL FI
NAL STAGE ARE AVAILABLE #HARACTERISTIC AND REACH OF
THESE ARE DETERMINED BY THE SELECTED FAULT DETECTION
OPTION REFER 3ECTION &OR MODELS WITH IMPED
ANCE FAULT DETECTION FAULT DETECTION ZONE
:! IS PROVIDED AS SHOWN IN &IGURE 4HE REACHES
OF THE OTHER TYPES OF FAULT DETECTION ARE DEPENDENT
ON THE INFEED CHARACTERISTICS EG SYSTEM IMPED
ANCE RATIO SO THAT THEY HAVE NO FIXED SHAPE IN THE
2 8 PLANE
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
J8
&AULT DETECTION
4 4
8
4
8
4
8"
4"
8
4
2
2
2%
2"
2
CA^
2
2"
2%
2
2
8
8"
8
4 y 4
&IGURE
8
# ' #

3!6

4RIPPING LOGIC
7HEN THE RELAY HAS DETECTED A FAULT SEE 3ECTION

THE DELAY TIMES ARE STARTED 4HE IMPEDANCE
OF THE SELECTED FAULT LOOP ACCORDING TO 3ECTION
ARE COMPARED WITH THE THRESHOLD OF THE SET ZONES
4RIPPING OCCURS WHEN THE IMPEDANCE IS WITHIN A
ZONE WHOSE CORRESPONDING TIME STAGE HAS EXPIRED
AND THE FAULT DIRECTION COMPLIES WITH THE DIRECTION AS
SET FOR THAT ZONE &OR ZONE : AND :" THE DELAY
TIME CAN EQUAL ZERO IE TRIPPING OCCURS AS SOON AS IT
HAS BEEN CONFIRMED THAT THE FAULT LIES WITHIN THE
ZONE !N AUTOMATIC REPETITION OF THE MEASUREMENT
BECOMES EFFECTIVE NEAR TO THE BALANCED POINT IN OR
DER TO PREVENT ANY TRANSIENT OVERREACH 4HIS CAN LEAD
TO A SLIGHT INCREASE IN THE REACTION TIME
)N STAGES : AND :" AND IF DESIRED IN STAGE :
SINGLE PHASE FAULTS CAN BE TRIPPED SINGLE POLE
4HIS IS ALWAYS MEANINGFUL WHEN THE NETWORK PRAC
TICE REQUIRES SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE -ULTI
PHASE FAULTS WILL ALWAYS RESULT IN THREE POLE CLEAR
ANCE )F THE !2 FUNCTION IS NOT READY TO CARRY OUT AN
AUTO RECLOSURE CYCLE SEE 3ECTION THREE
POLE CLEARANCES WILL ALWAYS RESULT )F SINGLE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURE IS NOT AVAILABLE EACH CLEARANCE WILL
EQUALLY BE THREE POLE )F AN EXTERNAL !2 RELAY IS
USED THE TRIPPING COMMAND CAN ALSO BE COUPLED
THREE POLE VIA A BINARY INPUT
-OREOVER EXTERNAL BINARY INPUTS CAN BE USED TO RE
LEASE THE OVERREACH ZONES :" ANDOR :,
&IGURE ILLUSTRATES THE BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TRIP
PING LOGIC
4HE INTEGRATED SWITCH ONTO FAULT LOGIC 3ECTION
CAN BE SET TO ACTIVATE EITHER ZONE :" DIREC
TIONAL OR NON DIRECTIONAL OR FAULT DETECTION NON
DIRECTIONAL AND NON DELAYED
&OR THE ISSUE OF TRIPPING COMMANDS TO THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER APPROPRIATELY POWERFUL TRIPPING RELAYS ARE
PROVIDED EACH WITH TWO CLOSING CONTACTS 4HE TRIP
PING RELAYS ARE AUTOMATICALLY RESET WHEN THE FAULT
DETECTOR RESETS AND THE FAULT CURRENT HAS BEEN
SWITCHED OFF RESET OF MINIMUM CURRENT MONITOR
). 5P TO THAT POINT THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT MUST BE
BROKEN BY AN AUXILIARY CONTACT ON THE CIRCUIT BREAKER

-ETHOD OF OPERATION

3WITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
)F ONE SWITCHES A DEAD BUT SHORT CIRCUITED LINE ONTO A

LIVE BUS BAR IT IS ESSENTIAL IN GENERAL THAT THIS LINE
BE IMMEDIATELY DISCONNECTED 5SING DISTANCE PRO
TECTION ALONE HOWEVER DISCONNECTION FOR FAULTS
CLOSE TO EITHER LINE END IS NOT ALWAYS POSSIBLE FOR A
THREE PHASE FAULT AT THE LOCATION OF A RELAY AN ACCU
RATE MEASURED VOLTAGE FOR CORRECT DIRECTIONAL DETER
MINATION WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE AVAILABLE WHEN THE
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE CONNECTED ON THE LINE SIDE
EVEN STORED VOLTAGE VALUES ARE NOT AVAILABLE )F THE
FAULT IS AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END DISTANCE PROTECTION
WILL OPERATE ONLY AFTER A TIME DELAY
&OR CLOSE UP FAULTS THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WILL DE
CIDE ON FORWARDS AFTER CONNECTION OF THE LINE WHEN
THE VOLTAGE SIGNAL IS MISSING 4HUS INSTANTANEOUS
TRIP BY THE FIRST ZONE IS POSSIBLE
4O BE SURE OF AN IMMEDIATE DISCONNECTION UNDER ANY
CONDITION AND ESPECIALLY WHEN SWITCHING ONTO BOLTED
FAULT THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FROM THE DISCREP
ANCY SWITCH CAN BE REPEATED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO
CAUSE AN IMMEDIATE TRIP SIGNAL WHEN A FAULT IS DE
TECTED WITHIN AN ADJUSTABLE TIME &IGURE 4HE
FAULT IS CLEARED EITHER WITH PICK UP OF OVERREACHING
ZONE :" DIRECTIONAL AS ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE OR
PICK UP OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" NON DIRECTION
AL OR PICK UP OF THE FAULT DETECTOR SELECTABLE WITH
OUT DELAY
4HE INTEGRATED SWITCH ONTO FAULT LOGIC OF 3!
AUTOMATICALLY DISTINGUISHES BETWEEN AN EXTERNAL
CONTROL COMMAND AND AN AUTOMATIC AUTO RECLOSE
COMMAND BY MEANS OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
CIRCUITS SO THAT THE BINARY INPUT MANUAL CLOSE CAN
BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE CONTROL CIRCUIT OF THE
CLOSING COIL OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER )F HOWEVER EXTER
NAL CLOSING COMMANDS ARE POSSIBLE WHICH THE
SWITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION SHALL NOT OPERATE EG
EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICES THE BINARY INPUT
MANUAL CLOSE MUST BE TRIGGERED BY A SEPARATE AUX
ILIARY CONTACT ON THE DISCREPANCY SWITCH
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
&AULT
DIREC
TION
$IREC
POLE TRIP
22
88
$IREC
&AULT DETECTION
PERMITTED
4
, , ,
, , ,
22
88
4RIP ,
4
42)00/, :
9%3
./

4RIP ,
, , ,
$IREC

22
88
$IR"
4
'EN FAULT
22"
MULTI
88"
4RIP ,
4"
PHASE

")
40
2!2

THREE
POLE
'EN FAULT
-#
$IR,
4RIP ,
22,
4,
88,

$IREC
$IRECTION SET FOR ZONE

: ETC
$!2
22
$IR&$
88
'EN
&AULT
&AULT IN ZONE ETC
4
4IME 4 ETC EXPIRED
")
#ONTROL SIGNAL VIA BINARY INPUT
40
#ONTROL SIGNAL FROM TELE

PROTECTION LOGIC
4
40

2!2
#ONTROL SIGNAL FROM

AUTO
RECLOSE LOGIC 2AP
ID !2 FIRST SHOT
4
40
#ONTROL SIGNAL FROM

AUTO

-#
&IGURE
$!2
RECLOSE LOGIC
$ELAYED !2 FURTHER SHOTS

-#
-ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND
3CHEMATIC BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TRIPPING LOGIC OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
,INE
%ARTHING
DISCONNECTOR
:"
4RIP
#LOSE
$ISCREPANCY
SWITCH
-#
02/,
3!
#IRCUIT
BREAKER
,
,
"US
BAR
,
&IGURE

&UNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF THE SWITCH ONTO FAULT PROTECTION
$EFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT AND EMERGENCY PROTECTION
3! PROVIDES AN OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HIS

FEATURE MAY FOR EXAMPLE BE USEFUL WHEN DURING
FIRST COMMISSIONING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER OUTPUT IS
NOT AVAILABLE
4HE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION MAY ALSO COME AUTOMATI
CALLY INTO OPERATION WHEN THE MEASURED VOLTAGE IS
NOT AVAILABLE EG DURING SHORT CIRCUIT OR AN INTER
RUPTION IN THE 64 CIRCUITS
/VERCURRENT PROTECTION BACKS UP THE DISTANCE PRO
TECTION WHEN FAILURE OF THE MEASURED VOLTAGES IS DE
TECTED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
OPERATION OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR REFER 3ECTION
OR THE SIGNAL 64 MCB TRIPPED IS APPLIED TO
AN INPUT RELAY

)F EITHER OF THESE FACTORS OCCURS DISTANCE PROTECTION

IS IMMEDIATELY BLOCKED AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION MAY BECOME OPERATIVE SELECTABLE
5NDER THIS CONDITION SELECTIVITY CAN ONLY BE
ACHIEVED BY TIME DELAY JUST AS FOR ALL TYPES OF OVER
CURRENT PROTECTION SCHEME
!S SOON AS THE DEVICE RECOGNIZES THAT THE MEASURED
VOLTAGES HAVE REAPPEARED THE SYSTEM SWITCHES
BACK TO DISTANCE PROTECTION
&OR FURTHER DETAILS REFER TO 3ECTION
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
-EASURES TO BE TAKEN IN THE CASE OF POWER SWINGS OPTIONAL WITH

IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
!FTER DYNAMIC OCCURRENCES SUCH AS LOAD FLUCTUA

TIONS SHORT CIRCUITS AUTO RECLOSURES OR SWITCHING
OPERATIONS THE GENERATORS MAY HAVE TO ADJUST TO THE
NEW LOAD CONDITIONS IN THE NETWORK 4HE DISTANCE
PROTECTION REGISTERS THE HIGH EQUALIZING CURRENTS AND
IN PARTICULAR IN THE ELECTRICAL CENTRE REDUCED VOLT
AGES DURING POWER SWINGS &IGURE 3MALL VOLT
AGES WITH SIMULTANEOUSLY HIGH CURRENTS SIMULATE AP
PARENTLY SMALL IMPEDANCES WHICH CAN LEAD TO TRIP
PING )N EXTENSIVE NETWORKS WHICH CARRY HIGH LOADS
EVEN THE STABILITY OF THE ENERGY TRANSFER CAN BE EN
DANGERED BY SUCH POWER SWINGS
%
%
)
5
%
% %
)
8
&IGURE
%
AT MEASURING POINT -
0OWER SWING
)N ORDER TO PREVENT UNCONTROLLED TRIPPING THE DIS

TANCE PROTECTION DEVICES ARE PROVIDED WITH POWER
SWING BLOCKING DEVICES )N CERTAIN STRATEGIC LOCA
TIONS WITHIN THE NETWORK OUT OF STEP TRIPPING DE
VICES ARE INSTALLED SO THAT THE NETWORK CAN BE SPLIT
INTO PART NETWORKS IN THE CASE OF LOSS OF SYNCHRONISM
DUE TO STRONG UNSTABLE POWER SWINGS
)N MODELS WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTOR THE PROTEC
TION RELAY 3! CAN BE EQUIPPED WITH A POWERFUL
POWER SWING SUPPLEMENTARY FUNCTION DEPENDENT OF
THE ORDERED MODEL WHICH PREVENTS TRIPPING BY THE
DISTANCE PROTECTION DURING POWER SWINGS POWER
SWING BLOCKING BUT ALSO ALLOWS TRIPPING AT PREDETER
MINED LOCATIONS IN THE CASE OF UNSTABLE POWER
SWINGS OUT OF STEP TRIPPING
# ' #

$ETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
0OWER SWINGS ARE THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL OCCUR

RENCES 4HE FIRST PREREQUISITE IS THEREFORE THE AB
SENCE OF ANY EARTH FAULT AND THE SYMMETRY OF THE
MEASURED IMPEDANCES !S LONG AS THE EARTH FAULT
DETECTION HAS PICKED UP SEE 3ECTION OR THE
THREE IMPEDANCES PHASE PHASE DIFFER FROM EACH
OTHER BY MORE THAN POWER SWINGS ARE NOT DE
TECTED !SYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUITS IE ALL ONE
PHASE AND TWO PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS CAN THEREFORE
NOT RESULT IN PICK UP OF THE POWER SWING BLOCKING
FUNCTION %VEN WHEN A POWER SWING HAS BEEN RECOG
NIZED THE FOLLOWING ASYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT CUR
RENTS LEAD TO FAST RELEASE OF THE POWER SWING BLOCK
ING FUNCTION AND RENDER POSSIBLE TRIPPING BY THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION
)N ORDER TO DETECT A POWER SWING THE RATE OF CHANGE
OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IS MEASURED "ECAUSE OF
THE SYMMETRY CONDITIONS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO LIMIT THE
POWER SWING DETECTION TO ONE LOOP , , 4HE
MEASUREMENT COMMENCES WHEN THE IMPEDANCE
VECTOR MOVES INTO THE POWER SWING POLYGON 00/,
SEE &IGURE )N THE CASE OF A THREE PHASE SHORT
CIRCUIT THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IMMEDIATELY MOVES
INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON !0/, (OWEVER IN
THE CASE OF A POWER SWING THE APPARENT IMPEDANCE
VECTOR FIRST MOVES INTO THE POWER SWING POLYGON
00/, AND LATER INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
!0/, )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE FOR THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR
TO ENTER AND LEAVE THE POWER SWING POLYGON WITHOUT
MOVING INTO THE FAULT DETECTION POLYGON )F THE IM
PEDANCE VECTOR MOVES THROUGH THE WHOLE AREA REP
RESENTED BY THE POWER SWING POLYGON THEN PARTS OF
THE NETWORK SEEN FROM THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAVE
BECOME ASYNCHRONOUS THE TRANSFER OF ENERGY
HAS BECOME UNSTABLE
)F THE RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR IS
SMALLER THAN A SELECTABLE VALUE D2DT A POWER
SWING IS RECOGNIZED 4HE MEASURING TIME OF THE
POWER SWING DETECTOR IS COORDINATED WITH THE DIS
TANCE BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON 00/, AND FAULT
DETECTION POLYGON !0/, SO THAT THE POWER SWING IS
DETECTED BEFORE THE VECTOR MOVES INTO THE FAULT DE
TECTION POLYGON

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
8
00/,
00/, !0/,
!0/,
8!

2!
00/,
!0/,
&IGURE

00/,
0OWER SWING POLYGON
!0/,
&AULT DETECTION POLYGON
0ICK UP CHARACTERISTIC FOR THE DETECTION OF POWER SWINGS
0OWER SWING BLOCKING
7HEN THE CRITERIA FOR POWER SWING DETECTION HAVE

BEEN MET THEN THE FOLLOWING REACTIONS ARE POSSIBLE
SETTABLE FOR POWER SWING BLOCKING
"LOCKING OF THE FIRST STAGE ONLY
4HE FIRST STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION : AND
:" CANNOT TRIP &AULTS FROM THE SECOND STAGE
ONWARDS 4 EXPIRED ARE TRIPPED AFTER THEIR DELAY
TIME
"LOCKING OF ALL STAGES BUT THE FIRST
/NLY THE FIRST STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION :
OR :" IS AVAILABLE (IGHER STAGES ARE NOT AVAIL
ABLE
"LOCKING OF ALL STAGES
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED WITH ALL OF ITS
STAGES

/UT OF STEP TRIPPING
7HEN THE CRITERIA FOR POWER SWING DETECTION ARE MET

AND WHEN OUT OF STEP TRIPPING IS SELECTED THEN
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WITH ALL OF ITS STAGES IS
BLOCKED IN ORDER TO PREVENT TRIPPING BY THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION
7HEN THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR LEAVES THE POWER SWING
POLYGON THE VECTOR IS CHECKED BY ITS 2 COMPON
ENT )F THE 2 COMPONENT STILL HAS THE SAME SIGN AS AT
THE POINT OF ENTRY THEN THE POWER SWING IS IN THE PRO
CESS OF STABILIZING /THERWISE THE VECTOR HAS PASSED
THROUGH THE POLYGON LOSS OF SYNCHRONISM CASE
IN &IGURE 4HE DEVICE ISSUES A TRIPPING COM
MAND OF ADJUSTABLE DURATION 4HE OUT OF STEP TRIP
IS ANNOUNCED 4HE IMPEDANCE VECTOR MUST HAVE
PASSED THROUGH THE POWER SWING POLYGON WITHIN AN
ACTIVE TIME WHICH IS IDENTICAL WITH 03 4 !#4
4HE SELECTED REACTION REMAINS EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE

MEASURED IMPEDANCE VECTOR LEAVES THE POWER
SWING POLYGON 00/, OR WHEN DUE TO EARTH FAULT
PICK UP OR ASYMMETRY THE POWER SWING CRITERIA ARE
NO LONGER MET 4HE ACTION TIME OF THE POWER SWING
BLOCKING DEVICE CAN ALSO BE LIMITED BY A SELECTABLE
TIME 03 4 !#4

# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
3HORT CIRCUITS ON THE PROTECTED LINE WHICH LIE BEYOND

THE FIRST DISTANCE ZONE CAN BE SELECTIVELY CLEARED BY
DISTANCE PROTECTION ONLY AFTER A DELAY TIME &OR LINE
LENGTHS WHICH ARE SHORTER THAN THE SHORTEST REASON
ABLE DISTANCE SETTING SHORT CIRCUITS CAN EQUALLY NOT
BE SELECTIVELY CLEARED INSTANTANEOUSLY
4HUS TO ACHIEVE INSTANTANEOUS CLEARANCE OF ALL
FAULTS FOR OF LINE LENGTH 3! CAN EXCHANGE
AND PROCESS INFORMATION FROM THE OPPOSITE END STA
TION BY THE USE OF AN INCORPORATED TELEPROTECTION IN
TERFACE &OR THIS PURPOSE THE RELAY HAS TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT AND RECEIVER INPUT
$ISTINCTION IS MADE BETWEEN PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH
TRANSFER TRIP MODES 0544 AND PERMISSIVE OVER
REACH COMPARISON TRANSFER MODES 0/44
&OR UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIPPING THE RELAY IS SET WITH
NORMAL DISCRIMINATION STEPS )F A TRIPPING COMMAND
IS GIVEN IN THE FIRST ZONE THIS IS TRANSMITTED TO THE OTH
ER LINE END THROUGH A TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM 4HERE
THE RECEIVED SIGNAL WILL CAUSE INTERTRIPPING AS LONG
AS THE RELAY AT THAT END HAS PICKED UP OR HAS RECOG
NIZED A FAULT IN ITS OVERREACHING ZONE 3! PER
MITS
UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA FAULT DETECTION ZONE
&$ NON DIRECTIONAL
UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA OVERREACH ZONE :"
ACCELERATION DIRECTIONAL
&OR THE COMPARISON OVERREACH TRANSFER MODES THE
RELAY WILL ALREADY INCORPORATE A FAST OVERREACH ZONE
4HIS CAN HOWEVER GIVE A TRIP SIGNAL ONLY WHEN A FAULT
IS ALSO DETECTED AT THE OTHER LINE END IN AN OVERREACH
ZONE %ITHER A RELEASE OR A BLOCKING SIGNAL CAN BE
TRANSMITTED
$ISTINCTION IS MADE BETWEEN
2ELEASE MODES
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER WITH OVERREACH
ZONE :"
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON TRANSFER WITH FAULT DETEC
TION
# ' #
:ONE :" COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE

$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE WITH
FAULT DETECTION
"LOCKING MODE
"LOCKING OF THE OVERREACH ZONE :"
0ILOT WIRE MODES
:ONE :" OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP VIA PILOT
4HE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRE IS PARTICULARLY USEFUL IN
CABLE NETWORKS WITH SHORT DISTANCES (ERE THE INFOR
MATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE LINE ENDS CAN BE
MADE VIA ONE PILOT WIRE PAIR OR CONTROL CORES USING
DIRECT CURRENT 4HE REVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEME
WORKS WITH DC CONTROL SIGNALS TOO
&OR THE OTHER TELEPROTECTION MODES A VOICE FREQUEN
CY CHANNEL IS MOST FREQUENTLY USED EG 3IEMENS
TRANSMISSION DEVICE 374 & WITH FREQUENCY
SHIFT MODULATION 4HE VOICE FREQUENCY IS TRANSMITTED
VIA TELEPHONE CABLE POWER LINE CARRIER OR RADIO
TRANSMISSION !LTERNATIVELY THE SIGNALS CAN BE TRANS
MITTED VIA OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTIONS
)F A FAULT OCCURS IN THE RECEIVING DEVICE OR ON THE
TRANSMISSION LINK THE RECEIVER LOGIC OF THE UNIVERSAL
TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE CAN BE BLOCKED BY THE INPUT
OF A BINARY SIGNAL WITHOUT AFFECTING THE NORMAL DIS
TANCE PROTECTION GRADING -EASUREMENT RANGE CON
TROL RELEASE OF ZONE :" CAN THEN BE TRANSFERRED TO
THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SEE ALSO 3ECTION
OR THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION CAN BE BLOCKED
3INCE IN 3! ALL ZONES OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY IT
IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO GIVE RAPID TRIP IN : WITHOUT RECEIPT
OF A RELEASE SIGNAL OR WITH A BLOCKING SIGNAL PRESENT
IN THE COMPARISON MODES )F INSTANTANEOUS TRIP IS NOT
DESIRED EG FOR EXTREMELY SHORT LINES FOR REASONS OF
SELECTIVITY THEN ZONE : MUST BE DELAYED BY TIME
STAGE 4
7HEN EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION IS OPERAT
ING THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE FUNCTION IS
OUT OF OPERATION

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER

TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION

*UST AS FOR A PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH

FAULT DETECTION THE TRIPPING SIGNAL OF DISTANCE ZONE
: WILL TRANSMIT AN INTERTRIP SIGNAL TO THE OPPOSITE LINE
END IF DESIRED DELAYED BY 4D 4HERE A TRIP COM
MAND IS GIVEN WHEN THE FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED IN
ZONE :" IN THE SET DIRECTION 4HE DIFFERENCE BE
TWEEN PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRIP WITH FAULT DETEC
TION AND ZONE :" ACCELERATION IS THAT AT THE RECEIV
ING END THE TRIPPING AREA IS DEFINED BY THE EXTENDED
ZONE :" DIRECTIONAL 4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT
SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4S THE DURATION OF THE RE
CEIVE SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4R
7ITH A FAULT IN ZONE : AN INTERTRIP SIGNAL IS TRANS

MITTED TO THE OPPOSITE END OF THE LINE 4HIS CAN BE
DELAYED BY 4D 4HE SIGNAL RECEIVED THERE WILL RESULT IN
A TRIP AS LONG AS THE RELEVANT PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS
PICKED UP FAULT DETECTION &$ 4HE DURATION OF THE
TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4S PROGRAM
MABLE IN ORDER TO MATCH WITH DIFFERENT PICK UP
TIMES OF THE RELAYS AT THE LINE ENDS 4HE DURATION OF
THE RECEIVE SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED BY 4R
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME OF THIS
FUNCTION

FUNCTION
)N THIS OPERATING MODE THE OVERREACH ZONE :" IS OF

NO IMPORTANCE FOR THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTER
FACE BUT IT CAN BE INITIATED BY THE AUTO RECLOSURE
FUNCTION SEE 3ECTION
&AULT DETECTION
)F THE TRANSMISSION LINK IS FAULTY THE OVERREACH ZONE

:" CAN BE INITIATED BY THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION
SEE 3ECTION
:
&AULT DETECTION
:

:ONE ACCELERATION WITH :"
:
4D
4S
&AULT DETECTION
&AULT DETECTION
4S
4
DIREC
4
&LTDET
&LTDET

4RIP

4RIP
&URTHER
&URTHER
ZONES
ZONES
4R
4R
:
&AULT IN FIRST DISTANCE ZONE
4
$ELAY OF FIRST ZONE NORMALLY
&ORWDIREC
&AULT IN PARAMETERIZED DIRECTION
4D
$ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
4RANSMITTER
4S
0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
2ECEIVER
4R
0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL

&ORW
DIREC
&IGURE
:
4D
&ORW
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP &$ ACCELERATION
BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
:
&AULT DETECTION
:"
&AULT DET
:"
:
:"
&AULT DET
&AULT DETECTION
4D
:
:
4S
4S
4D
4
:"
4
4"
4"
&ORW
DIREC

4RIP

4RIP
&URTHER
DIREC
&URTHER
ZONES
ZONES
4R
4R
:
&AULT IN FIRST DISTANCE ZONE
4
$ELAY OF FIRST ZONE NORMALLY
:"
&AULT IN OVERREACH ZONE :"
4"
$ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE :" NORMALLY
&ORWDIREC
4D
4RANSMITTER
4S
2ECEIVER
4R
0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL
&IGURE

&ORW
:ONE ACCELERATION :"
BLOCK SCHEME
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :"
4HE PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP FUNCTION USES

A PERMISSIVE RELEASE PRINCIPLE :ONE :" IS OF SIGNIFI
CANCE AS IT IS SET TO INCLUDE THE NEXT STATION AND BE
YOND 4HIS METHOD OF SIGNAL COMPARISON CAN ALSO BE
USED FOR EXTREMELY SHORT LINE LENGTHS WHEN A SETTING
TO OF THE LINE LENGTH AND THEREFORE SELECTIVE IM
MEDIATE DISCONNECTION IS NOT POSSIBLE )N THE LATTER
CASE :ONE : HAS TO BE DELAYED BY 4 BECAUSE IT
WILL OPERATE INDEPENDENT OF RECEIPT OF A SIGNAL
# ' #
&IGURE SHOWS A SIMPLIFIED BLOCK SCHEME

)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION DETECTS A FAULT WITHIN THE
OVERREACH ZONE :" A RELEASE SIGNAL IS SENT TO THE
OPPOSITE LINE END IF DESIRED DELAYED BY 4D )F A RE
LEASE SIGNAL IS ALSO RECEIVED FROM THE OPPOSITE END OF
THE LINE THE TRIPPING COMMAND IS TRANSMITTED TO THE
COMMAND RELAY 0REREQUISITE FOR IMMEDIATE DISCON
NECTION IS THEREFORE THE DETECTION OF A FAULT WITHIN
ZONE :" FROM BOTH LINE ENDS IN THE PARAMETERIZED
DIRECTION

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED

BY 4S PROGRAMMABLE BUT THIS PROLONGATION IS EFFEC
TIVE ONLY AFTER THE PROTECTION HAS ISSUED A TRIP COM
MAND 4HIS ENSURES THE REMOTE LINE END TO BE RE
LEASED ALSO IN CASE THE LOCAL LINE END IS TRIPPED VERY
QUICKLY BY THE INDEPENDENT FIRST DISTANCE ZONE
CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE !2 FUNCTION SEE 3EC

TION
&ALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
SIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL
FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF FLOW AFTER INTERRUP
TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE RENDERED HARMLESS
BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION REFER 3ECTION

&OR THE OTHER ZONES : : : TRIPPING OCCURS

WITHOUT RELEASE FROM THE OPPOSITE LINE END SO THAT
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION WORKS NORMALLY EVEN WITHOUT
TRANSMISSION
&OR LINES WHICH ARE FED FROM ONE LINE END ONLY NO RE
LEASE SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE UNFED LINE END
SINCE NO PICK UP CAN OCCUR THERE )N ORDER TO
ACHIEVE EVEN IN THIS CASE IMMEDIATE TRIPPING OVER
OF THE LINE LENGTH AN ADDITIONAL ECHO FUNCTION
IS AVAILABLE SEE 3ECTION
)F THE TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A

TRANSMISSION FAULT IS DETECTED THE RECEIVING END LOG
IC CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE BY THE INPUT OF A BINARY
SIGNAL $ISTANCE PROTECTION THEN OPERATES WITH NOR
MAL GRADING RAPID TRIP IN : /VERREACH ZONE :"
:
&AULT DETECTION
:"
&AULT DET
:"
:"
&AULT DET
&AULT DETECTION
:
4D
:"
4D
4"
4"
&ORW
DIREC
4S
4S

4RIP

4RIP
&ORW
DIREC
: AND
: AND
FURTHER
FURTHER
ZONES
ZONES
:"
4"
$ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE NORMALLY
&ORWDIREC
4D
4RANSMITTER
4S
2ECEIVER
&IGURE

0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP RELEASE OF :"
BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FAULT DETECTION ZONE RELEASE
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON ALSO PERFORMS A TRANSFER RE

LEASE FUNCTION
)F THE TRANSMISSION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A FAULT

IS DETECTED THIS WILL ONLY BLOCK THE DIRECTIONAL COM
PARISON FUNCTION VIA THE INPUT CHANNEL 2ECEPTION
FAULTY
)F THE RELAY DETECTS A FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION IT SENDS

AFTER A SETTABLE TIME TD IF DESIRED A RELEASE SIGNAL TO
THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END AND WHEN A CORRE
SPONDING CONFIRMATION SIGNAL IS RECEIVED ISSUES THE
TRIPPING SIGNAL 4HE DISTANCE GRADING OPERATES INDE
PENDENTLY OF THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON


4HE DURATION OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL CAN BE INCREASED

BY 4S PROGRAMMABLE BUT THIS PROLONGATION IS EFFEC
TIVE ONLY AFTER THE PROTECTION HAS ISSUED A TRIP COM
MAND 4HIS ENSURES THE REMOTE LINE END TO BE RE
LEASED ALSO IN CASE THE LOCAL LINE END IS TRIPPED VERY
QUICKLY BY THE INDEPENDENT FIRST DISTANCE ZONE
&AULT DETECTION
:
&AULT DETECTION
&LTDET
&ORW
DIREC
:
4D
&AULT DETECTION
&AULT DETECTION
4S
4S
4RIP

4RIP
&LTDET
4D

&ORW
DIREC
: AND
: AND
FURTHER
FURTHER
ZONES
ZONES
4RANSMITTER
4D
2ECEIVER
4S
&IGURE
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON
# ' #
BLOCK SCHEME

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HE UNBLOCK MODE IS A RELEASING PROCEDURE :ONE

:" IS SET TO REACH BEYOND THE NEXT STATION 4HE DIF
FERENCE FROM PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH
:" 3ECTION IS THAT A TRIP COMMAND IS ALSO
POSSIBLE WHEN NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE
OPPOSITE END )T IS THEREFORE PRINCIPALLY USED FOR LONG
LINES WHEN THE SIGNAL HAS TO BE TRANSMITTED OVER THE
PROTECTED LINE USING A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING
OF THE TRANSMITTED SIGNAL CAN BE SO LARGE AT THE POINT
OF FAULT THAT ITS RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT
BE UNCONDITIONALLY GUARANTEED &OR THIS PARTICULAR
CASE A SPECIAL UNBLOCKING LOGIC COMES INTO OPERA
TION
&OR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION ONE REQUIRES TWO SIGNAL FRE

QUENCIES WHICH ARE SHIFTED OVER FROM THE TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT IN 3! )F THE 0,# SYSTEM INCORPORATES
CHANNEL MONITORING EG 3IEMENS VOICE FREQUENCY
UNIT 374 & THEN THE MONITORING FREQUENCY F IS
SWITCHED TO A WORKING FREQUENCY )F THE RELAY DETECTS
A FAULT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" IT INITIATES
TRANSMISSION OF THE WORKING FREQUENCY F5 UNBLOCK
ING FREQUENCY CAN BE DELAYED BY 4D 5NDER NORMAL
CONDITIONS OR WITH A FAULT OUTSIDE THE :" ZONE OR IN
THE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THAT SET THE MONITORING FRE
QUENCY F IS TRANSMITTED )F THE TRANSMISSION CHANNEL
IS DISTORTED THE RECEIVER UNIT WILL ISSUE THE FAULT SIGNAL
& 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND FAULT SIGNAL PASS THROUGH AN
UNBLOCKING LOGIC CIRCUIT WHICH CAN BE SEEN IN &IGURE


FUNCTION
:
&AULT DETECTION
:"
&AULT DET
:"
:"
&AULT DET
:
:"
4D
4"
&ORW
DIREC
4S
4S

4RIP

4RIP
&ORW
DIREC
: AND
: AND
FURTHER
FURTHER
ZONES
2
5NBLOCK
LOGIC
5
&
&
5NBLOCK
4"
$ELAY OF OVERREACH ZONE NORMALLY
&ORWDIREC
4D
4RANSMITTER
4S
2ECEIVER
ZONES
2
LOGIC
:"

4"
&IGURE
&AULT DETECTION
4D
BLOCK SCHEME
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
)F THE UNBLOCKING SIGNAL 5 IS FAULTLESSLY RECEIVED THEN

THE RELEASE SIGNAL 2 IS FORMED IN &IGURE UPPER
SIGNAL ROUTE THAT IS THE TRIPPING SIGNAL OF ZONE :"
IS FORWARDED TO THE TRIPPING RELAY AS WITH OVERREACH
TRANSFER WITH :" )F FAULT SIGNAL & APPEARS NO RE
LEASE IS GIVEN
)F THE TRANSMISSION DEVICE HAS NO CHANNEL SUPERVI

SION FACILITY BUT ONLY DEMODULATES THE TWO FREQUEN
CIES UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY AND BLOCKING FREQUEN
CY THE FAULT SIGNAL & CAN BE PRODUCED BY A SIMPLE
LOGIC ACCORDING TO &IGURE )NSTEAD OF THE !.$
GATE AN EXCLUSIVE /2 GATE CAN BE INCORPORATED
3TANDING TRANSMISSION FAULTS WILL BE RECOGNIZED BY
3! AFTER APPROXIMATELY S AND ANNUNCIATED
)F THE SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED DOES NOT REACH THE OTH

ER LINE END BECAUSE A SHORT CIRCUIT ON THE LINE CAUSES
EXCESSIVE DAMPING OR REFLECTION OF THE SIGNAL THE RE
CEIVER RECOGNIZES A FAULT AND ISSUES FAULT SIGNAL & )N
THIS CASE AFTER A SAFETY DELAY TIME OF MS RELEASE
SIGNAL 2 IS DISPATCHED BUT BY THE TIME STAGE
MS IT IS CANCELLED AFTER A FURTHER MS
7HEN THE FAULT SIGNAL DISAPPEARS AGAIN THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION IS REESTABLISHED AFTER ANOTHER MS
RESET DELAY OF TIME STAGE MS THAT IS THE
UPPER RELEASE ROUTE IN &IGURE IS AGAIN AVAILABLE


&OR ALL ZONES WITH THE EXCEPTION OF :" TRIPPING IS

PERMITTED WITHOUT RELEASE SO THAT THE RELAY OPERATES
INDEPENDENT OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 4HE OVERREACH
ZONE :" CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE AUTOMATIC
RECLOSING SYSTEM SEE 3ECTION
&AULT DETECTION
:
&AULT DETECTION
&LTDET
&ORW
DIREC
:
4D
&AULT DETECTION
&AULT DETECTION
4S
4S
4RIP
&ORW

4RIP
DIREC
: AND
: AND
FURTHER
FURTHER
ZONES
2
5NBLOCK
LOGIC
5
&
&
5NBLOCK
4RANSMITTER
4D
2ECEIVER
4S
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION
# ' #
ZONES
2
LOGIC
&IGURE
&LTDET
4D

BLOCK SCHEME

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$IRECTIONAL UNBLOCKING MODE WITH FAULT DETECTION
4HE UNBLOCKING MODE IS A RELEASE PROCEDURE 4HE

DIFFERENCE FROM DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROCEDURES
3ECTION IS THAT A TRIPPING SIGNAL IS ALSO POSSI
BLE WHEN NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE OP
POSITE END )T IS THEREFORE PRINCIPALLY USED FOR LONG
LINES WHEN THE SIGNAL MUST BE TRANSMITTED OVER THE
PROTECTED LINE BY A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING OF
THE TRANSMITTED SIGNAL AT THE POINT OF FAULT IS SO LARGE
THAT RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT BE UNCON
DITIONALLY GUARANTEED )N THIS CASE A SPECIAL UN
BLOCKING LOGIC COMES INTO OPERATION
FUNCTION
&OR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION ONE REQUIRES TWO SIGNAL FRE
QUENCIES WHICH ARE SHIFTED OVER FROM THE TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT IN 3! )F THE 0,# SYSTEM INCORPORATES
CHANNEL MONITORING EG 3IEMENS VOICE FREQUENCY
UNIT 374 & THEN THE MONITORING FREQUENCY F IS
SWITCHED TO A WORKING FREQUENCY )F THE RELAY DETECTS
A FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION IT INITIATES TRANSMISSION OF
THE WORKING FREQUENCY F5 UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY
CAN BE DELAYED 5NDER NORMAL CONDITIONS OR WITH A
FAULT IN THE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THAT SET THE MONITOR
ING FREQUENCY F IS TRANSMITTED )F THE TRANSMISSION
CHANNEL IS DISTORTED THE RECEIVER UNIT WILL ISSUE THE
FAULT SIGNAL & 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND FAULT SIGNAL PASS
THROUGH AN UNBLOCKING LOGIC CIRCUIT WHICH CAN BE
SEEN IN &IGURE
FAULT IN LINE DIRECTION AS WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARI

SON )F FAULT SIGNAL & APPEARS NO RELEASE IS GIVEN
)F THE SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED DOES NOT REACH THE OTH
ER LINE END BECAUSE A SHORT CIRCUIT ON THE LINE CAUSES
EXCESSIVE DAMPING OR REFLECTION OF THE SIGNAL THE RE
CEIVER RECOGNIZES A FAULT AND ISSUES FAULT SIGNAL & )N
THIS CASE AFTER A SAFETY DELAY TIME OF MS RELEASE
SIGNAL 2 IS DISPATCHED BUT BY THE TIME STAGE
MS IT IS CANCELLED AFTER A FURTHER MS
7HEN THE FAULT SIGNAL DISAPPEARS AGAIN THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION IS REESTABLISHED AFTER ANOTHER MS
RESET DELAY OF TIME STAGE MS THAT IS THE
UPPER RELEASE ROUTE IN &IGURE IS AGAIN AVAILABLE
)F THE TRANSMISSION DEVICE HAS NO CHANNEL SUPERVI
SION FACILITY BUT ONLY DEMODULATES THE TWO FREQUEN
CIES UNBLOCKING FREQUENCY AND BLOCKING FREQUEN
CY THE FAULT SIGNAL & CAN BE PRODUCED BY A SIMPLE
LOGIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH &IGURE )NSTEAD OF THE
!.$ GATE AN EXCLUSIVE /2 GATE CAN BE INCORPO
RATED 3TANDING TRANSMISSION FAULTS WILL BE RECOG
NIZED BY 3! AFTER APPROXIMATELY S AND AN
NUNCIATED
5NBLOCK FREQUENCY
"LOCK FREQUENCY
&IGURE
5
&

&IGURE

MS
&
0RODUCING THE FAULT SIGNAL &

MS
5NBLOCKING ,OGIC
)F THE UNBLOCKING SIGNAL 5 IS FAULTLESSLY RECEIVED THEN

THE RELEASE SIGNAL 2 IS FORMED IN &IGURE UPPER
SIGNAL ROUTE THAT IS AN UNDELAYED TRIPPING SIGNAL
CAN BE FORWARDED TO THE TRIPPING RELAY FOR A DETECTED



# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
"LOCKING MODE
)N THE BLOCKING PROCEDURE THE TRANSMISSION LINK IS

USED TO SEND A BLOCKING SIGNAL FROM ONE LINE END TO
THE OTHER 4HE SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED WHEN THE RELAY
DETECTS A FAULT IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION
BEEN CAUSED BY TRANSIENT OSCILLATIONS AFTER THE INTER

RUPTION OF EXTERNAL FAULTS OR BY REVERSAL OF DIRECTION OF
FLOW AFTER INTERRUPTION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINE 3EE
TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION 3ECTION
)F THE TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL IS MONITORED AND A

TRANSMISSION FAULT IS DETECTED THE RECEIVING END LOG
IC CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE BY THE INPUT OF A BINARY
SIGNAL $ISTANCE PROTECTION THEN OPERATES WITH NOR
MAL GRADING RAPID TRIP IN : /VERREACH ZONE :"
CAN THEN BE INITIATED FROM THE !2 FUNCTION SEE 3EC
TION
&AULTS IN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" WHICH IS SET TO AP

PROXIMATELY OF THE LINE LENGTH LEAD TO A TRIP SIG
NAL AS LONG AS NO BLOCKING SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE
OPPOSITE LINE END "ECAUSE OF POSSIBLE DIFFERENCES
IN THE PICK UP TIMES OF THE RELAYS AT EACH LINE END
AND BECAUSE OF THE TRANSMISSION TIME ZONE :"
MUST BE SOMEWHAT DELAYED WITH TIME 4"
%QUALLY TO AVOID COMPETITION A DISPATCHED SIGNAL
WILL BE LENGTHENED BY THE ADJUSTABLE TIME
4 3%.$ 02, 4S IN &IGURE !LSO THE RECEIVE
SIGNAL WILL BE LENGTHENED BY THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING
TIME 4 42!.3",/ 4" IN &IGURE PROVIDED IT
HAS BEEN RECEIVED FOR THE WAITING TIME 47 4HE
TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AGAIN COMES INTO OPERATION
TO RENDER HARMLESS FAULT SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE
!N INHERENT CHARACTERISTIC OF THE BLOCKING FUNCTION IS

THAT RAPID DISCONNECTION OF SINGLE END FED FAULTS IS
ENSURED EVEN WITHOUT SPECIAL MEASURES SINCE NO
BLOCKING SIGNAL CAN BE FORMED AT THE NON FEEDING
END !LSO THE PROCEDURE IS PARTICULARLY SUITABLE WHEN
THE SIGNAL MUST BE TRANSMITTED VIA THE PROTECTED LINE
USING A 0,# SYSTEM AND THE DAMPING OF THE TRANS
MITTED SIGNAL CAN BE SO LARGE AT THE POINT OF FAULT THAT
ITS RECEIPT FROM THE OTHER LINE END CANNOT BE UNCONDI
TIONALLY GUARANTEED
:"
&AULT DETECTION
:
&AULT DETECTION
&AULT DETECTION
:"
&LTDET
&AULT DETECTION
:
4S
4S
&LTDET
:"
:"
4"
4"
&ORW
DIREC

4RIP
4RIP
&ORW

DIREC
: AND
: AND
FURTHER
FURTHER
ZONES
4"

&IGURE
"LOCKING MODE
# ' #
47
47
ZONES
4"

BLOCK SCHEME

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
/VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON

VIA PILOT WIRES
4HE RECEIVE SIGNALS ARE MAINTAINED AT BOTH LINE ENDS

AND THEREFORE NO TRIP RESULTS 4HE REMAINING DISTANCE
STAGES HOWEVER OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY SO THAT THE
BACK UP PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ARE NOT AFFECTED
)N THIS MODE THE OVERREACH ZONE :" TAKES ON THE

FUNCTION OF THE INSTANTANEOUS STAGE AT BOTH ENDS OF
THE PROTECTED LINE :ONE :" IS SET BEYOND THE NEXT
STATION 4HE COMPARISON FUNCTION PREVENTS NON SE
LECTIVE TRIPPING
&OR LINES SHORTER THAN THE SHORTEST DISTANCE SETTING

ONE MUST NEVERTHELESS OBSERVE THAT THE FIRST DIS
TANCE ZONE SHALL BE SET TO BE EITHER INEFFECTIVE OR THE
TIME 4 SHALL BE SET EQUAL TO THE SECOND DISTANCE
ZONE
4HE INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE TWO LINE

ENDS IS MADE VIA A PILOT WIRE OR CONTROL CORE LOOP
CONNECTED AT EACH END VIA AN AUXILIARY RELAY AND FED
FROM THE DC BATTERY OF ONE OF THE SUBSTATIONS &OR
EACH LINE END AN INTERPOSING RELAY 0! ! IS
THEREFORE NECESSARY &IGURE #ONNECTION DIA
GRAMS ARE INCLUDED IN !PPENDIX "
7ITH SINGLE END FEED INSTANTANEOUS TRIP WILL EQUALLY

BE ACHIEVED FOR THE TOTAL PROTECTED LINE LENGTH 3INCE
NO PICK UP RESULTS AT THE NON FEEDING END THE
LOOP IS NOT INTERRUPTED THERE 7HEN AT THE OTHER END
THE FAULT IS DETECTED WITHIN :" THE LOOP IS AGAIN
CLOSED AND THE TRIP SIGNAL RELEASED
5NDER HEALTHY CONDITIONS THE PILOT WIRES CARRY DIRECT

CURRENT THUS ACHIEVING PILOT WIRE MONITORING "OTH
AUXILIARY RELAYS + ARE ENERGIZED IN CONTRAST TO THE
ILLUSTRATION IN &IGURE
3O THAT SUFFICIENT TIME IS AVAILABLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE

THE PILOT WIRE LOOP BETWEEN PICK UP AND TRIP SIGNAL
FROM THE RELAY 4" MUST BE SLIGHTLY DELAYED )F THE
OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES IS
ACHIEVED WITH TWO DIFFERENT RELAY TYPES AT THE TWO LINE
ENDS EG 3! AT ONE END AND A CONVENTIONAL
RELAY AT THE OTHER IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT POSSIBLE
FUNDAMENTAL DIFFERENCES IN PICK UP AND TRIPPING
TIMES OF BOTH RELAYS DO NOT LEAD TO FALSE RELEASE SIG
NALS 4HIS IS ALSO TO BE COVERED BY THE DELAY TIME
4"
$ISTANCE PROTECTION PICK UP AT EITHER LINE END WILL IN

TERRUPT THE WIRE LOOP VIA THE SEND SIGNAL AND AUXILIARY
RELAY + "OTH + DROP OFF AND BLOCK TRIPPING IN :"
VIA THE RECEIVE SIGNAL )F THE RELAY THEN DETECTS THE
FAULT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" THE SEND SIGNAL
DISAPPEARS AGAIN )F THE LOOP AT THE OPPOSITE END STA
TION IS ALSO CLOSED BY THE SAME PROCEDURE RELAYS +
ARE ENERGIZED AGAIN AND AS A RESULT THE RECEIVE SIG
NALS DISAPPEAR AND TRIPPING IS RELEASED AT BOTH LINE
ENDS
4HE NORMALLY CLOSED DC PILOT WIRE LOOP ALLOWS CON

TINUOUS MONITORING OF THE PILOT WIRES 3INCE WITH
EACH LINE FAULT THE LOOP IS INTERRUPTED THE PILOT WIRE
INTERRUPTION SIGNAL IS DELAYED FOR SECONDS 4HE
COMPARISON FUNCTION IS THEN BLOCKED 4HE REMAINING
STAGES OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION CONTINUE TO FUNC
TION NORMALLY 4HE INPUT 2ECEPTION FAULTY ON
3! IS NOT USED BECAUSE A PILOT WIRE FAULT WILL BE
RECOGNIZED WITHIN THE RELAY ITSELF
)F A FAULT OCCURS BEYOND THE PROTECTED LINE THE DC

LOOP WILL BE INTERRUPTED BY FAULT DETECTOR PICK UP OF
THE DEVICES AT BOTH ENDS 3INCE HOWEVER AT LEAST
ONE LINE END WILL NOT DE ENERGIZE THE SEND SIGNAL
FAULT NOT IN ZONE :" IN LINE DIRECTION THE LOOP RE
MAINS OPEN
3UBSTATION !
3!
3UBSTATION "
0!
0!
+

&AULT
:"
DIREC
3IGNAL SEND
4RIP
3
2
3IGNAL SEND
3IGNAL
RECEIVE
&AULT
4"
+
,
+
,
4"
3!
0ILOT
7IRES
4RIP
+
:"
DIREC
,
3IGNAL
,
RECEIVE
&AULT
&IGURE

&AULT
/VERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT WIRES
, ,
0ILOT WIRE LOOP VOLTAGE
, ,
0ROTECTION VOLTAGE
, ,
RESPECTIVE SUBSTATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
)F THE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS INSTALLED AS BACK UP PRO

TECTION IN A SINGLE END FEED TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT THE
DISTANCE RELAY CAN BE USED TO PROVIDE HIGH SPEED
PROTECTION FOR THE BUS BAR WITHOUT ENDANGERING THE
SELECTIVITY FOR THE OUTGOING LINES
$ISTANCE ZONES : AND : THEN SERVE AS BACK UP
STAGES FOR FAULTS ON THE OUTGOING LINES FOR EXAMPLE
AT " AS ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE 4HE DISTANCE ZONE
SETTINGS SHOULD BE BASED ON THE CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE SHORTEST LINE
4HE OVERREACHING ZONE :" WHOSE DELAY TIME 4"
WILL BE SET HIGHER THAN THE PICK UP TIME OF ANY SUB
ORDINATE RELAY WILL BE BLOCKED IF A SUBORDINATE RELAY
HAS PICKED UP !S ILLUSTRATED IN &IGURE THE
PICK UP SIGNAL WILL BE FED THROUGH THE RECEIVER IN
PUT TO THE PROTECTION SYSTEM (OWEVER IN ACCOR
DANCE WITH ITS PURPOSE AND IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH

AN INPUT SIGNAL THIS ZONE GUARANTEES RAPID DISCON
NECTION OF THE BUS BAR IN THE CASE OF
&AULT IN THE OUTGOING TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT FOR EXAM
PLE IN !
&AILURE OF A LINE PROTECTION RELAY
2EVERSE INTERLOCKING IS ACHIEVED BY DELIBERATE RE
LEASE OR BLOCKING OF THE OVERREACHING ZONE :" )T
CAN BE USED IN A BLOCKING MODE AS SHOWN IN &IGURE
OR IN RELEASE MODE BY A NORMALLY CLOSED CIRCUIT
4O AVOID TRANSIENT FALSE SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION
OF EXTERNAL FAULTS THE BLOCKING FUNCTION IS EXTENDED
BY A TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ 4" IN
&IGURE UNDER REVERSE INTERLOCK CONDITIONS
:
:
4
4
4!
:"
4"
SHORTEST
LINE
!
:"
&IGURE
4"
4"
&AULT
&AULT
&AULT
&AULT
"
4RIP
2EVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEME GRADING OF DISTANCE ZONES EXAMPLE
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
7EAK INFEED MEASURES ECHO FUNCTION

)N THOSE CASES WHERE AT ONE LINE END THERE IS NO OR
ONLY A WEAK INFEED SO THAT THE PROTECTION DEVICE AT
THAT END CANNOT PICK UP AND THEREFORE CANNOT SEND
ANY RELEASE SIGNAL AN ECHO INTERTRIP SIGNAL CAN BE
SENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH OVERREACHING MODES WITH
RELEASE SIGNAL 4HIS FEATURE CAN BE MADE EFFECTIVE OR
INEFFECTIVE BY A SOFTWARE /./&& SWITCH &IGURE
SHOWS THE LOGIC DIAGRAM
)N THE EVENT OF PICK UP FAILURE AT ONE LINE END THE
ECHO FUNCTION ENSURES THAT THE RECEIVED SIGNAL IS
SENT BACK TO THE OTHER LINE END AS AN ECHO AND
THERE PERMITS RELEASE OF THE TRIPPING COMMAND 4HE
DURATION OF THE ECHO IMPULSE IS ADJUSTABLE
4 %#(/ )-0
4HE ECHO IS DELAYED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME
4 %#(/ $%, 4HIS DELAY IS NECESSARY SO THAT THE
ECHO IS NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE RELAY AT ONE LINE END
HAS A HIGHER PICK UP TIME OR WHEN IT PICKS UP SOME
WHAT LATER BECAUSE OF UNFAVOURABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CUR

RENT DISTRIBUTION )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT
THE NON FEEDING LINE END IS OPEN DELAY OF THE ECHO
IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE ECHO DELAY TIME CAN THEN BE
BY PASSED AS LONG AS THE RELAY IS INFORMED OF THE
STATUS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER VIA A BINARY INPUT
4O PREVENT THE FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER DISCONNEC
TION OF THE LINE AND RESET OF THE FAULT DETECTION ELE
MENT NO ECHO CAN BE FORMED WHEN FAULT DETECTION
HAS PREVIOUSLY BEEN PRESENT 23 MEMORY IN &IGURE
&OR THE SAME REASON AN ADJUSTABLE TIME 4
%#(/ ",/ PREVENTS FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER A
TRIPPING COMMAND
7ITH THE BLOCKING MODE AND FOR TRANSFER TRIP MODES
THE ECHO FUNCTION IS NOT EFFECTIVE %QUALLY IT HAS NO
FUNCTION IN OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON VIA PILOT
WIRES OR REVERSE INTERLOCKING SCHEMES
#OMPARISON RELEASE LOGIC
2
1
2E
CEP
TION
&AULT
DET
4RIP
SIGNAL
#"
OPEN
&IGURE

4
%#(/
$%,
4
%#(/
3END
)-0
4
%#(/
",/
"LOCK DIAGRAM OF ECHO FUNCTION FOR RELEASE MODES
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4RANSIENT BLOCKING

)N OVERREACH TRANSFER AND COMPARISON MODES TRAN
SIENT BLOCKING PROVIDES ADDITIONAL SECURITY AGAINST
FALSE SIGNALS WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED BY TRAN
SIENT OSCILLATION AFTER THE INTERRUPTION OF EXTERNAL
TION OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES
4HE PRINCIPLE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS THAT AFTER THE OC
CURRENCE OF AN EXTERNAL FAULT FORMATION OF A RELEASE
SIGNAL IS PREVENTED FOR A SPECIFIC ADJUSTABLE TIME
4 42!.3",/ )N THE RELEASE MODES THIS IS ACCOM
PLISHED BY BLOCKING THE TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVER
CIRCUITS IN THE BLOCKING MODE BY LENGTHENING OF THE
BLOCKING SIGNAL AT THE RECEIVER END
&IGURE SHOWS THE PRINCIPLE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING
FOR A RELEASE MODE )F AFTER FAULT DETECTION A FAULT IS
SHOWN TO BE IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THE
SET DIRECTION THE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT AND THE RE
LEASE OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" OR DIRECTIONAL TRIP WILL
BE BLOCKED AFTER A WAITING TIME OF MS 4HIS BLOCK
ING WILL BE MAINTAINED FOR THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME
&ORW
DIREC

4"
4 42!.3",/ IDENTIFIED IN &IGURE WITH 4"

EVEN AFTER THE BLOCKING CRITERION HAS BEEN REMOVED
3IMILARLY THE RELEASE OF OVERREACHING ZONE :" OR DI
RECTIONAL TRIP CAN BE RESTRICTED WHEN AFTER FAULT DE
TECTION NO RELEASE SIGNAL IS RECEIVED FROM THE OPPO
SITE LINE END WITHIN THE SETTABLE WAITING TIME 47 4HIS
BLOCKING WILL ALSO BE EXTENDED BY THE TRANSIENT
BLOCKING TIME .ORMALLY THIS MODE OF TRANSIENT
BLOCKING IS REASONABLE ONLY WHEN THE PROTECTION
SCHEME AT THE REMOTE LINE END HAS NO TRANSIENT
BLOCKING FEATURE 4RANSIENT BLOCKING IS SUPPRESSED
WHEN THE WAITING TIME 47 IS SET TO INFINITY
)N THE BLOCKING MODE NON RECEIPT OF THE RELEASE
SIGNAL QUALIFIES AS RECEIPT OF A BLOCKING SIGNAL (ERE
TRANSIENT BLOCKING MEANS PROLONGATION OF THE BLOCK
ING SIGNAL 4HE BLOCKING SIGNAL MUST HAVE BEEN RE
CEIVED FOR THE WAITING TIME 47 4HE TRANSMISSION SIG
NAL CAN BE LENGTHENED BY THE TIME 4 3%.$ 02,
SEE ALSO 3ECTION
"LOCK TRANSMISSION
AND RELEASE SIGNAL
&AULT
DETEC
2E
CEP
TION
&IGURE
47
4"
"LOCK RELEASE SIGNAL
4RANSIENT BLOCKING WITH RELEASE MODE
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
3! CONTAINS TWO USER DEFINABLE LOGIC MODULES

4HESE COMPRISE EACH A TIMER WHICH CAN BE STARTED
AND BLOCKED VIA A BINARY INPUT &IGURE ! PICK
UP TIME DELAY AND A DROP OFF TIME DELAY CAN BE SET
4HE TIMES CAN ALSO BE SET TO OR 0
"INARY INPUT
5SER 4 3TART
5SER 4 2ESET
3ET MEMORY WITH
5SER OUTPUT 4
5SER 4 3TART
5SER 4 2ESET
2ESET MEMORY WITH
"INARY INPUTS
"INARY OUTPUT
5SER 4 3TART
5SER 4 2ESET
&IGURE
4PICK
4DROP
&IGURE
&LIP FLOP
5SER OUTPUT 4
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC ONE MODULE
4HE OUTPUTS ARE INCLUDED IN THE ANNUNCIATION PRO

CESSING OF THE DEVICE 4HEY CAN BE ASSIGNED TO SIG
NAL RELAYS ,%$S OR TRIP RELAYS
4HE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE REALIZED FOR EXAMPLE
PICK UP DELAY WITH 4PICK 4DROP
DROP OFF DELAY PULSE LENGTHENING WITH 4DROP
4PICK
!NY DESIRED TRIP SIGNAL FROM AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION OR

SUPERVISION UNIT CAN BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PRO
CESSING OF 3! 4HE SIGNAL IS COUPLED AS %XTER
NAL SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT ,IKE THE INTERNAL PROTEC
TION AND SUPERVISION SIGNALS IT CAN BE ANNUNCIATED
AS %XTERNAL FAULT AND TRANSMITTED TO THE TRIP RELAYS
!DDITIONALLY FOUR ANNUNCIATIONS ARE AVAILABLE WHICH
CAN BE DEFINED BY THE USER HIMSELF 3IGNALS AND
MESSAGES OF OTHER DEVICES WHICH HAVE NO INTERFACES
0# OR ,3! INTERFACE CAN BE INCLUDED IN THE ANNUN
CIATION PROCESSING OF THE DEVICE ,IKE THE INTERNAL AN
NUNCIATIONS THEY CAN BE ALLOCATED TO SIGNAL RELAYS
,%$S OR TRIP RELAYS OR TRANSMITTED TO THE FRONT DIS
PLAY A 0# OR ,3!
PICK UP DELAY AND DROP OFF DELAY

BISTABLE MEMORY FLIP FLOP REFER TO &IGURE
FLIP FLOP WITH DELAY

# ' #
3!6

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT
TIME PROTECTION
3! PROVIDES AN EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION 7HEREAS DISTANCE PROTECTION CAN OPER
ATE ONLY AS LONG AS THE LINE VOLTAGES ARE PROPERLY
AVAILABLE THE OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION NEEDS THE
CURRENTS ONLY
4HE OVERCURRENT FUNCTION COMES AUTOMATICALLY INTO
OPERATION WHEN FAILURE OF THE MEASURED VOLTAGES IS
DETECTED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS
OPERATION OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR OR THREE
PHASE VOLTAGE FAILURE SUPERVISION REFER 3ECTION
OR
THE SIGNAL 64 MCB TRIPPED IS APPLIED TO A BINARY
INPUT
)F EITHER OF THESE FACTORS OCCURS DISTANCE PROTECTION
IS IMMEDIATELY BLOCKED AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION MAY BECOME OPERATIVE SELECTABLE
5NDER THIS CONDITION SELECTIVITY CAN ONLY BE
ACHIEVED BY TIME DELAY JUST AS FOR ALL OTHER TYPES OF
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SCHEME
!S SOON AS THE DEVICE RECOGNIZES THAT THE MEASURED
VOLTAGES HAVE REAPPEARED THE SYSTEM SWITCHES
BACK TO DISTANCE PROTECTION
4HE EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS DE
SIGNED TWO STAGE FOR PHASE CURRENT WITH AN ADDI
TIONAL EARTH CURRENT STAGE !LL STAGES ARE INDEPEN
DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY
)
4)
)PH
4)
)%
4)%
HIGH CURRENT LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR

PHASE CURRENTS
CORRESPONDING DELAY TIME
DEFINITE TIME LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR
PHASE CURRENTS
DEFINITE TIME LIMIT VALUE THRESHOLD FOR
EARTH CURRENTS
5NDER CONDITIONS OF MANUAL CLOSING ONTO FAULT THE

EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION CAN ALSO PROVIDE
A RAPID TRIP ! CHOICE CAN BE MADE WHETHER THE )
STAGES OR THE ) STAGES ARE DECISIVE FOR AN UNDE
LAYED TRIP IE THE ASSOCIATED TIME DELAY IS BY
PASSED FOR THIS CONDITION 4HE EMERGENCY PROTECTION
CAN ALSO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AUTO RECLO
SURE )N THESE CASES THE ) STAGES BECOMES VALID
BEFORE RECLOSURE
# ' #
-ETHOD OF OPERATION

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTEC

TION
4HE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION PREVENTS THE POWER

LINE PARTICULARLY IN CASE OF CABLES FROM DAMAGE
CAUSED BY THERMAL OVERLOADING
4HE UNIT COMPUTES THE TEMPERATURE RISE ACCORDING
TO A THERMAL SINGLE BODY MODEL AS PER THE FOLLOWING
THERMAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION
D
DT

)
WHERE
INSTANTANEOUS TEMPERATURE RISE RELATED

ON THE FINAL TEMPERATURE RISE FOR THE MAXI
MUM PERMISSIBLE CABLE CURRENT Kw).
THERMAL TIME CONSTANT FOR HEATING UP OF

THE CABLE
INSTANTANEOUS CABLE CURRENT RMS VALUE

RELATED ON THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
CABLE CURRENT )MAX K w ).
7HEN THE TEMPERATURE RISE REACHES THE FIRST SET

THRESHOLD A WARNING ALARM IS GIVEN IN ORDER TO REN
DER POSSIBLE AN EARLY LOAD REDUCTION )F THE SECOND
TEMPERATURE THRESHOLD IS REACHED THE LINE CAN BE
DISCONNECTED FROM THE NETWORK SELECTABLE
4HE TEMPERATURE RISES ARE CALCULATED SEPARATELY FOR
EACH INDIVIDUAL PHASE ! CHOICE CAN BE MADE
WHETHER THE MAXIMUM CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE
OF THE THREE PHASES THE AVERAGE TEMPERATURE RISE OR
THE TEMPERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE PHASE WITH
MAXIMUM CURRENT SHOULD BE DECISIVE ! TRUE RMS
VALUE MEASUREMENT IS PERFORMED IN ORDER TO INCLUDE
FOR THE EFFECT OF HARMONIC CONTENT
4HE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CONTINUOUS THERMAL OVER
LOAD CURRENT )MAX IS DESCRIBED AS A MULTIPLE OF THE
RATED CURRENT ).
)MAX K ).
)N ADDITION TO THIS K VALUE THE TIME CONSTANT AS
WELL AS THE ALARM TEMPERATURE WARN MUST BE EN
TERED INTO THE PROTECTION UNIT
!PART FROM THE THERMAL WARNING STAGE THE OVERLOAD
PROTECTION ALSO INCLUDES A CURRENT DEPENDENT
WARNING STAGE 4HIS LATTER ALARM STAGE CAN GIVE AN
EARLY ANNUNCIATION OF AN IMPENDING OVERLOAD CURRENT
EVEN IF THE TEMPERATURE RISE HAS NOT YET REACHED THE
ALARM OR TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE VALUES

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT

OPTIONAL
)N SYSTEMS WHOSE STARPOINT IS EITHER ISOLATED OR

EARTHED THROUGH AN ARC SUPPRESSION COIL 0ETERSEN
COIL SINGLE PHASE EARTH FAULTS WILL NOT BE DETECTED BY
THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION SINCE NO SIGNIFICANT EARTH
FAULT CURRENT FLOWS &URTHERMORE SINCE NETWORK OPER
ATION IS NOT IMMEDIATELY AFFECTED BY AN EARTH FAULT
THE VOLTAGE TRIANGLE IS MAINTAINED &IGURE RAP
ID DISCONNECTION IS NOT NORMALLY DESIRED )T IS MORE
IMPORTANT THAT THE EARTH FAULT BE RECOGNIZED INDI
CATED AND WHEN POSSIBLE LOCATED !FTER SWITCHING
TO ALTERNATIVE NETWORK ROUTES IT CAN THEN BE CLEARED
"UT IT IS POSSIBLE TO TRIP ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT IN
NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

&AULT DETECTION
4HE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FUNCTION CAN BE SWITCHED

ON AND OFF BY PARAMETER 7HEN ON PICK UP OCCURS
WHEN AN ADJUSTABLE THRESHOLD FOR THE DISPLACEMENT
VOLTAGE 5% IS EXCEEDED 4O ENSURE MEASUREMENT
OF STABLE VALUES ALL EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTIONS
ARE DELAYED UNTIL SECOND SETTABLE AFTER INCEPTION
OF VOLTAGE DISPLACEMENT &URTHER EACH ALTERATION OF
THE EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS EG ALTERED DIRECTION IS
RECOGNIZED ONLY AFTER THIS DELAY %ARTH FAULT ANNUNCI
ATION IS ONLY ISSUED AFTER EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS EN
SURED ACCORDING
5,

%
5,
5,
A (EALTHY NETWORK WITHOUT EARTH FAULT

5,
5,
5
5,
B %ARTH FAULT IN PHASE ,

&IGURE
%ARTH FAULT IN NON EARTHED NEUTRAL

NETWORK
$EPENDENT UPON THE CHOSEN MODEL THE RELAY CAN

BE FITTED WITH OPTIONAL EARTH FAULT DETECTION MODULE
WHICH INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS
$ETECTION OF AN EARTH FAULT PICK UP BY MONITOR
ING THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED PHASE BY MEASURING
THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES
$ETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT
RESIDUAL CURRENT BY HIGH ACCURACY REAL AND REAC
TIVE COMPONENT MEASUREMENT

$ETERMINATION OF THE EARTH

FAULTED PHASE
!FTER RECOGNITION OF DISPLACED VOLTAGE CONDITIONS THE

FIRST OBJECTIVE OF THE DEVICE IS SELECTIVE DETECTION OF
THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE &OR THIS PURPOSE THE INDI
VIDUAL PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES ARE MEASURED 4HE
AFFECTED PHASE IS THE ONE IN WHICH THE VOLTAGE IS BE
LOW THE SETTABLE THRESHOLD 5PH WHEN SIMULTA
NEOUSLY THE OTHER TWO VOLTAGES EXCEED AN EQUALLY
SETTABLE MAXIMUM THRESHOLD 5PH

3ENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL

DETERMINATION
4HE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT CAN BE DETERMINED

FROM THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT CAPACITIVE OR
OHMIC CURRENT RELATED TO THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE
4HE ONLY RESERVATION IS THAT THE ACTIVE OR REACTIVE CUR
RENT COMPONENTS MUST BE AVAILABLE IN SUFFICIENT
MAGNITUDE AT THE POINT OF MEASUREMENT
)N NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED STARPOINT THE EARTH FAULT
CURRENT FLOWS AS CAPACITIVE CURRENT FROM THE HEALTHY
LINES VIA THE MEASURING POINT TO THE POINT OF FAULT 4HIS
CAPACITIVE CURRENT DETERMINES THE DIRECTION
)N NETWORKS WITH ARC SUPPRESSION COILS THE 0ETERSEN
COIL SUPERIMPOSES A CORRESPONDING INDUCTIVE CUR
RENT ON THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT WHEN AN
EARTH FAULT OCCURS SO THAT THE CAPACITIVE CURRENT AT
THE POINT OF FAULT IS COMPENSATED $EPENDENT UPON
THE POINT OF MEASUREMENT IN THE NETWORK THE RESUL
TANT MEASURED CURRENT CAN HOWEVER BE INDUCTIVE OR
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
CAPACITIVE AND THE REACTIVE CURRENT IS THEREFORE NOT

SUITABLE FOR THE DETERMINATION OF DIRECTION )N THIS
CASE ONLY THE OHMIC RESIDUAL CURRENT WHICH RESULTS
FROM THE LOSSES OF THE 0ETERSEN COIL CAN BE USED FOR
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION 4HIS EARTH FAULT OHMIC CUR
RENT IS ONLY A FEW PERCENT OF THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT
CURRENT
2EACTIVE POWER
0 %R
4
0 %A
4
I % T
I % T
DT
4HE USE OF AN EFFICIENT CALCULATION ALGORITHM AND SI

MULTANEOUS NUMERICAL FILTERING ALLOWS THE DIRECTIONAL
DETERMINATION TO BE ACHIEVED WITH HIGH ACCURACY
AND SHARPLY DEFINED THRESHOLD LIMITS SEE &IGURE
AND INSENSITIVITY TO HARMONIC INFLUENCES PAR
TICULARLY THE FREQUENTLY STRONG THIRD AND FIFTH HARMON
ICS WHICH OCCUR PARTICULARLY IN OHMIC EARTH FAULT CUR
RENTS 4HE DIRECTIONAL DECISION RESULTS FROM THE SIGNS
OF ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER
T4
U % T
U % T
WHERE 4 EQUALS PERIOD OF INTEGRATION
)N 3! THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTION IS DETERMINED

FROM A HIGHLY ACCURATE CALCULATION OF ACTIVE AND REAC
TIVE POWER USING THE DEFINITIONS
!CTIVE POWER
T4
DT
)%A ACTIVE COMPONENT

M!
M!
2EVERSE
&ORWARDS
&ORWARDS
2EVERSE
M!
)% LEADING
^
&IGURE
^
^
)% LAGGING
^
^
^
^
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTIC
3INCE THE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF THE CUR

NOT THE POWER
DETERMINE PICK UP OF THE
RENT
EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DECISION THESE CURRENT COM
PONENTS ARE CALCULATED FROM THE POWER COMPO
NENTS 4HUS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE
EARTH FAULT ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENTS OF THE
EARTH FAULT CURRENT AS WELL AS THE DIRECTION OF THE AC
TIVE AND REACTIVE POWER ARE EVALUATED
# ' #
)N NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED STARPOINT THE FOLLOWING CRI

TERIA APPLY
EARTH FAULT FORWARDS WHEN 0%R AND )%R SET
VALUE
EARTH FAULT BACKWARDS WHEN 0%R AND )%R SET
VALUE

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
)N COMPENSATED NETWORKS WITH ARC SUPPRESSION

COIL THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA APPLY
EARTH FAULT FORWARDS WHEN 0%A AND )%A SET
VALUE
EARTH FAULT BACKWARDS WHEN 0%A AND )%A SET
VALUE
)N THE LATTER CASE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT DEPENDENT
UPON THE LOCATION OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY A CONSIDER
ABLE REACTIVE COMPONENT MAY BE SUPERIMPOSED
WHICH IN THE MOST UNFAVOURABLE CASES CAN ATTAIN
TIMES THE ACTIVE COMPONENT %VEN THE EXTREMELY
HIGH ACCURACY OF THE CALCULATION ALGORITHM IS THEN IN
ADEQUATE IF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS DO NOT EXACTLY
CONVERT THE PRIMARY VALUES
4HE MEASUREMENT INPUT CIRCUIT OF THE RELAY MODEL
WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS PARTICULARLY DESIGNED FOR
THIS PURPOSE AND PERMITS AN EXTREMELY HIGH SENSITIV
ITY FOR THE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION OF THE WATTMETRIC
RESIDUAL CURRENT )N ORDER TO UTILIZE THIS SENSITIVITY IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANS
FORMERS BE USED FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN COMPEN
SATED NETWORKS !S EVEN THE CORE BALANCE TRANS
FORMERS HAVE AN ANGLE OF ERROR THE PROTECTION SYS
TEM ALLOWS THE SETTING OF FACTORS WHICH DEPENDENT
UPON THE REACTIVE CURRENT WILL CORRECT THE ERROR
ANGLE

&AULTED LINE LOCATION
)N RADIAL NETWORKS LOCATION OF THE FAULTED LINE IS RELA

TIVELY SIMPLE 3INCE ALL CIRCUITS ON A BUSBAR &IGURE
CARRY A CAPACITIVE PARTIAL CURRENT THE MEASUR
&IGURE

ING POINT ON THE FAULTED LINE IN AN ISOLATED NETWORK

SEES ALMOST THE ENTIRE PROSPECTIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT
OF THE NETWORK IN COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE WATT
METRIC RESIDUAL CURRENT FROM THE 0ETERSEN COIL FLOWS
THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT &OR THE FAULTED LINE OR
CABLE A DEFINITE FORWARDS DECISION WILL RESULT
WHILST IN THE REMAINING CIRCUITS A REVERSE INDICATION
WILL BE GIVEN UNLESS THE EARTH CURRENT IS SO SMALL THAT
NO MEASUREMENT CAN BE TAKEN )N ANY CASE THE
FAULTED CABLE CAN BE CLEARLY DETERMINED
&IGURE
&AULTED LINE LOCATION IN RADIAL NET

WORK
)N MESHED OR RING NETWORKS THE MEASURING POINTS AT

THE ENDS OF THE FAULTED CABLE EQUALLY SEE A MAXIMUM
OF EARTH FAULT CAPACITIVE OR OHMIC CURRENT /NLY IN
THIS CABLE WILL THE DIRECTION FORWARDS BE INDICATED
ON BOTH LINE ENDS &IGURE %VEN THE REMAINING
DIRECTIONAL INDICATIONS IN THE NETWORK CAN AID LOCA
TION OF THE EARTH FAULT "UT UNDER CERTAIN CIRCUM
STANCES ONE OR MORE INDICATIONS MAY NOT BE GIVEN
DUE TO INSUFFICIENT EARTH CURRENT &URTHER ADVICE CAN
BE FOUND IN THE LEAFLET %ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN ISO
LATED NEUTRAL OR ARC SUPPRESSION COIL EARTHED HIGH
VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
,OCATION OF EARTH FAULT BASED ON THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATORS IN A MESHED NETWORK

# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

)N EARTHED NETWORKS IN WHICH THE EARTH PATH RESIS
TANCE CAN BE EXTREMELY HIGH EG OVERHEAD LINES
WITHOUT LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONDUCTOR OR SANDY
SOMETIMES EVEN THE UN
SOILS THE OVERCURRENT
DER IMPEDANCE ELEMENT WILL OFTEN NOT PICK UP SO
THAT NO PHASE SELECTION IS POSSIBLE FOR THE DISTANCE
MEASUREMENT %VEN WHEN USING IMPEDANCE FAULT
DETECTION EARTH FAULT IMPEDANCES CAN OCCUR WHICH
APPEAR TO LIE OUTSIDE THE PICK UP CHARACTERISTIC OF
THE DISTANCE RELAY
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 3! DEPENDENT UPON THE
MODEL ORDERED SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA CAN
PROVIDE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS FOR SUCH HIGH RESISTANCE
EARTH FAULTS /NE OF THE FOLLOWING FEATURES CAN THEN
BE SELECTED
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME
EARTH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH NON DIRECTION
AL BACK UP AND STAND BY PROTECTION FUNCTION
NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME LAG OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS WITH SELECTABLE CHARAC
TERISTICS
4HE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EX
TENDED BY AN INTEGRATED DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON LOG
IC SO THAT BY MEANS OF A CARRIER CHANNEL FAST AND SE
LECTIVE TRIPPING FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IS ALSO
POSSIBLE
4HE NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME PROTECTION IS USED
MOSTLY FOR HIGHLY INTERLINKED ALL ROUND EARTHED NET
WORKS WITH HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS WHERE THE
ENDS OF THE FAULTY LINE SECTION CARRY THE LARGEST FAULT
CURRENT AND THUS PRODUCE THE SHORTEST TRIPPING TIME
5%
$IREC

)%
TION
4$)2%#4

4RIP
)%
4./.
$)2
&IGURE

$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
4HE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION &IGURE

HAS AN ADJUSTABLE EARTH CURRENT DETECTION ELEMENT
)% AND AN ADJUSTABLE DELAY TIME "ECAUSE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON SEE 3ECTION
DETECTION IS TWO STAGE A LOWER VALUE
)% RELEASES DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION &OR TRIP
PING THE HIGH VALUE STAGE MUST ADDITIONALLY BE EX
CEEDED CORRESPONDING TO THE SET VALUE OF )%
$IRECTIONAL DETERMINATION REQUIRES A LEAST VALUE DIS
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE FOR WHICH THE 5% SETTING IS
USED )F THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL A DI
RECTIONAL DETERMINATION AND THUS DIRECTIONAL DE
PENDENT TRIPPING IS NOT POSSIBLE $IRECTIONAL DETER
MINATION IS ALSO SUPPRESSED AND TRIPPING PREVENTED
WHEN THE INDICATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PROTECTIVE
DEVICE TRIPPED IS SIGNALLED TO THE RELAY VIA A BINARY
INPUT
4HE CRITERION FOR THE DELAY TIME IS THE SETTING 4
2%#4
$)
! FURTHER TIME STAGE 4 ./. $)2 WILL CAUSE TRIPPING

WITHOUT DIRECTIONAL MEASUREMENT )T CAN BE SET AS A
NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE FOR THE DIRECTIONAL
STAGE )F THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL OR IF
THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS OPER
ATED THIS STAGE REMAINS EFFECTIVE AND CAN ALSO SERVE
AS AN EMERGENCY FUNCTION FOR THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION AND THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COM
PARISON PROTECTION
4HE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL FUNCTION IS BLOCKED FROM
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION 7HEN THE FAULT IS DETECTED BY THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DOES NOT OPER
ATE 4HIS GIVES SELECTIVE FAULT DETERMINATION BY THE
DISTANCE PROTECTION PREFERENCE OVER TRIPPING BY THE
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION !DDITIONALLY THE EARTH FAULT DI
RECTIONAL PROTECTION IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE
AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS MEA
SUREMENT WITH THE ZERO SEQUENCE QUANTITIES WHICH
ARE NOW PRESENT )N CASE A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EX
TERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME
4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING
CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
$IRECTIONAL EARTH PROTECTION WITH

NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
7ITH THE AID OF THE INTEGRATED COMPARISON LOGIC THE

DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED TO
FORM A DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION &OR THIS
PURPOSE A CARRIER CHANNEL IS NECESSARY FOR EACH DI
RECTION WHICH TRANSMITS THE SIGNALS OF THE DIRECTIONAL
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION EG VIA 0,# TO THE ASSO
CIATED OTHER LINE END 4HIS CAN ALSO BE THE SAME
CHANNEL AS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION WITH DISTANCE PRO
TECTION 3ECTION UNDER THE CONDITION THAT A COR
RESPONDING COMPARISON PROCEDURE 0ERMIS
SIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP WITH :" OR $IREC
TIONAL COMPARISON HAS BEEN SELECTED AT THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION ELEMENT
MEANS OF A TRANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION &IGURE

4HE PRINCIPLE OF THIS TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS THAT AFTER
THE OCCURRENCE OF AN EXTERNAL FAULT THE FORMATION OF A
RELEASE SIGNAL IS PREVENTED FOR A SPECIFIC ADJUSTABLE
TIME 4 42!.3",/
!FTER THE PICK UP )% THE RELAY CARRIES OUT DI

RECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING THE EARTH CURRENT )%
| ) AND THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5% o | 5
7ITH AN EARTH FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION A RELEASE SIG
NAL IS SENT TO THE OPPOSITE END IF A RELEASE SIGNAL IS
THEN RECEIVED FROM THAT END TRIPPING RESULTS AS LONG
AS THIS RELAY HAS ALSO DETECTED AN EARTH FAULT IN THE
LINE DIRECTION AND THE SET PICK UP VALUE )% IS EX
CEEDED &IGURE 4RANSMISSION SIGNAL AND TRIP
PING CAN BOTH BE MADE DEPENDENT ON A DELAY TIME
4 $%,!9
3IMILARLY THE RELEASE OF DIRECTIONAL TRIP CAN BE RE

STRICTED WHEN AFTER FAULT DETECTION NO RELEASE SIGNAL
IS RECEIVED FROM THE OPPOSITE LINE END WITHIN THE SET
TABLE WAITING TIME 47 4HIS BLOCKING WILL ALSO BE EX
TENDED BY THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME .ORMALLY THIS
MODE OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN
THE PROTECTION SCHEME AT THE REMOTE LINE END HAS NO
TRANSIENT BLOCKING FEATURE 4RANSIENT BLOCKING IS SUP
PRESSED WHEN THE WAITING TIME 47 IS SET TO INFINITY
$ELAY BY 4 $%,!9 CAN BE APPROPRIATE WHEN AN EX

TERNAL PROTECTION RELAY SHALL OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION
WITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE 3INCE THE EARTH
FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON DOES NOT SUPPLY ANY IN
FORMATION ABOUT THE FAULTED PHASES IT CAN ONLY INITI
ATE THREE PHASE AUTO RECLOSE
!NY FAULTY SIGNALS WHICH COULD BE CAUSED BY TRAN
SIENT OSCILLATIONS DURING THE CLEARANCE OF EXTERNAL
FAULTS OR DURING CHANGE OF DIRECTION AFTER CLEARANCE
OF FAULTS ON PARALLEL LINES ARE MADE HARMLESS BY
5%

)%
)%
&IGURE

&ORW
DIREC
)F AFTER FAULT DETECTION IT IS DETERMINED THAT THE FAULT IS

IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION OPPOSITE TO THE SET DIRECTION
THE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT AND RELEASE ARE SUPPRESSED
AFTER A WAITING TIME OF MS 4HIS BLOCKING WILL BE
MAINTAINED FOR THE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4
42!.3",/
IN &IGURE ABBREVIATED TO 4"
EVEN AFTER THE BLOCKING CRITERION IS REMOVED
&OR LINES WITH SINGLE END INFEED OR STAR POINT EARTHING

AT ONE LINE END ONLY NO RELEASE CAN BE FORMED FROM
THE RESIDUAL CURRENT FREE LINE SINCE NO FAULT DETEC
TION SIGNAL OCCURS AT THAT END 4O ACHIEVE TRIPPING BY
THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON ELEMENT EVEN IN THIS
CASE AN ECHO FUNCTION IS ADDITIONALLY AVAILABLE &IG
URE 4HIS HAS THE EFFECT THAT WHEN THE LOW VALUE
DETECTION SIGNAL IS NOT PRESENT AT ONE LINE END
)% THE RECEIVED SIGNAL WILL BE SENT BACK TO THE
OTHER LINE END AS AN ECHO AND THUS PERMITS THE RE
LEASE OF A TRIPPING COMMAND AT THAT END 4HE DURA
TION OF THIS ECHO IMPULSE IS ADJUSTABLE 4 %#(/
)-0
4RIP
$%,!9
4RIP
&ORW
DIREC
4
$%,!9
5%

)%
)%
%ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION
# ' #
3!6
$IREC
TION
-ETHOD OF OPERATION

4"
"LOCKING OF
TRANSMISSION
BEEN PRESENT 23 MEMORY IN &IGURE &OR THE

SAME REASON NO ECHO IS PERMITTED FOR AN ADJUSTABLE
TIME 4 %#(/ ",/ AFTER A TRIPPING COMMAND HAS
BEEN ISSUED
AND TRIP
)NDEPENDENT OF THE RESULT OF THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARI

SON THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT STAGE DESCRIBED IN
SECTION IS EFFECTIVE WITH THE TIME 4 $)2%#4
AND THE NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE WITH THE
TIME 4 ./. $)2 )F ONE OF THESE STAGES IS NOT RE
QUIRED THE CORRESPONDING TIME MUST BE SET TO INFIN
ITY

)%
2ECEP
TION
&IGURE
47
4"
"LOCKING
OF TRIP
4RANSIENT "LOCKING
4HE ECHO IS DELAYED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME

4 %#(/ $%, 4HIS DELAY IS NECESSARY SO THAT
THE ECHO WILL NOT BE EFFECTIVE WHEN THE PROTECTION AT
ONE LINE END HAS A HIGHER FAULT DETECTION TIME OR IF IT
PICKS UP SOMEWHAT LATER DUE TO UNFAVOURABLE EARTH
CURRENT DISTRIBUTION )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT
THE NON INFEED LINE END IS OPEN THE DELAY OF THE
ECHO IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE ECHO DELAY TIME CAN THEN
BE BY PASSED IF THE RELAY IS INFORMED OF THE POSITION
OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER THROUGH A BINARY INPUT
4O PREVENT THE FORMATION OF AN ECHO AFTER CLEARANCE
OF THE LINE AND RESET OF THE FAULT DETECTION ELEMENTS
AN ECHO IS NOT FORMED WHEN A PICK UP HAS ALREADY
4HE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION

FUNCTION IS BLOCKED FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HEREFORE IF A
FAULT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION THEN THE
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DOES NOT OPERATE 4HIS GIVES
SELECTIVE FAULT EVALUATION BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
PREFERENCE OVER TRIPPING VIA THE EARTH FAULT PROTEC
TION !DDITIONALLY THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARI
SON PROTECTION IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE AU
TO RECLOSE CYCLE TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS MEA
SUREMENT WITH THE ZERO SEQUENCE QUANTITIES WHICH
ARE NOW PRESENT )N CASE A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EX
TERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION CAN BE EXTENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME
4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING
CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
#OMPARISON LOGIC
2
1
2E
CEPT

)%
$%,
4RIP
SIG
NAL
4
%#(/
3END
)-0
4
%#(/
",/#
#"
OPEN
&IGURE
4
%#(/
"LOCK DIAGRAM OF ECHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
# ' #

3!6

)NVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FOR EARTH FAULTS
4HE INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS

NON DIRECTIONAL )T CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF THE DIREC
TIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
OR 4HE REQUIRED CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE
CHOSEN FROM THE THREE WHICH ARE AVAILABLE
NORMAL INVERSE TYPE ! )%# "3
VERY INVERSE TYPE " )%#
EXTREMELY INVERSE TYPE # )%#
4HE SHAPE OF THE CHARACTERISTICS AND THE FORMULAE ON
WHICH THEY ARE BASED ARE GIVEN IN THE 4ECHNICAL DATA
3ECTION &IGURE
4RIPPING TIME IS THEN DEPENDENT ON THE LEVEL OF CUR
RENT )F THIS VALUE CHANGES DURING THE FAULT THE TRIP
PING TIME WILL BE DETERMINED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE CHANGING CURRENT VALUE 4HIS IS ACHIEVED BY
AN INTEGRATING PROCESS SIMILAR TO THAT OF CONVENTIONAL
INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAYS 4HUS THE
GRADING PLAN CAN EASILY BE COORDINATED WITH INVERSE
TIME OVERCURRENT RELAYS OF CONVENTIONAL CONSTRUC
TION )N STRONGLY MESHED ALL ROUND EARTHED NET
WORKS THE LARGEST FAULT CURRENTS FLOW AT THE ENDS OF

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
THE FAULTY LINE SECTION THE INVERSE CHARACTERISTIC HAS

THE EFFECT THAT HERE THE SHORTEST RESPONSE TIME OC
CURS AND THE REMAINING RELAYS RESET
4HE RANGE OF DEFINITION OF THE CHARACTERISTICS GOES
FURTHER THAN THAT OF THE )%# STANDARDS 4HEY ARE DE
FINED FROM ABOVE THE SET VALUE UP TO TIMES
THE SET VALUE "EYOND THAT POINT NO FURTHER REDUCTION
OF THE TRIPPING TIME OCCURS
4HE EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION FUNCTION
IS BLOCKED FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGEN
CY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 4HEREFORE IF A FAULT IS REC
OGNIZED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OR EMERGENCY
OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION THEN THE EARTH FAULT PRO
TECTION DOES NOT OPERATE 4HIS GIVES SELECTIVE FAULT
EVALUATION BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION PREFERENCE
OVER TRIPPING VIA THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION !DDITION
ALLY THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION
IS BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
TO PREVENT FROM ERRONEOUS PICK UP ON THE ZERO SE
QUENCE CURRENT WHICH MAY NOW BE PRESENT )N CASE
A FAULT IS CLEARED BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION DEVICE
BLOCKING OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE EX
TENDED BY AN ADJUSTABLE TIME 4 ",/#+ TO ALLOW A
SINGLE PHASE AUTO RECLOSING CYCLE TO BE CARRIED OUT
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL
%XPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT APPROXIMATELY OF

SHORT CIRCUITS ARE CAUSED BY AN ARC ON OVERHEAD
LINES AND SELF EXTINGUISH AFTER INTERRUPTION BY THE
PROTECTIVE DEVICE 4HE LINE CAN THEREFORE BE RE EN
ERGIZED 4HIS IS CARRIED OUT BY THE AUTOMATIC RECLO
SURE !2 FUNCTION &IGURE SHOWS AN EXAMPLE
FOR THE TIME SEQUENCE OF SUCH AN AUTO RECLOSE
CYCLE
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLES CAN BE TRIPPED INDIVIDUAL
LY THEN !2 IS OFTEN CARRIED OUT SINGLE POLE FOR SING
LE PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI PHASE
FAULTS IN NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT )F THE SHORT
CIRCUIT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER THE AUTO RECLOSURE ARC
NOT QUENCHED OR METALLIC SHORT CIRCUIT THEN THE PRO
TECTIVE RELAY FINALLY DISCONNECTS THE POWER -ULTIPLE
AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS OFTEN WITH A FIRST RAPID
AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 AND SUBSEQUENT DELAYED
AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES $!2 ARE POSSIBLE IN SOME
NETWORKS
4HE STRINGENT LOOP DETERMINATION OF 3! SEE
3ECTION ALLOWS RELIABLY SINGLE POLE AUTO RE
CLOSURE 4HE 3! ALSO ALLOWS AUTOMATIC SINGLE
AND THREE POLE AS WELL AS SINGLE AND MULTI SHOT
RECLOSURE IF THE !2 FUNCTION IS ACCORDINGLY ORDERED
REFER 3ECTION /RDERING DATA
3! CAN ALSO WORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTER
NAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM )N THIS CASE THE SIGNAL EX
CHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL !2 UNIT
MUST BE ACCOMPLISHED VIA THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUT
PUTS SEE 3ECTION
&URTHERMORE IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO ALLOW THE INTERNAL
!2 FUNCTION TO BE TRIGGERED FROM AN EXTERNAL PRO
TECTION RELAY EG BACK UP RELAY SEE 3ECTION
4HE USE OF TWO 3! WITH INTERNAL !2
FUNCTION IS ALSO POSSIBLE AS WELL AS THE USE OF ONE
3! WITH !2 FUNCTION AND A SECOND PROTECTION
RELAY WITH SEPARATE !2 UNIT EXAMPLE SEE 3ECTION

4HE POSSIBLE PROGRAMS OF THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION
FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING
WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE ARE
2!2 02/' 4(2%% 0/,% IE ALL TYPES OF
FAULTS RESULT IN THREE POLE !2
2!2 02/' 3).',% 0/,% IE SINGLE PHA
SE FAULTS RESULT IN SINGLE POLE !2
# ' #
MULTI PHASE FAULTS IN THREE POLE

FINAL DISCONNECTION /PTIONALLY
SINGLE POLE !2 IS POSSIBLE AFTER
TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH
CONNECTION
2!2 02/' 3).',%4(2%% 0/,E IE SIN
GLE PHASE FAULT OR TWO PHASE
WITHOUT EARTH RESULT IN SINGLE PO
LE !2 MULTI PHASE FAULTS IN
THREE POLE !2
)F MORE THAN ONE RECLOSE ATTEMPT WILL BE CARRIED OUT
THE SECOND AND ANY FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE ARE
DESIGNATED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED
AUTO RECLOSURE INDEPENDENT ON THE SETTING OF THE
DEAD TIMES OF THE CYCLES )T IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE
2!2 CYCLE SO THAT ONLY $!2 CYCLES OCCUR $!2
CYCLES ARE ALWAYS THREE POLE &OR THE $!2 FUNC
TION THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMS ARE SELECTABLE
$!2 02/' ./ $!2 IE NO $!2 OCCURS UN
SUCCESSFUL 2!2 RESULTS IN FINAL TRIP
$!2 02/' $!2 7)4(/54 2!2 IE $!2 CY
CLES CAN BE CARRIED OUT EVEN WI
THOUT A PRECEDING 2!2 CYCLE EG
2!2 IS BY PASSED BECAUSE BLOK
KED
$!2 02/' $!2 !&4%2 2!2 IE THE $!2 CY
CLES CAN ONLY BE INITIATED AFTER AN
UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
4HE POSSIBILITIES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE INTERNAL !2
UNIT ARE DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS 0REREQ
UISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS ALWAYS THAT
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR OPERATION WHEN THE
!2 FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED 4HIS INFORMATION HAS TO BE
TRANSMITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A BINARY INPUT
&URTHERMORE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED IF THE TRIPPING
COMMAND OCCURS AFTER THE ACTION TIME WHICH CAN BE
SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR 2!2 AND $!2 !DDITIONALLY THE
AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION IS NOT READY WHEN AT THE
MOMENT OF INITIATION THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS AN
NOUNCED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO BE OPEN 4HIS PRE
VENTS FROM AN ACCIDENTAL CLOSE COMMAND SHOULD
THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION RECEIVE AN ERRONEOUS
TRIP COMMAND FOR ANY REASON EG VIA A BINARY IN
PUT EVEN THOUGH THE BREAKER IS OPEN AND THE LINE
MAY BE DEAD

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
)
!
,
#
%
2
%
3
/
,
#
E
M
IT
IM
A
L
C
E
2
E
M
IT
D
A
E
D
D
N

R
E
H
TR
U
F
,
/
0

D 4
N 2
A
!
$

4
#
!
4
2
!
$
E
M
IT
D
A
E
D
T
S

,
/
0

,
/
0

4
2
!
2
E
L
O
P
4
2
!
2
E
L
O
P
,
/
0

2
#
3
)
$
4

4
#
!
4
2
!
2

C
TE
E
D
LT
U
A
&
&IGURE

P
RI
4
E
S
O
L
C
E
2
E
M
IT
N
IO
T
C
!
E
M
IT
N
IO
T
A
N
I
M
IR
C
IS
$
4
2
!
2
,
/
0

4
2
!
2
O
T
R
E
V
O
G
IN
H
C
TI
W
3
D
TE
IT
M
R
E
P
2
!
E
L
O
P

IF
E
M
IT
IM
A
L
C
E
2
3! $IAGRAM OF RECLOSURE SEQUENCE
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
3ELECTIVITY DURING AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

&OR THE AUTO RECLOSURE SEQUENCE TO BE SUCCESSFUL
FAULTS ON ANY PART OF THE LINE MUST BE CLEARED FROM
SHORTEST POSSI
BOTH LINE ENDS WITHIN THE SAME
TIME 5SUALLY THEREFORE AN INSTANTANEOUS
BLE
STAGE OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS SET TO OPERATE
BEFORE A RECLOSURE BY THE !2 UNIT 4HEREFORE THE
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTION OF 3! WHICH
CAN INITIATE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS PROVIDE A
SPECIAL 2!2 STAGE &URTHERMORE ONE CAN DECIDE FOR
EACH SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION WHETHER OR NOT IT SHALL
INITIATE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS OPERATED WITH ONE OF THE

CARRIER SIGNAL TELEPROTECTION SYSTEMS DESCRIBED IN
3ECTION THE OVERREACH ZONE IS CONTROLLED BY THE
UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IE THE INTERFACE
DETERMINES IF AN UNDELAYED TRIP OR WITH 4" IS PER
MITTED FOR FAULTS IN THE OVERREACH ZONE IE TO THE LIMIT
OF ZONE :" AND THUS IF TRIPPING IS SIMULTANEOUS AT
BOTH LINE ENDS 7HETHER THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR
OPERATION OR NOT IS IRRELEVANT IN THIS CASE SINCE THE
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM GUARANTEES SELECTIVITY OVER
OF THE LINE LENGTH AND FAST SIMULTANEOUS DISCON
NECTION 3IMILAR APPLIES FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
EARTH FAULT PROTECTION REFER 3ECTION
7ITH DISTANCE PROTECTION THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IN THE

FOLLOWING CALLED 2!2 ALLOWS FAULTS IN THE OVERREACH
ZONE :" TO BE CLEARED INSTANTANEOUSLY HOWEVER
THIS CAN BE CHANGED WHEN SETTING THE RELAY &OR POS
SIBLE FURTHER CYCLES IN THE FOLLOWING CALLED $!2 A
SEPARATE ZONE :, WITH A SEPARATE TIME STAGE 4,
BECOMES EFFECTIVE
(OWEVER IF THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION IS SWITCHED

OFF OR IF THE CARRIER DEVICE IS FAULTY THEN THE !2 FUNC
TION DETERMINES WHICH STAGE : OR :" IS DECISIVE
FOR FAST TRIPPING )F NO AUTO RECLOSURE IS AVAILABLE FOR
EXAMPLE CIRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR OPERATION
THEN THE NORMAL GRADING OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
MUST BE VALID IE INSTANTANEOUS TRIPPING ONLY FOR
FAULTS WITHIN STAGE : IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN SELECTIVITY
&IGURE
4HE NORMAL DISTANCE ZONES : : : AND THE DIREC

TIONAL AND NON DIRECTIONAL END STAGES OF THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION ARE INDEPENDENT OF THE AUTOMATIC
RECLOSE FUNCTION 4HIS MUST BE CONSIDERED WHEN A
FAULT SHALL BE CLEARED AFTER A TIME DELAY FOR SELECTIVITY
REASONS WHEN NO AUTO RECLOSE WILL OCCUR 4HUS IT IS
NOT REASONABLE TO SET A SHORTER TIME DELAY FOR NORMAL
DISTANCE ZONES THAN FOR THE 2!2 OVERREACH ZONE
:"
)T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO BLOCK THE !2 FUNCTION IF THE

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM IS NOT WORKING
:
:
:"
:ONE REACH UNTIL THE END OF THE FIRST DEAD TIME :" RELEASE
:
:
:"
:ONE REACH AFTER THE FIRST DEAD TIME UNTIL EXPIRY OF RECLAIM TIME :" BLOCKED
&IGURE
:ONE REACH CONTROL WITH THE !2 FUNCTION
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
!DDITIONALLY DIFFERENT DEAD TIMES CAN BE SET AT BOTH
LINE ENDS SO THAT ONE END EG AT THE LOCATION ) IS
RECLOSED AT FIRST )F RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUCCESSFUL
THEN THE HEALTHY VOLTAGE IS PRESENT ALSO AT THE OTHER
LINE END )) SO THAT THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS VERY
SMALL THIS LINE END CAN BE RECLOSED WITH A SLIGHTLY
HIGHER DEAD TIME )F THE FAULT HAS REMAINED UN
SUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE IT CAN BE INSTANTA
NEOUSLY CLEARED AT LINE END ) AT LINE END )) A SIGNIFI
CANT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE REMAINS BECAUSE ONE
SINGLE POLE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS OPEN RECLOSURE IS
BLOCKED 4HE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLES WHICH ARE STILL
CLOSED CAN BE TRIPPED BY THE POLE DISCREPANCY PRO
TECTION OR BY 3! ITSELF 4HIS METHOD BY THE WAY
SAVES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT LOCATION )) BECAUSE THIS
#" NEED NOT SWITCH ONTO THE FAULT AGAIN
3! PROVIDES A SELECTION PROCEDURE WHICH CAN

IMPROVE SELECTIVITY DURING SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLO
SURE IN THOSE CASES WHERE NO TELEPROTECTION MODE IS
AVAILABLE OR USED 5 PROCESSING PARAMETER
! PREREQUISITE IS THAT THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE IN
STALLED AT THE LINE SIDE AS SEEN FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAK
ER
7HEN A SHORT CIRCUIT OCCURS NEAR ONE END OF THE
LINE EVEN THE NEIGHBOURING LINES ARE TRIPPED AT FIRST
BECAUSE THEY RECOGNIZE THE FAULT IN THEIR OVERREACH
ING ZONE :" REFER &IGURE )F THE NETWORK IS IN
TERCONNECTED AND THE BUS BAR " IS FITTED WITH AT
LEAST ONE EARTHED TRANSFORMER WITH A DELTA WINDING
THE VOLTAGES WILL BE SYMMETRIZED THERE 4HUS DIS
TINCTION CAN BE MADE BETWEEN THE FAULTED LINE AND
THE UNFAULTED LINES AFTER DISCONNECTION AT THE LOCA
TIONS ) )) AND )))
4HE SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNC

TIONS AT BOTH LINE ENDS DETERMINE AT WHICH LINE END
THE BREAKER IS RECLOSED WITH NORMAL DEAD TIME WITH
OUT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE CHECK AND AT WHICH LINE
END THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS MEASURED TO DE
CIDE WHETHER RECLOSURE TAKES PLACE WITH A SLIGHTLY
HIGHER DEAD TIME OR NOT
3INCE LINE " # IS INTERRUPTED AT ONE END ONLY A RE

VERSE VOLTAGE APPEARS FROM THE NON INTERRUPTED
LINE END 4HUS THE INTERRUPTED PHASE CARRIES VOLTAGE
AGAIN 4HEREFORE THE ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE MEA
SURED AT THE RELAY LOCATION ))) IS VERY SMALL )F THE RELAY
AT THIS LOCATION RECOGNIZES THIS IT CAN RECLOSE IMME
DIATELY OR WITH ONLY A SMALL DEAD TIME WHICH MAY
COVER THE MEASURING TIME 4HE HEALTHY LINES ARE IN
OPERATION VERY SOON BY THIS PROCEDURE
)F A LINE TO BE PROTECTED IS COMPOSED OF OVERHEAD LINE

AND CABLE SECTIONS THE CONTROLLED ZONES :" AND
:, CAN BE USED TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN FAULTS ON THE
THE OVERHEAD SECTION AND CABLE FAULTS TO A CERTAIN
DEGREE 2ECLOSURE CAN BE BLOCKED FOR CABLE FAULTS
USING SETTING PARAMETERS REFER TO 3ECTION
)F FOR EXAMPLE A CABLE SECTION IS FOLLOWED BY AN
OVERHEAD LINE SECTION REFER TO &IGURE ZONE
:" IS SET TO COVER THE CABLE SECTION AND RECLOSURE
IS BLOCKED FOR FAULTS WITHIN :" BUT RELEASED FOR FAULTS
OUT OF :" #ONVERSELY THE OTHER LINE END IS SET SUCH
THAT FAULTS WITHIN ZONE :" WHICH NEARLY COVERS THE
OVERHEAD LINE SECTION ARE CLEARED WITH AUTO RECLO
SURE WHEREAS RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED FOR FAULT OUT OF
ZONE :" )F FURTHER SEGREGATION IS NECESSARY EG
OVERHEAD LINE
CABLE DISTINCTION CAN BE
CABLE
MADE BY A FURTHER ZONE :, IN SIMILAR WAY
,INE ! " HAS BEEN INTERRUPTED AT BOTH ENDS 4HUS A

SIGNIFICANT ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT WHICH
IDENTIFIES AT BOTH LINE ENDS THIS LINE AS THE FAULTY LINE
4HE NORMAL DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLO
SURE BECOMES VALID
&URTHERMORE 3! PRESENTS THE POSSIBILITY TO TRIP
A REMAINING FAULT INSTANTANEOUSLY OVER LINE
LENGTH EVEN AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE !S
LINE ! " HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AS THE FAULTED LINE BY
THE METHOD PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED THE OVERREACH
ZONE CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE EVEN AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL
AUTO RECLOSURE SO THAT A PERSISTENT FAULT CAN BE
CLEARED IMMEDIATELY EVEN AT LINE END )
:
!
)
&IGURE

:"
! " #
BUS
) )) )))
2ELAY LOCATIONS
TRIPPED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
"
))
:"
#
)))
BARS
%XAMPLE FOR THE 5 PROCEDURE

# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
:
:"
:"
:
!CTION TIMES AND RECLAIM TIMES

"
3UBSTATION !

UP TO :" AUTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED

OUT OF :" AUTO RECLOSURE PERMITTED
3UBSTATION "

UP TO :" AUTO RECLOSURE PERMITTED

OUT OF :" AUTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED
OVERHEAD LINE SECTION
CABLE SECTION
&IGURE
,INE WITH OVERHEAD AND CABLE SEC

TION
&OR OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION EMERGENCY MODE

STAGE ) OPERATES UNDELAYED AS 2!2 STAGE "E
FORE ANY RECONNECTION IE WHEN THE 2!2 FUNCTION
IS READY FOR OPERATION DISCONNECTION IS EFFECTED WITH
) !FTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPT
OR WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS NOT READY FOR OPERATION
STAGE ) IS BLOCKED )N ORDER TO MAINTAIN SELECTIV
ITY DISCONNECTION THEN IS EFFECTED WITH ) AFTER EXPIRY
OF THE DELAY TIME 4) 7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS
BLOCKED OR SWITCHED OFF ) IS ALSO BLOCKED 4HIS
CAN BE CHANGED IN THAT THE ) STAGE IS EFFECTIVE AL
WAYS INDEPENDENT OF THE 2!2
!LL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WHICH CAN OPERATE DIRECTION
AL CAN BLOCK RECLOSURE IN CASE THE FAULT LIES IN REVERSE
DIRECTION 4HIS APPLIES ALSO IF A TRIP COMMAND IS GIVEN
FOR A REVERSE FAULT BEFORE THE ACTION TIME HAS
ELAPSED
)T IS OFTEN APPROPRIATE TO PREVENT READINESS FOR RECLO

SURE WHEN THE FAULT HAS PERSISTED FOR A SPECIFIED
TIME FOR EXAMPLE WHEN IT CAN BE ASSUMED THAT THE
ARC HAS BURNT ITSELF IN TO SUCH AN EXTENT THAT THERE IS
NO CHANCE OF NATURAL QUENCHING DURING THE DEAD
TIME
4RIPPING AFTER FAULTS WHICH ARE CLEARED IN A DELAYED
TIME SHOULD FOR REASONS OF SELECTIVITY ALSO NOT RESULT
IN AN AUTO RECLOSURE
4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE PROVIDED WITH SET
TABLE ACTION TIMES SEPARATE FOR 2!2 AND $!2 WHICH
ARE STARTED BY THE FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL )F AFTER EXPI
RY OF THE ACTION TIME NO TRIPPING SIGNAL HAS BEEN GIV
EN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
4HE !2 FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE PROVIDED WITH
THREE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIMES WHICH DO NOT DISCRIMI
NATE BETWEEN 2!2 AND $!2 'ENERALLY THE RECLAIM
TIME IS THE TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH NO FURTHER RECLO
SURE ATTEMPT IS PERMITTED
4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- IS STARTED AT EVERY RE
CLOSE COMMAND )F AUTO RECLOSURE HAS BEEN SUC
CESSFUL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION
AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 2%#,!)- ANY FAULT OCCURRING AFTER
THE EXPIRY OF THE RECLAIM TIME IS CONSIDERED TO BE A
NEW SYSTEM FAULT 7HEN A RENEWED TRIP COMMAND IS
GIVEN WITHIN THIS RECLAIM TIME THE NEXT AUTO RECLOSE
CYCLE IS STARTED IF MULTI SHOT !2 IS PERMITTED IF NO
FURTHER !2 CYCLE IS PERMITTED A RENEWED TRIP COM
MAND WITHIN THE RECLAIM TIME IS FINAL !2 HAS BEEN
UNSUCCESSFUL
4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ IS THE TIME PERIOD DUR
ING WHICH ANY FURTHER CLOSE COMMAND BY THE
3! RELAY IS BLOCKED AFTER FINAL DISCONNECTION
4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL CLOSING ATTEMPTS WHICH ARE PER
FORMED BY THE RELAY )F THIS TIME IS SET TO 0 CLOSING IS
LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION IS RESET BY ENERGIZA
TION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET !FTER THE RESET
SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION
! SPECIAL RECLAIM TIME 4 ",/#+ -# IS PROVIDED FOR
MANUAL CLOSING $URING THIS TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSE
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED ANY TRIP COMMAND WILL BE A
THREE POLE FINAL TRIP
# ' #

3!6
)NTERROGATION FOR READINESS OF
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
! PRE CONDITION FOR A RECLOSE ATTEMPT AFTER SHORT
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION IS THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY
FOR AT LEAST ONE 42)0 #,/3% 42)0 CYCLE WHEN
THE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED IE AT THE INSTANT OF TRIP
COMMAND 4HE READINESS INFORMATION FROM THE
BREAKER HAS TO BE TRANSMITTED TO THE DEVICE VIA A
BINARY INPUT )N CASE THAT SUCH READINESS INFORMATION
IS NOT AVAILABLE INTERROGATION CAN BE SUPPRESSED
SINCE OTHERWISE NO AUTO RECLOSE WOULD BE POSSIBLE
AT ALL
7HEN SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERFORMED IT IS
SUFFICIENT TO INTERROGATE THE BREAKER READINESS ONE
SINGLE TIME BEFORE INITIATION OF !2 !S FOR EXAMPLE
THE AIR PRESSURE FOR BREAKER OPERATION WILL COLLAPSE
DURING THE TRIP EXECUTION NO FURTHER INTERROGATION
SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT
7HEN MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED IT IS AD
VANTAGEOUS TO INTERROGATE BREAKER READINESS NOT
ONLY AT THE INSTANT OF THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND BUT ALSO
BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE ATTEMPT OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER
RECLOSE ATTEMPT )F THIS FACILITY IS SELECTED RECLOSURE
IS BLOCKED AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT READY
FOR ANOTHER 42)0 #,/3% SEQUENCE
4HE RECOVERY TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN BE SU
PERVISED BY THE 3! RELAY 4HIS SUPERVISION TIME
4 #" 3506 WILL RUN AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
DOES NOT INFORM ABOUT READINESS )N THIS CASE THE
DEAD TIME MAY BE EXTENDED WHEN THE BREAKER IS NOT
READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SET DEAD TIME "UT IF THE
BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER EXPIRY OF THE SUPERVI
SION TIME THEN RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED 4HIS BLOCKING IS
CANCELED ONLY AFTER THE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ RE
FER 3ECTION HAS ELAPSED )F 4 ,/#+ IS SET TO
0 CLOSING IS LOCKED OUT UNTIL THE !2 FUNCTION IS RESET
BY ENERGIZATION OF THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET !F
TER THE RESET SIGNAL ALL FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIES
CENT CONDITION

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR OPERATION THE
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS THREE POLE FOR ALL
FAULTS WITHIN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 EG THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION IN ZONE :" 4HE !2 FUNCTION IS
INITIATED PROVIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION
TIME REFER 3ECTION 7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE
SETTABLE DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR
THREE POLE 2!2 !FTER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RE
CEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS
SETTABLE 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME
4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION IS STARTED
)F THE FAULT IS CLEARED SUCCESSFUL 2!2 THE RECLAIM
TIME 4 2%#,!)- 3ECTION EXPIRES AND ALL
FUNCTIONS RESET TO THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NET
WORK FAULT IS CLEARED
)F THE FAULT HAS NOT BEEN CLEARED UNSUCCESSFUL !2
THEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL
DISCONNECTION IN THE STAGE THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2
WHEN THE UNIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE IS IN OP
ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION THEN :" CAN RE
MAIN EFFECTIVE FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION
!LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RECLAIM TIME WILL RE
SULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION
!FTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 FINAL DISCONNECTION THE
LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ 3ECTION IS STARTED
&OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE COMMAND FROM 3! IS
LOCKED
4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
SHOT 2!2 7ITH 3! MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
TO $!2 SHOTS REFER 3ECTION ARE ALSO POS
SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER 3ECTION
# ' #
3!6
3INGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE

7HEN ONLY SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS CARRIED
OUT AND THE 2!2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR RECLOSE THE
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE IF A SING
LE PHASE FAULT IS DETECTED IN THE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2
&OR DISTANCE PROTECTION EG ZONE :" IS EFFECTIVE
ONLY FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS 4HE RELAY CAN ALSO BE
SET TO TRIP SINGLE POLE IN CASE OF TWO PHASE FAULTS
WITHOUT EARTH CONNECTION
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
3INGLE AND THREE POLE AUTO

RECLOSURE
7HEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS READY FOR OPERATION THE
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS SINGLE POLE FOR
SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND THREE POLE FOR MULTI
PHASE FAULTS 4HE RELAY CAN ALSO BE SET TO TRIP SINGLE
POLE IN CASE OF TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH CON
NECTION 4HE STAGE VALID FOR 2!2 EG THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION ZONE :" IS VALID FOR ALL TYPES OF FAULT
!FTER OCCURRENCES OF MULTI PHASE FAULTS THE SHORT

CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS FINALLY THREE POLE AFTER THE
TIME THAT IS VALID WITHOUT 2!2 &OR DISTANCE PROTEC
TION EG ZONE : IS DECISIVE NOT :" WHEN THE UNI
VERSAL TELEPROTECTION IS IN OPERATION ZONE :" CAN
SEE 3ECTION %VERY THREE
REMAIN EFFECTIVE
POLE TRIP IS A FINAL TRIP 4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+
3ECTION IS STARTED &OR THIS TIME ANY CLOSE
COMMAND FROM 3! IS LOCKED
4HE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED PROVIDED TRIPPING OC

CURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME REFER 3ECTION
7ITH FAULT CLEARANCE THE SETTABLE DEAD TIME
2!2 4 0/, COMMENCES FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 OR
THE SEPARATELY SETTABLE DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, FOR
THREE POLE 2!2 !FTER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RE
CEIVES A CLOSING COMMAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS
SETTABLE 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME
!FTER A SINGLE POLE TRIP THE !2 FUNCTION IS INITIATED

PROVIDED TRIPPING OCCURS WITHIN THE ACTION TIME 7ITH
THE CLEARANCE OF THE FAULT THE SETTABLE DEAD TIME
2!2 4 0/, FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 COMMENCES !F
TER THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER RECEIVES A CLOSING COM
MAND THE DURATION OF WHICH IS SETTABLE 3IMULTA
NEOUSLY THE SETTABLE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)3ECTION IS STARTED )F AUTO RECLOSURE IS
BLOCKED DURING THE DEAD TIME AFTER SINGLE POLE TRIP
THEN THE BREAKER CAN BE TRIPPED THREE POLE IMMEDI
ATELY SELECTABLE


ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION OR
WHEN THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS OPERATIVE SEE
3ECTION THEN :" CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE FOR
DISTANCE PROTECTION !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RE
CLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION

ERATION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION SEE 3ECTION OR
WHEN THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS OPERATIVE SEE
3ECTION THEN :" CAN REMAIN EFFECTIVE FOR
DISTANCE PROTECTION !LSO EVERY FAULT DURING THE RE
CLAIM TIME WILL RESULT IN FINAL DISCONNECTION
LOCKED
4HE ABOVE SEQUENCE COMES INTO EFFECT WITH SINGLE
SHOT 2!2 7ITH 3! MULTIPLE !2 ATTEMPTS UP
TO $!2 SHOTS REFER 3ECTION ARE ALSO POS
SIBLE !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO SKIP THE 2!2 CYCLE
BY A SIGNAL VIA A BINARY INPUT OF THE DEVICE )N THIS
CASE ONLY $!2 IS EFFECTIVE REFER 3ECTION

LOCKED
)N THIS MODE ONLY SINGLE SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS
POSSIBLE
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS
-ULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
7HEN SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE

AND THREE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURES ARE CARRIED OUT IN THE NETWORK SPE
CIAL ATTENTION HAS TO BE DIRECTED TO EVOLVING FAULTS
%VOLVING FAULTS ARE THOSE WHICH AFTER CLEARANCE OF
THE FIRST DETECTED FAULT OCCUR DURING THE DEAD TIME
4HE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FEATURE IN 3! WILL

ALSO PERMIT MULTI SHOT RECLOSURE UP TO CONSECU
TIVE $!2 CYCLES 4HE SECOND AND EACH FURTHER
CYCLE ARE ALWAYS THREE POLE !N INDIVIDUAL ZONE :,
WITH DELAY TIME 4, IS AVAILABLE FOR THE DISTANCE PRO
TECTION !LSO THE ACTION TIME AND SEVERAL DEAD TIMES
CAN BE INDEPENDENTLY SET FOR THESE $!2 CYCLES
3! ALLOWS SEVERAL POSSIBILITIES FOR THE TREATMENT

OF EVOLVING FAULTS DEPENDENT UPON THE REQUIREMENTS
OF THE NETWORK
4HE CRITERION FOR RECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS CAN BE
SELECTED TO BE EITHER 42)0 #/--!.$ IN ANOTHER
PHASE DURING THE DEAD TIME OR ANY FURTHER &!5,4 $%
4%#4)/.
4HE REACTION OF THE !2 FUNCTION TO A RECOGNIZED
EVOLVING FAULT CAN ALSO BE SELECTED
A ./ SPECIAL REACTION TO EVOLVING FAULTS
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED
THE UNIT SWITCHES TO THE THREE POLE AUTO RECLO
SURE CYCLE ! THREE POLE TRIP OCCURS )F THREE
POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS PERMITTED THEN THE DEAD
TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE BEGINS SI
MULTANEOUSLY WITH THE INTERRUPTION OF THE EVOLVING
FAULT 7HEN THE DEAD TIME HAS EXPIRED THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER RECEIVES THE COMMAND TO CLOSE 4HE FUR
THER SEQUENCE IS THE SAME AS FOR SINGLE AND
THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
4HE TOTAL DEAD TIME IN THIS CASE CONSISTS OF THE
DEAD TIME FOR THE SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
WHICH HAS EXPIRED WHEN THE EVOLVING FAULT IS INTER
RUPTED PLUS THE DEAD TIME FOR THE THREE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURE 4HIS IS USEFUL BECAUSE ONLY THE
DEAD TIME FOR THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS OF IM
PORTANCE FOR THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK
B "LOCKING OF RECLOSURE AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS !,
7!93
!S SOON AS AN EVOLVING FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED 4HE TRIP IS THREE POLE AND
OCCURS REGARDLESS WHETHER THREE POLE !2 IS PER
MITTED OR NOT
C "LOCKING AFTER EVOLVING FAULTS AFTER AN ADJUSTABLE
DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)-
4HE DISCRIMINATION TIME STARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY
WITH THE DEAD TIME )T IS USED TO DISCRIMINATE FROM
WHICH POINT IN TIME AN EVOLVING FAULT IS IDENTIFIED AS
SUCH )F THE EVOLVING FAULT OCCURS BEFORE THE EXPIRY
OF THE DISCRIMINATION TIME A THREE POLE TRIP IS CAR
RIED OUT AND THE DEVICE IS SWITCHED TO A THREE
POLE !2 CYCLE IF PERMITTED AS UNDER A )F HOW
EVER THE EVOLVING FAULT OCCURS AFTER THE DISCRIMINA
TION TIME HAS EXPIRED A THREE POLE TRIP IS CARRIED
OUT AND RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED AS UNDER B

$IFFERENT NUMBERS OF $!2 CYCLES CAN BE SET FOR SING

LE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI PHASE FAULT TRIPPING
COMMAND IS NEVERTHELESS ALWAYS THREE POLE 4HE
SET NUMBER OF $!2 CYCLES DOES NOT INCLUDE THE FIRST
2!2 CYCLE
$EAD TIMES CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SET FOR THE FIRST THREE
!2 CYCLES FURTHER CYCLES OPERATE WITH THE DEAD TIME
OF THE THIRD CYCLE )N THIS CASE ALL !2 CYCLES ARE DECI
SIVE IE ALSO THE 2!2 CYCLE 4HE 2!2 CYCLE OPERATES
WITH ITS DEAD TIME 2!2 4 0/, FOR SINGLE OR 2!2
4 0/, FOR THREE POLE 2!2 THE FIRST $!2 IS THE
SECOND CYCLE WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE SECOND
CYCLE $!2 40/, ETC )F NO 2!2 CYCLE HAS OC
CURRED EG 2!2 BLOCKED THEN THE FIRST $!2 CYCLE
OPERATES WITH THE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST CYCLE $!2
40/, ETC
%ACH NEW PICK UP RESTARTS THE ACTION TIME
$!2 4 !#4 WITHIN WHICH A TRIPPING COMMAND MUST
OCCUR !FTER FAULT CLEARANCE THE DEAD TIME BEGINS !T
THE END OF THIS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS GIVEN A NEW
CLOSING COMMAND 3IMULTANEOUSLY THE RECLAIM TIME
!S LONG AS THE PERMITTED NUMBER OF CYCLES HAS NOT
BEEN REACHED THE RECLAIM TIME IS RESET BY EACH NEW
PICK UP AND RECOMMENCES WITH THE NEXT CLOSING
COMMAND
)F ONE OF THE CYCLES IS SUCCESSFUL THAT IS AFTER RECLOSE
THE FAULT IS NO LONGER PRESENT THE RECLAIM TIME 4
2%#,!)- EQUALLY RUNS OUT AND ALL FUNCTIONS RETURN TO
THE QUIESCENT CONDITION 4HE NETWORK FAULT IS
CLEARED
)F NONE OF THE !2 CYCLES HAS BEEN SUCCESSFUL THEN
THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION CARRIES OUT A FINAL DIS
CONNECTION AFTER THE LAST PERMISSIBLE CYCLE 4HE
LOCKED
4HE SUBSEQUENT CYCLES $!2 CAN BE BLOCKED BY A
BINARY INPUT INDEPENDENTLY OF THE FUNCTION OF THE
2!2 CYCLE
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
#ONNECTION OF EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM

3! CAN OPERATE IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERNAL
AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM 4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION
CANNOT THEN BE ALLOWED TO OPERATE IT MUST BE PRO
GRAMMED TO BE INEFFECTIVE DE CONFIGURED SEE
3ECTION
PROTECTION
SHORT CIRCUIT
FUNCTIONS OF 3! ARE RE
LEASED BY BINARY INPUT
ONLY WHEN A SINGLE PHASE
FAULT IS DETECTED WHEN A
MULTI PHASE FAULT IS DE
TECTED THE 2!2 STAGES ARE
NOT RELEASED BUT THE NORMAL
GRADING STAGES ARE EFFECTIVE
ONLY
3IGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL

AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE MUST BE MADE VIA THE BINARY IN
PUTS AND OUTPUTS OF THE RELAY 4HE FOLLOWING LIST MAY
BE REGARDED AS A RECOMMENDATION
P 4RIP 0ERM 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE PER

MITS SINGLE POLE TRIPPING
IE IS READY FOR RECLOSURE AF
TER SINGLE POLE TRIP 4HIS
FUNCTION IS THE LOGICAL INVER
SION OF THREE POLE COUPLING
)F THIS BINARY INPUT IS NOT ALLO
CATED THEN ONLY THREE POLE
TRIPPING CAN OCCUR
"INARY INPUTS
2!2 2ELEASE 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE RE
LEASES THE 2!2 STAGES OF ALL
PROTECTION
SHORT CIRCUIT
FUNCTIONS WITHIN 3!
WHICH SHALL OPERATE WITH !2
EG ZONE :" OF THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION VIA THIS
BINARY INPUT
/NLY POLE
$!2 2ELEASE 4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE CON

TROLS THE $!2 STAGE :, OF
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION ONLY
RELEVANT WHEN MULTI SHOT
AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED
4HE EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE IS

PROGRAMMED TO RECLOSE ONLY
IN CASE OF SINGLE POLE TRIP
PING 4HE 2!2 STAGES OF THE
3!
EXTERNAL
!2 DEVICE
&AULT DETECTION
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
,
2!2 2ELEASE
POLE COUPLING
,
POLE ONLY
,
P
POLE
POLE COUPLING CAN BE

INVERTED IN 3!
&IGURE
P
3ELECTION
3WITCH
%XAMPLE OF CONNECTIONS WITH EXTERNAL !2 SYSTEM
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
"INARY OUTPUTS
$EVICE&LT$ET 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE
DEVICE
4HREE POLE TRIP COMMAND
OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P, 3INGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND
, OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P
$EV4RIP P

OF THE DEVICE
, OF THE DEVICE
$EV4RIP P

OF THE DEVICE
, OF THE DEVICE
)N ORDER TO ACHIEVE A PHASE SEGREGATED TRIP SIGNAL

THE SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND FOR EACH POLE AND THE
THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND MUST BE COMBINED TO THE
PHASE TRIP SIGNAL
$EPENDENT OF THE FEATURES OF THE EXTERNAL AUTO RE
CLOSE DEVICE IT IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO COMBINE THE THREE
SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMANDS &.O TO
A SIGNAL SINGLE POLE TRIP THE THREE POLE TRIP COM
MAND &.O GIVES THE SIGNAL THREE POLE TRIP
&OR THREE POLE !2 THE GENERAL FAULT DETECTION AND
TRIPPING SIGNALS ARE NORMALLY SUFFICIENT
&IGURE SHOWS A CONNECTION EXAMPLE FOR THE IN
TERCONNECTION BETWEEN 3! AND AN EXTERNAL
!2 SYSTEM USING A PROGRAM SELECTOR SWITCH
#ONTROL OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION BY AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
)F 3! IS FITTED WITH AN INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION THIS
CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM AN EXTERNAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE
4HIS IS APPLICABLE FOR EXAMPLE FOR LINE ENDS WITH DU
PLICATED PROTECTION OR ADDITIONAL BACK UP PROTEC
TION WHEN A SECOND PROTECTIVE DEVICE IS USED FOR THE
SAME LINE END AND SHALL OPERATE WITH THE !2 FUNC
TION INCORPORATED IN 3!
3IGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN 3! AND THE EXTERNAL
AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE MUST BE MADE VIA THE BINARY IN
PUTS AND OUTPUTS OF THE RELAY 4HE FOLLOWING LIST MAY
BE REGARDED AS A RECOMMENDATION
4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION CAN BE STARTED FOR EXAM
PLE VIA THE BINARY INPUTS
3TART !2
'ENERAL START SIGNAL FOR !2
4RIP , !2
4RIPPING COMMAND , FOR

!2
4RIP , !2

!2
4RIP , !2

!2
4HE GENERAL START SIGNAL IS THE CRITERION FOR THE START OF

THE ACTION TIMES !T THE ISSUE OF THE TRIPPING COM
MAND IT IS DECIDED WHETHER THE DEAD TIME FOR
SINGLE POLE !2 OR THREE POLE !2 WILL BE EFFECTED OR
IF FOR THREE POLE TRIPPING RECLOSURE WILL BE BLOCKED
DEPENDENT UPON THE SET !2 PROGRAM ! POSSIBILITY

FOR THREE POLE COUPLING SHOULD BE AVAILABLE EXTER

NALLY )F ONLY THREE POLE !2 IS TO BE CARRIED OUT ALL
THREE BINARY INPUT FOR THE TRIPPING SIGNALS MUST BE AL
LOCATED TO A PHYSICAL BINARY INPUT MODULE
4O COUPLE THE EXTERNAL RELAY THREE POLE AND TO RE
LEASE ITS OVERREACH ZONE THE FOLLOWING OUTPUT FUNC
TIONS ARE SUITABLE
P 4RIP 0ERM INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR
SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE LOG
ICAL INVERSION OF THREE POLE
COUPLING
2!2 :ONE 2EL INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR AN
2!2 CYCLE IE RELEASES
2!2 ZONE FOR THE EXTERNAL
PROTECTION RELAY
$!2 :ONE 2EL INTERNAL !2 IS READY FOR A
$!2 CYCLE IE RELEASES
$!2 ZONE FOR THE EXTERNAL
PROTECTION RELAY
2!2 P 0ROG
INTERNAL 2!2 PROGRAMMED

TO SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE
ONLY IE WILL RECLOSE ONLY AF
TER SINGLE POLE TRIP
$EPENDING ON THE ACTUAL PHILOSOPHY AND THE USED

FUNCTIONS OF THE AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION ONE OR THE
OTHER BINARY OUTPUT MAY BE OMITTED &OR EXAMPLE
THE 2!2 :ONE 2EL OUTPUT &.O IS SUFFI
CIENT WHEN ONLY THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4WO PROTECTION RELAYS WITH TWO !2 DEVICES

)F A FEEDER IS EQUIPPED WITH DUPLICATED PROTECTION
AND EACH PROTECTION RELAY SHOULD CONTROL ITS OWN AU
TO RECLOSE DEVICE CERTAIN EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION
IS NECESSARY BETWEEN THE TWO COMBINATIONS 4HIS IS
SHOWN AS AN EXAMPLE IN &IGURE 4HREE POLE
COUPLING SHOULD BE ARRANGED WITH AN EXTERNAL COU

PLING UNIT WHICH INTERACTS DIRECTLY WITH THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER TRIP CIRCUITS 4HIS ENSURES THREE POLE TRIP
PING UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES OF MULTI POLE FAULTS
3ECOND RELAY
3!
INTERNAL
!2 FUNCTION
ND !2
!2 BLOCKDYN
")
!2 BLOCK
")
3TART !2
")
DEVICE
!2 BLOCK INT
!2 BLOCKED
")
3TART !2
")
4RIP , !2
4RIP , FOR !2
")
")
4RIP , !2
4RIP , FOR !2
")
")
4RIP , !2
4RIP , FOR !2
")
,
,INE PROTECTION
RELAY
'EN &AULT
4RIP ,
,
#
")
3
#
ND PROTECTION
FUNCTION
'EN &AULT
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P
"INARY INPUT
3IGNALLING OUTPUT
4RIP COMMAND
FOR ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
WHICH OPERATE WITH !2
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
4RIP ,
POLE
COUPLING
, , ,
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER
&IGURE
#ONNECTION EXAMPLE FOR PROTECTION RELAYS WITH AUTO RECLOSURE DEVICES
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION WILL EN

SURE WHEN SWITCHING A LINE CIRCUIT ONTO A BUS BAR
THAT THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK WILL NOT BE ENDAN
GERED 4HE FUNCTION CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM
THE SYNCHRO CHECK ONLY FOR AUTO RECLOSE ONLY FOR
MANUAL CLOSE OR FOR BOTH CASES $IFFERENT PERMIS
SION CRITERIA CAN ALSO BE PROGRAMMED FOR AUTOMATIC
CLOSE AND FOR MANUAL CLOSE
"US
BAR
&EEDER
5
#,/3%
0ROTECTION
$ISCREP
ANCY
CONTROL
SWITCH
!2
3YNC
5
&IGURE
3YNCHRO CHECK ON CLOSING
&OR COMPARISON OF THE TWO VOLTAGES THE SYNCHRO

CHECK ELEMENT USES THE FEEDER VOLTAGE 5 AND AN
ADDITIONALLY CONNECTED BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 4HE LAT
TER CAN BE ANY CONVENIENT PHASE EARTH OR PHASE
PHASE VOLTAGE FROM THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS
"US
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION OPERATES ONLY WHEN IT

IS REQUESTED TO DO SO 4HIS REQUEST CAN COME FROM
THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION FROM THE MANUAL
CLOSING COMMAND OR FROM AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
RELAY BY BINARY INPUT
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION GIVES PERMISSION FOR
PASSAGE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND PROVIDED THE FEED
ER IS CURRENT FREE ) ). )F NOT EITHER THE BREAK
ER IS NOT OPEN OR A FAULT IS SITUATED BETWEEN THE
BREAKER AND THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
BAR
5
3!
42)0
#,/3%
0ROTECTION
3YNC
5
&IGURE

4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IN 3! NORMALLY

OPERATES IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE INTEGRATED AUTO RE
CLOSE AND MANUAL CLOSE FUNCTIONS )T IS HOWEVER POS
SIBLE TO OPERATE WITH AN EXTERNAL PROTECTION RELAY
ANDOR WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE RELAY )N THIS
CASE THE SIGNAL EXCHANGE BETWEEN THE DEVICES
MUST BE PERFORMED THROUGH BINARY INPUTS AND OUT
PUTS
&URTHERMORE SYNCHRONOUS OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCH
ING IS POSSIBLE 3YNCHRONOUS SWITCHING MEANS THAT
THE CLOSING COMMAND IS GIVEN AS SOON AS THE CRITICAL
VALUES VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE 5 ANGLE DIF
FERENCE AND FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE F LIE WITHIN
THE SET TOLERANCES &OR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING THE
DEVICE CALCULATES THE CORRECT TIMING OF THE CLOSING
COMMAND FROM THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE AND THE FRE
QUENCY DIFFERENCE F SUCH THAT THE VOLTAGES AT THE
BUS BAR AND THE FEEDER CIRCUIT ARE EXACTLY THE SAME
AT THE INSTANT THAT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTACTS TOUCH
&OR THAT PURPOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME
MUST BE PROGRAMMED INTO THE RELAY &OR SYNCHRO
NOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING DIFFERENT FRE
QUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMITS CAN BE PROGRAMMED
3!
42)0
7HEN A POWER TRANSFORMER LIES BETWEEN THE FEEDER

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER &IGURE ITS VECTOR GROUP CAN BE
MATCHED AT THE 3! RELAY SO THAT NO EXTERNAL
MATCHING TRANSFORMERS ARE NECESSARY
3YNCHRO CHECK ACROSS TRANSFORMER
/PTIONALLY A CLOSING COMMAND CAN BE GIVEN BY THE

SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 4HIS CAN CONTROL THE CLOS
ING COIL OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER OR !2 CLOSING COM
MAND AND SYNCHRO CHECK CLOSING COMMAND CAN
BE CONNECTED IN SERIES
4HE PERMISSION TIME WINDOW IS LIMITED BY AN ADJUST
ABLE SYNCHRONOUS MONITORING TIME 7ITHIN THIS PERI
OD THE PROGRAMMED CONDITIONS MUST HAVE BEEN
MET OTHERWISE CLOSING PERMISSION WILL NOT BE GIVEN
! NEW SYNCHRO CHECK SEQUENCE REQUIRES A NEW RE
QUEST
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
/PERATING MODES
3WITCHING AT SYNCHRONISM
4HE CLOSING CHECK PROCEDURE CAN BE SELECTED FROM

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS
4O RELEASE A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING CONDI

TIONS ARE CHECKED
39.#(2 2ELEASE AT SYNCHRONISM 4HAT IS

WHEN THE CRITICAL VALUES 5 AND
F LIE WITHIN THE SET LIMITS
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE ABOVE THE SET VALUE 5
5 5 2ELEASE FOR ENERGIZED LINE 5

AND DE ENERGIZED BUS BAR 5
)S
THE
VOLTAGE
MAGNITUDE
DIFFERENCE
\\5\ \5\\ WITHIN THE PERMISSIBLE TOLER
ANCE 5
5 5 2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE

5 AND ENERGIZED BUS BAR
5
5 5 2ELEASE FOR DE ENERGIZED LINE
5 AND DE ENERGIZED BUS BAR
5
/6%22)$%
2ELEASE WITHOUT ANY CHECK
%ACH OF THESE CONDITIONS CAN BE SWITCHED TO EFFEC

TIVE OR NOT EFFECTIVE COMBINATIONS ARE ALSO POSSIBLE
EG RELEASE WHEN 5 5 OR 5 5 ARE SATIS
FIED #OMBINATION OF /6%22)$% WITH OTHER PARAME
TERS IS OF COURSE NOT MEANINGFUL
4HE RELEASE CONDITIONS CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR AU
TOMATIC AND FOR MANUAL CLOSING EG ONE CAN PERMIT
MANUAL CLOSING AT SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE WHILST
BEFORE AN AUTO RECLOSE AT ONE LINE END ONLY FREE
DOM FROM VOLTAGE AND AT THE OTHER ONLY SYNCHRONISM
WILL BE CHECKED
$EAD LINE OR DEAD BUS SWITCH

ING
&OR RELEASE OF THE CLOSING COMMAND TO ENERGIZE A
VOLT FREE LINE FROM THE BUS BAR THE FOLLOWING CONDI
TIONS ARE CHECKED
$OES THE VOLTAGE 5 LIE BELOW THE SET VALUE 5
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM
MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED
)S THE ANGLE DIFFERENCE \

MISSIBLE TOLERANCE
\ WITHIN THE PER
)S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F

PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCE F
F\ WITHIN THE
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE CLOSING COM

MAND IS RELEASED 4HE DURATION OF THE COMMAND CAN
BE ADJUSTED
!SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING

&OR RELEASE OF A CLOSING COMMAND THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS ARE CHECKED
)S THE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE
THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT 5
\\5\
\5\\ WITHIN
)S THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE \F F\ WITHIN THE

PERMISSIBLE DIFFERENCE F BUT LARGER THAN FSYNC
7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE SATISFIED THE DEVICE CALCU
LATES THE TIME TO THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM
FROM THE RATE OF CHANGE OF ANGLE AND FREQUENCY DIF
FERENCE 4HE CLOSING COMMAND IS THEN RELEASED AT
THE INSTANT THAT THE CLOSING TIME OF THE BREAKER
EQUALS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN INSTANT OF COMMAND
AND THE NEXT INSTANT OF SYNCHRONISM 4HE DURATION OF
THE COMMAND IS ADJUSTABLE
#ORRESPONDING CONDITIONS APPLY WHEN SWITCHING A

LIVE LINE ONTO A DEAD BUS BAR OR A DEAD LINE ONTO A
DEAD BUS BAR
# ' #

3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$ISTANCE TO FAULT MEASUREMENT BEFORE CLEARANCE

OF THE FAULT IS AN IMPORTANT ADDITION TO THE FUNCTION OF
A DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY !VAILABILITY OF THE LINE FOR
ENERGY TRANSMISSION IN THE NETWORK CAN BE IN
CREASED BY RAPID LOCATION OF POINT OF FAULT AND REPAIR
OF ANY RESULTANT DAMAGE
$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION IN DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY
3! IS A FUNCTION INDEPENDENT OF DISTANCE PRO
TECTION )T POSSESSES INDEPENDENT MEASURED VALUE
STORES AND ITS OWN FILTER ALGORITHMS $ISTANCE PROTEC
TION PROVIDES ONLY A START TO MEASURE COMMAND IN
ORDER TO DETERMINE THE VALID MEASUREMENT LOOP AND
THE MOST FAVOURABLE TIME INTERVAL FOR MEASURED VALUE
STORAGE
.ORMALLY THE FAULT LOCATION FUNCTION IS STARTED BY THE
TRIPPING COMMAND FROM THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
0AIRED VALUES OF SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE TAKEN AT INTERVALS OF OF A CYCLE AND
STORED IN A CIRCULATING BUFFER ARE FROZEN MS LATER
WHICH EVEN WITH EXTREMELY FAST CIRCUIT BREAKERS EN
SURES THAT THE MEASUREMENTS ARE NOT DISTORTED BY
THE TRIPPING TRANSIENTS &ILTERING OF THE MEASURED VAL
UES AND QUANTITY OF THE IMPEDANCE CALCULATIONS ARE
AUTOMATICALLY MATCHED TO THE NUMBER OF INCOMING
VALUE PAIRS FROM THE TIME OF FAULT INCEPTION TO MS
AFTER TRIPPING COMMAND
&AULT LOCATION CAN ALSO BE INITIATED VIA A BINARY INPUT
4HUS CALCULATION IS POSSIBLE WHEN A DIFFERENT PROTEC
TION DEVICE EFFECTS CLEARANCE OF A SHORT CIRCUIT &UR
THER FAULT CALCULATION CAN BE STARTED WITHOUT RECEIPT
OF ANY TRIPPING COMMAND )N THIS CASE THE START TO
MEASURE CRITERION IS FAULT DETECTION BY THE 3!
RELAY
%VALUATION OF THE MEASURED VALUES OCCURS AFTER THE
FAULT HAS BEEN CLEARED &ROM THE STORED AND FILTERED
VALUES AT LEAST THREE RESULTANT PAIRS FOR 2 AND 8 ARE
DETERMINED )F LESS THAN THREE RESULTANT PAIRS ARE
AVAILABLE NO FAULT LOCATION IS GIVEN &ROM THE RESUL
TANT PAIRS AVERAGE VALUE AND STANDARD DEVIATION ARE
CALCULATED !FTER ELIMINATION OF EXCEPTIONS WHICH
ARE RECOGNIZED BY THEIR EXCESSIVE DIFFERENCE FROM
THE STANDARD DEVIATION ANOTHER AVERAGE IS AGAIN CAL
CULATED FOR 8 4HIS AVERAGE IS TAKEN AS FAULT REAC
TANCE
!S A RESULT OF THE FAULT LOCATION CALCULATION THE FOLLOW
ING OUTPUTS ARE GIVEN
THE SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP FROM WHICH THE FAULT REAC
TANCE IS DETERMINED

THE REACTANCE PER PHASE IN /HMS PRIMARY AND

SECONDARY
THE RESISTANCE PER PHASE IN /HMS PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY
THE FAULT DISTANCE IN KM LINE LENGTH PROPORTIONAL TO
THE REACTANCE CALCULATED ON THE BASIS OF THE SET
UNIT REACTANCE OF THE LINE
THE DISTANCE TO FAULT IN OF THE LINE LENGTH CALCU
LATED ON THE BASIS OF THE SET UNIT REACTANCE AND THE
SET LINE LENGTH
.OTE #ALCULATION OF THE DISTANCE IN KM AND PERCENT
CAN ONLY BE APPLICABLE TO HOMOGENEOUS LINE
LENGTHS "UT IF THE LINE IS MADE UP OF SECTIONS WITH
DIFFERING REACTANCE VALUES EG OVERHEAD LINE
CABLE COMBINATIONS THE DISTANCE TO FAULT CAN STILL BE
CALCULATED MANUALLY FROM THE REACTANCE DETERMINED
BY THE FAULT LOCATION IF THE LINE CHARACTERISTICS ARE
KNOWN
7ITH EARTH FAULTS ON PARALLEL CIRCUIT LINES THE LOOP
EQUATION USED FOR CALCULATION OF THE IMPEDANCE SEE
3ECTION IS INFLUENCED BY THE COUPLING OF THE
EARTH IMPEDANCES OF BOTH CONDUCTOR SYSTEMS )F NO
SPECIAL MEASURES ARE TAKEN THIS WILL LEAD TO MEA
SUREMENT ERRORS IN THE RESULT OF THE IMPEDANCE CAL
CULATION 4HE RELAY CAN THEREFORE BE FITTED WITH A PAR
ALLEL LINE COMPENSATION MODULE FOR SUCH FAULT LOCA
TION SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA 4HIS TAKES INTO
ACCOUNT THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE IN THE
LINE EQUATION AND THUS COMPENSATES FOR THE INFLU
ENCE OF THE COUPLING &OR THIS PURPOSE THIS EARTH CUR
RENT MUST BE FED INTO THE RELAY 4HE LOOP EQUATION IN
DIFFERENTIAL FORM IS THEN AS FOLLOWS
,
DI , 8 %
DT
8,
2
DI % 8
DT
8,
2
I, %
2,
DI %J

DT
2
I% 2,
I %J 5 ,%
WHERE I% IS THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE AND

THE RATIOS 8-8, AND 2-2, ARE LINE CONSTANTS WHICH
RESULT FROM THE GEOMETRY OF THE DOUBLE LINE AND THE
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE EARTH RETURN PATH 4HE LINE CON
STANTS ARE INPUT TO THE RELAY JUST AS THE OTHER LINE DATA
ARE ALSO SET
4HE PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION IS VALID ONLY FOR FAULTS
ON THE PROTECTED LINE &OR FAULTS BEYOND THE PRO
TECTED ZONE AND FAULTS ON THE PARALLEL LINE COMPEN
SATION IS NOT POSSIBLE
# ' #
3!6

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST
.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3! ALLOWS

SIMPLE CHECKING OF THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT AND THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER )F THE DEVICE INCORPORATES AN INTERNAL AUTO
RECLOSE SYSTEM A 42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE IS ALSO
POSSIBLE THE LATTER CAN ALSO BE PERFORMED WITH AN EX
TERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE
0REREQUISITE FOR THE START OF A TEST CYCLE IS THAT NO PRO
TECTIVE FUNCTION HAS PICKED UP )F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE RELAY THROUGH A BINARY
INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION THE TEST CYCLE
CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS
CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEATURE SHOULD NOT
BE OMITTED
&OR STARTING A 42)0 #,/3% CYCLE A FURTHER CONDITION
IS THAT THE CONDITIONS FOR RECLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER
READY !2 NOT BLOCKED ARE FULFILLED 4HIS APPLIES ALSO
FOR AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE DEVICE
)NITIATION OF THE TEST CYCLE CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPER
ATOR KEYBOARD OR VIA THE FRONT OPERATOR INTERFACE
! 42)0 #,/3% CYCLE CAN BE PERFORMED THREE POLE

OR SINGLE POLE 4HREE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED ONLY
WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL PERMITS
THREE POLE RECLOSURE 3INGLE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED
ONLY WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL PER
MITS SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE 3INGLE POLE TRIP TEST
CAN ALSO BE CARRIED OUT WITH A SEQUENCE 42)0 ,
2%#,/3% 42)0 , 2%#,/3% 42)0 , 2%
#,/3%
4HE TEST SEQUENCE IS SUPERVISED BY 3! BY
MEANS OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT POSI
TION PROVIDED THE AUXILIARY CONTACT IS CONNECTED TO A
BINARY INPUT )F THE BREAKER DOES NOT REACT CORRECTLY
THEN THE TEST SEQUENCE IS ABORTED A CORRESPONDING
MESSAGE IS GIVEN IN THE DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN
4RIP TEST CAN ALSO BE STARTED BY ENERGIZATION OF A
BINARY INPUT ! PURE TRIP TEST WITHOUT RECLOSURE BY IN
TERNAL OR EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE IS NOT RECOM
MENDED FOR SAFETY REASONS
7HEN A PURE TRIP TEST IS STARTED THE RELAY ISSUES A

THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND
# ' #

3!6

!NCILLARY FUNCTIONS
4HE ANCILLARY FUNCTIONS OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION

3! INCLUDE
3TORAGE OF SHORT CIRCUIT DATA FOR FAULT RECORDING
/PERATIONAL MEASUREMENTS AND TESTING ROUTINES

!FTER A FAULT IN THE NETWORK INFORMATION CONCERNING
THE RESPONSE OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE AND KNOWL
EDGE OF THE MEASURED VALUES ARE OF IMPORTANCE FOR
AN EXACT ANALYSIS OF THE HISTORY OF THE FAULT &OR THIS
PURPOSE THE DEVICE PROVIDES ANNUNCIATION PROCESS
ING WHICH IS EFFECTIVE IN THREE DIRECTIONS
)NDICATORS AND BINARY OUTPUTS SIGNAL

RELAYS
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND CONDITIONS ARE INDICATED BY
OPTICAL INDICATORS ,%$ ON THE FRONT PLATES 4HE
MODULES ALSO CONTAIN SIGNAL RELAYS FOR REMOTE INDI
CATION -OST OF THE SIGNALS AND INDICATIONS CAN BE
MARSHALLED IE THEY CAN BE ALLOCATED MEANINGS OTH
ER THAN THE FACTORY SETTINGS )N 3ECTION THE DELIV
ERED CONDITION AND THE MARSHALLING FACILITIES ARE DE
SCRIBED IN DETAIL
4HE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS ARE NOT LATCHED AND AUTO
MATICALLY RESET AS SOON AS THE ORIGINATING SIGNAL DIS
APPEARS 4HE ,%$S CAN BE ARRANGED TO LATCH OR TO BE
SELF RESETTING
4HE MEMORIES OF THE ,%$S ARE SAVED AGAINST SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FAILURE 4HEY CAN BE RESET
LOCALLY BY OPERATION OF THE RESET BUTTON ON THE
RELAY
REMOTELY BY ENERGIZATION OF THE REMOTE RESET IN
PUT
REMOTELY VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
AUTOMATICALLY ON OCCURRENCE OF A NEW GENERAL
FAULT DETECTION SIGNAL

-ETHOD OF OPERATION
3OME INDICATORS AND RELAYS INDICATE CONDITIONS IT IS

NOT APPROPRIATE THAT THESE SHOULD BE STORED %QUALLY
THEY CANNOT BE RESET UNTIL THE ORIGINATING CRITERION
HAS BEEN REMOVED 4HIS MAINLY CONCERNS FAULT INDI
CATIONS SUCH AS AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAULT EMERGENCY
/# ETC
! GREEN ,%$ INDICATES READINESS FOR OPERATION 4HIS
,%$ CANNOT BE RESET AND REMAINS ILLUMINATED WHEN
THE MICROPROCESSOR IS WORKING CORRECTLY AND THE UNIT
IS NOT FAULTY 4HE ,%$ EXTINGUISHES WHEN THE SELF
CHECKING FUNCTION OF THE MICROPROCESSOR DETECTS A
FAULT OR WHEN THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE IS ABSENT
7ITH THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE PRESENT BUT WITH AN EXIST
ING INTERNAL FAULT IN THE UNIT A RED ,%$ ILLUMINATES
"LOCKED AND BLOCKS THE UNIT
)NFORMATION ON THE DISPLAY PANEL OR TO

A PERSONAL COMPUTER
%VENTS AND CONDITIONS CAN BE READ OFF IN THE DISPLAY
ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE DEVICE !DDITIONALLY A PER
SONAL COMPUTER FOR EXAMPLE CAN BE CONNECTED VIA
THE OPERATION INTERFACE AND ALL THE INFORMATIONS CAN
THEN BE SENT TO IT
)N THE QUIESCENT STATE IE AS LONG AS NO NETWORK
FAULTS ARE PRESENT THE DISPLAY OUTPUTS SELECTABLE OP
ERATING INFORMATION USUALLY AN OPERATIONAL MEA
SURED VALUE IN EACH OF THE TWO LINES )N THE EVENT OF A
NETWORK FAULT SELECTABLE INFORMATION ON THE FAULT AP
PEARS INSTEAD OF THE OPERATING INFORMATION EG DE
TECTED PHASES AND ELAPSED TIME FROM FAULT DETEC
TION TO TRIP COMMAND 4HE QUIESCENT INFORMATION IS
DISPLAYED AGAIN ONCE THESE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
HAVE BEEN ACKNOWLEDGED 4HE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
IS IDENTICAL TO RESETTING OF THE STORED ,%$ DISPLAYS AS
IN 3ECTION
4HE DEVICE ALSO HAS SEVERAL EVENT BUFFERS EG FOR
OPERATING MESSAGES CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STA
TISTICS ETC SEE 3ECTION WHICH ARE SAVED AGAINST
SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAILURE BY A BUFFER BATTERY 4HESE
MESSAGES AS WELL AS ALL AVAILABLE OPERATING VALUES
CAN BE TRANSFERRED INTO THE FRONT DISPLAY AT ANY TIME
USING THE KEYBOARD OR TO THE PERSONAL COMPUTER VIA
THE OPERATING INTERFACE
# ' #
3!6
!FTER A FAULT FOR EXAMPLE IMPORTANT INFORMATION CON

CERNING ITS HISTORY SUCH AS PICK UP AND TRIPPING
CAN BE CALLED UP ON THE DISPLAY OF THE DEVICE 4HE
FAULT INCEPTION IS INDICATED WITH THE ABSOLUTE TIME OF
THE OPERATING SYSTEM PROVIDED THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS
AVAILABLE 4HE SEQUENCE OF THE EVENTS IS TAGGED WITH
THE RELATIVE TIME REFERRED TO THE MOMENT AT WHICH THE
FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICKED UP 4HUS THE ELAPSED TIME
UNTIL TRIPPING IS INITIATED AND UNTIL RESET CAN BE READ
OUT 4HE RESOLUTION IS MS
4HE EVENTS CAN ALSO BE READ OUT WITH A PERSONAL
COMPUTER BY MEANS OF THE APPROPRIATE PROGRAM
$)'3) 4HIS PROVIDES THE COMFORT OF A #24 SCREEN
AND MENU GUIDED OPERATION !DDITIONALLY THE DATA
CAN BE DOCUMENTED ON A PRINTER OR STORED ON A
FLOPPY DISC FOR EVALUATION ELSEWHERE
4HE PROTECTION DEVICE STORES THE DATA OF THE LAST FOUR
NETWORK FAULTS IF A FIFTH FAULT OCCURS THE OLDEST FAULT IS
OVERWRITTEN IN THE FAULT MEMORY 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS
OF THE LAST THREE NETWORK FAULT CAN BE READ OUT IN THE
LOCAL DISPLAY
! NETWORK FAULT BEGINS WITH RECOGNITION OF THE FAULT BY
PICK UP OF ANY FAULT DETECTOR AND ENDS WITH FAULT DE
TECTOR RESET OR EXPIRY OF THE AUTO RECLOSE SEQUENCE
SO THAT NON SUCCESSFUL AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS WILL
ALSO BE STORED AS PART OF ONE NETWORK FAULT 4HUS
ONE NETWORK FAULT CAN INCLUDE DIFFERENT FAULT EVENTS
FROM PICK UP UNTIL DROP OFF 4HIS IS PARTICULARLY
ADVANTAGEOUS FOR ALLOCATION OF TIME DATA
)NFORMATION TO A CENTRAL UNIT OPTIONAL

)N ADDITION ALL STORED INFORMATION CAN BE TRANSMITTED
VIA AN OPTICAL FIBRE CONNECTOR OR THE ISOLATED SECOND
INTERFACE SYSTEM INTERFACE TO A CONTROL CENTRE FOR
EXAMPLE THE 3)%-%.3 ,OCALIZED 3UBSTATION !UTO
MATION 3YSTEM ,3! 4RANSMISSION USES A STAN
DARDIZED TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO )%#
AND 6$%7:6%) OR SELECTABLE AC
CORDING TO $).
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
$ATA STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION

FOR FAULT RECORDING
4HE INSTANTANEOUS VALUES OF THE MEASURED VALUES
I, I, I, I% U,
U,
U,
U%.
ARE SAMPLED AT MS INTERVALS FOR (Z AND STORED

IN A CIRCULATING SHIFT REGISTER )N CASE OF A FAULT THE
DATA ARE STORED OVER A SELECTABLE TIME PERIOD BUT
MAX OVER SECONDS 4HE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FAULT
RECORDS WITHIN THIS TIME PERIOD IS 4HESE DATA ARE
THEN AVAILABLE FOR FAULT ANALYSIS &OR EACH RENEWED
FAULT EVENT THE ACTUAL NEW FAULT DATA ARE STORED WITH
OUT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THE OLD DATA
4HE DATA CAN BE TRANSFERRED TO A CONNECTED PERSONAL
COMPUTER VIA THE OPERATION INTERFACE AT THE FRONT AND
EVALUATED BY THE PROTECTION DATA EVALUATION PROGRAM
$)'3) 4HE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE REFERRED TO
THEIR MAXIMUM VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VAL
UES AND PREPARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDI
TION SIGNALS CAN BE MARKED AS BINARY TRACES EG
0ICK UP AND 4RIP
!DDITIONALLY THE FAULT RECORD DATA CAN BE TRANSMITTED
TO A CONTROL CENTRE VIA THE SERIAL SYSTEM INTERFACE IF
FITTED %VALUATION OF THE DATA IS MADE IN THE CONTROL
CENTRE USING APPROPRIATE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS 4HE
CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE REFERRED TO THEIR MAXIMUM
VALUES NORMALIZED TO THEIR RATED VALUES AND PRE
PARED FOR GRAPHIC VISUALIZATION )N ADDITION SIGNALS
CAN BE MARKED AS BINARY TRACES EG 0ICK UP AND
4RIP
7HEN THE DATA ARE TRANSFERRED TO A CENTRAL UNIT
READ OUT CAN PROCEED AUTOMATICALLY OPTIONALLY AF
TER EACH PICK UP OF THE RELAY OR ONLY AFTER A TRIP 4HE
FOLLOWING THEN APPLIES
4HE RELAY SIGNALS THE AVAILABILITY OF FAULT RECORD
DATA
4HE DATA REMAIN AVAILABLE FOR RECALL UNTIL THEY ARE
OVERWRITTEN BY NEW DATA
! TRANSMISSION IN PROGRESS CAN BE ABORTED BY THE
CENTRAL UNIT
# ' #

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
/PERATING MEASUREMENTS AND

CONVERSION
&OR LOCAL RECALL OR TRANSMISSION OF DATA THE TRUE RMS
VALUES OF THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES ARE ALWAYS AVAIL
ABLE AS ARE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE POWER AS WELL AS THE
FREQUENCY CALCULATED FROM AN AVERAGE OF MS AS
LONG AS AT LEAST ONE PHASE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT
4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID
), ), ),
0HASE CURRENTS IN AMPS PRIMARY AND

IN OF RATED CURRENT ).
5,% 5,% 6OLTAGES PHASE EARTH IN KILOVOLTS

PRIMARY AND IN OF RATED VOLTAGE
5,%
5.o
5, 5, 6OLTAGES PHASE PHASE IN KILOVOLTS
PRIMARY AND IN OF RATED VOLTAGE
5,
5.
0A
!CTIVE POWER IN MEGAWATTS PRIMARY

AND IN OF o).5.
0R
2EACTIVE POWER IN MEGVARS PRIMARY

AND IN OF o).5.
&REQUENCY IN OF RATED FREQUENCY
TRIP
OVERLOAD MEASURED VALUES REFERRED

TO TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE
!DDITIONALLY THE COMPONENTS OF THE EARTH FAULT CUR

RENT CAN BE OUTPUT FOR RELAYS WITH HIGHLY SENSITIVE
EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
)%A )%R
ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF

EARTH FAULT CURRENT IN NON EARTHED
SYSTEMS
%VEN THE DIRECTION OF THE ENERGY FLOW FORWARDS

LINE DIRECTION CAN BE RECALLED UPON REQUEST 4HESE
DATA ARE PARTICULARLY USEFUL WHEN CHECKING THAT THE
TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS ARE CORRECT DURING COM
MISSIONING SEE 3ECTION


3! INCORPORATES COMPREHENSIVE MONITORING
FUNCTIONS WHICH COVER BOTH HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
FURTHERMORE THE MEASURED VALUES ARE CONTINUOUSLY
CHECKED FOR PLAUSIBILITY SO THAT THE CURRENT AND VOLT
AGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS ARE ALSO INCLUDED IN THE
MONITORING SYSTEM
(ARDWARE MONITORING
4HE COMPLETE HARDWARE IS MONITORED FOR FAULTS AND
INADMISSIBLE FUNCTIONS FROM THE MEASURED VALUE IN
PUTS TO THE OUTPUT RELAYS )N DETAIL THIS IS ACCOM
PLISHED BY MONITORING
!UXILIARY AND REFERENCE VOLTAGES
4HE PROCESSOR MONITORS THE OFFSET AND REFERENCE
VOLTAGE OF THE !$# ANALOGDIGITAL CONVERTER 4HE
PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AS SOON AS IMPERMISSIBLE
DEVIATIONS OCCUR 0ERMANENT FAULTS ARE ANNUN
CIATED
&AILURE OR SWITCH OFF OF THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AUTO
MATICALLY PUTS THE SYSTEM OUT OF OPERATION THIS
STATUS IS INDICATED BY A FAIL SAFE CONTACT 4RAN
SIENT DIPS IN SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF LESS THAN MS WILL
NOT DISTURB THE FUNCTION OF THE RELAY 5( 6
-EASURED VALUE ACQUISITION
4HE COMPLETE CHAIN FROM THE INPUT TRANSFORMERS
UP TO AND INCLUDING THE ANALOGDIGITAL CONVERTERS
ARE MONITORED BY THE PLAUSIBILITY CHECK OF THE
MEASURED VALUES
)N THE CURRENT PATH THERE ARE FOUR INPUT CONVER
TERS THE DIGITIZED SUM OF THE OUTPUTS OF THESE
MUST ALWAYS BE ZERO ! FAULT IN THE CURRENT PATH IS
RECOGNIZED WHEN
\I, I, I, K) X I%\
35-)THRES X ). 35-&ACT) X )MAX
# ' #
3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
!N ADJUSTABLE FACTOR K) PARAMETER )E)PH CAN BE

SET TO CORRECT THE DIFFERENT RATIOS OF PHASE AND
EARTH CURRENT TRANSFORMERS EG WINDOW TYPE
TRANSFORMER FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION )F THE RESIDU
AL EARTH CURRENT IS DERIVED FROM THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMER STARPOINT K) 35-)THRES AND
35-&ACT) ARE SETTING PARAMETERS REFER TO
4HE COMPONENT 35-&ACT) X )MAX TAKES
INTO ACCOUNT PERMISSIBLE CURRENT PROPORTIONAL
TRANSFORMATION ERRORS IN THE INPUT CONVERTERS
WHICH MAY PARTICULARLY OCCUR UNDER CONDITIONS OF
HIGH SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS &IGURE
.OTE #URRENT SUM MONITORING CAN OPERATE PROP
ERLY ONLY WHEN THE RESIDUAL CURRENT OF THE PRO
TECTED LINE IS FED TO THE )% INPUT OF THE RELAY
)&
).
3LOPE
35-&ACT)
35-)THRES
) MAX
).
#URRENT SUM MONITORING CURRENT

PLAUSIBILITY CHECK
)N THE VOLTAGE PATH THERE ARE SEVEN INPUT CONVER

TERS THREE CONNECTED TO EACH PHASE EARTH VOLT
AGE THREE CONNECTED TO EACH PHASE PHASE VOLT
AGE ONE FURTHER CONNECTED TO THE DISPLACEMENT
VOLTAGE 5%. OR A BUS BAR VOLTAGE ! FAULT IN THE
VOLTAGE CIRCUITS WILL BE RECOGNIZED WHEN
\U, U, U, K5 | U%.\ 6
&ACTOR K5 PARAMETER 5PH5DELTA CAN BE SET TO
CORRECT DIFFERENT RATIOS OF PHASE AND OPEN DELTA
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER WINDINGS
.OTE 6OLTAGE SUM PHASE EARTH MONITORING CAN
OPERATE PROPERLY ONLY WHEN AN EXTERNALLY FORMED
OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE 5%. IS CONNECTED TO THE RESID
UAL VOLTAGE INPUT OF THE RELAY
# ' #
\U,
,
U,
,
U,
\ 6
,
!DDITIONALLY THE PHASE PHASE VOLTAGES ARE COM

PARED WITH THE ASSOCIATED PHASE EARTH VOLTAGES
! FAULT WILL BE RECOGNIZED WHEN
\U,
\U,
\U,
,
,
,
U, U, \ 6
U, U, \ 6
U, U, \ 6
)F ANY OF THESE MONITORING FUNCTIONS DETECTS THAT

THE MEASURED VALUES ARE NOT PLAUSIBLE IT WILL CON
CLUDE THAT THERE IS A FAULT IN THE ANALOG MEASURE
MENT CIRCUITS !FTER APPROXIMATELY SECOND AN
ALARM WILL BE GIVEN
#OMMAND OUTPUT CHANNELS
)& &AULT CURRENT
&IGURE
3INCE THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES ARE SEPA

RATELY FORMED AND MEASURED WITHIN THE DEVICE A
SIMILAR MONITORING PROCEDURE APPLIES
4HE COMMAND RELAYS FOR TRIPPING AND CLOSING ARE

CONTROLLED BY TWO COMMAND AND ONE ADDITIONAL
RELEASE CHANNELS !S LONG AS NO PICK UP CONDI
TION EXISTS THE CENTRAL PROCESSOR MAKES A CYCLIC
CHECK OF THESE COMMAND OUTPUT CHANNELS FOR
AVAILABILITY BY EXCITING EACH CHANNEL ONE AFTER THE
OTHER AND CHECKING FOR CHANGE IN THE OUTPUT SIG
NAL LEVEL #HANGE OF THE FEED BACK SIGNAL TO LOW
LEVEL INDICATES A FAULT IN ONE OF THE CONTROL CHAN
NELS OR IN THE RELAY COIL 3UCH A CONDITION LEADS AU
TOMATICALLY TO ALARM AND BLOCKING OF THE COMMAND
OUTPUT
-EMORY MODULES
4HE MEMORY MODULES ARE PERIODICALLY CHECKED
FOR FAULT BY
C 7RITING A DATA BIT PATTERN FOR THE WORKING
MEMORY 2!- AND READING IT
C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS FOR THE PROGRAM
MEMORY %02/- AND COMPARISON OF IT WITH A
REFERENCE PROGRAM MODULUS STORED THERE
C &ORMATION OF THE MODULUS OF THE VALUES STORED
IN THE PARAMETER STORE %%02/- THEN COM
PARING IT WITH THE NEWLY DETERMINED MODULUS AF
TER EACH PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT PROCESS

3!6
3OFTWARE MONITORING
&OR CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE PROGRAM SE
QUENCES A WATCHDOG TIMER IS PROVIDED WHICH WILL RE
SET THE PROCESSOR IN THE EVENT OF PROCESSOR FAILURE OR
IF A PROGRAM FALLS OUT OF STEP &URTHER INTERNAL PLAUSI
BILITY CHECKS ENSURE THAT ANY FAULT IN PROCESSING OF
THE PROGRAMS CAUSED BY INTERFERENCE WILL BE RECOG
NIZED 3UCH FAULTS LEAD TO RESET AND RESTART OF THE PRO
CESSOR
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
) MIN
).
3LOPE
39-&ACT)
39-)THRES
)F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY RESTARTING FURTHER

RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS STILL PRESENT AFTER
THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROTECTIVE SYSTEM WILL
SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDICATE THIS CONDITION
BY DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY THUS INDICATING
EQUIPMENT FAULT AND SIMULTANEOUSLY THE ,%$
"LOCKED COMES ON
-ONITORING OF EXTERNAL MEASURING

TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
4O DETECT INTERRUPTIONS OR SHORT CIRCUITS IN THE EXTER
NAL MEASURING TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS OR FAULTS IN THE
CONNECTIONS AN IMPORTANT COMMISSIONING AID THE
MEASURED VALUES ARE CHECKED AT CYCLIC INTERVALS AS
LONG AS NO PICK UP CONDITION EXISTS
#URRENT SYMMETRY
)N HEALTHY OPERATION IT CAN BE EXPECTED THAT THE
CURRENTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY SYMMETRICAL 4HE
FOLLOWING APPLIES
\ )MIN \ \ )MAX \ 39-&ACT)
IF
)MAX ). 39-)THRES ).
)MAX IS ALWAYS THE LARGEST OF THE THREE PHASE CUR
RENTS AND )MIN ALWAYS THE SMALLEST 4HE SYMMETRY
FACTOR 39-&ACT) REPRESENTS THE MAGNITUDE OF
ASYMMETRY OF THE PHASE CURRENTS AND THE THRESH
OLD 39-)THRES IS THE LOWER LIMIT OF THE PROCESSING
AREA OF THIS MONITORING FUNCTION SEE &IGURE
"OTH PARAMETERS CAN BE SET SEE 3ECTION
&IGURE
#URRENT SYMMETRY MONITORING
6OLTAGE SYMMETRY
)N HEALTHY OPERATION IT CAN BE EXPECTED THAT THE
VOLTAGES WILL BE APPROXIMATELY SYMMETRICAL
4HEREFORE THE DEVICE CHECKS THE THREE PHASE
TO PHASE VOLTAGES FOR SYMMETRY -ONITORING OF
THE SUM OF THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES IS NOT
INFLUENCED BY EARTH FAULTS WHICH CAN BE A LASTING
OPERATING CONDITION IN NON EARTHED NETWORKS
4HE FOLLOWING APPLIES
\ 5MIN \ \ 5MAX \ 39-&ACT5
IF
\ 5MAX \ 39-5THRES
WHEREBY 5MAX IS THE LARGEST OF THE THREE VOLTAGES
AND 5MIN THE SMALLEST 4HE SYMMETRY FACTOR
39-&ACT5 REPRESENTS THE MAGNITUDE OF THE
ASYMMETRY OF THE SUM OF THE VOLTAGES 4HE THRESH
OLD 39-5THRES IS THE LOWER LIMIT OF THE PROCESSING
AREA OF THIS MONITORING FUNCTION SEE &IGURE
"OTH PARAMETERS CAN BE SET SEE 3ECTION
5MIN
5.
3LOPE
39-&ACT5
39-5THRES
&IGURE

) MAX
).
5MAX
5.
6OLTAGE SYMMETRY MONITORING
# ' #
3!6
-EASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE

&AILURE OF THE MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE CAN BE DE
TECTED WHEN A MINIMUM CURRENT FLOWS ON THE PRO
TECTED LINE BUT THE CURRENT STAGES )PH OF THE FAULT
DETECTORS HAVE NOT YET PICKED UP 6OLTAGE FAILURE
IS DETECTED WHEN
5PH PH 5-%!3 5 AND AT THE SAME TIME
)MAX 5-%!3 )
WHEREBY 5PH PH REPRESENTS ANY PHASE PHASE
VOLTAGE 5-%!3 5 AND 5-%!3 ) ARE SETTING
PARAMETERS SEE 3ECTION 4HIS MONITOR
DOES NOT OPERATE ONCE THE MINIMUM CURRENT
THRESHOLD OF ANY FAULT DETECTOR HAS BEEN EXCEED
ED SINCE THIS MAY INDICATE A REAL SYSTEM FAULT
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
ARY CIRCUITS OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 4HE DIS

TANCE FUNCTION IS THEN BLOCKED AND THE RELAY CAN
BE SWITCHED TO EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT OPERATION
SEE 3ECTION )MMEDIATE BLOCKING IS PER
FORMED PROVIDED AT LEAST ONE PHASE CURRENT IS
FLOWING
)F WITHIN APPROXIMATELY SECONDS OF RECOGNITION
OF THIS CRITERION AN EARTH CURRENT OCCURS DISTANCE
PROTECTION AUTOMATICALLY BECOMES OPERATIVE FOR
THE DURATION OF THE TIME OF THE EARTH FAULT )F THE FUSE
FAILURE CRITERION LASTS LONGER THAN APPROXIMATELY
SECONDS THE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AND
WILL NOT BE RELEASED UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE VOLTAGE
FAILURE HAS BEEN REMOVED 4HE DISTANCE PROTEC
TION FUNCTION WILL THEN AUTOMATICALLY BE RESTORED
!FTER THIS MONITOR HAS OPERATED DISTANCE PROTEC

TION IS BLOCKED AND WILL NOT BE RELEASED UNTIL THE
CAUSE OF THE VOLTAGE FAILURE HAS BEEN REMOVED
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION WILL THEN AUTO
MATICALLY BE RESTORED #HANGE OVER TO OVERCUR
RENT EMERGENCY PROTECTION IS POSSIBLE
.OTE 7HEN FOR EXAMPLE ON LINES FED BY UN

EARTHED TRANSFORMERS THE EARTH CURRENT DURING
EARTH FAULT IS INSIGNIFICANTLY SMALL OR ABSENT THE
FUSE FAILURE MONITORING MUST NOT BE ACTIVATED )N
NON EARTHED NETWORKS THIS FUSE FAILURE MONITOR
ING FACILITY IS POINTLESS AND WILL BE IGNORED BY
3!
&USE FAILURE MONITOR
0HASE ROTATION
)F ANY MEASURED VOLTAGE IS NOT PRESENT DUE TO

SHORT CIRCUIT OR CONDUCTOR BREAKAGE IN THE VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER SECONDARY SYSTEM IT MAY APPEAR
THAT THE VOLTAGE IS ZERO FOR CERTAIN MEASURED
LOOPS
3INCE CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF MEASURED VALUE SE

LECTION AND DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION RELIES UPON
A CLOCKWISE SEQUENCE OF THE PHASE VOLTAGES THE
DIRECTION OF ROTATION IS MONITORED
)F NO PROTECTIVE MCB WITH APPROPRIATELY SET AUXIL

IARY CONTACT IS AVAILABLE IN THE 64 SECONDARY CIR
CUIT BUT INSTEAD FOR EXAMPLE FUSES ARE FITTED THE
OPTIONAL FUNCTION FUSE FAILURE MONITOR CAN BE
MADE EFFECTIVE IN SOLIDLY EARTHED NETWORKS /B
VIOUSLY THIS FUNCTION CAN ALSO BE USED TOGETHER
WITH THE ABOVE MENTIONED 64 PROTECTIVE MCB
7HEN A ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE IS INDICATED WITH
OUT SIMULTANEOUS RECOGNITION OF AN EARTH FAULT THIS
IS INDICATIVE OF A SINGLE PHASE FAULT IN THE SECOND
# ' #
5, BEFORE 5, BEFORE 5,

4HIS CHECK IS CARRIED OUT WHEN THE MEASURED VOLT
AGES AS DESCRIBED IN ARE PLAUSIBLE AND
HAVE A MINIMUM VALUE OF AT LEAST
\5,\\5,\\5,\ 6o
#OUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION WILL CAUSE AN ALARM
4ABLE GIVES A SURVEY OF ALL THE FUNCTIONS OF THE
MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYSTEM

3!6
-ETHOD OF OPERATION
-ONITORING
0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF CURRENTS
\I, I, I, )E)PH X I%\
35-)THRES X ). 35-&ACT) X )MAX
0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF VOLTAGES PHASE EARTH
\U, U, U, 5PH5DELTA X U%.\ 6
&AILURE COVERED REACTION

2ELAY FAILURES IN THE SIGNAL ACQUISITION CIRCUITS
I, I, I, I%
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE )
U, U, U, U%
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5PH E
0LAUSIBILITY CHECK OF VOLTAGE PHASE PHASE

\U,
,
U,
,
U,
\ 6
,
0HASE PHASE VOLTAGES AGAINST VOLTAGE

DIFFERENCES
\U, , U, U, \ 6
\U, , U, U, \ 6
\U, , U, U, \ 6
#URRENT UNBALANCE
\) MIN\
39-&ACT)
\) MAX\
AND \)MAXb 39-)THRES
6OLTAGE UNBALANCE PHASE PHASE
\5 MIN\
39-&ACT5
\5 MAX\
AND \5MAXi 39-5THRES
-EASURED VOLTAGE FAILURE
5PH
PH
5-%!3 5 AND )MAX 5-%!3 )

\U, U, U,\ &&- ~5O AND
\I, I, I,\ &&- )E
0HASE ROTATION
U, BEFORE U, BEFORE U,
AS LONG AS \5,\ \5,\ \5,\ 6o

U, , U, , U, ,
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5P P
#ONNECTION ERROR IN ONE OF THE VOLTAGE CONNEC
TIONS PHASE PHASE ANDOR PHASE EARTH
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5P P
3INGLE OR PHASE TO PHASE SHORT CIRCUITS OR BRO
KEN CONDUCTORS IN THE CT CIRCUITS I, I, I,
OR
5NBALANCED LOAD
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE )SYMM
3HORT CIRCUIT OR INTERRUPTION PHASE PHASE
IN VT SECONDARY CIRCUITS
OR
UNBALANCED VOLTAGE ON THE SYSTEM
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5SYMM
,OSS OF MEASURED VOLTAGES
DELAYED ALARM &AILURE 5MEAS
AND BLOCK OF DISTANCE PROTECTION
&USE FAILURE OR CONDUCTOR INTERRUPTION NON SYM
METRIC IN VT SECONDARY CIRCUIT
DELAYED ALARM &USE &AILURE
AND IMMEDIATE BLOCK OF DISTANCE PROTECTION
3WOPPED VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS OR REVERSE ROTATION
SEQUENCE
DELAYED ALARM
&AIL0HASE3EQ
"OLTED FIGURES ARE SETTING VALUES

4ABLE

3UMMARY OF MEASURING CIRCUIT MONITORING
# ' #
3!6
7ARNING
4HE SUCCESSFUL AND SAFE OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE IS DEPENDENT ON PROPER HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL UNDER OBSERVANCE OF ALL WARNINGS AND HINTS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL
)N PARTICULAR THE GENERAL ERECTION AND SAFETY REGULATIONS EG )%# $). 6$% OR NATIONAL STANDARDS
REGARDING THE CORRECT USE OF HOISTING GEAR MUST BE OBSERVED .ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN DEATH
PERSONAL INJURY OR SUBSTANTIAL PROPERTY DAMAGE

5NPACKING AND REPACKING
7HEN DISPATCHED FROM THE FACTORY THE EQUIPMENT IS

PACKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GUIDELINES LAID DOWN
IN )%# WHICH SPECIFIES THE IMPACT RESIS
TANCE OF PACKAGING
4HIS PACKING SHALL BE REMOVED WITH CARE WITHOUT
FORCE AND WITHOUT THE USE OF INAPPROPRIATE TOOLS 4HE
EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE VISUALLY CHECKED TO ENSURE
THAT THERE ARE NO EXTERNAL TRACES OF DAMAGE
4HE TRANSPORT PACKING CAN BE RE USED FOR FURTHER
TRANSPORT WHEN APPLIED IN THE SAME WAY 4HE STOR
AGE PACKING OF THE INDIVIDUAL RELAYS IS NOT SUITED TO
TRANSPORT )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS USED THIS MUST
ALSO PROVIDE THE SAME DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST
MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%#
CLASS AND )%# CLASS
"EFORE INITIAL ENERGIZATION WITH SUPPLY VOLTAGE THE
RELAY SHALL BE SITUATED IN THE OPERATING AREA FOR AT
LEAST TWO HOURS IN ORDER TO ENSURE TEMPERATURE
EQUALIZATION AND TO AVOID HUMIDITY INFLUENCES AND
CONDENSATION
# ' #

0REPARATIONS
4HE OPERATING CONDITIONS MUST ACCORD WITH 6$%

AND 6$% PART OR CORRESPOND
ING NATIONAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLA
TIONS
#AUTION
4HE MODULES OF DIGITAL RELAYS CONTAIN #-/3
CIRCUITS 4HESE SHALL NOT BE WITHDRAWN OR IN
SERTED UNDER LIVE CONDITIONS 4HE MODULES
MUST BE SO HANDLED THAT ANY POSSIBILITY OF
DAMAGE DUE TO STATIC ELECTRICAL CHARGES IS
EXCLUDED $URING ANY NECESSARY HANDLING
OF INDIVIDUAL MODULES THE RECOMMENDA
TIONS RELATING TO THE HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATI
CALLY ENDANGERED COMPONENTS %%# MUST
BE OBSERVED
)N INSTALLED CONDITIONS THE MODULES ARE IN NO DAN

GER

3!6

-OUNTING AND CONNECTIONS

-ODEL 3!J J"JJJ FOR PANEL SUR

FACE MOUNTING
4HE RATED DATA OF THE UNIT MUST BE CHECKED AGAINST

THE PLANT DATA 4HIS APPLIES IN PARTICULAR TO THE AUXIL
IARY VOLTAGE AND THE RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS
3ECURE THE UNIT WITH FOUR SCREWS TO THE PANEL &OR

DIMENSIONS REFER TO &IGURE
#ONNECT EARTHING TERMINAL 4ERMINAL OF THE UNIT
TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTIVE OP
ERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTHING
SURFACE AT THE SIDE OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL RECOMMENDED GROUNDING
STRAP $). FORM ! EG /RDER .O OF
-ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ERMANY
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA SCREWED TERMINALS

#HECKING THE RATED DATA
#ONTROL DC VOLTAGE OF BINARY INPUTS
7HEN DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE BINARY INPUTS ARE

DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH A CONTROL VOLTAGE WHICH
CORRESPONDS WITH THE RATED VOLTAGE OF THE POWER
SUPPLY OF THE RELAY )N ORDER TO OPTIMIZE THE OPERATION
OF THE INPUTS THEY SHOULD BE MATCHED TO THE REAL
CONTROL VOLTAGE )T DEPENDS ON THE HARD WARE STATE
PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY HOW THIS IS CARRIED
OUT 4HIS STATE IS FOUND ON THE NAME PLATE BEHIND THE
COMPLETE ORDER DESIGNATION
4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID FOR PRODUCTION SERIES ''

-ODEL 3!J J#JJJ FOR PANEL FLUSH

MOUNTING OR 3!J J%JJJ FOR CU
BICLE INSTALLATION
,IFT UP BOTH LABELLING STRIPS ON THE LID OF THE UNIT

AND REMOVE COVER TO GAIN ACCESS TO FOUR HOLES FOR
THE FIXING SCREWS
)NSERT THE UNIT INTO THE PANEL CUT OUT AND SECURE IT
WITH THE FIXING SCREWS &OR DIMENSIONS REFER TO &IG
URE
#ONNECT EARTHING SCREW ON THE REAR OF THE UNIT TO
THE PROTECTIVE EARTH OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE
-AKE A SOLID LOW OHMIC AND LOW INDUCTIVE OP
ERATIONAL EARTH CONNECTION BETWEEN THE EARTHING
SURFACE AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT USING AT LEAST ONE
STANDARD SCREW - AND THE EARTHING CONTINUITY
SYSTEM OF THE PANEL OR CUBICLE RECOMMENDED
GROUNDING STRAP $). FORM ! EG /RDER
.O OF -ESSRS $RUSEIDT 2EMSCHEID 'ER
MANY
-AKE CONNECTIONS VIA THE SCREWED OR SNAP IN
TERMINALS OF THE SOCKETS OF THE HOUSING /BSERVE
LABELLING OF THE INDIVIDUAL CONNECTOR MODULES TO
ENSURE CORRECT LOCATION OBSERVE THE MAX PERMIS
SIBLE CONDUCTOR CROSS SECTIONS 4HE USE OF THE
SCREWED TERMINALS IS RECOMMENDED SNAP IN
CONNECTION REQUIRES SPECIAL TOOLS AND MUST NOT BE
USED FOR FIELD WIRING UNLESS PROPER STRAIN RELIEF AND
THE PERMISSIBLE BENDING RADIUS ARE OBSERVED

4HE BINARY INPUTS REACT ON CONTROL DC VOLTAGES IN

THE TOTAL VOLTAGE RANGE FROM 6 TO 6 4HE
PICK UP THRESHOLD LIES NEAR 6 )F THE RATED CON
TROL VOLTAGE FOR BINARY INPUTS IS 6 OR HIGHER IT IS
ADVISABLE TO FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD TO
THESE INPUTS TO INCREASE STABILITY AGAINST STRAY
VOLTAGES IN THE DC CIRCUITS
4O FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD OF APPROXIMATELY
6 TO A BINARY INPUT A SOLDER BRIDGE MUST BE RE
MOVED &IGURE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THESE
SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ") TO ") AND THEIR
LOCATION ON THE BASIC PCB OF THE BASIC INPUTOUT
PUT MODULE '%! &IGURE SHOWS THE ASSIGN
MENT OF THESE SOLDER BRIDGES FOR THE INPUTS ") TO
") AND THEIR LOCATION ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUT
OUTPUT MODULE :%!
4HE FOLLOWING IS VALID FOR PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LAT
ER
4ABLE SHOWS THE ASSIGNMENT OF THE PRESET
TINGS OF THE CONTROL VOLTAGE OF THE BINARY INPUTS
AGAINST THE RATED SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF THE RELAY )F THE
CONTROL VOLTAGE OF A BINARY INPUT IS OF THE SAME
MAGNITUDE AS THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OF THE RELAY NO
MATCHING IS NECESSARY %VEN WITH HIGHER CONTROL
VOLTAGE THE BINARY INPUT WILL OPERATE "UT IT IS AD
VISABLE TO FIT A HIGHER PICK UP THRESHOLD TO IN
CREASE STABILITY AGAINST STRAY VOLTAGES 2EFER TO
4ABLE FOR POSSIBILITIES )F A BINARY INPUT IS TO BE
CONTROLLED BY A LOWER VOLTAGE THEN THE PICK UP
THRESHOLD MUST BE MATCHED /THERWISE IT CANNOT
BE ENERGIZED
# ' #
3!6
8
8
8
8
"INARY INPUT 3OLDER BRIDGE 8

&OR RATED VOLTAGES 6
3OLDER BRIDGES MUST BE FITTED
3OLDER BRIDGES MAY BE REMOVED
#UT AND BEND ASIDE
&IGURE
#HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS TO ON BASIC MODULE '%! UP TO PRO
DUCTION SERIES ''
8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
"INARY INPUT
3OLDER BRIDGE 8
8
8
8
8
8
3OLDER BRIDGES MUST BE FITTED
3OLDER BRIDGES MAY BE REMOVED
#UT AND BEND ASIDE
&IGURE
#HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES FOR BINARY INPUTS TO ON ADDITIONAL MODULE :%! UP TO
PRODUCTION SERIES ''
# ' #

3!6
/RDER CODE
3!J
2ATED AUXILIARY
VOLTAGE RANGE
0RESETTING OF
BINARY INPUTS
JJJJ JJJJ
6DC
6DC
JJJJ JJJJ
6DC
6DC
JJJJ JJJJ
4ABLE
6
6DC
0RESETTING OF CONTROL VOLTAGE FOR

BINARY INPUTS FOR PRODUCTION SERIES
(( OR LATER
4ABLE SHOWS THE SETTING POSSIBILITIES FOR THE

BINARY INPUTS ") TO ") ON THE BASIC PCB OF THE
BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! 4ABLE FOR THE
INPUTS ") TO ") ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT
MODULE :%! 4HE FIGURES AND SHOW THE
PRINTED CIRCUITS BOARDS VIEWED FROM THE COMPONENT
SIDE WITH THE SETTING PLUGS FOR THE CONTROL VOLTAGE OF
THE BINARY INPUTS 4HEY ARE VALID FOR RELAYS FROM PRO
DUCTION SERIES (( )F THE ACTUAL CONTROL VOLTAGE IS NOT
FOUND ON THE PCB SELECT THE SETTING FOR THE NEXT
LOWER VOLTAGE 4HE FIGURES SHOW FURTHER PLUGS WHICH
MUST NOT BE CHANGED
3ETTINGS FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE

6DC
6DC
"INARY INPUT
ON '%!
6DC
")
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
NO PLUG
")
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
NO PLUG
")
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
NO PLUG
")
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
PLUG 8 8
NO PLUG
6DC
5NUSED PLUGS MAY BE PARKED ON THE PINS 8 TO 8
4ABLE
#HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES OF BINARY INPUTS TO ON THE BASIC MODULE '%! VALID FROM
PRODUCTION SERIES ((
"INARY INPUT
ON :%!
6DC
3ETTINGS FOR RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE

6DC
6DC
6DC
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
")
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
PLUG 6
4ABLE

#HECKING FOR CONTROL VOLTAGES OF BINARY INPUTS TO ON THE ADDITIONAL MODULE :%! VALID
FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #
3!6
8 TO 8 UNUSED PLUGS

MAY BE PARKED HERE

8 8

8

8

8

8

8
D
E
G
G
LU
P
T
O
N

!

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"

D
E
T
A
RT
S
LU
IL
S
A

D
E
G
G
LU
P

!

C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I
D
E
K
R
A
P
IS

8

G 8
LU N
0 O

8

8

8

8

8

8

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I

8

8

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"

8
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"

8

8 8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I

) .) .
T T
A A
8
8

8

8

8
&IGURE

8

8
3ETTING PLUGS ON BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

3!6
6

6

6

6

6

6

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"

8
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I
6

6

6

6

6

C
D
6

T

U
P D
IN E
T
A
Y
R RT
A S
IN U
L
" LI
6

6

6

6

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I
6

6

6

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I
6

6

6

6

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I
6

T
U
P
IN
Y
R
A
IN
"
C
D
6

D
E
T
A
RT
S
U
LL
I

8
! NOT PLUGGED
.
. ! PLUGGED AS ILLUSTRATED
AT )
AT )
WITH HIGHLY SENSITIVE EARTH CURRENT

INPUT NOT PLUGGED
&IGURE

3ETTING PLUGS ON ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT MODULE :%! FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #
3!6
/PEN HOUSING COVER

,OOSEN THE BASIC MODULE USING THE PULLING AIDS
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM
#AUTION
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPO
NENT CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE
CONNECTING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE
AVOIDED UNDER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PRE
VIOUSLY TOUCHING AN EARTHED METAL SUR
FACE
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO A CONDUC

TIVE SURFACE
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES UP TO '' CHECK THE SOLDER
BRIDGES ACCORDING TO &IGURE REMOVE BRIDGES

)NSERT BASIC MODULE INTO THE HOUSING ENSURE THAT

THE RELEASING LEVER IS PUSHED FULLY TO THE LEFT BEFORE
THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN
&IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE RELEASING LE
VER
3IMILARLY CHECK ON THE ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT
MODULE :%!
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES UP TO '' CHECK SOLDER
BRIDGES ACCORDING TO &IGURE
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES FROM (( CHECK THE PLUGS
ACCORDING TO &IGURE
#LOSE HOUSING COVER
)NSERTING THE BACK UP BATTERY
4HE DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S

%VEN THE FAULT RECORDING DATA ARE STORED IN .6
2!-S FOR RELAYS FROM PRODUCTION SERIES '' OR LATER
! BACK UP BATTERY IS AVAILABLE SO THAT THEY ARE RE
TAINED EVEN WITH A LONGER FAILURE OF THE DC SUPPLY
VOLTAGE 4HE BACK UP BATTERY IS ALSO REQUIRED FOR THE
INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK WITH CALENDER TO CONTINUE IN
THE EVENT OF A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE

WHERE NECESSARY
&OR PRODUCTION SERIES FROM (( CHECK THE PLUGS
ACCORDING TO &IGURE
4HE BATTERY IS SUPPLIED SEPARATELY WITH RELAYS OF PRO

DUCTION SERIES UP TO '' )T SHOULD BE INSERTED BE
FORE THE RELAY IS INSTALLED 3ECTION EXPLAINS IN DE
TAIL HOW TO REPLACE THE BACK UP BATTERY *OIN THIS
SECTION ACCORDINGLY WHEN INSERTING THE BATTERY FOR
THE FIRST TIME
7HEN THE PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY IS (( OR LAT
ER THE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AT DELIVERY SO THAT NO ACTIVI
TIES ARE NECESSARY HERE
#HECKING ,3! TRANSMISSION LINK
&OR MODELS WITH INTERFACE FOR A CENTRAL DATA PROCESS

ING STATION EG ,3! THESE CONNECTIONS MUST ALSO
BE CHECKED )T IS IMPORTANT TO VISUALLY CHECK THE ALLO
CATION OF THE TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER CHANNELS
3INCE EACH CONNECTION IS USED FOR ONE TRANSMISSION
DIRECTION THE TRANSMIT CONNECTION OF THE RELAY MUST
BE CONNECTED TO THE RECEIVE CONNECTION OF THE CEN
TRAL UNIT AND VICE VERSA
)F DATA CABLES ARE USED THE CONNECTIONS ARE MARKED
IN SYMPATHY WITH )3/ AND $).
# ' #
48$ 4RANSMIT LINE OF THE RESPECTIVE UNIT

-4 &RAME REFERENCE FOR THE TRANSMIT LINE
28$ 2ECEIVE LINE OF THE RESPECTIVE UNIT
-2 &RAME REFERENCE FOR THE RECEIVE LINE
4HE CONDUCTOR SCREEN AND THE COMMON OVERALL
SCREEN MUST BE EARTHED AT ONE LINE END ONLY 4HIS
PREVENTS CIRCULATING CURRENTS FROM FLOWING VIA THE
SCREEN IN CASE OF POTENTIAL DIFFERENCES

3!6
4RANSMISSION VIA OPTICAL FIBRE IS RECOMMENDED )T IS

PARTICULARLY INSENSITIVE AGAINST DISTURBANCES AND AU
TOMATICALLY PROVIDES GALVANIC ISOLATION 4RANSMIT AND
RECEIVE CONNECTOR ARE DESIGNATED WITH THE SYMBOLS
FOR TRANSMIT OUTPUT AND
FOR RECEIVE IN
PUT
OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD CENTRE BOARD &IGURE

*UMPER
8
8
4HE NORMAL SIGNAL POSITION FOR THE DATA TRANSMISSION

IS FACTORY PRESET AS LIGHT OFF 4HIS CAN BE CHANGED
BY MEANS OF A PLUG JUMPER 8 WHICH IS ACCESSIBLE
WHEN THE BASIC INPUTOUTPUT MODULE IS REMOVED
FROM THE CASE 4HE JUMPER IS SITUATED IN THE REAR AREA
0OSITION

.ORMAL SIGNAL POSITION

,IGHT OFF
,IGHT ON
4HE FIGURE SHOWS ADDITIONALLY THE POSITION OF FURTHER

PLUGS WHICH ARE PRESET BY THE FACTORY AND MUST NOT
BE CHANGED

$
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
#
8
8
8

8

WITH 6 INTERFACE
&IGURE
8
8

0LUG JUMPER SHOWN AS DELIVERED

8 0OSITION ,IGHT OFF
8
WITH OPTICAL FIBRE IN

TERFACE
0OSITION OF THE JUMPER 8 ON THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD
# ' #
3!6

#ONNECTIONS
'ENERAL AND CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ARE SHOWN IN !P

PENDIX ! AND " 4HE MARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES OF THE
BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION

#HECKING THE CONNECTIONS
7ARNING
3OME OF THE FOLLOWING TEST STEPS ARE CARRIED
OUT IN PRESENCE OF HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
4HEY SHALL BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PER
SONNEL ONLY WHICH IS THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH
ALL SAFETY REGULATIONS AND PRECAUTIONARY
MEASURES AND PAY DUE ATTENTION TO THEM
.ON OBSERVANCE CAN RESULT IN SEVERE PER
SONAL INJURY

CONDENSATION
3WITCH OFF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR THE DC SUPPLY
AND THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
#HECK THE CONTINUITY OF ALL THE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS AGAINST THE PLANT AND CONNEC
TION DIAGRAMS
C !RE THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS CORRECTLY
EARTHED
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS CONSISTENT
C )S THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMERS CORRECT
C )S THE POLARITY OF THE OPEN DELTA WINDING ON THE

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND THE CONNECTION COR
RECT IF FITTED
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMERS CORRECT IF USED FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLT
AGE CHECK
)F TEST SWITCHES HAVE BEEN FITTED IN THE SECONDARY
CIRCUITS CHECK THEIR FUNCTION PARTICULARLY THAT IN
THE TEST POSITION THE CURRENT TRANSFORMER SEC
ONDARY CIRCUITS ARE AUTOMATICALLY SHORT CIRCUITED
%NSURE THAT THE MINIATURE SLIDE SWITCH ON THE FRONT
PLATE IS IN THE /&& ew POSITION REFER &IGURE

&IT A DC AMMETER IN THE AUXILIARY POWER CIRCUIT
RANGE APPROX ! TO !
#LOSE THE BATTERY SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER CHECK
POLARITY AND MAGNITUDE OF VOLTAGE AT THE TERMINALS
OF THE UNIT OR AT THE CONNECTOR MODULE
4HE MEASURED CURRENT CONSUMPTION SHOULD BE IN
SIGNIFICANT 4RANSIENT MOVEMENT OF THE AMMETER
POINTER ONLY INDICATES THE CHARGING CURRENT OF THE
STORAGE CAPACITORS
0UT THE MINIATURE SLIDE SWITCH OF THE FRONT PLATE IN
THE /. POSITION 4HE UNIT STARTS UP AND ON
COMPLETION OF THE RUN UP PERIOD THE GREEN ,%$
ON THE FRONT COMES ON THE RED ,%$ GETS OFF AFTER AT
MOST SEC
/PEN THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE DC POWER SUPPLY
2EMOVE DC AMMETER RECONNECT THE AUXILIARY VOLT
AGE LEADS
#LOSE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB SECONDARY
CIRCUIT
#HECK THE DIRECTION OF PHASE ROTATION AT THE RELAY
TERMINALS CLOCKWISE
C !RE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS CORRECTLY EARTHED
/PEN THE MCB S FOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SEC

ONDARY CIRCUITS AND DC POWER SUPPLY
C !RE THE POLARITIES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CIR

CUITS CORRECT
#HECK THROUGH THE TRIPPING CIRCUITS TO THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER
C )S THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS

FORMERS CORRECT
#HECK THROUGH THE CONTROL WIRING TO AND FROM OTH

ER DEVICES
C )S THE POLARITY OF THE WINDOW TYPE SUMMATION

CURRENT TRANSFORMER CORRECT FOR THE MODEL WITH
EARTH FAULT DETECTION
#HECK THE SIGNAL CIRCUITS
# ' #
2ECLOSE THE PROTECTIVE MCB S

3!6

#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS

/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS AND GENERAL
&OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE

WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON
CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR CONFIGURATION OF THE
INTERFACES AND THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS
ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF ANNUNCIATION SIGNALS
BINARY INPUTS OPTICAL INDICATIONS AND TRIP RELAYS
SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS
FUNCTIONS
% . 4 % 2
# 7
# / $ % 7 / 2 $
! # # % 0 4 % $
# / $ % 7 / 2 $
7 2 / . '
!DDRESS BLOCKS TO ARE PROVIDED FOR CONFIGURA

TION OF THE SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM 4HESE SET
TINGS CONCERN THE OPERATION OF THE RELAY COMMUNI
CATION WITH EXTERNAL OPERATING AND PROCESSING
DEVICES VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACES AND THE INTERACTION
OF THE DEVICE FUNCTIONS

/ 0
3 9 3 4 % -
# / . & ) ' 5 2 ! 4 ) / .
4HE DOUBLE ARROW KEY SWITCHES OVER TO THE FIRST

CONFIGURATION BLOCK SEE BELOW 5SE THE KEY ! TO
FIND THE NEXT ADDRESS 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR
DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER IE BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUM
BER 4HE TITLE OF THE REQUESTED PARAMETER APPEARS
BEHIND THE BAR SEE BELOW 4HE SECOND LINE OF THE
DISPLAY SHOWS THE TEXT APPLICABLE TO THE PARAMETER
4HE PRESENT TEXT CAN BE REJECTED BY THE .O KEY .
4HE NEXT TEXT CHOICE THEN APPEARS AS SHOWN IN THE

INITIATION OF TEST PROCEDURES

4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
4O INDICATE AUTHORIZED OPERATOR USE PRESS KEY #7
ENTER THE SIX FIGURE CODE AND CONFIRM
WITH % #ODEWORD ENTRY CAN ALSO BE MADE RETRO
SPECTIVELY AFTER PAGING OR DIRECT ADDRESSING TO ANY
SETTING ADDRESS
4HE ENTERED CHARACTERS DO NOT APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY

INSTEAD ONLY A SYMBOL
APPEARS !FTER CONFIRMATION
OF THE CORRECT INPUT WITH % THE DISPLAY RESPONDS WITH
#7 !##%04%$ 0RESS THE ENTRY KEY % AGAIN
)F THE CODEWORD IS NOT CORRECT THE DISPLAY SHOWS
#/$%7/2$ 72/.' 0RESSING THE #7 KEY ALLOWS
ANOTHER ATTEMPT AT CODEWORD ENTRY
4HE SIMPLEST WAY OF ARRIVING AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS

CONFIGURATION BLOCKS IS TO USE KEY $! FOLLOWED BY
THE ADDRESS NUMBER AND %.4%2 KEY % 4HE
ADDRESS APPEARS WHICH FORMS THE HEADING OF
THE CONFIGURATION BLOCKS
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATING SYSTEM CONFIGURA

TION
BOXES BELOW 4HE CHOSEN ALTERNATIVE MUST BE CON

FIRMED WITH ENTER KEY %
4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM
WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
COME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
# ' #
3!6
3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM WITH *9 OR

ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
STEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL AL

TERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST 4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS
CAN BE MADE INEFFECTIVE
7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA

RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN BUFFER
STORES ARE PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%02/-S AND
PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE )F CONFIGURATION PA
RAMETERS HAVE BEEN CHANGED THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
WILL RESET AND RE START $URING RE START THE DEVICE IS
NOT OPERATIONAL
)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE CONFIGU

RATION BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO WITH KEYS
THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/$%
7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO
CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY
*9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7

3ETTINGS FOR THE INTEGRATED OPERATION
/PERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE SET IN ADDRESS BLOCK

4HIS BLOCK ALLOWS THE DATE FORMAT TO BE SELECTED
-ESSAGES ON THE FRONT DISPLAY CAN BE SELECTED HERE
FOR THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE UNIT OR AFTER A FAULT
EVENT 4O CHANGE ANY OF THESE PARAMETERS CODE

) . 4 % ' 2 ! 4 % $
$ ! 4 %
& / 2 - ! 4
$ $ - - 9 9 9 9
- - $ $ 9 9 9 9

/ 0 % 2
) , ; =
) , ; =
) , ; =
S T
WORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY

7HEN DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE DATE IS SHOWN IN THE
%UROPEAN FORMAT
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK )NTEGRATED OPERATION
/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / .

ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DATE IN THE DISPLAY IS PRESET TO THE %UROPEAN FORMAT

$AY-ONTH9EAR 3WITCH OVER TO THE !MERICAN FORMAT
-ONTH$AY9EAR IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING THE
.O KEY . THEN CONFIRM WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
$$
TWO FIGURES FOR THE DAY
-TWO FIGURES FOR THE MONTH
9999 FOUR FIGURES FOR THE YEAR INCL CENTURY
-ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ST DISPLAY LINE DURING

OPERATION !NY OF THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES AC
CORDING TO 3ECTION CAN BE SELECTED AS MESSAGES
IN THE THE QUIESCENT STATE OF THE RELAY BY REPEATEDLY DE
PRESSING THE .O KEY . 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE
ENTRY KEY % UNDER ADDRESS WILL APPEAR IN THE FIRST
LINE OF THE DISPLAY
ETC
# ' #

3!6

5 ,
/ 0 % 2
; =
N D
ETC
&AULT EVENT ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE DISPLAYED AFTER A

FAULT ON THE FRONT 4HESE CAN BE CHOSEN UNDER AD
DRESSES AND 4HE POSSIBLE MESSAGES
CAN BE SELECTED BY REPEATEDLY PRESSING THE
.O KEY . 4HE DESIRED MESSAGE IS CONFIRMED
WITH THE ENTER KEY % 4HESE SPONTANEOUS MESSAGES

& ! 5 , 4
& A U L T
4 R I P
S T
4 Y P E
ARE ACKNOWLEDGED DURING OPERATION WITH THE 2%3%4

KEY OR VIA THE REMOTE RESET INPUT OF THE DEVICE OR VIA
THE SYSTEM INTERFACE IF FITTED !FTER ACKNOWLEDGE
MENT THE OPERATIONAL MESSAGES OF THE QUIESCENT
STATE WILL BE DISPLAYED AGAIN AS CHOSEN UNDER AD
DRESSES AND
!FTER A FAULT EVENT THE FIRST LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS

TYPE OF FAULT FAULTY PHASES
TYPE OF TRIP COMMAND TRIPPED BREAKER POLE OR THREE
POLE TRIP
4 Y P E
0 R O T 0 I C K
-ESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE ND DISPLAY LINE DURING

OPERATION 4HE VALUE SELECTED BY THE ENTRY KEY % UNDER
ADDRESS WILL APPEAR IN THE SECOND LINE OF THE DIS
PLAY
U P
PROTECTION FUNCTION WHICH HAS PICKED UP
0 R O T 4 R I P
PROTECTION FUNCTION WHICH HAS TRIPPED
$ R O P
THE ELAPSED TIME FROM PICK UP TO DROP OFF
4 R I P
THE ELAPSED TIME FROM PICK UP TO TRIP COMMAND
& A U L T

4
L O C A T
& ! 5 , 4
N D
FOR THE FAULT LOCATION EACH OF THE FAULT LOCATOR MESSAGES

ACCORDING CAN BE SELECTED
4 R I P
!FTER A FAULT EVENT THE SECOND LINE OF THE DISPLAY SHOWS

THE POSSIBILITIES ARE THE SAME AS UNDER ADDRESS
ETC

& ! 5 , 4
) . $ ) #
7 ) 4 (
& ! 5 , 4
$ % 4 % #
7 ) 4 (
4 2 ) 0

# / - -
3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS AND THE FAULT EVENT MESSAGES IN

THE DISPLAY CAN BE DISPLAYED EITHER WITH EACH FAULT DE
TECTION OR ONLY AFTER TRIP COMMAND IS GIVEN 4HIS MODE
CAN BE CHANGED BY DEPRESSING THE .O KEY . AND
CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
# ' #
3!6

#ONFIGURATION OF THE SERIAL INTERFACES
4HE DEVICE PROVIDES ONE OR TWO SERIAL INTERFACES ONE

0# INTERFACE IN THE FRONT FOR OPERATION BY MEANS OF A
PERSONAL COMPUTER AND DEPENDENT OF THE ORDERED
MODEL A FURTHER SYSTEM INTERFACE FOR CONNECTION OF
A CENTRAL CONTROL AND STORAGE UNIT EG 3IEMENS ,3!
#OMMUNICATION VIA THESE INTERFACES REQUIRES
SOME DATA PREARRANGEMENTS IDENTIFICATION OF THE
RELAY TRANSMISSION FORMAT TRANSMISSION SPEED

0 # 3 9 3 4 % -
) . 4 % 2 & ! # % 3

$ % 6 ) # %
! $ $
& % % $ % 2
! $ $
3 5 " 3 4
! $ $
& 5 . # 4
4 9 0 %
$ % 6 ) # %
4 9 0 %

# ' #
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HESE DATA ARE ENTERED TO THE RELAY IN ADDRESS BLOCK
#ODEWORD INPUT IS NECESSARY REFER TO 3ECTION
4HE DATA MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE CON
NECTED DEVICES
!LL ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH CAN BE PROCESSED BY THE
,3! ARE STORED WITHIN THE DEVICE IN A SEPARATE TABLE
4HIS IS LISTED IN !PPENDIX #
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK )NTERFACES FOR PERSONAL

COMPUTER AND CENTRAL COMPUTER SYSTEM
)DENTIFICATION NUMBER OF THE RELAY WITHIN THE SUBSTATION

VALID FOR BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND SYSTEM
INTERFACE 4HE NUMBER CAN BE CHOSEN AT LIBERTY BUT
MUST BE USED ONLY ONCE WITHIN THE PLANT SYSTEM
3MALLEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER

,ARGEST PERMISSIBLE NUMBER

.UMBER OF THE FEEDER WITHIN THE SUBSTATION VALID FOR
BOTH THE INTERFACES OPERATING AND SYSTEM INTERFACE


)DENTIFICATION NUMBER OF THE SUBSTATION IN CASE MORE
THAN ONE SUBSTATION CAN BE CONNECTED TO A CENTRAL
DEVICE


&UNCTION TYPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) FOR
DISTANCE PROTECTION NO
4HIS ADDRESS IS MAINLY FOR INFORMATION IT SHOULD NOT BE
CHANGED
$EVICE TYPE FOR IDENTIFICATION OF THE DEVICE IN 3IEMENS
,3! AND PROGRAM $)'3)Q &OR 3! 6 NO
4HIS ADDRESS IS ONLY FOR INFORMATION IT CANNOT BE
CHANGED

3!6
!DDRESSES TO ARE VALID FOR THE OPERATING

0# INTERFACE ON THE FRONT OF THE RELAY
.OTE &OR OPERATOR PANEL 82 THE 0# INTERFACE
FORMAT ADDRESS MUST BE !3#)) THE 0# "AUD
RATE ADDRESS MUST BE "!5$ THE 0# PAR
ITY ADDRESS MUST BE ./ 34/0
4HE SETTING OF THE 0# '!03 ADDRESS FOR THE
OPERATING INTERFACE OR THE 393 '!03 ADDRESS
FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE IS RELEVANT ONLY WHEN THE
RELAY IS INTENDED TO COMMUNICATE VIA A MODEM 4HE
SETTINGS ARE THE MAXIMUM TIME PERIOD WHICH IS TOLER
ATED BY THE RELAY WHEN GAPS OCCUR DURING TRANSMIS
SION OF A TELEGRAM 'APS MAY OCCUR WHEN MODEMS
ARE USED BY COMPRESSION OF DATA ERROR CORRECTION

0 #
$ ) ' 3 )
) . 4 % 2 &
6
! 3 # ) )

' ! 0 3

0 #
" ! 5 $ 2 ! 4 %

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

0 #
$ ) ' 3 )

'!03
JJREACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAYJJ

(IGHER VALUES FOR REACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAY RE

DUCE THE TRANSMISSION SPEED IN CASE OF TRANSMISSION
ERRORS )F THE RELAY INTERFACE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO A
PERSONAL COMPUTER THEN '!03 MAY BE SET TO S
$ATA FORMAT FOR THE 0# OPERATING INTERFACE

FORMAT FOR 3IEMENS PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM
$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6
!3#)) FORMAT
0 #

AND DIFFERENCES OF THE "AUD RATE 7ITH GOOD TRANS

MISSION QUALITY S IS ADEQUATE 4HE VALUE SHOULD
BE INCREASED WHEN TRANSMISSION QUALITY IS NOT SO
GOOD )T MUST BE NOTED THAT '!03 MUST BE SMALLER
THAN THE SETTING OF REACTION TIME PROTECTION RELAY IN
THE PROTECTION SOFTWARE $)'3)Q 6 2ECOMMENDED
VALUE
0 ! 2 ) 4 9
6
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF DATA GAPS WITHIN TELEGRAMS

WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING DATA TRANSMISSION VIA MODEM
ON THE OPERATING 0# INTERFACE
3MALLEST SETTING VALUE
S
,ARGEST SETTING VALUE
S
4HE TRANSMISSION "AUD RATE FOR COMMUNICATION VIA THE

0# OPERATING INTERFACE AT THE FRONT CAN BE ADAPTED TO
THE OPERATOR S COMMUNICATION INTERFACE EG PERSONAL
COMPUTER IF NECESSARY 4HE AVAILABLE POSSIBILITIES CAN
BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATEDLY DEPRESSION OF THE .O KEY
. #ONFIRM THE DESIRED "AUD RATE WITH THE ENTRY KEY %
0ARITY AND STOP BITS FOR THE 0# OPERATING INTERFACE

$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6 WITH EVEN PARITY AND STOP BIT
. /
3 4 / 0
TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BITS
. /
3 4 / 0
TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BIT EG MO

DEM
# ' #
3!6
!DDRESSES TO ARE VALID FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE IF FITTED

3 9 3
6 $ % 7
# / - 0 ! 4 ) " , %
&ORMAT OF ANNUNCIATIONS AND FAULT RECORDS FOR THE SYS

TEM ,3! INTERFACE
ONLY DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

6 $ % 7
% 8 4 % . $ % $
DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

EXTENDED BY 3IEMENS SPECIFIED DATA
$ ) ' 3 )
) . 4 % 2 &

$)'3)Q 6ERSION 6
6
, 3 !
FORMAT OF THE FORMER 3IEMENS ,3! VERSION

3 9 3
6 $ % 7
# / - 0 ! 4 ) " , %
&ORMAT OF MEASURED VALUES FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTER

FACE
ONLY DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

6 $ % 7
% 8 4 % . $ % $
DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6$%7:6%) )%#

EXTENDED BY 3IEMENS SPECIFIED DATA

3 9 3
' ! 0 3

3 9 3
" ! 5 $ 2

" ! 5 $

- % ! 3 5 2

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

" ! 5 $

3 9 3
0 ! 2 ) 4 9
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF DATA GAPS WITHIN TELEGRAMS

WHICH MAY OCCUR DURING DATA TRANSMISSION VIA MODEM
ON THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE
S
S
4HE TRANSMISSION "AUD RATE FOR COMMUNICATION VIA THE

SYSTEM INTERFACE CAN BE ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM INTER
FACE EG ,3! IF NECESSARY 4HE AVAILABLE POSSIBILITIES
CAN BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATEDLY DEPRESSION OF THE
.O KEY . #ONFIRM THE DESIRED "AUD RATE WITH THE
ENTRY KEY %
0ARITY AND STOP BITS FOR THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE
6 $ % 7 $ ) ' 3 ) 6 , 3 !
FORMAT FOR 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%# OR

3IEMENS PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM $)'3)Q
6ERSION AND FORMER ,3!
. /
3 4 / 0
TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BITS
. /
3 4 / 0
TRANSMISSION WITH ./ PARITY AND 34/0 BIT EG MO

DEM
# ' #

3!6
SWITCH
OVER
FROM
6$%7 PROTOCOL
)%#
TO $)'3)Q PROTOCOL AND VICE VERSA AT
THE SYSTEM INTERFACE 4HE ACTUAL SWITCH OVER IS AR
RANGED BY A SPECIAL TELEGRAM WHICH IS SENT BY
$)'3)Q TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WHEN TO 0# OPERA
TOR INITIATES THE CORRESPONDING COMMAND 7HEN AD
DRESS SEE BELOW IS EQUALLY SET TO 9%3 THEN RE
MOTE PARAMETERIZING IS POSSIBLE VIA THE SYSTEM
INTERFACE BY MEANS OF $)'3)Q PROCEDURES
)T IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH THE 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%#

OVER TO THE TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL AC
CORDING TO THE OPERATION SOFTWARE $)'3)Q DURING OP
ERATION ! PRECONDITION IS THAT A TRANSMISSION FORMAT
IS SELECTED FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WHICH IS COMPAT
IBLE TO THE 6$%7 PROTOCOL )%# IE
ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SWITCHED TO 6$%7
#/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %84%.$%$ )F THIS FACILITY IS TO
BE USED ADDRESS 393 37)4#( MUST BE SET TO
9%3 4HIS CONFIGURATION ADDRESS DOES ONLY PERMIT TO

3 9 3
3 7 ) 4 # (
. /
9 % 3
3WITCH OVER BETWEEN 6$%7 TRANSMISSION PROTOCOL

)%# AND $)'3)Q PROTOCOL VIA THE SYSTEM
INTERFACE
./
IS NOT PERMITTED
9%3
IS PERMITTED
!DDRESS IS RELEVANT ONLY IN CASE THE SYSTEM IN

TERFACE IS CONNECTED WITH A HARDWARE THAT OPERATES
WITH THE PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM $)'
3)Q 4HIS ADDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER IS SHALL BE
PERMITTED TO CHANGE PARAMETERS VIA THIS INTERFACE
/NE OF THE FOLLOWING PRECONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED

3 9 3
0 ! 2 ! - % 4
EITHER ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SET TO $)'3)

6
OR ADDRESS 393 ).4%2& IS SET TO 6$%7
#/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %84%.$%$ AND AT THE
SAME TIME ADDRESS 393 37)4#( SEE
ABOVE IS SET TO 9%3
2EMOTE PARAMETERIZING VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
. /
./
IS NOT PERMITTED
9 % 3
9%3
IS PERMITTED

. / 4
3 -
# / . . % # 4 % $
# / . . % # 4 % $

)F A FAULT LOCATION OUTPUT DEVICE 3- OR 3- IS CON

NECTED TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE ADDRESS 3-
IS TO BE SET TO #/..%#4%$ )N ALL OTHER CASES THE AD
DRESS REMAINS ./4 #/..%#4%$
# ' #
3!6

3ETTINGS FOR FAULT RECORDING
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH A FAULT

DATA STORE SEE 3ECTION $ISTINCTION MUST BE
MADE BETWEEN THE REFERENCE INSTANT AND THE STORAGE
CRITERION ADDRESS .ORMALLY THE GENERAL FAULT
DETECTION SIGNAL OF THE PROTECTION IS THE REFERENCE IN
STANT 4HE STORAGE CRITERION CAN BE THE GENERAL FAULT
DETECTION TOO 34/2!'% "9 &$ OR THE TRIP COM
MAND 34/2!'% "9 42)0 !LTERNATIVELY THE TRIP
COMMAND CAN BE SELECTED AS REFERENCE INSTANT
34!24 7)4( 42)0 IN THIS CASE THE TRIP COMMAND IS
THE STORAGE CRITERION TOO
! FAULT EVENT BEGINS WITH THE FAULT DETECTION OF ANY
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS AND ENDS WITH DROP OFF OF THE
LATEST FAULT DETECTION 4HE SCOPE OF A FAULT RECORD IS
NORMALLY THIS FAULT EVENT ADDRESS )F AUTO RE
CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT THE COMPLETE NETWORK FAULT SE
WITH ONE OR MORE RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS
QUENCE
CAN BE RECORDED UNTIL FINAL FAULT CLEARANCE 4HIS
SHOWS THE TOTAL TIME SEQUENCE OF THE FAULT BUT UTILIZES
MORE MEMORY SPACE EVEN DURING THE DEAD TIMES
4HE ACTUAL RECORDING TIME STARTS WITH THE PRE TRIGGER
TIME 4 02% ADDRESS BEFORE THE REFERENCE IN

& ! 5 , 4

2 % # / 2 $ ) . ' 3
) . ) 4 ) ! 4 ) / .
3 4 / 2 ! ' %
" 9
& $
3 4 / 2 ! ' %
" 9
4 2 ) 0
7 ) 4 (
4 2 ) 0
3 4 ! 2 4

3 # / 0 %
& ! 5 , 4
% 6 % . 4
& ! 5 , 4
) .

# ' #
0 / 7 3 9 3
- ! 8
STANT AND ENDS WITH THE POST FAULT TIME 4 0/34

ADDRESS AFTER THE RECORDING CRITERION HAS DIS
APPEARED 4HE PERMISSIBLE RECORDING TIME FOR EACH
RECORD IS SET UNDER ADDRESS !LTOGETHER S ARE
AVAILABLE FOR FAULT RECORDING )N THIS TIME RANGE UP TO
FAULT RECORDS CAN BE STORED
.OTE 4HE SET TIMES ARE RELATED ON A SYSTEM FREQUEN
CY OF (Z 4HEY ARE TO BE MATCHED ACCORDINGLY FOR
DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES
$ATA STORAGE CAN ALSO BE INITIATED VIA A BINARY INPUT
OR BY OPERATOR ACTION FROM THE MEMBRANE KEYBOARD
ON THE FRONT OF THE RELAY OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE
4HE STORAGE IS TRIGGERED DYNAMICALLY IN THESE CASES
4HE LENGTH OF THE DATA STORAGE IS DETERMINED BY THE
SETTINGS IN ADDRESSES AND BUT MAX 4
-!8 ADDRESS 0RE TRIGGER TIME AND POST
FAULT TIME ARE ADDITIVE TO THE SET VALUES )F THE STORAGE
TIME FOR START VIA BINARY INPUT IS SET TO 0 THEN THE
STORAGE TIME ENDS AFTER DE ENERGIZATION OF THE
BINARY INPUT STATICALLY BUT NOT AFTER 4 -!8 AD
DRESS
"EGINNING OF BLOCK &AULT RECORDINGS
$ATA STORAGE IS INITIATED

FAULT DETECTION IS REFERENCE INSTANT
FAULT DETECTION IS STORAGE CRITERION
FAULT DETECTION IS REFERENCE INSTANT
TRIP COMMAND IS STORAGE CRITERION
TRIP COMMAND IS REFERENCE INSTANT
TRIP COMMAND IS STORAGE CRITERION
3COPE OF A FAULT RECORD

A FAULT RECORD IS STORED FOR EACH &!5,4 %6%.4 IE FROM
PICK UP UNTIL DROP OFF
A FAULT RECORD COMPRISES THE TOTAL .%47/2+ &!5,4 IN
CLUDING AUTO RECLOSURE ATTEMPTS
-AXIMUM TIME PERIOD OF A FAULT RECORD
S
S

3!6

0RE TRIGGER TIME BEFORE THE REFERENCE INSTANT

S
S
0 2 %
0OST FAULT TIME AFTER THE STORAGE CRITERION DISAPPEARS

S
S
0 / 3 4
" ) . ! 2 9
) .
+ % 9 " / ! 2 $
3TORAGE TIME WHEN FAULT RECORDING IS INITIATED VIA A

BINARY INPUT PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT TIMES ARE
ADDITIVE
S
S
OR 0 IE AS LONG AS THE BINARY INPUT IS ENERGIZED BUT
NOT LONGER THAN 4 -!8
3TORAGE TIME WHEN FAULT RECORDING IS INITIATED VIA THE
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD PRE TRIGGER AND POST FAULT
TIMES ARE ADDITIVE
S

S
!DDRESS IS NOT RELEVANT IN CASE THAT THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A CONTROL AND STORAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
WHICH OPERATES WITH THE PROTOCOL ACCORDING TO 6$%7:6%) )%# "UT IF THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A
FORMER ,3! SYSTEM THE RELAY MUST BE INFORMED HOW LONG A TRANSMITTED FAULT RECORD MUST BE SO THAT THE FORMER
,3! SYSTEM RECEIVES THE CORRECT NUMBER OF FAULT RECORD VALUES
/NLY FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A FORMER ,3! SYSTEM

3 9 3
6 ! , 5 % 3

, % . ' 4 (
6 ! ,
& ) 8
6 ! 2
,ENGTH OF A FAULT RECORD WHICH IS TRANSMITTED VIA THE SERIAL

SYSTEM INTERFACE
VALUES FIX OR
VARIABLE LENGTH WITH A MAXIMUM OF VALUES
# ' #
3!6

#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

)NTRODUCTION
4HE DEVICE 3! IS CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A SERIES

OF PROTECTION AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 4HE SCOPE OF
THE HARD AND FIRM WARE IS MATCHED TO THESE FUNC
TIONS &URTHERMORE INDIVIDUAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE SET
CONFIGURED TO BE EFFECTIVE OR NON EFFECTIVE OR THE
INTERACTION OF THE FUNCTIONS CAN BE MODIFIED BY CON
FIGURATION PARAMETERS !DDITIONALLY THE RELAY CAN BE
ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM FREQUENCY
ST EXAMPLE FOR CONFIGURATION OF THE SCOPE OF THE DE
VICE
!SSUME A NETWORK COMPRISING OVERHEAD LINES AND
CABLE SECTIONS &OR REASONS OF UNIFORMITY ALL DEVICES
HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED WITH AUTO RECLOSE FACILITIES
3INCE AUTO RECLOSE IS ONLY APPLICABLE FOR THE OVER
HEAD LINE SECTIONS THIS FUNCTION WILL BE DE CONFI
GURED FOR THE DEVICES PROTECTING THE CABLE SECTIONS
ND EXAMPLE FOR THE INTERACTION OF THE FUNCTIONS
4HE DEVICE INCLUDES DISTANCE PROTECTION AND EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IN
EARTHED NETWORKS 4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION IS RE
QUIRED TO OPERATE WITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE
THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION SHALL OPERATE WITHOUT
AUTO RECLOSURE 4HE DEVICE WILL BE INFORMED OF THIS
CONDITION DURING CONFIGURATION
4HE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ARE INPUT THROUGH THE
INTEGRATED OPERATION KEYBOARD AT THE FRONT OF THE DE
VICE OR BY MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER CONNECTED
TO THIS FRONT INTERFACE 4HE USE OF THE INTEGRATED OP
ERATING KEYBOARD IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION
!LTERATION OF THE PROGRAMMED PARAMETERS RE
QUIRES THE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD SEE 3ECTION
7ITHOUT CODEWORD THE SETTING CAN BE READ OUT BUT
NOT ALTERED
&OR THE PURPOSE OF CONFIGURATION ADDRESSES JJ
AND JJ ARE PROVIDED /NE CAN ACCESS THE BEGIN
NING OF THE CONFIGURATION BLOCKS EITHER BY DIRECT DIAL
PRESS DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $!
TYPE IN ADDRESS
PRESS EXECUTE KEY %
OR BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS FORWARDS OR BACK
WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS APPEARS
# ' #
7ITHIN THE BOCK ONE CAN PAGE FORWARD WITH ! OR

BACK WITH " %ACH PAGING ACTION LEADS TO A FURTHER
ADDRESS FOR THE INPUT OF A CONFIGURATION PARAMETER )N
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS SHOWN IN A
BOX AND EXPLAINED )N THE UPPER LINE OF THE DISPLAY
BEHIND THE NUMBER AND THE BAR STANDS THE ASSO
CIATED DEVICE FUNCTION )N THE SECOND LINE IS THE ASSO
CIATED TEXT EG %8)34 )F THIS TEXT IS APPROPRIATE
THE ARROW KEYS ! OR " CAN BE USED TO PAGE THE NEXT
ADDRESS )F THE TEXT SHOULD BE ALTERED PRESS THE
.O KEY . AN ALTERNATIVE TEXT THEN APPEARS EG
./. %8)34 4HERE MAY BE OTHER ALTERNATIVES
WHICH CAN THEN BE DISPLAYED BY REPEATED DEPRES
SION OF THE .O KEY . 4HE REQUIRED ALTERNATIVE
MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE KEY %
5SE OF THE DOUBLE ARROW KEY BRINGS ONE TO THE NEXT
ADDRESS BLOCK IN THIS CASE 4HERE ONE FINDS FUR
THER SETTING PARAMETERS WHICH CAN EQUALLY BE CON
FIRMED OR ALTERED
4HE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3
#ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SET
TINGS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
.O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
TIVE
THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/$%
7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO
CONTINUE CONFIGURATION )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY
*9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7
ABORT WITH . AS DESCRIBED ABOVE
7HEN ONE EXITS THE SETTING PROGRAM THE ALTERED PA
RAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN VOLA
TILE MEMORIES ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN %%
02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE 4HE
PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $URING
RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL

3!6

0ROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE AVAILABLE PROTECTIVE AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

CAN BE PROGRAMMED AS EXISTING OR NOT EXISTING &OR
SOME FUNCTIONS IT MAY ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO SELECT BE
TWEEN MULTIPLE ALTERNATIVES
FUNCTION MEANS THAT THE FUNCTION WILL BE PROCESSED

THAT INDICATION WILL APPEAR EG SWITCHED OFF BUT
THAT THE FUNCTION WILL HAVE NO EFFECT ON THE RESULT OF
THE PROTECTIVE PROCESS EG NO TRIPPING COMMAND
&UNCTIONS WHICH ARE CONFIGURED AS ./. %8)34 WILL

NOT BE PROCESSED IN 3! 4HERE WILL BE NO AN
NUNCIATIONS AND THE ASSOCIATED SETTING PARAMETERS
FUNCTIONS LIMIT VALUES WILL NOT BE REQUESTED DURING
SETTING 3ECTION )N CONTRAST SWITCH OFF OF A
4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW THE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE

MAXIMUM SCOPE OF THE DEVICE )N AN ACTUAL CASE
FUNCTIONS WHICH ARE NOT AVAILABLE WILL NOT APPEAR IN
THE DISPLAY

3 # / 0 %
/ &
& 5 . # 4 ) / . 3
4ELEPROTECTION MODE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION

"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3COPE OF FUNCTIONS
$ ) 3 4
0 2 / 4

4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % #
% 8 ) 3 4
. / .
. / .
5 . $ % 2 2 % ! # (
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
/ 6 % 2 2 % ! # (
&AULT DETECTION MODE FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION

$ ) 3 4 & $ % 4
/ 6 % 2 # 5 2 2 % . 4

5 3 % 2
) - 0 % $ ! . # %
: / . %
. / .
5 )
$ % 4
% 8 ) 3 4
& ! 5 , 4
. / .
0 / 7 % 2
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4

% 8 ) 3 4

, / ' ) #
3 7 ) . '

% - % 2 '
/ #
% 8 ) 3 4
. / .
% 8 ) 3 4
# ' #
3!6
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION

. / .
4 ( % 2 - ! ,
/ ,
% 8 ) 3 4

. / .
) . 4 % 2 . ! ,
! 2
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
)NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM

. / .
) 3 / ,
% &
% 8 ) 3 4

. / .
3 9 . # ( # ( % # +
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
% 8 ) 3 4
&AULT LOCATION
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED

SYSTEM

. / .
% ! 2 4 (
% 8 ) 3 4
& ! 5 , 4
% 8 ) 3 4
$ ) 2 . / .
, / # ! 4
% 8 ) 3 4
. / .

& ! 5 , 4
$ ) 2
0ARAMETER SET CHANGE OVER

0 ! 2 ! -
$ ) 2 % # # / - 0 ! 2 ) 3 / .
. / .
) . 6 % 2 3 %
% 8 ) 3 4
4 ) - %
# /
% 8 ) 3 4
4HE RATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY MUST COMPLY WITH THE SETTING UNDER ADDRESS )F THE SYSTEM FREQUENCY IS NOT
(Z ADDRESS MUST BE CHANGED

& 2 % 1 5 % . # 9
F .

( Z
F .

( Z
# ' #
2ATED SYSTEM FREQUENCY (Z OR (Z

3!6

3ETTING THE DEVICE CONFIGURATION
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE CONFIGURATION AFFECTS THE INTERACTION OF THE PROTECTIVE AND ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ABOVE ALL FOR 3! THE
INTERACTION OF THE AUTO RECLOSING SYSTEM WITH THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

$ % 6 ) # %
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $EVICE CONFIGURATION
# / . & ) ' 5 2 ! 4 ) / .

# "
4 % 3 4
4 2 ) 0
# , / 3 %
,
3 % 1 5
,
4 ( 2 % %
0 / , %

! 2
W
! 2
W O
" )
0 / , %
,
4 2 ) 0
$ ) 3 4
9 % 3
#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST VIA BINARY INPUT IS CARRIED OUT

42)0 #,/3% 0/,% THAT IS THREE POLE !2 CYCLE OR
EACH POLE ONE AFTER THE OTHER WITH A
3%15 , , , OPEN AND CLOSE THIS IS ONLY APPLICA
BLE WHEN SINGLE POLE !2 IS USED OR
4(2%% 0/,% 42)0 WILL BE INITIATED WITHOUT RECLOSE
!UTO RECLOSING WORKS TOGETHER WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION OR NOT
. /

4 % , %
9 % 3
. /

! 2
W
% - % 2 '
9 % 3
. /

! 2
W
) 3 % &
7HEN SIGNAL TRANSMISSION IS DISTORTED OR SWITCHED OFF

9%3
!2 OPERATES AS SET
./
!2 IS BLOCKED
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION OPERATION

9%3
!2 WORKS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SETTING BUT

NO AUTO RECLOSE WHEN ONLY )% PICK UP
./
!2 IS BLOCKED
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
9 % 3
9%3
!2 WORKS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SETTING ONLY

WHEN TRIPPING ON EARTH FAULT IS ALLOWED
. /
./
!2 IS BLOCKED

# ' #
3!6

! 2
W
% &
9 % 3
. /

! 2
9 % 3
. /
# ' #
W
% 8 4
7ITH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED NETWORKS

9%3
!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT BUT ONLY THREE POLE
./
NO !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT
7ITH EXTERNAL TRIP VIA BINARY INPUT

9%3
!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT BUT ONLY THREE POLE
./
NO !2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT

3!6

-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS

)NTRODUCTION
4HE FUNCTIONS OF THE BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS REPRE

SENTED IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS !PPENDIX ! RELATE
TO THE FACTORY SETTINGS 4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE INPUTS
AND OUTPUTS OF THE INTERNAL FUNCTIONS CAN BE REAR
RANGED AND THUS ADAPTED TO THE ON SITE CONDITIONS
-ARSHALLING OF THE INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IS PER
FORMED BY MEANS OF THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR
VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT 4HE OPERATION
OF THE OPERATOR PANEL IS DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3ECTION
-ARSHALLING BEGINS AT THE PARAMETER ADDRESS

4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS REQUIRED FOR MARSHAL
LING REFER TO 3ECTION 7ITHOUT CODEWORD ENTRY
PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE CHANGED
$URING CODEWORD OPERATION IE FROM CODEWORD
ENTRY UNTIL THE TERMINATION OF THE MARSHALLING PROCE
DURE THE SOLID BAR IN THE DISPLAY FLASHES
7HEN THE 3! PROGRAMS ARE RUNNING THE SPECIFIC
LOGIC FUNCTIONS WILL BE ALLOCATED TO THE PHYSICAL INPUT
AND OUTPUT MODULES OR ,%$S IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
SELECTION
%XAMPLE &AULT DETECTION IS REGISTERED FROM THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION IN PHASE , 4HIS EVENT IS GENER
ATED IN 3! AS AN !NNUNCIATION LOGICAL FUNC
TION AND SHOULD BE AVAILABLE AT CERTAIN TERMINALS OF
THE UNIT AS A ./ CONTACT 3INCE SPECIFIC UNIT TERMI
NALS ARE HARD WIRED TO A SPECIFIC PHYSICAL SIGNAL
RELAY EG TO THE SIGNAL RELAY THE PROCESSOR MUST
BE ADVISED THAT THE LOGICAL SIGNAL $IST&AULT
, SHOULD BE TRANSMITTED TO THE SIGNAL RELAY 4HUS
WHEN MARSHALLING IS PERFORMED TWO STATEMENTS OF
THE OPERATOR ARE IMPORTANT 7HICH LOGICAL ANNUNCI
ATION GENERATED IN THE PROTECTION UNIT PROGRAM
SHOULD TRIGGER WHICH PHYSICAL SIGNAL RELAY 5P TO
LOGICAL ANNUNCIATIONS CAN TRIGGER ONE PHYSICAL
SIGNAL RELAY
! SIMILAR SITUATION APPLIES TO BINARY INPUTS )N THIS
CASE EXTERNAL INFORMATION EG VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
MCB TRIPPED IS CONNECTED TO THE UNIT VIA A PHYSI

- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '

CAL INPUT MODULE AND SHOULD INITIATE A LOGICAL FUNC

TION NAMELY BLOCKING 4HE CORRESPONDING QUESTION
TO THE OPERATOR IS THEN 7HICH SIGNAL FROM A PHYSI
CAL INPUT RELAY SHOULD INITIATE WHICH REACTION IN THE
DEVICE /NE PHYSICAL INPUT SIGNAL CAN INITIATE UP TO
LOGICAL FUNCTIONS
4HE TRIP RELAYS CAN ALSO BE ASSIGNED DIFFERENT FUNC
TIONS %ACH TRIP RELAY CAN BE CONTROLLED BY EACH COM
MAND FUNCTION OR COMBINATION OF COMMAND FUNC
TIONS
4HE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED IN
MULTIPLE MANNER %G ONE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
TRIGGER SEVERAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEVERAL TRIP RELAYS ADDI
TIONALLY BE INDICATED BY ,%$S AND BE CONTROLLED BY A
BINARY INPUT UNIT 4HE RESTRICTION IS THAT THE TOTAL OF ALL
PHYSICAL INPUTOUTPUT UNITS BINARY INPUTS PLUS SIGNAL
RELAYS PLUS ,%$S PLUS TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE TO BE AS
SOCIATED WITH ONE LOGICAL FUNCTION MUST NOT EXCEED A
NUMBER OF )F THIS NUMBER IS TRIED TO BE EXCEEDED
THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW A CORRESPONDING MESSAGE
4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE IS SET UP SUCH THAT FOR
EACH PHYSICAL BINARY INPUT EACH OUTPUT RELAY AND
FOR EACH MARSHALLABLE ,%$ THE OPERATOR WILL BE
ASKED WHICH LOGICAL FUNCTION SHOULD BE ALLOCATED
4HE OFFERED LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE TABULATED FOR THE
BINARY INPUTS OUTPUTS AND ,%$S IN THE FOLLOWING SEC
TIONS
4HE BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING PARAMETER BLOCKS
IS REACHED BY DIRECTLY SELECTING THE ADDRESS
IE
ENTER ADDRESS
PRESS ENTER KEY %
OR BY PAGING WITH KEYS FORWARDS OR BACK
WARDS UNTIL ADDRESS HAS BEEN REACHED 4HE
BEGINNING OF THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS THEN APPEARS
"EGINNING OF MARSHALLING BLOCKS
# ' #
3!6
/NE CAN PROCEED THROUGH THE MARSHALLING BLOCKS

WITH THE KEY OR GO BACK WITH THE KEY 7ITHIN A
BLOCK ONE GOES FORWARDS WITH ! OR BACKWARDS WITH "
%ACH FORWARD OR BACKWARD STEP LEADS TO DISPLAY OF
THE NEXT INPUT OUTPUT OR ,%$ POSITION )N THE DISPLAY
BEHIND THE ADDRESS AND THE SOLID BAR THE PHYSICAL
INPUTOUTPUT UNIT FORMS THE HEADING
FUNCTION APPEARS FOR CHECKING PURPOSES 4HIS CAN

BE ALTERED EITHER BY ENTERING A DIFFERENT FUNCTION
NUMBER OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE FUNC
TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 )F THE FUNCTION HAS BEEN
CHANGED ANOTHER CONFIRMATION IS NECESSARY WITH
THE ENTER KEY %
4HE KEY COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNC

TION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY ! SWITCHES OVER
TO THE SELECTION LEVEL FOR THE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS TO BE AL
LOCATED $URING THIS CHANGE OVER IE FROM PRESS
ING THE & KEY UNTIL PRESSING THE ! KEY THE BAR BEHIND
THE ADDRESS NUMBER IS REPLACED BY A & 4HE DIS
PLAY SHOWS IN THE UPPER LINE THE PHYSICAL INPUTOUT
PUT UNIT THIS TIME WITH A THREE DIGIT INDEX NUMBER
4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS THE LOGICAL FUNCTION
WHICH IS PRESENTLY ALLOCATED
)N THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS ALLOCATION POSSIBILITIES

FOR BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS
ARE GIVEN 4HE ARROWS OR !" AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE
OF THE DISPLAY BOX INDICATE PAGING FROM BLOCK TO
BLOCK WITHIN THE BLOCK OR ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 4HE
CHARACTER & BEFORE THE ARROW INDICATES THAT THE FUNC
TION KEY & MUST BE PRESSED BEFORE PUSHING THE ARROW
KEY !
/N THIS SELECTION LEVEL THE ALLOCATED FUNCTION CAN BE

CHANGED BY PRESSING THE .O KEY . "Y REPEATED
USE OF THE KEY . ALL MARSHALLABLE FUNCTIONS CAN BE
PAGED THROUGH THE DISPLAY "ACK PAGING IS POSSI
BLE WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 7HEN THE REQUIRED
FUNCTION APPEARS PRESS THE EXECUTE KEY % !FTER THIS
FURTHER FUNCTIONS CAN BE ALLOCATED TO THE SAME PHYSI
CAL INPUT OR OUTPUT MODULE WITH FURTHER INDEX NUM
BERS BY USING THE KEY ! %ACH SELECTION MUST BE
CONFIRMED BY PRESSING THE KEY % )F A SELECTION
PLACE SHALL NOT BE ASSIGNED TO A FUNCTION SELECTION IS
MADE WITH THE FUNCTION NOT ALLOCATED
9OU CAN LEAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL BY PRESSING THE KEY
COMBINATION & ! IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY &
FOLLOWED BY THE ARROW KEY ! 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
AGAIN THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS NUMBER OF THE PHYSICAL
INPUTOUTPUT MODULE .OW YOU CAN PAGE WITH KEY !
TO THE NEXT INPUTOUTPUT MODULE OR WITH " TO THE PRE
VIOUS TO REPEAT SELECTION PROCEDURE AS ABOVE
4HE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO PROVIDED WITH FUNCTION
NUMBERS WHICH ARE EQUALLY LISTED IN THE TABLES )F THE
FUNCTION NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS CAN BE INPUT DIRECTLY
ON THE SELECTION LEVEL 0AGING THROUGH THE POSSIBLE
FUNCTIONS IS THEN SUPERFLUOUS 7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE
FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZEROS NEED NOT BE ENTERED
!FTER INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER USE THE ENTER KEY
% )MMEDIATELY THE ASSOCIATED IDENTIFICATION OF THE
# ' #
4HE FUNCTION NUMBERS AND DESIGNATIONS ARE LISTED

COMPLETELY IN !PPENDIX #
4HE MARSHALLING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY
TIME BY THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE
FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DIS
PLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3
#ONFIRM WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW ALLOCA
TIONS SHALL BECOME VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE
.O KEY . INSTEAD CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE
ABORTED IE ALL ALTERATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN
CHANGED SINCE THE LAST CODEWORD ENTRY ARE LOST
4HUS ERRONEOUS ALTERATIONS CAN BE MADE INEFFEC
TIVE
THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$ /& #/
$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO
CONTINUE MARSHALLING )F YOU PRESS THE 9ES KEY *
9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS 3!6% .%7
ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
7HEN ONE EXITS THE MARSHALLING PROGRAM THE ALTERED
PARAMETERS WHICH UNTIL THEN HAVE BEEN STORED IN
VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY SECURED IN
%%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST POWER OUTAGE
4HE PROCESSOR SYSTEM WILL RESET AND RE START $UR
ING RE START THE DEVICE IS NOT OPERATIONAL

3!6

-ARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS
4HE UNIT CONTAINS BINARY INPUTS WHICH ARE DESIG

NATED ).054 TO ).054 4HEY CAN BE MARSHALLED
IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS BLOCK IS REACHED
BY PAGING IN BLOCKS OR BY DIRECT ADDRESSING WITH
$! % 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT
AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
! CHOICE CAN BE MADE FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL INPUT FUNC
TION AS TO WHETHER THE DESIRED FUNCTION SHOULD BE
COME OPERATIVE IN THE NORMALLY OPEN MODE OR IN
THE NORMALLY CLOSED MODE WHEREBY
ADDRESS BLOCK
7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER LEADING ZER
OS NEED NOT BE USED 4O INDICATE THE CONTACT MODE
THE FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
POINT FOLLOWED BY OR WHEREBY

MEANS NORMALLY OPEN MODE CORRESPONDS

TO ./ AS ABOVE

MEANS NORMALLY CLOSED MODE CORRESPONDS

TO .# AS ABOVE
./
NORMALLY OPEN MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A ./

CONTACT IE THE CONTROL VOLTAGE AT THE INPUT
TERMINALS ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION
.#
NORMALLY CLOSED MODE THE INPUT ACTS AS A

.# CONTACT IE CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT AT THE
TERMINALS TURNS OFF THE FUNCTION CONTROL VOLT
AGE ABSENT ACTIVATES THE FUNCTION
)F THE EXTENSION WITH OR IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY FIRST

INDICATES THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN NORMALLY
OPEN MODE ./ "Y PRESSING THE .O KEY . THE
MODE IS CHANGED TO .# !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNC
TIONS CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNC
TIONS FORWARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS
WITH THE BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION
THEN MUST BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTRY KEY %
7HEN PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY EACH INPUT FUNC

TION IS DISPLAYED WITH THE INDEX ./ OR .# WHEN
PROCEEDING WITH THE .O KEY .
.OTE /NE LOGICAL FUNCTION MUST NOT BE MARSHALLED TO

TWO OR MORE BINARY INPUTS BECAUSE AN /2 LOGIC OF
THE SIGNALS CAN NOT BE GUARANTEED
4ABLE SHOWS A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL THE BINARY INPUT

FUNCTIONS WITH THEIR ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER
&.O )NPUT FUNCTIONS NATURALLY HAVE NO EFFECT IF THE
CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE
RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFI
GURED REFER TO 3ECTION
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE BINARY INPUTS AS DELIVERED

FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P
PENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE
THE ALLOCATION FOR BINARY INPUT 4ABLE SHOWS ALL
BINARY INPUTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY

- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
" ) . ! 2 9
) . 0 5 4 3
"EGINNING OF BLOCK -ARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
4HE FIRST BINARY INPUT IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

&

" ) . ! 2 9
) . 0 5 4
!LLOCATIONS FOR BINARY INPUT
#HANGE OVER TO THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH & !

, % $
) . 0 5 4
R E S E T
. /

) . 0 5 4
N O T
A L L O C A T E D

2ESET OF STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS &.O

NORMALLY OPEN OPERATION
,%$S ARE RESET WHEN CONTROL VOLTAGE PRESENT
.O FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE INITIATED BY BINARY INPUT
# ' #
3!6
,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT BINARY INPUT WITH THE ARROW
KEY !

" ) . ! 2 9
) . 0 5 4
&.O
!BBREVIATION

NOT ALLOCATED
4IME 3YNCHRO
3TART &LT2EC
,%$ RESET
0ARAM3ELEC
0ARAM3ELEC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
3YS 4EST
3YS -- BLOCK
#" !UXP CL
-ANUAL #LOSE
#LOSE#MD"LO
64 MCB 4RIP
6 MCB 4RIP
P 4RIP 0ERM
/NLY POLE
2!2 2ELEASE
$!2 2ELEASE
3TART &LT,OC
#" 4EST
%& $ET ON
%& $ET OFF
%& $ETBLOC
%& BLOCK
%& COMP ON
%& COMPOFF
%& 2ECEPT
%& 2EC&AIL
/, ON
/, OFF
/, BLOCK
%MER BLOCK
) BLOCK
!2 ON
!2 OFF
!2 BLOCK
!2 RESET
P 2!2 BLOCK
P 2!2 BLOCK
2!2 BLOCK
$!2 BLOCK
3TART !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP P !2
4RIP P !2
$!2 AFT 2!2
#" READY
3YNCRELEASE
4ABLE
-ARSHALLING BINARY INPUT
$ESCRIPTION
"INARY INPUT IS NOT ALLOCATED TO ANY INPUT FUNCTION
3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
3TART FAULT RECORDING FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
0ARAMETER SET SELECTION IN CONJUNCTION WITH &.O
5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION
3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGESVALUES ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION
3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES ARE BLOCKED
#IRCUIT BREAKER IS POLE CLOSED FROM #" AUXILIARY CONTACT
#IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
"LOCK ALL CLOSING COMMANDS
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER HAS TRIPPED
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR HAS TRIPPED
%XTERNAL !2 READY FOR SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE
%XTERNAL !2 IS PROGRAMMED SINGLE POLE ONLY
2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL EG EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE
2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL EG EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE
3TART FAULT LOCATOR FROM EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
4RIGGER CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST
3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
"LOCK EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
"LOCK EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEM
3WITCH ON DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
3WITCH OFF DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
#ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL %& COMPARISON
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT COMPARISON FAULTY
3WITCH ON OVERLOAD PROTECTION
3WITCH OFF OVERLOAD PROTECTION
"LOCK OVERLOAD PROTECTION
"LOCK EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
"LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
3WITCH ON INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
"LOCK INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION STATICALLY
2ESET INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
"LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2
"LOCK TREE POLE 2!2
"LOCK COMPLETE 2!2
"LOCK COMPLETE $!2
3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP SIGNAL SINGLE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
4RIP SIGNAL THREE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2
$!2 IS PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
#IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
2ECLOSE RELEASE FROM AN EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM CHECK RELAY
-ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR BINARY INPUTS CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #

3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION

3YNC ON
3YNC OFF
3YNC BLOCK
3YNC 3TART
3YNC SYNCH
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC ORIDE
$IST BLOCK
%XTENS :"
%XTENS :,
$IS 2ECEPT
$IS2EC&AIL
$IS0/44 ON
$IS0/44 OFF
$IS0544 ON
$IS0544 OFF
%XT4RIP BLK
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RPWO!2
5SER 43TART
5SER 42ESET
5SER 43TART
5SER 42ESET
4ABLE
$ESCRIPTION
3WITCH ON INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
"LOCK INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3TART TO MEASURE SIGNAL FOR INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE ANY CHECK
"LOCK DISTANCE PROTECTION
2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :" FROM EXTERNAL
2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :, FROM EXTERNAL
#ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION FAULTY
3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
"LOCK TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION
4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION
4RIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION TIMER START
5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION TIMER RESET
-ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR BINARY INPUTS
!DDR
ST DISPLAY LINE

-!23(!,,).'
").!29 ).0543

").!29
).054
).054
,%$ RESET
./
!CKNOWLEDGE AND RESET OF STORED ,%$ AND DIS

PLAY INDICATIONS ,%$ TEST

").!29
).054
).054
64 MCB 4RIP
./

6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS

TRIPPED

").!29
).054
).054
#" !UXP CL ./

FROM CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT #" POSI

TION IS /.

").!29
).054
).054
-ANUAL #LOSE ./

-ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FROM DISCREPANCY

SWITCH

").!29
).054
).054
$IS 2ECEPT
./

").!29
).054
).054
$IS2EC&AIL
./

").!29
).054
).054
#" READY
./

").!29
).054
).054
!2 BLOCK
./

").!29
).054
).054
!2 ON
./

").!29
).054
).054
!2 OFF
./

4ABLE

ND DISPLAY LINE
&.O
2EMARKS
(EADING OF THE ADDRESS BLOCK
FROM CARRIER DEVICE FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DIS

TANCE PROTECTION
"INARY INPUTS TO ARE ONLY EFFECTIVE WHEN THE

INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE IN
THE RELAY AND HAS BEEN CONFIGURED AS %8)34 RE
FER TO 3ECTION
0RESET BINARY INPUTS

# ' #
3!6

-ARSHALLING OF THE SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAYS
4HE UNIT CONTAINS SIGNAL OUTPUTS ALARM RELAYS

4HE SIGNAL RELAYS ARE DESIGNATED 3)'.!, 2%,!9
TO 3)'.!, 2%,!9 AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN AD
DRESS BLOCK 4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN
BLOCKS WITH OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING $!
% 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DE
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE
POSSIBLE IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL PHYSICAL SIGNAL RELAYS SEE ALSO
3ECTION
4ABLE GIVES A LISTING OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS
WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBERS &.O !NNUN
CIATION FUNCTIONS ARE NATURALLY NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE
CORRESPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE
RELAY OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFI
REFER TO 3ECTION
GURED

- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
3 ) ' . ! ,
2 % , ! 9 3
ADDRESS BLOCK
.OTE AS TO 4ABLE !NNUNCIATIONS WHICH ARE INDI

CATED BY A LEADING SIGN REPRESENT THE DIRECT
CONFIRMATION OF THE BINARY INPUTS AND ARE AVAILABLE AS
LONG AS THE CORRESPONDING BINARY INPUT IS ENERGIZED
&URTHER INFORMATION ABOUT ANNUNCIATIONS SEE 3EC
TION
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAYS AS DELIV
ERED FROM FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS
IN !PPENDIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW EXAMPLES
FOR MARSHALLING )N THE EXAMPLE FOR SIGNAL RELAY THE
GROUP ANNUNCIATION FOR SEVERAL ANNUNCIATION FUNC
TIONS ON ONE SIGNAL RELAY IS SHOWN 4ABLE SHOWS
ALL SIGNAL RELAYS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE OUTPUT

SIGNAL RELAYS
4HE FIRST SIGNAL RELAY IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

&

3 ) ' . ! ,
2 % , ! 9
!LLOCATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY

2 % , ! 9
$ I S
3 E N D

2 % , ! 9
N O T
A L L O C A T E D
3IGNAL RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR CARRIER FOR TELEPROTECTION
WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION &.O
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR SIGNAL RELAY
,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT SIGNAL OUTPUT RELAY WITH THE
ARROW KEY ! 3IGNAL RELAY REPRESENTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY AN EXAMPLE FOR A GROUP ANNUNCIATION IE
SEVERAL LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ARE GIVEN TO ONE OUTPUT SIGNAL RELAY
&

3 ) ' . ! ,
2 % , ! 9

2 % , ! 9
6 4
M C B
# ' #
4 R I P

-EANING &AILURE IN MEASURED QUANTITIES

ST 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS
TRIPPED &.O

3!6

2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E

5 M E A S
2 % , ! 9
& U S E
5 S Y M M
2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E
) S Y M M
2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E

RD &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
MONITOR PHASE TO EARTH &.O
5 P
2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E
5 P
2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E

ND &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SUM
MONITOR &.O
2 % , ! 9
& A I L U R E
& A I L U R E
2 % , ! 9
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q

2 % , ! 9
N O T
A L L O C A T E D

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SYMME
TRY MONITOR &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SYM
METRY MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE MONITOR
MEASURED VOLTAGE COLLAPSED &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY FUSE FAILURE MONITOR &.O


TH &AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR
&.O

NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR SIGNAL RELAY
!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAY CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT
WITH & !

2 % , ! 9

3 ) ' . ! ,


# ' #
3!6
&.O

4ABLE
!BBREVIATION
NOT ALLOCATED
4IME 3YNCHRO
3TART &LT2EC
,%$ RESET
0ARAM3ELEC
0ARAM3ELEC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
!NNUNC
3YS 4EST
3YS -- BLOCK
$EVOPERATIVE
0ROT OPERAT
,%$ RESET
0ARAMRUNNING
0ARAM 3ET !
0ARAM 3ET "
0ARAM 3ET #
0ARAM 3ET $
&AILURE 6
&AILURE 6
&AILURE 6
&AILURE 6
&AILURE )/
&AILURE )/
) SUPERVISION
&AILURE )
&AILURE )SYMM
5 SUPERVISION
&AILURE 5P E
&AILURE 5P P
&AILURE 5SYMM
&AILURE 5MEAS
&USE &AILURE
&AIL0HASE3EQ
#" !UXP CL
-ANUAL #LOSE
#LOSE#MD"LO
64 MCB 4RIP
6 MCB 4RIP
P 4RIP 0ERM
/NLY POLE
2!2 2ELEASE
$!2 2ELEASE
$EVICE &LT$ET
$EV&LT$ET ,
$EV&LT$ET ,
$EV&LT$ET ,
$EV&LT$ET %
$ESCRIPTION
.O ANNUNCIATION ALLOCATED
3YNCHRONIZE INTERNAL REAL TIME CLOCK
3TART FAULT RECORDING BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
2ESET ,%$ INDICATORS
3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGESVALUES ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION
3YSTEM INTERFACE MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES ARE BLOCKED
0ROTECTION DEVICE OPERATIVE
!T LEAST ONE PROTECTION FUNCTION IS OPERATIVE
3TORED ANNUNCIATIONS ARE RESET
0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET
0ARAMETER 3ET ! IS ACTIVATED
0ARAMETER 3ET " IS ACTIVATED
0ARAMETER 3ET # IS ACTIVATED
0ARAMETER 3ET $ IS ACTIVATED
&AILURE 6 INTERNAL DC SUPPLY
&AILURE 6 !$ CONVERTER
&AILURE IN FIRST INPUTOUTPUT MODULE BASE MODULE '%!
&AILURE IN ADDITIONAL INPUTOUTPUT MODULE ADDITIONAL MODULE :%!
'ENERAL FAILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT SUPERVISION
&AILURE SUPERVISION ) MEASURED CURRENTS
&AILURE SUPERVISION SYMMETRY )
'ENERAL FAILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
&AILURE SUPERVISION 5 PHASE EARTH
&AILURE SUPERVISION 5 PHASE PHASE
&AILURE SUPERVISION SYMMETRY 5
&AILURE MEASURED VOLTAGE
&USE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATED
&AILURE SUPERVISION PHASE SEQUENCE
#IRCUIT BREAKER POSITION IS /. FROM #" AUXILIARY CONTACT
#IRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED FROM DISCREPANCY SWITCH
"LOCK CLOSING COMMAND
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER HAS TRIPPED
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR HAS TRIPPED
%XTERNAL !2 READY FOR POLE RECLOSURE
%XTERNAL !2 IS PROGRAMMED POLE ONLY
2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL
2ELEASE $!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL
'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE
&AULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE PHASE ,
&AULT DETECTION OF THE DEVICE EARTH FAULT
-ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #

3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION

$EVICE 4RIP
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P
$EV4RIP FORW
$EV4RIP REV
-ANUAL #LOSE
-AN#LOSE #MD
#" !LARM 3UPP
3TART &LT,OC
#" 4EST
#" IN 4EST
#" 4EST 4RIP
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P
%& $ET ON
%& $ET OFF
%& $ETBLOC
%& $ET OFF
%& $ETBLOCK
%& $ETACTIV
%& $ETECTION
%& $ETEC ,
%& $ETEC ,
%& $ETEC ,
%& FORWARDS
%& REVERSE
%& UNDEFINED
%& $ET 4RIP
%& BLOCK
%& COMP ON
%& COMPOFF
%& 2ECEPT
%& 2EC&AIL
%& 0ROT OFF
%& BLOCKED
%& ACTIVE
%& $IRBLOCK
%& &LT)E
%& &LT )E

%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
%&
4ABLE

&LT )E
5E
4 $ELAY
4
4
4RIP
$IR OFF
3END
%CHO
4RANS"LOC
$ESCRIPTION
'ENERAL TRIP OF THE DEVICE
4RIP BY THE DEVICE SINGLE POLE ,
4RIP BY THE DEVICE THREE POLE , , ,
4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN FORWARD LINE DIRECTION
4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
-ANUAL CLOSE INDICATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKER
-ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION ALARM SUPPRESSED
3TART FAULT LOCATOR BY EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA BINARY INPUT
4RIGGER CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST
#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IS IN PROGRESS
4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION GENERAL
4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION SINGLE POLE ,
4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION THREE POLE ,
3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
"LOCK EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS SWITCHED OFF
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS BLOCKED
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEM IS ACTIVE
%ARTH FAULT IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM DETECTED
%ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN PHASE , DETECTED
%ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN FORWARD DIRECTION DETECTED
%ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED IN REVERSE DIRECTION DETECTED
%ARTH FAULT NON EARTHED DIRECTION UNDEFINED
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION
"LOCK EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED NETWORKS
3WITCH ON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
3WITCH OFF EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
2ECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
2ECEPTION FAILURE FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE IS BLOCKED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION LOW VALUE STAGE )% PICKED UP
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP DEFINITE OR
INVERSE TIME
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP
%ARTH FAULT DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E PICKED UP
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION GENERAL
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
#ARRIER TRANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
%CHO SIGNAL SENT FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
4RANSIENT BLOCKING OF EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT
# ' #
3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION

/, ON
/, OFF
/, BLOCK
/, 0ROT OFF
/, BLOCKED
/, ACTIVE
/, 7ARN )
/, 7ARN
/, PICKUP
/, 4RIP
%MER BLOCK
) BLOCK
%MER OFF
%MER BLOCK
%MER ACTIVE
%MER MODE
%MER'EN&LT
%MER &LT ,
%MER &LT ,
%MER &LT ,
%MER &LT %
%MER )
%MER )
%MER )%
%MER 4)
%MER 4)
%MER 4)%
%MER'EN4RIP
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIP P
!2 ON
!2 OFF
!2 BLOCK
!2 RESET
P 2!2 BLOCK
P 2!2 BLOCK
2!2 BLOCK
$!2 BLOCK
3TART !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP , !2
4RIP P !2
4RIP P !2
$!2 AFT 2!2
#" READY
3YNCRELEASE
!2 OFF
!2 ON
4ABLE
$ESCRIPTION
3WITCH ON THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
3WITCH OFF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
"LOCK THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CURRENT WARNING STAGE PICKED UP
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL WARNING STAGE PICKED UP
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FAULT DETECTION OF TRIP STAGE
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP BY TRIP STAGE
"LOCK EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
"LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING
'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION , OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION OF ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION OF ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
&AULT DETECTION OF )% STAGE OF EMERGENCY /# PROTECTION
%MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 ) EXPIRED
%MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 ) EXPIRED
%MERGENCY /# PROTECTION TIME 4 )% EXPIRED
'ENERAL TRIP BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
3WITCH ON INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
"LOCK INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ABORT
2ESET INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
"LOCK SINGLE POLE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
"LOCK THREE POLE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
"LOCK COMPLETE RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE 2!2 ST SHOT
"LOCK COMPLETE DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE $!2 FURTHER SHOTS
3TART SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP SIGNAL , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP SIGNAL SINGLE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
4RIP SIGNAL THREE POLE FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR !2
$!2 IS PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
#IRCUIT BREAKER READY FOR !2 CYCLE
2ECLOSE RELEASE BY AN EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM CHECK RELAY
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
# ' #

3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION
$ESCRIPTION

!2 INOPERATIV
!2 NOT READY
!2 BLOCKDYN
#" NOT READY
!2 4 #" %XP
!2 IN PROG
2!2 ONLY
2!2 4 ACTRUN
2!2 4 P RUN
2!2 4 P RUN
2!2 P 0ROG
2!2 P 0ROG
2!2 :ONE 2EL
!2 EVOLVFLT
$!2 ONLY
$!2 4 ACT RUN
$!2 4 P RUN
$!2 4 P RUN
$!2 4 P RUN
$!2 :ONE 2EL
!2 #LOSE #MD
2!2 P #LOSE
2!2 P #LOSE
$!2 P #LOSE
!2 4 2ECLRUN
!2 SUCCESSFUL
$EFINIT4RIP
P 4RIP PERM
3YNC-EAS2EQ
!2 4RIP P
3YNC ON
3YNC OFF
3YNC BLOCK
3YNC 3TART
3YNC SYNCH
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC ORIDE
3YNC OFF
3YNC BLOCKED
3YNC FAULTY
3YNC4SUP%XP
3YNC RUNNING
3YNC/VERRIDE
3YNC 3YNCHRO
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC 55
3YNC 5DIFF
3YNC FDIFF
3YNC DIFF
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS NOT OPERATIVE

)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS NOT READY FOR RECLOSE
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS BLOCKED DYNAMICALLY
#IRCUIT BREAKER NOT READY FOR A TRIPRECLOSE CYCLE
#IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
!UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IS IN PROGRESS
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY 2!2 CYCLE
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ACTION TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION THREE POLE DEAD TIME FOR 2!2 IS RUNNING
2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY SINGLE POLE !2
2!2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY THREE POLE !2
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN 2!2 STAGE
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION EVOLVING FAULT RECOGNIZED DURING DEAD TIME
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS PROGRAMMED TO PERFORM ONLY $!2 CYCLES
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ACTION TIME FOR $!2 IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR FIRST $!2 IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR SECOND $!2 IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION DEAD TIME FOR FURTHER $!2 IS RUNNING
INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT TRIP IN $!2 STAGE
2ECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE $!2 DELAYED !2
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION RECLAIM TIME IS RUNNING
!UTO RECLOSURE WAS SUCCESSFUL
$EFINITIVE FINAL TRIP SIGNAL
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION IS READY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIP
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION REQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE CHECK
)NTERNAL !2 FUNCTION TRIPS THREE POLE BECAUSE BLOCKED
3WITCH ON SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
"LOCK SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION
3TART TO MEASURE SIGNAL FOR INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM CHECK SYNCHRONISM
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHROC HECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHRO CHECK PROGRAM OVERRIDE ANY CHECK
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS DISTURBED
#IRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION TIME EXPIRED
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK IS RUNNING
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED OVERRIDE
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED SYNCHRONISM
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED LIVE LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED DEAD LINE LIVE BUS
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK HAS STATED DEAD LINE DEAD BUS
3YNCHRONISM CHECK 5 EXCEEDED
3YNCHRONISM CHECK F EXCEEDED
3YNCHRONISM CHECK EXCEEDED
4ABLE

# ' #
3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION

3YNC RELEASE
3YNC#LOSE#MD
$IST BLOCK
%XTENS :"
%XTENS :,
$IST OFF
$IST BLOCKED
$IST ACTIVE
$IS:" !2 BLK
$IS:, !2 BLK
$IST'EN&LT
$IST&AULT ,
$IST&AULT ,
$IST&AULT ,
$IST&AULT %
,OOP , % F
,OOP , % F
,OOP , % F
,OOP , F
,OOP , F
,OOP , F
,OOP , % R
,OOP , % R
,OOP , % R
,OOP , R
,OOP , R
,OOP , R
$IST &OR$IR
$IST 2EV$IR
$IST 4
$IST 4
$IST 4
$IST 4
$IST 4
$IST 4"
$IST 4,
$IS'EN 4RIP
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P
$IS4RIP BACK
$IS4RIP:P
$IS4RIP:P
$IS4RIP:"P
$IS4RIP:"P
$IS4RIP :,
$IS4RIP:P
$IS4RIP:P
$IS4RIP:4
$IS4RIP &$
$IS4RIP
4ABLE
$ESCRIPTION
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING RELEASE
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING COMMAND
"LOCK DISTANCE PROTECTION
2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :" FROM EXTERNAL
2ELEASE DISTANCE OVERREACHING ZONE :, FROM EXTERNAL
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS ACTIVE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS RECLOSURE AFTER FAULT IN ZONE :"
$ISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS RECLOSURE AFTER FAULT IN ZONE :,
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT DETECTION ,
$ISTANCE PROTECTION %ARTH FAULT DETECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , % IN FORWARD DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , , IN FORWARD DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , % IN REVERSE DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN LOOP , , IN REVERSE DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION &AULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 ST STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 ND STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 RD STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 TH STAGE DIRECTIONAL EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4 FINAL STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4" ST EXTENDED STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4IME 4, ND EXTENDED STAGE EXPIRED
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL 4RIP COMMAND
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP SINGLE POLE ,
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP THREE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP WITH A HIGHER BACK UP STAGE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 SINGLE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 THREE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :"4" SINGLE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :"4" THREE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN EXTENDED STAGE :,4,
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 SINGLE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4 THREE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN STAGE :4
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN DIRECTIONAL STAGE FAULT DETECTION
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP IN NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE FAULT DETECTION
# ' #

3!6
&.O
!BBREVIATION

$IS 2ECEPT
$IS2EC&AIL
$IS0/44 ON
$IS0/44 OFF
$IS0544 ON
$IS0544 OFF
$IS4ELE ON
$IS4ELE OFF
$IS 2ECEPT
$IS 2EC&AIL
$IS 3END
$IS0/44 %CHO
$IS4RANS"LO
0OWER 3WING
03 4 ACTION
/3 4RIP
%XT4RIP BLK
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RIP ,
%XT4RPWO!2
%XT'EN4RIP
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P
%XT4RIP WO!2
5SER 43TART
5SER 42ESET
5SER 43TART
5SER 42ESET
5SER OUTPUT
5SER OUTPUT
4ABLE

$ESCRIPTION
#ARRIER RECEPTION SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
#ARRIER RECEPTION FAULTY SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH ON PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
3WITCH OFF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER FUNCTION
4ELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED ON
4ELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF
#ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION RECEIVED
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION FAULTY
4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FROM DISTANCE PROTECTION
%CHO SIGNAL DISTANCE PROTECTION TRANSMITTED
4RANSIENT BLOCKING DISTANCE PROTECTION IS RUNNING
0OWER SWING DETECTED
0OWER SWING ACTION TIME IS RUNNING
/UT OF STEP 4RIP COMMAND
"LOCK TRIP SIGNAL BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP SIGNAL , BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP SIGNAL BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
'ENERAL TRIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT AUTO RECLOSURE
/UTPUT SIGNAL OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTION
-ARSHALLING POSSIBILITIES FOR SIGNAL RELAYS AND ,%$S
# ' #
3!6
!DDR
ST DISPLAY LINE

-!23(!,,).'
3)'.!, 2%,!93

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
$IS 3END

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
!2 INOPERATIV

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
#" !LARM 3UPP

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
64 MCB 4RIP
&AILURE )
&AILURE 5P E
&AILURE 5P P
&AILURE )SYMM
&AILURE 5SYMM
&AILURE 5MEAS
&USE &AILURE
&AIL0HASE3EQ

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
$EVOPERATIVE

4HE .# CONTACT OF THIS RELAY INDICATES $E

VICE FAULT

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
$EVICE 4RIP

4RIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY EITHER PROTECTION FUNC

TION OF THE DEVICE

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
$IST&AULT ,
%MER &LT ,

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
$IST&AULT ,
%MER &LT ,

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
$IST&AULT ,
%MER &LT ,

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
2%,!9
$IST&AULT %
%MER &LT %

3)'.!,
2%,!9
2%,!9
$EV4RIP 2EV
4ABLE
ND DISPLAY LINE
&.O
2EMARKS

4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR CARRIER FROM TELEPRO

TECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION
ONLY WHEN AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS AVAIL
ABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
'ROUP ANNUNCIATION OF ALL DISTURBANCES IN

MEASURED QUANTITIES
&AULT DETECTION ANNUNCIATIONS OF

THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION
OR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME
PROTECTION
&AULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION
0RESET ANNUNCIATIONS FOR SIGNAL RELAYS
# ' #

3!6

-ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ INDICATORS
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE UNIT CONTAINS ,%$S FOR OPTICAL INDICATIONS

OF WHICH CAN BE MARSHALLED 4HEY ARE DESIGNATED
,%$ TO ,%$ AND CAN BE MARSHALLED IN ADDRESS
BLOCK 4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS
WITH OR BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $!
% 4HE SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DE
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION -ULTIPLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE
POSSIBLE IE ONE LOGICAL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION CAN
BE GIVEN TO SEVERAL ,%$S SEE ALSO 3ECTION
ESSARY TO INPUT THE LEADING ZEROS 4O INDICATE WHETH

ER THE STORED OR UNSTORED MODE SHALL BE EFFECTIVE THE
FUNCTION NUMBER CAN BE EXTENDED BY A DECIMAL
POINT FOLLOWED BY OR WHEREBY
!PART FROM THE LOGICAL FUNCTION EACH ,%$ CAN BE

MARSHALLED TO OPERATE EITHER IN THE STORED MODE M
FOR MEMORIZED OR UNSTORED MODE NM FOR NOT MEM
ORIZED %ACH ANNUNCIATION FUNCTION IS DISPLAYED
WITH THE INDEX M OR NM WHEN PROCEEDING WITH THE .
KEY
)F THE EXTENSION WITH OR IS OMITTED THE DISPLAY

SHOWS FIRST THE FUNCTION DESIGNATION IN UNSTORED
MODE WITH NM 0RESS THE .O KEY . TO CHANGE TO
STORED MODE M !FTER DIRECT INPUT OTHER FUNCTIONS
CAN BE SELECTED BY PAGING THROUGH THE FUNCTIONS FOR
WARDS WITH THE .O KEY . OR BACKWARDS WITH THE
BACKSPACE KEY 2 4HE CHANGED FUNCTION THEN MUST
BE RE CONFIRMED BY THE ENTER KEY %
4HE MARSHALLABLE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS ARE THE

SAME AS THOSE LISTED IN 4ABLE !NNUNCIATION FUNC
TIONS ARE OF COURSE NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE CORRE
SPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE RELAY
OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFIGURED

UNSTORED INDICATION NOT MEMORIZED CORRE

SPONDS TO NM AS ABOVE
STORED INDICATION MEMORIZED CORRESPONDS TO
M AS ABOVE
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE ,%$S AS PRESET BY THE FACTORY

IS SHOWN IN THE FRONT OF THE UNIT &IGURE 4HE FOL
LOWING BOXES SHOW AS AN EXAMPLE THE ASSIGNMENT
FOR ,%$ 4ABLE SHOWS ALL ,%$ INDICATORS AS THEY
ARE PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
7ITH DIRECT INPUT OF THE FUNCTION NUMBER IT IS NOT NEC

, % $
- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
). $ ) # ! 4 / 2 3
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE ,%$ IN

DICATORS
4HE FIRST MARSHALLABLE ,%$ IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

, % $
!LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$


, % $
6 4
M C B
4 R I P

, % $
& A I L U R E

N M

)
N M
,%$ HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

ST 6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB HAS
TRIPPED &.O
ND &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SUM
MONITOR &.O
# ' #
3!6

, % $
& A I L U R E
5 P

, % $
& A I L U R E
5 P

, % $
& A I L U R E
) S Y M M

, % $
& A I L U R E
5 S Y M M

, % $
& A I L U R E
5 M E A S

& U S E

, % $
& A I L U R E
, % $
N M
N M
N M

, % $
N O T
A L L O C A T E D

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O
TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED CURRENT SYMME
TRY MONITOR &.O
N M

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SYM
METRY MONITOR PHASE TO PHASE &.O
N M

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE MONITOR
MEASURED VOLTAGE COLLAPSED &.O
N M
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q

RD &AILURE DETECTED BY MEASURED VOLTAGE SUM
MONITOR PHASE TO EARTH &.O
N M

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY FUSE FAILURE MONITOR &.O

TH &AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR
&.O
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR ,%$
!FTER INPUT OF ALL ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS FOR ,%$ CHANGE BACK TO THE MARSHALLING LEVEL IS CARRIED OUT WITH
& !

, % $
!LLOCATIONS FOR ,%$

4HE COMPLETE PRESETTINGS FOR ,%$ INDICATORS ARE LISTED IN 4ABLE
# ' #

3!6
!DDR
ST DISPLAY LINE

-!23(!,,).'
,%$S

,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
64 MCB 4RIP

&AILURE )
&AILURE 5P E
&AILURE 5P P
&AILURE )SYMM
&AILURE 5SYMM
&AILURE 5MEAS
&USE &AILURE
&AIL0HASE3EQ

ND DISPLAY LINE
&.O

NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM

,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST&AULT , M
%MER &LT , M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST&AULT , M
%MER &LT , M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST&AULT , M
%MER &LT , M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST&AULT %
%MER &LT %
M
M

,%$
,%$
!2 NOT READY
NM

,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST 4
%MER 4)
M
M

,%$
,%$
$IST 4

,%$
,%$
$IST 4

,%$
,%$
$IST 4

,%$
,%$
,%$
,%$
$IST 4
%MER 4)
%MER 4)%
M
M
M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$EV4RIP P, M
$EV4RIP P
M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$EV4RIP P, M
$EV4RIP P
M

,%$
,%$
,%$
$EV4RIP P, M
$EV4RIP P
M

4ABLE

2EMARKS
'ROUP ANNUNCIATION OF ALL DISTURBANCES IN

MEASURED QUANTITIES
&AULT DETECTION ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE

DISTANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION OR THE EMER
GENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
ONLY WHEN THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNC

TION IS AVAILABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
)NDICATION OF EXPIRY OF THE DISTANCE PROTEC

TION STAGES OR OF THE TIME STAGES OF THE
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
4RIP SIGNAL GIVEN BY EITHER PROTECTION FUNC

TION OF THE DEVICE
0RESET ,%$ INDICATORS

# ' #
3!6

-ARSHALLING OF THE COMMAND TRIP RELAYS
4HE UNIT CONTAINS TRIP RELAYS WHICH ARE DESIGNATED

42)0 2%,!9 TO 42)0 2%,!9 %ACH TRIP RELAY CAN
BE CONTROLLED BY UP TO LOGICAL COMMANDS 4HE TRIP
RELAYS CAN BE MARSHALLED IN THE ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE BLOCK IS REACHED BY PAGING IN BLOCKS WITH OR
BY DIRECTLY ADDRESSING WITH $! INPUT OF THE ADDRESS
NUMBER AND PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % 4HE
SELECTION PROCEDURE IS CARRIED OUT AS DESCRIBED IN
3ECTION -ULTIPLE COMMANDS ARE POSSIBLE IE
ONE LOGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION CAN BE GIVEN TO SEV
ERAL TRIP RELAYS SEE ALSO 3ECTION
-OST OF THE ANNUNCIATION FUNCTIONS IN ACCORDANCE
WITH 4ABLE CAN BE MARSHALLED TO OUTPUT COM
MAND RELAYS "UT THOSE LISTED IN 4ABLE ARE PARTICU
LARLY SUITABLE FOR TRIP RELAY OUTPUT 2EGARD THE TABLE AS
A RECOMMENDED PRE SELECTION #OMMAND FUNC
TIONS ARE NATURALLY NOT EFFECTIVE WHEN THE CORRE
SPONDING PROTECTION FUNCTION IS NOT FITTED IN THE RELAY
OR HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED OUT DE CONFIGURED
4HE ASSIGNMENT OF THE TRIP RELAYS AS DELIVERED FROM

- ! 2 3 ( ! , , ) . '
4 2 ) 0
2 % , ! 9 3
ADDRESS BLOCK
FACTORY IS SHOWN IN THE GENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !PPEN

DIX ! 4HE FOLLOWING BOXES SHOW EXAMPLES FOR MAR
SHALLING OF TRIP RELAYS AND )N THE EXAMPLE FOR TRIP
RELAY THE GROUP COMMAND FOR SEVERAL COMMAND
FUNCTIONS ON ONE TRIP RELAY IS SHOWN 4ABLE SHOWS
ALL TRIP RELAYS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY
)MPORTANT NOTE 7ITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT FOR EACH CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE THE
CORRESPONDING PHASE SEGREGATED COMMAND EG
$EV4RIP P, &.O FOR POLE , AS ALSO
THE THREE POLE COMMAND $EV4RIP P &.O
IS MARSHALLED TO THE CORRECT TRIPPING RELAY 4HIS
IS TAKEN CARE OF IN THE PRESETTING OF THE RELAY BUT MUST
ALSO BE CONSIDERED IF THE ALLOCATION OF THE TRIP RELAYS
IS ALTERED
)F FURTHER PROTECTION FUNCTIONS SHALL TRIP THE SAME
BREAKER EACH COMMAND RELAY MUST BE TRIGGERED BY
THE CORRESPONDING COMMAND FUNCTION 3IMILAR IS VAL
ID FOR CLOSING COMMANDS
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -ARSHALLING OF THE TRIP RE

LAYS
4HE FIRST TRIP RELAY IS REACHED WITH THE KEY !

4 2 ) 0
2 % , ! 9
!LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY

4 2 ) 0
2 % ,
# L O S E
# M D

4 2 ) 0
2 % ,
N O T
A L L O C A T E D
! 2
4RIP RELAY HAS BEEN PRESET FOR

!UTO RECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
FUNCTION &.O
NO FURTHER FUNCTIONS ARE PRESET FOR TRIP RELAY
,EAVE THE SELECTION LEVEL WITH KEY COMBINATION & ! 9OU CAN GO THEN TO THE NEXT TRIP RELAY WITH THE ARROW KEY !
4RIP RELAY REPRESENTS AS PRESET FROM THE FACTORY AN EXAMPLE FOR TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE , &OR
THIS ALL COMMAND FUNCTIONS WHICH SHALL TRIP POLE , ARE ALLOCATED
# ' #

3!6

4 2 ) 0
2 % , ! 9

!LLOCATIONS FOR TRIP RELAY

4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE ,
4 2 ) 0
2 % ,
$ E V 4 R I P
P ,

2 % ,
4 2 ) 0
$ E V 4 R I P
&.O


ST 'ENERAL SINGLE POLE TRIP COMMAND OF THE DE
VICE FOR BREAKER POLE , &.O

ND 'ENERAL THREE POLE TRIP COMMAND OF THE DE
VICE &.O
P
!BBREVIATION

NOT ALLOCATED
$EVICE &LT$ET
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P
$EV4RIP FORW
$EV4RIP REV
-AN#LOSE #MD
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P ,
#" 4EST P
%& $ET 4RIP
%& &LT)E
%& &LT )E

%& &LT )E
%& 4 $ELAY
%& 4
%& 4
%& 4RIP
%& 3END
/, 4RIP
%MERG'EN&LT
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIPP,
%MER4RIP P
!2 #LOSE #MD
2!2 P #LOSE
2!2 P #LOSE
$!2 P #LOSE
3YNC#LOSE#MD
$IST'EN&LT
4ABLE
,OGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION

.O FUNCTION ALLOCATED
4RIP BY THE DEVICE THREE POLE , , ,
4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN FORWARD LINE DIRECTION
4RIP BY THE DEVICE ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
-ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND FOR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
4RIP BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION THREE POLE ,
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION LOW VALUE STAGE )% PICKED UP
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP DEFINITE
TIME OR INVERSE TIME
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL STAGE )% PICKED UP
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY TIME EXPIRED
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION GENERAL
#ARRIER TRANSMISSION SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON %&
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION TRIP BY TRIP STAGE
'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
2ECLOSE COMMAND BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE 2!2 RAPID !2
2ECLOSE COMMAND AFTER POLE $!2 DELAYED !2
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK CLOSING COMMAND
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 'ENERAL FAULT DETECTION
#OMMAND FUNCTIONS CONTINUED NEXT PAGE
# ' #
3!6
&.O

4ABLE
!BBREVIATION
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P,
$IS4RIP P
$IS4RIP BACK
$IS 3END
/3 4RIP
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P,
%XT4RIP P
%XT4RIP WO!2
5SER OUTPUT
5SER OUTPUT
,OGICAL COMMAND FUNCTION

$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP THREE POLE
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 4RIP WITH A HIGHER BACK UP STAGE
4RANSMISSION SIGNAL FROM DISTANCE PROTECTION
/UT OF STEP TRIP COMMAND
4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
4RIP THREE POLE BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION WITHOUT !2
#OMMAND FUNCTIONS
!DDR
ST DISPLAY LINE

-!23(!,,).'
42)0 2%,!93

42)0
42)0 2%,
2%,!9
!2 #LOSE #MD

42)0
42)0 2%,
2%,!9
$EVICE &LT$ET


42)0
42)0 2%,
42)0 2%,
2%,!9
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P

4RIP COMMAND FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE ,

42)0
42)0 2%,
42)0 2%,
2%,!9
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P


42)0
42)0 2%,
42)0 2%,
2%,!9
$EV4RIP P,
$EV4RIP P

4ABLE
ND DISPLAY LINE
&.O
2EMARKS
ONLY WHEN INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS
AVAILABLE AND CONFIGURED AS %8)34
0RESET COMMAND FUNCTIONS FOR TRIP RELAYS
# ' #

3! 6

3AFETY PRECAUTIONS
7ARNING
!LL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHICH APPLY FOR WORK
IN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ARE TO BE OBSERVED
DURING TESTS AND COMMISSIONING
-EMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DIS

PLAY PANEL
4HE MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL IS EXTER

NALLY ARRANGED SIMILAR TO A POCKET CALCULATOR &IGURE
ILLUSTRATES THE FRONT VIEW
! TWO LINE EACH CHARACTER LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
PRESENTS THE INFORMATION %ACH CHARACTER COMPRISES
A X DOT MATRIX .UMBERS LETTERS AND A SERIES OF
SPECIAL SYMBOLS CAN BE DISPLAYED
$URING DIALOG THE UPPER LINE GIVES A FOUR FIGURE NUM
BER FOLLOWED BY A BAR 4HIS NUMBER PRESENTS THE SET
TING ADDRESS 4HE FIRST TWO DIGITS INDICATE THE AD
DRESS BLOCK THEN FOLLOWS THE TWO DIGIT SEQUENCE
NUMBER )N MODELS WITH PARAMETER CHANGE OVER FA
CILITY THE IDENTIFIER OF THE PARAMETER SET IS SHOWN BE
FORE THE SETTING ADDRESS

.UMERICAL KEYS FOR THE INPUT OF NUMERALS

TO
$IGITS TO FOR NUMERICAL INPUT
$ECIMAL POINT
0
)NFINITY SYMBOL
#HANGE OF SIGN INPUT OF NEGATIVE

NUMBERS
$IALOG WITH THE RELAY
3ETTING OPERATION AND INTERROGATION OF DIGITAL PROTEC

TION AND AUTOMATION SYSTEMS CAN BE CARRIED OUT VIA
THE INTEGRATED MEMBRANE KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY
PANEL LOCATED ON THE FRONT PLATE !LL THE NECESSARY
OPERATING PARAMETERS CAN BE ENTERED AND ALL THE IN
FORMATION CAN BE READ OUT FROM HERE /PERATION IS
ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE VIA THE INTERFACE SOCKET BY
MEANS OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR SIMILAR

4HE KEYBOARD COMPRISES KEYS WITH NUMBERS

9ES.O AND CONTROL BUTTONS 4HE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE
KEYS IS EXPLAINED IN DETAIL IN THE FOLLOWING
#AUTION
#ONNECTION OF THE DEVICE TO A BATTERY CHAR
GER WITHOUT CONNECTED BATTERY MAY CAUSE
IMPERMISSIBLY HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH DAMAGE
THE DEVICE 3EE ALSO 3ECTION UNDER
4ECHNICAL DATA FOR LIMITS

9ES.O KEYS FOR TEXT PARAMETERS

*9
9ES KEY OPERATOR AFFIRMS THE DIS

PLAYED QUESTION
.O KEY OPERATOR DENIES THE DIS

PLAYED QUESTION OR REJECTS A SUG
GESTION AND REQUESTS FOR ALTERNATIVE
+EYS FOR PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY

0AGING FORWARDS THE NEXT ADDRESS
IS DISPLAYED
0AGING BACKWARDS THE PREVIOUS
ADDRESS IS DISPLAYED
"LOCK PAGING FORWARDS THE BEGIN

NING OF THE NEXT ADDRESS BLOCK IS DIS
PLAYED
"LOCK PAGING BACKWARDS THE BEGIN
NING OF PREVIOUS ADDRESS BLOCK IS
DISPLAYED
# ' #
3! 6

#ONFIRMATION KEY
%
%NTER OR CONFIRMATION KEY EACH NU

MERICAL INPUT OR CHANGE VIA THE 9ES
.O KEYS MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE
ENTER KEY ONLY THEN DOES THE DE
VICE ACCEPT THE CHANGE 4HE ENTER
KEY CAN ALSO BE USED TO ACKNOWL
EDGE AND CLEAR A FAULT PROMPT IN
THIS DISPLAY A NEW INPUT AND RE
PEATED USE OF THE ENTER KEY IS THEN
NECESSARY
#ONTROL AND SPECIAL KEYS

#7
#ODEWORD PREVENTS UNAUTHORIZED

ACCESS TO SETTING PROGRAMS NOT
NECESSARY FOR CALL UP OF ANNUNCI
ATIONS OR MESSAGES
"ACKSPACE ERASURE OF INCORRECT EN

TRIES
&
&UNCTION KEY
USED
$!
-3
EXPLAINED
WHEN
$IRECT ADDRESSING IF THE ADDRESS

NUMBER IS KNOWN THIS KEY ALLOWS
DIRECT CALL UP OF THE ADDRESS
-ESSAGES3IGNALS INTERROGATION
OF ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT AND OPER
ATING DATA REFER 3ECTION
4HE THREE KEYS ! 2%3%4 WHICH ARE SOMEWHAT

SEPARATED FROM THE REST OF THE KEYS CAN BE AC
CESSED WHEN THE FRONT COVER IS CLOSED 4HE ARROWS
HAVE THE SAME FUNCTION AS THE KEYS WITH IDENTICAL
SYMBOLS IN THE MAIN FIELD AND ENABLE PAGING IN FOR
WARD DIRECTION 4HUS ALL SETTING VALUES AND EVENT
DATA CAN BE DISPLAYED WITH THE FRONT COVER CLOSED
&URTHERMORE STORED ,%$ INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT CAN
BE ERASED VIA THE 2%3%4 KEY WITHOUT OPENING THE
FRONT COVER $URING RESET OPERATION ALL ,%$S ON THE
FRONT WILL BE ILLUMINATED THUS PERFORMING A ,%$ TEST
7ITH THIS RESET ADDITIONALLY THE FAULT EVENT INDICA
TIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE DEVICE
ARE ACKNOWLEDGED THE DISPLAY SHOWS THEN THE OP
ERATIONAL VALUES OF THE QUIESCENT STATE 4HE DISPLAY IS
SWITCHED OVER TO OPERATING MODE AS SOON AS ONE OF
THE KEYS $! -3 #7 OR IS PRESSED
# ' #
/PERATION WITH A PERSONAL COM

PUTER
! PERSONAL COMPUTER ALLOWS JUST AS THE OPERATOR

PANEL ALL THE APPROPRIATE SETTINGS INITIATION OF TEST
ROUTINES AND READ OUT OF DATA BUT WITH THE ADDED
COMFORT OF SCREEN BASED VISUALIZATION AND A ME
NU GUIDED PROCEDURE
!LL DATA CAN BE READ IN FROM OR COPIED ONTO MAGNET
IC DATA CARRIER FLOPPY DISC EG FOR SETTINGS AND CON
FIGURATION !DDITIONALLY ALL THE DATA CAN BE DOCU
MENTED ON A CONNECTED PRINTER )T IS ALSO POSSIBLE BY
CONNECTING A PLOTTER TO PRINT OUT THE FAULT HISTORY
TRACES
&OR OPERATION OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER THE INSTRUC
TION MANUALS OF THIS DEVICE ARE TO BE OBSERVED 4HE
0# PROGRAM $)'3) IS AVAILABLE FOR SETTING AND PRO
CESSING OF ALL DIGITAL PROTECTION DATA .OTE THAT THE
OPERATING INTERFACE IN THE FRONT OF THE RELAY IS NOT GAL
VANICALLY ISOLATED AND THAT ONLY ADEQUATE CONNEC
TION CABLES ARE APPLIED EG 86 &URTHER
INFORMATION ABOUT FACILITIES ON REQUEST

/PERATIONAL PRECONDITIONS
&OR MOST OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS THE INPUT OF A CODE

WORD IS NECESSARY 4HIS APPLIES FOR ALL ENTRIES VIA THE
MEMBRANE KEYBOARD OR FRONT INTERFACE WHICH CON
CERN THE OPERATION ON THE RELAY FOR EXAMPLE
SETTING OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS THRESHOLDS
FUNCTIONS
ALLOCATION OR MARSHALLING OF SIGNALS BINARY INPUTS
,%$ INDICATORS
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR INTERFACE AND DEVICE
CONFIGURATION
INITIATION OF TEST PROCEDURES
4HE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE READ OUT OF AN
NUNCIATIONS OPERATING DATA OR FAULT DATA OR FOR THE
READ OUT OF SETTING PARAMETERS
4HE METHOD OF ENTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS EXPLAINED IN
DETAIL IN THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UNDER 3ECTION

3! 6

2EPRESENTATION OF THE RELAY FRONT VIEW

2EADINESS INDICATION
GREEN
5NIT FAULTY INDICATION

RED
,%$ TO
4WO LINE DISPLAY
"ETRIEB3ERVIC
3TRUNG"LOCKED
,#$ WITH CHARAC

TERS EACH
/N/FF SWITCH FOR

INTEGRATED POWER
SUPPLY
!DDITIONAL KEYS
CAN BE ACCESSED
#7
&
$!

.

RED CAN BE
MARSHALLED
PRESETTING BE
LOW
/PERATOR
WHEN COVER IS
CLOSED
2%3%4
,%$
PANEL
-3 *9
POLE SOCKET FOR

CONNECTING A
PERSONAL COM
PUTER
$ISTANZSCHUTZ
$ISTANCE 0ROTECTION

5

! (Z
)))
6 !#
5
6 $#
5

$IAGR
/PERATION ONLY WITH FIXED COVER
"ETRIEB NUR MIT ANGESCHRAUBTER +APPE
).
.
(
#
3!
& .R "&
!
8
!
#!

#'((
"ASIC MODULE
!DDITIONAL MODULE
UP TO PRODUCTION SERIES ''
&ACTORY PRESETTING ,%$S
&IGURE

-EAS VALUES FAULTY

&AULT ,
&AULT %
!2 NOT READY
44) EXPIRED
#
!
!
3! !
#
!
!
3! !
#
!
!
3! )
%2$
4 EXPIRED
&AULT ,
4 EXPIRED
&AULT ,

4 EXPIRED

44) EXPIRED
#
!
!
3! !

4RIP ,
#
!
!
3! !

4RIP ,
#
!
!
3! )

4RIP ,
IE SENSITIVE EARTH

CURRENT INPUT
%2$
IE SENSITIVE EARTH

CURRENT INPUT
&RONT VIEW OF OPERATING KEY BOARD AND DISPLAY PANEL

# ' #
3! 6

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

)NTRODUCTION

0ARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE
&OR SETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IT IS NECESSARY

TO ENTER THE CODEWORD SEE 7ITHOUT CODE
WORD ENTRY PARAMETERS CAN BE READ OUT BUT NOT BE
CHANGED
)F THE CODEWORD IS ACCEPTED PARAMETERIZING CAN BE
GIN )N THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS EACH ADDRESS IS ILLUS
TRATED IN A BOX AND IS EXPLAINED 4HERE ARE THREE
FORMS OF DISPLAY
!DDRESSES WITHOUT REQUEST FOR OPERATOR INPUT
4HE ADDRESS IS IDENTIFIED BY THE BLOCK NUMBER FOL
LOWED BY AS SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR
BLOCK $ISPLAYED TEXT FORMS THE HEADING OF THIS
BLOCK .O INPUT IS EXPECTED "Y USING KEYS OR
THE NEXT OR THE PREVIOUS BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED "Y
USING THE KEYS ! OR " THE FIRST OR LAST ADDRESS WITHIN
THE BLOCK CAN BE SELECTED AND PAGED
!DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE NUMERICAL INPUT
4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE
BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR BLOCK
SEQUENCE NUMBER "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS
THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC
OND DISPLAY LINE THE VALUE OF THE PARAMETER 7HEN
THE RELAY IS DELIVERED A VALUE HAS BEEN PRESET )N
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS VALUE IS SHOWN )F THIS
VALUE IS TO BE RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECES
SARY /NE CAN PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN
THE BLOCK OR TO THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE
VALUE NEEDS TO BE ALTERED IT CAN BE OVERWRITTEN US
ING THE NUMERICAL KEYS AND IF REQUIRED THE DECI
MAL POINT ANDOR CHANGE SIGN OR WHERE AP
PROPRIATE INFINITY SIGN 0 4HE PERMISSIBLE SETTING
RANGE IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING TEXT NEXT TO THE AS
SOCIATED BOX %NTERED VALUES BEYOND THIS RANGE
WILL BE REJECTED 4HE SETTING STEPS CORRESPOND TO
THE LAST DECIMAL PLACE AS SHOWN IN THE SETTING BOX
)NPUTS WITH MORE DECIMAL PLACES THAN PERMITTED
WILL BE TRUNCATED DOWN TO THE PERMISSIBLE NUMBER
4HE VALUE MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY
% 4HE DISPLAY THEN CONFIRMS THE ACCEPTED VALUE
4HE CHANGED PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TER
MINATION OF PARAMETERIZING REFER BELOW
# ' #
!DDRESSES WHICH REQUIRE TEXT INPUT

4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS IE
BLOCK AND SEQUENCE NUMBER EG FOR BLOCK
SEQUENCE NUMBER "EHIND THE BAR APPEARS
THE MEANING OF THE REQUIRED PARAMETER IN THE SEC
OND DISPLAY LINE THE APPLICABLE TEXT 7HEN THE
RELAY IS DELIVERED A TEXT HAS BEEN PRESET )N THE
FOLLOWING SECTIONS THIS TEXT IS SHOWN )F IT IS TO BE
RETAINED NO OTHER INPUT IS NECESSARY /NE CAN
PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN THE BLOCK OR TO
THE NEXT OR PREVIOUS BLOCK )F THE TEXT NEEDS TO BE
ALTERED PRESS THE .O KEY . 4HE NEXT ALTERNATIVE
TEXT ALSO PRINTED IN THE DISPLAY BOXES ILLUSTRATED IN
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS THEN APPEARS )F THE ALTER
NATIVE TEXT IS NOT DESIRED THE . KEY IS PRESSED
AGAIN ETC 4HE ALTERNATIVE WHICH IS CHOSEN IS
CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE CHANGED
PARAMETERS ARE ONLY SAVED AFTER TERMINATION OF PA
RAMETERIZING REFER BELOW
&OR EACH OF THE ADDRESSES THE POSSIBLE PARAMETERS
AND TEXT ARE GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS )F THE
MEANING OF A PARAMETER IS NOT CLEAR IT IS USUALLY BEST
TO LEAVE IT AT THE FACTORY SETTING 4HE ARROWS OR !"
AT THE LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE ILLUSTRATED DISPLAY BOXES
INDICATE THE METHOD OF MOVING FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK OR
WITHIN THE BLOCK 5NUSED ADDRESSES ARE AUTOMATI
CALLY PASSED OVER
)F THE PARAMETER ADDRESS IS KNOWN THEN DIRECT AD
DRESSING IS POSSIBLE 4HIS IS ACHIEVED BY DEPRESSING
KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE FOUR DIGIT ADDRESS AND SUB
SEQUENTLY PRESSING THE ENTER KEY % !FTER DIRECT AD
DRESSING PAGING BY MEANS OF KEYS AND KEYS ! "
IS POSSIBLE
4HE SETTING PROCEDURE CAN BE ENDED AT ANY TIME BY
THE KEY COMBINATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION
KEY & FOLLOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS
THE QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM
WITH THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE

3! 6
)F ONE TRIES TO LEAVE THE SETTING RANGE FOR THE FUNCTION

AL PARAMETER BLOCKS IE ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
WITH KEYS THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION %.$
/& #/$%7/2$ /0%2!4)/. 0RESS THE .O
KEY . TO CONTINUE PARAMETERIZING )F YOU PRESS THE
9ES KEY *9 INSTEAD ANOTHER QUESTION APPEARS
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 .OW YOU CAN CONFIRM
WITH *9 OR ABORT WITH . AS ABOVE
!LL PARAMETER SETS CAN BE ACCESSED IN A SIMILAR MAN

NER
C +EY COMBINATION &
C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !

ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "
!FTER COMPLETION OF THE PARAMETERIZING PROCESS THE

CHANGED PARAMETERS WHICH SO FAR HAVE ONLY BEEN
STORED IN VOLATILE MEMORY ARE THEN PERMANENTLY
STORED IN %%02/-S 4HE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7
3%44).'3 3!6%$ !FTER PRESSING THE KEY -3 FOL
LOWED BY 2%3%4 ,%$ THE INDICATIONS OF THE QUIES
CENT STATE APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY
C +EY COMBINATION &

ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #

3INCE ONLY A FEW PARAMETERS WILL BE DIFFERENT IN MOST

APPLICATIONS IT IS POSSIBLE TO COPY PREVIOUSLY STORED
PARAMETER SETS INTO ANOTHER PARAMETER SET
3ELECTABLE PARAMETER SETS OPTIONAL
5P TO DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED

FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES
ABOVE AND BELOW 4HESE PARAMETER SETS
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING
BINARY INPUTS
)F THIS FACILITY IS NOT USED THEN IT IS SUFFICIENT TO SET THE
PARAMETERS FOR THE PRESELECTED SET 4HE REST OF THIS
SECTION IS OF NO IMPORTANCE /THERWISE THE PARAME
TER CHANGE OVER FACILITY MUST BE CONFIGURED AS %8
)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION 4HE
FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS IS ADJUSTED
ONE AFTER THE OTHER
)F THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS TO BE USED FIRST SET ALL PA
RAMETERS FOR THE NORMAL STATUS OF PARAMETER SET !
4HEN SWITCH OVER TO PARAMETER SET "
C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $
)NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS AGAIN NECESSARY FOR THE SET

TING OF A NEW SELECTED PARAMETER SET 7ITHOUT INPUT
OF THE CODEWORD THE SETTINGS CAN ONLY BE READ BUT
NOT MODIFIED
)T IS ADDITIONALLY POSSIBLE TO SELECT THE ORIGINAL SET

TINGS IE THE SETTINGS PRESET ON DELIVERY FOR A MODI
FIED AND STORED PARAMETER SET 4HIS IS DONE BY COPY
ING THE /2)'3%4 TO THE DESIRED PARAMETER SET
)T IS FINALLY STILL POSSIBLE TO DEFINE THE ACTIVE PARAMETER
SET IE THE PARAMETER SET WHICH IS VALID FOR THE FUNC
TIONS AND THRESHOLD VALUES OF THE UNIT 3EE 3ECTION
FOR MORE DETAILS
4HE PARAMETER SETS ARE PROCESSED IN ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE MOST SIMPLE MANNER TO COME TO THIS BLOCK IS
USING DIRECT ADDRESSING
ENTER ADDRESS EG
PRESS ENTER KEY %
&IST COMPLETE THE PARAMETERIZING PROCEDURE FOR

SET ! AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION
4HE HEADING OF THE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING THE PARAME

TER SETS THEN APPEARS
0RESS KEY COMBINATION & IE FIRST THE FUNCTION

KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY !LL FOLLOWING IN
PUTS THEN REFER TO PARAMETER SET "
)T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS

ES USING THE ! KEY 4HE COPYING FACILITIES ARE SUMMA
RIZED IN 4ABLE

0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2
# ( ! . ' %

/ 6 % 2
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER

PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS
# ' #
3! 6
!DDR
#OPY
FROM
TO

/2)'3%4
3%4 !

/2)'3%4
3%4 "

/2)'3%4
3%4 #

/2)'3%4
3%4 $

3%4 !
3%4 "

3%4 !
3%4 #

3%4 !
3%4 $

3%4 "
3%4 !

3%4 "
3%4 #

3%4 "
3%4 $

3%4 #
3%4 !

3%4 #
3%4 "

3%4 #
3%4 $

3%4 $
3%4 !

3%4 $
3%4 "

3%4 $
3%4 #
4ABLE
#OPYING PARAMETER SETS

3 % 4 4 ) . '
2 % ! ,
4 ) - %
# , / # +

$ ! 4 %

4 ) - %

$ ) & &
# ' #
0ARAMETERIZING MUST BE TERMINATED FOR EACH PARAM

ETER SET AS DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION

3ETTING OF DATE AND TIME
4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE SET IF THE THE REAL TIME CLOCK
IS AVAILABLE 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK WHICH IS
REACHED BY DIRECT ADDRESSING $! % OR BY
PAGING WITH AND )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS RE
QUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA
3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER
SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
4HE DATE AND TIME ARE ENTERED WITH DOTS AS SEPARA
TOR SIGNS SINCE THE KEYBOARD DOES NOT HAVE A COLON
OR SLASH FOR !MERICAN DATE
4HE CLOCK IS SYNCHRONIZED AT THE MOMENT WHEN THE
ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED FOLLOWING INPUT OF THE COM
PLETE TIME 4HE DIFFERENCE TIME FACILITY ADDRESS
ENABLES EXACT SETTING OF THE TIME SINCE THE DIF
FERENCE CAN BE CALCULATED PRIOR TO THE INPUT AND THE
SYNCHRONIZATION OF THE CLOCK DOES NOT DEPEND ON THE
MOMENT WHEN THE ENTER KEY % IS PRESSED
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK

#ONTINUE WITH !
!T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED

#ONTINUE WITH !

&OLLOWING COPYING ONLY SUCH PARAMETERS NEED BE

CHANGED WHICH ARE TO BE DIFFERENT FROM THE SOURCE
PARAMETER SET
%NTER THE NEW DATE DIGITS FOR DAY DIGITS FOR MONTH
AND DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999
%NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH
WITH DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33
4 ) - %
5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY

THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE

3! 6

)NITIAL DISPLAYS
ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
7HEN THE RELAY IS SWITCHED ON FIRSTLY THE ADDRESS AND THE TYPE IDENTIFICATION OF THE RELAY APPEARS !LL 3IEMENS
RELAYS HAVE AN -,&" MACHINE READABLE TYPE NUMBER 7HEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATIVE AND DISPLAYS A QUIESCENT
MESSAGE ANY DESIRED ADDRESS CAN BE REACHED EG BY PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE
ADDRESS NUMBER
3 !
6

3 !

4HE RELAY INTRODUCES ITSELF BY GIVING ITS TYPE NUMBER

THE VERSION OF FIRMWARE WITH WHICH IT IS EQUIPPED AND
A HARDWARE IDENTIFIER 4HE SECOND DISPLAY LINE SHOWS
THE COMPLETE ORDERING DESIGNATION
!FTER ADDRESS THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS BEGIN &URTHER ADDRESS POSSIBILITIES ARE LISTED UNDER !NNUNCI
ATIONS AND 4ESTS

#OMMENCEMENT OF FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER BLOCKS
0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2 3

0OWER SYSTEM DATA

'ENERAL DATA
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE RELAY REQUESTS BASIC DATA OF THE POWER SYSTEM AND THE SWITCHGEAR

0 / 7 % 2 3 9 3 4 % -

# 4
$ ! 4 !
3 4 ! 2 0 . 4
4 / 7 ! 2 $ 3
, ) . %
4 / 7 ! 2 $ 3
" 5 3 " ! 2

3 9 3 4 % - 3 4 ! 2
3 / , ) $ , 9
% ! 2 4 ( % $
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0OWER SYSTEM DATA
#URRENT TRANSFORMER POLARITY

CT STAR POINT TOWARDS LINE
,).%
"53"!2
CT STAR POINT TOWARDS BUSBAR
4HIS SETTING DETERMINES THE MEASUREMENT
DIRECTION OF THE RELAY FORWARDS LINE DIRECTION
3YSTEM STAR POINT CONDITION

)MPORTANT FOR EARTH FAULT AND DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
CONDITIONS
# / - 0 % . 3 ! 4 % $
) 3 / , ! 4 % $

K 6
5 N
0 2 ) - ! 2 9
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER PRIMARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE

K6
K6
# ' #
3! 6

3 % # / . $
) N
0 2 ) - ! 2 9

5 N
7ITH ADDRESSES TO THE DEVICE IS IN

STRUCTED AS TO HOW THE ADDITIONAL CURRENT AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS ARE CONNECTED 4HIS INFORMATION IS IMPORTANT
FOR THE TREATMENT OF EARTH FAULTS IN EARTHED NET
WORKS EARTH LEAKAGE IN UNEARTHED NETWORKS PAR
ALLEL LINE COMPENSATION FOR FAULT LOCATION IF USED
SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK IF USED AND THE
MONITORING OF MEASURED VALUES
4HE ADDITIONAL VOLTAGE INPUT IS DESIGNATED IN AD
DRESS WITH 5X #/..%#4 IT CAN BE DECLARED AS
./4 #/..%#4%$ OR 5DELTA 42!.3&/2- OR 5
42!.3&/2-%2
)F THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SET HAS E N OPEN DELTA
WINDINGS AND IF THESE ARE CONNECTED TO THE DEVICE
REFER &IGURE " IN !PPENDIX " THEN THIS HAS TO BE
RECORDED IN ADDRESS WITH 5X #/..%#4
5DELTA 42!.3&/2- 3INCE THE RATIO OF THE VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS IS NORMALLY
5 .PRIM 5 .SEC 5 .SEC

THE FACTOR 5PH5DELTA SECONDARY VALUES ADDRESS
SHALL BE SET AS o o WHEN THE
DELTA WINDINGS ARE CONNECTED )F THE RATIO IS DIFFERENT
EG WHEN THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE IS FORMED BY IN
TERMEDIATE TRANSFORMERS THE FACTOR HAS TO BE SE
LECTED ACCORDINGLY
)F THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS TO
BE USED AT THE FEEDER THEN THE ADDITIONAL VOLTAGE IN
PUT OF THE DEVICE MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE BUS BAR
VOLTAGE )N THIS CASE ADDRESS MUST BE SET AS
5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3&/2-%2 REFER &IGURE
" IN !PPENDIX " 5NDER ADDRESS THE DEVICE
MUST BE INFORMED TO WHICH VOLTAGE OF THE BUS BAR
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS IS USED PHASE TO PHASE OR
PHASE TO GROUND AND WHICH PHASES 4HE DE
VICE AUTOMATICALLY SELECTS THE CORRESPONDING FEEDER
VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
# ' #
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE LINE TO LINE

6
6
#URRENT TRANSFORMER PRIMARY RATED CURRENT PHASES

!
!
4HREE POSSIBILITIES EXIST FOR THE EARTH CURRENT PATH

#ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM THE STAR POINT
OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS STANDARD CIRCUIT AR
RANGEMENT SEE ALSO !PPENDIX " &IGURE "
!DDRESS IS THEN SET AS
)E #4 02/4%#4%$ ,).%
!DDRESS IS SET AS
)E)PH
#ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM THE TRANS

FORMER STAR POINT OF A PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION
ONLY FOR TYPE
OF FAULT LOCATION FOR PARALLEL LINES
3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE ALSO !PPENDIX "
&IGURE "
)E #4 0!2!,,%, ,).%
!DDRESS IS SET AS
)E)PH
BUT IF THE TRANSFORMERS OF THE PARALLEL LINE HAVE A

RATIO WHICH DIFFERS FROM THOSE OF THE PROTECTED LINE
THE RELATION OF THESE RATIOS HAS TO BE SET FOR )E)PH
EG
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PROTECTED LINE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PARALLEL LINE
RESULTS IN
!!
!!
)E)PH
#ONNECTION OF THE EARTH CURRENT FROM A SEPARATE

EARTH CURRENT DETECTION TRANSFORMER EG WINDOW
TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
SEE ALSO !PPENDIX " &IGURE "
)E #4 02/4%#4%$ ,).%
&OR UNITS WITH HIGH SENSITIVE EARTH CURRENT INPUT
ADDRESS NEEDS NOT BE SET IT IS NOT AVAILABLE

3! 6
!DDRESS IS SET AS

)E)PH

RATIO OF THE EARTH CURRENT #4

RATIO OF THE PHASE CURRENT #4
5 X
# / . . % # 4
. / 4
# / . . % # 4 % $
5 E N
4 2 ! . 3 & / 2 -
5
4 2 ! . 3 & / 2 - % 2

5 P H 5 D E L T A

%XAMPLE
0HASE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
7INDOW TYPE SUMMATION TRANSFORMER
2ELAY TYPE FOR HIGH SENSITIVE EARTH FAULT DETECTION

LELPH

4HE ADDITIONAL MEASURED VOLTAGE INPUT 5X OF THE
DEVICE IS
./4 #/..%#4%$ OR
CONNECTED TO THE E N OPEN DELTA WINDINGS OF
THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SET OF THE FEEDER OR
CONNECTED TO THE A VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER OF THE
BUS BAR FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
-ATCHING FACTOR FOR RESIDUAL VOLTAGE
RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF VT PHASE WINDING
RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF OPEN DELTA WINDING
NORMALLY
LARGEST SETTING VALUE

) E
0 2 / 4 % # 4 % $
0 ! 2 ! , , % ,

# 4
, ) . %
, ) . %
) E ) P H

!!
!!

#URRENT WHICH IS CONNECTED TO THE )% MEASURING

INPUT OF THE RELAY
.OTE !DDRESS IS ONLY AVAILABLE IN MODELS WITH
PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION 3!J JJJJJ JJJ IN
OTHER CASES 02/4%#4%$ ,).% IS INTERNALLY FIXED
-ATCHING FACTOR FOR EARTH CURRENT

FOR CONNECTION IN CT STARPOINT
WINDOW TYPE EARTH CT RATIO
PHASE CT RATIO
FOR CONNECTION TO SEPARATE EARTH CURRENT
TRANSFORMER

,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
5
# . . % # 4

0HASE ALLOCATION FOR THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 IF IT IS USED

FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
7HEN SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE IS TO BE CHECKED BEFORE
CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE CON
NECTED TO THE 5 VOLTAGE INPUT OF THE RELAY IS COMPARED
WITH THE VOLTAGE OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AS SE
LECTED IN THIS ADDRESS
# ' #
3! 6

,INE DATA GENERAL
'ENERAL LINE DATA ARE THOSE WHICH ARE INDEPENDENT

OF REACH OF THE DISTANCE ZONES AND THE GRADING PLAN
-ATCHING OF THE EARTH IMPEDANCE RATIO IS ACHIEVED
BY ENTERING THE RESISTANCE RATIO 2%2, AND THE REAC
TANCE RATIO 8%8, 4HESE ARE PURELY FORMALLY CALCU
LATED AND ARE NOT IDENTICAL WITH REAL AND IMAGINARY
PARTS OF :%:, .O COMPLEX CALCULATION IS NECESSARY
4HE SETTING PARAMETERS CAN BE DETERMINED FROM THE
LINE DATA USING THE FOLLOWING FORMULAE
2ESISTANCE RATIO
2%

2,
2

2
2EACTANCE RATIO
8%

8,
8

8
7HEREBY
2 :ERO SEQUENCE LINE RESISTANCE
8 :ERO SEQUENCE LINE REACTANCE
2 0OSITIVE SEQUENCE LINE RESISTANCE
8 0OSITIVE SEQUENCE LINE REACTANCE
&OR THE EARTH IMPEDANCE RATIO WE HAVE

2%

2,

8%

8,

8

8
KM

KM
4HE SETTING PARAMETERS CAN BE DETERMINED BY THE

FOLLOWING FORMULAE
2ESISTANCE RATIO
2

2,
2 2
2EACTANCE RATIO
#ALCULATION %XAMPLE
8

8,
K6 OVERHEAD LINE !LU3TEEL MM WITH THE

LINE PARAMETERS
S LENGTH KM
7HERE
0OS SEQ IMPEDANCE
2S KM

f :ERO SEQ IMPEDANCE
8S KM
#URRENT TRANSFORMERS ! !
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMERS K6 K6
# ' #
KM

KM
7ITH DOUBLE LINES THERE IS MUTUAL COUPLING BETWEEN

THE TWO CONDUCTOR SYSTEMS 4HIS IS ONLY RELEVANT FOR
3! WHEN IT INCORPORATES THE PARALLEL LINE FAULT LO
CATION FEATURE AND HAS BEEN ORDERED WITH PARALLEL
LINE COMPENSATION 4HIS COMPENSATION CAN ONLY BE
EFFECTIVE FOR FAULT LOCATION WHEN ADDITIONALLY AD
DRESS IS SET AS 0!2!,,%, ,).% 9%3 3ECTION

)T IS UNIMPORTANT WHETHER TOTAL LINE VALUES OR VALUES

PER UNIT LENGTH ARE USED SINCE THE RATIOS ARE INDE
PENDENT OF THE LINE LENGTH
2S KM

8S KM
2

2
88
8 8
MUTUAL REACTANCE COUPLE REAC

TANCE OF THE LINE SYSTEMS
POSITIVE SEQUENCE REACTANCE OF THE
LINES
4HESE DATA CAN BE SET EITHER FOR THE TOTAL PARALLEL CIR
CUIT LINE LENGTH OR AS LENGTH RELATED VALUES SINCE THE
QUOTIENTS ARE INDEPENDENT OF LENGTH

3! 6

2 % 2 ,

8 % 8 ,

-ATCHING OF EARTH IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE RATIO


-ATCHING OF EARTH IMPEDANCE REACTANCE RATIO


/NLY FOR PARALLEL CIRCUIT LINES IF FAULT LOCATOR IS USED WITH PARALLEL LINE COMPENSATION

2 - 2 ,

8 - 8 ,

3OME ADDITIONAL DATA ARE REQUESTED FOR VARIOUS PRO

TECTION FUNCTIONS 4HESE HAVE TO BE ENTERED TO THE
RELAY UNDER THE ADDRESSES TO
4HE REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH ADDRESS IS
ENTERED AS SECONDARY VALUE 4HIS CAN BE DERIVED
FROM THE PRIMARY VALUE USING THE FORMULA
. CT
. VT
8 PRIM

8 SEC

).
!
3 % #
W K M
, ) . % , % . ' 4 (
K M
-ATCHING OF MUTUAL IMPEDANCE RESISTANCE RATIO


-ATCHING OF MUTUAL IMPEDANCE REACTANCE RATIO


7HERE
.CT
.VT
).!
CT RATIO
VT RATIO
RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMERS RATED CURRENT OF THE DE
VICE
&INALLY THE LINE LENGTH IS ENTERED UNDER ADDRESS

)T IS USED FOR FAULT LOCATION
,INE REACTANCE PER UNIT LINE LENGTH SECONDARY ONLY FOR

FAULT LOCATION REFER TO 3ECTION
KM
KM
,ENGTH OF THE TOTAL LINE SECONDARY ONLY FOR FAULT LOCA

TION REFER TO 3ECTION
KM
KM
.OTE 7HEN THE LINE LENGTH IS ENTERED IN MILES INSTEAD OF KILOMETERS AND THE LINE CONSTANTS ARE ENTERED
IN OHMS PER MILE THEN THE RELAY WILL OPERATE PROPERLY

# ' #
3! 6

!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA
!DDITIONAL PLANT DATA ARE REQUESTED FOR SOME DEVICE

FUNCTIONS
5NDER ADDRESSES AND THE MINIMUM TRIP
COMMAND DURATION CAN BE SET 4HIS IS THEN VALID FOR

4 2 ) 0
)
4 2 ) 0
)

)F THE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS

USED NOTE THE FOLLOWING
4HE FEEDER VOLTAGE IS DESIGNATED WITH 5 IT IS THE REF
ERENCE VOLTAGE FOR ALL DEVICE FUNCTIONS WHICH OPERATE
WITH MEASURED VOLTAGES 4HE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IS
DESIGNATED 5 4HE MODE OF CONNECTION OF 5 IE
WHICH VOLTAGE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH HAS
BEEN ENTERED TO THE RELAY UNDER ADDRESS AND
)F A POWER TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED BETWEEN THE
BUS BAR AND THE LOCATION OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS THEN THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORD
ING TO THE POWER TRANSFORMER CONNECTION GROUP MUST
BE COMPENSATED 4HIS CAN BE DONE USING THE PA
RAMETER ADDRESS
4HE SECONDARY RATED VOLTAGES OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMERS MUST BE EQUAL !DDITIONALLY THE PRIMARY
RATED VOLTAGES OF THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ON
THE ONE HAND AND THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS ON THE OTHER HAND MUST RELATE TO THE TRANSFOR
MATION RATIO OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER
)F NO PHASE SHIFTING TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED BETWEEN
FEEDER AND BUS BAR THEN ADDRESS REMAINS
OTHERWISE IT MUST BE CHANGED 4HE VOLTAGE IS DE
FINED FROM 5 TO 5

5
# ' #
5
! . ' ,
ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE WHICH CAN ISSUE

A TRIP SIGNAL $ISTINCTION CAN BE MADE BETWEEN THE
MINIMUM TRIP COMMAND DURATION WITH CURRENT FLOW 4
42)0 ) ADDRESS ) ). AND THE DURATION
WITHOUT CURRENT FLOW 4 42)0 ) ADDRESS
-INIMUM DURATION OF TRIP COMMAND WITH CURRENT FLOW

S
S
-INIMUM DURATION OF TRIP COMMAND WITHOUT CURRENT

FLOW
S
S
%XAMPLE
"US BAR
K6 PRIMARY
6 SECONDARY
&EEDER
K6 PRIMARY
6 SECONDARY
! POWER TRANSFORMER SHOULD BE INSTALLED BETWEEN

BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND FEEDER VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS
0OWER TRANSFORMER
K6 K6
CONNECTION GROUP $YN
4HE CONNECTION GROUP OF THE POWER TRANSFORMER IS

DEFINED FROM THE UPPER VOLTAGE SIDE TO THE LOWER VOLT
AGE SIDE 4HE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS WHICH
ARE THE REFERENCE VOLTAGES FOR THE PROTECTION RELAY
ARE INSTALLED ON THE LOWER VOLTAGE SIDE OF THE POWER
TRANSFORMER 4HUS THE PHASE DISPLACEMENT ACCORD
ING TO THE CONNECTION GROUP NUMERAL IE } ^
MUST BE ENTERED AS NEGATIVE VALUE
3ETTING WILL BE
ADDRESS
0() 5 5
^
0HASE DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN 5 FEEDER VOLTAGE AND

5 BUS BAR VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
^
^

3! 6

'ENERAL DEVICE DATA
5NDER ADDRESSES TO SOME ADDITIONAL

GENERAL DEVICE DATA ARE ENTERED TO THE PROTECTION
RELAY TO MATCH IT TO THE SWITCH GEAR CONDITIONS
4HE CLOSING TIME OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ADDRESS
IS NECESSARY IF THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION OF
THE RELAY IS USED ALSO FOR ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING )N
THIS CASE THE PROTECTION CALCULATES THE IDEAL CLOSING
INSTANT SUCH THAT THE TWO VOLTAGES BUS BAR AND
FEEDER ARE IN SYNCHRONISM AT THE INSTANT WHEN THE
BREAKER POLES CONTACT EACH OTHER
5NDER ADDRESS THE MAXIMUM CLOSE COMMAND
DURATION CAN BE SET 4HIS TIME IS THEN VALID FOR ALL
FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE WHICH CAN CLOSE THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER )T MUST BE LONG ENOUGH TO ENSURE RELIABLE
CLOSURE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER 4HE CLOSING COMMAND
WILL BE INTERRUPTED AT ONCE ON RENEWED TRIP OF ANY OF
THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
4HE PHASES IN WHICH FAULT DETECTION IS REGISTERED
ARE DECISIVE FOR THE SELECTED LINE LOOP AND THUS FOR
THE TRIP COMMAND BEING SINGLE POLE OR THREE POLE
IN 3! !NOTHER PICK UP DURING OUTPUT OF THE TRIP
COMMAND RESULTS IN THREE POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP

# "
# , / 3 %
0
# / 5 0 ,
7 ) 4 (
& ! 5 , 4
$ % 4 % #
7 ) 4 (
4 2 ) 0

# , / 3 %
# / - -
COMMAND 4HIS CORRESPONDS TO THE PRESETTING OF AD

DRESS 0 #/50, 7)4( &!5,4 $%4%# )F
ADDRESS IS SET TO 7)4( 42)0 #/-- THREE
POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP COMMAND IS SUPPRESSED
WHEN PICK UP IN ANOTHER PHASE IS REGISTERED ONLY
AFTER THE SINGLE POLE TRIP IS INITIATED 4HIS SETTING IS
REASONABLE WHEN IS CAN BE ASSUMED THAT A FURTHER
PICK UP AFTER INITIATION OF THE TRIP COMMAND MUST
ARISE FROM A DIFFERENT INDEPENDENT FAULT EVENT 4HIS
SETTING IS VALID FOR ALL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE RELAY
WHICH CAN TRIP SINGLE POLE
!DDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WILL TRIP SINGLE POLE IN CASE OF
AN ISOLATED TWO PHASE FAULT IE WITHOUT EARTH AS
LONG AS SINGLE POLE TRIPPING IS ALLOWED 4HIS PARAM
ETER CAN BE CHANGED IF SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH THIS FAULT TYPE
4HE PARAMETER 4 -# 02/, ADDRESS IS OP
ERATIVE ONLY AFTER MANUAL CLOSING OF THE BREAKER 4HIS
TIME IS DECISIVE FOR THOSE PROTECTION STAGES WHICH
SHALL OPERATE ONLY DURING MANUAL CLOSING EG OVER
REACH ZONE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
#IRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME RELEVANT ONLY IN CASE

ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS USED IN CONNECTION WITH
SYNCHRO CHECK
S
S
-AXIMUM DURATION OF CLOSE COMMAND

S
S
4HREE POLE COUPLING

EACH MULTI PHASE &!5,4 $%4%#TION RESULTS IN
THREE POLE COUPLING OF THE TRIP COMMAND
AFTER INITIATION OF A SINGLE POLE 42)0 DECISION
NO THREE POLE COUPLING IS EFFECTIVE
# ' #
3! 6

4 2 ) 0 P H & , 4
4 ( 2 % %
0 / , %
THREE POLE TRIP WILL ALWAYS OCCUR
0 / , %
, % ! $ ) . '
0 / , %
, ! ' ' ) . '

- #
0 2 / ,
% 8 4 3 4 ! "

S

& ) , 4 % 2
7ITH TWO PHASE FAULTS WITHOUT EARTH
SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE LEADING PHASE WILL OCCUR

PROVIDED SINGLE POLE TRIP IS ALLOWED
SINGLE POLE TRIP OF THE LAGGING PHASE WILL OCCUR
PROVIDED SINGLE POLE TRIP IS ALLOWED
0ROLONGATION TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSING FOR WHICH THE

ASSOCIATED PROTECTION STAGE SHALL OPERATE
S
S
3TABILIZATION TIME DELAY FOR EXTERNAL TRIP COMMAND

VIA BINARY INPUT
S
S
&ILTER FOR MEASURED QUANTITIES
. / 2 - ! ,
./2-!, FILTER
, / . '
,/.' FILTER FOR DIFFICULT MEASURING CONDITIONS
# ' #

3!6

3ETTINGS FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
3INCE THE MAIN FUNCTION OF 3! IS THAT OF DISTANCE

PROTECTION IT IS ASSUMED IN THE FOLLOWING THAT IN SET
TING THE SCOPE OF THE DEVICE 3ECTION THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION FUNCTION HAS BEEN SET AS %8)34 AD
DRESS )F THE RESPONSE ./. %8)34 HAS BEEN
SET FOR THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR EXAMPLE BE
CAUSE ONLY OTHER FUNCTIONS SHALL BE USED THIS SEC
TION IS IRRELEVANT

'ENERAL SETTINGS
ADDRESS BLOCK
3! COMPRISES DISTANCE ZONES AND TIME

STAGES ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS
)NDEPENDENT DISTANCE STAGES
ZONE :
DELAY 4
ZONE :
DELAY 4
ZONE :
DELAY 4

$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
' % . % 2 ! ,

3 % 4 4 ) . ' 3
&INAL STAGES
FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL
DELAY 4
FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL DELAY 4
&OR : : AND :" DIFFERENT DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET
FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI PHASE FAULTS RE
SPECTIVELY
)N ADDRESS BLOCK THE DIRECTION OF THE DIRECTIONAL
STAGE AND THE DELAY TIMES 4 AND 4 ARE SET
./4%
4HE DIRECTION WHICH IS SET FOR THE DIRECTIONAL FINAL
STAGE ADDRESS IS NOT VALID FOR OTHER DIRECTION
ALLY DEPENDENT FUNCTIONS OF THE FAULT DETECTION FUNC
TIONS FOR EXAMPLE FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON WHEN
THIS IS SELECTED
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK

$ISTANCE PROTECTION GENERAL SETTINGS
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS
/.
SWITCHED ON
OR
/&&
SWITCHED OFF
$ ) 2
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
$IRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP WITH FAULT DETECTION

WHICH CAN BE SET
&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION OR
. / .
./. $)2%#4)/.!,
EITHER DIRECTION
/ .
/ & &

4
S

& $ 4
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

#ONTROLLED OVERREACHING STAGES

ZONE :" DELAY 4"
ZONE :,
DELAY 4,
4
S
$ELAY FOR 4 FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL TRIP

S
S
AND 0 NO DIRECTIONAL TRIP
$ELAY FOR 4 FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL TRIP
S
S
AND 0 NO NON DIRECTIONAL TRIP
# ' #
3!6
DISTANCE ZONE :, IS AVAILABLE 2ELEASE OF THIS ZONE

BEFORE A $!2 CYCLE CAN BE BLOCKED BY SETTING AD
DRESS $!2 :, TO ./ 4HE $!2 CYCLES CAN
ALSO BE BLOCKED BY A BINARY INPUT /NE CAN SELECT THE
STAGE THAT SHOULD BE EFFECTIVE DURING BLOCKING OF THE
$!2 CYCLES ADDRESS .ORMALLY : WITH 4 IS
EFFECTIVE IN THIS CASE THIS CAN BE CHANGED TO : WITH
4"
&OR MANUAL CLOSURE ONTO THE SHORT CIRCUIT THE DIS

TANCE PROTECTION CAN BE SET FOR VARIOUS VALUES OF
REACH ADDRESS &OR : %&&%#4)6% NO SPECIAL
MEASURES ARE TAKEN 0OSSIBLE MEASURES ARE SWITCH
TO OVERREACH ZONE INSTANTANEOUS DIRECTIONAL :"
$)2%#4)/.!, OR OVERREACH ZONE INSTANTANEOUS
NON DIRECTIONAL :" ./. $)2%#4 OR &$ %&&%#
4)6% IE FAULT DETECTION INSTANTANEOUS NON DIREC
TIONAL 0REREQUISITE IS THAT THE MANUAL CLOSING COM
MAND IS FED TO THE RELAY VIA A BINARY INPUT FROM THE
DISCREPANCY SWITCH
)F A LINE TO BE PROTECTED IS COMPOSED OF OVERHEAD LINE

AND CABLE SECTIONS THE CONTROLLED ZONES :" AND
:, CAN BE USED TO DISTINGUISH BETWEEN FAULTS ON THE
THE OVERHEAD SECTION AND CABLE FAULTS TO A CERTAIN
DEGREE 2ECLOSURE CAN BE BLOCKED FOR CABLE FAULTS
USING ADDRESSES AND )F FOR EXAMPLE A
CABLE SECTION IS FOLLOWED BY AN OVERHEAD LINE SEC
TION ZONE :" IS SET TO COVER THE CABLE SECTION AND
ADDRESS IS SET SUCH THAT RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
FOR FAULTS 7)4(). :" )F FURTHER SEGREGATION IS NECES
SARY EG CABLE OVERHEAD LINE CABLE DISTINCTION
CAN BE MADE BY ADDRESS IN SIMILAR WAY )N ALL
OTHER CASES BOTH ADDRESSES REMAIN IN POSITION ./
)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION OPERATES TOGETHER WITH THE

INTEGRATED OR AN EXTERNALLY CONNECTED AUTO RECLOSE
DEVICE ADDRESS DETERMINES WHICH DISTANCE
ZONE IS VALID BEFORE AUTO RECLOSE .ORMALLY MEA
SUREMENT FOR THE 2!2 CYCLE TAKES PLACE IN THE EX
TENDED OVERREACH ZONE :" 4HIS CAN BE CHANGED
BY SETTING 2!2 :" TO ./ /VERREACHING ZONE
:" IS NOT RELEASED BY THE 2!2 FUNCTION IN THIS CASE
:ONE : IS EFFECTIVE CONTINUOUSLY
&OR $!2 FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES A SEPARATE

- ! .
# , / 3 %
: "
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
: "
. / .
$ ) 2 % # 4
$ISTANCE MEASURING RANGE WHICH IS VALID WHEN THE

CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED MANUALLY
:" $)2%#4)/.!, IE THE OVERREACH ZONE DIREC
TIONAL AS SET IN ADDRESS
:" ./. $)2%#4 IE THE OVERREACH ZONE NON
DIRECTIONAL
& $
% & & % # 4 ) 6 %
&$ %&&%#4)6%
IE FAULT DETECTION ZONE NON

DIRECTIONAL
:
% & & % # 4 ) 6 %
: %&&%#4)6%
IE THE NORMAL FIRST ZONE

NO SPECIAL MEASURES

2 ! 2
: "
9 % 3
. /
:ONE :" IS EFFECTIVE BEFORE 2!2

9%3
OR
./

$ ! 2
" , / # +
)F $!2 ND AND FURTHER SHOTS IS BLOCKED
:
4
: 4
ZONE : IS VALID WITH DELAY 4
:
4 "
: 4"
ZONE : IS VALID WITH DELAY 4"
# ' #

3!6

$ ! 2
: ,
9 % 3
. /
:ONE :, IS EFFECTIVE BEFORE $!2

9%3
OR
./

" , + ! 2
: "
!UTO RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED FOR FAULTS
. /
./
NORMAL SETTING
7 ) 4 ( ) .
7)4().
ZONE :"
/ 5 4 3 ) $ %
/543)$%
OF ZONE :"

" , + ! 2
: ,
!UTO RECLOSURE IST BLOCKED FOR FAULTS
. /
./
NORMAL SETTING
7 ) 4 ( ) .
7)4().
ZONE :,
/ 5 4 3 ) $ %
/543)$%
OF ZONE :,

3ETTING OF THE DISTANCE STAGES
ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
4HE RELEVANT PARAMETERS ARE SET FOR EACH DISTANCE

STAGE 4HE REACTANCE 8 DETERMINES THE REACH OF ITS
ASSOCIATED ZONE 4HE RESISTANCE 2 FORMS THE ALLOW
ANCE FOR LINE AND FAULT RESISTANCE )T CAN BE SET SEPA
RATELY FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS AND FOR PHASE
EARTH FAULTS TO ALLOW FOR EXAMPLE FOR EARTH FAULTS
WITH HIGHER FAULT PATH RESISTANCE
)T IS RECOMMENDED THAT A COMPREHENSIVE GRADING

PLAN SHOULD BE MADE FOR THE COMPLETE ELECTRICALLY
CONNECTED NETWORK )T SHOULD BE MADE BEFORE THIS
ENTRY SERIES IS ATTEMPTED 4HIS PLAN SHOULD CONTAIN
THE LINE LENGTHS WITH THEIR PRIMARY REACTANCES 8 IN
PHASE 4HESE REACTANCES 8 ARE THE BASIS FOR ZONE
REACH DETERMINATION
-EASUREMENT DIRECTION CAN BE SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR

EACH ZONE 4HIS ALLOWS FREE CHOICE OF FORWARDS RE
VERSE OR NON DIRECTIONAL STAGES EG AT TRANSFORM
ERS GENERATORS OR BUS BAR COUPLERS
&OR THE FIRST ZONE : ONE NORMALLY SELECTS NO DELAY

TIME IE 4 S FOR THE FIRST OF THE
PROTECTED LINE LENGTH /VER THIS DISTANCE THE RELAY WILL
THEN DISCONNECT FAULTS WITHIN ITS INHERENT OPERATING
TIME
4HE DELAY TIMES 4 AND 4 CAN EACH BE SET INDIVIDU

ALLY AND DIFFERENTLY FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS AND MULTI
PHASE FAULTS 4HUS ONE CAN FOR EXAMPLE MAKE A SET
TING FOR SINGLE POLE FAULTS HIGHER THAN THAT OF AN
ASSOCIATED DIFFERENTIAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION 4
0(!3% GRATER THAN 4 0(!3% OR SET A SHORTER
RESERVE TIME FOR MULTI POLE FAULTS CLOSE TO A POWER
STATION 4 0(!3% LESS THAN 4 0(!3%
4HE INDEPENDENT ZONES : : : OPERATE INDEPEN
DENTLY FROM ONE ANOTHER AND INDEPENDENTLY OF THE
OVERREACH ZONES :" :,

&OR EACH OF THE FOLLOWING STAGES THE DELAY TIME IS IN

CREASED BY ONE GRADING TIME UNIT 4HIS GRADING TIME
UNIT MUST BE ADEQUATE TO COVER THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
OPERATING TIME INCLUSIVE TOLERANCE THE RESET TIME OF
THE PROTECTION DEVICES AND THE TOLERANCE OF THE DELAY
TIMES .ORMALLY S TO S IS USED 2EACH IS SE
LECTED SO THAT IT COVERS UP TO OF THE EQUAL TIME
STAGE OF THE RELAY FOR THE SHORTEST FOLLOWING LINE SEC
TION
# ' #
3!6
#ALCULATION %XAMPLE
4HE VALUES DETERMINED FROM THE GRADING PLAN MUST

BE CONVERTED FOR THE SECONDARY SIDE OF CURRENT AND
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS )N GENERAL
K6 OVERHEAD LINE !LU3TEEL MM WITH

THE CHARACTERISTICS
:SECONDARY
#URRENT TRANSFORMER RATIO
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO
S LENGTH KM
: PRIMARY
2S KM

8S KM
2S KM
8S KM
4HE SECONDARY VALUES GIVEN TO THE RELAY MUST BE RE

LATED TO A CURRENT OF ! 4HUS THE CONVERSION FORMULA
FOR REACH FOR ANY DISTANCE ZONE IS
8 SEC
7HERE
.CT
.VT
).!
. CT
. VT
8 PRIM
#URRENT TRANSFORMERS ! !

6OLTAGE TRANSFORMERS K6 K6
).
!
-AXIMUM OVERLOAD
0MAX -6! CORRESPONDING
)MAX !
CT RATIO
VT RATIO
RATED RELAY CURRENT IN !MPERE
SECONDARY RATED CURRENT OF CUR
RENT TRANSFORMERS
&IGURE SHOWS A SAMPLE NETWORK SECTION WITH PRI

MARY GRADING PLAN
7HICH GIVES THE LINE DATA
2ESISTANCE SETTING 2 ALLOWS A MARGIN FOR FAULT RESIS

TANCE WHICH APPEARS AS AN IN PHASE RESISTANCE
ADDITION TO THE LINE IMPEDANCE AT THE POINT OF FAULT )T
COMPRISES FOR EXAMPLE ARC RESISTANCES TOWER FOOT
ING RESISTANCES OR SIMILAR 4HE SETTING SHOULD
TAKE THESE FAULT RESISTANCES INTO ACCOUNT BUT NOT BE
SET HIGHER THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY !N ADEQUATE
DIFFERENCE FROM THE OPERATING IMPEDANCE MUST BE
ENSURED EVEN UNDER CONDITIONS OF TEMPORARY OVER
LOAD 4HE RESISTANCE MARGIN CAN BE SET SEPARATELY
FOR PHASE PHASE FAULTS AND FOR PHASE EARTH FAULTS
8A
2A

KM KM
KM KM

8B
2B

KM KM
KM KM

8C
2C

KM KM
KM KM

4HUS THE FOLLOWING ZONE LIMITS ARISE

:ONE
PRIMARY OF LINE LENGTH
8PRIM
8A
:
:
!
:
"
8A 2A
8B 2B
8C 2C
8 8A
S!
"
KM
8 8A 8B
S"
KM
8 ; 8A 8B 8C =
S#
KM
&IGURE 'RADING PLAN RELATED TO ABOVE CALCULATION EXAMPLE

# ' #

3!6
:ONE
8 SEC
8PRIM

!
!

2 PRIM 2 LINE

. CT
. VT
2 SEC
8 PRIM

).
!

).
!

2% SEC
!
!
. CT
. VT
2% PRIM

).
!

!
!

&OR RESISTANCE SETTING IN RELATION TO OVERHEAD LINES

CONSIDERATION OF THE ARC RESISTANCE IS MOST IMPOR
TANT )N CABLE NETWORKS AN EXTENSIVE ARC IS NOT POSSI
BLE THUS THE EFFECTIVE RESISTANCE OF THE CABLE ITSELF
NORMALLY PLAYS THE MORE IMPORTANT ROLE 7ITH VERY
SHORT CABLE LENGTHS HOWEVER IT MUST BE ENSURED
THAT THE RESISTANCE OF AN ARC AT THE TERMINALS AT THE
CLOSE UP CABLE END IS COVERED BY THE RESISTANCE
WHICH IS SET FOR THE FIRST ZONE
)NDEPENDENT ZONES : : AND :
4HIS VALUE GIVES AN ADEQUATE CLEARANCE TO THE MINI

MUM LOAD IMPEDANCE 4HE POWER SWING POLYGON
CAN BE IGNORED FOR THE PHASE EARTH FAULTS BECAUSE
THE POWER SWING DETECTION WORKS ONLY WITH PHASE
PHASE MEASUREMENT
./4% 4HE SETTING VALUES 2 FOR EACH ZONE SHOULD IF
POSSIBLE NOT EXCEED TIMES THE SET 8 VALUE
ADDRESS BLOCK
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
) . $ % 0 % . $

!
!
2% PRIM 2 LINE 2 ARC 2 TOWER
2ESISTANCE SETTING

8 PRIM

).
!
&OR EARTH FAULTS A SEPARATE RESISTANCE TOLERANCE CAN

BE SET )F AN ARC RESISTANCE OF AND A RESISTANCE OF
FOR THE TOWER FOOTING EARTH PATH ARE ASSUMED
THIS THEN LEADS TO
;8A 8B 8C =

;
=

. CT
. VT
2 PRIM
/NLY HALF OF THE ARC RESISTANCE VALUE WAS USED BE

CAUSE IT IS ADDITIVE TO THE LOOP IMPEDANCE AND ONLY
HALF SHOULD BE ADDED TO THE IMPEDANCE PER PHASE
!
!
SECONDARY
8 SEC
. CT
. VT

PRIMARY UP TO : OF THE NEXT LINE B
8PRIM

2 ARC

SECONDARY
:ONE
).
!
8 PRIM
8A 8B

8 SEC
:ONE
. CT
. VT
PRIMARY UP TO : OF THE NEXT LINE B
:ONE
:ONE
)N THIS EXAMPLE FOR PHASE PHASE ARCS AN ARC VOLT

AGE DROP OF MAX K6 IS ASSUMED 7ITH AN AS
SUMED MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT OF ! THIS
CORRESPONDS TO PRIMARY &OR THE RESISTANCE SET
TING OF THE FIRST ZONE THIS RESULTS IN
SECONDARY
: / . % 3
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ISTANCE PROTECTION INDEPENDENT ZONES : :
AND :
# ' #
3!6
&IRST ZONE :

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE

PHASE
2

8

2 %

$ ) 2 % #
:
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3

2EACTANCE VALUE REACH


2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH


$IRECTION FOR ZONE : CAN BE

&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION
./. $)2%#4)/.!, EITHER DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / .
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

0 ( ! 3 %
$ELAY FOR ZONE : SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
4
0 ( ! 3 %
$ELAY FOR ZONE : MULTI PHASE FAULTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS

4
.ORMALLY ADDRESSES AND ARE SET TO THE SAME VALUE
3ECOND ZONE :

2

8
# ' #
2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE



3!6


2 %

$ ) 2 % #
:
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / .


&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

4
0 ( ! 3 %
4
0 ( ! 3 %

4 2 ) 0
0
:
. /
$ELAY FOR ZONE : SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
$ELAY FOR ZONE : MULTI PHASE FAULTS
S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE : FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS
3INGLE POLE TRIP WITH SINGLE PHASE FAULT EVEN IN
ZONE :
./
9 % 3
OR
9%3
4HIRD ZONE :

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE

2
8
2 %
$ ) 2 % #
:





& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION
. / .
./. $)2%#4)/.!,
EITHER DIRECTION
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,
# ' #
3!6

$ELAY FOR ZONE :

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :
4
S
#ONTROLLED OVERREACH ZONES :" AND :,
S
S
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE TWO OVERREACH ZONES :" AND :, ARE CON

TROLLED STAGES 4HEY DO NOT INFLUENCE THE NORMAL
ZONES : : : 4HERE IS THEREFORE NO SWITCH OV
ER RATHER THE OVERREACH ZONES WILL BE SWITCHED EFFEC
TIVE OR NON EFFECTIVE BY THE APPROPRIATE CRITERIA )F
ONE OF THESE STAGES IS NOT REQUIRED THE CORRESPOND
ING SETTINGS ARE IRRELEVANT
"OTH STAGES CAN ALSO BE USED FOR SELECTION BETWEEN

CABLE AND OVERHEAD LINE SECTIONS IN CASE OF MIXED
LINES REFER TO 3ECTION FOR MORE DETAILS %ACH
OF THESE STAGES HAVE THEIR OWN DELAY TIME WHEREBY
FOR :" ONE CAN AGAIN DISTINGUISH BETWEEN SINGLE
POLE 4" 0(!3% AND MULTI POLE FAULTS 4"
0(!3
:ONE :" IS EFFECTIVE IN CONJUNCTION WITH RAPID RE

CLOSING FIRST SHOT ANDOR TELEPROTECTION MODES )T
CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED VIA A BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT )T IS
GENERALLY SET AT AT LEAST OF THE LINE LENGTH
-EASUREMENT DIRECTION CAN ALSO BE SET INDIVIDUALLY

FOR THE OVERREACH ZONES
4HE ZONE :, IS USED FOR MULTIPLE RECLOSING AFTER THE

SECOND SHOT $!2 DELAYED AUTO RECLOSURE )T
CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED VIA A BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT

$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
# / . 4 2 / , , % $
: / . % 3
./4% 4HE DIRECTIONS SET FOR ZONE :" AND :, AP

PLY IN GENERAL FOR THIS STAGE INDEPENDENT OF THE
CAUSE WHICH LEADS TO ACTIVATION OF ONE OF THESE
ZONES
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ISTANCE PROTECTION CONTROLLED ZONES
:" AND :,
/VERREACH ZONE :" CONTROLLED BY 2!2 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALS OR BINARY INPUT

2 "

8 "

2 " %
# ' #

PHASE





3!6

$ ) 2 % #
: "
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
$IRECTION FOR ZONE :" CAN BE

&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / .
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

4 "
0 ( ! 3 %
$ELAY FOR ZONE :" SINGLE PHASE FAULTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :" FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS
4 "
0 ( ! 3
$ELAY FOR ZONE :" MULTI PHASE FAULTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :" FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS

/VERREACH ZONE :, CONTROLLED BY $!2 OR BINARY INPUT


PHASE
2 ,

8 ,

2 , %

$ ) 2 % #
: ,
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3





$IRECTION FOR ZONE :, CAN BE

&/27!2$3
LINE DIRECTION OR
2%6%23%
BUSBAR DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / .
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

4 ,
S
$ELAY FOR ZONE :,

AND 0 NO TRIP IN ZONE :,
S
S
# ' #
3!6

3ELECTION OF THE FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY HAS A VARIETY OF FAULT

DETECTION FUNCTIONS FROM WHICH THE OPTIMUM CAN BE
CHOSEN FOR THE SYSTEM UNDER CONSIDERATION REFER TO
3ECTION /RDERING DATA
EQUIPPED WITH MORE THAN ONE FAULT DETECTOR SELEC

TION HAS BEEN MADE DURING CONFIGURATION ACCORDING
3ECTION ADDRESS 4HE FOLLOWING PARA
GRAPHS SHOW THE PARAMETERS FOR ALL FAULT DETECTION FA
CILITIES 7HEN PAGING THROUGH THE DISPLAY ONLY THOSE
ADDRESSES APPEAR WHICH ARE VALID FOR THE SELECTED
FAULT DETECTION METHODS
4HE POSSIBLE FAULT DETECTION METHODS ARE INDIVIDUAL

LY DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION )F THE DEVICE IS

$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
& ! 5 , 4
$ % 4 % # 0 2 / '

0 2 / '
5 )
, % 5 P H E , , 5 P H P H
, % 5 P H P H , , 5 P H P
, % 5 P H E , , 5 P H E
, % 5 P H E , , )
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $ISTANCE PROTECTION

FAULT DETECTION PROGRAM
ONLY WITH VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT DETECTION

MEASUREMENT CONTROL
5PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT
5PH PH WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
5PH
5PH
PH
5PH
5PH
PH
WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
5PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT

)
WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT OVERCURRENT
PICK UP ONLY
./4% -EASUREMENT CONTROL WITH ,%5PHPH,,5PHPH EXCLUDES MEASUREMENT OF PHASE TO EARTH LOOP THUS
IT IS NOT USED FOR SYSTEMS WITH EARTHED STARPOINT UNLESS A DIFFERENT PROTECTIVE RELAY OR FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED FOR
EARTH FAULTS

0 2 / '
: !
, % : P H E , , : P H P H
, % : P H E , , )
# ' #
ONLY FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION

FIX IMPEDANCE :! -EASUREMENT CONTROL
:PH % WITH DETECTED EARTH FAULT
:PH PH WITHOUT DETECTED EARTH FAULT
:PH %
)

OVERCURRENT PICK UP ONLY

3!6

'ENERAL SETTING FOR FAULT DETECTION

& ! 5 , 4
$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
$ % 4 % # 4 ) / .
ADDRESS BLOCK
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT DETECTION FOR DISTANCE

PROTECTION
0ARAMETERS FOR OVERCURRENT DETECTION ARE SET IN AD

DRESS FOR PHASE CURRENTS AND FOR EARTH
CURRENTS 4HE DETERMINING FACTOR FOR OVERCURRENT
SETTING IS THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE OPERATING CURRENT
0ICK UP UNDER CONDITIONS OF PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
MUST BE EXCLUDED 4HE THRESHOLD VALUE )PH !D
DRESS MUST THEREFORE BE SET ABOVE THE MAXI
MUM ANTICIPATED OVER LOAD CURRENT APPROX
TIMES )T MUST THEN BE CHECKED THAT THE MINIMUM
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS ABOVE THIS LIMIT )F THAT IS NOT
THE CASE A RELAY WITH VOLTAGE CONTROLLED 5) FAULT
DETECTION OR IMPEDANCE DETECTION IS NECESSARY
&OR THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT A SEPARATE SETTING VALUE
)E !DDRESS IS PROVIDED )N SOLIDLY EARTHED
NETWORKS THIS WOULD BE SET BELOW THE MINIMUM EX
PECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT VALUE )N ISOLATED OR COM
PENSATED NETWORKS THE SETTING VALUE FOR CORRECT DE
TECTION OF DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS MUST BE SET BELOW THE
MINIMUM EXPECTED DOUBLE EARTH FAULT CURRENT

) P H
) ) N
) E
) ) N
#ALCULATION EXAMPLE
&OR THE LINE USED IN THE EXAMPLE IN 3ECTION
THE MAXIMUM OPERATING CURRENT IS ! WITH
! ! CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND THE MINIMUM
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS ASSUMED TO BE ! 4HE
FOLLOWING SETTING WOULD THEREFORE BE USED
) ) ,MAX
).
).
!
!

4HIS VALUE LIES ADEQUATELY BELOW THE MINIMUM SHORT

CIRCUIT CURRENT OF ! ! | ).
4HE CONDITION FOR THE MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT IS
ALSO VALID FOR EARTH FAULT CURRENTS IN SOLIDLY EARTHED
NETWORKS EQUALLY FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN EITHER
SYSTEM
)F IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IS USED THE
) STAGE CAN BE SET MORE SENSITIVE BECAUSE THIS
IS NOT AN INDEPENDENT STAGE BUT SUPPLEMENTS THE
IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION PHASE TO EARTH WHEN
A LINE LOOP WOULD BE ELIMINATED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
TION &OR LONG LINES IT CAN BE SET SUCH THAT IS
DOES NOT OPERATE IN CASE OF REVERSE FAULT BECAUSE OF
THE DAMPING EFFECT OF THE LINE ITSELF
/VERCURRENT DETECTION THRESHOLD VALUE )PH

).
).
4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION )%

).
).
# ' #
3!6

3ETTING FOR VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH VOLT

AGE
CONTROLLED
FAULT
DETECTION
FACILITY
OR JJJJ AND WHEN THIS
3!J JJJJ
METHOD HAS BEEN SELECTED 3ECTION /THER
WISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER
4HE MEANING OF THE PARAMETERS CAN BE GATHERED
FROM THE CURRENTVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IG
URE )PH ADDRESS IS THE MINIMUM OPERAT
ING CURRENT THE PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK
UP )T MUST BE SET BELOW THE MINIMUM PRESUMED
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
4HE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH CAN BE SET EITHER FOR
PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGES IN ADDRESSES AND
OR FOR PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES UNDER AD
DRESSES AND 4HIS DEPENDS ON WHETHER
VOLTAGE CONTROL IS SELECTED WITH 5PHPH OR WITH 5PHE
4HE CHARACTERISTIC MUST BE SET SUCH THAT IT HAS A SUFFI
CIENT SAFETY DISTANCE FROM THE MAXIMUM OPERATION
CURRENT AT MINIMUM OPERATION VOLTAGE )N CASES OF
DOUBT ONE SHOULD CHECK THE PICK UP CONDITIONS
AGAINST THE CHARACTERISTIC 7ITH COMPREHENSIVE NET
WORKS SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS MAY BE USEFUL
56
5)

5)

)PH
)PH

)).
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTORS

5) CHARACTERISTIC

4HE POSSIBILITY TO CONTROL WITH THE VOLTAGE LOOPS

50H % ONLY WHEN AN EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN DETECTED IS
ADVANTAGEOUS IN SYSTEMS WITH A LOW IMPEDANCE
EARTHED STARPOINT IE WITH EARTH FAULT LIMITING AIDS
SO CALLED RESISTANCE EARTHING )N THESE SYSTEMS
ONLY EARTH FAULTS ARE TO BE DETECTED BY THE VOLTAGE
CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION &OR PHASE PHASE FAULTS
THE HIGH SET OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTORS )PH WILL
PICK UP ADDRESS ,%5PHE,,)
)N ORDER TO PREVENT FAULTY PICK UP OF THE EARTH FAULT
DETECTOR BY THE OSCILLATION TRANSIENTS ON OCCURRENCE
OF A SIMPLE EARTH FAULT IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED
0ETERSEN COIL NETWORKS EARTH FAULT DETECTION CAN
BE DELAYED BY THE PARAMETER 4)E 0(!3% ADDRESS
REFER 3ECTION )F THE EARTH CURRENT
COULD EXCEED THE EARTH FAULT THRESHOLD EVEN UNDER
STEADY STATE CONDITIONS 4)E 0(!3% SHOULD BE SET
TO 0 PICK UP ON ONE SINGLE PHASE FAULT IS THEN NO
MORE POSSIBLE EVEN IF A HIGH EARTH CURRENT WILL FLOW
$OUBLE EARTH FAULTS WILL NEVERTHELESS BE DETECTED
CORRECTLY AND CLEARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DOUBLE
FAULT PREFERENCE PROGRAM 3ECTION

&IGURE
)N MOST CASES CONTROL WITH 50H % FOR EARTH FAULTS AND

50H 0H FOR EARTH FREE FAULTS IS PREFERRED IN SYSTEMS
WITH EARTHED STARPOINT ADDRESS ,%5PHE
,,5PHPH 4HIS ENSURES MAXIMUM SENSITIVITY FOR ALL
KINDS OF FAULT ! PRE REQUISITE IS HOWEVER THAT THE
EARTH FAULT CRITERIA ARE SATISFIED AT THE MEASURING
POINT SAFELY FOR ALL EARTH FAULTS REFER 3ECTION
/THERWISE CONTROL WITH 50H % FOR ALL KINDS OF FAULT IS
REASONABLE ADDRESS ,%5PHE,,5PHE
WHICH IS LESS SENSITIVE FOR EARTH FREE SHORT CIRCUITS
)N MANY CASES THIS CAN BE ACCEPTED BECAUSE PHA
SE TO PHASE FAULTS ARE COVERED BY THE OVERCURRENT
FAULT DETECTION FUNCTIONS )PH
) P H
) ) N
# ' #
!DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO MAKE VOLTAGE CONTROL

WITH PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGES ONLY ADDRESS
,%5PHPH,,5PHPH 4HE MEASURED LINE LOOP IN
THIS CASE IS INDEPENDENT OF THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
THIS METHOD EXCLUDES PICK UP ON EARTH FAULTS ABSO
LUTELY HOWEVER CORRECT DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER
ENCE IS NOT POSSIBLE
-INIMUM OPERATING CURRENT FOR FAULT DETECTION )PH

).
).

3!6

5 P H P H )

5 P H E )

5 P H E )

5 P H P H )
5NDERVOLTAGE PICK UP VALUE AT )PH ADDRESS

&IGURE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
6
6

&IGURE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
6
6

&IGURE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
6
6

&IGURE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
6
6
3ETTINGS FOR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH IM

PEDANCE DETECTION FACILITY 3!J JJJJ
JJJJ AND WHEN THIS METHOD HAS BEEN SELECTED
3ECTION /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER
4HE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION FOR PHASE EARTH IS
SUPPLEMENTED BY AN OVERCURRENT STAGE )PH
WHERE PICK UP OF THE OVERCURRENT STAGE ONLY LEADS
TO DETECTION IF THE ASSOCIATED IMPEDANCE LOOP HAS
BEEN ELIMINATED REFER 3ECTION 4HE RESPEC
TIVE PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN SET IN 3ECTION
4HE MEANING OF THE PARAMETERS CAN BE GATHERED
FROM THE IMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE BOLD DOTS IDENTIFY THE SETTING PARAMETERS
WHICH DETERMINE THE GEOMETRY OF THE FAULT DETECTION
POLYGON )PH IS THE MINIMUM OPERATING CURRENT THE
PREREQUISITE FOR EACH PHASE PICK UP )T MUST BE SET
BELOW THE MINIMUM PRESUMED SHORT CIRCUIT CUR
RENT
)MPEDANCE DETECTION SHOULD WITH SAFETY BE LOOKED
UPON AS THE ULTIMATE PROTECTION 4AKING INTO ACCOUNT
INTERMEDIATE FEEDING FOR REMOTE FAULTS A LARGER RATH
ER THAN SMALLER THRESHOLD VALUE SHOULD BE CHOSEN )F
THE LINE CARRIES REACTIVE POWER THE PICK UP THRESH
OLD MUST LIE BELOW THE REACTIVE POWER IMPEDANCE
HOWEVER

&AULT DETECTION AREA
&IGURE
0HASE
PHASE FAULTS
0HASE
EARTH FAULTS

ISTIC
# ' #
3!6
#ONSIDERING THE CALCULATION EXAMPLE IN 3ECTION

WE SELECT APPROXIMATELY TIMES THE VALUE OF
THE THIRD ZONE ! CALCULATION USING PRIMARY VALUES IS
SUPERFLUOUS IN THIS CONSIDERATION
8!SEC
&OR THE REVERSE DIRECTION DO NOT FORGET THAT WITH
OVERREACH TELEPROTECTION PROCEDURES A REVERSE FAULT
MUST DEFINITELY BE RECOGNIZED IF IT LIES WITHIN THE OVER
REACH ZONE OF THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE END .ORMAL
SETTING VALUES ARE APPROXIMATELY HALF THOSE OF THE
REACH IN THE FORWARDS DIRECTION
8 !SEC
&OR THE RESISTANCE SETTING THERE IS A LOWER AND AN UP
PER LIMIT 4HE SETTING 2! MUST STILL RECOGNIZE ARC
FAULTS WITHIN ITS TOLERANCE RANGE 2OUGHLY OR
TIMES THE VALUE OF THE THIRD ZONE APPLIES HERE ALSO
!T THE UPPER END THE SETTING VALUE 2! SHOULD NOT EX
CEED TIMES THE SETTING FOR 8 !
&OR LONG OVERHEAD LINES IT MUST BE CONSIDERED THAT
THE SETTING IN THE RESISTIVE DIRECTION MUST HAVE A SUFFI
CIENT SAFETY MARGIN FROM THE MINIMUM LOAD IMPED
ANCE 4HE MINIMUM LOAD IMPEDANCE OCCURS AT MAXI
MUM LOAD CURRENT AND MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE
)N THIS EXAMPLE THEREFORE
5 MIN
K6
2 ,PRIM
!
) ,MAX

OR SECONDARY
2 ,SEC
. CT
. VT
).
!
2 ,PRIM

) P H
) ) N
8 !
# ' #
!
!
! SAFETY MARGIN OF AT LEAST SHOULD BE MAIN

TAINED WITH RESPECT TO THIS VALUE
2MAX
7HEN THE POWER SWING BLOCKING FUNCTION IS USED
THIS VALUE MUST NOT BE EXCEEDED BY THE POWER SWING
POLYGON EITHER SO THE PICK UP VALUE IN THE 2 DIREC
TION MUST BE SET CONSIDERABLY SMALLER IN ORDER TO OB
TAIN ADEQUATE MEASURING CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE
POWER SWING POLYGON AND THE FAULT DETECTION POLY
GON REFER TO 3ECTION
)N ORDER TO GUARANTEE UNEQUIVOCAL CRITERIA FOR DIS
CRIMINATION BETWEEN LOAD OPERATION AND A SHORT CIR
CUIT IN THE CASE OF LONG HIGH LOADED LINES IN OTH
ER WORDS IF ABOVE PRECONDITIONS CANNOT BE FULFILLED
THE CHARACTERISTIC CAN BE SET DEPENDENT ON THE
PHASE ANGLE THE 2 INTERSECTION 2! ADDRESS
THEN APPLIES TO PHASE ANGLES ABOVE THE VALUE
!.',% 0()! ADDRESS THE 2 INTERSECTION 2!
ADDRESS TO PHASE ANGLES BELOW !.',%
0()! 4HE SAFETY MARGIN FROM THE MINIMUM LOAD IM
PEDANCE IS NECESSARY ONLY FOR 2! 4HE ANGLE
!.',% 0()! MUST BE SET HIGHER THAN THE MAXIMUM
PHASE ANGLE DURING LOAD TRANSPORT &UNDAMENTALLY IT
IS MOST IMPORTANT THAT THE FAULT DETECTION CHARACTER
ISTIC NEVER EXCEEDS THE LOAD IMPEDANCE DURING OPER
ATION
&OR EARTH FAULTS A SEPARATE RESISTANCE TOLERANCE AND
A SEPARATE LIMIT ANGLE !.' 0()!% CAN BE SET AD
DRESS ,OAD IMPEDANCE CAN BE IGNORED FOR THE
PHASE EARTH FAULTS UNLESS THE PICK UP VALUE OF THE
EARTH CURRENT DETECTION ADDRESS COULD BE EX
CEEDED BY ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENTS CAUSED BY
ASYMMETRIES IN CURRENTS
4HE POWER SWING DETECTION USES PHASE TO PHASE
QUANTITIES 4HUS SETTING OF THE R SECTION FOR PHASE
EARTH MEASUREMENT ARE IRRELEVANT
-INIMUM CURRENT FOR IMPEDANCE DETECTION

).
).
2EACTANCE VALUE REACH FORWARDS



3!6

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH PHASE ANGLE ABOVE !.'

0()!% ADDRESS


2 ! %

! . ' , %
0 ( ) !

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE EARTH PHASE ANGLE BELOW !.'

0()!% ADDRESS

2 ! %

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE PHASE ANGLE ABOVE

!.',% 0()! ADDRESS FAULT AREA


2 !

! . '
^

2ESISTANCE FOR PHASE PHASE PHASE ANGLE BELOW

!.',% 0()! ADDRESS LOAD AREA


2 !

2EACTANCE VALUE REACH REVERSE

0 ( ) ! %
,IMIT ANGLE FOR PHASE PHASE MEASUREMENT BELOW

WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2! ADDRESS IS
VALID LOAD AREA ABOVE WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION
2! ADDRESS IS VALID FAULT AREA
^
^
,IMIT ANGLE FOR PHASE EARTH MEASUREMENT BELOW
WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2!% ADDRESS IS
VALID ABOVE WHICH RESISTANCE INTERSECTION 2!% AD
DRESS IS VALID
^
^
.OTE $ISTINCTION BETWEEN 2! AND 2! CAN BE MADE FOR USE ON LONG HEAVY LOADED LINES )N OTHER CASES BOTH
THE PARAMETERS ARE TO BE SET TO THE SAME VALUE $ISTINCTION BETWEEN 2!% AND 2!% IS USUALLY NOT NECESSARY

# ' #
3!6

3ETTINGS FOR DETERMINATION OF THE FAULTED LOOP
4HE SELECTION OF VALID SHORT CIRCUITED LOOPS VARIES

CONSIDERABLY DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER THE SYSTEM
STARPOINT IS EARTHED ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED 0ET
ERSEN COIL !CCORDINGLY THE TREATMENT OF THE SYSTEM
STAR POINT HAS TO BE KNOWN BEFORE THE DEVICE IS PUT
INTO OPERATION SEE 3ECTION ADDRESS
4HE PARAMETER BLOCK IS IMPORTANT FOR NETWORKS
WITH SOLIDLY EARTHED STARPOINT 7ITH UNEARTHED STAR
POINT IT IS IRRELEVANT AND CAN BE PASSED OVER
0ARAMETER BLOCK IS FOR ISOLATED AND COMPENSATED
NETWORKS &OR NETWORKS WITH EARTHED STAR POINTS IT
IS IRRELEVANT AND CAN BE PASSED OVER
)N EARTHED NETWORKS AN EARTH FAULT CAN BE DETECTED
BY EARTH CURRENT OR DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE ADDRESS
&AULT LOOP SELECTION FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS
CAN BE PROGRAMMED UNDER ADDRESS .ORMALLY
THE 0(!3% 0(!3% LOOP WILL BE SELECTED )F HIGH
FOOTING RESISTANCES ARE EXPECTED THEN ,!'').'
0( % LOOP MAY BE MORE FAVOURABLE BECAUSE THE
LEADING PHASE EARTH LOOP TENDS TO OVERREACH )N

& ! 5 , 4
% ! 2 4 ( % $

. % 4 7 / 2 + 3
ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
SOME CASES FAULT RESISTANCE PHASE PHASE LARGER

THAN PHASE EARTH ,%!$).' 0( % CAN BE MORE FA
VOURABLE
&OR THREE PHASE PICK UP THE SETTING OF ADDRESS
DETERMINES THE TYPE OF LOOP WHICH WILL BE SE
LECTED 0( &!5,43 %& #/.42/, MEANS THAT IF
THERE IS NO EARTH FAULT DETECTED THEN A PHASE PHASE
LOOP WILL BE MEASURED BUT WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION A
PHASE LOOP PHASE EARTH 4HE OTHER POSSIBILITIES
0( 0( /.,9 AND 0( % /.,9 ARE INDEPENDENT OF
THE )% PICK UP
5NDER ADDRESS ONE CAN SELECT WHETHER UNDER
CONDITIONS OF A SINGLE PHASE PICK UP WITHOUT EARTH
FAULT DETECTION A CONDUCTOR EARTH LOOP IS SELECTED
4HE SETTING 0( &!5,43 0(!3% %!24( ONLY
MAKES SENSE IN EARTHED NETWORKS WHEN NO CURRENT
OR ONLY EXTREMELY LOW CURRENT CAN FLOW IN THE CASE OF
AN EARTH FAULT &OR IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION THIS PA
RAMETER IS IRRELEVANT BECAUSE IMPEDANCE FAULT DE
TECTION ALWAYS IS RELATED TO A FAULT LOOP
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULT LOOP IN SOLIDLY EARTHED
NETWORKS
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E o | 5 FOR EARTH FAULT

DETECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS .OTE !DDRESS HAS
NO INFLUENCE ON THIS PICK UP VALUE
6

6
OR 0 NO EARTH FAULT DETECTION BASED ON DISPLACE MENT
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
5 E

0 ( 0 ( %
& , 4 3
0 ( ! 3 %
0 ( ! 3 %
/ . , 9
&OR DOUBLE EARTH FAULTS IN EARTHED NETWORKS

MEASUREMENT IS CARRIED OUT IN
0(!3% 0(!3% LOOP /.,9
, % ! $ ) . '
0 (
0(ASE %ARTH LOOP OF THE ,%!$).' PHASE
, ! ' ' ) . '
0 (
0(ASE %ARTH LOOP OF THE ,!'').' PHASE

% &
0 (
& ! 5 , 4 3
# / . 4 2 / ,
0 ( ! 3 %
0 ( ! 3 %
/ . , 9
0 ( ! 3 %
% ! 2 4 (
/ . , 9
# ' #
7ITH FAULT DETECTION IN ALL PHASES

%& #/.42/,LED
0(!3% 0(!3% /.,9
0(!3% %!24( /.,9
FAULT LOOP IS SELECTED DEPEN

DENT ON EARTH FAULT DETECTION
FAULT LOOP PHASE TO PHASE IS
SELECTED EVEN WITH EARTH
FAULT DETECTION
FAULT LOOP PHASE TO EARTH IS
SELECTED EVEN WITHOUT EARTH
FAULT DETECTION

3!6
0 ( ! 3 %
% ! 2 4 (
WITH FAULT DETECTION IN ONE SINGLE PHASE

FAULT LOOP PHASE TO EARTH IS
0(!3% %!24(
SELECTED EVEN WITHOUT EARTH
FAULT DETECTION
0 ( ! 3 %
0 ( ! 3 %
0(!3% 0(!3%

0 (
& ! 5 , 4 3
)N ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS IT MUST BE

ENSURED THAT THE PREFERENCE UNDER CONDITIONS OF
DOUBLE CROSS COUNTRY EARTH FAULTS IS THE SAME
THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED NET
WORK ADDRESS 4O PREVENT PICK UP DURING THE
TRANSIENT SWINGS ON INCEPTION OF A SINGLE PHASE FAULT
)% PICK UP IS DELAYED FOR SINGLE PHASE PICK UP BY
SETTING 4)E 0(!3% AT SECONDS ADDRESS
)N EXTENDED COMPENSATED NETWORKS THIS TIME
SHOULD BE INCREASED )F IT IS SET TO 0 NO START OF THE

. / .
& ! 5 , 4
% ! 2 4 ( % $

4 ) E
0 ( ! 3 %
& , ,
DISTANCE PROTECTION TAKES PLACE IF ONLY ONE PHASE

PICKS UP )F HOWEVER A CROSS COUNTRY DOUBLE EARTH
FAULT OCCURS AFTER DETECTION OF A SIMPLE EARTH FAULT
THIS IS RECOGNIZED BY THE RELAY AND MEASURED AC
CORDING TO THE SELECTED DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFERENCE
PROGRAM 3INGLE EARTH FAULT IS RECOGNIZED BY THE DIS
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E ADDRESS DELAY 4)E
0(!3% IS NOT EFFECTIVE THEREAFTER A FURTHER EARTH
FAULT AFTER OCCURRENCE OF A SINGLE EARTH FAULT CAN ONLY
BE A DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
$ETERMINATION OF THE FAULT LOOP IN NON EARTHED
ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS
$ELAY FOR )% DETECTION WITH SINGLE PHASE

PICK UP IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
S
S
AND 0 )% PICK UP TOTALLY AVOIDED
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E o | 5 FOR EARTH
FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS .OTE
!DDRESS HAS NO INFLUENCE ON THIS PICK UP
VALUE
6
6
5 E

0 ( ! 3 %

. % 4
FAULT LOOP PHASE TO PHASE IS

SELECTED
0 2 %
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
! # 9 # , ) #
, ,
# 9 # , ) #
, ,
# 9 # , ) #
0HASE PREFERENCE FOR DOUBLE CROSS COUNTRY EARTH

FAULTS &OR ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE
PREFERENCE SEQUENCE MUST BE THE SAME THROUGHOUT
THE WHOLE ELECTRICALLY INTERCONNECTED NETWORK
# ' #
3! 6

3ETTINGS FOR THE POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT
./4% 4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR MODELS WITH

POWER SWING OPTION MODEL 3!J JJJJJ
JJJ /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER 4HE POW
ER SWING SUPPLEMENT ONLY OPERATES IF IT IS CONFIGURED
ADDRESS 0/7%2 37).' %8)34 REFER 3EC
TION AND IF THE DEVICE HAS IMPEDANCE FAULT DE
TECTION
4HREE POSSIBLE PROGRAMS CAN BE SELECTED FOR THE
POWER SWING BLOCKING FUNCTION IN ADDITION A TRIP
PING FUNCTION IN THE CASE OF UNSTABLE POWER SWINGS
ASYNCHRONISM CAN BE PROGRAMMED &OR THE DETEC
TION OF POWER SWINGS THE FOLLOWING CONSIDERATIONS
ARE OF IMPORTANCE SEE ALSO 3ECTION
3 7 ) . '

0 3
" , / # +
! , ,
" , / # +
:
" , / # +
! , ,
/ 5 4
/ &

" 5 4
:
4 2 ) 0
0 3
# ' #
&UNCTIONAL PROGRAM OF THE POWER SWING

SUPPLEMENT
BLOCKING OF THE HIGHER DELAYED ZONES

ONLY : IS RELEASED
TRIP IN THE EVENT OF UNSTABLE POWER SWING
ASYNCHRONISM ALL ZONES ARE BLOCKED
$ISTANCE 2 BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND FAULT
DETECTION POLYGON SECONDARY SEE IN


2ATE OF CHANGE OF THE POWER SWING VECTOR BETWEEN
THE POWER SWING POLYGON AND FAULT DETECTION POLYGON
IN S BELOW WHICH THE POWER SWING IS DETECTED
S
S
D 2 D 4
S

4O SET THE RATE OF CHANGE OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR

BOTH THE MAXIMUM POWER SWING FREQUENCY IN THE IN
STANT OF ENTRY OF THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR INTO THE POWER
SWING POLYGON AND THE TIME REQUIRED BY 3! FOR
THE DETECTION OF THE POWER SWING MUST BE TAKEN INTO
CONSIDERATION 5NDER THE MOST DIFFICULT CONDITIONS AT
LEAST MS SHOULD BE ALLOWED FOR THE DETECTION OF A
POWER SWING
BLOCKING OF THE FIRST ZONE ONLY
/ . , 9
$ E L T A

0 2 / ' 2
3 4 % 0
4HE DISTANCE BETWEEN POWER SWING POLYGON AND

FAULT DETECTION POLYGON PHASE PHASE SHOULD BE
AS LARGE AS POSSIBLE THE 2 INTERSECTION IS DECISIVE
/N THE OTHER HAND THE POWER SWING POLYGON MUST
NOT EXTEND INTO THE OPERATIONAL IMPEDANCE
"EGINNING OF BLOCK

0 / 7 % 2
ADDRESS BLOCK
! # 4
0OWER SWING ACTION TIME

4HE FUNCTION CAN BE LIMITED TO THE TIME 03 4 !#4
7ITH THE SETTING 0 THE POWER SWING FUNCTION IS
EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE IMPEDANCE VECTOR HAS LEFT THE POWER
SWING POLYGON AGAIN
S
S
AND 0 ONLY AFTER DISCONTINUATION OF THE POWER SWING
CRITERION

3! 6

3ETTINGS FOR TELEPROTECTION
ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
)N PROGRAMMING OF THE SCOPE OF THE FUNCTIONS 3EC

TION ONE SELECTS WHETHER A PERMISSIVE UNDER
REACH TRANSFER SCHEME 5.$%22%!#( OR A PERMIS
SIVE OVERREACHING TRANSFER SCHEME /6%22%!#(
SHALL BE USED FOR THE TELEPROTECTION ADDRESS )F
THE TELEPROTECTION IS PROGRAMMED AS ./. %8)34
THIS 3ECTION IS IRRELEVANT
4HE FUNCTION OF THE VARIOUS PROCEDURES IS DESCRIBED
IN 3ECTION
5NDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES

DRESS BLOCK
4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % #
0 % 2 -
5 . $ % 2 2 % ! # (
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
4ELEPROTECTION PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER
SCHEMES
0 5 4 4
0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IS
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

: "
& $
0 5 4 4
- / $ %
! # # % , % 2 ! 4 ) / .
! # # % , % 2 ! 4 ) / .

2 % #
3 % . $
0 2 ,
0 2 / ,

3 % . $

$ % ,
AD
&OR THE UNDERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES THE TRANSMIS

SION SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, ADDRESS
SHALL ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL SAFE
LY REACHES THE OPPOSITE LINE END EVEN WHEN THE SIG
NAL FROM THE TRANSMITTING LINE END IS INTERRUPTED
QUICKLY ANDOR WHEN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IS RELA
TIVELY LONG 3IMILAR CONSIDERATIONS CAN APPLY FOR THE
RECEIVED SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 2%# 02/, AD
DRESS $ELAY OF THE FIRST ZONE : DOES NOT DELAY
THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL BUT AN OWN TIME DELAY 4
3%.$ $%, ADDRESS IS AVAILABLE

-ODE SELECTION OF PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH

TRANSFER TRIP
:ONE ACCELERATION :" WITH 4"
4RIP WITH FAULT DETECTION NON DIRECTIONAL
INSTANTANEOUS
0ROLONGATION OF TRANSMIT SIGNAL WITH UNDERREACH
MODES
S
S
0ROLONGATION OF RECEIVED SIGNAL WITH UNDERREACH
MODES
S
S
$ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IN PERMISSIVE UNDER
REACH MODES 4 IS NOT DECISIVE FOR TRANSMISSION
SIGNAL DELAY EVEN IF A DELAY IS SET
S
S
# ' #
3! 6

/VERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES

DRESS BLOCK
AD
&OR THE OVERREACH TRANSFER SCHEMES IT MUST BE NOTED

PARTICULARLY THEREFORE ALSO
THAT THE NORMAL ZONES
: OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY )F THE DISTANCE PROTEC
TION DEVICES AT THE TWO LINE ENDS HAVE SIGNIFICANTLY
DIFFERENT COMMAND TIMES MORE THAN APPROXIMATELY
MS DIFFERENCE THE FIRST ZONE WITH DELAY 4 SHALL
BE APPROPRIATELY DELAYED ADDRESSES AND
FOR THE RELEASE PROCEDURES :" 2%,%!3% &$
$)2%# 2%,%!3% :" 5.",/#+ AND &$ 5.
",/#+
&OR THE BLOCKING PROCEDURES :" ",/#+).' AND
2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ 4" ADDRESSES AND
MUST BE SUFFICIENTLY DELAYED THAT THE BLOCKING
SIGNAL IS SAFELY TRANSMITTED UNDER CONDITIONS OF EXTER
NAL FAULT &OR 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 A DELAY OF 4" IS
EQUALLY NECESSARY WHEN SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCES ARE
PRESENT BETWEEN THE PICK UP AND DROP OFF TIMES OF
THE DEVICES AT TWO LINE ENDS !DDITIONALLY A SUFFICIENT
TIME PERIOD MUST REMAIN BETWEEN FAULT DETECTION
PICK UP AND TRIP SIGNAL IN ZONE :" SO THAT THE
CLOSED WIRE LOOP CAN SAFELY BE INTERRUPTED BY FAULT
DETECTION AND RECLOSED BY TRIP IN :" )F NECES
SARY 4" MUST BE DELAYED FOR THIS CASE TOO

0 % 2 -

4HE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ ADDRESS

MUST BE LONGER THAN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IN
ADDITION THE DURATION OF HEAVY TRANSIENT REACTIONS AT
THE INCEPTION AND INTERRUPTION OF SHORT CIRCUITS HAS TO
BE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION
4HE TIME 4 7!)4 ADDRESS IS A WAITING TIME
FOR INITIATION OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING 7HEN THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION HAS DETECTED A FAULT THE RECEPTION CIRCUIT
RELEASE WILL BE BLOCKED IF NO RECEPTION SIGNAL HAS
BEEN RECEIVED WITHIN THIS TIME THEREAFTER A RECEPTION
SIGNAL CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE AFTER THE TRANSIENT BLOCK
ING TIME 4 42!.3",/ REFER ALSO 3ECTION )F
SET TO 0 NO BLOCKING TAKES PLACE FOR THIS CASE
0ROLONGATION OF THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL 4 3%.$
02, ADDRESS IS ONLY EFFECTIVE DURING THE RE
LEASE PROCEDURE WHEN THE RELAY HAS ALREADY ISSUED A
TRIPPING COMMAND 4HIS ALSO GUARANTEES RELEASE OF
THE OTHER LINE END WHEN THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS RAPIDLY
CLEARED BY THE INDEPENDENT ZONE : )N THE BLOCKING
PROCEDURE :" ",/#+).' THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL
IS ALWAYS PROLONGED BY THIS TIME
)F A DELAY 4" IS SET FOR THE OVERREACH ZONE :" THIS
DOES NOT LEAD TO DELAY OF THE TRANSMIT SIGNAL BUT
TRANSMISSION CAN BE DELAYED BY THE TIME 4 3%.$
$%, ADDRESS
/ 6 % 2 2 % ! # (
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
4ELEPROTECTION PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER
SCHEMES
0 / 4 4
0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IS
4 % , % 0 2 / 4 % #
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

: "
& $
: "
& $
: "
0 / 4 4
- / $ %
2 % , % ! 3 %
$ ) 2 % #
2 % , % ! 3 %
5 . " , / # +
5 . " , / # +
" , / # + ) . '
0 ) , / 4
7 ) 2 %
2 % 6 % 2 3
# ' #
# / - 0
) . 4 % 2 , / # +
-ODE SELECTION OF PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP

PERMISSIVE OVERREACH WITH
:" 2%,%!3%
ZONE :" RELEASE MODE
DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
&$ $)2%# 2%,%!3%
RELEASE FAULT DETECTION
5NBLOCKING MODE WITH ZONE
:" 5.",/#+
:"
5NBLOCKING MODE WITH
&$ 5.",/#+
FAULT DETECTION DIRECTIONAL
"LOCKING MODE WITH ZONE
:" ",/#+).'
:"
#OMPARISON :" VIA
0),/4 7)2% #/-0
PILOT WIRES
2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ 2EVERSE INTERLOCKING

3! 6

/

7 ! ) 4
3 % . $
4 2 ! . 3 " ,
7AITING TIME BEFORE TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING

RECEPTION SIGNAL
S
S
OR 0 IE NO TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING RECEPTION
!TTENTION )N BLOCKING MODE ADDRESS 0/44
-/$% :" ",/#+).' THE WAITING TIME MUST BE
SET TO THE SMALLEST VALUE IN ORDER TO ENSURE TRANSIENT
BLOCKING AFTER RECEPTION

0 2 ,

0 / 4 4
$ I R & $
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
. / .

0ROLONGATION OF THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL EFFECTIVE

ONLY WITH :" ",/#+).' OR AFTER A TRIP SIGNAL HAS
BEEN ISSUED
S
S
%FFECTIVE DIRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL 0/44 MODES &$ $)

2%# 2%,%!3% AND &$ 5.",/#+ NOT RELEVANT FOR THE
OTHER 0/44 MODES
&/27!2$3
.ORMAL APPLICATION
2%6%23%
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT

S
S
3 % . $
$ % ,
./. $)2%#4)/.!,
FOR SPECIAL APPLICATION ONLY
$ELAY OF TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IN PERMISSIVE OVER

REACH MODES 4" IS NOT DECISIVE FOR TRANSMISSION
SIGNAL DELAY EVEN IF A DELAY IS SET
S
S
&OR LINE ENDS WITH WEAK POWER INFEED THE ECHO FUNC
TION IS REASONABLE WHEN USING OVERREACH TRANSFER
SCHEMES WITH RELEASE PERMISSION SIGNALS SO THAT
THE STRONG FEEDING LINE END CAN BE RELEASED EVEN
WHEN THE WEAK INFEED END DOES NOT PICK UP &OR OTH
ER TRANSFER SCHEMES THE ECHO FUNCTION IS NOT EFFEC
TIVE RESPECTIVE PARAMETERS ARE OF NO CONCERN THEN
4HE ECHO IMPULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 ADDRESS

CAN BE ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RE
QUIREMENTS OF THE NETWORK )T HAS TO BE LONG ENOUGH
SO THAT EVEN WITH DIFFERING OPERATING TIMES OF THE PRO
TECTIVE DEVICES AT BOTH LINE ENDS AND OF THE TRANSMIS
SION DEVICES RECOGNITION OF THE RECEIVE SIGNAL IS
GUARANTEED
4HE ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, ADDRESS

MUST BE SET TO SUCH A LONG DURATION THAT DIFFERING
REACTION TIMES OF THE FAULT DETECTORS OF THE PROTECTIVE
RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS CANNOT RESULT IN A FALSE ECHO
SIGNAL IN THE CASE OF EXTERNAL FAULTS
4O AVOID FALSE ECHO SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE

LINE A BLOCKING TIME FOR ECHO GENERATION 4 %#(/
",/ ADDRESS IS SET 4HIS SHOULD INCLUDE THE
ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, PLUS THE ECHO IM
PULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 PLUS A SAFETY MARGIN
OF AT LEAST TWICE THE TRANSMISSION TIME

# ' #
3! 6

4HE ECHO FUNCTION FOR WEAK INFED LINE ENDS IS
% # ( /
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

$ % ,
% # ( /
) - 0
$URATION OF ECHO IMPULSE

S
S
% # ( /
" , /
%CHO BLOCKING TIME

S
S

% # ( /

%CHO DELAY TIME

S
S
AND 0 NO ECHO SIGNAL WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED
3ETTINGS FOR USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4WO USER DEFINABLE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE

4HEY CAN OPERATE IF THEY ARE CONFIGURED AS %8)34 UN
DER ADDRESS DURING CONFIGURATION OF THE SCOPE
OF FUNCTIONS REFER TO 3ECTION %ACH FUNCTION
CAN BE TRIGGERED BY BINARY INPUTS AND MARSHALLED TO
BINARY OUTPUTS ,%$S SIGNAL RELAYS TRIP RELAYS &OR

5 3 % 2
, / ' ) #
& 5 . # 4 ) / . 3

# ' #
0 ) # + 5 0
$ 2 / 0
ADDRESS BLOCK
PICK UP AND DROP OFF DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET IN AD

DRESS BLOCK
.OTE THAT THE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES WHICH DO
NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES OF THE
BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
5SER DEFINABLE LOGICAL FUNCTIONS
0ICK UP TIME DELAY FOR THE FIRST USER DEFINABLE

LOGICAL FUNCTION
S
S
AND 0 IE NO START
$ROP OFF TIME DELAY FOR THE FIRST USER DEFINABLE
LOGICAL FUNCTION
S
S
AND 0 IE DROPP OFF ONLY BY RESET SIGNAL

3! 6

0 ) # + 5 0
$ 2 / 0

$ROP OFF TIME DELAY FOR THE SECOND USER DEFINABLE

LOGICAL FUNCTION
S
S
AND 0 IE DROP OFF ONLY BY RESET SIGNAL
3ETTINGS FOR EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
)F THE MEASURED VOLTAGE FAILS EG BECAUSE THE VT

PROTECTION MCB HAS TRIPPED THE RELAY CAN STILL BE
OPERATED AS A DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION ! PRE CONDITION
IS THAT THE EMERGENCY PROTECTION HAS BEEN CONFI
GURED UNDER ADDRESS AS %-%2' /# %8)34
REFER TO 3ECTION
4HE PARAMETERS OF THE OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION
ARE SET IN BLOCK 4HE PICK UP VALUE ) ADDRESS
MUST BE SET ABOVE THE MAXIMUM EXPECTED
OVER LOAD CURRENT APPROXIMATELY TIMES 4HE
PICK UP VALUE ) ADDRESS ALLOWS A CURRENT
GRADING 4HE CORRESPONDING DELAY TIMES 4 ) AD
DRESS AND 4 ) ADDRESS ARE SET IN
SUCH A WAY THAT THEY ALLOW THE HIGHEST POSSIBLE DE
GREE OF SELECTIVITY )N A RING NETWORK FOR EXAMPLE
ONE CAN SET UP A DELIBERATE BREAK POINT WITH RAPID
INTERRUPTION TO ALLOW FOR EMERGENCY CASES EG FAULT
IN THE VT SECONDARY CIRCUIT 4HE RESULTANT RADIAL NET
WORKS CAN BE PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CON
VENTIONAL PRACTICE OF GRADING OF DEFINITE TIME OVERCUR
RENT PROTECTION
&OR EARTH FAULTS BOTH THE PICK UP VALUE )% AD
DRESS AND THE DELAY TIME 4 )% ADDRESS
CAN BE SET SEPARATELY )N THIS WAY IT IS OFTEN
POSSIBLE TO ACHIEVE A SEPARATE GRADING WITH SHORTER
TIMES FOR EARTH FAULTS
$URING EMERGENCY OPERATION TELEPROTECTION COM
MUNICATION IS NOT POSSIBLE
)F THE DISTANCE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO OPER

0ICK UP TIME DELAY FOR THE SECOND USER DEFINABLE

LOGICAL FUNCTION
S

S
AND 0 IE NO START
ADDRESS BLOCK
ATE EXCEPTIONALLY FOR A CERTAIN TIME PERIOD EG BE

CAUSE OF MISSING VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ONLY AS DEFI
NITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION ELEMENTS CAN BE BLOCKED BY INPUT OF THE
EXTERNAL SIGNAL VT PROTECTIVE MCB TRIPPED
)F PARTS OF THE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ARE NOT REQUIRED
AT ALL THEN THE CORRESPONDING DELAY TIMES CAN BE SET
AT 0
!DDRESSES AND DETERMINE WHICH STAGES
ARE EFFECTIVE IF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS MANUALLY CLOSED
! PRE REQUISITE IS THAT THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND
FOR THE BREAKER IS REPEATED VIA A BINARY INPUT TO THE
RELAY SO THAT IT IS INFORMED ABOUT MANUAL CLOSING OF
THE BREAKER ).%&&%#4)6% MEANS THAT THE STAGES OP
ERATE ACCORDING TO THE SETTINGS
)T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO CARRY OUT AUTO RECLOSURE IN THE
EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MODE 4HIS HAS
TO BE ENTERED INTO THE DEVICE DURING CONFIGURATION
UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION )N THIS
CASE THE ) STAGE WITH 4 ) IS DECISIVE FOR THE
AUTO RECLOSURE &INAL DISCONNECTION IS CARRIED OUT
VIA ) WITH 4 ) DELAYED ) AND ) SHOULD THEN
BE SET TO THE SAME VALUE 4 ) IS SET UNDELAYED

!DDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE ) STAGE IN
EFFECTIVE ONLY IN CONJUNCTION WITH AUTO RECLOSURE OR
WHETHER IT OPERATES INDEPENDENTLY
.OTE THAT THE SET TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES WHICH DO
NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT OPERATING TIMES
# ' #
3! 6

% - % 2 ' % . # 9
/ 6 % 2 # 5 2 2 % . 4

0 2 / 4
% - % 2 '
/ #
/ .
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS

/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

) ) N

$ELAY FOR ) PHASE CURRENTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) PHASES
)

/VERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE ) FOR PHASE

CURRENTS
).
).
)
) ) N

$ELAY FOR ) PHASE CURRENTS

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) PHASES
)

)
(IGH OVERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE ) FOR

PHASE CURRENTS
).
).
)

)
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
- # , / 3 %
0 (
5 . $ % , ! 9 % $
)
5 . $ % , ! 9 % $
2 ! 2
: / . %
)
7 ) 4 (
)
! , 7 ! 9 3

) %
) ) N
# ' #
! 2
IE ) STAGE BUT WITHOUT DELAY 4 )
).%&&%#4)6% IE PHASE CURRENT STAGES OPERATE AS

PARAMETERIZED
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 %

0HASE OVERCURRENT STAGE WHICH IS EFFECTIVE DURING

MANUAL CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
)
IE ) STAGE BUT WITHOUT DELAY 4 )
!2 FUNCTION OPERATES WITH THE )STAGE

) 7)4( !2 IE ) IS RELEASED ONLY IF !2 IS READY
) !,7!93 IE ) STAGE OPERATES ALWAYS INDE
PENDENT OF THE !2 FUNCTION
/VERCURRENT DETECTION VALUE )% FOR EARTH CURRENTS

).
).

3! 6

$ELAY FOR )% EARTH CURRENT

S
S
AND 0 NO TRIP WITH ) EARTH
) %

) %
- # , / 3 %
5 . $ % , ! 9 % $
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 %

3ETTINGS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
4HE RELAY INCLUDES A THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

FUNCTION REFER TO 3ECTION 4HIS CAN OPERATE ONLY
WHEN IT IS CONFIGURED TO 4(%2-!, /, %8)34 UNDER
ADDRESS DURING CONFIGURATION OF THE DEVICE
FUNCTIONS REFER 3ECTION
#ABLES ARE PARTICULARLY ENDANGERED BY OVERLOADS OF
LONGER DURATION 4HESE OVERLOADS CANNOT AND
SHOULD NOT BE DETECTED BY THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTEC
TION ! BACK UP STAGE OF THE DISTANCE PROTECTION FOR
EXAMPLE MUST BE SET SUFFICIENTLY HIGH SO AS TO ONLY
DETECT SHORT CIRCUITS /NLY SHORT DELAYS ARE PER
MITTED FOR SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION 4HESE SHORT TIME
DELAYS HOWEVER DO NOT PERMIT MEASURES TO UNLOAD
THE OVERLOADED CABLE NOR TO UTILIZE ITS LIMITED OVER
LOAD CAPACITY
4HE PROTECTION RELAY 3! INCLUDES AN OVERLOAD
FUNCTION WITH A THERMAL TRIP CHARACTERISTIC WHICH CAN
BE MATCHED TO THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY OF THE PRO
TECTED CABLE 4HIS FUNCTION IS USUALLY NOT REQUIRED FOR
OVERHEAD LINES AS THE CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY OF
OVERHEAD LINES IS GENERALLY NOT DEFINED
4HE OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION CAN BE SET TO BE IN
OPERATIVE TO INITIATE ALARMS ONLY OR TO INITIATE TRIPPING
INCLUDING ALARM ADDRESS
4HE RATED CURRENT OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS IS USED
AS THE BASE CURRENT FOR THE OVERLOAD MEASUREMENT
4HE SETTING FACTOR K IS DETERMINED BY THE RATIO OF THE
CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE THERMAL CURRENT )MAX TO THE
RATED CURRENT
)
K MAX
).

%ARTH OVERCURRENT TIME STAGE WHICH IS EFFECTIVE DURING

MANUAL CLOSE OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
)% 5.$%,!9%$ IE THE )% STAGE BUT WITHOUT
DELAY
).%&&%#4)6%
EARTH CURRENT STAGE OPERATES AS
PARAMETERIZED EVEN DURING
MANUAL CLOSURE
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE PERMISSIBLE CONTINUOUS CURRENT DEPENDS ON

CROSS SECTION INSULATION MATERIAL TYPE OF CONSTRUC
TION AND METHOD OF INSTALLATION OF THE CABLE ETC )N
GENERAL THE MAGNITUDE OF THE CURRENT CAN BE TAKEN
FROM WIDELY AVAILABLE TABLES OR OTHERWISE IS TO BE
STATED BY THE MANUFACTURER
4HE HEATING UP TIME CONSTANT DEPENDS ON THE
CABLE DATA AND THE CABLE SURROUNDINGS )F THE TIME
CONSTANT IS NOT READILY AVAILABLE IT CAN BE CALCULATED
FROM THE SHORT TERM OVERLOAD CAPACITY OF THE CABLE
&REQUENTLY THE S CURRENT IE THE MAXIMUM PERMIS
SIBLE CURRENT FOR S DURATION IS KNOWN OR CAN BE TAK
EN FROM TABLES 4HE TIME CONSTANT CAN THEN BE CALCU
LATED ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING FORMULA
3ETTING VALUE ;MIN=

PERMISSIBLE S CURRENT
CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE CURRENT
)F THE SHORT TIME OVERLOAD CAPACITY IS STATED FOR A DU

RATION OTHER THAN S THEN THAT SHORT TERM CURRENT IS
INSERTED INTO THE ABOVE FORMULA INSTEAD OF THE S CUR
RENT (OWEVER THE RESULT IS THEN MULTIPLIED WITH THE
STATED DURATION IE IN CASE OF AN S CURRENT

PERMISSIBLE S CURRENT

CONTINUOUSLY PERMISSIBLE CURRENT
)T SHOULD BE NOTED THAT THE RESULT BECOMES MORE IN

ACCURATE THE LONGER THE STATED DURATION OF THE CUR
RENT BECOMES
# ' #
3! 6

4 ( % 2 - ! ,
/ 6 % 2 , / ! $

4 ( % 2 - ! ,
! , ! 2 -
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
0 2 / 4
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CAN BE SET TO
/ ,
/ . , 9
ISSUE !,!2-S /.,9 OR
/ .
BE SWITCHED /. IE TRIP AND ALARMS OR
/ & &
BE SWITCHED /&&

& ! # 4 / 2

# / . 3 4 ! . 4
M I N
3ETTING VALUE OF K FACTOR )MAX).

3ETTING RANGE
TO
4IME CONSTANT
3ETTING RANGE
"Y SETTING A WARNING TEMPERATURE RISE ADDRESS

AN ALARM CAN BE OUTPUT BEFORE THE TRIP TEM
PERATURE RISE IS REACHED SO THAT FOR EXAMPLE BY
PROMPT LOAD SHEDDING TRIPPING MAY BE PREVENTED
! FURTHER CURRENT WARNING STAGE IS AVAILABLE ADDRESS
4HIS CAN BE SET AS A FACTOR OF THE RATED CURRENT
AND SHOULD BE EQUAL OR LESS THAN THE CONTINUOUSLY
ADMISSIBLE CURRENT )T CAN BE USED BESIDES THE TEM
PERATURE WARNING STAGE OR INSTEAD OF THAT 7HEN SET

- ! 8
- % ! .
& 2 / -
! CHOICE CAN BE MADE WHETHER THE TEMPERATURE RISE

WHICH IS DECISIVE FOR THE THRESHOLD STAGES IS THE
MAXIMUM CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE OF THE THREE
CONDUCTORS THE MEAN VALUE OF THE CALCULATED TEM
PERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CONDUCTORS OR THE TEM
PERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE MAXIMUM CURRENT
OF THE THREE CONDUCTORS ADDRESS
7 ! 2 .
4HERMAL WARNING STAGE IN OF TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE

WARNTRIP
3ETTING RANGE
TO
7 ! 2 .
#URRENT WARNING STAGE SET AS A MULTIPLE OF ).

3ETTING RANGE
| ). TO | ).
) ) N

TING WARNTRIP TO THE TEMPERATURE WARNING IS

PRACTICALLY INEFFECTIVE

TO MIN
/ ,
# ' #
# ! , # 5 ,
) - ! 8
#ALCULATION METHOD DECISIVE FOR THERMAL STAGES

MAXIMUM OF THE TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CONDUC
TORS
MEAN VALUE OF THE TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE THREE CON
DUCTORS
TEMPERATURE RISE CALCULATED FROM THE MAXIMUM CON
DUCTOR CURRENT

3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR MEASURED VALUE MONITORING

4HE DIFFERENT MONITORING FUNCTIONS OF THE PROTECTIVE
RELAY ARE DESCRIBED IN 3ECTION 4HEY PARTLY
MONITOR THE RELAY ITSELF PARTLY THE STEADY STATE MEA
SURED VALUES OF THE TRANSFORMER CIRCUITS
4HE SENSITIVITY OF THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING CAN
BE CHANGED IN BLOCK 4HE FACTORY SETTINGS ARE SUF
FICIENT IN MOST CASES )F PARTICULARLY HIGH OPERATIONAL
ASYMMETRIES OF THE CURRENTS ANDOR VOLTAGES ARE EX

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
3 5 0 % 2 6 ) 3 ) / .

3 9 - 5 T H R E S

3 9 - & A C T 5

3 9 - ) T H R E S
) ) N
3 9 - & A C T )

3 5 - ) T H R E S
) ) N
3 5 - & A C T )
ADDRESS BLOCK
PECTED OR IF DURING OPERATION ONE OR MORE MONITOR

ING FUNCTIONS REACT SPORADICALLY THEN SENSITIVITY
SHOULD BE REDUCED
./4% 0REREQUISITE FOR CORRECT FUNCTION OF THE MEA
SURED VALUE MONITORS IS THE PROPER SETTING OF THE GEN
ERAL POWER SYSTEM DATA 3ECTION ESPECIALLY
THE PARAMETERS CONCERNING EARTH CURRENT VOLTAGE
CONNECTIONS AND THE MATCHING FACTORS
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
-EASURED VALUE SUPERVISION
6OLTAGE THRESHOLD PHASE PHASE ABOVE WHICH THE

SYMMETRY MONITORING IS EFFECTIVE REFER &IGURE
6
6
3YMMETRY FACTOR FOR THE VOLTAGE SYMMETRY SLOPE OF

THE SYMMETRY CHARACTERISTIC REFER &IGURE


#URRENT THRESHOLD ABOVE WHICH THE SYMMETRY MONI

TORING IS EFFECTIVE REFER &IGURE
).
).
3YMMETRY FACTOR FOR THE CURRENT SYMMETRY SLOPE OF
THE SYMMETRY CHARACTERISTIC SEE &IGURE


#URRENT THRESHOLD ABOVE WHICH THE SUMMATION MONI
TORING REFER &IGURE REACTS ABSOLUTE CONTENT RE
FERRED TO ). ONLY


2ELATIVE CONTENT RELATED TO THE MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
CURRENT FOR OPERATION OF THE CURRENT SUMMATION MONI
TORING REFER &IGURE

# ' #
3! 6

5 - % ! 3
5
5 - % ! 3
)

) ) N
4HE SETTING VALUES OF THE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR AD

DRESSES AND HAVE TO BE CHOSEN SO THAT IT
PICKS UP RELIABLY IN THE CASE OF SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE
FAILURE CRITERION X 5 BUT ON THE OTHER HAND DOES
NOT PICK UP IN THE CASE OF EARTH FAULTS IN AN EARTHED
NETWORK )% MUST THEREFORE BE SET AT A CORRESPOND
INGLY SENSITIVE LEVEL BELOW THE SMALLEST FAULT CURRENT
IN THE CASE OF EARTH FAULTS 4HE FUNCTION &USE FAIL

& 5 3 %
& ! ) ,
/ .
-INIMUM CURRENT TO DETECT A VOLTAGE FAILURE

).
).
URE MONITOR MUST NOT BE CHOSEN FOR LINES IN

EARTHED NETWORKS IN WHICH EARTH FAULTS WITH SMALL
OR ZERO EARTH CURRENTS CAN OCCUR FOR EXAMPLE
WHEN FEEDER TRANSFORMERS MAY NOT BE EARTHED )N
NON EARTHED NETWORKS THIS FUSE FAILURE MONITOR IS
NOT MEANINGFUL AND WILL BE IGNORED BY THE 3!
4HE FUSE FAILURE MONITOR CAN BE SWITCHED OFF UNDER
ADDRESS
&USE FAILURE MONITOR IS

/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

6OLTAGE THRESHOLD PHASE TO PHASE BELOW WHICH

THE VOLTAGE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATES
6
6
& & -

5 O
& & -
) E

) ) N
# ' #
$ISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5 ABOVE WHICH FUSE FAIL

URE SHOULD BE DETECTED
6
6
%ARTH CURRENT ABOVE WHICH NO FUSE FAILURE IS AS
SUMED
).
).

3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED
STAR POINT ADDRESS BLOCK
4HIS SECTION APPLIES ONLY FOR RELAY MODELS WITH EARTH
FAULT DETECTION MODULE 3!J JJJJJ
JJJ SEE 3ECTION /RDERING DATA AND ONLY WHEN
THESE ARE USED IN NETWORKS WITH ISOLATED OR COMPEN
SATED STAR POINT )N OTHER CASES THIS SECTION CAN BE
PASSED OVER
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS ONLY POSSIBLE IF THE RESPECTIVE
CONFIGURATION PARAMETER 3ECTION ADDRESS
IS SET TO %8)34 )F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH
EARTH FAULT DETECTOR BUT SUPPOSED TO OPERATE IN AN
EARTHED NETWORK CONFIGURATION PARAMETER
%8)34
)3/, %& MUST BE SET TO ./.
4HE FUNCTION EARTH FAULT DETECTION COMPRISES RESID
UAL VOLTAGE DETECTION DETERMINATION OF THE EARTH
FAULTED PHASE AND THE DETERMINATION OF THE EARTH
FAULT DIRECTION 4HE LATTER IS ONLY POSSIBLE WHEN BOTH
EARTH CURRENT AND RESIDUAL VOLTAGE ARE AVAILABLE TO
THE RELAY
4HE RESIDUAL VOLTAGE 5E INITIATES EARTH FAULT DETEC
TION AND IS SET IN ADDRESS 3INCE FOR EARTH FAULTS
IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS THE FULL DIS
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE APPEARS THE SETTING VALUE IS NOT
CRITICAL IT SHOULD LIE BETWEEN 6 AN 6 %ARTH FAULT
IS DETECTED AND ANNUNCIATED ONLY WHEN THE DIS
PLACEMENT VOLTAGE HAS BEEN STAYED FOR THE DURATION
4 %& ADDRESS
&OR PHASE DETERMINATION 5PH ADDRESS IS
THE CRITERION FOR THE EARTH FAULTED PHASE WHEN SI
MULTANEOUSLY THE OTHER TWO PHASE VOLTAGES HAVE EX
CEEDED 5PH ADDRESS !CCORDINGLY 5PH
MUST BE SET LOWER THAN THE MINIMUM OPERATIONAL
PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE 4HIS SETTING IS HOWEVER ALSO
NOT CRITICAL 6 FACTORY SETTING SHOULD ALWAYS BE
ADEQUATE 5PH MUST LIE ABOVE THE MAXIMUM OP
ERATIONAL PHASE EARTH VOLTAGE BUT BELOW THE MINI
MUM OPERATIONAL PHASE PHASE VOLTAGE THEREFORE
FOR EXAMPLE 6 AT 5. 6 4HE IDENTIFICATION OF
THE FAULTY PHASE IS A FURTHER PRECONDITION FOR ANNUNCI
ATION OF AN EARTH FAULT
&OR DETERMINATION OF THE DIRECTION OF THE EARTH FAULT IN
PRINCIPLE THE THRESHOLD CURRENT ADDRESS
SHOULD BE SET AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE TO PREVENT FAULTY
OPERATION DUE TO ASYMMETRICAL CURRENTS IN THE NET
WORK AND THROUGH THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PARTICU
LARLY IN (OLMGREEN CONNECTION $EPENDENT UPON
THE TREATMENT OF THE NETWORK STAR POINT THE MAGNI
TUDE OF THE CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT FOR ISOLATED
NETWORKS OR THE WATTMETRIC RESIDUAL CURRENT FOR

COMPENSATED NETWORKS IS IMPORTANT

)N ISOLATED NETWORKS AN EARTH FAULT IN A CABLE WILL AL
LOW THE TOTAL CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENTS OF THE EN
TIRE ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED NETWORK WITH THE EXCEP
TION OF THE FAULTED CABLE ITSELF TO FLOW THROUGH THE
MEASURING POINT )T IS NORMAL TO USE HALF THE VALUE OF
THIS EARTH FAULT CURRENT AS THE THRESHOLD VALUE
%XAMPLE ! K6 BUS BAR FEEDS SEVEN CABLE CIR
CUITS %ACH CIRCUIT HAS A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SET
! ! 4HE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IS !KM 4HE
CABLES MIGHT BE AS FOLLOWS
#ABLE
#ABLE
#ABLE
#ABLE
#ABLE
#ABLE
#ABLE
4OTAL

KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
7ITH AN EARTH FAULT ON CABLE ! !

! EARTH FAULT CURRENT WILL FLOW THROUGH THE MEASUR
ING POINT SINCE ! FLOWS DIRECT FROM CABLE INTO
THE FAULT 3INCE THAT CABLE IS AMONGST THE LONGEST
THIS IS THE MOST UNFAVOURABLE CASE SMALLEST EARTH
FAULT CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH THE MEASURING POINT /N
THE SECONDARY SIDE FLOWS
! !
4HE RELAY SHOULD BE SET AT APPROXIMATELY HALF THIS VAL
UE EG !
)N COMPENSATED NETWORKS DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA
TION IS MADE MORE DIFFICULT SINCE A MUCH LARGER REAC
TIVE CURRENT OF CAPACITIVE OR INDUCTIVE CHARACTER IS SU
PERIMPOSED ON THE CRITICAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT 4HE
TOTAL EARTH CURRENT AVAILABLE TO THE RELAY CAN THERE
FORE DEPENDENT UPON THE NETWORK CONFIGURATION AND
LOCATION OF THE COMPENSATION COIL ASSUME VERY DIF
FERENT VALUES IN MAGNITUDE AND PHASE ANGLE 4HE
RELAY HOWEVER MUST EVALUATE ONLY THE REAL COMPO
NENT OF THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT THAT IS )% X COS 4HIS
DEMANDS EXTREMELY HIGH ACCURACY PARTICULARLY WITH
REGARD TO PHASE ANGLE ACCURACY OF ALL THE INSTRUMENT
TRANSFORMERS !LSO THE RELAY SHOULD NOT BE SET UN
NECESSARILY SENSITIVE 7HEN USED IN COMPENSATED
NETWORKS THEREFORE RELIABLE DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA
TION IS ONLY EXPECTED WHEN CORE BALANCE WINDOW
# ' #
3! 6
TYPE TRANSFORMERS ARE USED (ERE ALSO USE THE

THUMB RULE SETTING AT HALF THE EXPECTED MEASURED
CURRENT WHEREBY ONLY THE RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CUR
RENT IS APPLICABLE 4HIS RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT IS
PROVIDED PRINCIPALLY BY THE LOSSES IN THE 0ETERSEN
COIL
%XAMPLE 4HE SAME NETWORK AS IN THE PREVIOUS EX
AMPLE IS CONSIDERED TO BE COMPENSATED BY A 0ETER
SEN COIL 4HE COIL IS MATCHED TO THE TOTAL NETWORK 4HE
COMPENSATION CURRENT IS THUS ! 4HE LOSSES
SHOULD BE &OR EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DETERMINA
TION WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ! !
ARE FITTED
3INCE THE RESIDUAL WATTMETRIC CURRENT IS DERIVED PRIN
CIPALLY FROM THE COIL LOSSES IT IS INDEPENDENT OF EARTH
FAULT LOCATION APPROXIMATELY THE SAME
OF ! !
4HIS REAL CURRENT IS SUPERIMPOSED BY A REACTIVE CUR

. / .
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
% ! 2 4 ( % $

! , ! 2 -
. % 4
RENT WHICH CAN AMOUNT TO UP TO ! FOR EARTH FAULTS

NEAR THE 0ETERSEN COIL /N THE SECONDARY SIDE WE
HAVE
! !
!S SETTING VALUE ! IS SELECTED
4HE HIGH REACTIVE CURRENT COMPONENT IN COMPEN
SATED NETWORKS AND THE UNAVOIDABLE AIR GAP OF THE
WINDOW TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS OFTEN MAKE
COMPENSATION OF THE ANGLE ERROR OF THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMER NECESSARY 4HIS IS POSSIBLE THROUGH ADDRESS
ES TO 4HE MAX ANGLE ERROR & OF THE CT
WITH ITS ASSOCIATED CURRENT ) AS WELL AS ANOTHER CT
OPERATING POINT )& ABOVE WHICH THE ANGLE ERROR RE
MAINS PRACTICALLY CONSTANT ARE ENTERED FOR THE AC
TUALLY CONNECTED BURDEN 4HE RELAY THEN APPROXI
MATES WITH ADEQUATE ACCURACY TO THE CHARACTERISTIC
OF THE TRANSFORMER )N ISOLATED NETWORKS THIS ANGLE ER
ROR COMPENSATION IS NOT NECESSARY
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IS
/ . , 9
REQUIRED TO GIVE !,!2- /.,9 NO TRIP
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON AND WILL TRIP
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

5 P H

5 E
5 P H
# ' #
4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE 5E

o | 5 .OTE !DDRESS HAS NO INFLUENCE ON
THIS PICK UP VALUE
6
6
0HASE EARTH VOLTAGE OF A FAULTED PHASE WHICH WILL BE
CERTAINLY UNDERSHOT UNDER EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS
6
6
0HASE EARTH VOLTAGE OF HEALTHY PHASES WHICH WILL
CERTAINLY BE EXEEDED UNDER EARTH FAULT CONDITIONS
6
6

3! 6

# 4
% 2 2 &
# 4
% 2 2 )
# 4
% 2 2 &

% 2 2 )

# 4
!

4HRESHOLD VALUE FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION

&OR ISOLATED NETWORK CAPACITIVE EARTH FAULT CURRENT
&OR COMPENSATED NETWORK OHMIC WATTMETRIC EARTH
FAULT RESIDUAL CURRENT
!
!
) E
% &
3ECONDARY CURRENT FOR MAX ERROR ANGLE OF

CURRENT TRANSFORMER
!
!
,ARGEST SEFTING VALUE
%RROR ANGLE OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER AT )
DEG
DEG
3ECONDARY CURRENT ABOVE WHICH THE ANGLE

ERROR IS PRACTICALLY CONSTANT
!
!
%RROR ANGLE OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER AT )
DEG
DEG
$URATION OF DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE AFTER WHICH EARTH

FAULT IS DETECTED AND ANNUNCIATED THIS DELAY IS ALSO
VALID FOR ANNUNCIATIONS WHEN THE EARTH FAULT CONDI
TIONS CHANGE EG ALTERATION OF DIRECTION
S
S
# ' #
3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH PROTECTION FOR HIGH RE
SISTANCE EARTH FAULTS IN AN EARTHED NETWORK TYPE
3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE 3ECTION /RDER
ING DATA THE FOLLOWING POSSIBILITIES ARE AVAILABLE FOR
THE DETECTION OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULTS
DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
WITH NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE
DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON AND NON DIREC
TIONAL BACK UP STAGE
NON DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH IN
VERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC
)N 3! ONE OF THESE THREE POSSIBILITIES CAN BE
PROGRAMMED OR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE MADE
INEFFECTIVE SEE 3ECTION
$IRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFI
NITE TIME ADDRESS BLOCK
&OR DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION WITH
NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE THE PARAMETERS ARE

% &
4HE DIRECTIONAL DEPENDENT TRIPPING TIME 4 $)2%#4

ADDRESS IS INDEPENDENT OF DIRECTIONAL COM
PARISON AND RECEIVED SIGNAL 4HE DIRECTION SET UNDER
ADDRESS IS DECISIVE FOR THE DIRECTIONAL STAGE
.ORMALLY THE LINE DIRECTION IS SET AS &/27!2$3 DI
RECTION
4HE NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE 4 ./. $)2
ADDRESS ALSO OPERATES WHEN NO DIRECTIONAL
DETERMINATION IS POSSIBLE BECAUSE THE MEASURED
VOLTAGE IS TOO SMALL OR IF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PRO
TECTIVE MCB HAS TRIPPED OUT )T THUS ALSO PERFORMS THE
EMERGENCY FUNCTION FOR EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AS WELL
AS A BACK UP STAGE
$ 4
%ARTH FAULT DEFINITE TIME PROTECTION IS

/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

) E
) ) N

5 E

5E 5, 5, 5, o
$ ) 2 % #
/ .

SET IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE PICK UP VALUE )E AD

DRESS SHOULD BE SET SOMEWHAT BELOW THE MINI
MUM EXPECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT 4HE SET VALUE OF
THE EARTH VOLTAGE 5E ADDRESS SHALL NOT BE
EXCEEDED BY OPERATIONAL ASYMMETRY OF THE VOLTAGES
5E MEANS THE VOLTAGE AT THE INPUT TO THE DEVICE WITH
OPEN DELTA 64 IF THIS INPUT IS NOT USED THE RELAY CAL
CULATES
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
%ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME PROTECTION WITH
NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
$ ) 2 % # . / .
ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4
S
# ' #
$ ) 2 % # 4
0ICK UP VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION

X )E FOR TRANSMIT SIGNAL
).
).
-INIMUM VOLTAGE FOR DIRECTIONAL DISCRIMINATION
6
6
$ELAY TIME FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP

S
S

3! 6
& / 2 7 ! 2 $ 3
$IRECTION FOR DIRECTIONAL STAGE

CAN BE SET TO TRIP
&/27!2$3
IN LINE DIRECTION
2 % 6 % 2 3 %
2%6%23%
IN BUSBAR DIRECTION
. / .
./. $)2%#4)/.!,
IN EITHER DIRECTION

$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / .
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

. / .
$ ) 2
" , / # +

$ELAY TIME FOR NON DIRECTIONAL BACK UP STAGE

S
S
4IME DURING WHICH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AF
TER DISTANCE PROTECTION HAS RESET WHEN A SECOND EXTER
NAL PROTECTION RELAY WITH !2 IS PRESENT THIS TIME MUST BE
LONGER THAN A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
3MALLEST SETTING
S
S

)F THE EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION IS EXTENDED BY
DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON THE PARAMETERS ARE SET IN
ADDRESS BLOCK IN ADDITION TO THOSE OF ADDRESS
BLOCK 3ECTION
4HE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON CAN BE SWITCH /. AND
/&& UNDER ADDRESS 4HE FUNCTIONS ACCORDING
TO ADDRESS BLOCK 3ECTION OPERATE INDE
PENDENTLY "UT WHEN THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS
SWITCHED OFF UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION
THE DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS
INEFFECTIVE TOO
4RANSMISSION SIGNAL AND TRIP WILL BE DELAYED BY THE
DELAY TIME TIME 4 $%,!9 ADDRESS 4HIS AL
LOWS COMPENSATION FOR DIFFERENT REACTION TIMES OF THE
DEVICES AT THE TWO LINE ENDS
ADDRESS BLOCK
SIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ REFER ALSO 3EC

TION )F SET TO 0 NO BLOCKING TAKES PLACE FOR
THIS CASE
&OR LINES WITH ONE WEAK INFEED OR NON INFEED END
THE ECHO FUNCTION IS REASONABLE 3O THE STRONG FEED
ING LINE END CAN BE RELEASED EVEN WHEN THE WEAK
INFEED END DOES NOT PICK UP 4HE ECHO FUNCTION CAN
BE SET EFFECTIVE OR NOT UNDER ADDRESS
4HE ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, ADDRESS
MUST BE SET TO SUCH A LONG DURATION THAT DIFFERING
REACTION TIMES OF THE FAULT DETECTORS OF THE PROTECTIVE
RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS CANNOT RESULT IN A FALSE ECHO
SIGNAL IN THE CASE OF EXTERNAL FAULTS
4HE TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME ADDRESS MUST BE

LONGER THAN THE TRANSMISSION TIME IN ADDITION THE
DURATION OF HEAVY TRANSIENT REACTIONS AT THE INCEPTION
AND INTERRUPTION OF SHORT CIRCUITS HAS TO BE TAKEN INTO
CONSIDERATION
4HE ECHO IMPULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 ADDRESS

CAN BE ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RE
QUIREMENTS OF THE NETWORK )T HAS TO BE LONG ENOUGH
SO THAT EVEN WITH DIFFERING OPERATING TIMES OF THE PRO
TECTIVE DEVICES AT BOTH LINE ENDS AND OF THE TRANSMIS
SION DEVICES RECOGNITION OF THE RECEIVE SIGNAL IS
GUARANTEED
4HE TIME 4 7!)4 ADDRESS IS A WAITING TIME

FOR INITIATION OF TRANSIENT BLOCKING 7HEN THE EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION HAS DETECTED A FAULT THE RECEPTION
CIRCUIT RELEASE WILL BE BLOCKED IF NO RECEPTION SIGNAL
HAS BEEN RECEIVED WITHIN THIS TIME THEREAFTER A RE
CEPTION SIGNAL CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE AFTER THE TRAN
4O AVOID FALSE ECHO SIGNALS AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE

LINE A BLOCKING TIME FOR ECHO GENERATION 4 %#(/
",/ ADDRESS IS SET 4HIS SHOULD INCLUDE THE
ECHO DELAY TIME 4 %#(/ $%, PLUS THE ECHO IM
PULSE DURATION 4 %#(/ )-0 PLUS TWICE THE TRANS
MISSION TIME PLUS A SAFETY MARGIN

# ' #
3! 6

% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
$ ) 2 % # # / - 0 ! 2 ) 3 / .

% &
# / - 0 ! 2
/ .
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON FOR EARTH FAULT DEFINITE TIME

PROTECTION IS
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF

$ELAY TIME FOR TRANSMISSION AND TRIP ON RECEPTION FOR

DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
S
S
AND 0 NO TRANSMISSION NO TRIP
$ % , ! 9
4 2 ! . 3 " , /
7 ! ) 4

S

0
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
%ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON
7AITING TIME BEFORE TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING

RECEPTION SIGNAL
S
S
OR 0 IE NO TRANSIENT BLOCKING WITH MISSING RECEPTION

% &
% # ( /
/ .
/&& SWITCHED OFF

% # ( /
$ % ,
%CHO DELAY TIME WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

S
S
AND 0 NO ECHO SIGNAL WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED
% # ( /
) - 0
$URATION OF ECHO IMPULSE

S
S
% # ( /
" , /
%CHO BLOCKING TIME

S
S

4
S

%CHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH

FAULT PROTECTION IS
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &

4RANSIENT BLOCKING TIME AFTER EXTERNAL FAULT

S
S
# ' #

3! 6
.ON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION INVERSE TIME

)NSTEAD OF THE ABOVE MENTIONED FUNCTIONS NON DI
RECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CAN BE SET ! CHOICE
OF THREE CHARACTERISTICS IS GIVEN NORMAL INVERSE VERY
INVERSE AND EXTREME INVERSE )E SHALL BE SET BELOW
THE MINIMUM EXPECTED EARTH FAULT CURRENT AT OR
LESS SINCE ACCORDING TO )%# THE PROTECTION
SHALL NOT OPERATE FOR CURRENTS UP TO TIMES THE
SETTING VALUE AND THE CHARACTERISTICS ARE DEFINED
ONLY FROM TIMES THE SETTING VALUE ONWARDS )N ANY
EVENT 3! ALREADY TRIPS FOR CURRENTS ABOVE AP
PROXIMATELY TIMES THE SETTING VALUE IN ACCOR

. / .
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / . ! ,

% &
) 4
/ .
% &
. / 2 - ! ,
) . 6 % 2 3 %

) ) N
) E
" , / # +

) . 6 % 2 3
) E

# ( ! 2 ! #
) . 6 % 2 3 %
% 8 4 2 % - % , 9

)N SETTING THE TIME 4 )E ADDRESS ONE MUST

CONSIDER THAT THE SETTING VALUE CORRESPONDS TO
TIMES THE TIME FACTOR OF THE TRIPPING TIME FORMULA EG
4 )E S FOR NORMAL INVERSE 4- THUS
S TRIPPING TIME AT TIMES THE SET
TTRIP
VALUE )E
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
%ARTH FAULT NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION
.ON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

IS
/&& SWITCHED OFF

DANCE WITH THE FORMULAE VALID FOR THE CHARACTERISTICS

&IGURE 3ECTION
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
6 % 2 9
ADDRESS BLOCK
4RIP TIME CHARACTERISTIC FOR THE NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE

TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ACCORDING
)%# OR "3
./2-!, ).6%23%
TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE !
6%29 ).6%23%
TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE "
%842%-%,9 ).6%23E
TIME CHARACTERISTIC TYPE #
0ICK UP VALUE FOR EARTH CURRENT DETECTION

).
).
$ELAY TIME CORRESPONDS X 4 S

S
AND 0 NO TRIP BY )E
4IME DURING WHICH EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED AFTER

DISTANCE PROTECTION HAS RESET WHEN A SECOND EXTERNAL
PROTECTION RELAY WITH !2 IS PRESENT THIS TIME MUST BE
LONGER THAN A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE
S
S
# ' #
3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR AUTO RECLOSURE
ADDRESS BLOCK
./4% 4HIS SECTION IS VALID ONLY FOR MODELS WITH INTE

GRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION 3!J JJJJJ
JJ"#&'J /THERWISE IT CAN BE PASSED OVER !U
TO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS EFFECTIVE ONLY IF CONFIGURED AS
%8)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER 3ECTION
7HEN NO AUTO RECLOSURE IS TO BE CARRIED OUT ON THE
FEEDER WHICH IS PROTECTED BY THE DISTANCE PROTECTION
RELAY EG CABLES TRANSFORMERS MOTORS ETC THEN
THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION MUST BE CONFIGURED AS
./. %8)34 IN ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION
4HE !2 FUNCTION IS THEN NOT EFFECTIVE AT ALL IE
3! DOES NOT PROCESS THE !2 FUNCTION .O CORRE
SPONDING ANNUNCIATIONS ARE GIVEN BINARY INPUTS FOR
AUTO RECLOSURE ARE IGNORED !LL PARAMETERS IN BLOCK
ARE IRRELEVANT AND UNAVAILABLE 4RIPPING OCCURS
THREE POLE WITH ALL KINDS OF FAULT
)F THE RELAY IS REQUIRED TO OPERATE WITH AN EXTERNAL !2
DEVICE THE RELEVANT BINARY INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE TO
BE USED 0ARTICULARLY THE CORRESPONDING CONTROL SIG
NALS MUST BE CONNECTED TO 3! EG RELEASE OF
2!2 OR $!2 STAGES AND SINGLETHREE POLE TRIPPING
IF NECESSARY THE FAULT DETECTION AND TRIP SIGNAL OUT
PUTS OF 3! MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE EXTERNAL
!2 DEVICE 4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION MUST BE SET AS
./. %8)34 3ECTION ADDRESS IN THIS
CASE
7ITH THE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION GENERALLY DISTINCTION IS
MADE BETWEEN THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IDENTIFIED IN THE
FOLLOWING WITH 2!2 RAPID AUTO RECLOSURE AND FUR
THER !2 CYCLES WITH MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE
IDENTIFIED IN THE FOLLOWING WITH $!2 DELAYED AUTO
RECLOSURE 4HE ABOVE IDENTIFICATIONS ARE REGARDLESS
WHETHER THE DEAD TIMES ARE REALLY RAPID OR
DELAYED 3ETTING ADDRESS TO ARE COM
MON FOR ALL TYPES OF AUTO RECLOSURE
-OST OF THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF
3! HAVE SEVERAL STAGES WHICH OPERATE INDE
PENDENT OF EACH OTHER EG FOR THE DISTANCE PROTEC
TION STAGES TIME DELAY AND DIRECTION CAN BE SELECTED
FOR EACH STAGE INDIVIDUALLY AND INDEPENDENTLY
4HEREFORE RECLOSURE IS NORMALLY BLOCKED IF A PROTEC
TION TRIPS A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION !CCORDINGLY AD
DRESS IS PRESET TO !2 ",/ 2%6 9%3
7HEN SWITCHING MANUALLY ON A DEAD FAULT IT IS NOR
MALLY DESIRED THAT THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION TRIPS
INSTANTANEOUSLY AND THE !2 FUNCTION IS BLOCKED
4HUS ADDRESS SHOULD REMAIN IN POSITION -#
",/#+ 9%3
# ' #
4HE RECLAIM TIME 4 2%#,!)- ADDRESS IS THE

TIME PERIOD AFTER WHICH THE NETWORK FAULT IS SUP
POSED TO BE TERMINATED AFTER A SUCCESSFUL AUTO RE
CLOSE CYCLE ! RENEWED TRIP OF ANY PROTECTION FUNC
TION WITHIN THIS TIME INCREMENTS THE !2 COUNTER
WHEN MULTI SHOT !2 IS USED SO THAT THE NEXT !2
CYCLE STARTS IF NO FURTHER !2 IS ALLOWED THE LAST !2 IS
TREATED AS UNSUCCESSFUL
4HE LOCK OUT TIME 4 ,/#+ ADDRESS IS THE
TIME PERIOD DURING WHICH AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL AU
TO RECLOSURE FURTHER RECLOSURES BY 3! ARE
BLOCKED )F THE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND IS LED VIA THE
3! THEN THIS WILL BE BLOCKED ALSO 4HIS TIME
MUST BE LONGER THAN THE RENEWED READINESS FOR OPER
ATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER UNLESS THE #" IS SUPER
VISED IN THE RELAY SEE BELOW ADDRESS )F THIS
TIME IS SET TO 0 BREAKER CLOSE COMMANDS ARE
LOCKED )N THIS CASE SWITCHING CAN BE UNLOCKED ONLY
WHEN THE BINARY INPUT !2 2ESET &.O IS
ENERGIZED
4HE SET TIME FOR 4 ",/#+ -# ADDRESS MUST
COVER THE TIME FOR SAFE CLOSING AND OPENING OF THE CIR
CUIT BREAKER S TO S )F ANY OF THE PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS OF 3! DETECTS A FAULT WITHIN THIS TIME
THREE POLE DEFINITIVE TRIP COMMAND IS ISSUED AND RE
CLOSURE IS BLOCKED PROVIDED -# ",/#+ ADDRESS
SEE ABOVE IS SWITCHED /.
4HE DURATION OF THE CLOSING COMMAND HAS ALREADY
BEEN SET WHEN SETTING THE GENERAL PARAMETERS OF THE
DEVICE ADDRESS 3ECTION
! PREREQUISITE FOR INITIATION OF THE !2 FUNCTION IS THAT
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS READY FOR AT LEAST ONE TRIP CLOSE
CYCLE WHEN ANY SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTION
TRIPS 4HIS INFORMATION HAS TO BE GIVEN TO THE RELAY VIA
THE BINARY INPUT #" READY &.O )N CASE
SUCH INFORMATION IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE #" CIRCUIT
INTERROGATION OF #" READY CAN BE SUPPRESSED
BY SETTING THE PARAMETER #" 42)0 ./ IE #"
INTERROGATION ST TRIP ADDRESS OTHERWISE RE
CLOSURE WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE
!DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO INTERROGATE READINESS OF
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE EACH FURTHER RECLOSE COM
MAND OR BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE COMMAND 3ET
TING IS MADE IN ADDRESS

3! 6
#" #,/3% #" .%6%2 INTERROGATION IS NOT

MADE OR ONLY AT THE MOMENT OF THE
FIRST TRIP COMMAND AS PARAMETERIZED
UNDER ADDRESS
#" #,/3% #" 7)4( %!#( !2 INTERROGATION IS
MADE BEFORE EACH RECLOSE COM
MAND
#" #,/3% #" 7)4( ND !2 INTERROGATION IS
MADE BEFORE EVERY OTHER RECLOSE
COMMAND IE BEFORE THE ND TH
ETC EVERY TRIP CLOSE CYCLE IS VALID
REGARDLESS WHETHER IT IS 2!2 OR $!2

! 5 4 /
2 % # , / 3 %

! 2
& 5 . # 4 ) / .
& 5 . # 4
/ .
&INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES FOR WHICH RECLOSE

CYCLES SYNCHRONISM SHALL BE CHECKED BY THE SYN
CHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION )N THE CASES
WHICH ARE PARAMETERIZED IN THIS ADDRESS RECLOSURE
IS BLOCKED AS LONG AS THE CONDITIONS AS SET FOR THE
SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 3ECTION ARE NOT FUL
FILLED
"EGINNING OF BLOCK
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS

/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/&& SWITCHED OFF
9 % 3
!2 WILL BE BLOCKED WHEN A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS

TRIPPED FOR ALL SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS WHICH
CAN OPERATE DIRECTIONAL
. /
NORMAL SETTING 9%3

! 2

- #
" , /
2 % 6
" , / # +
9 % 3

2 % # , ! ) -
, / # +

"LOCKING OF RECLOSING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE OF THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER
NORMAL SETTING 9%3
. /

)N ORDER TO MONITOR THE REGENERATION TIME OF THE CIR

CUIT BREAKER A SPECIAL CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION
TIME 4 #" 3506 CAN BE SET UNDER ADDRESS
4HIS TIME SHOULD BE SET SLIGHTLY ABOVE THE REGENERA
TION TIME OF THE BREAKER AFTER A TRIP CLOSE CYCLE )F THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT YET READY AFTER THIS TIME RECLO
SURE IS SUPPRESSED
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER SUCCESSFUL !2 CYCLE

S
S
,OCK OUT TIME AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL !2 ANY CLOSE COM

MAND IS BLOCKED
S
S
AND 0 LOCKED UNTIL !2 2ESET VIA BINARY INPUT
# ' #
3! 6

" , / # +
- #

# "
4 2 ) 0
2ECLAIM TIME AFTER MANUAL CLOSING OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

S

S
#" READY INTERROGATION AT THE FIRST TRIP COMMAND
9 % 3
9%3
. /
ONLY IF THERE IS NO POSSIBILITY TO INTERROGATE #"

./
READINESS

# "
# , / 3 %
# "
. % 6 % 2
# "
7 ) 4 (
% ! # (
# "
7 ) 4 (
N D

! 2
3 5 0 6

3 9 .
" % & / 2 %
/ . , 9
# "
! 2
2 % 1 5 3 4
0 / , %
" % & / 2 %
" % & / 2 %
N D
! 2
$ ! 2
$ ! 2
. % 6 % 2
&OR 2!2 FIRST AUTO RECLOSE CYCLE SEVERAL PRO

GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS THREE POLE
SINGLE POLE OR SINGLE AND THREE POLE
)F THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS USED FOR IDENTIFICA
TION OF THE FAULTY LINE THEN ADDRESS MUST BE
CHANGED ACCORDINGLY OTHERWISE IT REMAINS IN POSI
TION 5 02/' ).%&&%#4)6% 4HIS FEATURE IS EX
PLAINED IN DETAIL IN SECTION )T MUST BE ENSURED
THAT ONLY ONE END OF THE LINE MUST BE PARAMETERIZED
5 02/' 0/,% 7)4( 5 IE SINGLE POLE
AUTO RECLOSURE WITH 5 INTERROGATION 4HE OTHER
END IS SET 5 02/' 0/,% 7/ 5 IE SING
# ' #
NORMAL SETTING
#" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE RECLOSING

.%6%2
NO #" READY INTERROGATION BE
FORE RECLOSING
7)4( %!#( !2
#" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
EACH RECLOSING
7)4( %!#( ND !2 #" READY INTERROGATION BEFORE
ND TH TH ETC RECLOSING
2!2 OR $!2
#" SUPERVISION TIME WITHIN WHICH #" MUST BE READY

S
S
2EQUEST FOR SYNCHRONISM OR VOLTAGE CHECK INTERNAL OR

EXTERNAL IS MADE
BEFORE EVERY RECLOSE AFTER THREE POLE TRIPPING
ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2
ONLY BEFORE RECLOSE DURING $!2 FROM THE ND
$!2 SHOT ON
NO REQUEST FOR SYNCHRO CHECK
LE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE WITHOUT 5 INTERROGATION )F

ONLY THE IMMEDIATE RECLOSURE OF THE HEALTHY LINES
SHOULD BE USED BOTH LINE ENDS CAN BE SET TO 5
02/' 0/,% 7/ 5 !DDRESS SEE BE
LOW MUST BE OBSERVED FOR IMMEDIATE RECLOSURE OF
THE UNFAULTED LINES TOO
7HEN SETTING THE ACTION TIME 2!2 4 !#4 ADDRESS
IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT THIS TIME IS AT LEAST AS
LONG AS THE COMMAND TIME OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY IN
CLUDING ANY POSSIBLE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION TIMES BUT
SMALLER THAN THE DELAY 4 OF THE SECOND DISTANCE
ZONE USUALLY S

3! 6
7ITH SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE THE DEAD TIME

2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS MUST BE LONG ENOUGH
TO ENSURE THAT THE FAULT ARC IS EXTINGUISHED AND THE AIR
SURROUNDING THE ARC IS DE IONIZED SO THAT AUTO RE
CLOSURE CAN BE SUCCESSFUL "ECAUSE OF THE DIS
CHARGE AND RE CHARGE OF THE CONDUCTOR CAPACI
TANCES THIS TIME INCREASES WITH THE LENGTH OF THE LINE
#ONVENTIONAL VALUES LIE BETWEEN S AND S
!DDRESS 2!2 40/, IS ONLY RELEVANT WHEN
THE 5 PROCESSING FEATURE IS USED TO DISCRIMINATE THE
UNFAULTY LINES DURING SINGLE POLE RECLOSURE )N THESE
CASES ADDRESS DETERMINES THE DEAD TIME
WHICH IS VALID AFTER THE LINE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED BY THE
5 PROCESSING FEATURE AS THE UNFAULTED LINE )T CAN
THEREFORE BE VERY SHORT S IS SUFFICIENT 4HIS IM
MEDIATE RECLOSURE IS INDEPENDENT ON WHETHER AD
DRESS HAS BEEN SET TO 5 02/# 0/,%
7)4( 5 OR 5 02/# 0/,% 7/ 5 .EVER
THELESS IT MUST BE OBSERVED THAT A SLIGHTLY HIGHER
SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME ADDRESS MUST BE SET
AT THE LINE END WITH 5 INTERROGATION 5 02/#
0/,% 7)4( 5 IT SHOULD BE HIGHER THAN THE
DEAD TIME OF THE LINE END WITHOUT 5 INTERROGATION
PLUS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING TIME PLUS APPROXI
MATELY TO MS
7ITH THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE ADDRESS
THE STABILITY OF THE NETWORK IS THE MOST IMPORTANT CON
SIDERATION 3INCE THE DISCONNECTED LINE CAN NO LONG
ER PRODUCE ANY SYNCHRONIZING POWER ONLY A SHORT
DEAD TIME IS PERMITTED IN MOST CASES #ONVENTIONAL
VALUES LIE BETWEEN S AND S )F THE DEVICE IS

4 ( 2 % %
3 ) . ' , %
2 ! 2
0 2 / '
0 / , %
0 / , %
3 ) . ' , % 4 ( 2 % %

5
0 / ,
0 2 / '
) . % & & % # 4 ) 6 %

0 / , %
7 ) 4 (
0 / , %
7 /
5
5
EQUIPPED WITH THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION A LONG

ER TIME CAN OFTEN BE TOLERATED
4HE POSSIBILITIES FOR THE TREATMENT OF MULTIPLE AND
EVOLVING FAULTS HAVE BEEN DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IN 3EC
TION 4HE RECOGNITION OF AN EVOLVING FAULT CAN
BE MADE DEPENDENT UPON A TRIPPING COMMAND OR
UPON FAULT DETECTION DURING THE DEAD TIME ADDRESS
4HE REACTION TO EVOLVING FAULTS IS SET IN AD
DRESS BLOCKING IN THE CASE OF AN EVOLVING FAULT
EITHER OCCURS !,7!93 IE WITH EACH EVOLVING FAULT
OR .%6%2 AT ALL OR BLOCKING OCCURS ONLY AFTER THE FAULT
IS DETECTED AFTER THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4$)3#2)WHICH HAS TO BE SET IN ADDRESS "LOCKING IN
THESE CASES OCCURS EVEN WHEN THREE POLE AUTO
RECLOSURE IS PERMITTED
!LSO FOR THE TREATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS AND FOR THE
DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)- THE STABILITY OF THE
NETWORK IS OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE )N ADDITION THE
DYNAMIC BURDEN OF THE GENERATORS MUST BE TAKEN
INTO ACCOUNT IN THE CASE OF FAULTS CLOSE TO A POWER
STATION &OR THE DISCRIMINATION TIME 4 $)3#2)- AD
DRESS IT IS ONLY MEANINGFUL TO CHOSE A VALUE
WHICH IS SMALLER THAN THE DEAD TIME FOR SINGLE POLE
!2 2!2 4 0/, ADDRESS
&INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES WHETHER THE PRO
TECTION RELAY SHOULD ISSUE A THREE POLE TRIP WHEN
DURING THE DEAD TIME OF A SINGLE POLE AUTO RECLOSE
CYCLE RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED EG BECAUSE OF DETEC
TION OF AN EVOLVING FAULT
!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2

FOR EACH TYPE OF FAULT
4(2%% 0/,%
THREE POLE AUTO RECLOSURE
3).',% 0/,%
SINGLE POLE !2
FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS NO RECLOSURE
TAKES PLACE !2 BLOCKED
3).',%
FOR SINGLE PHASE FAULTS SINGLE POLE
!2 FOR MULTI PHASE FAULTS THREE
4(2%% 0/,E
POLE !2
5SE OF THE 5 PROCESSING FOR DISCRIMINATION OF THE

FAULTED LINE
).%&&%#4)6%
5 PROCESSING IS INEFFECTIVE
0/,% 7)4( 5
5 PROCESSING WITH 5 INTERROGA

TION
0/,% 7/ 5
5 PROCESSING WITHOUT 5 INTERRO

GATION
# ' #
3! 6

2 ! 2
0 / ,
$EAD TIME FOR FIRST THREE POLE 2!2 CYCLE

S
S
2 ! 2
0 / ,
$EAD TIME FOR FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2 SINGLE POLE

S
S
2 ! 2
4 0 / ,

! # 4

% 6 & 2 % # / '
7 ) 4 (
& ! 5 , 4
7 ) 4 (
4 2 ) 0

!CTION TIME FOR 2!2 FIRST !2 SHOT IF TRIP SIGNAL

IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
S
S
AND 0
2 ! 2
$ % 4 % #
# / - -
% 6 & " , / # +
! , 7 ! 9 3
$EAD TIME FOR FIRST !2 CYCLE 2!2 SINGLE POLE WHEN

THE LINE HAS BEEN IDENTIFIED AS UNFAULTED BY THE 5 PRO
CESSING FEATURE
S
S
2ECOGNITION OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH SINGLE POLE
!2
7)4( &!5,4 $%4%#TION
EACH FAULT DETECTION DURING

SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME IS
RECOGNIZED AS AN EVOLVING
FAULT
7)4( 42)0 #/--AND
FAULTS DURING SINGLE POLE

DEAD TIME ARE RECOGNIZED
AS EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WHEN
THE RELAY TRIPS
4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH POLE !2

EACH EVOLVING FAULT RESULTS IN FINAL THREE POLE TRIP
RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
NO BLOCKING OF RECLOSURE IN THE CASE OF EVOLVING
FAULTS A CHANGE FROM SINGLE POLE !2 TO THREE
POLE !2 OCCURS WHEN PERMITTED
. % 6 % 2
4
BEFORE EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2)- A CHANGE TO THREE

POLE !2 WHEN PERMITTED OCCURS
AFTER EXPIRY OF 4 $)3#2)- RECLOSURE IS BLOCKED
$ ) 3 # 2

$ ) 3 # 2 ) -
! 2
9 % 3
. /
# ' #
4 2 ) 0
0
$ISCRIMINATION TIME FOR EVOLVING FAULTS ONLY WITH SING

LE POLE !2
S
S
4HREE POLE TRIP IS GIVEN WHEN THE !2 FUNCTION IS
BLOCKED DURING A SINGLE POLE DEAD TIME CYCLE
9%3
OR
./

3! 6
&OR $!2 FURTHER AUTO RECLOSE CYCLES SEVERAL PRO

GRAMS ARE POSSIBLE ADDRESS $!2 CAN BE EX
CLUDED $!2 02/' ./ $!2 $!2 CAN BE PER
MITTED ALSO IF NO 2!2 HAS BEEN PRECEDED $!2
02/' $!2 7)4(/54 2!2 $!2 CAN BE PER
MITTED ONLY AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 $!2 02/'
$!2 !&4%2 2!2 $!2 IS ALWAYS THREE POLE
4HE NUMBER OF $!2S CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY AFTER SING

LE POLE 2!2 ADDRESS AND AFTER THREE POLE
2!2 ADDRESS .EVERTHELESS TRIP OCCURS AL
WAYS THREE POLE
-ULTIPLE AUTO RECLOSURE WITH LONGER THREE POLE

DEAD TIMES ARE ONLY PERMITTED IN NETWORKS IN WHICH
NO STABILITY PROBLEMS ARE TO BE EXPECTED FOR EXAM
PLE DUE TO A HIGH DEGREE OF MESHING OR IN RADIAL
NETWORKS OR IF SYNCHRO CHECK IS USED REFER TO 3EC
TION
$IFFERENT DEAD TIMES CAN BE SET FOR THE FIRST SECOND

AND THIRD TRIP CLOSE CYCLE 4HE DEAD TIME FOR THE FIRST
CYCLE ADDRESS IS ONLY VALID IF THE $!2 CYCLE IS
REALLY THE FIRST CYCLE IE 2!2 IS SUPPRESSED &OR THE
SECOND ADDRESS AND THIRD ADDRESS
CYCLE A 2!2 COUNTS ONLY IF IT HAS OCCURRED &URTHER
CYCLES ARE TREATED LIKE THE THIRD CYCLE

. /
$ ! 2
0 2 / '
$ ! 2
$ ! 2
7 ) 4 ( / 5 4
$ ! 2
! & 4 % 2
2 ! 2
2 ! 2

$ ! 2
. O 0 (

$ ! 2
. O 0 (

$ ! 2
$ ! 2
4 0 / ,
$ ! 2
4 0 / ,
$ ! 2
4 0 / ,

! # 4
&OR $!2 A SEPARATE ACTION TIME $!2 4 !#4 CAN BE

SET ADDRESS
!UTO RECLOSE PROGRAM FOR $!2 CYCLES

./ $!2
NO DELAYED !2
$!2 7)4(/54 2!2
$!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ALSO

WHEN NO 2!2 HAS PRECEDED
$!2 !&4%2 2!2
$!2 WILL BE CARRIED OUT ONLY

AFTER AN UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2
CYCLE
.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER SINGLE POLE

2!2 THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER


.UMBER OF PERMISSIBLE $!2 CYCLES AFTER THREE POLE
2!2 THE 2!2 IS NOT INCLUDED IN THIS NUMBER


!CTION TIME FOR $!2 FURTHER !2 SHOTS IF TRIP SIGNAL
IS GIVEN AFTER THIS TIME !2 IS BLOCKED
S
S
AND 0
$EAD TIME FOR THE FIRST !2 CYCLE IF IT IS A $!2 CYCLE
S
S
$EAD TIME FOR THE SECOND !2 CYCLE

S
S
$EAD TIME FOR FURTHER !2 CYCLES

S
S
# ' #
3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK

./4% 4HIS SECTION IS VALID ONLY FOR MODELS WITH INTE
GRATED SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION 3!J
JJJJJ JJ"#%&'J AND WHEN THIS FUNCTION IS
CONFIGURED AS %8)34 UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO
3ECTION
7HEN SETTING THE GENERAL POWER SYSTEM DATA 3EC
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH VOLT
AGES ARE CONNECTED TO THE RELAY TO WHICH INPUTS 4HIS
CONCERNS THE PARAMETERS
5. 3%#/.$ RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF
THE FEEDER VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS PHASE TO PHASE IN 6 IT
MUST BE EQUAL TO THE RATED
SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF THE
BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS
5X #/..%#4 CONNECTION OF THE ADDITIONAL
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUT OF
THE DEVICE MUST BE 5
42!.3&/2-
5 #/..%#4 TYPE OF VOLTAGE WHICH IS CON
NECTED TO THE DEVICE FROM THE
ERS
5 5 !.', PHASE ANGLE DISPLACEMENT
BETWEEN THE VOLTAGES OF THE
ERS AND THE FEEDER VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS
AND IF ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING SHALL BE ALLOWED
4 #" #,/3% THE CLOSING TIME OF THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER
$IFFERENT INTERROGATION CONDITIONS CAN BE PARAMETER
IZED FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE ON ONE HAND AND FOR
MANUAL CLOSURE ON THE OTHER HAND

# ( % # +
3 9 . # ( 2 / . ) 3 -
# ' #
ADDRESS BLOCK
4HE GENERAL FUNCTIONS AND LIMIT VALUES FOR CLOSURE ARE

SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO AND !DDI
TIONALLY ADDRESSES TO ARE RELEVANT FOR AU
TOMATIC RECLOSURE ADDRESSES TO ARE RELE
VANT FOR MANUAL CLOSURE 'ENERALLY A CLOSURE COM
MAND IS NOT RELEASED AS LONG AS A CURRENT KEEPS
FLOWING ) ).
4HE COMPLETE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNC
TION IS SWITCHED /&& OR /. UNDER ADDRESS
7ARNING
)F SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED
OFF ADDRESS EACH MANUAL OR AUTOMAT
IC CLOSURE IS CARRIED OUT WITHOUT SYNCHRO
NISM CHECK
4HE VOLTAGE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE

GARDED SAFELY AS DEAD IS SET UNDER ADDRESS
5 FOR DEAD LINE OR DEAD BUS CHECK
4HE VOLTAGE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR IS RE
GARDED SAFELY AS LIVE IS SET UNDER ADDRESS 5
FOR LIVE LINE OR LIVE BUS CHECK )T MUST BE SET BELOW
THE MINIMUM OPERATING VOLTAGE UNDER NORMAL CONDI
TIONS
4HE PERMISSIBLE MAGNITUDE DIFFERENCE 5 BETWEEN
THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! 5
$EPENDING ON THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE CONNECTION 5
#/..%#4 ADDRESS THE LINE TO LINE VOLTAGE
OR THE LINE TO EARTH VOLTAGE IS TO BE SET
4HE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE F BETWEEN
THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! F
4HE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
THE VOLTAGES IS SET UNDER ADDRESS $%,4! 0()
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE

CHECK

3! 6

3 9 . #
# ( % # +
/ .
/. SWITCHED ON
/ & &
/FF SWITCHED OFF

6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE BELOW WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR

CAN BE REGARDED AS DEAD PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
EARTH IN 6
6
6
5

6OLTAGE MAGNITUDE ABOVE WHICH THE LINE OR BUS BAR

CAN BE REGARDED AS LIVE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE
EARTH IN 6
6
6
5

$ % , 4 !
5
$ % , 4 !
F

( Z
$ % , 4 !
0 ( )
4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION IN 3! CAN ALSO

GIVE CLOSING COMMANDS IN ASYNCHRONOUS NETWORKS
)N THIS CASE CLOSING COMMAND IS GIVEN SUCH THAT
UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
THE VOLTAGE PHASORS OF THE
TIME ADDRESS
LINE AND BUS BAR VOLTAGES AGREE IN PHASE AT THE IN
STANT WHEN THERE IS CONTACT OF THE BREAKER POLES
!DDRESS $%,F39.# DEFINES THE LIMIT WITHIN
WHICH THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN THE

3YNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION COMPLETE IS

( Z
$ % , F 3 9 . #
,IMIT VALUE 5 FOR THE PERMISSIBLE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE IN

MAGNITUDE PHASE PHASE OR PHASE EARTH IN 6
6
6
,IMIT VALUE F FOR THE PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE
IN (Z
(Z
(Z
,IMIT VALUE FOR THE PERMISSIBLE PHASE ANGLE DIFFER
ENCE IN ^
^
^
NETWORKS ARE REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE THIS

FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS CAR
RIED OUT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE DIF
FERENCE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CLOSING TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE THE
SYNCHRO CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER ADDRESSES
AND ARE ONLY RELEVANT 4HE SETTING
VALUE OF ADDRESS MUST LIE BELOW THAT OF ADDRESS
)F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS SUP
PRESSED FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
,IMIT VALUE F FOR SYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE

(Z
(Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS AUTO RECLOSURE
# ' #
3! 6
4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOS

ING ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO
39.#(2
SYNCHRONISM CHECK THE CON

DITIONS FOR SYNCHRONISM 5
F AND ARE CHECKED BE
FORE RECLOSURE
55
DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEEDER

5 MUST BE LIVE 5 REFER
ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
5 MUST BE DEAD 5 REFER
ADDRESS
55

ADDRESS THE BUS BAR

ADDRESS
9%3
. /
./
5 5
5 5
$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE

./
. /
9%3
9 % 3
5 5
. /
$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RE

CLOSURE
./
9%3
9 % 3

$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
9%3
9 % 3

AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE IS RE
LEASED WITHOUT ANY CHECK
./
. /

/6%22)$%
3YNCHRONISM CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
9 % 3

DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS

CHECK THE FEEDER 5 AND THE
BUS BAR 5 MUST BOTH BE
DEAD 5 REFER ADDRESS

4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN

DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE COMBINED
DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEEDER

3 9 . # ( 2
55
/ 6 % 2 2 ) $ %
/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE
. /
./
9 % 3
9%3
# ' #

3! 6
4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING

ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO 4HE SYNCHRO
NISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION FOR MANUAL CLOSING
CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY SWITCHED OFF OR ON UNDER ADDRESS
7HEN 39.-!.#, IS SWITCHED /&& NO
CHECKS ARE CARRIED OUT FOR MANUAL CLOSING
F AND ARE CHECKED BE

FORE MANUAL CLOSURE
-# 55 DEAD BUS CHECK THE FEEDER
ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
ADDRESS
! SEPARATE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE LIMIT CAN BE SET FOR

ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING AFTER MANUAL CLOSE COM
MAND !DDRESS -# $F39.# DEFINES THE LIMIT
WITHIN WHICH THE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE MUST LIE WHEN
THE NETWORKS ARE REGARDED AS SYNCHRONOUS !BOVE
THIS FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE ASYNCHRONOUS CLOSING IS
CARRIED OUT UNDER CONSIDERATION OF THE PHASE ANGLE
DIFFERENCE FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE AND THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER CLOSING TIME "ELOW THIS FREQUENCY DIFFER
ENCE THE SYNCHRO CHECK CONDITIONS AS SET UNDER
ADDRESSES AND ARE ONLY RELEVANT
4HE SETTING VALUE OF ADDRESS MUST LIE BELOW
THAT OF ADDRESS )F SET TO 0 ASYNCHRONOUS
SWITCHING IS SUPPRESSED FOR MANUAL CLOSURE
-# 55 DEAD LINE CHECK THE FEEDER

ADDRESS THE BUS BAR
ADDRESS
-# 55 DEAD LINE AND DEAD BUS
CHECK THE FEEDER 5 AND THE
BUS BAR 5 MUST BOTH BE
DEAD 5 REFER ADDRESS

4HE FURTHER RELEASE CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL CLOSING

ARE SET UNDER ADDRESSES TO
-# /2)$%
-# 39.#(2 SYNCHRONISM CHECK THE CON

DITIONS FOR SYNCHRONISM 5
4HE FIVE POSSIBLE RELEASE CONDITIONS ARE INDEPEN

DENT FROM EACH OTHER AND CAN BE FREELY COMBINED

3 9 . - ! . # ,
/ .
$ F 3 9 . #
- #
3 9 . # ( 2
,IMIT VALUE F FOR SYNCHRONOUS MANUAL CLOSURE

(Z
(Z
AND 0 NO ASYNCHRONOUS MANUAL SWITCHING
3YNCHRONISM CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE
9 % 3
9%3
. /
./

- #
( Z

3YNCHRO CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSE COMMAND IS

/. SWITCHED ON
/&& SWITCHED OFF
/ & &

MANUAL CLOSING IS RELEASED

WITHOUT ANY CHECK
- #
5 5
$EAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE
. /
./
9 % 3
9%3
# ' #
3! 6

- #
5 5
$EAD LINE CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE
. /
./
9 % 3
9%3
. /
$EAD LINE AND DEAD BUS CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLO

SURE
./
9 % 3
9%3

- #

- #
5 5
/ 2 ) $ %
/VERRIDE OF ANY CHECK BEFORE MANUAL CLOSURE
. /
./
9 % 3
9%3
&INALLY ADDRESS DETERMINES THE TIME PERIOD

BEGINNING FROM THE MEASURING REQUEST IE FROM
CLOSE COMMAND WITHIN WHICH THE CHECK CONDITIONS
AS PARAMETERIZED MUST BE FULFILLED 4HIS TIME IS VALID
FOR AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE AS WELL AS FOR MANUAL CLO
SURE 7HEN THE CONDITIONS ARE NOT FULFILLED WITHIN THIS
TIME CLOSING IS BLOCKED /NLY AFTER A RENEWED MEA

3 9 . 3 5 0 6
) .

# ' #
3 9 . #
SURING REQUEST THE TIME STARTS AGAIN AND A NEW

CHECK IS CARRIED OUT
)F THE CONDITIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION SHOULD
BE CHECKED TO BE MAINTAINED FOR A CERTAIN DURATION
THIS MINIMUM DURATION CAN BE SET UNDER ADDRESS

3UPERVISION TIME PERIOD WITHIN WHICH THE CHECK CONDI

TIONS MUST BE FULFILLED
S
S
-INIMUM TIME DURING WHICH THE SYNCHRONOUS CONDI
TIONS MUST BE FULFILLED
S
S

3! 6
3ETTINGS FOR FAULT LOCATION
ADDRESS BLOCK
$ISTANCE TO FAULT WILL BE CALCULATED AS LONG AS &!5,4

,/#!4 %8)34 HAS BEEN SET IN ADDRESS DUR
ING CONFIGURATION SEE 3ECTION
.ORMALLY FAULT LOCATION CALCULATION IS INITIATED AT THE
INSTANT WHEN A TRIPPING COMMAND IS ISSUED )T CAN
HOWEVER ALSO BE STARTED ON FAULT DETECTION DROP OFF
ADDRESS IF FOR EXAMPLE ANOTHER PROTECTION
DEVICE CLEARS THE FAULT !DDITIONALLY FAULT LOCATION
CAN BE INITIATED BY AN EXTERNAL COMMAND VIA A BINARY
INPUT &.O REFER 3ECTION PROVIDED THE
PROTECTION HAS PICKED UP
4O CALCULATE THE DISTANCE IN KILOMETERS THE DEVICE RE
QUIRES THE REACTANCE VALUE IN KM AS A SECONDARY
VALUE RELATED TO ! #ONVERSION FROM PRIMARY TO SEC
ONDARY VALUE IS MADE BY USING THE SAME FORMULA AS
FOR THE DISTANCE SETTING 3ECTION )F ONE PUTS
IN THE REACTANCE VALUE OF THE LINE IN KM FOR 8PRIM
ONE OBTAINS THE REQUIRED SETTING VALUE 8 3%# AD
DRESS
&OR CORRECT OUTPUT OF THE DISTANCE TO FAULT IN OF LINE
LENGTH THE TOTAL LINE LENGTH IN KM MUST ALSO BE INPUT
ADDRESS )F THE REACTANCE 8 3%# IS ENTERED IN
MILE AND THE ,).% ,%.'4( ENTERED IN MILES THE
RESULT OF FAULT CALCULATION WOULD BE READ IN MILES IN
STEAD OF KILOMETERS
%XAMPLE
&OR THE EXAMPLE GIVEN IN SECTION WE OBTAIN

& ! 5 , 4

$ 2 / 0
4 2 ) 0

. /
, / # ! 4 ) / .
O R

KM

KM
,ENGTH KM
!
!
)F FOR EXAMPLE A FAULT REACTANCE OF PRIMARY IS

CALCULATED THIS EXAMPLE GIVES US THE FAULT LOCATION
DATA
8PRI
D
KM
D

)F THE RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH PARALLEL LINE COMPENSA
TION 3!J JJJJJ JJJ SEE /RDERING DATA
3ECTION THIS CAN ONLY FUNCTION CORRECTLY IF
THE EARTH CURRENT OF THE PARALLEL LINE IS CONNECTED
WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY TO THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
AND
IN THE POWER SYSTEM DATA SEE 3ECTION THE
PARAMETER )E #4 IS SET AS 0!2!,,%, ,).% AD
DRESS AND
IN THE LINE DATA SEE 3ECTION THE COUPLING
IMPEDANCES 2-2, AND 8-8, ADDRESSES
AND ARE CORRECTLY SET AND
FOR THE FAULT LOCATION THE COMPENSATION IS SWITCHED
TO EFFECTIVE UNDER ADDRESS
"EGINNING OF BLOCK &AULT LOCATION
3TART TO MEASURE OF FAULT LOCATION IS INITIATED
3 4 ! 2 4
/ & &
8 PRIM KM
.
)
8 SEC #T 8 PRIM .
. VT
!
4 2 ) 0
# / - - ! . $
0 ! 2 ! , , ) . %
BY $2/0 /&& OF THE FAULT DETECTOR OR BY 42)0

COMMAND
ONLY BY 42)0 #/--!.$
4HIS PARAMETER DETERMINES WHETHER PARALLEL LINE

COMPENSATION IS EFFECTIVE PROVIDED ABOVE
PREREQUITES ARE FULFILLED OR NOT
9 % 3

# ' #
3!6

!NNUNCIATIONS

)NTRODUCTION
!FTER A NETWORK FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS AND MESSAGES

PROVIDE A SURVEY OF IMPORTANT FAULT DATA AND THE FUNC
TION OF THE RELAY AND SERVE FOR CHECKING SEQUENCES
OF FUNCTIONAL STEPS DURING TESTING AND COMMISSION
ING &URTHER THEY PROVIDE INFORMATION ABOUT THE CON
DITION OF MEASURED DATA AND THE RELAY ITSELF DURING
NORMAL OPERATION
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS
4O READ OUT RECORDED ANNUNCIATIONS NO CODEWORD

INPUT IS NECESSARY
"LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST FAULT

PICK UP TRIP !2 EXPIRED TIMES CALCU
LATED DISTANCE OR SIMILAR !S DEFINED A
NETWORK FAULT BEGINS WITH PICK UP OF ANY
FAULT DETECTOR )F AUTO RECLOSE IS CARRIED
OUT THE NETWORK FAULT ENDS AFTER EXPIRY OF
THE LAST RECLAIM TIME THUS AN !2 SHOT OR
ALL SHOTS OCCUPY ONLY ONE FAULT DATA STORE
7ITHIN A NETWORK FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS
CAN OCCUR FROM PICK UP OF ANY FAULT DE
TECTION UNTIL DROP OFF
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS GENERATED IN THE RELAY ARE PRES

ENTED IN VARIOUS WAYS
,%$ INDICATIONS IN THE FRONT PLATES OF THE RELAY &IG
URE
"INARY OUTPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIA THE CONNECTIONS
OF THE RELAY
"LOCK /PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS THESE ARE

MESSAGES WHICH CAN APPEAR DURING THE
OPERATION OF THE RELAY INFORMATION ABOUT
CONDITION OF RELAY FUNCTIONS MEASURE
MENT DATA ETC
)NDICATIONS IN THE DISPLAY ON THE FRONT PLATE OR ON

THE SCREEN OF A PERSONAL COMPUTER VIA THE OPERAT
ING INTERFACE
"LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE PREVIOUS NET

WORK FAULT AS BLOCK
4RANSMISSION VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE TO LOCAL OR

REMOTE CONTROL FACILITIES IF AVAILABLE
"LOCK %VENT ANNUNCIATIONS FOR THE LAST BUT TWO

NETWORK FAULT AS BLOCK
-OST OF THESE ANNUNCIATIONS CAN BE RELATIVELY FREELY

ALLOCATED TO THE ,%$S AND BINARY OUTPUTS SEE 3EC
TION !LSO WITHIN SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS GROUP AND
MULTIPLE INDICATIONS CAN BE FORMED
"LOCK !NNUNCIATIONS OF AN EARTH FAULT REPORT

MODELS WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON
EARTHED SYSTEMS ONLY
4O CALL UP ANNUNCIATIONS ON THE OPERATOR PANEL THE

FOLLOWING POSSIBILITIES EXIST
"LOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS FORWARDS OR BACK
WARDS UP TO ADDRESS
$IRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY $!
ADDRESS AND EXECUTE WITH KEY %
0RESS KEY -3 - STANDS FOR MESSAGES 3 FOR
SIGNALS THEN THE ADDRESS APPEARS AUTO
MATICALLY AS THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION
BLOCKS
&OR CONFIGURATION OF THE TRANSFER OF ANNUNCIATIONS VIA
THE SERIAL INTERFACES THE NECESSARY DATA ARE ENTERED
IN ADDRESS BLOCK SEE 3ECTION

"LOCK !NNUNCIATIONS FOR #" OPERATION STATISTICS

THAT IS COUNTERS FOR FIRST !2 2!2 SECOND
OR FURTHER !2 $!2 AND TRIPPING COM
MANDS TOGETHER WITH ACCUMULATED
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS OF EACH BREAKER
POLE
"LOCK )NDICATION OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VAL
UES CURRENTS VOLTAGES POWERS FREQUEN
CY
"LOCK )NDICATION OF EARTH FAULT VALUES MODELS
WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED
SYSTEMS ONLY
"LOCK )NDICATION OF MEASURED VALUES OF THE THER
MAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
#OMMENCEMENT OF ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS
! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3
! COMPREHENSIVE LIST OF THE POSSIBLE ANNUNCIATIONS AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS WITH THE ASSOCIATED FUNCTION NUMBER
&.O IS GIVEN IN !PPENDIX # )T IS ALSO INDICATED TO WHICH DEVICE EACH ANNUNCIATION CAN BE ROUTED
# ' #

3! 6

/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
ADDRESS BLOCK
/PERATIONAL AND STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS CONTAIN INFOR

MATION WHICH THE UNIT PROVIDES DURING OPERATION AND
ABOUT THE OPERATION 4HEY BEGIN AT ADDRESS
)MPORTANT EVENTS AND STATUS CHANGES ARE CHRONO
LOGICALLY LISTED STARTING WITH THE MOST RECENT MES
SAGE 4IME INFORMATION IS SHOWN IN HOURS AND MIN
UTES 5P TO OPERATIONAL INDICATIONS CAN BE STORED
)F MORE OCCUR THE OLDEST ARE ERASED IN SEQUENCE
&AULTS IN THE NETWORK ARE ONLY INDICATED AS 3YST
&LT TOGETHER WITH THE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF THE
FAULT $ETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE HISTORY OF THE
FAULT IS CONTAINED IN BLOCKS &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS RE
FER TO 3ECTION
)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR
NON EARTHED SYSTEMS AN EARTH FAULT IS INDICATED
WITH %& $ET DETAILED INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND
IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT REFER 3ECTION
4HE INPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED

/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . !
, ! . . 5 . # ) ! 4 ) / . 3

% M E R

- O D E
#
!FTER SELECTION OF THE ADDRESS BY DIRECT SELEC

TION WITH $! % ANDOR PAGING WITH OR
AND FURTHER SCROLLING ! OR " THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCI
ATIONS APPEAR 4HE BOXES BELOW SHOW ALL AVAILABLE
OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS )N EACH SPECIFIC CASE OF
COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS APPEAR IN
THE DISPLAY 4HE ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH ARE INDICATED
BY A LEADING SIGN REPRESENT THE DIRECT CONFIRMA
TION OF THE BINARY INPUTS
.EXT TO THE BOXES BELOW THE ABBREVIATED FORMS ARE
EXPLAINED )T IS INDICATED WHETHER AN EVENT IS AN
NOUNCED ON OCCURRENCE # #OMING OR A STATUS
IS ANNOUNCED #OMING AND 'OING #'
4HE FIRST LISTED MESSAGE IS AS EXAMPLE ASSIGNED
WITH DATE AND TIME IN THE FIRST LINE THE SECOND LINE
SHOWS THE BEGINNING OF A CONDITION WITH THE CHARAC
TER # TO INDICATE THAT THIS CONDITION OCCURRED AT THE
DISPLAYED TIME
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL ANNUNCI

ATIONS
ST LINE
$ATE AND TIME OF THE EVENT OR STATUS

CHANGE
ND LINE !NNUNCIATION TEXT IN THE EXAMPLE #OMING
)F THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS NOT AVAILABLE THE DATE IS REPLACED BY JJJJJJ THE TIME IS GIVEN AS RELATIVE TIME
FROM THE LAST RE START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
$IRECT RESPONSE FROM BINARY INPUTS

3 T A R T
& L T 2 E C
! N N U N C
5SER DEFINABLE ANNUNCIATION .O RECEIVED VIA BINARY

INPUT #'
! N N U N C

INPUT #'
! N N U N C

INPUT #'
! N N U N C

INPUT #'
# L O S E # M D " L O

&AULT RECORDING STARTED VIA BINARY INPUT #
"LOCK ALL CLOSING COMMANDS #'
# ' #
3!6
6 4
M C B
4 R I P
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB FEEDER VT

TRIPPED #'
6
M C B
4 R I P
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB BUS BAR VT

TRIPPED #'
P
4 R I P
0 E R M
3INGLE POLE TRIPPING IS PERMITTED FROM EXTERNAL !2

DEVICE #'
P O L E
%XTERNAL !2 DEVICE IS PROGRAMMED FOR SINGLE POLE

RECLOSURE ONLY #'
2 ! 2
2 E L E A S E
2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE #'
$ ! 2
2 E L E A S E
2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE #'
/ N L Y
3 T A R T
& L T , O C
3TART FAULT LOCATOR VIA BINARY INPUT #'
% &
2 E C E P T
#ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION RECEIVED #
% &
2 E C & A I L
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION FAULTY #'
)
B L O C K
"LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

FROM AN EXTERNAL DEVICE #'
! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK AUTO RECLOSURE STATICALLY VIA BINARY INPUT #'
! 2
R E S E T
2ESET AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION FROM EXTERNAL VIA

BINARY INPUT #
P
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
P
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK THREE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK COMPLETE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
$ ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK COMPLETE $!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
3 T A R T
3TARTING SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2

#
! 2
4 R I P
,
! 2
4RIP SIGNAL POLE , FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL

!2 #
4 R I P
,
! 2

!2 #
4 R I P
,
! 2

!2 #
4 R I P
P
! 2
3INGLE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
4 R I P
P
! 2
4HREE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
$ ! 2
A F T
2 ! 2
$!2 PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 #'
% X T E N S
: "
3WITCH DISTANCE REACH TO EXTENDED ZONE :" FROM EX

TERNAL SIGNAL #'
% X T E N S
: ,
3WITCH DISTANCE REACH TO EXTENDED ZONE :, FROM EX

TERNAL SIGNAL #'
# ' #

3! 6
2 E C E P T
#ARRIER SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION RECEIVED #
$ I S 2 E C & A I L
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PRO

TECTION FAULTY #'
% X T 4 R I P
B L K
"LOCK EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION #'
% X T 4 R I P
,
4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION FOR POLE , #
% X T 4 R I P
,
% X T 4 R I P
,
$ I S
% X T 4 R P W O ! 2
4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE #'
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
'ENERAL OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE PROTECTION DEVICE

$ E V O P E R A T I V E
$EVICE OPERATIVE #'
0 R O T
!T LEAST ONE PROTECTION FUNCTION IS OPERATIVE #'
O P E R A T
) N I T I A L
, % $
S T A R T
R E S E T
3TORED ,%$ INDICATIONS RESET #
, O G - E A S " L O C K
-ESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES VIA THE SYSTEM INTER

FACE ARE BLOCKED #'
4 E S T
-ESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUE VIA THE SYSTEM INTER

FACE ARE MARKED WITH 4EST OPERATION #'
M O D E
0 A R A M R U N N I N G
0ARAMETERS ARE BEING SET #'
0 A R A M
3 E T
0ARAMETER SET ! IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M
3 E T
"
0ARAMETER SET " IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M
3 E T
0ARAMETER SET # IS ACTIVE #'
0 A R A M
3 E T
0ARAMETER SET $ IS ACTIVE #'
3 Y S T & L T

)NITIAL START OF THE PROCESSOR SYSTEM #
.ETWORK SYSTEM FAULT #' DETAILED INFORMATION IN

THE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS
# ' #
3!6
% &
- A N U A L
# "
%ARTH FAULT DETECTED IN NON EARTHED SYSTEM #'

DETAILED INFORMATION IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT
$ E T
I N
# L O S E
4 E S T
-ANUAL CLOSE COMMAND REGISTERED IMPULSE #

#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IS IN PROGRESS #'
& L T 2 E C $ A T $ E L
&AULT RECORDING DATA DELETED #
& L T 2 E C V I A " )
&AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA BINARY INPUT #
& L T 2 E C V I A + "
&AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA THE FRONT KEYBOARD #
& L T 2 E C V I A 0 #
&AULT RECORDING TRIGGERED VIA OPERATING 0# INTERFACE

#
!NNUNCIATIONS OF MONITORING FUNCTIONS

7 R O N G
3 7
7 R O N G
D E V
! N N U N C
! N N U
V E R S
) $
L O S T
0 #
L O S T
3OFTWARE VERSION OF THE DEVICE IS WRONG #

$EVICE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER IS WRONG #
!NNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW #

!NNUNCIATIONS FOR OPERATING 0# INTERFACE LOST #
/ P E R ! N N ) N V A
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #'
& L T ! N N ) N V A L
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS INVALID #'
% & 0 R O T
%ARTH FAULT REPORT FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS INVALID

#'
) N V A
3 T A T " U F F ) N V
"UFFER FOR OPERATION STATISTICS INVALID #'
, % $
"UFFER FOR STORED ,%$S INVALID #'
" U F F ) N V A
6 $ % 7
# H S
3 T A T E ) N V
% R R O R
6$%7 STATE )%# INVALID #'
#HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED #'
# H S !
% R R O R
#HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET !

NO OPERATION POSSIBLE WITH THIS SET #'
# H S "
% R R O R
#HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET "

# H S #
% R R O R
#HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET #

# H S $
% R R O R
#HECK SUM ERROR DETECTED FOR PARAMETER SET $

# ' #

3! 6
& A I L U R E
6
&AILURE IN INTERNAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE 6 #'
& A I L U R E
6
& A I L U R E
6
& A I L U R E
6
&AILURE IN OFFSET VOLTAGE 6 #'
& A I L U R E
) /
&AILURE ON FIRST INPUTOUTPUT MODULE '%! #'
& A I L U R E
) /
&AILURE ON SECOND INPUTOUTPUT MODULE :%! #'
& A I L
, 3 !
4 R I P 2 E L
D I S R U P T E D
& A I L U R E
&AILURE IN INTERNAL TRIP RELAY CIRCUIT #'

,3! LINK DISRUPTED SYSTEM INTERFACE #'
&AILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR ) #
'
& A I L U R E
) S Y M M
&AILURE DETECTED BY CURRENT SYMMETRY MONITOR #'
& A I L U R E
5 P
&AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR

5PH E #'
& A I L U R E
5 P
&AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE PLAUSIBILITY MONITOR

5PH PH #'
& A I L U R E
5 S Y M M
&AILURE DETECTED BY VOLTAGE SYMMETRY MONITOR #'
& A I L U R E
5 M E A S
,OSS OF MEASURED VOLTAGES #'
& & -
P I C K
& U S E
U P
& A I L U R E
& A I L 0 H A S E 3 E Q
&USE FAILURE MONITOR PICKED UP UNDELAYED ANNUNCI

ATION #'
&USE FAILURE MONITOR OPERATED DELAYED ANNUNCI
ATION APPROX S #'
&AILURE DETECTED BY PHASE SEQUENCE MONITOR #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF DISTANCE PROTECTION AND TELEPROTECTION FEATURES

$ I S T
O F F
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
$ I S T
B L O C K E D
$ISTANCE PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
% M E R
M O D E
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING #'
% X T E N S
: "
2ELEASE ZONE EXTENSION STAGE :" #'
% X T E N S
: ,
2ELEASE ZONE EXTENSION STAGE :, #'
$ I S 4 E L E O F F

4ELEPROTECTION FUNCTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION IS

SWITCHED OFF #'
# ' #
3!6
$ I S

TION RECEIVED #
2 E C E P T
$ I S 2 E C & A I L
2ECEPTION SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PRO

TECTION IS FAULTY #'
$ I S 0 / 4 4
%CHO SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION

TRANSMITTED #
% C H O
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT

0 O W E R
/ 3
3 W I N G
0OWER SWING DETECTED #'
4 R I P
/UT OF STEP TRIP SIGNAL ISSUED #
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
5 S E R
O U T P U T
/UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
5 S E R
O U T P U T
/UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 #'
% X T 4 R I P
B L K
"LOCK EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION #'
% X T 4 R I P
,
% X T 4 R I P
,
% X T 4 R I P
,
% X T 4 R P W O ! 2
4RIGGER EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION

% M E R
O F F
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF

#'
% M E R
B L O C K
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION IS BLOCKED

#'
# ' #

3! 6
% M E R
)
M O D E
%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME MODE IS RUNNING #'

"LOCK ) STAGE OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PRO
TECTION FROM AN EXTERNAL DEVICE #'
B L O C K
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

/ ,
0 R O T
O F F
/ ,
B L O C K E D
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
/ ,
7 A R N
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION CURRENT WARNING STAGE

#'
/ ,
7 A R N
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL WARNING STAGE

#'
/ ,
0 I C K U P
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION PICK UP OF THERMAL TRIP

STAGE #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF EARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

% &
$ E T
O F F
% &
$ E T B L O C K
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IS BLOCKED #'
$ETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE EARTH FAULT ARE GIVEN IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT ADDRESS BLOCK
REFER 3ECTION
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS

% &
0 R O T
% &
B L O C K E D
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS BLOCKED #'
% &
$ I R
%ARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON IS SWITCHED OFF #

'
O F F
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
% &
2 E C E P T
#ARRIER SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION RECEIVED #
% &
2 E C & A I L
#ARRIER RECEPTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION FAULTY #'
% &

O F F
% C H O
%CHO SIGNAL FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON TRANSMITTED #
# ' #
3!6
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

! 2
O F F
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF #'
! 2
I N O P E R A T I V
!UTO RECLOSE FUNCTION INOPERATIVE IE CANNOT BE INITI

ATED #'
! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK AUTO RECLOSURE STATICALLY VIA BINARY INPUT #'
! 2
R E S E T
2ESET AUTO RECLOSURE FUNCTION FROM EXTERNAL VIA

BINARY INPUT #
P
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK SINGLE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
P
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK THREE POLE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
2 ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK COMPLETE 2!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
$ ! 2
B L O C K
"LOCK COMPLETE $!2 VIA BINARY INPUT #'
3 T A R T
3TARTING SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR INTERNAL !2

#
! 2
4 R I P
,
! 2

!2 #
4 R I P
,
! 2

!2 #
4 R I P
,
! 2

!2 #
4 R I P
P
! 2
3INGLE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
4 R I P
P
! 2
4HREE POLE TRIP SIGNAL FROM EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR

INTERNAL !2 #
$ ! 2
! 2
A F T
# L O S E
2 ! 2
# M D
$!2 PERMITTED ONLY AFTER UNSUCCESSFUL 2!2 #'

2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ISSUED
#
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION OF THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3 Y N C
O F F
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED

OFF CLOSING IS RELEASED #'
3 Y N C
B L O C K E D
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS BLOCKED

#'
3 Y N C
F A U L T Y
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION IS DISTURBED

#'
3 Y N C 4 S U P % X P
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION SUPERVISION

TIME EXPIRED #
3 Y N C / V E R R I D E
3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION OVERRIDDEN

#'
3 Y N C
3YNCHRONISM DETECTED #'
3 Y N C H R O
# ' #

3! 6
3 Y N C
5 5
,IVE LINE 5 AND DEAD BUS BAR 5 DETECTED

#'
3 Y N C
5 5
$EAD LINE 5 AND LIVE BUS BAR 5 DETECTED

#'
3 Y N C
5 5
$EAD LINE 5 AND DEAD BUS BAR 5 DETECTED

#'
3 Y N C
5 D I F F
3YNCHRONISM CHECK 5 EXCEEDED #'
3 Y N C
F D I F F
3YNCHRONISM CHECK F EXCEEDED #'
3 Y N C
D I F F
3YNCHRONISM CHECK EXCEEDED #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT LOCATION

3 T A R T
& L T , O C
3TART FAULT LOCATOR VIA BINARY INPUT #'
/PERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNCTION

# "
I N
4 E S T
# "
4 E S T
P ,
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST

FUNCTION #
# "
4 E S T
P ,

FUNCTION #
# "
4 E S T
P ,

FUNCTION #
# "
4 E S T
P
4RIP THREE POLE BY INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST FUNC

TION #
#IRCUIT BREAKER TEST IN PROGRESS #'
&URTHER MESSAGES
4 A B L E
% N D

O F
O V E R F L O W
T A B L E
)F MORE MESSAGES HAVE BEEN RECEIVED THE LAST VALID

MESSAGE IS 4ABLE OVERFLOW
)F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS
%ND OF TABLE
# ' #
3!6

&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS
ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4HE ANNUNCIATIONS WHICH OCCURRED DURING THE LAST

THREE NETWORK FAULTS CAN BE READ OFF ON THE FRONT PAN
EL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HE INDICATIONS ARE
RECORDED IN THE SEQUENCE FROM THE YOUNGEST TO THE
OLDEST UNDER ADDRESSES AND 7HEN
A FURTHER FAULT OCCURS THE DATA RELATING TO THE OLDEST
ARE ERASED %ACH FAULT DATA BUFFER CAN CONTAIN UP TO
ANNUNCIATIONS
)NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED
4O CALL UP THE LAST FAULT DATA ONE GOES TO ADDRESS
EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESS $! % OR BY
PAGING WITH THE KEYS OR 7ITH THE KEYS ! OR " ONE
CAN PAGE THE INDIVIDUAL ANNUNCIATIONS FORWARDS OR
BACKWARDS %ACH ANNUNCIATION IS ASSIGNED WITH A
SEQUENCE ITEM NUMBER

& A U L T

#
M S
$ I S T & L T , %

$ E V
& ,
P
$ R O P

, O O P
4HE FOLLOWING ITEMS INDICATE ALL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS

WHICH HAVE OCCURRED FROM FAULT DETECTION UNTIL DROP OFF
OF THE DEVICE IN CHRONOLOGICAL SEQUENCE 4HESE ANNUN
CIATIONS ARE TAGGED WITH THE RELATIVE TIME IN MILLISECONDS
STARTING WITH THE FAULT DETECTION
#
O F F #
M S
, %

D ; =
UNDER ITEM THE TIME OF THE BEGINNING OF THE FAULT IS GIV

EN TIME RESOLUTION IS MS
M S

D
#
M S
$ I S 4 R I P

UNDER ITEM THE DATE OF THE SYSTEM FAULT IS INDICATED IN

THE SECOND LINE THE CONSECUTIVE NUMBER OF THE SYSTEM
FAULT

3 Y S T & L T
)N THE FOLLOWING CLARIFICATION ALL THE AVAILABLE FAULT AN

NUNCIATIONS ARE INDICATED )N THE CASE OF A SPECIFIC
FAULT OF COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED ANNUNCIATIONS
APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY !T FIRST AN EXAMPLE IS GIVEN FOR
A SYSTEM FAULT AND EXPLAINED
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE LAST
SYSTEM FAULT
, ! 3 4
& ! 5 , 4

&OR THESE PURPOSES THE TERM SYSTEM FAULT MEANS

THE PERIOD FROM SHORT CIRCUIT INCEPTION UP TO FINAL
CLEARANCE )F AUTO RECLOSE OCCURS THEN THE SYSTEM
FAULT IS FINISHED ON EXPIRY OF THE LAST RECLAIM OR LOCK
OUT TIME THAT IS AFTER SUCCESSFUL OR UNSUCCESSFUL !2
4HUS THE TOTAL FAULT CLEARANCE PROCEDURE INCLUSIVE
!2 CYCLES OCCUPIES ONLY ONE FAULT ANNUNCIATION
STORE 7ITHIN ONE SYSTEM FAULT SEVERAL FAULT EVENTS
CAN HAVE OCCURRED IE FROM PICK UP OF ANY PROTEC
TION FUNCTION UNTIL DROP OFF OF THE LAST PICK UP OF A
PROTECTION FUNCTION
K M
&OR FAULT LOCATION THE CONDUCTOR LOOP IS GIVEN FROM

WHICH THE FAULT LOCATION HAS BEEN DERIVED &AULT DISTANCE
IS DISPLAYED IN /HMS PRIMARY IN /HMS SECONDARY IN KI
LOMETERS AND IN PERCENTAGE LINE LENGTH CALCULATED FROM
THE PARAMETERS WHICH HAVE BEEN SET FOR LINE AND TRANS
FORMER DATA REFER TO 3ECTION
)F THE PER UNIT LINE REACTANCE HAS BEEN PARAMETERIZED IN
MILE INSTEAD OF KM ADDRESS THEN THE FAULT
DISTANCE IS TO BE READ IN MILES

ETC
# ' #

3! 6
'ENERAL FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF THE DEVICE

3 Y S T & L T
3YSTEM FAULT WITH CONSECUTIVE NUMBER
& A U L T
"EGINNING OF FAULT
& L T " U F F / V E R
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW
2 ! 2
2 E L E A S E
2ELEASE 2!2 STAGES FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE WHEN

OCCURRED DURING A FAULT
$ ! 2
2 E L E A S E
2ELEASE $!2 STAGE FROM EXTERNAL !2 DEVICE WHEN

OCCURRED DURING A FAULT
$ E V 4 R I P
R E V
4RIP ON FAULT IN REVERSE BUS BAR DIRECTION
) , ) N
)NTERRUPTED FAULT CURRENT OF PHASE ,
) , ) N
) , ) N
$ E V I C E
$ E V
4 R I P
$ R O P
O F F
4HE GENERAL TRIP COMMAND OF THE DEVICE IS ANNUN

CIATED 'OING IE RESET OF THE TRIP IS INDICATED
$ROP OFF OF THE DEVICE GENERAL
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF DISTANCE PROTECTION

$ I S : "
! 2
B L K
!UTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED BY FAULT IN ZONE :"
$ I S : ,
! 2
B L K
!UTO RECLOSURE BLOCKED BY FAULT IN ZONE :,
$ I S T & L T ,
&AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASE ,
$ I S T & L T , %
&AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASE , %
$ I S T & L T ,
$ I S T & L T , %
$ I S T & L T ,
&AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES , ,
$ I S T & L T , %
&AULT DETECTION DISTANCE PROTECTION PHASES

, , %
$ I S T & L T ,
$ I S T & L T , %
$ I S T & L T ,
$ I S T & L T , %

, , %
# ' #
3!6
$ I S T & L T ,
$ I S T & L T , %

, , %
$ I S T & L T ,

, , ,
$ I S T & L T %

, , , %
, O O P
,
)N LINE LOOP , % A FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION IS DE

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,
)N LINE LOOP , , A FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION IS DE

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,
)N LINE LOOP , % A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS DE

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,
)N LINE LOOP , , A FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION IS DE

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
, O O P
,

TECTED
$ I S 4 R I P
P ,
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY DISTANCE PROTECTION
$ I S 4 R I P
P ,
$ I S 4 R I P
P ,
$ I S 4 R I P
P
4RIP THREE POLE BY DISTANCE PROTECTION
$ I S T
$ I S
2 E C E P T
3 E N D
$ I S 4 R A N S " L O

TION RECEIVED
#ARRIER SEND SIGNAL FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE
PROTECTION TRANSMITTED
4RANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION OF TELEPROTECTION WITH DIS
TANCE PROTECTION HAS OPERATED
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF POWER SWING SUPPLEMENT

/ 3
4 R I P
# ' #
/UT OF STEP TRIP SIGNAL ISSUED

3! 6
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS AND EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R
O U T P U T
/UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R
4 3 T A R T
3TART USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R
4 2 E S E T
2ESET USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
5 S E R
O U T P U T
/UTPUT OF USER DEFINABLE TIMER 4 DURING FAULT
% X T 4 R I P
P ,
4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION SINGLE POLE ,
% X T 4 R I P
P ,
% X T 4 R I P
P ,
% X T 4 R I P
P
4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE
% X T 4 R I P
W O ! 2
4RIP BY EXTERNAL TRIP FUNCTION THREE POLE WITHOUT

RECLOSURE
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION

% M E R
& L T
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION OF EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R
& L T
,
&AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTEC

TION PHASE ,
% M E R
& L T
, %

TION PHASE , EARTH
% M E R
& L T
,

TION PHASE ,
% M E R
& L T
, %

TION PHASE , EARTH
% M E R
& L T
,

TION PHASES , ,
, %

TION PHASES , , EARTH
% M E R & L T
% M E R
& L T
,

TION PHASE ,
% M E R
& L T
, %

TION PHASE , EARTH
% M E R
& L T
,

TION PHASES , ,
, %

% M E R & L T

# ' #
3!6
,

TION PHASES , ,
% M E R & L T
, %

% M E R & L T
,

TION PHASES , , ,
% M E R & L T
%

TION PHASES , , , EARTH
% M E R
& L T
% M E R
)
&AULT DETECTION EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROTECTION ON

HIGH PHASE CURRENT STAGE )
% M E R
)

PHASE OVERCURRENT STAGE )
% M E R
) %

EARTH OVERCURRENT STAGE )%
% M E R 4 R I P P ,
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P P ,
4RIP SINGLE POLE , BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P P ,
4RIP SINGLE POLE , FROM EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME

PROTECTION
% M E R 4 R I P
4RIP THREE POLE BY EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PRO

TECTION
P
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

/ ,
4 R I P
4RIP BY THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

.OTE 4HESE ANNUNCIATION OCCUR ONLY IN THE FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS WHEN THE HIGH SENSITIVITY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
IS CONFIGURED TO TRIP ON EARTH FAULT ADDRESS %!24( &!5,4 /. REFER ALSO TO 3ECTION /THERWISE
THE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED ONLY IN THE EARTH FAULT REPORT REFER TO 3ECTION
% &
$ E T E C T I O N
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
% &
$ E T
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
4 R I P
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS

% &
B L O C K E D
%ARTH FAULT PROTECTION BLOCKED WHEN DURING FAULT
% &
& L T ) E
&AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION )% STAGE

VALID FOR DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION AND TRANSMISSION
% &
& L T
&AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION NON DIRECTIONAL
# ' #
) E

3! 6
% &
& L T
% &
4 R I P
4RIP BY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
% &
3 E N D
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CARRIER

SIGNAL TRANSMITTED
&AULT DETECTION EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL
2 E C E P T
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION CARRIER

SIGNAL RECEIVED
4 R A N S " L O C
4RANSIENT BLOCKING FUNCTION OF DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION HAS OPERATED
% &
% &
) E
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

! 2
I N
P R O G
!UTO RECLOSE CYCLE IN PROGRESS
2 ! 2
P
R U N
$EAD TIME OF SINGLE POLE 2!2 IS RUNNING
2 ! 2
P
R U N
$EAD TIME OF THREE POLE 2!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2
P
R U N
$EAD TIME OF FIRST THREE POLE $!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2
P
R U N
$EAD TIME OF SECOND THREE POLE $!2 IS RUNNING
$ ! 2
P
R U N
$EAD TIME OF THIRD OR FURTHER THREE POLE $!2 IS RUN

NING
! 2
B L O C K D Y N
!2 FUNCTION DYNAMICALLY BLOCKED BY INTERNAL CAUSE
! 2
# L O S E
2ECLOSE COMMAND FROM AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION ISSUED
! 2
4 R I P
# M D
4HREE POLE TRIP BY INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION

CAUSED BY BLOCKING DURING SINGLE POLE !2 CYCLE
P
&AULT ANNUNCIATION OF INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3UPERVISION TIME FOR SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK
EXPIRED NO MORE CLOSE RELEASE
3 Y N C 4 S U P % X P
&AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF FAULT LOCATION

& A U L T

&AULT LOCATION DATA THE LINE LOOP IS INDICATED FROM

WHICH FAULT DATA HAVE BEEN CALCULATED
, O C A T
2 P R I
#ALCULATED PRIMARY FAULT RESISTANCE IN OHMS BASED ON

THE PARAMETERIZED RATED VALUES ADDRESSES TO
REFER TO 3ECTION
8 P R I
#ALCULATED PRIMARY FAULT REACTANCE IN OHMS BASED ON

REFER TO 3ECTION
# ' #
3!6
2 S E C
#ALCULATED SECONDARY FAULT RESISTANCE IN OHMS BASED

ON !
8 S E C
#ALCULATED SECONDARY FAULT REACTANCE IN OHMS BASED

ON !
K M
#ALCULATED FAULT DISTANCE IN KILOMETERS BASED ON THE

PARAMETERIZED RATED VALUES ADDRESSES TO
REFER TO 3ECTION AND THE LINE DATA AS PARAME
TERIZED UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER TO 3EC
TION
#ALCULATED FAULT DISTANCE IN OF LINE LENGTH BASED ON
REFER TO 3ECTION AND THE LINE DATA AS
PARAMETERIZED UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER
TO 3ECTION
D ; =
&URTHER MESSAGES
4 A B L E
E M P T Y
MEANS THAT NO FAULT EVENT HAS BEEN RECORDED
4 A B L E
O V E R F L O W
MEANS THAT OTHER FAULT DATA HAVE OCCURRED HOWEVER

MEMORY IS FULL
4 A B L E
S U P E R C E D E D
A NEW FAULT EVENT HAS OCCURRED DURING READ OUT

PAGE ON WITH ! OR " THE DISPLAY SHOWS THE FIRST AN
NUNCIATION IN THE ACTUALIZED ORDER
% N D
O F
)F NOT ALL MEMORY PLACES ARE USED THE LAST MESSAGE IS

%ND OF TABLE
T A B L E
4HE DATA OF THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS 4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE
THE SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT

N D
4 /
, ! 3 4
& ! 5 , 4
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF

THE SECOND TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
ETC
4HE DATA OF THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT CAN BE FOUND UNDER ADDRESS 4HE AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE THE
SAME AS FOR THE LAST FAULT

R D
& ! 5 , 4
4 /
, ! 3 4
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK &AULT ANNUNCIATIONS OF

THE THIRD TO LAST SYSTEM FAULT
ETC
# ' #

3! 6

$ATA OF EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
&OR EARTH FAULTS IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS

A SPECIAL EARTH FAULT DATA STORE IS AVAILABLE UNDER AD
DRESS 5P TO MESSAGES CAN BE STORED FOR
EACH OF THE LAST THREE EARTH FAULTS )NPUT OF THE CODE
WORD IS NOT REQUIRED
4HE EARTH FAULT REPORTS CAN BE CALLED UP BY DIRECT AD
DRESSING USING $! % OR BY PAGING WITH THE

& , 4
$ ! 4 !

% &
$ E T

% &
$ E T E C T I O N
KEYS OR TO THE ADDRESS 7ITH THE KEYS ! OR "

ONE CAN PAGE FORWARDS OR BACKWARDS WITHIN THE INDI
CATIONS
)N THE FOLLOWING LIST THE AVAILABLE EARTH FAULT ANNUNCI
ATIONS ARE ATTACHED TO THE BOX WITH MAIN HEADING )N
A SPECIFIC CASE OF COURSE ONLY THE ASSOCIATED INDI
CATIONS APPEAR IN THE DISPLAY
"EGINNING OF BLOCK %ARTH FAULT EVENT DATA FOR

NON EARTHED SYSTEM
) 3 / , ! 4 % $
% ! 2 4 (
ADDRESS BLOCK
UNDER ITEM .O THE DATE AND THE SEQUENCE NUMBER

OF THE EARTH FAULT ARE DISPLAYED

#
)TEM .O SHOWS THE TIME OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE

EARTH FAULT
4HE FOLLOWING ITEMS SHOW THE EARTH FAULT DATA
% &
$ E T E C
,
%ARTH FAULT DETECTED IN PHASE ,
% &
$ E T E C
,
% &
$ E T E C
,
% &
F O R W A R D S
%ARTH FAULT IN FORWARD DIRECTION
% &
R E V E R S E
%ARTH FAULT IN REVERSE DIRECTION
% &
U N D E F I N E D
%ARTH FAULT DIRECTION UNDEFINED EG CURRENT TOO SMALL
) E A

M !
!CTIVE COMPONENT OF EARTH FAULT CURRENT
) E R

M !
REACTIVE COMPONENT OF EARTH FAULT CURRENT
% &
$ E T
% &
" U F F / V E R
4 A B L E
4 R I P
E M P T Y
4RIP ON EARTH FAULT ONLY WHEN EARTH FAULT DETECTION IS

CONFIGURED TO TRIP
%ARTH FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS LOST BUFFER OVERFLOW
MEANS THAT NO EARTH FAULT HAS BEEN RECORDED YET
2EPORTS OF FURTHER EARTH FAULTS BEGIN WITH ITEM NUMBER AND EG

% &
$ E T

UNDER )TEM .O THE DATE OF ANOTHER EARTH FAULT

CAN BE DISPLAYED FOLLOWED BY THE RESPECTIVE DATA
# ' #
3!6

#IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS
4HE NUMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS INITIATED BY THE RELAY

IS COUNTED SEPARATELY FOR EACH OF THE BREAKER POLES
!LSO THE NUMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS IS
COUNTED SEPARATELY FOR SINGLE POLE 2!2 THREE
POLE 2!2 FIRST SHOT AND THREE POLE $!2 FURTHER
SHOTS !DDITIONALLY THE INTERRUPTED CURRENTS ARE
STATED FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL POLE AND GIVEN UNDER THE
FAULT ANNUNCIATIONS REFER TO 3ECTION FOLLOWING
EACH TRIP COMMAND 4HESE CURRENTS ARE ACCUMU
LATED AND STORED #OUNTER STATUS AND STORES ARE SE

# "
/ 0 % 2 ! 4
3 4 ! 4 ) 3 4 ) # 3

! 2
P O L E

ADDRESS BLOCK
CURED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE AND CAN BE
READ OFF IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN BE
PAGING WITH THE KEYS OR UNTIL ADDRESS IS
REACHED 4HE COUNTERS CAN BE CALLED UP USING THE
KEY ! FOR FORWARDS PAGING OR " FOR BACKWARDS PAG
ING
%NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT REQUIRED FOR READ OFF OF
COUNTER STATES
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK #IRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION

STATISTICS
.UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER SINGLE

POLE TRIP EG
0AGE ON WITH KEY ! TO GET FURTHER COUNTER STATES

P O L E
.UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE

POLE TRIP ST !2 CYCLE 2!2
P O L
.UMBER OF AUTO RECLOSE ATTEMPTS AFTER THREE

POLE TRIP FURTHER !2 CYCLES $!2

! 2

$ ! 2

4 2 ) 0
. O
,
.UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE

,

4 2 ) 0
. O
,
.UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

POLE ,

4 2 ) 0
. O
,
.UMBER OF TRIP COMMANDS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

POLE ,

) , ) N
!CCUMULATED INTERRUPTED CURRENTS FOR #" POLE ,

) , ) N

) , ) N
4HE MAXIMUM VALUES OF THE COUNTERS ARE

2!2 POLE 2!2 POLE $!2 POLE
DIGITS
4RIP .O , 4RIP .O , 4RIP .O ,
DIGITS
),)N ),)N ),)N
DIGITS PLUS DECIMAL DIGIT
4HE COUNTERS CAN BE RESET TO IN BLOCK SEE 3ECTION

# ' #

3! 6

2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES
4HE STEADY STATE RMS OPERATING VALUES CAN BE READ

OUT AT ANY TIME IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN
BE CALLED UP DIRECTLY USING $! % OR BY
PAGING WITH OR 4HE INDIVIDUAL MEASURED VALUES
CAN BE FOUND BY FURTHER PAGING WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF
THE CODEWORD IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE VALUES WILL BE
UPDATED IN APPROXIMATELY TO SECONDS INTERVALS

/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ) / . ! ,
- % ! 3 5 2 % $
6 ! , 5 % 3
ADDRESS BLOCKS AND
4HE DATA ARE DISPLAYED IN ABSOLUTE PRIMARY VALUES

AND IN PERCENT OF THE RATED DEVICE VALUES 4O ENSURE
CORRECT PRIMARY VALUES THE RATED DATA MUST BE EN
TERED TO THE DEVICE UNDER ADDRESS BLOCK AS DE
SCRIBED IN 3ECTION
)N THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SOME TYPICAL VALUES HAVE
BEEN INSERTED )N PRACTICE THE ACTUAL VALUES APPEAR
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK /PERATIONAL MEASURED VAL

UES
5SE ! KEY TO MOVE TO THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) ,

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) ,

) ,

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

5 , %

5 , %

5 , %

5 ,

0AGE ON WITH THE ! KEY TO READ OFF THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH
THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE OR PAGE BACK WITH "
/NE ADDRESS IS AVAILABLE FOR EACH MEASURED VALUE 4HE

VALUES CAN BE REACHED ALSO BY DIRECT ADDRESSING USING
KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS NUMBER AND EXECUTE
WITH %
4HE PRIMARY VALUES ADDRESSES TO ARE
BASED ON THE PRIMARY RATED VALUES AS PARAMETERIZED
UNDER ADDRESSES FOR 5. AND FOR ). REFER
3ECTION
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

K 6
# ' #
3!6

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 ,

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 ,

0 A

0 R

F

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED CURRENT

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED VOLTAGE DIVIDED BY

o
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % ; =

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % ; =

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED FREQUENCY (Z OR

(Z AS PARAMETERIZED UNDER ADDRESS REFER TO
3ECTION
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; =

- 6 ! R
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; =

- 7
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) , ; =

K 6
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
; =

K 6

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , % ; =
# ' #

3! 6

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , ; =

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
0 A ; =

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED VOLTAGE
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , ; =

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
5 , ; =

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO RATED APPARENT POWER

o w 5. w ).
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
0 R ; =

4HE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISE FOR THE OVERLOAD

PROTECTION CAN BE READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE
ADDRESS CAN BE CALLED UP DIRECTLY USING $!
% OR BY PAGING WITH OR 4HE INDIVIDUAL
MEASURED VALUES CAN BE FOUND BY FURTHER PAGING
WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NOT NECESSARY

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P ,

4HE VALUES ARE AVAILABLE AS LONG AS THE THERMAL OVER

LOAD PROTECTION IS CONFIGURED AS 4(%2-!, /, %8
)34 ADDRESS AND SWITCHED ON ADDRESS
0AGE ON WITH THE ! KEY TO READ OFF THE NEXT ADDRESS
WITH THE NEXT MEASURED VALUE OR PAGE BACK WITH "
4HE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE RISES OF THE INDIVIDUAL

PHASES ARE NOT PRESENTED IF THE MEASURING METHOD
WITH )MAX HAS BEEN SELECTED ADDRESS

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P ,

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P ,

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
T R I P

4HE PERCENTAGE IS REFERRED TO THE TRIP TEMPERATURE RISE

ACCORDING TO THE MEASUREMENT METHOD AS SELECTED IN
ADDRESS
# ' #
3!6

2EAD OUT OF EARTH FAULT MEASURED VALUES IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS

DRESS BLOCK
4HE MEASURED VALUES DURING AN EARTH FAULT CAN BE

READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK 4HE ADDRESS CAN BE DI
RECTLY CALLED UP USING $! % OR BY PAGING
WITH KEYS OR 4HE INDIVIDUAL VALUES CAN BE FOUND
THEN BY FURTHER PAGING WITH ! OR " %NTRY OF THE CODE
WORD IS NOT NECESSARY 4HE VALUES ARE RECORDED ONLY
IF THE RELAY IS EQUIPPED WITH THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION
FUNCTION AND WHEN THIS IS CONFIGURED TO %8)34

) 3 / ,
- % ! 3 5 2 % $

) E A

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) E A ; M ! =

6 ! , 5 % 3
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %

) E R
% &

AD
4HE DISPLAYED VALUES ARE THE ACTIVE COMPONENT )EA

AND THE REACTIVE COMPONENT )ER OF THE EARTH CURRENT
AS PRIMARY VALUES AND AS SECONDARY VALUES AT THE
RELAY TERMINALS 0RE REQUISITE FOR CORRECT OUTPUT OF
THE CURRENT VALUES IS THAT THE RATED DATA ARE CORRECTLY
PARAMETERIZED IN ADDRESS BLOCK REFER TO 3ECTION

)N THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SOME TYPICAL VALUES HAVE
BEEN INSERTED )N PRACTICE THE ACTUAL VALUES APPEAR
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK -EASURED VALUES OF

EARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
5SE ! KEY TO DISPLAY THE NEXT ADDRESS WITH THE NEXT

MEASURED VALUE OR USE " KEY FOR THE PREVIOUS AD
DRESS
%ACH MEASURED VALUE IS ASSIGNED TO ONE ADDRESS
EACH ADDRESS ALTERNATIVELY CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT
ADDRESSING USING KEY $! FOLLOWED BY THE ADDRESS
NUMBER
4HE PRIMARY VALUES ADDRESSES AND ARE
BASED ON THE PRIMARY RATED VALUES AS PARAMETERIZED
UNDER ADDRESSES AND REFER TO 3ECTION

M !
- % ! 3 6 ! , 5 %
) E R ; M ! =
# ' #

M !

3! 6

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES
$URING OPERATION OF THE PROTECTION RELAY IT MAY BE DE

SIRED TO INTERVENE IN FUNCTIONS OR ANNUNCIATIONS MAN
UALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRITERIA 3! COMPRISES FACI
LITIES EG TO RE ADJUST THE REAL TIME CLOCK TO ERASE
STORED INFORMATIONS AND EVENT COUNTERS TO SWITCH ON
OR OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OR
TO CHANGE OVER PRESELECTED SETS OF FUNCTION PARAME
TERS 4HE SCOPE OF OPERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES DE
PENDS ON THE ORDERED SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS OF THE DE
VICE REFER TO 3ECTION /RDERING DATA
4HE FUNCTIONS CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM THE OPERATING
PANEL ON THE FRONT OF THE DEVICE VIA THE OPERATING
AND SYSTEM INTERFACE AS WELL AS VIA BINARY INPUTS

$ % 6 ) # %
BY BLOCK PAGING WITH THE KEYS FORWARDS OR

BACKWARDS UP TO ADDRESS OR
BY DIRECT SELECTION WITH ADDRESS CODE USING KEY
$! ADDRESS AND EXECUTE WITH KEY %
!DJUSTING AND SYNCHRONIZING THE REAL TIME CLOCK
4HE DATE AND TIME CAN BE ADJUSTED AT ANY TIME DUR

ING OPERATION AS LONG AS THE REAL TIME CLOCK IS OPERA
TIVE 3ETTING IS CARRIED OUT IN BLOCK WHICH IS
PAGING WITH AND )NPUT OF THE CODEWORD IS RE

3 % 4 4 ) . '
2 % ! ,
4 ) - %
# , / # +

$ ! 4 %

4 ) - %

$ ) & &
ADDRESS BLOCK
QUIRED TO CHANGE THE DATA

3ELECTION OF THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSES IS BY FURTHER
SCROLLING USING ! " AS SHOWN BELOW %ACH MODIFICA
TION MUST BE CONFIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 3ETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK

#ONTINUE WITH !
!T FIRST THE ACTUAL DATE AND TIME ARE DISPLAYED

#ONTINUE WITH !

4HE CONTROL FACILITIES BEGIN WITH ADDRESS BLOCK

4HIS ADDRESS IS REACHED
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK $EVICE CONTROL
# / . 4 2 / ,

)N ORDER TO CONTROL FUNCTIONS VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS

NECESSARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MAR
SHALLED TO THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS
DURING INSTALLATION OF THE DEVICE AND THAT THEY HAVE
BEEN CONNECTED REFER TO 3ECTION -ARSHALLING
OF THE BINARY INPUTS
%NTER THE NEW DATE DIGITS FOR DAY DIGITS FOR MONTH
AND DIGITS FOR YEAR INCLUDING CENTURY USE THE ORDER
AS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS 3ECTION BUT
ALWAYS USE A DOT FOR SEPARATOR
$$--9999 OR --$$9999
%NTER THE NEW TIME HOURS MINUTES SECONDS EACH
WITH DIGITS SEPARATED BY A DOT
((--33
4 ) - %
5SING THE DIFFERENCE TIME THE CLOCK IS SET FORWARDS BY

THE ENTERED TIME OR BACKWARDS USING THE KEY
4HE FORMAT IS THE SAME AS WITH THE TIME SETTING ABOVE
# ' #
3!6

%RASING STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND COUNTERS
4HE STATISTICAL INDICATIONS 3ECTION ADDRESS

BLOCK ARE STORED IN %%02/-S IN THE DEVICE 4HEY
ARE NOT THEREFORE ERASED IF THE AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
FAILS !DDITIONALLY ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE STATUS OF
THE ,%$ MEMORIES ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S AND THUS
SAVED PROVIDED THE BACK UP BATTERY IS OPERATIONAL
4HESE STORES CAN BE CLEARED IN BLOCK "LOCK IS
CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH THE KEYS OR OR DIRECTLY
BY KEYING IN THE CODE $! % 7ITH THE EXCEP

, % $
2 % 3 % 4
2EQUEST WHETHER THE ,%$ MEMORIES SHOULD BE RESET

2 % 3 % 4
/ 0 % 2 ! 4 ! . . 5 . #

! . . 5 . #
2 % 3 % 4
# / 5 . 4 % 2 3

% &
) S C
2EQUEST WHETHER THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION BUFFER

STORE SHOULD BE ERASED
2EQUEST WHETHER THE FAULT ANNUNCIATION BUFFER AND

FAULT RECORDING STORES SHOULD BE ERASED
2EQUEST WHETHER THE #" OPERATION COUNTERS SHOULD

BE SET TO ZERO
2 % 3 % 4
4 / 4 ! ,

2 % 3 % 4
& ! 5 , 4
TION OF RESETTING THE ,%$ INDICATIONS ADDRESS

CODEWORD ENTRY IS NECESSARY TO ERASE THE STORED
ITEMS 2ESET IS SEPARATE FOR THE DIFFERENT GROUPS OF
COUNTERS MEMORIES AND ANNUNCIATIONS /NE REACH
ES THE INDIVIDUAL ITEMS BY PAGING ! " %RASURE RE
QUIRES CONFIRMATION WITH THE KEY *9 4HE DISPLAY
THEN CONFIRMS THE ERASURE )F ERASURE IS NOT REQUIRED
PRESS KEY . OR SIMPLY PAGE ON
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 2ESET
2 % 3 % 4

ADDRESS BLOCK
2EQUEST WHETHER THE TOTAL OF SWITCHED SHORT CIRCUIT

CURRENTS SHOULD BE SET TO ZERO
2 % 3 % 4
! . . 5 . #
2EQUEST WHETHER THE EARTH FAULT REPORT BUFFER STORE FOR

EARTH FAULTS IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS SHOULD BE
ERASED
$URING ERASURE OF THE STORES WHICH MAY TAKE SOME TIME THE DISPLAY SHOWS 4!3+ ). 02/'2%33 !FTER ERASURE
THE RELAY ACKNOWLEDGES ERASURE EG

2 % 3 % 4
% 8 % # 5 4 % $
# ' #

3! 6

/FF/N CONTROL OF PART FUNCTIONS OF THE DEVICE
$URING OPERATION OF THE PROTECTION RELAY IT MAY BE DE

SIRED TO CONTROL THE RELAY MANUALLY OR FROM SYSTEM CRI
TERIA TEMPORARILY TO SWITCH OFF PARTIAL FUNCTIONS OF THE
RELAY OR TO SWITCH THEM ON ONLY UNDER SPECIFIC CONDI
TIONS %XAMPLES MAY BE THE SWITCHING OFF OF THE TELE
PROTECTION FUNCTION DURING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OF
THE TRANSMISSION MEDIUM OR THE SWITCHING ON OR OFF
OF THE AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM WHEN A TRANSFER BUS IS
BEING USED DEPENDENT UPON WHETHER A TRANSFORMER
OR LINE BRANCH IS SWITCHED TO THE TRANSFER
3! ALLOWS PARTIAL FUNCTIONS TO BE SWITCHED ON OR
OFF VIA BINARY INPUTS OR MANUAL OPERATION VIA THE INTE
GRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE
AT THE FRONT USING A PERSONAL COMPUTER
&OR SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IT IS OF COURSE NECES
SARY THAT THE BINARY INPUTS HAVE BEEN MARSHALLED TO
THE CORRESPONDING SWITCHING FUNCTIONS &URTHER
MORE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT A BINARY INPUT IS REQUIRED
FOR EACH FUNCTION SWITCHING OFF AND SWITCHING ON
4HE SWITCHING COMMAND IS STORED IN THE RELAY AND
PROTECTED AGAINST AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE FUNC
TION OF A BI STABLE STORE 4HE COMMAND CAN BE AN
NUNCIATED VIA AN ANNUNCIATION RELAY OR ,%$ DISPLAY
&OR SWITCHING VIA THE INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL OR
THE FRONT INTERFACE A CODE WORD IS NECESSARY 4HE
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ARE FOUND AT THE BEGINNING OF THE
PARAMETER BLOCK OF EACH PROTECTION OR SUPPLEMENTA
RY FUNCTION 4HE SWITCH CONDITION SHOWN IN THE DIS
PLAY CAN BE CHANGED OVER USING THE .O KEY .
4HE OPPOSITE SWITCH CONDITION THEN APPEARS IN THE
DISPLAY %ACH CHANGE OF CONDITION MUST BE CON
FIRMED WITH THE % KEY 4HE CHANGE OVER IS FIRST RE
CORDED IN THE RELAY WHEN CODEWORD OPERATION HAS
BEEN TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY THE KEY COMBINA
TION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOLLOWED
BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE QUESTION
3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH THE
9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME
VALID NOW 4HE SWITCHED CONDITIONS ARE THEN PERMA
NENTLY STORED IN %%02/-S AND PROTECTED AGAINST
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FAILURE THE DISPLAY CONFIRMS .%7
3%44).'3 3!6%$ )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . IN
! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /. WHEN THE ON COMMAND
HAS BEEN GIVEN BY BOTH THE BINARY INPUT !.$ ALSO
FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR INTERFACE

! FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /&& WHEN THE OFF COMMAND

IS GIVEN BY %)4(%2 THE BINARY INPUT /2 FROM THE OP
ERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HUS IT IS EN
SURED THAT A PARTIAL FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE SWITCHED ON
FROM THAT PLACE WHERE IT WAS PREVIOUSLY SWITCHED OFF
#ONTROL INPUTS WHICH ARE NOT MARSHALLED TO A BINARY
INPUT ARE REGARDED FROM THAT LOCATION AS SWITCHED
ON SO THAT CHANGE OF THE CONDITION IS POSSIBLE FROM
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR THE OPERATING INTERFACE
!T THE OPERATOR PANEL AND THE OPERATING INTERFACE THE
FACTORY SETTING IS EQUALLY THAT ALL PARTIAL FUNCTIONS ARE
SWITCHED ON SO THAT SWITCHING VIA BINARY INPUTS IS
POSSIBLE
4HE COMPLETION OF A SWITCHING COMMAND IS INDE
PENDENT OF ITS CAUSE OUTPUT AS AN OPERATIONAL AN
NUNCIATION
FUNCTION OFF #OMES AT THE INSTANT OF
SWITCH OFF
FUNCTION OFF
SWITCHED ON
'OES AT THE INSTANT THAT IT IS
4HESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE LISTED IN BLOCK UNDER

/0%2!4)/.!, !..5.#)!4)/.3 AND CAN ALSO BE
TRANSMITTED VIA THE SYSTEM ,3! INTERFACE TO A CEN
TRAL COMPUTER !LSO THEY CAN BE MARSHALLED AS BINARY
OUTPUTS THE SIGNAL RELAY THEN INDICATES THE SWITCH
ED OFF CONDITION
&OR ANNUNCIATIONS ONE MUST DIFFERENTIATE
$IRECT CONFIRMATION OF A BINARY INPUT IS AVAILABLE AS
LONG AS THE CORRESPONDING BINARY INPUT IS ENER
GIZED )T CAN BE OUTPUT VIA A SIGNAL RELAY OR ,%$ )N
THE SUMMARY OF ALL ANNUNCIATIONS !PPENDIX #
THESE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE IDENTIFIED WITH A SYM
BOL
4HE COMPLETION INDICATION OF THE SWITCHED OFF
CONDITION IS SIGNALIZED INDEPENDENTLY OF THE
SOURCE OF THE COMMAND )T APPEARS #OMES AT
THE INSTANT OF SWITCH OFF AND DISAPPEARS 'OES
AT THE INSTANT OF SWITCHING ON
4HE FOLLOWING SURVEY SHOWS THE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
AND ALSO INDICATES WHICH CONFIRMATION INDICATIONS
ARE GENERATED
# ' #
3!6
"INARY INPUT
CONFIRMATION

$ ) 3 4 0 2 / 4
#OMPLETION INDICATION
COMES AND GOES
$ISTANCE PROTECTION WITHOUT EMERGENCY /# PROT
/ .
/ & &

0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP MODE FOR DISTANCE

PROTECTION
0 5 4 4
/ .
$IS0544 ON
/ & &

$IS0544 OFF
$IS4ELE OFF
$IS0/44 ON
/ & &
$IS0/44 OFF

$IS4ELE OFF
%CHO FUNCTION FOR TELEPROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTEC

TION
% # ( /
/ .
IS SWITCHED OFF ALSO TOGETHER WITH
/ & &

0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP MODE FOR DISTANCE

PROTECTION
0 / 4 4
/ .

$IST OFF
% - % 2 '
/ #
/ .
/ & &

! , ! 2 -

4 ( % 2 - ! ,
/ ,
/ . , 9
/ .
/, ON
/ & &
/, OFF

%MER OFF
& 5 3 %
/ .
& ! ) ,

/, 0ROT OFF
/ & &
# ' #

3! 6

! , ! 2 -
% ! 2 4 ( & ! 5 , 4
%ARTH FAULT DETECTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
/ . , 9
/ .
%& $ET ON
/ & &
%& $ET OFF

% &
$ 4
/ .

% &
# / - 0 ! 2
/ .
$IRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR

EARTHED SYSTEMS
%& COMPOFF
% &
% # ( /
/ .
% &
) 4
/ .
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED

SYSTEMS NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME

! 2
& 5 . # 4
/ .
3 9 . #
# ( % # +
/ & &

!2 OFF
)NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

3YNC ON
3YNC OFF
/ & &
/ .
)NTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
!2 OFF
/ .

%& 0ROT OFF
!2 ON
/ & &

%& $IR OFF
%CHO FUNCTION FOR DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT

PROTECTION
/ & &

IS SWITCHED OFF TOGETHER WITH %& #/-0!2
/ & &

%& 0ROT OFF
%& COMPON
/ & &

%& $ET OFF
(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED

SYSTEMS DIRECTIONAL DEFINITE TIME WITH NON DIRECTIONAL
BACK UP STAGE
/ & &

3YNC OFF
!TTENTION 7HEN THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLT

AGE CHECK FUNCTION IS SWITCHED OFF EACH CLOSING COM
MAND IS RELEASED WITHOUT ANY CHECK
3 9 . - ! . # ,
)NTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK DURING MANU

AL CLOSE
IS SWITCHED OFF TOGETHER WITH ADDRESS
# ' #
3!6

)NFORMATION TO ,3! DURING TEST OPERATION
7HEN THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A CENTRAL STORAGE DE

VICE OR LOCALIZED SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM AND
THE PROTOCOL ACCORDING 6$%7:6%) )%#
IS USED THEN THE INFORMATIONS WHICH ARE
TRANSMITTED TO THE CENTRAL COMPUTING SYSTEM CAN BE
INFLUENCED
4HE STANDARDIZED PROTOCOL ALLOWS ALL ANNUNCIATIONS
MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES TO BE TAGGED WITH
THE ORIGIN TEST OPERATION WHICH OCCUR WHILE THE
RELAY IS TESTED 4HUS THESE MESSAGES CAN BE DISTIN
GUISHED FROM THOSE WHICH OCCUR DURING REAL OPERA
TION !DDITIONALLY IT IS POSSIBLE TO BLOCK ALL ANNUNCI
ATIONS MESSAGES AND MEASURED VALUES TO ,3! DUR
ING TEST OPERATION
4HIS FEATURES CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED VIA BINARY INPUTS
OR USING THE INTEGRATED OPERATING KEYBOARD OR VIA THE
OPERATING 0# INTERFACE
)N ORDER TO ACCOMPLISH SWITCH OVER VIA BINARY IN
PUTS THE RESPECTIVE INPUTS MUST HAVE BEEN AS
SIGNED DURING MARSHALLING REFER TO 3ECTION
4HE FOLLOWING INPUT FUNCTIONS ARE SUITABLE
&.O
3YS 4EST FOR TAGGING THE MESSAGES

AND MEASURED VALUES WITH THE ORIGIN 4EST
OPERATION

3 9 3
! . . 5 . #

3 9 3
6 $ % 7
- % ! 3 6 ! ,
4 % 3 4
/ & &
3YS -- BLOCK FOR BLOCKING ALL MES

SAGES AND MEASURED VALUES
)N ORDER TO CARRY OUT SWITCH OVER BY THE OPERATOR

ENTRY OF THE CODEWORD IS NECESSARY REFER TO 3ECTION
&OR THIS PURPOSE ADDRESS BLOCK IS AVAIL
ABLE PROVIDED THE 6$%7:6%) PROTOCOL )%#
HAS BEEN CHOSEN DURING CONFIGURATION
OF THE SERIAL SYSTEM INTERFACE 3ECTION ADDRESS
ANDOR 6$%7 #/-0!4)",% OR 6$%7 %8
4%.$%$ 4HE BLOCK IS CALLED UP BY PAGING WITH THE
KEYS OR OR DIRECTLY BY KEYING IN THE CODE $!
% 5SE KEY ! TO SCROLL TO ADDRESS "Y
PRESSING THE .O KEY . THE POSITIONS OF THIS SWITCH
ARE CHANGED 4HE DESIRED POSITION MUST BE CON
FIRMED WITH THE ENTER KEY %
!S WITH EVERY SETTINGS OF THE DEVICE FOR WHICH CODE
WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY CODEWORD OPERATION MUST
BE TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY USING THE KEY COMBI
NATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOL
LOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE
QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH
THE 9ES KEY *9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BE
"EGINNING OF BLOCK !NNUNCIATIONS AND MEASURED VAL

UES FOR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH 6$%7:6%) COMPAT
IBLE PROTOCOL )%#
/NLY FOR 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE PROTOCOL )%#

IN /. POSITION THE 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE ANNUNCI
ATIONS )%# ARE ASSIGNED WITH THE ORIGIN
TEST OPERATION
/ .

&.O
ADDRESS BLOCK
3 9 3
/ & &
/ .
" , / # +
/NLY FOR 6$%7:6%) COMPATIBLE PROTOCOL )%#

IN /. POSITION NO ANNUNCIATIONS AND MEASURED VALUES
ARE TRANSMITTED TO THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
$O NOT FORGET TO SWITCH THE ADDRESSES BACK TO /&& AFTER HAVING FINISHED TEST OPERATIONS
# ' #

3! 6

3ELECTION OF PARAMETER SETS
ADDRESS BLOCK
5P TO DIFFERENT SETS OF PARAMETERS CAN BE SELECTED

FOR THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS IE THE ADDRESSES
ABOVE AND BELOW 4HESE PARAMETER SETS
CAN BE SWITCHED OVER DURING OPERATION LOCALLY USING
THE OPERATOR PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE US
ING A PERSONAL COMPUTER OR ALSO REMOTELY USING
BINARY INPUTS OR THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
4HE FIRST PARAMETER SET IS IDENTIFIED AS SET ! THE OTHER
SETS ARE " # AND $ %ACH OF THESE SETS HAS BEEN SET
DURING PARAMETERIZING 3ECTION PROVIDED
THE SWITCH OVER FACILITY IS USED

2EAD OUT OF SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER

SET
)N ORDER TO LOOK UP THE SETTINGS OF A PARAMETER SET IN

THE DISPLAY IT IS SUFFICIENT TO GO TO ANY ADDRESS OF THE
FUNCTION PARAMETERS IE ADDRESSES ABOVE AND
BELOW EITHER BY DIRECT ADDRESSING USING KEY
$! ENTERING THE FOUR FIGURE ADDRESS CODE AND TER
MINATING WITH ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING THROUGH THE
DISPLAY WITH OR 9OU CAN SWITCH OVER TO LOOK UP A
DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET EG
0RESS KEY COMBINATION & IE FIRST THE FUNCTION
KEY & AND THEN THE NUMBER KEY !LL DISPLAYED
PARAMETERS NOW REFER TO PARAMETER SET "
4HE PARAMETER SET IS INDICATED IN THE DISPLAY BY A
LEADING CHARACTER ! TO $ BEFORE THE ADDRESS NUM
BER INDICATING THE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION

0 ! 2 ! - % 4 % 2
# ( ! . ' %
/ 6 % 2
)T IS POSSIBLE TO SCROLL THROUGH THE INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS

ES USING THE ! KEY OR TO SCROLL BACKWARDS WITH "
!DDRESS SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER
SET WITH WHICH THE RELAY OPERATES
)N ORDER TO SWITCH OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET
SCROLL ON WITH ! TO ADDRESS 5SING THE
.O KEY . YOU CAN CHANGE TO ANY DESIRED PARAM
ETER SET ALTERNATIVELY YOU CAN DECIDE THAT THE PA
RAMETER SETS ARE TO BE SWITCHED OVER FROM BINARY IN
PUTS OR VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE USINF THE 6$%7
:6%) PROTOCOL )%# )F THE DESIRED SET
OR POSSIBILITY APPEARS IN THE DISPLAY PRESS THE ENTER

4HE CORRESPONDING PROCEDURE IS USED FOR THE OTHER

PARAMETER SETS
C +EY COMBINATION &
C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET !

ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET "
C +EY COMBINATION &

ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET #
C +EY COMBINATION &
ACCESS TO PARAMETER SET $
4HE RELAY OPERATES ALWAYS WITH THE ACTIVE PARAMETER

SET EVEN DURING READ OUT OF THE PARAMETERS OF ANY
DESIRED PARAMETER SET 4HE CHANGE OVER PROCE
DURE DESCRIBED HERE IS THEREFORE ONLY VALID FOR
READ OUT OF PARAMETERS IN THE DISPLAY

#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER

SET FROM THE OPERATING PANEL
&OR CHANGE OVER TO A DIFFERENT PARAMETER SET IE IF

A DIFFERENT SET SHALL BE ACTIVATED THE ADDRESS BLOCK
IS TO BE USED &OR THIS CODEWORD ENTRY IS RE
QUIRED
4HE BLOCK FOR PROCESSING PARAMETER SETS IS REACHED
BY PRESSING THE DIRECT ADDRESS KEY $! FOLLOWED BY
THE ADDRESS AND ENTER KEY % OR BY PAGING
THROUGH THE DISPLAY WITH OR 4HE HEADING OF THE
BLOCK WILL APPEAR
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK 0ARAMETER CHANGE OVER

PROCESSING OF PARAMETER SETS
KEY %
!S WITH EVERY SETTINGS OF THE DEVICE FOR WHICH CODE
WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY CODEWORD OPERATION MUST
BE TERMINATED 4HIS IS DONE BY USING THE KEY COMBI
NATION & % IE DEPRESSING THE FUNCTION KEY & FOL
LOWED BY THE ENTRY KEY % 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS THE
QUESTION 3!6% .%7 3%44).'3 #ONFIRM WITH
THE 9ES KEY 9 THAT THE NEW SETTINGS SHALL BECOME
VALID NOW )F YOU PRESS THE .O KEY . INSTEAD
CODEWORD OPERATION WILL BE ABORTED IE ALL ALTER
ATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE THE LAST
# ' #
3!6

3 % 4
! # 4 ) 6
0 ! 2 ! -

! # 4 ) 6 ! 4 ) / .
3 % 4
3 % 4
"
3 % 4
3 % 4
3 % 4
" 9
" ) . ) . 0 5 4
3 % 4
" 9
, 3 !

!DDRESS SHOWS THE ACTUALLY ACTIVE PARAMETER SET
# / . 4 2
#HANGE OVER OF THE ACTIVE PARAMETER

SET VIA BINARY INPUTS
)F CHANGE OVER OF PARAMETER SETS IS INTENDED TO BE

CARRIED OUT VIA BINARY INPUTS THE FOLLOWING IS TO BE
HEEDED
,OCALLY IE FROM THE OPERATOR PANEL OR FROM 0# VIA
THE OPERATING INTERFACE !#4)6!4)/. MUST BE
SWITCHED TO 3%4 "9 ").).054 REFER 3ECTION

LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR CONTROL OF
THE PARAMETER SETS 4HESE BINARY INPUTS ARE
DESIGNATED 0ARAM3ELEC AND 0ARAM
3ELEC &.O AND
4HE LOGICAL BINARY INPUTS MUST BE ALLOCATED TO
PHYSICAL INPUT MODULES REFER 3ECTION IN OR
DER TO ALLOW CONTROL !N INPUT IS TREATED AS NOT EN
ERGIZED WHEN IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY PHYSICAL IN
PUT
5SE THE .O KEY . TO PAGE THROUGH THE ALTERNATIVE

POSSIBILITIES 4HE DESIRED POSSIBILITY IS SELECTED BY
PRESSING THE ENTER KEY %
)F YOU SELECT 3%4 "9 ").).054 THEN THE PARAMETER

SET CAN BE CHANGED OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS SEE 3EC
TION
)F YOU SELECT 3%4 "9 ,3! #/.42 THEN THE PARAMETER
SET CAN BE CHANGED OVER VIA THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
"INARY INPUT
0ARAM3ELEC
0ARAM3ELEC
NO
NO
3ET !
YES
NO
3ET "
NO
YES
3ET #
YES
YES
3ET $
NO INPUT NOT ENERGIZED

YES INPUT ENERGIZED
4ABLE 0ARAMETER SELECTION VIA BINARY INPUT
! SIMPLIFIED CONNECTION EXAMPLE IS SHOWN IN &IGURE

/F COURSE THE BINARY INPUTS MUST BE DECLARED IN
NORMALLY OPEN ./ MODE
# ' #
3ELECTOR SWITCH FOR

PARAM SET
!
"
#
$
4HE CONTROL INPUT SIGNALS MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY

PRESENT AS LONG AS THE SELECTED PARAMETER SET
SHALL BE ACTIVE
4HE ACTIVE PARAMETER SETS ARE ASSIGNED TO THE LOGICAL
BINARY INPUTS AS SHOWN IN 4ABLE
CAUSES
ACTIVE SET
&IGURE
!
"
#
$
"INARY INPUT
0ARAM3ELEC
,
"INARY INPUT
0ARAM3ELEC
#ONNECTION SCHEME FOR PARAMETER

CHANGE OVER VIA BINARY INPUTS

3! 6

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

'ENERAL
0REREQUISITE FOR COMMISSIONING IS THE COMPLETION OF

THE PREPARATION PROCEDURES DETAILED IN #HAPTER
7ARNING
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DURING OPERATION
.ON OBSERVANCE OF THE SAFETY RULES CAN
RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPER
TY DAMAGE
/NLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHALL WORK ON
AND AROUND THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER BECOM
ING THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL WARNINGS
AND SAFETY NOTICES OF THIS MANUAL AS WELL
AS WITH THE APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS
0ARTICULAR ATTENTION MUST BE DRAWN TO THE
FOLLOWING
!
4HE EARTHING SCREW OF THE DEVICE

MUST BE CONNECTED SOLIDLY TO THE
PROTECTIVE EARTH CONDUCTOR BEFORE
ANY OTHER CONNECTION IS MADE
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT
ON ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CON
NECTED TO THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR TO THE
MEASURING AND TEST QUANTITIES
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT
IN THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNEC
TION OF THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE STORAGE
CAPACITORS
4HE LIMIT VALUES GIVEN IN THE 4ECHNI
CAL DATA 3ECTION MUST NOT BE EX
CEEDED AT ALL NOT EVEN DURING TESTING
AND COMMISSIONING
7HEN TESTING THE UNIT WITH A SECONDARY INJECTION TEST

SET IT MUST BE ENSURED THAT NO OTHER MEASURED VAL
UES ARE CONNECTED AND THAT THE TRIPPING LEADS TO THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP COILS HAVE BEEN INTERRUPTED

$!.'%2
3ECONDARY CONNECTIONS OF THE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS MUST BE SHORT CIRCUITED
BEFORE THE CURRENT LEADS TO THE RELAY ARE
INTERRUPTED
)F A TEST SWITCH IS INSTALLED WHICH AUTOMATI
CALLY SHORT CIRCUITS THE CURRENT TRANSFORM
ER SECONDARY LEADS IT IS SUFFICIENT TO SET THIS
SWITCH TO THE 4EST POSITION 4HE SHORT
CIRCUIT SWITCH MUST BE CHECKED BEFORE
HAND REFER 3ECTION
)T IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE ACTUAL SETTINGS FOR THE

RELAY BE USED FOR THE TESTING PROCEDURE )F THESE VAL
UES ARE NOT YET AVAILABLE TEST THE RELAY WITH THE FAC
TORY SETTINGS )N THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST
SEQUENCE THE PRESET SETTINGS ARE ASSUMED UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED FOR DIFFERENT SETTING VALUES FORMU
LAE ARE GIVEN WHERE NECESSARY
&OR THE FUNCTIONAL TEST A THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL
VOLTAGE SOURCE WITH INDIVIDUALLY ADJUSTABLE VOLTAGE
OUTPUTS TOGETHER WITH A THREE PHASE SYMMETRICAL
CURRENT SOURCE WITH INDIVIDUALLY ADJUSTABLE CURRENTS
SHOULD BE AVAILABLE &OR CHECKING THE DISTANCE
ZONES !2 TELEPROTECTION AND BACK UP OVERCUR
RENT A SINGLE PHASE CURRENT SOURCE IS SUFFICIENT BUT
THIS IS NOT ADEQUATE FOR A CORRECT FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF
THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYSTEMS AND POWER
SWING DETECTOR 0HASE DISPLACEMENT BETWEEN TEST
CURRENT )0 AND TEST VOLTAGE 50 SHOULD PREFERABLY BE
CONTINUOUSLY ADJUSTABLE BUT AT LEAST SETTINGS OF ^
AND ^ SHALL BE AVAILABLE
)F UNSYMMETRICAL CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES OCCUR DURING
THE TESTS IT IS LIKELY THAT THE ASYMMETRY MONITORING WILL
FREQUENTLY OPERATE 4HIS IS OF NO CONCERN BECAUSE
THE CONDITION OF STEADY STATE MEASURED VALUES IS
MONITORED AND UNDER NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
THESE ARE SYMMETRICAL UNDER SHORT CIRCUIT CONDI
TIONS THESE MONITORING SYSTEMS ARE NOT EFFECTIVE !D
DITIONALLY UNSYMMETRICAL VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE THE
FUSE FAILURE MONITOR TO OPERATE 4HIS SWITCHES THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OUT OF SERVICE SO THAT DISTANCE MEA
SUREMENT IS NOT POSSIBLE )F THIS HAPPENS THIS MONI
TORING MUST EITHER BE MADE INEFFECTIVE DURING THE TEST
BY SWITCHING IT /&& UNDER !DDRESS OR IT MUST
BE ENSURED THAT DURING ALL TESTS WITHOUT EARTH CURRENT
DETECTION NO RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OCCURS
# ' #
3!6
./4% 4HE ACCURACY WHICH CAN BE ACHIEVED DURING

TESTING DEPENDS ON THE ACCURACY OF THE TESTING
EQUIPMENT 4HE ACCURACY VALUES SPECIFIED IN THE
4ECHNICAL DATA CAN ONLY BE REPRODUCED UNDER THE
REFERENCE CONDITIONS SET DOWN IN )%# RESP 6$%
PART AND WITH THE USE OF PRECISION MEASUR
ING INSTRUMENTS 4HE TESTS ARE THEREFORE TO BE LOOKED
UPON PURELY AS FUNCTIONAL TESTS
$URING ALL THE TESTS IT IS IMPORTANT TO ENSURE THAT THE
CORRECT COMMAND TRIP CONTACTS CLOSE THAT THE
PROPER INDICATIONS APPEAR AT THE ,%$S AND THE OUT
PUT RELAYS FOR REMOTE SIGNALLING )F THE RELAY IS CON
NECTED TO A CENTRAL MEMORY DEVICE VIA THE SERIAL IN
TERFACE CORRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE RELAY
AND THE MASTER STATION MUST BE CHECKED

!FTER TESTS WHICH CAUSE ,%$ INDICATIONS TO APPEAR

THESE SHOULD BE RESET AT LEAST ONCE BY EACH OF THE
POSSIBLE METHODS THE RESET BUTTON ON THE FRONT PLATE
AND VIA THE REMOTE RESET RELAY SEE CONNECTION DIA
GRAMS !PPENDIX ! )F THE RESET FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN
TESTED RESETTING THE STORED INDICATIONS IS NO MORE
NECESSARY AS THEY ARE ERASED AUTOMATICALLY WITH
EACH NEW PICK UP OF THE RELAY AND REPLACED BY THE
NEW ANNUNCIATIONS
./4% 7HEN THE RELAY IS CONFIGURED SUCH THAT THE
POSITION OF THE AUXILIARY CONTACT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
IS PROCESSED IE THE CORRESPONDING INPUT IS MAR
SHALLED THE TRIP COMMAND OF THE RELAY IS MAINTAINED
AS LONG AS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS SIGNALLED TO BE
CLOSED "UT THE TRIP COMMAND IS DE ENERGIZED AFTER
S PROVIDED THE FAULT CURRENT IS SWITCHED OFF
4ESTING THE OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTION STAGE AND EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT

TIME PROTECTION
!PPLY SYMMETRICAL RATED VOLTAGES TO ALL THREE PHASES

TO AVOID IMMEDIATE TRIP AFTER PICK UP
4ESTING CAN BE PERFORMED WITH SINGLE PHASE TWO
PHASE OR THREE PHASE TEST CURRENT WITHOUT DIFFICUL
TIES
3ETTING PARAMETER )PH ADDRESS IS DECISIVE
FOR THE PHASE CURRENTS &OR SETTING VALUES UP TO
X ). THE CURRENT CAN BE INCREASED GRADUALLY IN ANY
PHASE UNTIL THE STAGE PICKS UP
#AUTION
4EST CURRENTS LARGER THAN TIMES ). MAY
OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF APPLIED
CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION FOR
OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A COOLING
DOWN PERIOD
&OR TESTS CURRENTS ABOVE X ). MEASUREMENT SHALL BE

PERFORMED DYNAMICALLY )T SHOULD BE ENSURED THAT
THE RELAY PICKS UP AT TIMES SETTING VALUE AND DOES
NOT PICK UP AT TIMES SETTING VALUE 4HE RESET VALUE
SHOULD LIE AT OF THE PICK UP VALUE
# ' #
7HEN FOR TEST CURRENT PHASE EARTH THE SET VALUE FOR
)PH FACTORY SETTING X ). IS EXCEEDED THE
PICK UP INDICATION FOR )% ,%$ AT FACTORY SETTING
AND PICK UP INDICATION APPEARS FOR THE TESTED
PHASE ,%$ FOR , OR ,%$ FOR , OR ,%$ FOR , AT
FACTORY SETTING 7HEN TESTING PHASE PHASE PICK
UP INDICATION APPEARS FOR THE ASSOCIATED PHASES
&INAL TIMES ARE NORMALLY TESTED AT X SETTING VALUE
$EPENDENT UPON POLARITY OF THE VOLTAGE DIRECTIONAL
FINAL TIME 4 OR NON DIRECTIONAL FINAL TIME 4 WILL AP
PLY ADDRESS OR CONSIDER ALSO ADDRESS
FOR DIRECTIONAL TRIP )T MUST BE NOTED THAT THE SET
TIMES ARE PURE DELAY TIMES OPERATING TIMES OF THE
MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED
0UT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB IN TRIPPED POSITION
2EPEAT TIME MEASUREMENT FOR ONE PHASE .OW THE
DELAY TIME FOR EMERGENCY BACK UP OPERATION IS
APPLICABLE 4 ) ADDRESS 4 ) ADDRESS
4 )% ADDRESS ! PREREQUISITE IS THAT
THE FUNCTION %-%2' /# %8)34 IS SELECTED UNDER
ADDRESS IN THE SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS 3ECTION
AND THIS FUNCTION IS SWITCHED /. UNDER AD
DRESS

3! 6

4ESTING THE VOLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5) IF FITTED
#LOSE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB

4ESTING CAN BE PERFORMED WITH SINGLE PHASE TWO
PHASE OR THREE PHASE TEST CURRENT WITHOUT DIFFICUL
TIES
3ET TEST VOLTAGE TO 6
3LOWLY INCREASE TEST CURRENT OF ONE PHASE UNTIL THE
FAULT DETECTOR PICKS UP
C 7HEN THE TEST CURRENT EXCEEDS THE SETTING VALUE
ADDRESS TIMES ). WHEN DELIVERED
PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS FOR THE ASSOCIATED
PHASES
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ WHEN DELIVERED FOR
PHASE , FOR A DIFFERENT PHASE ACCORDINGLY
,%$ FOR , ,%$ FOR ,
3WITCH OFF TEST CURRENT
4HE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH OF THE PICK UP CHAR
ACTERISTIC IS SHOWN IN &IGURE 7HEN DELIVERED THE
SLOPE OF THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH IS
56
3LOWLY DECREASE VOLTAGE UNTIL THE FAULT DETECTOR PICKS

UP
C 7HEN THE TEST VOLTAGE GOES BELOW THE SET VALUE OF
ADDRESS 6 AT DELIVERY PICK UP AN
NUNCIATION OCCURS FOR THE ASSOCIATED PHASE
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ AT DELIVERY FOR
PHASE , FOR A DIFFERENT PHASE ACCORDINGLY
AND
,%$
FOR
,
$IST&LT ,
$IST&LT , AND ,%$ FOR ,
)F VOLTAGE CONTROL IS CARRIED OUT WITH 5PH PH SET TEST
VOLTAGE OF THE TESTED LOOP TO APPROXIMATELY THE RATED
VOLTAGE SET TEST CURRENT OF BOTH THE PHASES TO TWICE
THE SETTING VALUE )PH ADDRESS PHASE RELA
TIONSHIP OF TEST VOLTAGE AND TEST CURRENT IS IRRELEVANT
4HE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE IS DECISIVE FOR PICK
UP
3LOWLY DECREASE VOLTAGE UNTIL THE FAULT DETECTOR PICKS
UP
C 7HEN THE TEST VOLTAGE GETS SMALLER THAN THE SET
VALUE OF ADDRESS 6 AT DELIVERY
PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS FOR BOTH THE ASSO
CIATED PHASES
$IST&LT, AND ,%$ AND ,%$ AT DELIV
ERY FOR PHASE LOOP , , FOR A DIFFERENT LOOP AC
CORDINGLY $IST&LT, AND ,%$ AND
,%$ FOR PHASE LOOP , , $IST&LT,
AND ,%$ AND ,%$ FOR PHASE LOOP , ,

4HE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED ABOVE IS VALID FOR THE PRE

SET VALUES OF 5PHE) ADDRESS 5PHE)
ADDRESS 5PHPH) ADDRESS AND
5PHPH) ADDRESS )N THIS CASE THE SLOPE OF
THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH OF THE PICK UP CHAR
ACTERISTIC IS IE 5PHE) 5PHE) AND
5PHPH) 5PHPH)
5)

5)

)F THE VOLTAGE DEPENDENT BRANCH IS INCLINED THE EX

PECTED PICK UP VALUE OF THE VOLTAGE CAN BE CALCU
LATED ACCORDING THE FOLLOWING FORMULA PROVIDED THE
TEST CURRENT IS TIMES THE SETTING VALUE OF )PH

)PH
)PH
0ICK UP VALUE 5

)).
&IGURE
6OLTAGE CONTROLLED FAULT DETECTION 5)

CHARACTERISTIC
)F VOLTAGE CONTROL IS CARRIED OUT WITH 5PH % SET TEST

VOLTAGE OF THE TESTED PHASE TO APPROXIMATELY THE
RATED PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE SET TEST CURRENT OF
THE SAME PHASE TO TWICE THE SETTING VALUE )PH AD
DRESS 4HE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE IS DECI
SIVE FOR PICK UP

5) ; 5) 5) =
)PH
)PH )PH
WHERE
5) IS THE SETTING VALUE 5PHE) ADDRESS
WITH 5PH E CONTROL BUT 5PHPH) ADDRESS
WITH 5PH PH CONTROL
5) IS THE SETTING VALUE 5PHE) ADDRESS
WITH 5PH E CONTROL BUT 5PHPH) ADDRESS
WITH 5PH PH CONTROL
# ' #
3!6

4ESTING THE IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION IF FITTED
#LOSE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER MCB

!LWAYS APPLY THREE PHASE TEST VOLTAGE ENSURE
CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION
&EED A TEST CURRENT )0 X ). INTO THE LOOP UNDER TEST
)F THE TEST VOLTAGE WOULD EXCEED RATED VOLTAGE WHEN
THE THRESHOLD IS REACHED REDUCE TEST CURRENT BUT
ONLY SO FAR THAT OPERATION OF MINIMUM CURRENT DETEC
TION )PH ADDRESS IS GUARANTEED 4HE TEST
CURRENT MUST BE KEPT CONSTANT DURING A TEST
$ETERMINE THE THRESHOLD POINT BY SLOW REDUCTION OF

THE VOLTAGE #HECK INDICATORS AND OUTPUTS 3INCE THE
FAULT DETECTION POLYGON IS MADE UP OF STRAIGHT LINES
&IGURE DIFFERENT FORMULAE MUST BE USED FOR THE
THRESHOLD VOLTAGES DEPENDENT UPON THE INTERSEC
TIONS OF THESE LINES 4HE GENERAL FORMULAE ARE
&OR THE REACTANCE INTERSECTIONS 8 REACH
506 +8 8q! )0).
&OR THE RESISTANCE INTERSECTIONS 2 LIMITATION
506 +2 2! )0).
8
6ALIDITY
WHERE )0
).
50
8q!
6ALIDITY RANGE +8
8!
RANGE +2
TEST CURRENT
RATED CURRENT OF RELAY
TEST VOLTAGE AT THRESHOLD
SETTING VALUE 8! FOR 8 AXIS POSI
TIVE OR SETTING VALUE 8 ! FOR 8 AXIS
NEGATIVE
SETTING VALUE 2! OR 2!% FOR 2 AXIS
50
2!
2 AXIS NEGATIVE
FACTOR FOR 8 INTERSECTION ACCORDING
4ABLE
4ABLE
POSITIVE FOR
+8
+2
)0
2!
2!%
6ALIDITY
RANGE +2
6ALIDITY RANGE +8
&IGURE

ISTIC
WITH FAULT TYPE

PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
4ABLE
0
50 6
50 6
50 6
0
50 6
50 6
50 6
&OR PHASE TO EARTH TESTING THE TEST CURRENT IS

APPLIED TO ONE PHASE AND THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
&OR TESTING PHASE TO PHASE THE CURRENT MUST FLOW
THROUGH THE TESTED PHASES IN OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE )T IS ES
SENTIAL TO ENSURE ABSOLUTE SYMMETRY OF THE TWO
PHASE VOLTAGES OTHERWISE ERROR WILL OCCUR
&OR THREE PHASE TESTING IT IS REASONABLE TO MEA
SURE ONE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE AND THE ASSO
CIATED PHASE CURRENT
&OR THE FACTORY SET VALUES AND )0). THE RESULTANT
VOLTAGES WILL BE AS 4ABLE
O
0
50 6
50 6
50 6
0

50 6
50 6
50 6
4EST VOLTAGES 50 WITH TEST CURRENT )0 | ). AND PRESETTING
# ' #

3! 6
+8
+2
WITH FAULT TYPE

0 ^^
GENERAL
PHASE

SIN 0

COS 0
PHASE

SIN 0

COS 0
PHASE
8% 8,
8 %8 ,
SIN 0
2% 2,
4ABLE
0 ^^
GENERAL
2 %2 ,
COS 0
4EST FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS
)F DIFFERENT VALUES HAVE BEEN SET FOR 2! ADDRESS

AND 2! ADDRESS THEN 2! IS VALID FOR
PHASE ANGLES BETWEEN 0() ! AND 0() ! AD
DRESS AND BETWEEN THE COMPLEMENT ANGLES
0() ! AND 0() ! &OR OTHER PHASE

ANGLES SETTING VALUE 2! IS DECISIVE
)F DIFFERENT VALUES HAVE BEEN SET FOR 2!% ADDRESS
AND 2!% ADDRESS THEN 2!% IS VALID
FOR PHASE ANGLES BETWEEN 0() !% AND 0() !%
ADDRESS AND BETWEEN THE COMPLEMENT
0() !% AND 0() !% &OR DIF
ANGLES
FERENT PHASE ANGLES SETTING VALUE 2!% IS DECISIVE

4ESTING THE DISTANCE ZONES
!LWAYS APPLY THREE PHASE TEST VOLTAGE ENSURE

CLOCKWISE PHASE ROTATION +EEP THE VOLTAGES IN THE
UNTESTED PHASES AT APPROXIMATELY RATED VALUE
&EED A TEST CURRENT )0 ). INTO THE LOOP UNDER TEST
)F THE TEST VOLTAGE WOULD EXCEED RATED VOLTAGE WHEN
THE THRESHOLD IS REACHED REDUCE TEST CURRENT BUT
ONLY SO FAR THAT OPERATION OF THE OVERCURRENT DETEC
TION ADDRESS OR OF THE MINIMUM CURRENT DE
TECTION )PH IS GUARANTEED ADDRESS OR
4HE TEST CURRENT MUST BE KEPT CONSTANT DURING A TEST
4ABLE GIVES THE FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR YOUR OWN

SETTINGS FOR TEST ANGLES 0 AND AND THE
GENERALLY APPLICABLE FORMULAE
J8
6ALIDITY RANGE +
0
6ALIDITY RANGE +
^
0
)
^
&IGURE

$ISTANCE ZONE CHARACTERISTICS

# ' #
3!6
$ETERMINE THE THRESHOLD POINT BY SLOW REDUCTION OF

THE VOLTAGE #HECK INDICATORS AND OUTPUTS 3INCE THE
TRIPPING POLYGON IS MADE UP OF STRAIGHT LINES &IGURE
DIFFERENT FORMULAE MUST BE USED FOR THE THRESH
OLD VOLTAGES DEPENDENT UPON THE INTERSECTION OF
THESE LINES 4HE GENERAL FORMULAE ARE
&OR THE REACTANCE INTERSECTIONS 8 REACH
506 +8 8:ONE )0).
:ONE :
0
0
PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
4ABLE
4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE : AT )0

| ). AND PRE SETTING
&OR THE RESISTANCE INTERSECTIONS 2 LIMITATION

506 +2 2:ONE )0).
WHERE )0
).
50
8:ONE
TEST CURRENT
RATED CURRENT OF RELAY
TEST VOLTAGE AT THRESHOLD
SETTING VALUE 8 OF THE DISTANCE ZONE
TO BE CHECKED
SETTING VALUE 2 OR 2% OF THE DISTANCE
ZONE TO BE CHECKED
4ABLE
4ABLE
2:ONE
+8
+2
&OR PHASE TO EARTH TESTING THE THE TEST CURRENT IS

APPLIED TO ONE PHASE AND THE EARTH CURRENT PATH
4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE
&OR TESTING PHASE TO PHASE THE TEST CURRENT MUST
FLOW THROUGH THE TESTED PHASES IN OPPOSITE DIREC
TIONS 4EST VOLTAGE IS THE PHASE TO PHASE VOLTAGE
)T IS ESSENTIAL TO ENSURE ABSOLUTE SYMMETRY OF THE TWO
PHASE VOLTAGES OTHERWISE ERROR WILL OCCUR
&OR THREE PHASE TESTING IT IS REASONABLE TO MEA
SURE ONE PHASE TO EARTH VOLTAGE AND THE ASSO
CIATED PHASE CURRENT
&OR THE FACTORY SET VALUES AND )0). THE RESULTANT
VOLTAGES WILL BE AS 4ABLES TO
4ABLE GIVES THE FACTORS +8 AND +2 FOR YOUR OWN
SETTINGS FOR TEST ANGLES 0 ^ AND ^ AND THE
GENERALLY APPLICABLE FORMULAE
:ONE :
0
0
PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
4ABLE

# ' #
:ONE :
PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
4ABLE
0
50 6
50 6
50 6
0
50 6
50 6
50 6

/VERREACH ZONE :" CAN ONLY BE CHECKED UNDER

STEADY STATE CONDITIONS WHEN AN INPUT RELAY HAS
BEEN ALLOCATED TO THE INPUT FUNCTION %XTENS
:" AND IS ENERGIZED &.O NOT ALLOCATED AT
DELIVERY
:ONE :"
0
0
PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
4ABLE 4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE :" AT )0 | ).

AND PRE SETTING
/VERREACH ZONE :, CAN ONLY BE CHECKED UNDER
STEADY STATE CONDITIONS WHEN AN INPUT RELAY HAS
BEEN ALLOCATED TO THE INPUT FUNCTION %XTENS :,
AND IS ENERGIZED &.O NOT ALLOCATED AT DELIV
ERY
:ONE :,
0
0
PHASE
PHASE
PHASE
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
50 6
4ABLE
4EST VOLTAGES 50 FOR ZONE :, AT )0


3! 6

4ESTING THE GRADING TIMES
&OR EACH TIME STAGE AT LEAST ONE ADDITIONAL DYNAMIC

TEST SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK THE CORRECT SIGNALLING
OF THE TIME STAGES &OR THIS PURPOSE A SHORT CIRCUIT
APPROXIMATELY IN THE MIDDLE OF TWO ZONES WOULD BE
SIMULATED

0ERMISSIVE UNDERREACH PROCEDURES
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN ZONE : &OR THE DURATION

OF THE COMMAND RESPECTIVELY EXTENDED BY TRANS
MISSION SIGNAL PROLONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, AD
DRESS THE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL APPEARS
7ITH PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP IN ZONE :"
ADDRESS 0544 -/$% :" !##%,%2!
4)/. SIMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN :" BUT BEYOND :
4RIPPING RESULTS IMMEDIATELY THE RECEIVED SIGNAL
$IS 2ECEPT &.O APPEARS RESPECTIVE
LY IN 4" OR WITHOUT RECEIVED SIGNAL FIRST IN A
DELAYED STAGE
&OR THE CONDITION PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER
TRIP BY FAULT DETECTION ADDRESS &$ !##%,
%2!4)/. THE RELAY MUST TRIP IMMEDIATELY UPON RE
CEIPT OF THE SIGNAL $IS 2ECEPT &.O AS
LONG AS IT HAS ALREADY PICKED UP

7HEN MEASURING THE RESPONSE TIMES DO NOT FORGET

THAT THE PROGRAMMED VALUES ARE DELAY TIMES 4HE IN
HERENT MEASUREMENT AND TRIP TIME OF THE RELAY IS AD
DITIONAL
4ESTING THE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS
7HEN PROGRAMMING THE SCOPE OF THE FUNCTIONS OF THE

RELAY 3ECTION IT IS DECIDED WHETHER THE DIS
TANCE PROTECTION OPERATES WITH INTERTRIP FACILITY OR
COMPARISON PROTECTION OR IF NO TELEPROTECTION WILL BE
USED ADDRESS 7HEN USING A TELEPROTECTION
FEATURE TRANSMISSION AND RECEIVER CIRCUITS MUST BE
CHECKED 3INCE CORRECT FUNCTION OF THE OVERREACHING
ZONE IS A PREREQUISITE THE AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION
AS FAR AS FITTED
SHOULD BE SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS
#OMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE DEVICES AND THE
CARRIER CHANNEL WILL BE CHECKED DURING COMMISSION
ING WITH PRIMARY VALUES SEE 3ECTION


0ERMISSIVE OVERREACH PROCEDURES
4HE TRANSMISSION SIGNAL IS CHECKED BY SIMULATION OF

A SHORT CIRCUIT IN THE APPLICABLE ZONE
7ITH THE RELEASE PROCEDURES 0/44 -/$% :"
2%,%!3% OR :" 5.",/#+ ADDRESS A
SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIMULATED IN :"
WITH 0/44 -/$% &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR &$
5.",/#+ FAULT DETECTION IN THE FORWARD DIRECTION
IS SIMULATED
WITH THE BLOCKING PROCEDURE 0/44 -/$% :"
",/#+).' OR 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 A SHORT CIRCUIT IN
THE REVERSE DIRECTION IS SIMULATED
)N ALL THESE CASES THE TRANSMITTING RELAY CLOSES ITS
WORKING CONTACT
3IMILARLY TO CHECK THE RECEIVER CIRCUIT A SHORT CIRCUIT
IS SIMULATED AND SIMULTANEOUSLY AN EXTERNAL BINARY
INPUT $IS 2ECEPT &.O IS ENERGIZED AS
FOLLOWS
WITH 0/44 -/$% :" 2%,%!3% OR :" 5.
",/#+ ADDRESS A SHORT CIRCUIT IN :" BUT
BEYOND : IMMEDIATE TRIP RESULTS RESPECTIVELY
4"
WITH 0/44 -/$% &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR &$
5.",/#+ WITHIN THE FAULT DETECTION ZONE BEYOND
:" IMMEDIATE TRIP RESULTS
WITH 0/44 -/$% :" ",/#+ OR 0),/4 7)2%
#/-0 OR 2%6%23% ).4%2,/#+ WITHIN :" BUT
BEYOND : TRIPPING CAN ONLY OCCUR IN A HIGHER
STAGE
# ' #
3!6

4ESTING THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4HE OPERATION OF THE USER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS IS

WIDELY DEPENDENT OF THE APPLICATION 4HE INPUT CON
DITION HAVE TO BE PRODUCED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
INTENDED FUNCTION AND THE OUTPUT CONDITIONS MUST
BE CHECKED

7HEN MEASURING THE DELAY TIMES IT MUST BE NOTED

THAT THE SET TIME PICK UP ANDOR DROP OFF DELAYS
DO NOT INCLUDE THE INHERENT TIME OF THE INPUT AND OUT
PUT MODULES THESE ARE ADDITIONAL
4ESTING THE THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FUNCTION
4HE OVERLOAD FUNCTION CAN ONLY BE TESTED IF IT HAS

BEEN CONFIGURED AS 4(%2-!, /, %8)34 ADDRESS
REFER 3ECTION AND PARAMETERIZED AS OP
ERATIVE UNDER ADDRESS
4O CHECK THE TIME CONSTANT THE CURRENT INPUT IS SIM

PLY SUBJECTED TO X THE PICK UP VALUE I E
4HE BASIS CURRENT FOR THE DETECTION OF OVERLOAD IS AL

WAYS THE RATED CURRENT OF THE DEVICE /VERLOAD DATA
ARE CALCULATED FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL PHASE )F THE TESTS
ARE PERFORMED WITH THREE PHASE CURRENTS NO FURTHER
CONDITIONS ARE TO BE CONSIDERED 7HEN TESTING WITH A
SINGLE PHASE CURRENT IT MUST BE NOTED THAT THE AV
ERAGE VALUE DIFFERS FROM THE EXPECTED RESULT WHEN
MEAN HAS BEEN SET FOR THE OPERATION MODE UNDER
ADDRESS REFER TO 3ECTION
4RIPPING WILL THEN BE INITIATED AFTER A TIME INTERVAL

WHICH CORRESPONDS TO HALF THE TIME CONSTANT
7HEN APPLYING A TEST CURRENT

K | ).
TRIPPING MUST NOT OCCUR !FTER AN APPROPRIATE TIME
APPROXIMATELY X A STEADY STATE TEMPERATURE
RISE ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING RELATIONSHIP IS ESTAB
LISHED

K
TRIP
4HIS VALUE CAN BE READ OUT IN ADDRESS BLOCK FOR
EACH PHASE
X K X ).
)T IS ALSO POSSIBLE TO CHECK THE TRIP CHARACTERISTIC &IG

URE )T MUST BE NOTED THAT BEFORE EACH MEASURE
MENT THE TEMPERATURE RISE MUST BE REDUCED TO ZERO
4HIS CAN BE ACHIEVED BY EITHER DE ACTIVATING AND
RE ACTIVATING THE OVERLOAD FUNCTION ADDRESS
OR BY OBSERVING A CURRENT FREE PERIOD OF AT LEAST X
#AUTION
DOWN PERIOD
)F TESTING WITH PRELOAD IS PERFORMED THEN IT MUST BE

ENSURED THAT A CONDITION OF THERMAL EQUILIBRIUM HAS
BEEN ESTABLISHED BEFORE TIME MEASUREMENT COM
MENCES 4HIS IS THE CASE WHEN THE PRELOAD HAS
BEEN APPLIED CONSTANTLY FOR A PERIOD OF AT LEAST X
4ESTING THE EARTH FAULT DETECTION FUNCTION FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF FITTED
4ESTING OF THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IS NOT COMPLETELY
POSSIBLE WITH CONVENTIONAL TEST SETS SINCE THE SIMU
LATION OF AN EARTH FAULT REQUIRES A COMPLETE DISPLACE
MENT OF THE VOLTAGE TRIANGLE 4HE CORRECT RELATIONSHIP
# ' #
AND POLARITY OF THE MEASURING TRANSFORMER CONNEC

TIONS ESSENTIAL FOR PROPER EARTH FAULT DETECTION CAN
ONLY BE TESTED WHEN PRIMARY LOAD CURRENT IS AVAILABLE
DURING COMMISSIONING SEE 3ECTION

3! 6
4ESTING THE HIGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS IF
FITTED
4HIS PROTECTIVE FUNCTION WHEN FITTED CAN BE PRO
GRAMMED AS DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH OR
WITHOUT DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON AND WITH NON DIREC
TIONAL BACK UP OR AS NON DIRECTIONAL INVERSE TIME
OVERCURRENT ADDRESS SEE 3ECTION
"EFORE TESTING THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION THE DISTANCE
PROTECTION SHALL BE SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS $)34
02/4 /&& SO THAT IT WILL NOT PICK UP PICK UP OF
THE DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCKS THE EARTH FAULT PROTEC
TION
)F THE DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION DEFINITE TIME
OVERCURRENT IS SELECTED THEN FIRSTLY ITS NON DIREC
TIONAL BACK UP STAGE IS CHECKED BY SLOWLY RAISING
THE EARTH CURRENT IF THE EARTH CURRENT PATH OF THE RELAY
IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE STAR POINT OF THE CURRENT TRANS
FORMER SET BUT IS CONNECTED SO THAT IT WOULD DETECT
THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IN A PARALLEL LINE ADDRESS
)E #4 0!2!,,%, ,).% THEN ONE PHASE CURRENT IS
RAISED
#AUTION
DOWN PERIOD
!FTER PASSING THE VALUE OF THE SET VALUE )E AD
DRESS THE ANNUNCIATION %& &LT)E
APPEARS &.O NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SET
TING AND AFTER PASSING THE SET VALUE THE ANNUNCI
ATION %& &LT )E &.O NOT ALLOCATED
IN THE FACTORY SETTING
!FTER EXPIRY OF THE TIME 4 ./. $)2 ADDRESS
THE ANNUNCIATION %& 4 &.O NOT ALLO
CATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING AND TRIP %& 4RIP
&.O APPEAR
4O TEST THE DIRECTIONAL STAGE A RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IS NEC

ESSARY )F ADDRESS IS SET AS 5X #/..%#4
5DELTA 42!.3&/2- THE VOLTAGE FROM THE RESIDUAL
VOLTAGE WINDING IS APPLIED TO THE MEASURED VALUE IN
PUT OR A SINGLE PHASE VOLTAGE WILL BE APPLIED TO THE
PHASE INTO WHICH THE CURRENT IS FED )T MUST BE RE
MEMBERED THAT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE IN THAT SAME
PHASE MUST BE IN PHASE OPPOSITION SO THAT THE RELAY
TRIPS IN THE FORWARDS DIRECTION ANNUNCIATION %&
4 &.O NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING
)F DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON IS ALSO CARRIED OUT THE
TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT CAN BE SIMULTANEOUSLY
CHECKED TRANSMITTING RELAY %& 3END &.O
NOT ALLOCATED IN FACTORY SETTING
4O CHECK THE RECEIVER CIRCUIT A SINGLE PHASE FAULT IN
THE FORWARDS DIRECTION IS SIMILARLY SIMULATED SIMULTA
NEOUSLY WITH EXTERNAL INPUT OF THE BINARY SIGNAL %
& 2ECEPT &.O IS APPLIED
&OR NON DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION ONE WORK
ING POINT ON THE INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC SEE &IG
URE IS CHECKED NORMALLY AT TIMES THE SET VALUE
)E ADDRESS 0ICK UP INDICATION %& &LT
)E &.O AT APPROXIMATELY TIMES SET
VALUE NOT ALLOCATED IN THE FACTORY SETTING TRIP AFTER
TIME DELAY EXPIRY %& 4RIP &.O ALLOCATED
IN THE FACTORY SETTING TO THE THREE TRIPPING RELAYS
#AUTION
DOWN PERIOD
3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON ADDRESS

$)3402/4 /.
4ESTING THE INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTIONS IF FITTED

4HE INTERNAL !2 FUNCTION CAN BE DEPENDING ON THE
PROGRAMMED TO SINGLE POLE
ORDERED MODEL
THREE POLE OR SINGLETHREE POLE !2 ADDRESS
PROVIDED IT IS CONFIGURED UNDER ADDRESS
AS ).4%2.!, !2 %8)34 REFER TO 3ECTION
AND SWITCHED TO !2 &5.#4 /. !DDRESS

4O CHECK THE CONTROL OF THE OVERREACH ZONE PROPERLY

THE TELEPROTECTION FUNCTION SHOULD BE SWITCHED TO
0544 /&& ADDRESS OR 0/44 /&& AD
DRESS AND ADDRESS MUST BE SET !2 WO
4%,% 9%3
# ' #
3!6
4HE BINARY INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER READY MUST BE SIM

ULATED UNLESS AN OPEN CIRCUIT CONTACT HAS BEEN PRO
GRAMMED FOR THIS PURPOSE &.O #"
READY REFER ALSO TO 3ECTION )F THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS NOT READY BEFORE BEGINNING OF A TEST A RE
CLOSE ATTEMPT MUST NOT RESULT CLEARANCE OF SHORT CIR
CUITS BEYOND : IS DELAYED BY 4 OR IN A LATER STAGE
2ECLOSING IS EVEN BLOCKED WHEN AT THE MOMENT OF
!2 INITIATION TRIP COMMAND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS
SIGNALLED TO BE OPEN IE THE BREAKER AUXILIARY CON
TACT IS MARSHALLED TO A BINARY INPUT &.O AND
THIS INPUT INDICATES AN OPEN BREAKER &OR SECURITY
REASONS AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE SHALL ONLY BE CARRIED
OUT WHEN THE CLOSED CIIRCUIT BREAKER HAS BEEN
OPENED BEFORE
$EPENDING OF THE SELECTED !2 PROGRAM ADDRESS

2!2 02/' A SINGLE PHASE ANDOR TWO
PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE SIMULATED WITHIN :
AND BEYOND : BUT WITHIN :" EACH TIME ONCE WITH
SUCCESSFUL AND ONCE WITH UNSUCCESSFUL !2 #HECK
THE PROPER REACTION OF THE RELAY ACCORDING TO THE SET
!2 PROGRAM &OR MULTI SHOT !2 $!2 ZONE :, IS
DECISIVE FROM THE SECOND SHOT ON
.OTE THAT EACH NEW TEST CAN BEGIN ONLY AFTER THE RE
CLAIM TIME OR LOCK OUT TIME FOR THE PREVIOUS TEST HAS
EXPIRED OTHERWISE AN AUTO RECLOSE CANNOT RESULT
,%$ !2 NOT READY &.O ,%$ AS DELIV
ERED MUST NOT BE ILLUMINATED
7HEN MULTI SHOT AUTO RECLOSURE IS USED THE SE
QUENCE ACCORDING TO THE DESIRED PROGRAMS AND
NUMBER OF RECLOSE ATTEMPTS IS TO BE CHECKED
4ESTING THE INTERNAL SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTIONS IF FITTED
4HE SYNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION CAN
OPERATE WITH THE INTEGRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNCTION OR
WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE DEVICE !DDITIONAL
LY SYNCHRONISM OR DEAD LINE CHECK CAN BE PER
FORMED BEFORE MANUAL CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
! 0RE REQUISITE IS THAT IT IS CONFIGURED AS
39.#(#(%#+ %8)34 !DDRESS REFER TO
3ECTION AND SWITCHED TO 39.# #(%#+
/. !DDRESS
4HE MEASURED VOLTAGE INPUT 5X MUST BE PARAMETER
IZED AS CONNECTED TO THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE 5 IE
ADDRESS 5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3&/2-%2
)T MUST BE CONSIDERED WHICH VOLTAGE OF THE BUS BAR
SHALL BE USED !DDRESS MUST BE MATCHED
, , , , , , , % , % OR , % 4HE
CORRESPONDING TEST VOLTAGE HAS TO BE CONNECTED TO
THE 5X INPUT OF THE RELAY .O TEST CURRENT MUST BE
APPLIED DURING THIS TEST
4HE START TO MEASURE SIGNAL CAN BE GIVEN TO THE
RELAY VIA THE BINARY INPUT 3YNC 3TART &.O
4HE DEVICE CHECKS FOR CLOSE PERMISSION AC
CORDING TO THE CHECK PROGRAM WHICH IS SET UNDER THE
ADDRESSES TO )F THE CHECK RESULT IS POSI
TIVE CLOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED !NNUNCIATION
3YNC 2ELEASE &.O
# ' #
39.#(2 9%3
)F THE VOLTAGE AS PARAMETERIZED

UNDER ADDRESS IS IN PHASE
WITH THE 5X VOLTAGE CLOSE COM
MAND IS RELEASED IF THE VOLTAGES
ARE IN COUNTER PHASE NO RE
LEASE OCCURS
55 9%3
)F THE MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE

5 IS PRESENT BUT THE 5X VOLT
AGE 5 SWITCHED OFF CLOSE
COMMAND IS RELEASED
55 9%3
)F THE 5X VOLTAGE 5 IS PRESENT

BUT THE MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE
5 SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COM
MAND IS RELEASED
55 9%3
)F THE 5X VOLTAGE 5 AND THE

MEASURED FEEDER VOLTAGE 5
ARE SWITCHED OFF CLOSE COM
MAND IS RELEASED
/6%22)$% 9%3 #LOSE COMMAND IS RELEASED IN

DEPENDENT ON WHETHER VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT OR NOT OR WHAT IS THE
PHASE RELATIONSHIP

3! 6

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS
!LL SECONDARY TESTING SETS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE

REMOVED 2ECONNECT CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORM
ERS &OR TESTING WITH PRIMARY VALUES THE LINE MUST BE
ENERGIZED

7ARNING
ACCOUNT IN THE SETTING FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULT PREFER

ENCE IN ISOLATED OR COMPENSATED NETWORKS AD
DRESS 3ECTION OR FOR DOUBLE EARTH FAULT
TREATMENT IN EARTHED NETWORKS ADDRESS 3EC
TION AND WHEN APPROPRIATE IN THE ALLOCATION
OF THE INDIVIDUAL PHASE PICK UP INDICATIONS AND TRIP
COMMANDS 3ECTION TO
0RIMARY TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED ONLY BY

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL WHICH IS TRAINED IN
COMMISSIONING OF PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND
FAMILIAR WITH THE OPERATION OF THE PROTECTED
OBJECT AS WELL AS THE RULES AND REGULATIONS
SWITCHING EARTHING ETC
#URRENTS AND VOLTAGES CAN BE READ OFF ON THE DISPLAY

IN THE FRONT OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE IN BLOCK
AND COMPARED WITH THE ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES
#URRENT VOLTAGE AND PHASE SE

QUENCE CHECKS
#HECK THAT THE RELAY HAS RECOGNIZED THE POSITION OF

THE MCB 4HE MESSAGE 64 MCB 4RIP # MUST
BE GIVEN IN THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS IN ADDRESS
BLOCK
3WITCH OFF VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB OF

THE FEEDER VOLTAGE #HECK THAT THE VOLTAGES INDI
CATED IN THE OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES ADDRESS
BLOCK ARE NEAR 3MALL VOLTAGE VALUES CAN BE TOL
ERATED
#ONNECTIONS TO CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ARE

CHECKED WITH PRIMARY VALUES &OR THIS PURPOSE A
LOAD CURRENT OF AT LEAST OF THE RATED CURRENT IS
NECESSARY )F THE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS ARE
CORRECT NONE OF THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORING SYS
TEMS IN THE RELAY WILL OPERATE )F A FAULT INDICATION AP
PEARS THE POSSIBLE CAUSES CAN BE FOUND IN THE OP
ERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS !DDRESS
)N CASE THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE IS CONNECTED TO THE

RELAY IN ORDER TO OBTAIN SYNCHRONISM CHECK ALSO
SWITCH OFF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY MCB
OF THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE )N THE OPERATIONAL ANNUNCI
ATION ADDRESS BLOCK THE MESSAGE 6 MCB
4RIP # MUST OCCUR
&OR CURRENT SUM OR VOLTAGE SUM ERRORS THE MATCHING

FACTORS 3ECTION SHOULD BE CHECKED
3WITCH THE MCBS ON 4HE ABOVE MESSAGES MUST

OCCUR IN ADDRESS BLOCK AGAIN BUT WITH THE 'O
ING INDEX EG 64 MCB 4RIP '
)F THE SYMMETRY MONITORING APPEARS IT IS POSSIBLE

THAT ASYMMETRY IS IN FACT PRESENT ON THE LINE )F THIS IS
A NORMAL OPERATIONAL CONDITION THE CORRESPONDING
MONITORING FUNCTION SHOULD BE SET AT A LESS SENSITIVE
VALUE 3ECTION
4HE PHASE ROTATION MUST BE CLOCKWISE OTHERWISE
THE INDICATION &AIL0HASE3EQ WILL APPEAR
#HECK AND CORRECT THE PHASE RELATIONSHIPS IN THE
MEASURING CIRCUITS )F THE NETWORK HAS COUNTER
CLOCKWISE ROTATION TWO PHASES MUST BE INTER
CHANGED 4HIS PHASE EXCHANGE MUST BE TAKEN INTO

3HOULD ONE OF THE MESSAGES NOT BE GIVEN UNDER THE

OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATION THEN CHECK THE CONNECTION
OF THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SECONDARY CIRCUITS AND
CHECK CORRECT MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS FROM
THE AUXILIARY CONTACTS OF THE MCBS REFER 3ECTION

)F THE INDICES # FOR #OMING AND ' FOR 'OING
ARE INTERCHANGED CHECK AND CORRECT THE CONTACT
MODE OF THE BINARY INPUTS ./ OR .# CONTACT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH 3ECTION
# ' #
3!6

$IRECTION CHECK WITH LOAD CURRENT
#ORRECT CONNECTIONS OF CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANS

FORMERS ARE CHECKED USING LOAD CURRENT OVER THE PRO
TECTED LINE 4HE LINE MUST BE ENERGIZED AND MUST
CARRY A LOAD CURRENT OF AT LEAST OF THE RATED CUR
RENT THIS SHALL BE OHMIC OR OHMIC INDUCTIVE 4HE DI
RECTION OF THE LOAD CURRENT MUST BE KNOWN )N CASES
OF DOUBT INTERCONNECTED OR RING NETWORKS MUST BE
ISOLATED
)NITIATION OF THE TEST IS MADE VIA OPERATOR KEYBOARD OR

PERSONAL COMPUTER 4ESTS ARE LISTED FROM ADDRESS

THE DIRECTIONAL TEST IN ADDRESS
4HE ADDRESS IS REACHED
DIRECTLY WITH KEY $! FOLLOWED BY ADDRESS NUMBER
AND FINALLY OPERATION OF THE ENTER KEY % OR
BY PAGING THROUGH THE BLOCKS WITH OR UNTIL
ADDRESS IS REACHED
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 4ESTS
4 % 3 4 3

$ ) 2 % # 4 ) / .
"LOCK $IRECTIONAL TEST
) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3
7HEN THE ADDRESS APPEARS IN THE DISPLAY THE DIRECTIONAL TEST OF THE INDIVIDUAL MEASUREMENT LOOPS IS SE
LECTED WITH THE KEY ! &OR CONFIRMATION OF THE DIRECTIONAL TEST THE 9ES KEY *9 IS USED THIS STARTS THE DIRECTION
AL TEST 4HE SELECTED MEASUREMENT LOOP CARRIES OUT A DIRECTIONAL CHECK AND INDICATES THE RESULT ON THE DISPLAY

, %
$ ) 2 % #
4 % 3 4
-AKE DIRECTIONAL TEST , % #ONFIRM WITH *9
& O R W A R D
$ I R
2 E V E R S E
$ I R
U N D E F I N E D
,OAD FLOW FORWARDS

OR
LOAD FLOW BACKWARDS
OR
DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION NOT POSSIBLE
EG CURRENT TOO SMALL
4HE LOAD DIRECTION MUST BE INDICATED CORRECTLY 4HE NEXT ADDRESS SHOWS THE ACTIVE AND REACTIVE COMPONENT OF
THE LOAD IMPEDANCE 4HE LOAD IMPEDANCES ALLOW DETERMINATION OF THE POSITION OF THE LOAD IMPEDANCE VECTOR IN
THE 28 DIAGRAM &IGURE

, %
) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3

# ' #
!FTER CONFIRMATION WITH THE 9ES KEY *9 THE LOAD IMPED
ANCE WILL BE CALCULATED AND DISPLAYED

3! 6
2 R
8 R
#ONTINUE WITH !
4HE SAME APPLIES FOR THE OTHER LOOPS ADDRESSES AND FOR , % ADDRESSES AND FOR , %
ADDRESSES AND FOR , , ADDRESSES AND FOR , , ADDRESSES AND FOR
, , EG

$ ) 2 % #
4 % 3 4
, ,

) - 0 % $ ! . # % 3
, ,
!LL SIX MEASUREMENT LOOPS MUST INDICATE THE CORRECT

DIRECTION OF THE LOAD FLOW )F ALL DIRECTIONS ARE WRONG
THE POLARITY OF THE MEASURING TRANSFORMERS AND THE
PROGRAMMED POLARITY ADDRESS 3ECTION
DO NOT AGREE WITH EACH OTHER #HECK THE PO
LARITY AND PROGRAM CORRECTLY )F THE DIRECTIONS GIVEN IN
THE DISPLAY DIFFER FROM EACH OTHER THE INDIVIDUAL
PHASES IN THE CURRENT OR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNEC
TIONS ARE INTERCHANGED OR THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP IS
NOT CORRECT #HECK THE CONNECTIONS
)F THE LOAD IS CAPACITIVE CAUSED FOR EXAMPLE BY UN

DEREXCITED GENERATORS OR CHARGING CURRENTS BORDER
LINE CASES CAN OCCUR WITH RESPECT TO THE DIRECTIONAL
CHARACTERISTICS WHICH WILL LEAD TO UNDEFINED OR INCON
SISTENT DIRECTIONAL INFORMATION "Y MEANS OF THE LOAD
IMPEDANCE CALCULATION THE POSITION OF THE LOAD IM
PEDANCE VECTOR CAN BE DETERMINED SEE &IGURE
8
0OSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
8 POSITIVE
,OAD
FORWARDS
$IRECTION
CHARACTERISTIC
!CTIVE POWER IN
2 NEGATIVE
2 POSITIVE
LINE DIRECTION
^
2
.EGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
8 NEGATIVE
BACKWARDS
&IGURE

,OAD
0ACTIVE
)
0REACTIVE
)
;/HM=
,OAD IMPEDANCE VECTOR
# ' #
3!6

%ARTH FAULT CHECKS FOR NON EARTHED SYSTEMS IF USED
4HE PRIMARY CURRENT TEST ALLOWS DETERMINATION OF THE

CORRECT POLARITY OF TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE
EARTH FAULT DIRECTION DETERMINATION
$!.'%2
/PERATIONS IN PRIMARY AREA MUST ONLY BE
PERFORMED WITH PLANT SECTIONS VOLTAGE
FREE AND EARTHED
4HE MOST RELIABLE TEST IS TO APPLY A PRIMARY EARTH
FAULT 4HE PROCEDURE IS AS FOLLOWS
$ISCONNECT THE LINE AND EARTH AT BOTH ENDS THE
LINE MUST REMAIN DISCONNECTED AT THE REMOTE END
THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE TEST
!PPLY A BOLTED SINGLE PHASE EARTH BRIDGE TO THE
LINE /N OVERHEAD LINES THIS CAN BE DONE AT ANY
CONVENIENT POINT BUT IN ANY CASE BEHIND THE CUR
RENT TRANSFORMERS LOOKED AT FROM THE DIRECTION OF
THE BUS BAR OF THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST &OR CABLES
THE EARTH SHOULD BE APPLIED AT THE REMOTE END TER
MINATION
# ' #
/PEN THE LINE EARTHING SWITCHES

#LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE LINE END TO BE
TESTED
#HECK THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATION GIVEN APPROPRI
ATELY ALLOCATED ,%$
)N THE EARTH FAULT REPORT ON THE OPERATOR TERMINAL
ADDRESS SEE ALSO 3ECTION THE EARTH
FAULTED PHASE AND THE LINE DIRECTION IE %&
FORWARDS &.O WILL BE INDICATED !CTIVE
AND REACTIVE CURRENT ARE EQUALLY INDICATED FOR ISO
LATED NETWORKS THE REACTIVE CURRENT FOR RESONANT
EARTHED NETWORKS THE ACTIVE CURRENT IS CRITICAL )F
THE DISPLAY INDICATES %& REVERSE &.O
THEN THERE IS A CROSSED CONNECTION IN THE
EARTH CIRCUIT OF VOLTAGE OR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS )F
THE DISPLAY SHOWS %& UNDEFINED &.O
THE EARTH FAULT CURRENT IS PROBABLY TOO SMALL
$ISCONNECT THE LINE AND EARTH IT REMOVE THE
BOLTED EARTH CONNECTION
4HE TEST IS THUS COMPLETED

3! 6

$IRECTION CHECK FOR DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IF USED
4HE PRIMARY CURRENT TEST ALLOWS DETERMINATION OF THE

CORRECT POLARITY OF TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE
EARTH FAULT DIRECTION PROTECTION )F THIS FUNCTION IS NOT
FITTED OR IF IT IS SET AS %!24( &!5,4 ./. %8)34
ADDRESS OR IF THE NON DIRECTIONAL EARTH CUR
RENT OPTION IS USED ADDRESS %!24( &!5,4

).6%23% 4)-% THEN THIS DIRECTIONAL CHECK BECOMES
SUPERFLUOUS 4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION SHALL BE
SWITCHED OFF ADDRESS SO THAT IT WILL NOT INTER
FERE WITH THE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
3!
E
N
,
,
&IGURE %ARTH FAULT DIRECTION TEST WITH (OLMGREEN CONNECTION
4HE TRIP CIRCUITS SHOULD BE MADE INOPERATIVE AS THE
RELAY WILL ISSUE A TRIP COMMAND DURING THIS TEST &UR
THERMORE IT MUST BE NOTED THAT DURING ALL SUCH SIM
ULATIONS WHICH DO NOT REPRESENT EXACTLY THE PRACTICAL
CONDITIONS ASYMMETRY OF THE MEASURED VALUES CAN
CAUSE THE MEASURED VALUE MONITORS TO OPERATE
4HESE ANNUNCIATIONS SHOULD THEN BE IGNORED
$!.'%2
!LL PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES MUST BE OB
SERVED WHEN WORKING ON THE INSTRUMENT
TRANSFORMERS 3ECONDARY CONNECTIONS
OF THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MUST BE
SHORT CIRCUITED BEFORE ANY CURRENT
LEADS TO THE RELAY ARE INTERRUPTED
4HE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE WILL BE DERIVED BY BYPASS
ING A VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER PHASE EG , SEE &IGURE
)F EARTH DETECTION WINDINGS OF THE VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMERS ARE NOT AVAILABLE THE CORRESPONDING
PHASE SHOULD BE INTERRUPTED ON THE SECONDARY SIDE
)N THE CURRENT CIRCUIT ONLY THE CURRENT FROM THE CUR
RENT TRANSFORMER CORRESPONDING TO THE PHASE IN

,
WHICH THE VOLTAGE IS MISSING WILL BE USED )F THE LINE

IS CARRYING ACTIVE AND INDUCTIVE POWER IN LINE DIREC
TION PRACTICALLY THE SAME RELATIONSHIPS APPLY FOR THE
RELAY AS WITH AN EARTH FAULT IN THE LINE DIRECTION
#HECK THE DIRECTIONAL INDICATION )N THE FAULT EVENT RE
PORT ON THE DISPLAY PANEL ADDRESS SEE ALSO
SECTION AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING FAULT ANNUNCI
ATIONS MUST BE INDICATED %& &LT)E &.O
%& &LT )E &.O AND %
& 4RIP &.O 3HOULD DIRECTIONAL TRIP ANNUN
CIATION BE MISSING THEN A CROSSED CONNECTION IS
PRESENT IN EITHER THE CURRENT OR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS )F NO PICK UP ANNUNCIATION OCCURS THE
CURRENT IS PROBABLY TOO LOW OR THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP
OF THE TEST CIRCUIT IS NOT CORRECT )F THERE IS NO INDICA
TION WHATSOEVER IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE THRESHOLD VAL
UE OF THE DISPLACEMENT VOLTAGE !DDRESS 5E
HAS NOT BEEN REACHED
&INALLY PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL THE TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS 3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON AD
DRESS $)3402/4 /.
# ' #
3!6

#HECKING THE VOLTAGE POLARITY FOR SYNCHRONISM CHECK
4HIS CHECK SHOULD VERIFY THE CORRECT POLARITY OF THE

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS FOR THE SYNCHRO
NISM CHECK FUNCTION 4HE BUS BAR VOLTAGE MUST BE
CONNECTED TO THE DEVICE 4HE MEASURED VOLTAGE 5X
MUST BE PARAMETERIZED CORRECT IN THE POWER SYSTEM
DATA ADDRESS 5X #/..%#4 5 42!.3
&/2-%2 REFER 3ECTION
!T FIRST SET THE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION TO THE OVER
RIDE PROGRAM IE ADDRESS /6%22)$% 9%3
3TART SYNCHRONISM CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY
START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O 3YNC
3TART 4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE
THE RELEASE COMMAND ANNUNCIATION 3YNC 2E
LEASE &.O )F NOT CHECK ALL RELEVANT PARAM
ETERS ACCORDING 3ECTION AND
.EXT OPEN THE LINE ISOLATOR AND CLOSE THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER AS TO &IGURE 4HUS BOTH VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER SETS RECEIVE THE SAME VOLTAGE
5
5
THE CONNECTION GROUP OF THE TRANSFORMER REFER TO

3ECTION )F THE PARAMETERS ARE CORRECT
CHECK AND CORRECT THE POLARITY OF THE VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER CONNECTION FROM THE BUS BAR VOLTAGE
/PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK
FUNCTION TO THE DEAD LINE CHECK PROGRAM IE AD
DRESS 55 9%3 3TART BY ENERGIZING THE
BINARY START TO MEASURE INPUT &.O
3YNC 3TART 4HE SYNCHRO CHECK FUNCTION
MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE COMMAND ANNUNCIATION
3YNC 2ELEASE &.O )F NOT CHECK AGAIN
CAREFULLY ALL CONNECTIONS AND PARAMETERS RELATING TO
THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION ACCORDING TO 3EC
TION
2E CHECK ADDRESSES TO IN CASE THEY
WERE ALTERED FOR THE TESTS
)F ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING IS TO BE ALLOWED THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER CLOSING TIME IS MEASURED AND SET CORRECTLY
IN ADDRESS SEE ALSO 3ECTION ! SUIT
ABLE ARRANGEMENT IS SHOWN IN &IGURE
4HE TIME METER IS SET TO THE S RANGE OR TO A RESOLU
TION OF MS #LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MANUALLY THE
TIME METER IS STARTED AT THE SAME TIME 4HE VOLTAGE
5 APPEARS WHEN THE POLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ARE CLOSED THE TIME METER IS THEN STOPPED 4HE TIME
INDICATED ON THE METER IS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING
TIME
4HE EXPERIMENT MUST BE REPEATED IF THE TIME METER
DOES NOT STOP BECAUSE OF AN UNFAVOURABLE CLOSING
INSTANT
"US
BAR
,INE
&IGURE -EASURED VOLTAGES FOR SYNCHRONISM
CHECK
5
3TART

3ET THE SYNCHRONISM CHECK FUNCTION TO THE SYNCHRO

CHECK PROGRAM IE ADDRESS 39.#(2 9%3
AND /6%22)$% ./ 3TART SYNCHRONISM
CHECK BY ENERGIZING THE BINARY START TO MEASURE
INPUT &.O 3YNC 3TART 4HE SYNCHRO
CHECK FUNCTION MUST ISSUE THE RELEASE COMMAND
ANNUNCIATION 3YNC 2ELEASE &.O )F
NOT CHECK AT FIRST CONNECTION MATCHING UNDER AD
DRESS 5 #/..%#4 REFER 3ECTION )F
MEASUREMENT IS CARRIED OUT OVER A TRANSFORMER
CHECK ADDRESS TOO THIS PARAMETER MATCHES
# ' #
4IME
METER
5
3TOP
&EEDER
&IGURE -EASURING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSING

TIME

3! 6

#HECKING THE CARRIER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
!LL THE EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATED WITH TRANSMISSION OF

SIGNALS SHOULD BE COMMISSIONED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE APPROPRIATE DOCUMENTS

#HECKING OVERREACH ZONE COMPARISON

VIA PILOT WIRES
4HIS OVERREACHING ZONE COMPARISON OPERATING

MODE DIFFERS FUNDAMENTALLY FROM THE OTHER TELEPRO
TECTION SYSTEMS IN ITS TRANSMISSION METHOD DC CUR
RENT FAIL SAFE LOOP 4HE TEST PROCEDURE IS DE
SCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING )F A DIFFERENT TELEPROTECTION
METHOD IS USED THIS SUB SECTION CAN BE PASSED
OVER
)N THE SCOPE OF DEVICES UNDER ADDRESS MUST BE
SET 4%,%02/4%# /6%22%!#( REFER 3ECTION
AND 0/44 -/$% ADDRESS MUST BE PA
RAMETERIZED AS 0),/4 7)2% #/-0 REFER 3ECTION
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION DEVICES AT BOTH LINE
ENDS MUST BE IN OPERATION !T FIRST THE AUXILIARY VOLT
AGE FOR THE FAIL SAFE CURRENT LOOP AROUND THE PILOT
WIRES SHOULD NOT BE SWITCHED ON THE ADDITIONAL RE
LAYS ARE NOT ENERGIZED
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT BEYOND : BUT WITHIN THE
OVERREACH ZONE :" "ECAUSE OF THE PRESENCE OF THE
BLOCK SIGNAL THE RELAY FIRST TRIPS IN ONE OF THE UPPER
ZONES NORMALLY 4 -AKE THIS TEST FROM BOTH LINE
ENDS
.OW SWITCH ON THE DC VOLTAGE FOR THE FAIL SAFE LOOP
4HE ADDITIONAL RELAYS FOR TELEPROTECTION MUST BE IN
OPERATION 4HE LOOP NOW CARRIES MONITORING CURRENT
THE ADDITIONAL RELAYS AT BOTH LINE ENDS ARE ENERGIZED
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT AT ONE LINE END BEYOND THE
FIRST ZONE BUT WITHIN THE OVERREACH ZONE :" 4RIP
PING OCCURS AFTER 4" WHEN A DELAY IS SET -AKE
THIS TEST ALSO AT BOTH LINE ENDS
3INCE THE DC MONITOR IS AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THE PILOT
WIRE SYSTEM THIS TEST HAS SIMULTANEOUSLY PROVED
THAT THE PILOT WIRES ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY !LL OTHER
TESTS DESCRIBED IN THIS 3ECTION BECOME SUPER
FLUOUS

#HECKING REVERSE INTERLOCKING
4HE TEST PROCEDURE IS DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING )F A

DIFFERENT TELEPROTECTION METHOD IS USED THIS SUBSEC
TION CAN BE PASSED OVER

)N THE 3COPE OF DEVICES UNDER ADDRESS MUST BE

SET 4%,%02/4%# /6%22%!#( REFER 3ECTION
AND 0/44 -/$% ADDRESS MUST BE PA
RAMETERIZED AS 2%6%23 ).4%2,/#+ REFER 3ECTION
4HE PROTECTION RELAY ON THE INCOMING FEEDER
AND THOSE ON ALL OUTGOING CIRCUITS MUST BE IN OPERA
TION !T FIRST THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE FOR REVERSE INTERLOCK
ING SHOULD NOT BE SWITCHED ON
3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT WITHIN ZONE : AND WITHIN THE
OVERREACH ZONE :" "ECAUSE OF THE ABSENCE OF THE
RECEIVE SIGNAL THE RELAY TRIPS IN THE DELAYED TIME
4"
.OW SWITCH ON THE DC VOLTAGE FOR THE REVERSE INTER
LOCKING 4HE TEST AS DESCRIBED ABOVE IS REPEATED
WITH THE SAME RESULT
3IMULATE A TRIP ON EACH PROTECTIVE DEVICE ON ALL OUT
GOING FEEDERS 3IMULTANEOUSLY A SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIM
ULATED ON THE INCOMING FEEDER AS DESCRIBED BE
FORE 4RIPPING NOW OCCURS AFTER DELAY 4
4HESE TESTS HAVE SIMULTANEOUSLY PROVED THAT THE PI
LOT WIRES ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY !LL OTHER TESTS DE
SCRIBED IN THIS 3ECTION BECOME SUPERFLUOUS

#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH RE

LEASE SIGNAL
7ITH PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP 0/44 US

ING RELEASE SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 0/44 -/$% :"
2%,%!3% OR &$ $)2%# 2%,%!3% OR :" 5.",/#+
OR &$ 5.",/#+ ADDRESS IT IS SIMPLE TO
CHECK THE CARRIER SYSTEM FROM ONE END OF THE LINE
WITH THE ECHO FUNCTION 3IMULATE A SHORT CIRCUIT IN
:" BEYOND : 3INCE THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE END
HAS NOT PICKED UP ON FAULT THE ECHO FUNCTION WILL BE
EFFECTIVE AT THAT END AND A TRIP SIGNAL RESULTS 4HE PRE
CONDITION IS THAT THE ECHO FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
ADDRESS AT BOTH LINE ENDS 4HIS TEST IS TO BE
PERFORMED FROM BOTH LINE ENDS
4HE EFFECT OF THE ECHO DELAY TIME AND THE INPUT OF THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION CAN BE CHECKED AT THIS
STAGE 7ITH THE FOLLOWING TESTS THE ECHO FUNCTION OF
THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END IS CHECKED
4HE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AT BOTH LINE ENDS MUST BE OPEN
! SHORT CIRCUIT IS SIMULATED AS ABOVE "ECAUSE OF THE
ECHO FUNCTION OF THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED AND A TRIP SIGNAL OCCURS AT ONCE
# ' #
3!6
#LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END

2EPEAT ABOVE TEST ONCE MORE 2ECEIVED SIGNAL AND
TRIP COMMAND OCCUR AGAIN BUT NOW WITH AN ADDITION
AL DELAY CAUSED BY THE ECHO DELAY TIME AT THE OPPO
SITE LINE END S AS DELIVERED SEE ADDRESS
!T THE RECEIVING END SIMULATE A FAULT WITHIN ZONE :"

BUT BEYOND : WHEN SET 0544 -/$% :" !#
#%,%2!4)/. ADDRESS 4HE PROTECTION TRIPS AT
ONCE OR 4" WITHOUT RECEPTION A DELAYED STAGE
CAN ONLY BE EFFECTIVE
)F DELAYED AND UNDELAYED ECHO ARE INTERCHANGED THE

FUNCTION MODE ./.# OPERATION OF THE BINARY INPUT
FOR #" POSITION SHOULD BE WRONG #HECK AND CORRECT
IT AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END REFER 3ECTION 7HEN
DELIVERED FROM FACTORY THE INPUT FOR THE #" AUXILIARY
CONTACT IS ).054 ASSIGNED TO THE FUNCTION #"
!UXP CL REFER 3ECTION #HANGE THE FUNC
TION MODE FROM ./ TO .# #" !UXP CL .#
7ITH DIFFERENT ALLOCATION CHANGE THE MODE ACCORD
INGLY
!T THE RECEIVING END SIMULATE ANY PICK UP WHEN

SET 0544 -/$% &$ !##%,%2!4)/. ADDRESS
4HE PROTECTION TRIPS INSTANTANEOUS WITHOUT
RECEPTION IN A DELAYED STAGE
/PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 2EPEAT THESE TESTS FOR THE OTH

ER LINE END

#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH

BLOCKING SIGNAL
7ITH OVERREACHING TRANSFER MODE USING BLOCKING SIG

NAL 0/44 -/$% :" ",/#+).' ADDRESS
AND UNDERSTANDING BETWEEN BOTH LINE ENDS IS NEC
ESSARY
!T THE LINE END TO BE TESTED AS SENDER SIMULATE A FAULT
IN REVERSE DIRECTION AT THE OTHER END SIMULATE A FOR
WARD FAULT WITHIN ZONE :" BUT BEYOND THE LIMIT OF :
3INCE THE TRANSMITTER SENDS A BLOCKING SIGNAL THE RE
CEIVING PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP UNLESS IN A DELAYED
ZONE AS LONG AS BLOCKING SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED !FTER
SWITCHING OFF THE REVERSE FAULT ON THE SENDING SIDE
THE RECEIVING SIDE REMAINS BLOCKED FOR THE SEND PRO
LONGATION 4 3%.$ 02, ADDRESS PLUS THE
TRANSIENT BLOCKING TIME 4 42!.3",/ ADDRESS
OF THE RECEIVING SIDE
2EPEAT TEST FOR THE OTHER TRANSMISSION DIRECTION

#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION WITH UN

DERREACH TRANSFER SIGNAL
7ITH PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP 0544 THE

SCOPE OF DEVICES IS SET 4%,%02/4%# 5.$%2
2%!#( IN ADDRESS !N UNDERSTANDING BETWEEN
BOTH LINE ENDS IS NECESSARY
!T THE LINE END TO BE TESTED AS SENDER SIMULATE A FAULT
WITHIN ZONE :
# ' #
2EPEAT TESTS FOR THE OTHER TRANSMISSION DIRECTION

#HECKING CARRIER TRANSMISSION FOR DI

RECTIONAL COMPARISON EARTH FAULT PRO
TECTION
)F 3! IS EQUIPPED WITH DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON

EARTH FAULT PROTECTION AND THIS FUNCTION IS SET AS
%!24( &!5,4 $)2%##/-0!2)3/. IN ADDRESS
CARRIER TRANSMISSION MUST BE CHECKED 3WITCH
OFF DISTANCE PROTECTION ADDRESS $)34 02/4
/&&
)T IS SIMPLE TO CHECK THE CARRIER SYSTEM FROM ONE END
OF THE LINE WITH THE ECHO FUNCTION 3IMULATE AN EARTH
FAULT IN LINE DIRECTION 3INCE THE RELAY AT THE OTHER LINE
END HAS NOT PICKED UP ON FAULT THE ECHO FUNCTION WILL
BE EFFECTIVE AT THAT END AND A TRIP SIGNAL RESULTS 4HE
PRECONDITION IS THAT THE ECHO FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
ADDRESS AT BOTH LINE ENDS 4HIS TEST IS TO BE
PERFORMED FROM BOTH LINE ENDS
4HE EFFECT OF THE ECHO DELAY TIME AND THE INPUT OF THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION CAN BE CHECKED UNLESS IT HAS
ALREADY BEEN DONE UNDER 3ECTION 4HE OPPO
SITE LINE END IS CHECKED
4HE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AT BOTH LINE ENDS MUST BE OPEN
!N EARTH FAULT IS SIMULATED AS ABOVE "ECAUSE OF THE
ECHO FUNCTION OF THE RELAY AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END
SIGNAL IS RECEIVED AND A TRIP SIGNAL OCCURS AT ONCE
#LOSE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AT THE OPPOSITE LINE END
2EPEAT ABOVE TEST ONCE MORE RECEIVED SIGNAL AND
TRIP COMMAND OCCUR AGAIN BUT NOW WITH AN ADDITION
AL DELAY CAUSED BY THE ECHO DELAY TIME OF THE RELAY AT
THE OPPOSITE LINE END S AS DELIVERED SEE !D
DRESS
/PEN CIRCUIT BREAKER 2EPEAT THESE TESTS FOR THE OTH
ER LINE END
3WITCH DISTANCE PROTECTION ON ADDRESS
$)3402/4 /.

3! 6

4RIPPING TEST INCLUDING CIRCUIT BREAKER
$ISTANCE PROTECTION 3! ALLOWS SIMPLE CHECKING

OF THE TRIPPING CIRCUIT AND THE CIRCUIT BREAKER )F THE
DEVICE INCORPORATES AN INTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYS
TEM A TRIP CLOSE TEST CYCLE IS ALSO POSSIBLE 4HE TEST
CAN BE INITIATED EITHER VIA A BINARY INPUT

42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE

BLOCK
ADDRESS
0REREQUISITE FOR THE START OF A TRIP CLOSE TEST CYCLE IS

THAT THE RELAY HAS AN INTEGRATED AUTO RECLOSE FUNC
TION WHICH IS PROGRAMMED AS %8)34 ADDRESS
AND IT IS SWITCHED ON !DDRESS
! 42)0 #,/3% TEST CYCLE IS ALSO POSSIBLE WITH AN
EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE SYSTEM 3INCE IN THIS CASE
HOWEVER 3! ONLY GIVES THE TRIPPING COMMAND
THE PROCEDURE SHALL BE FOLLOWED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
TION
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE
RELAY THROUGH A BINARY INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
POSITION THE TEST CYCLE CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEA
TURE SHOULD NOT BE OMITTED
$URING MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS REFER 3EC
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH BINARY

# "
4 % 3 4
4 2 ) 0
# , / 3 %

# "
# 9 # , %
4 % 3 4
,
7 ) 4 (
! 2
# "
# , / 3 % $

!FTER CONFIRMATION BY THE OPERATOR THAT THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER IS CLOSED THE TEST CYCLE PROCEEDS )F THE TEST
IS TERMINATED SUCCESSFULLY THIS IS ANNUNCIATED IN THE
DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY IN
PUT AND CONNECTED THE RELAY REJECTS THE TEST CYCLE AS

INPUT INDICATES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION )F THE

AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT IT MUST
BE CONNECTED TOO )F IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY
INPUT THEN THE DEVICE WILL PERFORM TRIPPING TEST WITH
OUT INTERROGATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION
$!.'%2
! SUCCESSFULLY STARTED TEST CYCLE WILL
LEAD TO CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
)NITIATION OF THE TEST CYCLE CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPER
ATOR KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE ! CODE
WORD INPUT IS NECESSARY 4HE PROCEDURE IS STARTED
WITH ADDRESS WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT
ADDRESSING $! % OR BY PAGING WITH OR
)N THE ADDRESSES OF THIS BLOCK THERE IS A NUMBER OF
POSSIBILITIES AVAILABLE WHICH ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOW
ING BOXES 3INGLE POLE TRIP CLOSE TESTS WILL ONLY
BE CARRIED OUT BY THE RELAY WHEN SINGLE POLE !2 IS
ALSO PERMITTED 4HREE POLE TRIP CLOSE CYCLE WILL
ONLY BE CARRIED OUT WHEN THREE POLE !2 IS PER
MITTED
&URTHER PREREQUISITES FOR THE START OF TEST ARE THAT NO
PROTECTIVE FUNCTION FAULT DETECTOR HAS PICKED UP AND
THAT THE CONDITIONS FOR RECLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER READY
!2 NOT BLOCKED ARE FULFILLED
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK #IRCUIT BREAKER TEST

42)0 #,/3% CYCLE
#ARRY OUT TEST CYCLE WITH POLE , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED OR
ABORT BY PAGE ON !
LONG AS THE AUXILIARY CONTACT INDICATES THAT THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER IS NOT CLOSED EVEN IF THE OPERATOR HAS CON
FIRMED THAT IT IS /NLY WHEN NO CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIA
RY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY INPUT WILL THE
RELAY CONSIDER THE OPERATOR S CONFIRMATION VALID
# ' #
3!6

# "
,
7 ) 4 (
# "
# , / 3 % $

# "
! 2
7 ) 4 (
# "
# , / 3 % $
# "
,
7 ) 4 (
3 % 1 5
# "


#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON
KEY !
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ARRY OUT THREE POLE TEST CYCLE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
4 % 3 4
# , / 3 % $
# "
#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED OR

ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
! 2

4 % 3 4
,
# "

#ONFIRM WITH *9 KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON
KEY !
4 % 3 4
! 2

#ARRY OUT SEQUENCE OF SINGLE POLE TEST CYCLES

, , , OF CIRCUIT BREAKER #ONFIRM WITH *9
4 % 3 4
,
# , / 3 % $
,
,

,IVE TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
ADDRESS BLOCK
4O CHECK THE TRIPPING CIRCUITS THE CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN

BE TRIPPED BY 3! INDEPENDENTLY OF WHETHER AN
AUTO RECLOSE WILL OCCUR OR NOT (OWEVER THIS TEST
CAN ALSO BE MADE WITH AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE
RELAY
)F THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACTS ADVISE THE
RELAY THROUGH A BINARY INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
POSITION THE TEST CAN ONLY BE STARTED WHEN THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS CLOSED 4HIS ADDITIONAL SECURITY FEATURE
SHOULD NOT BE OMITTED WHEN AN EXTERNAL AUTO RE
CLOSE RELAY IS PRESENT
$URING MARSHALLING OF THE BINARY INPUTS REFER 3EC
TION THE RELAY HAS BEEN INFORMED WHICH BINARY
INPUT INDICATES THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION )F THE
AUXILIARY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT IT MUST
BE CONNECTED TOO )F IT IS NOT ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY
INPUT THEN THE DEVICE WILL PERFORM TRIPPING TEST WITH
OUT INTERROGATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION
# ' #
KEY
$!.'%2
! SUCCESSFULLY STARTED TEST CYCLE CAN
LEAD TO CLOSING OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
WHEN AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSURE DE
VICE IS CONNECTED
)NITIATION OF THE TEST CAN BE GIVEN FROM THE OPERATOR
KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE ! CODEWORD
INPUT IS NECESSARY 4HE PROCEDURE IS STARTED WITH AD
DRESS WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY DIRECT DIALLING
$! % OR BY PAGING WITH OR )N THE AD
DRESSES OF THIS BLOCK THERE IS A NUMBER OF POSSIBILI
TIES AVAILABLE WHICH ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING
BOXES
)N ORDER TO TRIP THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SINGLE POLE IT IS
NECESSARY TO PERMIT SINGLE POLE TRIPPING THROUGH
THE BINARY INPUT P 4RIP 0ERM &.O WITH
EXTERNAL SINGLE POLE !2 OTHERWISE THE SINGLE POLE
TEST WILL NOT BE CARRIED OUT

3! 6
4O TRIP ALL THREE POLES OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER AN EXTER

NAL SIGNAL /NLY POLE MUST NOT BE PRESENT FROM
AN EXTERNAL AUTO RECLOSE RELAY &.O

# "
, ) 6 %
4 2 ) 0

# "
4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER POLE , #ONFIRM WITH *9

ABORT BY PAGING ON WITH !
4 2 ) 0
0 / , %
,
# "
# , / 3 % $
0 / , %
# "
# , / 3 % $
# "
,
0 / , %
# "
# , / 3 % $

# "
,

4 ( 2 % %
# "
# , / 3 % $
0 / , %

KEY OR

4 2 ) 0
# "
KEY OR
KEY THAT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED

#ONFIRM WITH *9
4 2 ) 0
# "
LONG AS THE AUXILIARY CONTACT INDICATES THAT THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER IS NOT CLOSED EVEN IF THE OPERATOR HAS CON
FIRMED THAT IT IS /NLY WHEN NO CIRCUIT BREAKER AUXILIA
RY CONTACT IS ASSIGNED TO ANY BINARY INPUT WILL THE
RELAY CONSIDER THE OPERATOR S CONFIRMATION VALID

4 2 ) 0
# "

# "
KEY OR

#ONFIRM WITH *9
OR ABORT BY PAGING ON WITH !
!FTER CONFIRMATION BY THE OPERATOR THAT THE CIRCUIT

BREAKER IS CLOSED THE TEST CYCLE PROCEEDS )F THE TEST
IS TERMINATED SUCCESSFULLY THIS IS ANNUNCIATED IN THE
DISPLAY OR ON THE 0# SCREEN )F HOWEVER THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER AUXILIARY CONTACT ASSIGNED TO A BINARY INPUT
AND CONNECTED THE RELAY REJECTS THE TEST CYCLE AS

0REREQUISITE FOR STARTING THE TEST IS THAT NO PROTECTION

FUNCTION OF THE RELAY BE PICKED UP
"EGINNING OF THE BLOCK TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER
4 % 3 4
# "
)N THE ABSENCE OF AUTO RECLOSE ONLY THE THREE

POLE TRIP ADDRESS HAS ANY MEANING
4RIP CIRCUIT BREAKER THREE POLE #ONFIRM WITH *9

KEY OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON KEY !
#ONFIRM WITH *9
OR ABORT WITH PAGE ON +EY !
# ' #
3!6

3TARTING A TEST FAULT RECORD
ADDRESS BLOCK
! FAULT RECORD STORAGE CAN BE STARTED USING THE OPER

ATING PANEL OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 3TARTING A
TEST FAULT RECORD IS ALSO POSSIBLE VIA A BINARY INPUT
PROVIDED THIS IS ACCORDINGLY ALLOCATED &.O
3TART &LT2EC
4HE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS AS SET IN ADDRESS
BLOCK ARE DECISIVE FOR THIS FAULT RECORDING REFER TO
3ECTION ADDRESS CONCERNS TRIGGERING VIA
BINARY INPUT ADDRESS TRIGGERING VIA THE OPERAT
ING KEYBOARD OR VIA THE OPERATING INTERFACE 4HE
PRE TRIGGER TIME WAS SET UNDER ADDRESS

4 % 3 4
& ! 5 , 4

2 % # / 2 $ ) . '
& ! 5 , 4
3 4 ! 2 4
3 5 # # % 3 3 & 5 ,
# ' #
2 % #
3CANNING A TEST FAULT RECORD IS ESPECIALLY INTERESTING

FOR USE ON CABLES AND LONG OVERHEAD LINES WHERE
CONSIDERABLE INRUSH CURRENTS CAN BE PRODUCED BY
CHARGING OF THE LINE CAPACITANCES 4HE FAULT RECORD IS
TRIGGERED VIA A BINARY INPUT AT THE INSTANT OF THE
BREAKER CLOSING COMMAND
-ANUAL STARTING OF A FAULT RECORD CAN BE CARRIED OUT IN
ADDRESS BLOCK WHICH CAN BE REACHED BY PAGING
WITH OR OR BY DIRECT DIALLING WITH $! %
4HE START ADDRESS IS REACHED WITH !
"EGINNING OF BLOCK 4EST FAULT RECORDING

PAGE ON WITH ! TO ADDRESS
3TART FAULT RECORDING #ONFIRM WITH *9

WITH PAGE ON KEY !
KEY OR ABORT
4HE RELAY ACKNOWLEDGES SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE

TEST RECORDING

3! 6

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION
!LL SETTING VALUES SHOULD BE CHECKED AGAIN IN CASE

THEY WERE ALTERED DURING THE TESTS 0ARTICULARLY CHECK
THAT ALL DESIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN PRO
GRAMMED IN THE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ADDRESS
BLOCKS AND REFER TO 3ECTION AND ALL DE
SIRED PROTECTION FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN SWITCHED /.
FRONT SO THAT FROM THEN ON ONLY REAL FAULTS ARE INDI

CATED &ROM THAT MOMENT THE MEASURED VALUES OF
THE QUIESCENT STATE ARE DISPLAYED $URING PUSHING
THE 2%3%4 BUTTON THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT WILL LIGHT
UP EXCEPT THE "LOCKED ,%$ THUS A ,%$ TEST IS
PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME
4HE COUNTERS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION STATISTICS

SHOULD BE ERASED ADDRESS BLOCK REFER TO 3ECTION

#HECK THAT THE MODULES ARE PROPERLY INSERTED 4HE

GREEN ,%$ MUST BE ON ON THE FRONT THE RED ,%$ MUST
NOT BE ON
0USH THE KEY -3 ON THE FRONT 4HE DISPLAY SHOWS

THE BEGINNING OF THE ANNUNCIATION BLOCKS 4HUS IT IS
POSSIBLE THAT THE MEASURED VALUES FOR THE QUIESCENT
STATE OF THE RELAY CAN BE DISPLAYED SEE BELOW
4HESE VALUES HAS BEEN CHOSEN DURING CONFIGURATION
REFER TO 3ECTION UNDER THE ADDRESSES
AND
#LOSE HOUSING COVER
3TORED INDICATIONS ON THE FRONT PLATE SHOULD BE RESET

BY PRESSING THE PUSH BUTTON 2%3%4 ,%$ ON THE

!LL TERMINAL SCREWS

BE TIGHTENED
EVEN THOSE NOT IN USE
MUST
)F A TEST SWITCH IS AVAILABLE THEN THIS MUST BE IN THE

OPERATING POSITION
4HE DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY IS NOW READY FOR OPERA
TION
# ' #
3! 6
3IEMENS DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAYS ARE DESIGNED TO RE

QUIRE NO SPECIAL MAINTENANCE !LL MEASUREMENT AND
SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS ARE FULLY SOLID STATE AND
THEREFORE COMPLETELY MAINTENANCE FREE )NPUT MOD
ULES ARE EVEN STATIC RELAYS ARE HERMETICALLY SEALED OR
PROVIDED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERS
)F THE DEVICE IS EQUIPPED WITH A BACK UP BATTERY FOR
SAVING OF STORED ANNUNCIATIONS AND THE INTERNAL TIME
CLOCK THE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AFTER AT MOST
YEARS OF OPERATION REFER TO 3ECTION 4HIS REC
OMMENDATION IS VALID INDEPENDENT ON WHETHER THE
BATTERY HAS BEEN DISCHARGED BY OCCASIONAL SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FAILURES OR NOT
!S THE PROTECTION IS ALMOST COMPLETELY SELF MONI
TORED FROM THE MEASURING INPUTS TO THE COMMAND
OUTPUT RELAYS HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE FAULTS ARE AU
TOMATICALLY ANNUNCIATED 4HIS ENSURES THE HIGH AVAIL
ABILITY OF THE RELAY AND ALLOWS A MORE CORRECTIVE RATH
ER THAN PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE STRATEGY 4ESTS AT
SHORT INTERVALS BECOME THEREFORE SUPERFLUOUS

2OUTINE CHECKS
2OUTINE CHECKS OF CHARACTERISTICS OR PICK UP VALUES

ARE NOT NECESSARY AS THEY FORM PART OF THE CONTINU
OUSLY SUPERVISED FIRMWARE PROGRAMS 4HE PLANNED
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS FOR CHECKING AND MAINTE
NANCE OF THE PLANT CAN BE USED TO PERFORM OPERATION
AL TESTING OF THE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 4HIS MAINTE
NANCE SERVES MAINLY FOR CHECKING THE INTERFACES OF
THE UNIT IE THE COUPLING WITH THE PLANT 4HE FOLLOW
ING PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED
2EAD OUT OF OPERATIONAL VALUES ADDRESS BLOCK
AND COMPARISON WITH THE ACTUAL VALUES FOR
CHECKING THE ANALOG INTERFACES
3IMULATION OF AN INTERNAL SHORT CIRCUIT WITH X ).
FOR CHECKING THE ANALOG INPUT AT HIGH CURRENTS
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT ON

ALL CIRCUITS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED
WITH THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR WITH THE
MEASURING AND TEST QUANTITIES
7ITH DETECTED HARDWARE FAULTS THE RELAY BLOCKS ITSELF

DROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS EQUIPMENT
FAULT )F THERE IS A FAULT DETECTED IN THE EXTERNAL MEA
SURING CIRCUITS GENERALLY AN ALARM IS GIVEN ONLY
2ECOGNIZED SOFTWARE FAULTS CAUSE THE PROCESSOR TO
RESET AND RESTART )F SUCH A FAULT IS NOT ELIMINATED BY
RESTARTING FURTHER RESTARTS ARE INITIATED )F THE FAULT IS
STILL PRESENT AFTER THREE RESTART ATTEMPTS THE PROTEC
TIVE SYSTEM WILL SWITCH ITSELF OUT OF SERVICE AND INDI
CATE THIS CONDITION BY THE RED ,%$ "LOCKED ON THE
FRONT PLATE $ROP OFF OF THE AVAILABILITY RELAY SIGNALS
EQUIPMENT FAULT
4HE REACTION TO DEFECTS AND INDICATIONS GIVEN BY THE
RELAY CAN BE INDIVIDUALLY AND IN CHRONOLOGICAL SE
QUENCE READ OFF AS OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS UNDER
THE ADDRESS FOR DEFECT DIAGNOSIS REFER TO 3EC
TION
7ARNING
#AUTION
OVERLOAD AND DAMAGE THE RELAY IF
APPLIED CONTINUOUSLY REFER TO 3ECTION
FOR OVERLOAD CAPABILITY /BSERVE A
COOLING DOWN PERIOD
#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP CIRCUITS ARE TESTED BY ACTUAL

LIVE TRIPPING 2ESPECTIVE NOTES ARE GIVEN IN 3EC
TION
)F THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO A LOCAL SUBSTATION AUTO

MATION SYSTEM ,3! DEFECT INDICATIONS WILL ALSO BE
TRANSFERRED VIA THE SERIAL INTERFACE TO THE CENTRAL CON
TROL SYSTEM
7ARNING
%NSURE THAT THE CONNECTION MODULES ARE NOT
DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING OR INSERTING THE
DEVICE MODULES (AZARDOUS VOLTAGES MAY
OCCUR WHEN THE HEAVY CURRENT PLUGS ARE
DAMAGED
# ' #

3! 6

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY
4HE DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE STORED IN .6 2!-S

! BACK UP BATTERY IS INSERTED SO THAT THEY ARE RE
TAINED EVEN WITH A LONGER FAILURE OF THE DC SUPPLY
VOLTAGE 4HE BACK UP BATTERY IS ALSO REQUIRED FOR THE
INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK WITH CALENDER TO CONTINUE IN
THE EVENT OF A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
3HORTEN THE LEGS TO MM INCH EACH AND

BEND OVER AT A LENGTH OF MM INCH

4HE BACK UP BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED AT THE LAT

EST AFTER YEARS OF OPERATION 4HE WAY OF DISPLACE
MENT DEPENDS ON THE PRODUCTION SERIES OF THE RELAY
4HIS PRODUCTION SERIES IS FOUND ON THE NAME PLATE
BEHIND THE COMPLETE ORDER DESIGNATION
$IMENSIONS

2ECOMMENDED BATTERY
,ITHIUM BATTERY 6 !H TYPE #2 !! EG
6!24! /RDER .O FOR RELAYS UNTIL
PRODUCTION SERIES ''
6!24! /RDER .O FOR RELAYS FROM
PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER
4HE BATTERY IS LOCATED AT THE REAR EDGE OF THE PROCES
SOR BOARD OF THE BASIC MODULE 4HE BASIC MODULE
MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE HOUSING IN ORDER TO RE
PLACE THE BATTERY
0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE
FOR THE BASIC MODULE
&IGURE
.OTE !LL CONFIGURATION DATA AND SETTINGS OF THE DE

VICE ARE STORED IN %%02/-S PROTECTED AGAINST
SWITCHING OFF OF THE POWER SUPPLY 4HEY ARE STORED
INDEPENDENT OF THE BACK UP BATTERY 4HEY ARE
THEREFORE NEITHER LOST WHEN THE BATTERY IS RE
PLACED NOR WHEN THE DEVICE IS OPERATED WITHOUT A
BATTERY
/NLY FOR RELAY UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES '' 0RE
PARE THE BATTERY AS IN &IGURE
#AUTION
$O NOT SHORT CIRCUIT BATTERY $O NOT RE
VERSE BATTERY POLARITIES $O NOT CHARGE
BATTERY

"ENDING THE BACK UP BATTERY
2ELAYS FROM PRODUCTION SERIES (( OR LATER HAVE

NO AXIAL LEGS
PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE
7ARNING
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN
THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA
PACITORS
/PEN HOUSING COVER

2EAD OUT DEVICE ANNUNCIATIONS IE ALL ADDRESSES
WHICH COMMENCE WITH ONWARDS 4HIS IS
CARRIED OUT MOST CONVENIENT USING THE FRONT OPER
ATING INTERFACE AND A PERSONAL COMPUTER WITH THE
$)'3)q PROTECTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM THE
INFORMATION IS THUS STORED IN THE 0#
IN MM
#AUTION
FACE
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC

TIVE SURFACE
5NSCREW USED BATTERY FROM THE TERMINALS OR RE
MOVE IT FROM THE HOLDER DO NOT PLACE ON THE CON
DUCTIVE SURFACE 2EFER TO &IGURE FOR RELAY UNTIL
PRODUCTION SERIES '' AND TO &IGURE FROM PRO
DUCTION SERIES ((
)NSERT THE PREPARED BATTERY INTO THE TERMINALS OR
HOLDER AS IN &IGURE UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES
'' AND TIGHTEN THE SCREWS OR AS IN &IGURE
# ' #
3! 6
6IEW UPON
THE PCB
2EAR VIEW ON THE
REMOVED BASIC MODULE
&IGURE
)NSTALLATION OF THE BACK UP BATTERY FOR RELAY UNTIL PRODUCTION SERIES ''

THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN
$O NOT REVERSE POLARITIES $O NOT RE

CHARGE $O NOT THROW INTO FIRE $ANGER
OF EXPLOSION

VER &IGURE
0ROVIDED THE INTERNAL SYSTEM CLOCK IS NOT AUTOMAT

ICALLY SYNCHRONIZED VIA THE ,3! INTERFACE IT CAN
NOW BE SET OR SYNCHRONIZED AS DESCRIBED IN 3EC
TION
7ARNING
4HE DISCHARGED BATTERY CONTAINS ,ITHIUM
)T MUST ONLY BE DISPOSED OFF IN LINE WITH THE
APPLICABLE REGULATIONS
2EAR VIEW ON THE

REMOVED BASIC MODULE
&IGURE
#LOSE HOUSING COVER

4HE REPLACEMENT OF THE BACK UP BATTERY HAS THUS
BEEN COMPLETED
6IEW UPON
THE PCB
)NSTALLATION OF THE BACK UP BATTERY FOR RELAY FROM PRODUCTION SERIES ((
# ' #

3! 6

&AULT TRACING
)F THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE INDICATES A DEFECT THE FOLLOW

ING PROCEDURE IS SUGGESTED

2EPLACING THE MINI FUSE
)F NONE OF THE ,%$S ON THE FRONT PLATE OF THE MODULE IS

ON THEN CHECK
3ELECT A REPLACEMENT FUSE } MM %NSURE

THAT THE RATED VALUE TIME LAG MEDIUM SLOW AND
CODE LETTERS ARE CORRECT &IGURE
(AVE THE MODULES BEEN PROPERLY PUSHED IN AND

LOCKED
0REPARE AREA OF WORK PROVIDE CONDUCTIVE SURFACE

FOR THE BASIC MODULE
)S THE /./&& SWITCH ON THE FRONT PLATE IN THE /.

POSITION
/PEN HOUSING COVER
)S THE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE AVAILABLE WITH THE CORRECT

POLARITY AND OF ADEQUATE MAGNITUDE CONNECTED
TO THE CORRECT TERMINALS 'ENERAL DIAGRAMS IN !P
PENDIX !
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN

THE DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF
THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE
MODULES FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CA
PACITORS
(AS THE MINI FUSE IN THE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

BLOWN SEE &IGURE )F APPROPRIATE REPLACE THE
FUSE ACCORDING TO 3ECTION
)F THE RED FAULT INDICATOR "LOCKED ON THE FRONT IS ON
AND THE GREEN READY ,%$ REMAINS DARK THE DEVICE
HAS RECOGNIZED AN INTERNAL FAULT 2E INITIALIZATION OF
THE PROTECTION SYSTEM COULD BE TRIED BY SWITCHING
THE DC AUXILIARY VOLTAGE OFF AND ON AGAIN 4HIS HOW
EVER RESULTS IN LOSS OF FAULT DATA AND MESSAGES IF THE
RELAY IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH A BUFFER BATTERY AND IF A
PARAMETERIZING PROCESS HAS NOT YET BEEN COM
PLETED THE LAST PARAMETERS ARE NOT STORED
7ARNING

PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM &IGURE
#AUTION
FACE
-INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY

MEDIUM SLOW -
2EAR VIEW ON THE REMOVED
BASIC MODULE
&IGURE

AT 5(.6
RATED
VALUE

!%

!%

!'
-INI FUSE OF THE POWER SUPPLY

# ' #
3! 6
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO THE CONDUC

TIVE SURFACE

VER &IGURE
2EMOVE BLOWN FUSE FROM THE HOLDER &IGURE
#LOSE HOUSING COVER
&IT NEW FUSE INTO THE HOLDER &IGURE

THE MODULE IS PRESSED IN &IGURE
3WITCH ON THE DEVICE AGAIN )F A POWER SUPPLY FAILURE

IS STILL SIGNALLED A FAULT OR SHORT CIRCUIT IS PRESENT IN
THE INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 4HE DEVICE SHOULD BE RE
TURNED TO THE FACTORY SEE #HAPTER
2EMOVING THE BASIC MODULE

PROVIDED AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM
0ULL OUT BASIC MODULE AND PLACE ONTO CONDUCTIVE
SURFACE
)NSERTING THE BASIC MODULE
0USH RELEASING LEVER FULLY TO THE LEFT
)NSERT MODULE
&IRMLY PUSH IN THE MODULE USING THE
RELEASING LEVER
6IEW FROM ABOVE ONTO A SIZE

MODULE WITH RELEASING LEVER
&IGURE
!ID FOR REMOVING AND INSERTING BASIC MODULE
# ' #

3! 6
2EPAIRS
2EPAIR OF DEFECTIVE MODULES IS NOT RECOMMENDED AT

ALL BECAUSE SPECIALLY SELECTED ELECTRONIC COMPO
NENTS ARE USED WHICH MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCOR
DANCE WITH THE PROCEDURES REQUIRED FOR %LECTROSTATI
CALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS %%# &URTHER
MORE SPECIAL MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES ARE NECES
SARY FOR ANY WORK ON THE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS IN OR
DER TO DO NOT DAMAGE THE BATH SOLDERED MULTILAYER
BOARDS THE SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND THE PROTEC
TIVE FINISH
4HEREFORE IF A DEFECT CANNOT BE CORRECTED BY OPERA
TOR PROCEDURES SUCH AS DESCRIBED IN #HAPTER IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE COMPLETE RELAY SHOULD BE RE
TURNED TO THE MANUFACTURER 5SE THE ORIGINAL TRANS
PORT PACKAGING FOR RETURN )F ALTERNATIVE PACKING IS
USED THIS MUST PROVIDE THE DEGREE OF PROTECTION
AGAINST MECHANICAL SHOCK AS LAID DOWN IN )%#
CLASS AND )%# CLASS
)F IT IS UNAVOIDABLE TO REPLACE INDIVIDUAL MODULES IT IS
IMPERATIVE THAT THE STANDARDS RELATED TO THE HANDLING
OF %LECTROSTATICALLY %NDANGERED #OMPONENTS ARE
OBSERVED
7ARNING
(AZARDOUS VOLTAGES CAN BE PRESENT IN THE
DEVICE EVEN AFTER DISCONNECTION OF THE SUP
PLY VOLTAGE OR AFTER REMOVAL OF THE MODULE
FROM THE HOUSING STORAGE CAPACITORS
2EPAIRS 3TORAGE
3TORAGE
3OLID STATE PROTECTIVE RELAYS SHALL BE STORED IN DRY

AND CLEAN ROOMS 4HE LIMIT TEMPERATURE RANGE FOR
STORAGE OF THE RELAYS OR ASSOCIATED SPARE PARTS IS
^# TO ^# REFER 3ECTION UNDER THE
4ECHNICAL DATA CORRESPONDING TO ^& TO ^&
4HE RELATIVE HUMIDITY MUST BE WITHIN LIMITS SUCH THAT
NEITHER CONDENSATION NOR ICE FORMS
)T IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE STORAGE TEMPERA
TURE TO THE RANGE # TO # & TO &
THIS PREVENTS FROM EARLY AGEING OF THE ELECTROLYTIC CA
PACITORS WHICH ARE CONTAINED IN THE POWER SUPPLY
&OR VERY LONG STORAGE PERIODS IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE RELAY SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE AUXILIARY
VOLTAGE SOURCE FOR ONE OR TWO DAYS EVERY OTHER YEAR
IN ORDER TO REGENERATE THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
4HE SAME IS VALID BEFORE THE RELAY IS FINALLY INSTALLED
)N EXTREME CLIMATIC CONDITIONS TROPICS PRE WARM
ING WOULD THUS BE ACHIEVED AND CONDENSATION
AVOIDED
CONDENSATION
#AUTION
%LECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES VIA THE COMPONENT
CONNECTIONS THE 0#" TRACKS OR THE CONNECT
ING PINS OF THE MODULES MUST BE AVOIDED UN
DER ALL CIRCUMSTANCES BY PREVIOUSLY TOUCH
ING AN EARTHED METAL SURFACE 4HIS APPLIES
EQUALLY FOR THE REPLACEMENT OF REMOVABLE
COMPONENTS SUCH AS %02/- OR %%02/CHIPS &OR TRANSPORT AND RETURNING OF INDIVID
UAL MODULES ELECTROSTATIC PROTECTIVE PACK
ING MATERIAL MUST BE USED
#OMPONENTS AND MODULES ARE NOT ENDANGERED AS

LONG AS THEY ARE INSTALLED WITHIN THE RELAY
3HOULD IT BECOME NECESSARY TO EXCHANGE ANY DE
VICE OR MODULE THE COMPLETE PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT
SHOULD BE REPEATED 2ESPECTIVE NOTES ARE CONTAINED
IN #HAPTER AND

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
!PPENDIX
!
'ENERAL DIAGRAMS
"
#ONNECTION DIAGRAMS
4ABLES
# ' #

3! 6
'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

+/--!.$/2%,!)3 #/--!.$
.
/
)
$
.
!
-
4
2
!
4
3
,
!
2
%
.
%
'

G
N
U
G
E
R
N
LA
A
R
E
N
E
'
/
#
%
3
/
,
#

O
D
N
A
M
M
O
+
IN
%

"

"

!UFBAU 'EHUSE 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3%

%INBAU 'EHUSE &,53( -/5.4).' #!3%

"

+

"

!

!

+

!

3
)
6
2
%
0
5
3
2
!
,
!

"

-%,$%2%,!)3 2%,!9
!PPENDIX
%
5
,
!
6

2
5
3
!
%

$
.
%
3
G
N
U
R
IE
K
C
LO
2
2
!
#

N
E
D
N
E
3

"

!

G
N
U
K
C
R
D
R
E
T
N
U

2
!

2
%
)

"

+
#
/
,

+
#
/
,
"

"

"

"
LD
E
-
5
+
3
,

" "

" "

%
6
)
4
!
2
%
0
/
%
#
)
G
N
U
H
C
A
W
R
E
B
6
%
$

IT
E
R
E
B
T
R
E
'
7
-

"

"

" "

! !

!

!
%
'
!
%
:
!
%
'

$ $

"

"

"

"

#

#

# # #

!
%
'

!

%).'!"% ).054

! ! ! ! ! !

!
%
:
!
%
'

!

!

&IGURE !

X X
5
5

, .
5
5

,

,
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

% %

$
%
,
4
%
3
%
2
%
2

T
E
S
E
2

,

!

IN
%
D
N
A
(
3
,

% , %

!

%
3
/
,
#
,
!
5
.
!

#

T
K
A
T
N
O
K
FS
IL
M
O
T
U
A

L
D
W

S
G
P
3

, %

!

4
#
!
4
.
/
#

8
5
!

"

"
#

4

6

T
A
%
4
/

!

.
/
)
4
!
2
%
0
/
$
%
,

, , , , , ,

!

,

%

'ENERAL DIAGRAM 3! SHEET OF

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX

,

,

,
$
.
!
-
$
.
!
-
$
.
!
-
/
#
/
#
/
#
)0
2
4

,
)0
2
4

,
)0
2
4

,
O
D
N
A
O
D
N
A
O
D
N
A
M
O
+
M
O
+
M
O
+
S
U
!
S
U
!
S
U
!

+

$ $

+

# #

#

$

#

+

$ $

$

3
2
%
6
%
2
,
!
2
%
.
%
'
0
)
2
4

G
N
U
S
L
S
U
LA
A
R
E
N
E
'

# #

#

,

,

,
4
2
!
4
3

,
4
2
!
4
3

,
4
2
!
4
3

,
G
N
U
G
E
R
N
!
G
N
U
G
E
R
N
!
G
N
U
G
E
R
N
!

$ $

$ $

$ $

.
/
)
4
!
#
/
,

S
T
R
%
4
2
!
4
3

W
K
C
%
G
N
U
G
E
R
N
!
G
N
U
T
H
IC

# #

$

$

!
%
:
6
3

!
%
:

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

" "

2
2
!
#

.
/
,
%
.
.
!
(
#

T
R
T
S
E
G
G
N
FA
G
N
FA
P
#

IT
E
R
E
B
M
%
M
%
3
,
%
6
)
%
#
%
2
2
%
)

, %

, %

+
#
/
,
"
9
$
!
%
2

"

, %

"
IN
%
2
!

S
U
!
5
+
5
+
5
+
2
!

, %

&
&
/
.
/
2
!

K
C
LO

, %

, %

, ,
(
%).'!"% ).054
2
/
4
)
&IGURE !

$

%INBAU 'EHUSE &,53( -/5.4).' #!3%

$

!UFBAU 'EHUSE 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3%

-%,$%2%,!)3 2%,!9

+/--!.$/2%,!)3 #/--!.$

# ' #

3! 6

!PPENDIX
2X$
!
-2
!
6
!
4X$
!
-4

36
%INBAU UND !UFBAUGEHUSE MIT 6

3CHNITTSTELLE
&,53( !.$ 352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4(
6 3%2)!, $!4! ,).+
3!

"
&
3-!
!
!
&
3-!
36
%INBAU 'EHUSE MIT ,7, -ODUL
&,53( -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4( &)"2%
/04)# ).4%2&!#%
3!

!

#%&'
&
3-!
!
!
!
!
&
3-!
36
!UFBAU 'EHUSE MIT ,7, -ODUL

352&!#% -/5.4).' #!3% 7)4( &)"2%
/04)# ).4%2&!#%
3!

"!
&IGURE !


# ' #
3! 6
"
!PPENDIX
#ONNECTION DIAGRAMS
3URFACE MOUNTING
&LUSH MOUNTING#UBICLE INSTALLATION
,
),
)%
),
),
),
),
),
)%
5,
5,
5,
!
!
!
!
!

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

-EASURED QUANTITIES FAULTY
"

GENERAL
!

!

$EVICE OPERATIVE
!

DEVICE FAULTY
#

#

#

$

3IGNAL RELAY
$

$

3IGNAL RELAY
$

$

3IGNAL RELAY
$

#

3IGNAL RELAY
#

$

3IGNAL RE
$

3IGNAL RELAY

!
$
$
"
3IGNAL RELAY

3IGNAL RELAY

5,

"

"

"
3IGNAL RELAY
3IGNAL RELAY
5,
5.
5,
5E
5.
#
5N
#
,
#
,
,
"
3IGNAL RELAY
5X

#
5X

#

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

$

$
2ESET ,%$
6OLTAGE TRANSFORMER
MCB
#" AUXILIARY CONTACT
#" CLOSED
-ANUAL CLOSING
3IGNAL RECEPTION
2ECEPTION FAULTY
#" READY FOR CLOSE
TRIP CYCLE
"LOCK !2
3WITCH !2 ON
3WITCH !2 OFF

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

"

"
2X$

!
-2

!
0OWER SUPPLY
4RANSMISSION SIGNAL
!2 BLOCKED
#" ALARM SUPPRESSION
'ENERAL TRIP
&AULT DETECTION ,
&AULT DETECTION ,
&AULT DETECTION ,
&AULT DETECTION %
2EVERSE DIRECTION
LAY
"INARY
3!
INPUT
"INARY
INPUT
"INARY
"

4RIP RE
"

LAIS
"

"

INPUT
!

4RIP RE
!

LAIS
!

!

$

$

$

$

#

#

#

#

$

$

$

$

!

"INARY
INPUT
"INARY
INPUT
"INARY
4RIP RE
INPUT
LAIS
"INARY
INPUT
"INARY
4RIP RE
INPUT
LAIS
"INARY
INPUT
4RIP RE
"INARY
LAIS
INPUT
3ERIAL INTERFACE 623#

K6 INSULATED
COUPLING TO CENTRAL STATION
3ERIAL INTERFACE FOR OPTICAL FIBRE
!
#,/3% COMMAND
'ENERAL FAULT
DETECTION
42)0 ,
42)0 ,
42)0 ,
4X$
-4
/PTIONAL
6 INTERFACE
OPTICAL FIBRE INTERFACE
COUPLING TO CENTRAL STATION

"INARY INPUTS SIGNAL RELAYS

TRIP RELAYS ,%$ S ARE

FREELY ARRANGABLE

OPTIONAL SENSITIVITY
NORMAL SENSITIVITY
HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR EARTH FAULT DETECTION
IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
TO OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE AS ILLUSTRATED
TO BUS BAR VOLTAGE FOR SYNCHRO CHECK
&IGURE "
3!
# PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING

" PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING
% CUBICLE INSTALLATION
#ONNECTION EXAMPLE 3!
# ' #

3! 6
"US
BAR
&EEDER #4S
,INE
&IGURE "
!PPENDIX
SURFACE
"US
BAR
FLUSH
3!
),
!
!
),
!
!
),
!
!
)%
$
$
&EEDER #4S
,INE
SURFACE
FLUSH
3!
),
!
!
),
!
!
),
!
!
)%
$
$
EGSUMMATION
#4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S
TRANSFORMER
.OTE
)F THE CURRENT POLARITY IS CHANGED UNDER

ADDRESS THIS CHANGES ALSO THE
POLARITY OF THE CURRENT INPUT )%
"US
BAR
&EEDER #4S
,INE !
SURFACE
FLUSH
&IGURE "
3!
),
!
!
),
!
!
),
!
!
)%
#4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND ADDITIONAL

)% SUMMATION #4
"US
BAR

$
$
&EEDER #4S
,INE
,INE "
SURFACE
FLUSH
3!
),
!
!
),
!
!
),
!
!
)%
$
$
EGSUMMATION
&IGURE "
#4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND EARTH CUR

RENT OF A PARALLEL LINE "
TRANSFORMER
.OTE
)F THE CURRENT POLARITY IS CHANGED UNDER

ADDRESS THIS CHANGES ALSO THE
POLARITY OF THE CURRENT INPUT )%
&IGURE "

#4 CIRCUITS WITH #4S AND ADDITIONAL

)% SUMMATION #4 NOT FOR EARTHED SYS
TEMS
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
SURFACE
&EEDER 64S
FLUSH
3!
5,
"
5,

"
5,
5EN
SURFACE
&EEDER
64S

"

"

#

#
&IGURE "
FLUSH
3!
5,
"
5,

"
5,

"

"
64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S
.OTE
&IGURE "
64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S WITH OPEN DEL

TA WINDINGS E N
SURFACE
&EEDER 64S
IN 6
)F OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE IS NOT AVAILABLE NEITHER FROM

FEEDER 64S NOR FROM BUS BAR 64S THE APPROPRIATE
INPUT ON THE RELAY REMAINS UNCONNECTED .EVERTHE
LESS THE RELAY IS ABLE TO DETECT EARTH FAULTS PROVIDED
THREE STAR CONNECTED AND EARTHED VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMERS ARE AVAILABLE REFER &IGURE "
FLUSH
3!
5,
"
5,

"
5,

"
SURFACE
CONNEC
TION
&EEDER
64S
5EN

#

#
VOLTAGE FROM
BUS
BAR
FROM THE
BUS
3!
5,
"
5,

"
5,

"

"

#

#

#

#
5
ANY VOLTAGE
OPEN DELTA
FLUSH
BAR
PHASE
EARTH
&IGURE "
64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S AND OPEN DELTA

VOLTAGE FROM A BUS BAR VOLTAGE TRANS
FORMER SET NOT FOR EARTHED SYSTEMS
OR
ANY VOLTAGE
FROM THE
BUS
5
BAR
PHASE
PHASE
&IGURE " 64 CIRCUITS WITH 64S AND ANY DESIRED

VOLTAGE FROM THE BUS BAR 64S
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
)0
2
4

3
5
!
IT
M
S
N
A
R
4
G
N
A
F
P
M
%

!
3

,

E
V
I
E
C
E
2
3TATION "
L
E
S
S
L
H
C
3
A
8
8

2

+
Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2
"
# $

+ +

+

+

+
Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2
Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2
Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2
Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2
8
8

E
D
O
#
R
E
D
R
/

!
0

G
N
FA
P
M
%
N
E
G
N
U
LD
E
-
N
O
IT
C
E
N
N
O
C
E
RI
W
T
O
LI
0
N
IO
T
IA
C
N
U
N
N
A
N
IO
T
P
E
C
E
2
"
G
N
U
D
IN
B
R
E
V
N
R
E
D
A
Z
T
U
H
C
3

+

2

2

2

B

3TATION !

2

!
3

IT
M
S
N
A
R
4
0
)
2
4

3
5
!
G
N
A
F
P
M
%
E
IV
E
C
E
2
,

G
N
U
S
S
A
P
N
A
N
R
E
D
A
Z
T
U
H
C
3
R
U
Z
N
E
F
U
T
S
S
D
N
A
T
S
R
E
ID

P
O
LO

+
RE
I
W
T
LO
I
P
R
O
F
S
E
C
N
A
T
S
I
S
RE
R
E
P
P
O
R
$
X
2

+

X
2
X
2

+

,

+
K

X
2
X
2
K

X
2

+
K

,

K

K

+
K

K

K

K

K

,

Y
LA
E
2
S
I
LA
E
2

+

!
0

,

N
IO
T
N IA
E C
D N
N U
E N
3 N
A
N
E N
G IO
N S
U S
I
LD M
E S
- N
RA
4
N
E
D
N
E
3

+
,

8
8

2

#
$
6

#
$
6

#
$
6

2

+

,

B
#
$
6

0OWER LINE

!
0

,

2
%NERGIELEITUNG

,

"
&
,
-
#
$
6

N
E
D
N
E
3
#
$
6

K

K

,

,

,

,

&IGURE " 0ILOT WIRE CONNECTION SCHEME FOR OVERREACH TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES WITH 3! AT BOTH LINE
ENDS

# ' #
3! 6

,

!PPENDIX
,

N
IO
T
C
E
T
O
R
P
E
IN
,
3TATION "
Z
T
U
H
C
S
S
G
N
TU
I
E
,
T
E
D
TL
U
A
&

G
N
U
G
E
R
N
!
)0
2
4

3
5
!

T
,

,

T
R
T
S
E
G
N
R
E
D
A
FS
LI
(
G
N
U
LD
E
-
!
#
"

N
E
D
N
E
3
N
E
G
N
U
D
L
E
-
C
8
8

,

G
N
U
D
IN
B
R
E
V
N
R
E
D
A
Z
T
U
H
C
3
N
IO
T
IA
C
N
U
N
N
A
N
IO
S
S
I
M
S
N
RA
4

N
IO
T
C
E
N
N
O
C
E
RI
W
T
O
LI
0
G
N
A
F
P
M
%
N
E
G
N
U
D
L
E
-

N
IO
T
IA
C
N
U
N
N
A
N
IO
T
P
E
C
E
2

2

2

2

2

3TATION !

!
3

N
E
D
N
E
3
TI
M
S
N
A
R
4
)0
2
4

3
5
!

+
Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2
"
# $

E
D
O
#
R
E
D
R
/

!
0

+ +

+

+

+
Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2
Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2
Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2
Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2
G
N
FA
P
M
%
E
V
I
E
C
E
2
,

G
N
U
S
S
A
P
N
A
N
R
E
D
A
TZ
U
H
C
3
R
U
Z
N
E
F
TU
S
S
D
N
TA
S
R
E
D
I
7

P
O
O
L
E
RI
W
T
O
LI
P
R
FO
S
E
C
N
A
T
IS
S
E
R
R
E
P
P
O
R
$
X
2
X
2
X
2

+

+

X
2
,

,

,

X
2
X
2

+
K

K

K

K

,

Y
A
L
E
2

IS
A
L
E
2

+

!
0

S

+

RE
I
W
T
LO
I
P
N
IO
T
IA
C
N
U
N
N
!

"
&
,
-

#
$
6

7
3

E
R
U
LI
A
F

#
$
6

#
$
6

"
#
$
6

0OWER LINE
%NERGIELEITUNG
L
E
S
S
L
H
C
3
#
# $
$
6
6

K

K

,

,

,

,

&IGURE " 0ILOT WIRE CONNECTION SCHEME FOR OVERREACH TRANSFER VIA PILOT WIRES WITH 3! AT ONE LINE END
AND 37 AT THE OTHER LINE END
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
4ABLES
4ABLE #
!NNUNCIATIONS FO ,3!
4ABLE #
!NNUNCIATIONS FOR 0# ,# DISPLAY AND BINARY INPUTSOUTPUTS
4ABLE #
2EFERENCE TABLE FOR FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE #
4ESTS AND COMMISSIONING AIDS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE #
!NNUNCIATIONS MEASURED VALUES ETC ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE #
2EFERENCE TABLE FOR CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
4ABLE #
/PERATIONAL DEVICE CONTROL FACILITIES ADDRESS BLOCKS TO
./4% 4HE FOLLOWING TABLES LIST ALL DATA WHICH ARE AVAILABLE IN THE MAXIMUM COMPLEMENT OF THE DEVICE $EPEN
DENT ON THE ORDERED MODEL ONLY THOSE DATA MAY BE PRESENT WHICH ARE VALID FOR THE INDIVIDUAL VERSION
./4% 4HE ACTUAL TABLES ARE ATTACHED TO THE PURCHASED RELAY

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
Annunciations 7SA511 for LSA (DIN 19244 and according VDEW/ZVEI)
FNo.
Op/Ft
- Function number of annunciation

- Operation/Fault annunciation
C/CG: Coming/Coming and Going annunciation
V
: Annunciation with Value
M
: Measurand
LSA No.- Number of annunciation for former LSA (DIN 19244)
according to VDEW/ZVEI:
CA
- Compatible Annunciation
GI
- Annunciation for General Interrogation
BT
- Binary Trace for fault recordings
Typ
- Function type (p: according to the configured "Function type")
Inf
- Information number
Ann.LSA
VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning
OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf
11>User defined annunciation 1

CG 24CAGIBT p 27
CG 25CAGIBT p 28
CG 26CAGIBT p 29
CG 27CAGIBT p 30
15>Testing via system-interface

135 53
16>Block. of monitoring dir. via sys.-int
135 54
51Device operative / healthy
CG 1 GI 135 81
52Any protection operative
CG
CAGI p 18
55Re-start of processor system
C 8CA p 4
56Initial start of processor system
C 14CA p 5
59Real time response to LSA
C 6
60LED Reset
C 13CA p 19
61Logging and measuring functions blockedCG
CAGI p 20
62Test mode
CG
CAGI p 21
63PC operation via system interface
CG
GI 135 83
95Parameters are being set
CG 11CAGI p 22
96Parameter set A is active
CG 40CAGI p 23
97Parameter set B is active
CG 41CAGI p 24
98Parameter set C is active
CG 42CAGI p 25
99Parameter set D is active
CG 43CAGI p 26
110Annunciations lost (buffer overflow)
C 9 135130
112Annunciations for LSA lost
C 10 135131
113Fault tag lost

BT135136
140General internal failure of device
CG
CAGI p 47
141Failure of internal 24 VDC power supplyCG 96 GI 135161
143Failure of internal 15 VDC power supplyCG 97 GI 135163
144Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply CG 98 GI 135164
145Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply CG 99 GI 135165
151Failure in I/O module 1
CG 100 GI 135166
152Failure in I/O module 2
CG 101 GI 135167
154Supervision trip circuit
CG
CAGI p 36
160Common alarm
CG
CAGI p 46
161Measured value supervision of currents CG
CAGI p 32
162Failure: Current summation supervision CG 104 GI 135182
163Failure: Current symmetry supervision CG 107 GI 135183
164Measured value supervision of voltages CG
CAGI p 33
165Failure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-e)
CG 105 GI 135184
166Failure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-ph)
CG 106 GI 135185
167Failure: Voltage symmetry supervision CG 108 GI 135186
168Failure: Measuring voltages absent
CG 109 GI 135187
169Fuse failure monitor operated (>10s)
CG 110 GI 135188
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Ann.LSA
VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning
OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf
171Failure: Phase sequence supervision

CG 111CAGI p 35
204Fault recording initiated via bin.input
BT135204
205Fault recording initiated via keyboard
BT135205
206Fault recording initiated via PC interf
BT135206
301Fault in the power system
CG 2 135231
302Flt. event w. consecutive no.
C
135232
303E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw.
CG
GI 135233
361>U Line side VT MCB tripped
CG 20CAGI p 38
362>U2 Busbar side VT MCB tripped
CG
GI 150 12
501General fault detection of device
CG221CAGIBT p 84
502General drop-off of device
C 152 150152
503General device fault detection: Ph. L1 CG
CAGIBT p 64
CAGIBT p 65
CAGIBT p 66
506General device fault detection: Ph. N CG
CAGIBT p 67
507General device trip: Phase L1
C
CA BT p 69
C
CA BT p 70
C
CA BT p 71
511General trip of device
C
CA BT p 68
516General trip for fault in forward dir. C 242 150166
517General trip for fault in reverse dir. C 243 150167
521Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In)
V250 150171
V251 150172
V252 150173
561Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse)C 18 150211
562CB close command for manual closing
C
150212
601Current in phase IL1 [%] =
M
CA 134128
M
CA 134128
M
CA 134128
621UL1E [%]=
M
CA 134128
622UL2E [%]=
M
CA 134128
623UL3E [%]=
M
CA 134128
624UL12 [%] =
M
134128
625UL23 [%] =
M
134128
626UL31 [%] =
M
134128
641Active power Pa [%] =
M
CA 134128
642Reactive power Pr [%] =
M
CA 134128
644Frequency f [%] =
M
CA 134128
701Iea [mA] =
M
134128
702Ier [mA] =
M
134128
1114Fault resistance, Ohm prim.
V
151 14
1115Fault reactance, Ohm prim.
V
CA p 73
1117Fault resistance, Ohm sec.
V201 151 17
1118Fault reactance, Ohm sec.
V202 151 18
1119Distance to fault in km
V203 151 19
1120Distance to fault in %
V204 151 20
1174Circuit breaker test in progress
CG 21 GI 151 74
1181Circuit breaker test: General trip
C
151 81
1261E/F det. (isol./comp. net) switched offCG 95 GI 151161
1262E/F detection (isol./comp. net) blockedCG
GI 151162
1263E/F detection (isol./comp. net) active CG
GI 151163
1272Earth fault (isol./comp.) L1 detected CG 89CAGI p 48
1276Earth fault (isol./comp.) forward dir. CG 92CAGI p 51
1277Earth fault (isol./comp.) reverse dir. CG 93CAGI p 52
1278Earth fault (isol./comp.) undef. dir. CG 94 GI 151178

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
Ann.LSA
VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning
OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf
1281Trip by earth fault det. (isol./comp.) C

151181
1316>Carrier reception for direct. E/F compCG 68 GI 166 16
1317>Carrier reception for dir. E/F faulty CG 67 GI 166 17
1331Earth fault protection is switched off CG 71 GI 166 31
1332Earth fault protection is blocked
CG
GI 166 32
1333Earth fault protection is active
CG
GI 166 33
1334Earth fault prot. direct.stage blocked CG 64 GI 166 34
1341Earth fault detection 75% Ie picked up CG208 BT166 41
1342Earth fault detection non-direct. Ie
CG208 166 42
1343Earth fault detection directional Ie
CG209 166 43
1352Earth fault prot. dir. time expired
C 246 166 52
1353Earth fault prot. non-dir. time expired C 247 166 53
1381Earth fault dir. comp. is switched off CG
GI 166 81
1384Carrier transmission for dir. comp. E/F C 245 166 84
1385Echo signal for directional comp. E/F C 70 166 85
1386Transient block. of E/F protection
C 218 166 86
1511Thermal overload prot. is switched off CG
GI 167 11
1512Thermal overload protection is blocked CG
GI 167 12
1513Thermal overload protection is active CG
GI 167 13
1515Thermal overload prot.: Current warningCG
GI 167 15
1516Thermal overload prot.: Thermal warningCG
GI 167 16
1517Thermal overload prot.: Pick-up thermalCG
GI 167 17
1521Thermal overload protection trip
C
BT167 21
2051Emergency O/C protect. is switched off CG
GI 61 51
2052Emergency O/C protection is blocked
CG
GI 61 52
2053Emergency O/C protection is active
CG
GI 61 53
2054Emergency O/C protection is running
CG 50CAGI p 37
2061Emerg. O/C prot.: General fault detect. CG160 BT 61 61
2062Emerg. O/C prot.: Fault detection L1
CG145 61 62
CG146 61 63
CG147 61 64
2065Emerg. O/C prot.: Earth fault detection CG148 61 65
2071Emerg. O/C earth fault detection only C
61 71
2072Emerg. O/C fault detection L1 only
C 161 61 72
2073Emerg. O/C fault detection L1E
C 162 61 73
C 163 61 74
C 164 61 75
2076Emerg. O/C fault detection L12
C 165 61 76
C 166 61 77
C 167 61 78
C 168 61 79
C 169 61 80
C 170 61 81
C 171 61 82
C 172 61 83
C 173 61 84
C 174 61 85
2091Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>>
CG
61 91
2093Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>
CG
61 93
2097Emerg. O/C earth fault detection IE>
CG
61 97
2121Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI>> expired
C 153 61121
2123Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI> expired
C 157 61123
2127Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TIE> expired
C 157 61127
2141Emerg. O/C protection: General Trip
C 191CA p 72
2142Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 1pole L1
C 238 61142
C 239 61143
C 240 61144
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Ann.LSA
VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning
OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf
2145Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 3pole

C 241 61145
2704>AR: Reset auto-reclose function
CG
GI 40 4
2709>AR: Block delayed auto-reclose
CG 76 GI 40 9
2711>AR: External start for internal AR
CG 28 GI 40 11
2712>AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR
CG 29 GI 40 12
CG 30 GI 40 13
CG 31 GI 40 14
2781AR: Auto-reclose is switched off
CG 79 GI 40 81
2782AR: Auto-reclose is switched on
CG
CAGI p 16
2783AR: Auto-reclose is blocked
CG 72 GI 40 83
2784AR: Auto-reclose is not ready
CG
CAGIBT p130
2785AR: Auto-reclose is dynamically blockedCG 233 GI 40 85
2787AR: Circuit breaker not ready
CG 78 GI 40 87
2801AR: Auto-reclose in progress
CGCG228 GI 40101
2813AR: 1pole dead time for RAR is running CGCG230 GI 40113
2814AR: 3pole dead time for RAR is running CGCG230 GI 40114
2833AR: 3pole dead time 1 for DAR running CGCG230 GI 40133
2851AR: Close command from auto-reclose
C 248CA BT p128
2854AR: Close command after 3pole DAR cycleC
CA p129
2863AR: Definitive trip
C 74 40163
2871AR: Trip during 1pole AR cycle
C
40171
2931Synchro-check function is switched off CG
GI 41 31
2932Synchro-check function is blocked
CG
GI 41 32
2934Synchro-check function faulty
CG
GI 41 34
2935Synchro-check supervision time expired C
41 35
2941Synchro-check function is running
CG
GI 41 41
2942Synchro-check function override/bypass C
41 42
2943Synchronism (U1>,U2>) detected
C
41 43
2944Live line,dead busbar(U1>,U2<) detectedC
41 44
2945Dead line,live busbar(U1<,U2>) detectedC
41 45
2946Dead line,dead busbar(U1<,U2<) detectedC
41 46
2947Sync.: Voltage diff. greater than limitC
41 47
2948Sync.: Freq. diff. greater than limit C
41 48
2949Sync.: Angle diff. greater than limit C
41 49
2951Synchronism release (to ext. AR)
C
41 51
2961Close command from synchro-check
C
41 61
3651Distance protection is switched off
CG 55 GI 28 51
3652Distance protection is blocked
CG 48 GI 28 52
3653Distance protection is active
CG
GI 28 53
3671Dist.: General fault detection
CG144 28 71
3672Dist.: Fault detection , phase L1
CG145 GIBT 28 72
CG146 GIBT 28 73
CG147 GIBT 28 74
3675Dist.: Fault detection , earth fault
CG148 GIBT 28 75
3681Dist.: Fault detection only phase L1
C 161 28 81
3682Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,E
C 162 28 82
C 163 28 83
C 164 28 84
3685Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2
C 165 28 85
3686Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,E
C 166 28 86
C 167 28 87
C 168 28 88
C 169 28 89
C 170 28 90
C 171 28 91

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
Ann.LSA
VDEW/ZVEI
FNo. Meaning
OpFtNo.CAGIBTTypInf

C 172 28 92
3693Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3
C 173 28 93
3694Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3,E C 174 28 94
3719Dist.: Fault det. in forward direction C 149CA BT p 74
3720Dist.: Fault det. in reverse direction C 150CA BT p 75
3771Dist.: Time T1 ( Zone Z1 ) expired
C 153CA p 78
C 154CA p 79
C 155CA p 80
3778Dist.: Time T4 (direct. zone) expired C 156CA p 81
3779Dist.: Time T5 (non-dir. zone) expired C 157CA p 82
3780Dist.: Time T1B ( Zone Z1B ) expired
C 158 28180
3783Dist.: Time T1L ( Zone Z1L ) expired
C 159 28183
3801Distance protection: General trip
C
28201
3802Dist.: Trip phase L1 1pole only
C 238 28202
C 239 28203
C 240 28204
3805Dist.: Trip 3pole
C 241 28205
4051Dist. teleprotection is switched on
CG
CAGI p 17
4052Dist. teleprotection is switched off
CG 63 GI 29 52
4054Dist. teleprotection: Carrier reception C 57CA p 77
4055Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty
CG 60CAGI p 39
4056Dist. teleprotection: Carrier send
C 244CA p 76
4067POTT teleprotection: Carrier echo send C 59 29 67
4068POTT teleprotection: Transient block
C 198 29 68
4164Power swing detection
CG 80 GI 29164
4166Out-of-step trip 3pole
C 81 29166
4431Ext. trip via binary input: Trip
C
51 31
4432Ext. trip via binary input: 1pole L1
C
51 32
C
51 33
C
51 34
4435Ext. trip via binary input: 3pole
C
51 35
4436Ext. trip via binary input: Without AR C
51 36
6254Output signal of user defined timer T1 CG
GI 214 54
6255Output signal of user defined timer T2 CG
GI 214 55
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Annunciations 7SA511 for PC, LC-display and binary inputs/outputs
FNo. - Function number of annunciation

Op/Ft - Operation/Fault annunciation
C/CG: Coming/Coming and Going annunciation
M
: Measurand
E
- Earth fault annunciation
IOT
- I: can be marshalled to binary input
O: can be marshalled to binary output (LED, signal relay)
T: can be marshalled to trip relay
FNo.Abbreviation Meaning
OpFtEIOT
3>Time Synchro>Time synchronization

IO
4>Start FltRec>Start fault recording

C IO
5>LED reset
>Reset LED indicators
IO
7>ParamSelec.1>Parameter set selection 1 (with No.8) IO
8>ParamSelec.2>Parameter set selection 2 (with No.7) IO

11>Annunc. 1
>User defined annunciation 1
CG IOT
12>Annunc. 2
CG IOT
13>Annunc. 3
CG IOT
14>Annunc. 4
CG IOT
15>Sys-Test
>Testing via system-interface
IO
16>Sys-MM-block>Block. of monitoring dir. via sys.-int IO
51Dev.operativeDevice operative / healthy
CG O
52Prot. operat.Any protection operative
CG O
56Initial startInitial start of processor system
C
60LED reset
LED Reset
C O
61LogMeasBlock Logging and measuring functions blockedCG
62Test mode
Test mode
CG
95Param.runningParameters are being set

CG O
96Param. Set A Parameter set A is active
CG O
97Param. Set B Parameter set B is active
CG O
98Param. Set C Parameter set C is active
CG O
99Param. Set D Parameter set D is active
CG O
100Wrong SW-versWrong software-version
C
101Wrong dev. IDWrong device identification

C
110Annunc. lost Annunciations lost (buffer overflow)

C
111Annu. PC lostAnnunciations for PC lost

C
115Flt.Buff.OverFault annunciation buffer overflow

C
116E/F Buff.OverE/F buffer overflow

E
120Oper.Ann.InvaOperational annunciations invalid

CG
121Flt.Ann.InvalFault annunciations invalid

CG
122E/F.Prot InvaEarth fault annunciations invalid

CG
123Stat.Buff.InvStatistic annunciation buffer invalid CG
124LED Buff.InvaLED annunciation buffer invalid

CG
129VDEW-StateInvVDEW state invalid

CG
135Chs Error
Error in check sum
CG
136Chs.A Error Error in check sum for parameter set A CG
137Chs.B Error Error in check sum for parameter set B CG
138Chs.C Error Error in check sum for parameter set C CG
139Chs.D Error Error in check sum for parameter set D CG
141Failure 24V Failure of internal 24 VDC power supplyCG OT

143Failure 15V Failure of internal 15 VDC power supplyCG OT
144Failure 5V
Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply CG OT
145Failure 0V
Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply CG OT
151Failure I/O 1Failure in I/O module 1
CG OT
152Failure I/O 2Failure in I/O module 2
CG OT
154Fail. TripRelSupervision trip circuit
CG

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT
159LSA disruptedLSA (system interface) disrupted

CG
161I supervisionMeasured value supervision of currents O

162Failure I
Failure: Current summation supervision CG OT
163Failure IsymmFailure: Current symmetry supervision CG OT
164U supervisionMeasured value supervision of voltages O
165Failure Up-eFailure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-e)
CG OT
166Failure Up-pFailure: Voltage sum superv. (ph-ph)
CG OT
167Failure UsymmFailure: Voltage symmetry supervision CG OT
168Failure UmeasFailure: Measuring voltages absent
CG OT
169Fuse-Failure Fuse failure monitor operated (>10s)
CG OT
170FFM pick-up Fuse failure monitor pick-up
CG
171Fail.PhaseSeqFailure: Phase sequence supervision

CG OT
203Flt.RecDatDelFault recording data deleted
C
204Flt.Rec.viaBIFault recording initiated via bin.inputC
205Flt.Rec.viaKBFault recording initiated via keyboard C
206Flt.Rec.viaPCFault recording initiated via PC interfC
244D Time=
Diff. time of clock synchronism
M
301Syst.Flt
Fault in the power system
CGC
302Fault
Flt. event w. consecutive no.
C
303E/F Det.
E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw.
CG E
354>CB Aux.3p cl>CB aux. contact:3poles closed (series) IOT

356>Manual Close>Manual close
IOT
357>CloseCmd.Blo>Block all close commands from externalCG IOT
361>VT mcb Trip >U Line side VT MCB tripped
CG IOT
362>V2 mcb Trip >U2 Busbar side VT MCB tripped
CG IOT
381>1p Trip Perm>External auto-reclose ready for 1pole CG IOT
382>Only 1pole >External AR programmed for 1pole only CG IOT
383>RAR Release >Release overreach zones RAR
CGCG IOT
384>DAR Release >Release overreach zones DAR
CGCG IOT
501Device FltDetGeneral fault detection of device
OT
502Dev. Drop-offGeneral drop-off of device
C
503Dev.FltDet L1General device fault detection: Ph. L1 OT

506Dev.FltDet N General device fault detection: Ph. N OT
511Device Trip General trip of device
G OT
512Dev.Trip 1pL1General 1pole trip of device: Phase L1 OT
515Dev.Trip 3p General 3pole trip of device
OT
516Dev.Trip forwGeneral trip for fault in forward dir. OT
517Dev.Trip rev.General trip for fault in reverse dir. C OT
521IL1/In=
Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In)
C
522IL2/In=
C
523IL3/In=
C
545T-Drop
Time from fault detection to drop-off
546T-Trip
Time from fault detection to trip

561Manual Close Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse)C OT

562Man.Close CmdCB close command for manual closing
OT
563CB Alarm SuppCB alarm suppressed
OT
601IL1[%] =
Current in phase IL1 [%] =
M
602IL2[%] =
M
603IL3[%] =
M
621UL1E[%]=
UL1E [%]=
M
622UL2E[%]=
UL2E [%]=
M
623UL3E[%]=
UL3E [%]=
M
624UL12[%]=
UL12 [%] =
M
625UL23[%]=
UL23 [%] =
M
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT
626UL31[%]=
UL31 [%] =
M
641Pa[%]=
Active power Pa [%] =
M
642Pr[%]=
Reactive power Pr [%] =
M
644f [%]=
Frequency f [%] =
M
651IL1 =
Current in phase IL1 =
M
652IL2 =
M
653IL3 =
M
671UL1E=
Voltage UL1E =
M
672UL2E=
Voltage UL2E =
M
673UL3E=
Voltage UL3E =
M
674UL12=
Voltage UL12 =
M
675UL23=
Voltage UL23 =
M
676UL31=
Voltage UL31 =
M
691Pa=
Active power Pa =
M
692Pr=
Reactive power Pr =
M
701Iea[mA]=
Iea [mA] =
M
702Ier[mA]=
Ier [mA] =
M
711Iea =
Iea =
M
712Ier =
Ier =
M
801/trip =
Temperat. rise for warning and trip
M
802/tripL1=
Temperature rise for phase L1
M
803/tripL2=
M
804/tripL3=
M
1001TripNo L1=
Number of trip commands: Phase L1
M
1002TripNo L2=
M
1003TripNo L3=
M
1004IL1/In=
Summated current tripped IL1/In
M
1005IL2/In=
M
1006IL3/In=
M
1011AR 1pole=
No. of auto-reclose commands:1p RAR
M
1012AR 3pole=
M
1013DAR 3pol=
No. of auto-reclose commands:3p DAR
M
1106>Start FltLoc>Start fault locator

CG IOT
1114Rpri=
Fault resistance, Ohm prim.
C
1115Xpri=
Fault reactance, Ohm prim.
C
1117Rsec=
Fault resistance, Ohm sec.
C
1118Xsec=
Fault reactance, Ohm sec.
C
1119d
=
Distance to fault in km
C
1120d[%]=
Distance to fault in %
C
1156>CB Test
>CB test start
IOT
1174CB in Test
Circuit breaker test in progress
CG OT
1181CB Test Trip Circuit breaker test: General trip
OT
1182CB Test 1pL1 Circuit breaker test: Trip 1pole L1
C OT
C OT
C OT
1185CB Test 3p
Circuit breaker test: Trip 3pole
C OT
1251>E/F Det. on >Switch on E/F det. for isol./comp. net IOT
1252>E/F Det. off>Switch off E/F det. for isol./comp.net IOT
1253>E/F Det.bloc>Block E/F det. for isol./comp. net
IOT
1261E/F Det. off E/F det. (isol./comp. net) switched offCG OT
1262E/F Det.blockE/F detection (isol./comp. net) blockedCG OT
1263E/F Det.activE/F detection (isol./comp. net) active OT
1271E/F DetectionEarth fault in isol./comp. net detected C E OT
1272E/F Detec. L1Earth fault (isol./comp.) L1 detected E OT
1276E/F forwards Earth fault (isol./comp.) forward dir. E OT
1277E/F reverse Earth fault (isol./comp.) reverse dir. E OT

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT
1278E/F undefinedEarth fault (isol./comp.) undef. dir. E OT

1281E/F Det. TripTrip by earth fault det. (isol./comp.) C E OT
1289Iea
Active component Iea
E
1290Ier
Reactive component Ier
E
1303>E/F block
>Block E/F protection
IOT
1311>E/F comp. on>Switch on directional E/F comparison IOT
1312>E/F comp.off>Switch off directional E/F comparison IOT
1316>E/F Recept >Carrier reception for direct. E/F compC C IOT
1317>E/F Rec.Fail>Carrier reception for dir. E/F faulty CG IOT
1331E/F Prot. offEarth fault protection is switched off CG OT
1332E/F blocked Earth fault protection is blocked
CGCG OT
1333E/F active
Earth fault protection is active
OT
1334E/F Dir.blockEarth fault prot. direct.stage blocked OT
1341E/F Flt75%Ie>Earth fault detection 75% Ie picked up CG OT
1342E/F Flt Ie<->Earth fault detection non-direct. Ie
C OT
1343E/F Flt Ie ->Earth fault detection directional Ie
C OT
1344E/F Ue>
Earth fault displacement voltage Ue>
OT
1351E/F T-Delay Earth fault protection time expired
OT
1352E/F T->
Earth fault prot. dir. time expired
OT
1353E/F T<->
Earth fault prot. non-dir. time expired OT
1361E/F Trip
Trip by earth fault protection
C OT
1381E/F Dir off Earth fault dir. comp. is switched off CG OT
1384E/F Send
Carrier transmission for dir. comp. E/F C OT
1385E/F Echo
Echo signal for directional comp. E/F C OT
1386E/F TransBlocTransient block. of E/F protection
C OT
1501>O/L on
>Switch on thermal overload protection IOT
1502>O/L off
>Switch off thermal overload protection IOT
1503>O/L block
>Block thermal overload protection
IOT
1511O/L Prot. offThermal overload prot. is switched off CG OT
1512O/L blocked Thermal overload protection is blocked CG OT
1513O/L active
Thermal overload protection is active OT
1515O/L Warn I
Thermal overload prot.: Current warningCG OT
1516O/L Warn
Thermal overload prot.: Thermal warningCG OT
1517O/L pickup Thermal overload prot.: Pick-up thermalCG OT
1521O/L Trip
Thermal overload protection trip
C OT
2003>Emer. block >Block emergency overcurrent protection IOT
2010>I>> block
>Block I>> stage of emerg. O/C protec. CG IOT
2051Emer. off
Emergency O/C protect. is switched off CG OT
2052Emer. block Emergency O/C protection is blocked
CG OT
2053Emer. active Emergency O/C protection is active
OT
2054Emer. mode
Emergency O/C protection is running
CG OT
2061Emer.Gen.Flt Emerg. O/C prot.: General fault detect. OT
2062Emer. Flt L1 Emerg. O/C prot.: Fault detection L1
OT
OT
OT
2065Emer. Flt E Emerg. O/C prot.: Earth fault detection OT
2071Emer. Flt E Emerg. O/C earth fault detection only C
2072Emer. Flt L1 Emerg. O/C fault detection L1 only

C
2073Emer. Flt L1EEmerg. O/C fault detection L1E

C

C

C
2076Emer. Flt L12Emerg. O/C fault detection L12

C
2077Emer.Flt L12EEmerg. O/C fault detection L12E

C

C

C

C

C

C
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT

C
2084Emer.Flt L123Emerg. O/C fault detection L123

C
2085Emer.Flt 123EEmerg. O/C fault detection L123E

C
2091Emer. I>>
Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>>
C OT
2093Emer. I>
Emerg. O/C phase fault detection I>
C OT
2097Emer. IE>
Emerg. O/C earth fault detection IE>
C OT
2121Emer. TI>>
Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI>> expired
OT
2123Emer. TI>
Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TI> expired
OT
2127Emer. TIE>
Emerg. O/C prot.: Time TIE> expired
OT
2141Emer.Gen.TripEmerg. O/C protection: General Trip
OT
2142Emer.Trip1pL1Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 1pole L1
C OT
C OT
C OT
2145Emer.Trip 3p Emerg. O/C protection: Trip 3pole
C OT
2701>AR on
>AR: Switch on auto-reclose function
IOT
2702>AR off
>AR: Switch off auto-reclose function IOT
2703>AR block
>AR: Block auto-reclose function
CG IOT
2704>AR reset
>AR: Reset auto-reclose function
C IOT
2706>1p RAR block>AR: Block 1pole rapid auto-reclose
CG IOT
2707>3p RAR block>AR: Block 3pole rapid auto-reclose
CG IOT
2708>RAR block
>AR: Block rapid auto-reclose
CG IOT
2709>DAR block
>AR: Block delayed auto-reclose
CG IOT
2711>Start AR
>AR: External start for internal AR
C IOT
2712>Trip L1 AR >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR
C IOT
C IOT
C IOT
2715>Trip 1p AR >AR: Ext. 1pole trip for internal AR
C IOT
2716>Trip 3p AR >AR: Ext. 3pole trip for internal AR
C IOT
2721>DAR aft. RAR>AR: Delayed AR only after rapid AR
CG IOT
2730>CB ready
>AR: Circuit breaker ready for reclose IOT
2731>Sync.release>AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check IOT
2781AR off
AR: Auto-reclose is switched off
CG OT
2782AR on
AR: Auto-reclose is switched on
OT
2783AR inoperativAR: Auto-reclose is blocked
CG OT
2784AR not ready AR: Auto-reclose is not ready
OT
2785AR block.dyn.AR: Auto-reclose is dynamically blocked C OT
2787CB not ready AR: Circuit breaker not ready
OT
2788AR T-CB Exp. AR: CB supervision time expired
OT
2801AR in prog. AR: Auto-reclose in progress
C OT
2811RAR only
AR: Only rapid auto-reclosing allowed OT
2812RAR T-act.runAR: Action time for RAR is running
OT
2813RAR T-1p run.AR: 1pole dead time for RAR is running C OT
2814RAR T-3p run.AR: 3pole dead time for RAR is running C OT
2815RAR 1p Prog. AR: 1pole rapid auto-reclose program
OT
2816RAR 3p Prog. AR: 3pole rapid auto-reclose program
OT
2817RAR Zone Rel.AR: Zone extension for rapid reclosing OT
2818AR evolv.Flt.AR: Evolving fault recognition
OT
2831DAR Only
AR: Only delayed auto-reclosing allowed OT
2832DAR T-act.runAR: Action time for DAR is running
OT
2833DAR T-3p1 runAR: 3pole dead time 1 for DAR running C OT
2837DAR Zone Rel.AR: Zone extension for delayed reclose OT
2851AR Close Cmd.AR: Close command from auto-reclose
C C OT
2852RAR 1p Close AR: Close command after 1pole RAR cycle OT
2853RAR 3p Close AR: Close command after 3pole RAR cycle OT
2854DAR 3p Close AR: Close command after 3pole DAR cycle OT
2861AR T-Recl.runAR: Reclaim time is running
OT

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT
2862AR successfulAR: Auto-reclose cycle successful

OT
2863Definit.Trip AR: Definitive trip
OT
28641p Trip Perm.AR: 1pole trip allowed by internal AR OT
2865Sync.Meas.ReqAR: Sync-check request
OT
2871AR Trip 3p
AR: Trip during 1pole AR cycle
C OT
2901>Sync. on
>Switch on synchro-check function
IOT
2902>Sync. off
>Switch off synchro-check function
IOT
2903>Sync. block >Block synchro-check function
IOT
2906>Sync. Start >Initiate internal synchro-check
IOT
2907>Sync. synch >Sync.: Check synchronism
IOT
2908>Sync. U1>U2<>Sync. live line (U1>), dead bus (U2<) IOT
2909>Sync. U1<U2>>Sync. dead line (U1<), live bus (U2>) IOT
2910>Sync. U1<U2<>Sync. dead line (U1<), dead bus (U2<) IOT
2911>Sync. o/ride>Synchro-check override ( bypass )
IOT
2931Sync. off
Synchro-check function is switched off CG OT
2932Sync. blockedSynchro-check function is blocked
CG OT
2934Sync. faulty Synchro-check function faulty
CG OT
2935Sync.Tsup.ExpSynchro-check supervision time expired C C OT
2941Sync. runningSynchro-check function is running
OT
2942Sync.OverrideSynchro-check function override/bypass CG OT
2943Sync. SynchroSynchronism (U1>,U2>) detected
CG OT
2944Sync. U1>U2< Live line,dead busbar(U1>,U2<) detectedCG OT
2945Sync. U1<U2> Dead line,live busbar(U1<,U2>) detectedCG OT
2946Sync. U1<U2< Dead line,dead busbar(U1<,U2<) detectedCG OT
2947Sync. Udiff> Sync.: Voltage diff. greater than limitCG OT
2948Sync. fdiff> Sync.: Freq. diff. greater than limit CG OT
2949Sync. phidif>Sync.: Angle diff. greater than limit CG OT
2951Sync. releaseSynchronism release (to ext. AR)
OT
2961Sync.CloseCmdClose command from synchro-check
OT
3603>Dist. block >Block distance protection
IOT
3611>Extens. Z1B >Dist.: Zone 1B extension from externalCG IOT
3612>Extens. Z1L >Dist.: Zone 1L extension from externalCG IOT
3651Dist. off
Distance protection is switched off
CG OT
3652Dist. blockedDistance protection is blocked
CG OT
3653Dist. active Distance protection is active
OT
3661DisZ1B AR blkDist.: Block AR by fault detec. Z1B
C OT
3662DisZ1L AR blkDist.: Block AR by fault detec. Z1L
C OT
3671Dist.Gen.Flt.Dist.: General fault detection
OT
3672Dist.Fault L1Dist.: Fault detection , phase L1
OT
OT
OT
3675Dist.Fault E Dist.: Fault detection , earth fault
OT
3681Dist.Flt.L1 Dist.: Fault detection only phase L1
C
3682Dist.Flt.L1E Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,E

C

C

C
3685Dist.Flt.L12 Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2

C
3686Dist.Flt.L12EDist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C
3693Dist.Flt.L123Dist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3

C
3694Dist.Flt.123EDist.: Fault detection phase L1,2,3,E C
3701Loop L1-E f Dist.: Loop L1E selected forward

CG OT
CG OT
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT

CG OT
3704Loop L1-2 f Dist.: Loop L12 selected forward
CG OT
CG OT
CG OT
3707Loop L1-E r Dist.: Loop L1E selected reverse
CG OT
CG OT
CG OT
3710Loop L1-2 r Dist.: Loop L12 selected reverse
CG OT
CG OT
CG OT
3719Dist. For.DirDist.: Fault det. in forward direction OT
3720Dist. Rev.DirDist.: Fault det. in reverse direction OT
3771Dist. T1
Dist.: Time T1 ( Zone Z1 ) expired
OT
3774Dist. T2
OT
3777Dist. T3
OT
3778Dist. T4
Dist.: Time T4 (direct. zone) expired OT
3779Dist. T5
Dist.: Time T5 (non-dir. zone) expired OT
3780Dist. T1B
Dist.: Time T1B ( Zone Z1B ) expired
OT
3783Dist. T1L
Dist.: Time T1L ( Zone Z1L ) expired
OT
3801Dis.Gen. TripDistance protection: General trip
OT
3802Dis.Trip 1pL1Dist.: Trip phase L1 1pole only
C OT
C OT
C OT
3805Dis.Trip 3p Dist.: Trip 3pole
C OT
3808Dis.Trip backDist.: Trip in back-up stage
OT
3811Dis.TripZ1/1pDist.: Trip 1pole in zone Z1/T1
OT
OT
3813Dis.TripZ1B1pDist.: Trip 1pole in zone Z1B/T1B
OT
3814Dis.TripZ1B3pDist.: Trip 3pole in zone Z1B/T1B
OT
3815Dis.Trip Z1L Dist.: Trip for fault in zone Z1L/T1L OT
OT
OT
3818Dis.TripZ3/T3Dist.: Trip for fault in zone Z3/T3
OT
3819Dis.Trip FD->Dist.: Trip by fault detection, direct OT
3820Dis.Trip <-> Dist.: Trip by fault detec., non-direct OT
4004>Dis. Recept >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier receive C C IOT
4005>Dis.RecFail >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty CG IOT
4011>Dis.POTT on >Dist.:Switch on teleprotection POTT
IOT
4012>Dis.POTT off>Dist.:Switch off teleprotection POTT IOT
4021>Dis.PUTT on >Dist.:Switch on teleprotection PUTT
IOT
4022>Dis.PUTT off>Dist.:Switch off teleprotection PUTT IOT
4051Dis.Tele.on Dist. teleprotection is switched on
OT
4052Dis.Tele.off Dist. teleprotection is switched off
CG OT
4054Dis. Recept Dist. teleprotection: Carrier reception OT
4055Dis. RecFail Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty
CG OT
4056Dis. Send
Dist. teleprotection: Carrier send
C OT
4067Dis.POTT EchoPOTT teleprotection: Carrier echo send C OT
4068Dis.TransBlo POTT teleprotection: Transient block
C OT
4164Power Swing Power swing detection
CG OT
4165P/S T-action Power swing action time running
OT
4166O/S Trip
Out-of-step trip 3pole
C C OT
4403>Ext.Trip blk>Block external trip function
CG IOT
4412>Ext.Trip L1 >External trip L1 via binary input
C IOT
C IOT
C IOT
4416>Ext.Trp.woAR>External 3pole trip without AR
CG IOT
4431Ext.Gen. TripExt. trip via binary input: Trip
OT
4432Ext.Trip 1pL1Ext. trip via binary input: 1pole L1
C OT

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
OpFtEIOT

C OT
C OT
4435Ext.Trip 3p Ext. trip via binary input: 3pole
C OT
4436Ext.Trip woARExt. trip via binary input: Without AR C OT
6206>User T1Start>Start of user defined timer T1
CGCG IOT
6207>User T1Reset>Reset of user defined timer T1
C C IOT
6208>User T2Start>Start of user defined timer T2
CGCG IOT
6209>User T2Reset>Reset of user defined timer T2
C C IOT
6254User output 1Output signal of user defined timer T1 CGC OT
6255User output 2Output signal of user defined timer T2 CGC OT
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Reference Table for Functional Parameters 7SA511
1000 PARAMETERS
1100 POWERSYSTEM DATA

1101 CT STARPNT
TOWARDS LINE
TOWARDS BUSBAR
Current transformer polarity

[ ] Towards line
[ ] Towards busbar
1102 SYSTEMSTAR
SOLIDLY EARTHED
COMPENSATED
ISOLATED
System star-point condition

[ ] Solidly earthed
[ ] Compensated
[ ] Isolated
1103 Un PRIMARY
min. 1
max. 1200
1104 Un SECOND.
min. 80
max. 125
1105 In PRIMARY
min. 10
max. 5000
Primary rated voltage

kV
Secondary rated voltage
V
Primary rated current
A
1109 Ux CONNECT
Ux voltage transformer connection
NOT CONNECTED
[ ] Not connected
Udelta TRANSFORM [ ] Udelta transformer
U2 TRANSFORMER
[ ] U2 transformer
1110 Uph/Udelta
min. 0.10
max. 9.99
1111 Ie CT
PROTECTED LINE
PARALLEL LINE
1112 Ie/Iph
min. 0.100
max. 20.000
1116 U2 CONNECT
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-E
L2-E
L3-E
1117 RE/RL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00
1118 XE/XL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00

Matching factor Uph/Udelta (sec.earth voltage)
Ie current transformer
[ ] Protected line
[ ] Parallel line
Matching factor Ie/Iph for earth current
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
Voltage transformer U2 input connection

L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-E
L2-E
L3-E
Residual compensating factor RE/RL
Residual compensating factor XE/XL
# ' #
3! 6
1119 RM/RL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00
1120 XM/XL
min. -7.00
max. 7.00
1122 X SEC
min. 0.010
max. 5.000
1124 LINELENGTH
min. 1.0
max. 550.0
1130 T-TRIP I>
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
1131 T-TRIP I<
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
1132 U1-U2 ANGL
min. -179
max. 180
1133 T-CB CLOSE
min. 0.01
max. 0.50
1135 T-CLOSE
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
!PPENDIX
Mutual compensating factor RM/RL
Mutual compensating factor XM/XL
Secondary reactance per unit line length Xsec

/km
Line length
km
Trip command min.duration for I > I-RES
s
Trip command min.duration for I < I-RES
s
Phase angle between U1 and U2
Closing (operating) time of circuit breaker

s
Maximum close command duration
s
1136 3-P. COUPL

3 pole coupling
WITH FAULT DETEC [ ] With fault detection
WITH TRIP COMM. [ ] With trip command
1137 TRIP2phFLT
THREE-POLE
1-POLE LEADING
1-POLE LAGGING
1145 T-M/C-PROL
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
1149 T-EXT.STAB
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
1150 FILTER
NORMAL
LONG
# ' #
Trip type with 2phase faults

[ ] Three-pole
[ ] 1-pole leading
[ ] 1-pole lagging
Prolongation time after manual closing

s
Stabilization time for external trip
s
Filter for measured quantities

[ ] Normal
[ ] Long

3! 6
!PPENDIX
1200 DIST.PROT. GENERAL SETTINGS

1201 DIST.PROT.
ON
OFF
Distance protection function

[ ] on
[ ] off
1202 DIR. FD&T4

FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
Direction for fault detection directional trip

[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
1203 T4
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1204 T5
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
Delay T4 fault detection directional trip

s
Delay T5 fault detection non-directional trip
s
1205 MAN. CLOSE

Z1B DIRECTIONAL
Z1B NON DIRECT.
FD EFFECTIVE
Z1 EFFECTIVE
[
[
[
[
1216 RAR -> Z1B

YES
NO
Distance zone Z1B effective before 1st RAR

[ ] yes
[ ] no
1217 DAR BLOCK

Z1; T1
Z1; T1B
Effective zone if DAR is blocked

[ ] Z1; T1
[ ] Z1; T1B
1218 DAR -> Z1L

YES
NO
Distance zone Z1L effective before DAR

[ ] yes
[ ] no
1221 BLK.AR Z1B

NO
WITHIN
OUTSIDE
Autoreclosure is blocked for Z1B faults

[ ] no
[ ] Within
[ ] Outside
1222 BLK.AR Z1L

NO
WITHIN
OUTSIDE
Autoreclosure is blocked for Z1L faults

[ ] no
[ ] Within
[ ] Outside
]
]
]
]
Distance zone effective with manual close

Z1B directional
Z1B non-directional
Fault detection
Z1 effective
1300 DIST.PROT. INDEPEND. ZONES

1301 R1
min. 0.05
max. 65.00
1302 X1
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1303 R1E
min. 0.05
max. 130.00

Zone 1: Resistance (phase-phase) R1
Zone 1: Reactance (reach) X1
Zone 1: Resistance (phase-earth) R1E
# ' #
3! 6
1304 DIREC. Z1
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
1305 T1 1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1306 T1 >1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1311 R2
min. 0.05
max. 65.00
1312 X2
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1313 R2E
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1314 DIREC. Z2
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
1315 T2 1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1316 T2 >1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1317 TRIP 1P Z2
NO
YES
1321 R3
min. 0.05
max. 65.00
1322 X3
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1323 R3E
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1324 DIREC. Z3
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
1325 T3
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
# ' #
!PPENDIX
Zone 1: Direction
[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Zone 1: Delay for single phase faults T1 1PH

s
Zone 1: Delay for multi-phase faults T1
s
Zone 2: Direction
[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Zone 2: Delay for single phase faults T2 1PH

s
Zone 2: Delay for multi-phase faults T2
s
Single pole trip for faults in Z2

[ ] no
[ ] yes
Zone 3: Direction
[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Zone 3: Delay for all faults T3

s

3! 6
!PPENDIX
1400 DIST.PROT. CONTROLLED ZONES

1401 R1B
min. 0.05
max. 65.00
1402 X1B
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1403 R1BE
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1404 DIREC. Z1B
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
1405 T1B 1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1406 T1B >1PHAS
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1411 R1L
min. 0.05
max. 65.00
1412 X1L
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1413 R1LE
min. 0.05
max. 130.00
1414 DIREC. Z1L
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
1415 T1L
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
Zone 1B: Resistance (phase-phase) R1B
Zone 1B: Reactance (reach) X1B
Zone 1B: Resistance (phase-earth) R1BE
Zone 1B: Direction

[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Zone 1B: Delay for single phase faults T1B 1PH

s
Zone 1B: Delay for multi-phase faults T1B
s
Zone 1L: Resistance (phase-phase) R1L
Zone 1L: Reactance (reach) X1L
Zone 1L: Resistance (phase-earth) R1LE
Zone 1L: Direction

[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Zone 1L: Delay for all faults T1L

s
1500 DIST.PROT. FAULT DETEC.PROG

1501 PROG. U/I
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphph
LE:Uphph/LL:Uphp
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe
LE:Uphe/LL:I>>
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
Program for U/I fault detection

LE:Uphe/LL:Uphph
LE:Uphph/LL:Uphp
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe
LE:Uphe/LL:I>>
1503 PROG. ZA
Program for impedance fault detection
LE:Zphe/LL:Zphph [ ] LE:Zphe/LL:Zphph
LE:Zphe/LL:I>>
[ ] LE:Zphe/LL:I>>

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
1600 DIST.PROT. FAULT DETECTION

1601 Iph>>
min. 0.25
max. 4.00
1602 Ie>
min. 0.10
max. 1.00
1611 Iph>
min. 0.10
max. 1.00
1612 Uphe(I>>)
min. 20
max. 70
1613 Uphe(I>)
min. 20
max. 70
1614 Uphph(I>>)
min. 40
max. 130
1615 Uphph(I>)
min. 40
max. 130
1621 Iph>
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
1622 X+A
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1623 X-A
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1624 RA1
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1625 RA2
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1626 RA1E
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1627 RA2E
min. 0.10
max. 200.00
1628 ANGLE PHIA
min. 30
max. 80
# ' #
Overcurrent detection Iph>>

I/In
Earth fault detection Ie>
I/In
Minimum current for fault detection Iph>
I/In
Undervoltage pick-up at I>> (phase-earth)
V
Undervoltage pick-up at I> (phase-earth)
V
Undervoltage pick-up at I>> (phase-phase)
V
Undervoltage pick-up at I> (phase-phase)
V
Minimum current for fault detection Iph>
I/In
Fault detection forward reach X+A
Fault detection reverse reach X-A
Fault det. resistance (ph-ph, phi<PHI A) RA1
Fault det. resistance (ph-ph, phi>PHI A) RA2
Fault det. resistance (ph-e, phi<PHI AE) RA1E
Fault det. resistance (ph-e, phi>PHI AE) RA2E
Fault det. ph-ph angle betw. RA1/RA2 PHI A

3! 6
1629 ANG. PHIAE

min. 30
max. 80
!PPENDIX
Fault det. ph-e angle betw. RA1E/RA2E PHI AE
1700 FAULT IN EARTHED NETWORKS

1701 Ue>
min. 2
max. 100/
Displacement voltage for earth fault det. Ue>

V
1703 PHPHE FLTS

Loop selection with Ph-Ph-E faults
PHASE-PHASE ONLY [ ] Phase to phase only
LEADING PH-E
[ ] Leading phase-earth
LAGGING PH-E
[ ] Lagging phase-earth
1704 3PH FAULTS
Loop selection with 3phase faults
E/F CONTROL
[ ] Dependent on E/F det
PHASE-PHASE ONLY [ ] Phase to phase only
PHASE-EARTH ONLY [ ] Phase to earth only
1705 1PH FAULTS
PHASE-EARTH
PHASE-PHASE
Loop select. for single ph. w/o earth flt.det.

[ ] Phase-earth
[ ] Phase-phase
1800 FAULT NON-EARTHED NET

1801 TIe 1PHASE
min. 0.00
max. 0.50/
1802 Ue>
min. 10
max. 100
1803 PHASE PREF

L3(L1) ACYCLIC
L1(L3) ACYCLIC
L2(L1) ACYCLIC
L1(L2) ACYCLIC
L3(L2) ACYCLIC
L2(L3) ACYCLIC
L3(L1) CYCLIC
L1(L3) CYCLIC
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Delay time for single phase flt. det. TIe 1PH

s
Displacement voltage for earth fault det. Ue>
V
Phase preference for double earth faults
L3(L1) acyclic
L1(L3) acyclic
L2(L1) acyclic
L1(L2) acyclic
L3(L2) acyclic
L2(L3) acyclic
L3(L1) cyclic
L1(L3) cyclic
2000 POWER SWING

2002 P/S PROGR.
BLOCK ALL
BLOCK Z1 ONLY
BLOCK ALL BUT Z1
OUT-OF-STEP TRIP
2003 Delta R
min. 0.10
max. 50.00

[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
Program of power swing (P/S) function

Block all zones
Block Z1 only
Block all but Z1
Out-of-step trip
Distance between P/S and fault detect. polygon
# ' #
3! 6
2004 dR/dT
min. 0
max. 200
2005 P/S T-ACT.
min. 0.01
max. 32.00/
!PPENDIX
Rate of change of P/S vector dR/dT

/s
Power swing action time P/S T-ACT.
s
2100 TELEPROTEC PERM. UNDERREACH

2101 PUTT
ON
OFF
Permissive underreach transfer trip

[ ] on
[ ] off
2102 PUTT MODE

Permissive underreach transfer trip mode
Z1B ACCELERATION [ ] Z1B acceleration
FD ACCELERATION [ ] FD acceleration
2103 T-SEND-PRL
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
2104 T-REC-PROL
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
2106 T-SEND-DEL
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
Send signal prolongation for PUTT

s
Receive signal prolongation for PUTT
s
Send signal delay for PUTT
s
2200 TELEPROTEC PERM. OVERREACH

2201 POTT
ON
OFF
Permissive overreach transfer trip

[ ] on
[ ] off
2202 POTT MODE

Z1B RELEASE
FD DIREC RELEASE
Z1B UNBLOCK
FD UNBLOCK
Z1B BLOCKING
PILOT WIRE COMP.
REVERS INTERLOCK
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
2203 T-TRANSBLO
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
2204 T-WAIT
min. 0.01
max. 32.00/
2206 T-SEND-PRL
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
# ' #
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Permissive overreach transfer trip mode

Z1B release
Direct. comparison
Unblocking with Z1B
Unblocking with FD
Blocking with Z1B
Comp. via pilot wire
Reverse interlocking
Transient blocking time after external fault
s
Waiting time for trans.block. (missing recept)
s
Send signal prolongation for POTT
s

3! 6
2210 POTT DirFD

FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
2212 T-SEND DEL
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
2220 ECHO
ON
OFF
2221 T-ECHO-DEL
min. 0.01
max. 32.00/
2222 T-ECHO-IMP
min. 0.02
max. 32.00
2223 T-ECHO-BLO
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
!PPENDIX
Effect. direction for directional comparison

[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Send signal delay for POTT

s
Echo function for weak infeed

[ ] on
[ ] off
Echo delay time

s
Duration of echo impulse
s
Echo blocking time
s
2300 USER LOGIC FUNCTIONS

2302 T-PICKUP 1
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
2303 T-DROP 1
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
2305 T-PICKUP 2
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
2306 T-DROP 2
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
1st user logic function: Pick-up time

s
1st user logic function: Drop-off time
s
2nd user logic function: Pick-up time
s
2nd user logic function: Drop-off time
s
2600 EMERGENCY OVERCURRENT PROT

2601 EMERG. O/C
ON
OFF
2602 I>>
min. 0.50
max. 9.99
2603 T-I>>
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/

Emergency overcurrent definite time protection

[ ] on
[ ] off
Highset phase overcurrent threshold (DT) I>>

I/In
Delay time for I>> TI>>
s
# ' #
3! 6
2612 I>
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
2613 T-I>
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
!PPENDIX
Phase overcurrent threshold (DT) I>

I/In
Delay time for I> TI>
s
2621 M/CLOSE PH
I>> UNDELAYED
I> UNDELAYED
INEFFECTIVE
Phase overcurrent stage effect.: Manual close

[ ] I>> undelayed
[ ] I> undelayed
[ ] Ineffective
2623 RAR ZONE P

I>> WITH AR
I>> ALWAYS
Phase overcurrent stage effect.: Auto reclose

[ ] I>> only with AR
[ ] I>> always
2642 IE>
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
2643 T-IE>
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
2651 M/CLOSE E
IE> UNDELAYED
INEFFECTIVE
Earth overcurrent threshold (DT) IE>

I/In
Delay time for IE> TIE>
s
Earth overcurrent stage effect: Manual close

[ ] Ie> undelayed
[ ] Ineffective
2700 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROT.

2701 THERMAL OL
ALARM ONLY
ON
OFF
2702 K-FACTOR
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
2703 T-CONSTANT
min. 1.0
max. 999.9
2704 WARN
min. 50
max. 100
2705 I WARN
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
2706 O/L CALCUL
MAX
MEAN
FROM IMAX
# ' #
State of thermal overload protection

[ ] Alarm only
[ ] on
[ ] off
K-factor for thermal overload protection
Time constant for thermal overload protection

min
Thermal warning stage
%
Current warning stage
I/In
Calculation method for thermal stages

[ ] Theta max
[ ] Theta mean
[ ] Theta from Imax

3! 6
!PPENDIX
2900 MEAS.VALUE SUPERVISION

2901 SYM.Uthres
min. 10
max. 100
2902 SYM.Fact.U
min. 0.58
max. 0.95
2903 SYM.Ithres
min. 0.10
max. 1.00
2904 SYM.Fact.I
min. 0.10
max. 0.95
2905 SUM.Ithres
min. 0.10
max. 2.00
2906 SUM.Fact.I
min. 0.00
max. 0.95
2907 UMEAS U<
min. 10
max. 125
2908 UMEAS I>
min. 0.06
max. 1.00
2910 FUSE-FAIL
ON
OFF
2911 FFM 3*Uo>
min. 10
max. 100
2912 FFM Ie<
min. 0.10
max. 1.00
Symmetry threshold for voltage monitoring

V
Symmetry factor for voltage monitoring
Symmetry threshold for current monitoring

I/In
Symmetry factor for current monitoring
Summation threshold for current monitoring

I/In
Factor for current summation monitoring
Threshold for voltage failure monitor

V
Minimum current for voltage failure monitor
I/In
Fuse failure monitoring (FFM)

[ ] on
[ ] off
Displacement voltage level for FFM

V
Earth current for fuse failure monitoring
I/In
3000 EARTHFAULT NON-EARTHED NET

3001 EARTHFAULT
ALARM ONLY
ON
OFF
3002 Ue>
min. 10
max. 100
3003 Uph<
min. 10
max. 100

Sensitive earth fault det. in non-earthed net

[ ] Alarm only
[ ] on
[ ] off
Displacement voltage level Ue>

V
Phase-earth voltage of faulted phase Uph<
V
# ' #
3! 6
3004 Uph>
min. 10
max. 100
3005 Ie>
min. 0.003
max. 1.000
3006 CT ERR. I1
min. 0.003
max. 1.600
3007 CT ERR. F1
min. 0.0
max. 5.0
3008 CT ERR. I2
min. 0.003
max. 1.600
3009 CT ERR. F2
min. 0.0
max. 5.0
3010 T-E/F
min. 0.0
max. 320.0
!PPENDIX
Phase-earth voltage of healthy phases Uph>

V
Current level for directional determination
A
Second. current I1 for max error angle of C.T.
A
Error angle of C.T. at I1
Second. current I2 for max error angle of C.T.

A
Error angle of C.T. at I2
Duration of displacement voltage for E/F det.

s
3100 EARTHFAULT DIREC/NON-DIREC

3101 E/F D.T.
ON
OFF
3103 Ie>
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
3104 Ue>
min. 1.0
max. 10.0
3106 T-DIRECT.
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
3107 DIRECTION
FORWARDS
REVERSE
NON-DIRECTIONAL
3108 T-NON-DIR.
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
3109 T-BLOCK
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
# ' #
Earth fault definite time protection

[ ] on
[ ] off
Pick-up value for earth current detection

I/In
Minimum voltage for directional determination
V
Delay time for directional trip
s
Direction for directional stage

[ ] Forwards
[ ] Reverse
[ ] Non-directional
Delay time for non-directional trip

s
Blocking time after dist.prot. has dropped off
s

3! 6
!PPENDIX
3200 EARTHFAULT DIREC.COMPARISON

3201 E/F COMPAR
ON
OFF
3202 T-DELAY
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
3203 T-TRANSBLO
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
3204 T-WAIT
min. 0.01
max. 32.00/
3210 E/F ECHO
ON
OFF
3211 T-ECHO-DEL
min. 0.01
max. 32.00/
3212 T-ECHO-IMP
min. 0.02
max. 32.00
3213 T-ECHO-BLO
min. 0.01
max. 32.00
Directional comparison for E/F def. time prot

[ ] on
[ ] off
Delay time for transmission and trip on recept

s
Transient blocking time after external fault
s
Waiting time for trans.block. (missing recept)
s
Echo function for directional comparison

[ ] on
[ ] off
Echo delay time

s
Duration of echo impulse
s
Echo blocking time
s
3300 EARTHFAULT NON-DIRECTIONAL

3301 E/F I.T.
ON
OFF
Non directional inverse time E/F protection

[ ] on
[ ] off
3302 E/F CHARAC

Trip time characteristic
NORMAL INVERSE
[ ] Normal inverse
VERY INVERSE
[ ] Very inverse
EXTREMELY INVERS [ ] Extremely inverse
3303 Ie>
min. 0.10
max. 4.00
3304 T-Ie>
min. 0.00
max. 32.00/
3305 T-BLOCK
min. 0.01
max. 320.00

Pick-up value for earth current detection

I/In
Delay time multiplier
s
Blocking time after dist.prot. has dropped off
s
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
3400 AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION

3401 AR FUNCT
ON
OFF
Auto-reclose function
[ ] on
[ ] off
3402 AR BLO REV

YES
NO
Auto-reclose block with reverse faults

[ ] yes
[ ] no
3403 MC BLOCK
YES
NO
Auto-reclose block with manual close

[ ] yes
[ ] no
3405 T-RECLAIM
min. 0.50
max. 320.00
3406 T-LOCK
min. 0.50
max. 320.00/
3407 T-BLOCK MC
min. 0.50
max. 320.00
3412 CB? 1.TRIP
YES
NO
3413 CB?
CB?
CB?
CB?
Reclaim time after successful AR

s
Lock-out time after unsuccessful AR
s
Blocking duration with manual close
s
CB ready interrogation at 1st trip command

[ ] yes
[ ] no
CLOSE
CB ready interrogation before reclosing
NEVER
[ ] CB? never
WITH EACH AR [ ] CB? with each AR
WITH 2nd AR [ ] CB? with 2nd AR
3415 T-CB-SUPV
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
3419 SYN-REQUST
BEFORE 3POLE AR
ONLY BEFORE DAR
BEFORE 2nd DAR
NEVER
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
Circuit breaker supervision time

s
AR request for synchro-check
Before 3pole AR
Only before DAR
Before second DAR
Never
3422 RAR PROG.

Rapid auto-reclose program
THREE-POLE
[ ] Three-pole
SINGLE-POLE
[ ] Single-pole
SINGLE/THREE-POL [ ] Single/three-pole
3423 3U0 PROC.
INEFFECTIVE
1-POLE WITH U0
1-POLE W/O U0
3424 RAR T-ACT.
min. 0.01
max. 320.00/
3425 RAR T-3POL
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
# ' #
3U0 processing measurement before closing

[ ] Ineffective
[ ] 1-pole with U0
[ ] 1-pole without U0
Rapid auto-reclose action time

s
RAR 3pole dead time
s

3! 6
3426 RAR T-1POL

min. 0.01
max. 320.00
3427 RAR T1POL2
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
!PPENDIX
RAR 1pole dead time

s
RAR accelerated 1pole dead time (U0 dependent)
s
3428 EV.F.RECOG
Evolving fault recognition with 1pole AR
3429 EV.F.BLOCK
ALWAYS
NEVER
>T-DISCR.
3430 T-DISCRIM
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
Blocking with evolving faults

[ ] Always
[ ] Never
[ ] >T-discrimination
Discrimination time for evolving faults

s
3431 AR TRIP 3P
YES
NO
3p trip when AR is blocked during 1p dead time

[ ] yes
[ ] no
3442 DAR PROG.

NO DAR
DAR WITHOUT RAR
DAR AFTER RAR
Delayed auto-reclose program

[ ] No DAR
[ ] DAR without RAR
[ ] DAR only after RAR
3443 DAR No.1PH

min. 0
max. 9
3444 DAR No.3PH
min. 0
max. 9
3445 DAR T-ACT.
min. 0.01
max. 320.00/
3446 DAR T3POL1
min. 0.01
max. 1800.00
3447 DAR T3POL2
min. 0.01
max. 1800.00
3448 DAR T3POL3
min. 0.01
max. 1800.00
Number of DAR shots after 1 pole initiation
Number of DAR shots after 3 pole initiation
Delayed auto-reclose action time

s
DAR 3pole dead time for 1st shot
s
DAR 3pole dead time for 2nd shot
s
DAR 3pole dead time for 3rd and further shots
s
3500 CHECK SYNCHRONISM

3501 SYNC-CHECK
ON
OFF

Synchro-check function
[ ] on
[ ] off
# ' #
3! 6
3502 U<
min. 2
max. 60
3503 U>
min. 20
max. 125
3505 DELTA U<
min. 2
max. 50
3506 DELTA f<
min. 0.03
max. 1.00
3507 DELTA PHI<
min. 1
max. 60
3508 DEL.f<SYNC
min. 0.01
max. 0.10/
!PPENDIX
Maximum voltage for dead line or busbar

V
Minimum voltage for live line or busbar
V
Maximum voltage difference
V
Maximum frequency difference
Hz
Maximum angle difference
Maximum freq. difference for synchronous AR

Hz
3515 SYNCHR.
YES
NO
Synchronism-check before AR (U1>/U2>)

[ ] yes
[ ] no
3516 U1>U2<
NO
YES
Live line / dead bus check before AR (U1>/U2<)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3517 U1<U2>
NO
YES
Dead line / live bus check before AR (U1</U2>)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3518 U1<U2<
NO
YES
Dead line / dead bus check before AR (U1</U2<)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3519 OVERRIDE
NO
YES
Override of any check before AR

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3521 SYN.MAN.CL
ON
OFF
Synchro-check with manual close

[ ] on
[ ] off
3522 MC Df<SYNC
min. 0.01
max. 0.10/
Frequency difference for synchronous MC

Hz
3525 MC SYNCHR
YES
NO
Synchro-check before MC (U1>/U2>)

[ ] yes
[ ] no
3526 MC U1>U2<
NO
YES
Live line/dead bus check before MC (U1>/U2<)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
3527 MC U1<U2>
NO
YES
Dead line/live bus check before MC (U1</U2>)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3528 MC U1<U2<
NO
YES
Dead line/dead bus check before MC (U1</U2<)

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3529 MC O/RIDE
NO
YES
Override of any check before MC

[ ] no
[ ] yes
3530 T-SYN.SUPV
min. 0.01
max. 320.00
3531 T IN-SYNC
min. 0.00
max. 32.00
Synchro-check supervision time

s
Synchronism criteria maintained timer
s
3800 FAULT LOCATION

3802 START
Start condition for fault locator
DROP-OFF or TRIP [ ] Drop-off or trip
TRIP COMMAND
[ ] Trip command
3805 PARAL.LINE
NO
YES

Parallel line compensation

[ ] no
[ ] yes
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
Tests and Commissioning Aids 7SA511
4000 TESTS
4200 DIRECTION/ IMPEDANCES

4201 DIREC. TEST
Direction test L1-E
4202 IMPEDANCES
Impedance test L1-E
4203 DIREC. TEST
Direction test L2-E
4204 IMPEDANCES
Impedance test L2-E
4205 DIREC. TEST
Direction test L3-E
4206 IMPEDANCES
Impedance test L3-E
4207 DIREC. TEST
Direction test L1-L2
4208 IMPEDANCES
Impedance test L1-L2
4209 DIREC. TEST
4210 IMPEDANCES
4211 DIREC. TEST
4212 IMPEDANCES
4300 CB TEST TRIP-CLOSE CYCLE

4301 CB TEST
Circuit breaker test with AR 1pole L1
4302 CB TEST
4303 CB TEST
4304 CB TEST
Circuit breaker test with AR 3pole
4305 CB TEST
Circuit breaker test with AR sequence L1-L2-L3
4400 CB TEST LIVE TRIP

4401 CB TRIP
Circuit breaker trip test 1pole L1
4402 CB TRIP
4403 CB TRIP
4404 CB TRIP
Circuit breaker trip test 3pole
4900 TEST FAULT RECORDING

4901 FAULT REC.
# ' #
Initiation of fault recording

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Annunciations, Measured Values etc. 7SA511
5000 ANNUNCIATIONS
5100 OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
5200 LAST FAULT
5300 2nd TO LAST FAULT
5400 3rd TO LAST FAULT
5500 ISOLATED EARTH FLT DATA
5600 CB OPERAT. STATISTICS

5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
AR 1pole=
AR 3pole=
DAR 3pol=
TripNo L1=
TripNo L2=
TripNo L3=
IL1/In=
IL2/In=
IL3/In=

No. of auto-reclose commands:3p DAR
5700 OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES

5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719

IL1 =
IL2 =
IL3 =
UL1E=
UL2E=
UL3E=
UL12=
UL23=
UL31=
Pa=
Pr=
f [%]=
IL1[%] =
IL2[%] =
IL3[%] =
UL1E[%]=
UL2E[%]=
UL3E[%]=
UL12[%]=
Current in phase IL1

Voltage UL1E =
Voltage UL2E =
Voltage UL3E =
Voltage UL12 =
Voltage UL23 =
Voltage UL31 =
Active power Pa =
Reactive power Pr =
Frequency f [%] =
UL1E [%]=
UL2E [%]=
UL3E [%]=
UL12 [%] =
=
=
=
[%] =
[%] =
[%] =
# ' #
3! 6
5720
5721
5722
5723
!PPENDIX
UL23[%]=
UL31[%]=
Pa[%]=
Pr[%]=
UL23 [%] =
UL31 [%] =
Active power Pa [%] =
Reactive power Pr [%] =
5800 ISOL. E/F MEASURED VALUES

5801
5802
5803
5804
Iea =
Ier =
Iea[mA]=
Ier[mA]=
Iea
Ier
Iea
Ier
=
=
[mA] =
[mA] =
5900 OVERLOAD MEASURED VALUES

5901
5902
5903
5904
/tripL1=
/tripL2=
/tripL3=
/trip =
# ' #
Temperature rise for phase

Temperat. rise for warning
L1
L2
L3
and trip

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Reference Table for Configuration Parameters 7SA511
6000 MARSHALLING
6100 MARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS

6101 BINARY INPUT 1
6102 BINARY INPUT 2
Binary input 2
6103 BINARY INPUT 3
Binary input 3
6104 BINARY INPUT 4
Binary input 4
6105 BINARY INPUT 5
Binary input 5
6106 BINARY INPUT 6

Binary input 1
Binary input 6
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
6107 BINARY INPUT 7
Binary input 7
6108 BINARY INPUT 8
Binary input 8
6109 BINARY INPUT 9
Binary input 9
6110 BINARY INPUT 10
Binary input 10
6200 MARSHALLING SIGNAL RELAYS

6201 SIGNAL RELAY 1
Signal relay 1
6202 SIGNAL RELAY 2
Signal relay 2
6203 SIGNAL RELAY 3
Signal relay 3
# ' #

3! 6
6204 SIGNAL RELAY 4
Signal relay 4
6205 SIGNAL RELAY 5
Signal relay 5
6206 SIGNAL RELAY 6
Signal relay 6
6207 SIGNAL RELAY 7
Signal relay 7
6208 SIGNAL RELAY 8
Signal relay 8
6209 SIGNAL RELAY 9
Signal relay 9
6210 SIGNAL RELAY 10

!PPENDIX
Signal relay 10
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
6211 SIGNAL RELAY 11
Signal relay 11
6300 MARSHALLING LED INDICATORS

6301 LED 1
LED 1
6302 LED 2
LED 2
6303 LED 3
LED 3
6304 LED 4
LED 4
6305 LED 5
LED 5
6306 LED 6
LED 6
# ' #

3! 6
6307 LED 7
LED 7
6308 LED 8
LED 8
6309 LED 9
LED 9
6310 LED 10
LED 10
6311 LED 11
LED 11
6312 LED 12
LED 12
6313 LED 13

!PPENDIX
LED 13
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
6314 LED 14
LED 14
6400 MARSHALLING TRIP RELAYS

6401 TRIP RELAY 1
Trip relay 1
6402 TRIP RELAY 2
Trip relay 2
6403 TRIP RELAY 3
Trip relay 3
6404 TRIP RELAY 4
Trip relay 4
6405 TRIP RELAY 5
Trip relay 5
7000 OP. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
7100 INTEGRATED OPERATION

7102 DATE FORMAT
DD.MM.YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY
Date format
[ ] dd.mm.yyyy
[ ] mm/dd/yyyy
7105 OPER. 1st L
Operational message for 1st display line
7106 OPER. 2nd L
Operational message for 2nd display line
7107 FAULT 1st L
Fault message for 1st display line
7108 FAULT 2nd L
Fault message for 2nd display line
7110 FAULT INDIC

Fault indication: LED and LCD
7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES

7201 DEVICE ADD.
min. 1
max. 254
7202 FEEDER ADD.
min. 1
max. 254
7203 SUBST. ADD.
min. 1
max. 254
7208 FUNCT. TYPE
min. 1
max. 254
7209 DEVICE TYPE
min. 1
max. 254
7211 PC INTERF.
DIGSI V3
ASCII
7214 PC GAPS
min. 0.0
max. 5.0

Device address
Feeder address
Substation address
Function type in accordance with VDEW/ZVEI
Device type
Data format for PC-interface

[ ] DIGSI V3
[ ] ASCII
Transmission gaps for PC-interface

s
# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
7215 PC BAUDRATE
9600 BAUD
19200 BAUD
1200 BAUD
2400 BAUD
4800 BAUD
[
[
[
[
[
7216 PC PARITY
DIGSI V3
NO 2 STOP
NO 1 STOP
Parity and stop-bits for PC-interface

[ ] DIGSI V3
[ ] No parity,2 stopbits
[ ] No parity,1 stopbit
7221 SYS INTERF.

VDEW COMPATIBLE
VDEW EXTENDED
DIGSI V3
LSA
[
[
[
[
7222 SYS MEASUR.

VDEW COMPATIBLE
VDEW EXTENDED
Measurement format for system-interface

[ ] VDEW compatible
[ ] VDEW extended
7224 SYS GAPS

min. 0.0
max. 5.0
7225 SYS BAUDR.
9600 BAUD
19200 BAUD
1200 BAUD
2400 BAUD
4800 BAUD
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
Transmission baud rate for PC-interface

9600 Baud
19200 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
Data format for system-interface

VDEW compatible
VDEW extended
DIGSI V3
LSA
Transmission gaps for system-interface

s
Transmission baud rate for system-interface
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
7226 SYS PARITY

Parity and stop-bits for system-interface
VDEW/DIGSIV3/LSA [ ] VDEW/DIGSI V3/LSA
NO 2 STOP
[ ] No parity,2 stopbits
NO 1 STOP
[ ] No parity,1 stopbit
7227 SYS-SWITCH
NO
YES
Online-switch VDEW-DIGSI enabled

[ ] no
[ ] yes
7235 SYS PARAMET

NO
YES
Parameterizing via system-interface

[ ] no
[ ] yes
7239 7SM70/71
NOT CONNECTED
CONNECTED
Fault location output with 7SM70/7SM71

[ ] Not connected
[ ] Connected
7400 FAULT RECORDINGS

7402 INITIATION
STORAGE BY FD.
STORAGE BY TRIP
START WITH TRIP
Initiation
[ ] Storage by
[ ] Storage by
[ ] Start with
of data storage
fault det
trip
trip
7403 SCOPE
Scope of stored data
FAULT EVENT
[ ] Fault event
FAULT IN POW.SYS [ ] Fault in power syst.
# ' #

3! 6
7410 T-MAX
min. 0.30
max. 5.00
7411 T-PRE
min. 0.05
max. 0.50
7412 T-POST
min. 0.05
max. 0.50
7431 T-BINARY IN
min. 0.10
max. 5.00/
7432 T-KEYBOARD
min. 0.10
max. 5.00
7490 SYS LENGTH
660 VALUES FIX
<=3000 VAL. VAR
!PPENDIX
Maximum time period of a fault recording

s
Pre-trigger time for fault recording
s
Post-fault time for fault recording
s
Storage time by initiation via binary input
s
Storage time by initiation via keyboard
s
Length of fault record (former LSA)

[ ] 660 values fix
[ ] <=3000 val. var
7800 SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS

7812 DIST. PROT.
EXIST
NON-EXIST
Distance protection
[ ] Existent
[ ] Non-existent
7813 DIST.F.DET.
OVERCURRENT
IMPEDANCE ZONE
U/I FAULT DET.
Distance protection: Fault detection program

[ ] Overcurrent FD.
[ ] Impedance zone FD.
[ ] U/I fault detection
7820 POWER SWING

NON-EXIST
EXIST
Power swing detection

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7821 TELEPROTEC.
NON-EXIST
UNDERREACH
OVERREACH
Teleprotection for distance protection

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Underreach
[ ] Overreach
7823 USER LOGIC

NON-EXIST
EXIST
User definable logic functions

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7826 EMERG. O/C

EXIST
NON-EXIST
Emergency overcurrent time protection

[ ] Existent
[ ] Non-existent
7827 THERMAL OL
NON-EXIST
EXIST
Thermal overload protection

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7830 ISOL. E/F

NON-EXIST
EXIST
Earth fault detection for isol./comp. networks

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
7831 EARTH FAULT

NON-EXIST
DIR/NON-DIR
DIREC.COMPARISON
INVERSE TIME
[
[
[
[
7834 INTERNAL AR
NON-EXIST
EXIST
Internal auto-reclose function

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7835 SYNCH.CHECK
NON-EXIST
EXIST
Internal synchronism and voltage check

[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7838 FAULT LOCAT

EXIST
NON-EXIST
Fault locator
[ ] Existent
[ ] Non-existent
7885 PARAM. C/O

NON-EXIST
EXIST
Parameter change-over
[ ] Non-existent
[ ] Existent
7899 FREQUENCY
fN 50 Hz
fN 60 Hz
Rated system frequency

[ ] fN 50 Hz
[ ] fN 60 Hz
]
]
]
]
Earth fault protection for earthed networks

Non-existent
Directional/non-dir.
Direc. comparison
Inverse time
7900 DEVICE CONFIGURATION

7910 CB TEST BI
CB test via binary input program
TRIP-CLOSE 3POLE [ ] Trip-close 3pole
SEQU. L1-L2-L3
[ ] Sequence L1-L2-L3
THREE-POLE TRIP [ ] Three-pole trip
7912 AR w/ DIST.
YES
NO
Auto-reclose with distance protection

[ ] yes
[ ] no
7921 AR w/o TELE

YES
NO
Auto-reclose when teleprotect. is not operativ

[ ] yes
[ ] no
7926 AR w/ EMERG
YES
NO
Auto-reclose with emergency overcurrent prot.

[ ] yes
[ ] no
7930 AR w/ IS.EF
YES
NO
Auto-reclose with E/F det. in isol./comp. net

[ ] yes
[ ] no
7931 AR w/ E/F
YES
NO
Auto-reclose with E/F protect. in earthed net

[ ] yes
[ ] no
7941 AR w/ EXT.
YES
NO
Auto-reclose with ext. trip via binary input

[ ] yes
[ ] no
# ' #

3! 6
!PPENDIX
Operational Device Control Facilities 7SA511
8000 DEVICE CONTROL
8100 SETTING REAL TIME CLOCK

8101 DATE / TIME
Actual date and time
8102 DATE
Setting new date
8103 TIME
Setting new time
8104 DIFF. TIME
Setting difference time
8200 RESET
8201 RESET
Reset of LED memories
8202 RESET
Reset of operational annunciation buffer
8203 RESET
Reset of fault annunciation buffer
8204 RESET
Reset of CB operation counters
8205 RESET
Reset of the total of interrupted currents
8206 RESET
Reset of earth fault report buffer
8300 SYS-VDEW ANNUNC.-MEAS.VAL

8301 SYS TEST
OFF
ON
Testing via system-interface

[ ] off
[ ] on
8302 SYS BLOCK

OFF
ON
Blocking of monitoring direction via sys.-int.

[ ] off
[ ] on
8500 PARAMETER CHANGE-OVER

8501 ACTIV PARAM
8503 ACTIVATING
SET A
SET B
SET C
SET D
SET BY BIN.INPUT
SET BY LSA CONTR
Actual active parameter set

[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
Activation of parameter set

Set a
Set b
Set c
Set d
Set via binary input
Set by lsa control
8510 COPY
Copy original parameter set to set A
8511 COPY
Copy original parameter set to set B

# ' #
3! 6
!PPENDIX
8512 COPY
Copy original parameter set to set C
8513 COPY
Copy original parameter set to set D
8514 COPY
Copy parameter set A to set B
8515 COPY
Copy parameter set A to set C
8516 COPY
Copy parameter set A to set D
8517 COPY
Copy parameter set B to set A
8518 COPY
Copy parameter set B to set C
8519 COPY
Copy parameter set B to set D
8520 COPY
Copy parameter set C to set A
8521 COPY
Copy parameter set C to set B
8522 COPY
Copy parameter set C to set D
8523 COPY
Copy parameter set D to set A
8524 COPY
Copy parameter set D to set B
8525 COPY
Copy parameter set D to set C
9800 OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL

9802 MONITOR
# ' #
Monitor

3! 6

# ' #
3! 6
4O
3)%-%.3 !+4)%.'%3%,,3#(!&4
$EPT %6 3 350
$ "%2,).
'ERMANY
$EAR READER
PRINTING ERRORS CAN NEVER BE ENTIRELY ELIMINATED
THEREFORE SHOULD YOU COME ACROSS ANY WHEN
READING THIS MANUAL KINDLY ENTER THEM IN THIS
FORM TOGETHER WITH ANY COMMENTS OR SUG
GESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT THAT YOU MAY HAVE
#ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS
&ROM
????????????????????????????????????????
.AME
????????????????????????????????????????
#OMPANY$EPT
????????????????????????????????????????
!DDRESS
????????????????????????????????????????
4ELEPHONE NO
????????????????????????????????????????
#ORRECTIONS3UGGESTIONS
# ' #

3UBSTANTIAL ALTERATIONS AGAINST PREVIOUS ISSUE
!LTERATIONS IN $40
PLATFORM CHARACTER FONTS AND LAYOUT
#OPYING OF THIS DOCUMENT AND GIVING IT TO OTHERS AND THE USE

OR COMMUNICATION OF THE CONTENTS THEREOF ARE FORBIDDEN WITH
OUT EXPRESS AUTHORITY /FFENDERS ARE LIABLE TO THE PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES !LL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF THE GRANT OF
3UBJECT TO TECHNICAL ALTERATION
3IEMENS !KTIENGESELLSCHAFT
A PATENT OR THE REGISTRATION OF A UTILITY MODEL OR DESIGN
/RDER .O #
'
!VAILABLE FROM ,:& &RTH
#
"ISLOHE
0RINTED IN THE &EDERAL 2EPUBLIC OF 'ERMANY

!' &/ %N

7SA511 Iec

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

7SA511 Iec

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

.

UMERICAL $ISTANCE 0ROTECTION 2ELAY

3IEMENS !' 

# ' #

0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS                                                       

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION                                                         

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL                                

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL              

!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL                                                            

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL                                             

# ' #

ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION                 

/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT                                                           

5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE                                                   

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS                      

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION                                               

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION                                                         

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT OPTIONAL                  

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL                   

!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL                                                       

# ' #

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS                                                           

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL                                            

$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION                                                          

#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST                                                              

)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS                                                        

5NPACKING AND REPACKING                                                          

#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS                                   

#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS                                            

-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS                      

# ' #

/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS                                                         

3AFETY PRECAUTIONS                                                                 

$IALOG WITH THE RELAY                                                              

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS                                                  

# ' #

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES                                                       

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING                                                        

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS                                                

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION                                                      

-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING                                                 

2OUTINE CHECKS                                                                    

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY                                                     

&AULT TRACING                                                                       

# ' #

'ENERAL DIAGRAMS                                                                  

#ONNECTION DIAGRAMS                                                              

4HE CONTENTS OF THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL NOT

# ' #

.UMERICAL DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY 3)02/4%#

0ROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH POWERFUL  BIT MICRO

3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT FUNCTION

PROVIDES HIGH SPEED OPERATION AT EITHER LINE END

# ' #

!UTOMATIC RECLOSE FUNCTION OPTIONAL

OUTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN OHMS PRIMARY AND SEC

SETTABLE ALTERNATIVELY FOR DEAD LINE CHECK ANDOR

MEASUREMENT AND TEST ROUTINES UNDER NORMAL

ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING POSSIBLE WITH PRE DE

ANNUNCIATION STORAGE AND TRANSMISSION OF THE LAST

SETTABLE MINIMUM VOLTAGE

3IEMENS !'

# ' #

0OWER SWING SUPPLEMENT OPTIONAL

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN NON EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

!UTO RECLOSURE OPTIONAL

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL

# ' #

ONLY WITH IMPEDANCE FAULT DETECTION

/PERATION OF COMPLETE UNIT

5NIVERSAL TELEPROTECTION INTERFACE

5SER DEFINABLE LOGIC FUNCTIONS TRIP COMMANDS AND ANNUNCIATIONS

%MERGENCY OVERCURRENT TIME PROTECTION

4HERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

%ARTH FAULT DETECTION IN SYSTEMS WITH NON EARTHED STARPOINT OPTIONAL

(IGH RESISTANCE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION IN EARTHED SYSTEMS OPTIONAL

!UTOMATIC RECLOSURE OPTIONAL

# ' #

4REATMENT OF EVOLVING FAULTS

3YNCHRONISM AND VOLTAGE CHECK OPTIONAL

$ISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATION

#IRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TEST

)NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

5NPACKING AND REPACKING

#ONFIGURATION OF OPERATION AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS

#ONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

-ARSHALLING OF BINARY INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS AND ,%$ INDICATORS

# ' #

/PERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3AFETY PRECAUTIONS

$IALOG WITH THE RELAY

3ETTING THE FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

# ' #

/PERATIONAL CONTROL FACILITIES

4ESTING AND COMMISSIONING

#OMMISSIONING USING PRIMARY TESTS

0UTTING THE RELAY INTO OPERATION

-AINTENANCE AND FAULT TRACING

2OUTINE CHECKS

2EPLACING THE BACK UP BATTERY

&AULT TRACING

# ' #

'ENERAL DIAGRAMS

#ONNECTION DIAGRAMS

# ' #

0ROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH POWERFUL BIT MICRO

3! CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS

# ' #

!UTOMATIC RECLOSE FUNCTION OPTIONAL

OUTPUT OF FAULT DISTANCE IN OHMS PRIMARY AND SEC

SETTABLE ALTERNATIVELY FOR DEAD LINE CHECK ANDOR

SETTABLE MINIMUM VOLTAGE

# ' #

!LL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS INCLUDING DCDC CONVERTER

3!J J#JJJ IN HOUSING 80 FOR

# ' #

#ONNECTION PLUGS REAR VIEW

# ' #

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING 80

-AX TERMINALS FOR CROSS SECTION MAX MM

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

$IMENSIONS FOR HOUSING 80 FOR PANEL SURFACE MOUNTING

# ' #

3! (OUSING FOR PANEL FLUSH MOUNTING OR CUBICLE INSTALLATION 80

(EAVY CURRENT CONNECTORS

3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM

MAX MM

3CREWED TERMINAL FOR MAX MM

/PTICAL FIBRE CONNECTORS

# ' #

2ATED CURRENT RATED FREQUENCY

# ' #

WITHOUT 3# WITHOUT 0#/ !

WITHOUT 0#/ "

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3#

WITH 0#/ &

WITH !2 POLE WITH 3#

WITH 0#/ '